M-ifU^
■■«
=1
Presented to the
LIBRARY of the
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
by
/^rj.
/C^\
IMUNTED AND PUBLISIII-D BY A. 1. VALPV,
AND MAY Dli HAD 01- ALL BOOKSELLEKS.
GllJvEK G HAD US; or, Greek, Latin, and
English I'hosodial I.kxicon. For Schools and Clulleges. By the Rev.
J. BitAssK, I). D. Into Ftllow of Trin. Coll., Camb. Second Eil. 8vo. l^«.
It hai bt-en tho object to present, iu n coinpn-heiisive form, a Manual, coii-
lainiiijj tiie interprctiition, in Latin and English, of sucli words as occur in the
principal Greek I'ocls ; — tlit- quantity of each syllable aclually or virtually
marked ; — an authority quoted for the existence and quantity of each word in
tliose wiitcrs; — and those terms set down as synonymous whith appear to bear
a similitude in sense to the principal word.
ROBINSON'S ANTIQUITIES ot GREECE;
being an Account of the IManners and Customs of the Greeks, designed to
illustrate the Gueek Classics, by explaining Words and l^hrases according
to the Rites and Customs to which they refer. I'o which are prelixed, a
brief History of t! e Grecian Slates, and liingrapliical Sketches of the prin-
cipal Greek Wiiters. Archbisliop Potter, Lakemaciiek, and Bos, contain
nothing wiiich is not in this Edition, which lias also much usel'ul matter not
1(1 be found in those works. The Secund Edition, considerably enlarged and
improved, and illustrated with Plates. 8vo. Price I7». bds.
SCIIREVELIUS' GREEK AND ENGLISH
LEXICON, wit!i many new words. Second Edition. By tlie Rev. J. R,
jMajor, Head Master of King's College School, London. A cujjious
ENGLISH and GREF^K LEXICON, intended to assist the Student in
Greek Composition, lias been added. One vol. 8vo. 16s. bds. or 17j. bound.
GREEK GRAMMAR; with Notes for the use of
those who have made some progressin the language. By R. X'alpv, D.D.
F.A.S. Ta-elftk Edition. Price 6s. (jd. bds. 8vo.
GREEK EXERCISES; or, an Introduction to Greek
Composition ; so arranged as to lead the Student from the elements of Graai-
iiiar to the higiiest parts of Syntax. In this work the Greek of tlie Words is
not ajipendcd to the Text, but referred to a Lexicon at the end. Second
Editiiin ; in which many important improvements are made, and specimens of
the Greek IJjJilects, and the Critical Canons of Dawes anil Porson, are added.
By the R,ev. Y. Valpv, .M.A., Master of Reading Scliool. 6s. 6d. I'Jmo.
bound. — A KEY may be had. Price 'is. 6d.
' This Work evinces so much taleni, learning, and laborious industry, and is
so calculated to facilitate thy progress of Siudents in acqiiiririt: a knowlege of
the Greek languaiiC, that we shall be conferrina a benefit by bringing it into
public notice. The dejiavtment of the book which treats of syntax merits our
uuqualiOed approbation for its learning, correctness, and clearness.' — Lit.C'Uron.
EURIPIDES.— HECFBA, fiom the Text and with
a Translation of tiie Notes, Preface, and Supplement, of PonsoN ; criiical and
explanatory Remarks, origitial and selected ; Illustrations of Idioms from
Matthia;, L)awes, ^'iger, &.C. ; a Synopsis of Metrical Systems; iSlc. By the
Rev. .1. R. JMajor, iMastcr of King's Colh'ge School, London. Tlii'd i'.d. Us.
' This is, beyond all comparison, tlie best student's edition of a Griek Play,
which lias ever been given to the public' — Literary Chronicle. '
MEDEA. PHG^NISStE, and ORESTES. By
the Same. 5s. each. — The four Plays may be had in one v(d. Pr. 18<.
'The Oreites is one of the admirable series of the School and College
^'lassies, and will worthy of its place, 'the Quesiionx are judicious, and he
who correctly a'iswers them must iiave accurately ri ad his author.' — Spictittur.
Vi^er. "
11-
GREEK TESTAMENT, with English Notes,
Critical, Philological, and Explanatory, from the most eminent Critics and
Interpreters ; with Parallel Passages from the Classics, and Avich references
to Vigor for Idioms, and Bos for Ellipses. To which is prefixed a short
Treatise on the Doctrine of the Greek Article, according to Bishop Middle-
ton, Mr. Granville Sharp, &ic, briefly and compendiously explained, as
applicable to the Criticism of the New Testament. The Various Readings
are recorded under the Text. Greek and English Indexes are added. By
the Rev. E. Valpy, B.D. Third Edition ; with Panillel References, nnd other
Improvements. 3 vols. 8\"0. £2. 5s. bds. — Two I'lates are added, one illustrative
of the Travels of the Apostles, and the other a Mnp of Judea ami a Plan of
the City and Temple of Jerusalem.
' This Greek Testament is the most valuable of any that has yet been pub-
lished with critical and philological apparatus, especially for st\idents who
wish to purchase only ONE Edition.' — Home's Introduction to the Bible.
' Valpy 's Greek Testament is to be preferred to either Dr. Burton's or Dr.
Bloom (ield's.' — Christian Gtiardiut).
GREEK SEPTUAGINT, with the Apocrypha ;
edited by A. J. Valpy, from the Oxford edition of Bos and Holmes.
Second Edition. £1. Is. bds.
This Edition is liandsomelj printed in one volume, 8vo, hot-pressed.
FOR USE IN CHURCHES AND CHAPELS, as well as the Library.
'This elegantly executed volume is very correctly printed, and (which can-
not but recouiniend it to students in preference to llie incorrect Cambridge
and Amsterdam reprints of the Vatican text) its price is so reasonable as
to place it within the reach of almost every oue.' — Home's Introduction to
the Bible.
*^* The Septua/^^int and Testament may be had in four uniform volumes,
handsomeJy bound fur prize-books.
HOMER'S ILIAD, with English Notes and
Questions to the First Eight Books. By the Rev. E. Valpy, B.D., late
Head Master of Norwich School. Fourth Ed. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
'This is perhaps the most useful edition of the Maeonian bard that has jet
appeared. The author has judiciously enlivened the critical matter of his wnrk
by quotations from Pope's translation, and adorned it with a few parallel
passages from Virgil and Milton.' — New Monthly Mag.
HOMER'S ILIAD, Text of Heyne. Fifth Ed.
8vo. (is. 6d.
SECOND GREEK DELECTUS; or, NEW
ANALECTA MINORA. With English Notes, and a Greek and English
Lexicon. By the Rev. F. Valiy, Trin. Coll., Camb., and Master of Reading
School. Second Ed. 8vo. Price 9s. (id. bds.
This Work is intended to be read in schools nfter Dr. Valjiy's 'Greek
Delectus.' It retains a third of the Greek of D^dzel's AuHhcta .Minora, and
derives the remainder of its Text from other sources. The Notes are in i'''
English, explanatory of the Syntax and difficulties of the Greek, and are
placed at the end of the Text.
THIRD GRERK DELECTUS; or, NEW ANA-.
LECTA MAJORA. With English Notes. By the Same. Intended to be
used aflei; the ' Second Greek Delectus.'
Part I. PROSE, price 8». 6(/. bd., contains Selections from Herodo-
tus, .Xenopuon, Isockates, Plato, Demosthenes, Lvsias, Thucydides,
LoNOiKus, and '1 iieoimirastus.
Part II. POETRY, price Us. Vfd. bd., conlainsSelectionsfromHoMF.il,
Hesiod, Apoi.lonius RnoDius, Theociiitus, Pindap., EuniriDEs, So-
VIIOCI.KS, /Es<'HYL!'S, A It ISTO I'll A N r S, ^lC.
N. D. The two Parts may be had in one volume, price 15j. 6d. bd.
VIGER S GREEK IDIOMS
ABRIDGED
AND
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
FROM
PROFESSOR HERMANN'S LAST EDITION.
WITH
ORIGINAL NOTES.
By the Rev. JOHN SEAGER, B. A.
RECTOR OF WELCH BICKNOR, ROSS, HEREFORDSHIRE.
SECOND EDITION,
WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.
T
• LONDON :
VRINTED BY A. J. VALPY, RED LION CODRT, FLEET STREET.
SOLD BY LONGMAN AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.; BALDWIN
AND CRADpCK ; SIMPKIN AND iMARSHALL ;
AND ALL OTHER BOOKSELLERS.
^><^?SIJY OF
ABRIDGED INTO ENGLISH,
FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES,
By tlie Rev. J. SEAGER, Author of 'Critical Observations on Classical
Authors 'in the Classical Journal.
VIGER ON GREEK IDIOMS. Translated into
English, and abridged. 8vo. 9». 6d. bds.
' But when they have made real advances in Greek prose, read over with
them the whole of Viger. Mr. Berry, what I now recommend is really one
of the most useful parts of education. You should make thera read Viger in
this way twice every year for five or six or seven years.' — Dr. Parr.
HOOGEVEEN ON GREEK PARTICLES,
on the same Plan. 8vo. 7s. 6d. bds.
' Hoogeveen's work on Particles lias always been considered a valuable aid
in the study of the Greek language ; and Mr. Seager has compressed and
translated it in a manner which we could not desire to be better.' — Speclalor.
BOS ON GREEK ELLIPSES, on the same
Plan. 8vo. 9s. 6d. bds.
' Mr. Seager has contrived to retain the essence of all tliat is beneficial to
the student, while he has placed it more easily within his reach by the order
into which it is reduced.' — Intelligence.
' Bos, Hoogeveen, and Viger, are works of valuable criticism.' — Bicker-
steth's Christian Student.
HERMANN ON GREEK METRES, on the
.same Plan. 8vo. 8s. 6rf. bds.
• My hero is Hermann : he is not only a scholar, but a philosopher of the
hiijhest order; and he smiles probably, as I do, at the petty criticisms of puny
sciolists, who in fact do not understand what is written by this great critic.'—
Dr. Parr.
MAITTAIRE ON GREEK DIALECTS, on
the same Plan. Svo. <Js. 6d. bds.
' It is impossible to speak too highly of tlie fidelity of the. translation, or
the skill of the abridgment. It is enriched by some modest Notes, and more
original matter than careless readers will perhaps credit.'— J</as.
'This volume completes Mr. Seager's epitomising labors. With Viger,
Hongevfen, Box, and Hermann, the Greek Student has a set of scarcely dis-
pensable subsidia, at all events in a more accessible form than before. Mr.
Seager has labored zealously, and must be allowed to have deserved well of
Greek litcrhture.' — New Monthly Mag.
*^* These Five Works may be had in 2 vols., neatly bound in cloth, t'l. ISj.
Â¥0^'/
PREFACE.
The utility of Viger's^ Treatise on the Principal Idioms of the
Greek Language is well kiiowi), and fully justifies his reconi-
niendaliou of a repeated perusal of the work by all who are desirous
of entering with advantage on the study of the Greek authors. In
that work he has collected and explained, on a plan of arrangement
for the most part practically convenient, a multitude of phrases
remarkable for their peculiarity or elegance. Many of these are
very diflicult, and are interpreted in no other book, or in none
accessible to the generality of students, or iu none so fully, clearly,
and correctly. Is is no wonder, therefore, that the work should
have continued in general use ever since its first publication. ^
To say nothing of the testimony of others. Professor Hermann
declares ^ it to have been deservedly esteemed most useful : and
indeed its value is sufficiently attested by the comments of learned
men ; of Reizius, Hoogeveen, Zeunius, Schaefer, and lastly, of that
most profound and acute critic, Professor Hermann himself.
The first who published an edition of Viger with notes was
Hoogeveen. Zeunius followed him, and added his own annotations
to Hoogeveen's. Afterwards Hermann enriched his editions with
the notes not only of Hoogeveen and Zeunius, and with a few
which had been written by Reizius and by Scha^fer^ in the margins
of their copies of Viger, but with very copious and important notes
of his own. By all thes^ additions to the original work, a body of
Greek learning has been formed of the greatest moment to those
who are desirous of attaining a thorough knowlege of that justly
' Or, with the Latin terininatioa with wliich his name, although he was a native of
Rouen, lias been dignified, Vigerus.
* In tlie edition printed at Paris in 1G44. ' De Idiotnatis.
•• The notes of Ileizius are judicious and useful ; but those of that able scholar
Schajfer, which Hermann found of any use, are so vtry few, tliat ihey have left no
impression on my mind with regard to their value.
VI PREFACE.
admirod language, which it is calculated to illustrate. But many
are deprived of the benefit to be derived from the book, not only
by an inadequate acquaintance with the Latin language, in which it is
written, but by the bulk and price of it in its improved condition.
It was considered, therefore, that to persons under the disadvantage
of such a deprivation an Abridgment in English of the last edition
of Viger might prove highly beneficial; and the publication of such
an Abridgment was consequently resolved on. The plan and
execution of the work were intrusted to me : and of these I proceed
to give the reader some account. It was requisite for the further-
ance of the Publisher's design, to reduce Professor Hermann's last
edition to about one-fourth of its bulk.
This I have endeavored to effect without any sacrifice of useful
matter, by embodying both the text and notes in the formation of a
new text, retaining every thing really valuable, and rejecting all that
is manifestly erroneous and useless.^
The general arrangement of Viger, however objectionable in some
respects, has been unavoidably preserved, together with his division
into Chapters, Sections, and Rules, as he calls his lowest sub-
divisions. 2 The substance, indeed, of the notes appended in the
original to each rule being here incorporated with the rule itself,
the length of the rules is necessarily very unequal ; because many
and long notes are often in the original referred to a long rule,
while a short rule is often left without any annotation at all; but
the facility of reference^ and comparison afforded by this method
will, it is hoped, overbalance any seeming inconvenience.
' A considerable space in the notes, especially in Hermann's, is occupied in
pointing out errors in the text or in other notes. Hoogcveen and Zeunius, who are
very liberal in observations for the benefit of the raw recruits, commencing with
'' ccEterum monendi sunt tironcs,'' or the like well-known gracious and condescending
introductions, seem both to have been regarded by Hermann as scarcely out of the
awkward squad themselves. Poor Zeunius especially cumt s often under his dis-
cipline : — " this could /tare entered into the head of no mnn on earth except Zeunius;"
— " no one Vicing, except Zeunius, could have entertained such an imagination;" See.
lashes which can hardly be thought too severe, when inflicted on an instructor,
who could persuade himself and teach others, that anb, fur instance, in the following
passages signifies the final cause: idavna^ov rhv 'Ep.uoyepriv airb (ptXoaocplas : — air'
tlaayytXias Kpivtadai. See note 57. page 581 of the original. Both the refuted
and the refuting passages have generally been rejected by me ; hut manj' useful parts,
which n)ay at first appear to be omitted, will be found transferred to places more
appropriate to them.
^ As it has been found necessary here and there both to omit some rules, and
to compress several others into one, the numbers prefixed do not always correspond
to those of the original : in such cases the latter are inclosed in the marks of a
parenthesis. See, e. g., p. 58. Sometimes the number of a rule of Viger has
been retained, not on account of the rule itself, hut of the notes belonging to it.
^ One inducement among others to retain the division of the original, was the
PREFACE. Vll
Many of tlie dolinitiotis or descriptions whici) precede llie examples
of idioms in the orijjinal, are clumsy and inartificial ; inapplicable to
the idioms treated of, or encumbered with unessential particulars;!
often inadequate to the comprehension of all the examples following
them, and ofien, on the other hand, too loose to apply peculiarly
and exclusively to the idiom introduced by them. I l«ave ventured,
therefore, to remodel them in so many instances, that I can give only
this general advertisement of such alterations.^
The passages cited are next to be mentioned. Of passages equally
adapted to the exemplification of an idiom, I have alv/ays jireferred
such as are given on good authority^ to such as appear witiiout any
name either in the text or notes; and I have generally copied, with
the omission sometimes of parts irrelevant to the idiom under con-
sideration, all that are necessary to be immediately seen for the
elucidation of that idiom ;^ referring to all others of any use, espe-
cially to such as are taken from books, where they may be easily and
readily found. ^ In many instances mere references, instead of
passages, are given in the original: the whole of these, I believe,
both in the text and notes, have been transferred into this abridg-
ment. They may perhaps appear very numerous; but for the
thorough understanding of an idiom, it is often desirable to con-
power afforded by it to my readers of ascertaining by reference the parts assignable
to Viger and to each of his annotators. The rature of my plan made it impossible
to keep those parts separate, and distinguish them by the names of I heir respeciive
contributors. There is one mark indeed by which some of Hoogeveen's contributions
may still be often recognised without a reference to the original : I mean his atl'ected
and pedantic mode of quotation. He always, for example, cites the books of Hero-
dotus by the names of the Muses ; and a certain part of Homer's second Iliad
is always " Homer in Bant." the verses being reckoned from the beginning of the
Catalogue. He has, I believe, iu very few instances been deprived by me of these
badges of distinction.
• In this respect they have sometimes reminded me of Boyle's recipe for the cure
of dysentery. One of the ingredients in his medicine is calcined bone ; and tiie
bone to be employed is " the iliinh bone of a hanged man."
2 As no mark of discrimination could well be applied to these numerous altera-
tions, they can only be distinguished by comparison with the original.
3 An examination of the passages iu the books themselves from which they iiave
been taken is of so nmcli importance on many accounts, (see e. g. note n, p. 43. p,
p. 45. t, p. 49. h, p. 54. c, p. C7. /, p. 09. u and r, p. 74. y, p. 77. c, p. I'iG./, p. 129.
(i,p. I49.e, p. 150. c, p. 155.w,p.lG2.a,p.l65.c,p.l70.9,p. 191. c, p. 202./, p. 204.
s, p. 252.) that, to render it more easy, T have not only given more correct and
precise references in many parts, but have often supplied tliem when altogether
wanting. In the original, one part of a reference is often in the text, and the other
parts in the notes : in this Abridgment tho Reader will have the advantage of seeing
all the parts of the references together.
* I have frequently thought it expedient to give the passages more fully than they
appear in the original, and have sometimes given them from better editions.
^ Where the phrases tjuoted to illustrate an idiom are numerous, I have usually
reduced them into alphabetical order.
Vlll PREFACE.
template it in different situations, and in all its shades of vari-
ation ; and in a large number of references there is a chance that
some at least of the books referred to may be accessible to every
reader.
In translating the examples, I have not contented myself with the
sense whiuli words may possibly admit when considered abstractedly :
but of all the passages wliich I remembered, or to which I was able
to refer, I have endeavored to give that interpretation which the
tenor of the context requires. ^ The limits assigned to the work
obliged me in many instances to render the idiomatical words only ;
and where the meaning is very obvious, and is moreover contained in
an exposition preceding the citation of examples, any further inter-
pretation has sometimes been judged needless. Translation indeed,
properly so called, was not always possible. Various modifications,
transitions, and connexions of thought are expressed in Greek by
words to which there are none precisely ecjuivalent in languages
formed by nations of less acuteness and refinement.
Such is the mode of proceeding which appeared to me the most
eligible with regard to the materials furnished by the original. In the
hope of increasing their utility, 1 have offered some additions and
observations of my own;- but the want of room obliged me to leave
many things unaltered and unnoticed, the propriety of which ap-
peared to me, to say the least, very questionable.
They who are thoroughly acquainted with the last editions of
• In note 10, tlierefore, for example, p. 88. of tlie original, I have not, as others
have, translated ovKtr' tpyov iyKaOevSeiu, Zcrris eVr' iKevdepos, it is his business to
sleep no wore, who is free ; for that is far enough from tlie sense required by the
context of Aristoph. Lysistr. 614. see tliis Abridgment p. 34. 1. 30. nor in note 88.
p. 138, have I translated TroA.vcjttei' rbj' 'AA.e'lacSpui' /cal'tiAiTTTrov eV Tujs Sia^o\a7s (pepcou,
often mouthing Alexander and Philip in accusations ; see Abr. p. 51. I. It. nor in
Hermann's note [14S] on Cli. v. § ii. R. 7. olada vvu a /xoi yef^aBo) ; knowest thou
now what thins^s are to hap;tcn to me? because it must be evident to any one reading
and understanding the whole dialogue between Thoas and Iphigenia in the passage
whence the words are taken, that the intention of the latter is nut to inform I'hoas of
what is to happen to liersi-lf, but of what must be done to enable her to accomplish a
purificatiiin which she pretends to be necessary: see this Abridgment p. 71. 1.2.
nor in note 89, p. 340 of the original, have I rendered \vKrjphs XaQ' &)v, know that you
are wretched ; because in Aristoi)hanes the words are addressed to Dicieopolis
by liuripides after a great many inipcrtinent and troublesome requests made by tiie
former, and Euripides immediately adds, Kanoxtipriffov SSfioov : not to mention that
Avwrtphs never signilies unhappy or wretched: see this Abridgment p. 110. 1. 21.
I will not exhaust the Reader's patience by giving any more instances, but rather
refer him in general to the following work, and to the preceding note 3, page vii.
^ These are generally either included within brackets in the text, or placed in
notes at the bottom of the pages. 1 perceive that through my inadvertence a few
remarks of others have l)een included between brackets ; but they may be easily
distinguished by reference to the original. For every thing in the notes I am solely
answerable.
PREFACE. ix
Viger need not be told that this Abridgment has been a work of
much difficulty and perplexity ; and therefore need scarcely be
entreated to regard with indulgence the imperfections which tliey
may discover in it. Any suggestions offered by the really learned
for the improvement of it will be gratefully received by the pub-
lislier. '
J.S.
fVelch Bicknor,
August 19th, 1828.
N.B. Similar abridgments of Hoogeveen on the Particles, Bos on the Ellipses,
Hermaun on the Metres, and Maittaire on the Dialects, of the Greek language have
been published.
*,* With respect to the references, as passages may be readily found in any books
divided always into verses or other small portions, the editions of such books need
not be specified. Of books not so divided (as indeed of most books) the editions
referred to may generally be understood to be the best, when there is no specification
of any particular edition. The following, however, have sometimes been cited
without such specification : j$^schines, Orat. Aurel. Allobr. 1607. Aristide^,
interpr. Canter. 1604. Clemens Alexandr. Colon. 1688. Demosthenes, Aurel.
Allobr. 1607. Dinarchas, appended to the edition of Demosth. Hippocrates, Genet'.
1657. Isocrates, interpr. Wolf, 1604. Lysias, Marburg. 1683, Pausanias, Xy-
landr. Hanov. 1613. Philo Judaeus, Colon. 1613. Plutarch, Francof. 1599.
Proclus, appended to the Basil edition of Plato (but Plato himself is usually quoted
from the edition of Serranus).
In preparing this Second Edition for the Press, the Editor
has corrected a few oversights which had formerly escaped his
notice, and has inserted several additional Notes, the references
to which are distinguished by asterisks (*) and obelisks (f).
Viger.
CONTENTS.
CHAP. I.
The Article (called by some the prepositive Article)
Page
1
CHAP. II.
The Relative us (called by some the subjunctive Article)
13
CHAP. III. — THE NOUN.
Section
I. The Noun Substantive
II. The Adjective
III. On some particular Nouns, Adjectives, and Substan
tives, alphabetically : viz. ayados, uKpos, iiWos, ^nfto
ain)p, a7ro(j)pas, avdpumos, apCTrl, apy(^t)v, avTOcp^pos
IV. 'Acpopfxi), ftaaiXevs, (3ov\T}fia, (Sin, beiXr), bijXos, blaiTa, bi
i:aios, e^ov\r]s, cTribo^os, epyov, ereov, eTOi^os ,
V. "\mros, 'nnroypwfjiwv, 'iaos, KUipds, kokos, Kaictoais T7]s kirap
Xio-S, Kkoni] tCjv brjiuoaiwv, KOipos, Karaj^pews, Kvpla, npo-
Oea/uia, Ipfjfir], Kvpios . . . .
VI. Aoyos ........
VII. Mepos, fxoipa, ^r]be\s, firj')(avfi , fxiKpop and fiiya, veaviKos
VIII. 'Obos, oiKovofios, olos, opyi) . . . ,
IX. O(T0» ........
X. Ovpos, Tra'ibes, els Traaav, TrXoifJios, TroXneia, ttoXvs, irXeov
â– Trpay/xa, Trpa^is, TrpoCTj^rj^a, Trpofaais, Trpwro
XI. Z,r}fie~iov, TeKfxripwy, anobei^is, p(}biovpyr]fxa, awfxa, TiXos
'â– ^X*'''* '"'* ' ^"*^' '"'* .....
XII. 'ToaovTov, (pduyos, xapis, x^'P> XP^°*
XIII. \pijfia, xp^f^osj^wpa, wpa ....
IS
24
30
32
35
3.9
40
43
46
49
52
56
57
CHAP. IV.
Hi) the Pronoun
59
CHAP. V. — ON THE VERB.
I. On the Verb, with respect to kind or form . . 65
II. On the idioms of the Indicative, Imperative, Optative,
and Subjunctive Moods ...... 70
CONTENTS.
XI
Section Page
III. On the Infinitive Mood, and certain tenses ... 72
IV. Of the Verbs ayawq.v, (TTepyeiv, dro;^pf7i', aanaS,eaBai,
ayeiv koX <pipeiv, cnroXaveiv ..... 77
V. BouXoyuoi, yevv^VfTtKreiy, yiveadai, yiyvijaKeiVyhiayuipfTiv,
btivKetv, (pevyeiv, ene^ievat ...... 79
VI. On the Verb et/ut 82
VII. On the Verbs elire'iv, eXvi^eiv, eXireadai, e^epxeaOai,
elievni, eoiKa, e^w ....... 84
VIII. On the Verbs iJKU), KaraXafipdpai, Kelfiai, Xapdayu), /xeXAw,
viKcib), vofil$.(i), olha, 'iadi, olfxai . . . . . SB
IX. On the Verbs KarayivwaKeii', Xiyeiv, ofxoXoyely, 6(p\i(T-
icaveiv, irapiardvai, irda-^^eiv, Trepiibelv, irepiopqv . , <)2
X. On the Verbs -noieiv, iroie'iadai, irpaTTeiv, Trpoanoielcrdai . 97
XI. On the Verbs avyKpore'iv, avpptjyviivai, avjxippoveiv, tl-
Berai, rideadai, Tvyxaveiv ...... 101
XII. On the Verbs v^piki», virdp-^w, VTroaTiXXofxai . . 105
XIII. On the Verbs (pairofiai and (pepu) .... 107
XIV. On the Verbs (pddveii', (pveiy, "^aipeiv, ^^paadai, ^wpely,
eyy^iapeiv 108
CHAP. VI. — PARTICIPLE.
I. On Participles in general . . . " . . .113
II. On some Participles which appear to be redundant . 120
III. On the Participles cnroXeXeimievos, dp-^^unevos, l3ovX6-
fievos, yiyvofieyos, €')(6iievos, kvhe-j^Ofxevos . . . 122
IV. On the Participles of the Verbs ovo/idSbj, irap€x<^, tc-
ptej^w, TTCiw, reXevrdu), Tvy)^dvw, vndp-j^u), eifjii . . 123
CHAP. VIL— ADVERB.
I. On the terminations of certain Adverbs
II. On the Adverbs uKpi^ds, dXXws re koi, afxa
III. On the Adverbs dfiiXei, dyra-pv, avriKpvs
IV. On the Adverbs dpapoTws, apri, uTrapri, ews lipri, dpriws
dr€-)(^i'uJs, drpefia, arpe^uas, av, avdis, aire, avr/tca .
V. On the Adverbs avroBev, elra, eTreira, €[XTn]s
VI. On the Adverbs cTret, eneib)), kirav, eiretbdv, iirieiKiLs
VII. On the Adverbs kiriTrpoaBev, euye, rj, >), (with the Par-
ticles annexed to them,) and ybrj
VIII. On the Adverbs fidXXov and fidXiara .
IX. On the Adverbs /itera^i), fif^pi, fn)y, fiuvoy oi, fiioy, val
vij, vvy, 01, o'lfioi, olye, Ofiov, ofiws
X. On the Adverbs omj, ottov, virus, biroTav, oray, ore, ovru)
p^biu)s, o(j)pa, nuXiy, jrep, irpiy, pa ...
XI. On the Adverbs ttois, nov, ro^o, <5, and on those which
express approbation or disapprobation
125
129
131
133
136
139
142
145
147
153
161
Ml
CONTENTS.
Section Page
XII. Of Adverbs which have a peculiar energy and agree-
ableness in negation ; and expressly of those of which
/in) is the first in construction . . . . . l65
XIII. On ov and oi/c, and the Particles joined with them . 171
CHAP. VIII. — CONJUNCTION.
I. On the Conjunction dWa . . . . . '.175
II. On the Conjunction av (for which the poets use kc and
Key) with regard to its first and second use . . 178
III. On the third and fourth uses of ov .... 181
IV^ On the Conjunctions apa, apa, and ye . . , 182
V. On the Conjunctions yixp and I)) . . . .186
VI. On the Conjunctions ei, j/v, ai', eav, and their concomi-
tant Particles ........ 189
VII. On the Conjunctions re and Ka\, and their concomitant
Particles ......... 195
VIII. On the Conjunctions /lev and bk, and the Particles joined
with them ........ 200
IX. On the Conjunctions on and rolyvp .... 206
X. On the Conjunction iLs, and the Particles connected
with it 209
CHAP. IX. — PREPOSITION.
I. On the Prepositions afi<p\, ava, avevy avri, ano
II. On the Prepositions 5m and els .
III. On the Prepositions Ik or e^, and Iv .
IV. On the Preposition ctti . . .
V. On the Prepositions Kara, fierU, and avy
VI. On the Preposition -n-apa .
VII. On the Prepositions irepl and -rrpo
VIII. On the Preposition npus
IX. On the Prepositions vrrep, vtto, x«p<s •
217
222
228
234
242
249
253
256
260
:b
GREEK IDIOM S.
CHAPTER I
THE ARTICLE.^
Rule I. The article, in the masculine or feminine gender, agreeing
with no substantive expressed, is always to be referred to one under-
stood ; and there is often an ellipsis of a participle agreeing with the
substantive so understood : as rj/s 'Air/as >/ np6s -as aiaTuXhs, i. e. »/
/uepis — rerpct/jiJievrjTrpus, — the pai^t of Asia towards the East; rifv irapa.
TO reTi^os r^eifjtev, i. e. Tt]v obov ayovaav napa r. t. ^schin. Socr. Dial,
de Morte, c. 3. the road by the ivall. (See H. Steph. de dial. Att. p. 17.
ad art. 21. Tisth. ad Well, iii, 259 seq. Wakef. ad Eurij^. Ion,
438.)
With the article in the neuter also a noun is sometimes under-
stood ; as when grammarians say tu -koiw, i. e. to pTji-ia Trotw, the
verb TTOcw ; to (caXws, i. e. to knipprifia koKws, the adverb KaXws. But
there are many plirases in which no noun is ex|)ressed with the
neuter article, for this very reason, that either the thing intended
had no appropriate denomination, or that such denomination
did not occur to the speaker or writer. Such are the following :
70 fikv oTi — TO be oTi — partly — partly ; boicu) jim to tov 'IftvKelov
'iTTirov TTeTrorderat, Plato in Parmen. what happened to Ibycus's horse
seems to me to have happened to myself. So /i») iraQoifxi to tov ITpw-
r^wf, Lucian, Demostii. Enc. p. 93 1. and Aristopii. Nub. 1200.
ov ^ovov tu Tfjs ffUKJ/s TTon'jrjf.Te , Matth. xxi, 2\. ye shall not only
do this which is done to the Jig-tree ; ani'iyyeiXop Trdira, /cat rci tuiv
baijj.oviS.(JiJ.e\wv, Matth. viii, 33. and told every thing, and what
was befallen to the possessed of the devils.
II. Wlie/i the noun is expressed, the article is sometimes elegantly
repeated: as 'iy^eadm tFjs obov ti'is els tijv aojTrjpiuy, to keep to the
road to salvation. So tov TrapcnrXov tov ojs enl tovs "Apaj3as, Arr.
de Exp. Al. vii, 26.''
III. In a similar manner the article is joined elliptically with ad-
verbs and prepositions: as ol Kad' >//ias, (oires,) those of our own
times; ol evbov, those ivithin ; ol tt aX a i, the ancients ;'^ ttoju,
o Called by some tlie Prepositive Ar- sur la Nature des Animaux, p. 304. ed.
tide. Paris. 17G9.— J. S.
* 'Ev rif) <Tvyypd.nixari T^ Treplrov'llpa- <â– Tai tov trivv TltpiKXiovs uj'ip, Xen.
k\4ous, Xen. Wein. ii, 1, 21. In kh hook Mem. iii, 5, 1. tlte son of the famous
nboul IJtrcules. So in French: "Until Pericles. See Abridgm. of Bos, p. lOG,
honime est sans doule U itre LE plus note n. — J. S.
Iieureux de la \alure." Bnffon, Discours
Viger. A
2 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. t.
Ihe celthrattd ; tu o'ikoi, affairs al home, ox one^s home ; Iv rots
/iuAtora,* eminently or exceedingly/
IV. Tlie article, with tlie particles fxkv and he, serves for partition,
distinction, or opposition; as rwi- ^]n~iv av/jj^ut^oviTui' oi /jey pndvfjov-
aiv, 1 he advi^uwaiy : of our allies some are inactive, a7id Others de-
spond. In the following passages it serves for partition, or distinction
between different parts of the same thing: // rod pevfuaros taeivov Trrj-
7»), »'/ fieu els civroy ebv, )'/ be, airojietrrovfieiov, e^to invoppel, Plato in
Phsedr., where »/ jiev and »/ he both i\g\\\iy partly ; nnvTos tov e'lhovs
Tovrov fi'itTOjjev eTvidvjielv ', 7) tov fiey, tov he ov ', or the one part of it
only, hit not the other? Pialo de Hep. lib. v. |). 473. I. 15. — Some-
times what is usually only referred to, or sijjnified, by the article in
this phrase, is, for greater perspicuity, expressed in addition to it ;
either in both members, as 'imroi -e iinrois, ca) arhpes ayhpaaiv, ijyw-
vHovro' ol fxky — (iiaauadai tovs YXepans 01 IMaveSoves* 01 be eip^at
avTwy T))y ei^JDua-iy, 01 TlepfTcii : those, the Macedonians, to repel the
Persians ; these, the Persians, to prevent the egress of the Macedo-
nians : Arrian, de Exp. Alex, 1. i. p. 33. 1. 11.; or in one only, as,
e'^et he ayaXoyoy >/ KpijriK)) th^is irpos t})v AaKLjyiKi'iy' ytiopyovai re yap
vols fiey EtXwres, to'is he Kptjalv ol YlepioiKoi : for ihe Helots culti-
vate the land for the latter, and for the former, {the Cretans,) the
Periocci: Aristot. Polit. lib. ii. c. 8.
Sometimes 6 li'ey and 6 he are not made correlative ; but what
would have been signified by one or Ihe other, is put in the place
of it; as in Hcrodot. Terps. c. 94. where the Mitylenieans and
Athenians go to war with each other, ol jiev cnrai-eoy-es ttiv
â– )(_ujpi]y' 'Ad7]ya~ioi be, &c. " the former insisting on restoration
of the territory, and tlie Athenians" (instead of the latter,) &c.
So Time. i. c. 84. — Sometimes one of these correlative expressions
is omitted without any substitute, as OeCJv he ifpa ey KvWt'iir], 'AirKXij-
TTiov, to he 'AcppohiTtjs ea-iv : there are temples of the gods in Cyllene,
oj jEsculapius, and the other of Venus: Pausan. in El., lib. poster.;
and in this case there is sometinu's a repetition of the correlative
expressed, as vfKpoX §' e-mnToy, oi h' efxeWoy, 01 S' eKeiyrn, F],urip.
Or. 149(7. Pors.f See Musgr. on Ipii. in T. 136*1. In the following
passage there is the same reference (or, to use a law term, the
same innuendo) at each repetition of o« he, — ol [.ley being understood :
Tols TTfitai Tols TtXovaiois 01 narepes yi](f>eiv irapaiyovniy, ol be (sc. KoXaKes)
fxeOveiy' <Tio(ppoye7y, ol be iiaeXyuiyeiy' (pvXc'iTTeiy, ol he hcnrni'^y' (^i-
Xepye'iy, ol he padvi^ie'iv : fathers exhort their rich sons to be sober ;
BUT THEY (sycophants) to drink: to be temperate; BUT THiCY, to
he dissolute : to save ; but they, to spend: to be industrious;
BUT THEY, to be idle: Pint, irepl â– jrcuh. ay. Ol he by itself, for
soms : eaOrjTa be efopeov bippaTa Ot'ipeia' oi hk Kai l-^Ovojy Twy peyaXojy
tU TTdxert : they wore for clothes the skins of wild beasts: but some
U'ore the thick skins of large fishes : Arr. Hist. Iiid. c. 24. See too
* See Abridgm. of Bos, p. 106, note h. as M rwv a7ro/5/5r)Tcoj', a secrclary. — .T. S.
<* Add, 01 €7rl Twu iiriaTo\(iiv, the t STrouSrjs 5' viru "ETrnnov ol 5' wp-
clerks or amanuenses ; and in such plira- BovyTo- rovs Sc K(tp.(vovs HfKpovs fej/ tTSey.
ses the article itmlf is soiiietinies omitted, Eurip. Ilel. 1021. — .J. S,
RuLii 4.] THE ARTICLE. 3
Arr. (le Exp. Al. I. i. c. 11. in inil. — O'l ht, by itself, in a general
sense, for men: TlOpyoi KaTrjpeiTrorro, toi bt- (Ionic and poet, for
01 be) XoiaUtdi' N»'/;^oi'ro fiolpuv irpovf.if.iaTMV heiopKures : the lowers
trerc thrown doivn, and men swam about, seeing their last fate before
their eyes: Lycopli. v. 81. speaking of llie deluge. See another
unusual form in Oilyss. «, 115. — Soniefiines rts is substituted for one
member of the phrase : ti, dv nvrovs umpiiKiusi nves, o'l be kcu br/-
f.L()tTi<f treXeuTTjrTcii' : of whom so})ie have destroyed themselves, others
have been publicly executed: iEschin. de fals. leg. p. 238. I. 39.
Sometimes it is added : 6 /Jev tis ererpuTo, a be kciI CTreTrrw^et :
o?ie had been wounded, another had fallen : Xen. H. Gr. iv, 5,
14. — Ot be Tires and i'lbt/ be rtres equivalent: ol ^ev yap a'vrCJv
KoXuKus KoX irapatrlTOvs uvoKapfjuvovtnv, ol be rives eraipcn kui j^a-
fJLaiTVTras XvrpovvTcit, ...''// 5 tj 5 e 7«>'es Kni ruiv yeaviKwrepwr dnrovTai
kciKuf : for some of them entertain sycophants and parasites ; others
purchase the freedom of courtesans and street-walkers, . . . and others
there are who even engage in still bolder and more desperate prac-
tices : Flut. Trept iraib. ciywy. — Sometimes instead of the partitive
genitive which usually introduces this kind of plirase, a nominative is
employed: ol be 'Ai^apvdres, ol fiey ts "Apyos Ivt'eftoi'idovy, ol bk
&c. for Twv be 'Ac. ol jjh' — -' Tluicyd. iii, 105. So ol tt apovres be,
ol fjLev tjbovvTo, 1 be eyeXwj' : but as for those present, some were
ashamed, and others laughed : Lucian in Conv. t. iii. p. 432. 1. 23.
ed. Amst., which Latin autliors have imitated : see Sallust, B. C. c. 2.
init. \ irg. /En. xii, 277. Val. Fl. iii, 462. ; and Lucian has added
to the nominative a genitive of a pronoun referring to it: ol Kopv-
ftavres be, u /uev avruiy T^iiverui l,!(p(^i tui' -uTj^vy, 6 be &C. : lite-
rally, the Corybantes, 07ie of them cuts his arm with a sivord, another,
&c. Dial. Veil, et Cup. — ar;d, ol be trot Tratbes, ?/ nev avrwy
appeyiK)] nepa rov fierpov — o 6' 'AttoAXwj' Trpoanoielrdi fj.ev Trdvra et-
beyai &c. : a7id as to your children, one of them, your daughter,
is masculine beyond measure ; — and the other, Apollo, pretends to
know all things: Dial. Junon. et Lnt. The following form is
still more bold ; noXXavs vpovrpeTrey Itti <pi\o(Tn(piay' ol be ovbels
avTw npoae'iyoy, — for tCuv be ovbe\s : he urged many to philosophy,
hut no one of them attended to him: /Elian Iii). x. c. \6. V. H. —
Instead of 6 fxey, 6 be, eh pev, erepos be, (in French I'un, Vautre,) are
employed with propriety : bvo be ku\ //eyaXa, et' ^xey, on ov -aepi rioy
"lawy liywriiopai, erepoy be : the one, the other : Demoslh. j)ro Cor.
— Likewise, 6 el$ kui 6 erepos, see Maltli. vi, 21^. ; and u els, 6 be erepos
is in Luke vii, 41.; and in Matlh. xxiv, 40, 41, is found 6 eis kui .6
eh; and in Arist. 1. Eth. vi, c. 1. ev yuei- and er ^e are opposed,
and also in his Rhet. ii, 20. ; and in Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 8. ly
' "HSrj Se rives is evidently more em- -koXv yap ovruis p.eya\ft6rfpov, eVoXXa-
phatical than ol 5€ rives. — J. S. ytlcr^s nTwcreuis, ■!) eX-rrep ovtws ((pih To;;'
/ Homer is the source of tliis elegance, 56 Suu (TKoiriKdiy d fiiu — . avvriOws yap
as of must others : ol Se Svo aKoireAui, 6 iXiyero, iruv 5e tJ» ijvvriBes fiiKpowpitris'
fiev ovpavhv evpvv iKavn, — rhv S' fTepou Sih /cat aQavixaarov, Dcmetr. Phal. ile
&c. Od. p.. 73. The following is a just Eloc. § GO.— J.S.
remark, on the efi'cct of this unusual form :
4 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i.
fi€v — Iv he — aWo — aWo. In Aiistopli. erepos be ris first follows
6 fxh', and afterwards llie following nieinbers of llie sentence
are connected by o be : Pint. v. 102. seq. — In Xen. de Re E(j. 10, 6,
earu) u fiev XeTos, b be erepns &v.: let the one be smooth, but the
other, &c. — A more unusual form is, '/in v-rro jsev riLv aywi-m,
vTTo he Twv w9(irroe: that they may be led on by the Jirsl, uTid
urged forward by the last: Xen. Mem. iii, 1, 8. and so Time, iii,
6l. The followii)<^ phrases may also be noticed : ware tus ^ey nv-
Twv KUTuaKUTTTeir, ev he rals ciKpoiroXets rctj^/ijecr : SO as tO rasC
sovie, and build citadels in others: Isocr. Panej;. c. 3J. eh fxev
Tovs vpp/soires, rots he hovXevovres: insolent tyrants to some, to
others slaves : Ibid. c. 41. And presently aflerwards, Trpos /uej- roiis
<l>i\ovs — npos b' €)(6p(jvs. And see Steph. de dial. Att. p. 18-i.
V. The article with the preposition Kvira forms elejjant phrases ;
as TCI Knd' )ifids, the affairs of our time, or more generally, all that
relates to us : ret caret llavauvinv rov Aunehutfxovior, K(U Qe jiia-
TOKXea Tuv ^AQrivaiov — ovtms ireXevrrjaei' : thus COJlcluded the
events relative to Pausanias the Lacedoimonian and Themistocles the
Athenian: Tluic. i, 138. see Macchab. lib. ii, c. 15, v. 2>7 • Plii-
lipp. i, 12. Coloss. iv, 7.: o Ntypos eh,!ip-ve to. kuB" eavror, Niger
arranged his affairs: Herodian iii, 1, 17. — In the same sense rti Trept
7/juas : a^ci 7W wndeadni ret Trept A ei'rXov icai K.€d r)y6p : what had
befallen Lcniuliis and Ccthegus : Pint, in Vit. Cic. p. 872. ret irepl
Qqftaiovs, the state of the Thebaus affairs: Isocr. Or. ad Phil. So with
ufucpl: TO. aj-Kpl Tijv 'Ew'fti', the affairs of the East: Zosim. i, 37- —
But wlien the article before tlie preposition is in the masculine or
feminine, as oi u.j.if\ Ylpiafxov in Horn. II. y. 146. Trpos rets Trcpt
MupOav Kcil Mapiuv St. John, c. xi, v. ip- the phrase signifies,
sometimes, (especially in the earlier writers) the persoti named toge-
ther with attendants, colleauues, followers, &c. or the latter only ;
sometimes (especially in later writers,) merely the person named.*
The following are examples of diftcrent forms: ol d/i^' 'Ol^virija,
Ulysses and his people : Horn. Od. y. 163. ol d/j^t AvrcXvKoy, Au-
iolycus and his father : Xen. Synip. i, 4. ol afA(pi QpaavXov Kai
'Epaaivihrjv, Thrasylus and Erasinides ivifh their colleagues : Xen.
Mem. i, 1, IS. ol Trepi 'AretXai/rrji', AtaUinta uilh her Melanio :
Palaeph. F.ib. 14. ol ufi(pl tov " Awtuv, Any tus and the other ac-
cusers of Socrates : M.\\An V. H. ii, 13. ol irepl tov 'Iwavvriy, John
and his gang : Joseph. B.J. vi, 2. ol rrepl rut' TluiiXny ijXOo^ev
els KciKTcipetay, Paul and we of his party : Acts xxi, 8. — The article
before the preposition is omitted in Horn. 11. c. 436. i. 81 s(|q.
■—AXil,ayhp6s re Kul ol afi^' uvtov, Alexander and his, &c. Arrian
ii, 10. ol rrepl roy 'AXe^ayhpoy, Alexander s captains, (thus mcn-
* " Pervulgatumillud ol afx(pi TlKaruva, but Weiske is of a different opinion, and
pro solo Platone dictum, cadentis est refers lu IIodi. 11. j. 80. llerodot. i. 157.
lingua;, usitatuin Pliitatclio (t consinii- (wlieie he says it is j.lain from the follow-
libus se-riptoiibus, non antiquioribus, ut in^ chapters that Pactyas alone is meant.)
Tbucydidi, Flatoni, Xeiio])honti, nedum, Plato in Menone, t. iv. p. 376. &c. See
quod quidam opinati suiil, llon)ero." his Pieonasni. Pncposit. § 2. — J. S.
Hermann. De Ellips. et I'leonasm. —
Rule 5—7.] THE ARTICLE. 5
tioned after tlio doalh of Alt xaii'lor himself,) /E\. V. II. xii, 64. ol jj^v
yun (ijiipl Tor WXuTiora ktu \p{)annn)v, Ka\ V\vOay6(ini', <pi\oi : Jor the
Jollou'trs of Pluto, Chri/sippiis and Pj/thagoras [in llie time of Lii-
ciaii, ceiiluries after tlie ileatli of those piiilusophers themselves] tvere
rcriivcd by him [Alexander the false prophet] as friends : Ltician,
Psemlnm. [p. 879- E. ed. Saliiiiir.] ol Trept roi)$ ¥.o\)ivQiovs, the
Corinthians : Herodot. o« Trepi tov Kofi/iobor, Herodian i, 9» 15.
1 irtpl ray 'Epearjvuv 'Airuji'iroy, the faction of Anionifius of
Emesa : Zosini. i, 10. ol nepl nra OepaTrov-es, the servants or
train of a person: Herodian i, 6, 2'2. al vepl afds ivy('i}.ieis,
their forces: Zosiin. ii, 18. ol avy rJ Aeu'w, ib. i, 22. — But tiie
passage cited by Zeunius from Herodot. b. i. p. 12. 1. 21. ed.
Camt-r. to show a verb in the singular agreeing will) the article in
the plural in this kind of phrase, is read diflerently by Hermann.
The neuter article is said to be sometimes so employed : tu nepl
KaWippaijy, CalUrrhoe ; Charit. i, 8. like r'a Ti/s /uolpus, fate.
VI. The neuter to with the adverb rvy, and the neuter participle
ej^ov, or in one word Totvre-^oy, sii^nifies, at present, for the present,
as things go now; as, rorujej^ov ey ayaduls ylio/nai -a'lS iKirlai,
at present I entertain the best hopes. See Plut. 'Epwr. init. and lib.
Tob. vii, 11,
VII. "0("'€, ifhe, Tohe, with the article repeated are used demonstra-
tively for ovTos, uvrrj, tovto ; as, obe 6 a.y6pijJwos, this man; and
for the enclitic ^e the Attics use h), as obi [see Fisch. ad Well. i.
p. 345.] : tiowep Taiir eypa<p€y obi Trepi e/jov : on tvhich account this
man (or my friend Ctesiphon here) proposed these things in the
psephism concerning me: Demosth. pro Cor. ; but this form, and that
of the adverbs erOatl, yvyl, &c. are proper in familiar language only,
and therefore are never eniployed in tragedy, though very frequent
in comedy. — The article 6 is used also where avrus, ws, instead of it,
or (is alone, would make the sense plainer : KepKvpuloi aipwy uvtwv
Tovs F.-)^dpovs boicovvTcis ehai cfoi'evoi', -)jy fiev aiTiav ernfepoires -ols
Toy tfjf^iov f:riTa\vov(Tty: the Corcyraans destroyed those ivhom they
judged to be their enemies, as being guilty of subverting the de-
mocracy, — or, charging them with aiming at the subversion of the
democracy: Thuc. lib. iii. c. 81. Here the sense would be the
same it' uiirols, ws, or ws alone, were substituted for to7s. — The article
is joined with a nominative for a vocative : 'O TptpaWos, hnrlc ye,
Triballus: Aristoph. A v. l6"27. — 'O is put for ovtos. The phrases
in which the Attics employ it as a pronoun are the following : — 1,
after a preposilion ; bia to, for bia tovto, Thucyd. vii, 71. ky toIs,
among these: Plato Eulhyd. p. 281, I9. ed. Has. prim. — 2. tov kuI
tov, TCI Km TCI, such a one and such a one ; such and such things:
Lysias pro Eratoslh. cajd. p. QJ. Demosth. c. IMid. p. 56'0. This form
admits of those cases only which begin with r. — 3. ot fxky, o7 be,
some, others. — 4. Ttpo tov, or TrpoTov : 6 irpb tov ^poios, hereto-
fore, former time; cot fiaprvpel ttus 6 irpOTOv yjpuyns yeyoiws,
and all past time testifies: Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 496. 1. IS. —
5. the relative os following: ret, e^ wy avyKeiToi, these things of
which it is composed, or compounded : Arist. Top. vi, 13, § 14. — 6.
6 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i.
tv rots fiaXiara ami the like; of which lieroafler. — 7> even with-
out a preposition : au TO yiyjijfjkeis, on, yon know this, that , — ;
Plato Crat. p. 431. E. ro bt upa ov tuv-o 7iv, Id. in Sytnp. sx. 7-
VIII. Tijbe adverbially; here; in this ivay ; in this vianner ;
for ovr(i)s ; ob^ being defective: — eDoiJo-wjuev be kui Tijbe, let us
consider it thus also: Plato Apol. 32. (pevyu) to beiXiiv rrjbe,
by this course I avoid the charge of timidity: Enrip. Or, v.
TT-i- Pors. — T?J§e is opposed to Kakel(je : — T^be KUKe'tae orpe-
peaOat, to turn this icay and that way. Tj? yucv and r^ hk are very
frecjuently corrt lative ; for here, there, Src: rfi fiev Ojteuiy uneip-
yerat buaeai Kctl vtptjXoTs, rrj be nebioy avrTis Kudi'iKei es re en) Tifv
fieya\r]v Tijv ravr^ ddXaaaat' : On the One side it (Hyrcania) is hem-
med in by u'oody and lofty mountains ; on the other its plain extends
as far as to the great sea i?i this part : Arriaii, de Exp. Al. iii, 23. —
Sometimes for /;^/77/?/ — partly; or in this respect, — iji that respect :
Ka.i^u}KpuTi)s Tij fxey vpOws eiBijTei, Trj be iijuc'tpTayei' : and Socrates
in some respects inquired rightly ; in other respects he erred : Aristot.
Eth. vi, 13.
IX. To tI among- philosophers signifies the substatice or essence of
a thing; ro iroior, the quality ; ro -noaov, the quantity: koi yap
(juyaduv) ev t to t'i Xiyerai, o'lov 6 deijs Kul 6 yovs' Kul ec tm not^,
ai ctpeTui' k(u ev rw iroao), to fierpioV ku\ kv Tip irpos ri, to yfil}ai}iov'
Kal ey xporw, Katpos' Kcti ev tottco biaira, /cat erepa TOioiira : Jor Good
is spoken of in substance, as God, and Mind ; and in quality, as
the Virtues ; and in quantity, as Mean or Moderation ; and in re-
lation, as Utility ; and in time, as Opportunity ; and ifi place, as
Habitation, and the like: Aristot. Eth. i, 6.
X. With the same philosophers ro bin ri is, the final cause.
XI. 'Ytiv 7rpu)Tr]t'* is at fir'st : rijy /jey Trpuirriv TrpnOvpws e^cis,
at first you will be full (f alacrity : Epict. Ench. c. 31. vvv pev-
TOi Trl-Treifffxai Tovd' (kai'Oi' â– KpoXujyely eliai ijjxiv t i] v TTpu)Tr}v, for a
beginning, to begin: Den)oslli. Ol^nth. iii. [p. 2.Q. I. 1.] T>)v
Tu-)(jGTr}v, US quickly as possible : JiL\. H. V. vii, 5. Tiip evOelay, di-
rectly, straightforward, openly: 'OpT-qnitw ->)y /ney evOelav rw
Ik'/a^j7 avyeiwe'iy fi)) roXpijTurTus, Plut. in Cic. p. 8C>4. I. 2^). [p. 1584.
1. 8. ed. H. St.] — With the same ellipsis of Kn-a certain substan-
tives expressed are employed with a genitive after them, as x"P"'»
for the sake : evbaipoiias -y^hpir, for the sake of happiness: Aristot.
Kill, i, 3. see Euiip. Andr. 1228. Perictyone ap. Stob. 487, 51.
Abresch, .'\uct. Dilnc. Thiic. p. 420. — and with the article; Tijv
a))y x'''P^^' f^''' your sake: Eurip. Andr. 221. and, TrarpJav
')(^upiy, for the sake of their father : Eurip. lleracl. 242. — So bik-riy
and Tpanoy, ajter the manner of , like: Stur/v rwy beiXtiwy Tryevpti-
Tojy, Lucian, Uem. Eric. p. 9'1- biKijy \tfiatpns, /Eschyl. Ag. 241.
rpoiroy alyvKLwy, Iliid. 241. like vultures; rponoy Xuyxrjs, He-
rodol. vii, 6.9. Xpeos, for the benefit of : aay ovk eXaaaov */ kelyrjs
XPeos, for your advantage no less than for her own: Eurip. Ilcc.
880. Pors. — Here may be mentioned uKfi))y, still: u.h:p))y kui vpe'is
aavycTol tore ; Matlli. xv, 16.
* See the Abridgtn. of Bos, p. 100. 1. 4.
Rule 8— 16.] THE AU'IICLP:. f
XII. The aititle with a genitive of a proper name sij^itifies Ifie son
of, anil very fre(|uenl!y occurs in genealogies; 'O rov ^rj^oaderovsy
the son of Denioslhents. ^w^poD/s o ^lofpotitji^ov is used lo signify
eillier tliat he was the only son of Sophronisciis, or that he was that
Socrates, wliose father was Sophroniscus, to distinguish him from
others of the same name; hut Swvpurijs luxppntinKov, without the
article, is Socrates who had Soj)Iironiscus, not any oilier, for his
fatlier. See Herodot. Er. c. 52. Xenoph. Cyrop. i, 27. — So in the
plural, ol yoitwv biaffi'iidwr, the sons of il/ush'ious parents: Pint.
vepi TTcttb. (tywy.
XIII. To with a neuter adjective, usually in the superlative, sig-
nifying the chief thing in an enumeralion, after the recital of others:
01 be bvrarol KaXa KTi)f.taTa Kara tiiv -^wpnv oiicobniiiais Te Kn\ -noKv-
reXtTt KUTdcfKevals dnuXdjXeKuTes, to be yuey terror, TzoXe fioy uyr
elpiivTji eyovres : but above all, Szc. Tliuc. ii, 65. ; and the neuter
adjective without the article : fiey la- ov be, rtj twv ^(^fjtjparwi' aitavei
KwXvcjovTcu : and what is of most consequence, they will be prevented
by want of money : Thuc. i, 142. Tiie expression is elliptical, to
be fdeyicTTov kari tovto. — In a similar sense the Latin writers used
Id quod. See Cic. Mil. c. 30, fin. and ii. in Cat. c. S.
XIV. 'Eirl Tube {ficpjj or (cXZ/iora), on this side, with a genitive; as
err I rabe twv opwv, on this side the mountains, opposed to kire-
KGLva, on the further side, beyond; >/ l~eKeiva -wv "AXttcwv
KeXru)), Gallia Transalpina, Gaul beyond the Alps; ?/ cTrt Tube
tGiv "Akneuiv, Cisalpina, or Gaul on this side the Alps. — Not unlike
this, is cTTi OuTepn fiey, kiT\ Qarepu bk, on this side, on that side.
XV. To 01', part: rfjs ^^tlJpas to fxev Of irpus upKTOV larl, to be ov
Trpds fieam-iftpiav. of the country one part is towards the North,
the other towards the South: Ari^tid. Panath.^
XVI. To ixev, TO be, partly, partly : to /.tei' vw' eXnibos, tIj be vnb
beovs, partly through hope, partly through fear. And sometimes
Ti is ad<ied eitiier to to /jev or to to be, or to both, to qualify the
affirmation, rendering it generally, in some respect or other, according
to the various senses of rls, less definite: tu fiey ti t^aToiKTiaei twv
&r]l3wy,Td be ws avyyrwcrTa bebpuKeiai efah'oiTO : partly, in some
degree, from compassion for Thebes, and partly tipon their offence
(the offence of Tliessaliscus and Dionysodorus) appearing to be
venial: Arrian, Exp. Al. ii, 15. to fxey ti irpus Tijv ojfjorrira rov v'lov
biajSXrjdtis, TO be ti ws irapavofiovyTu uvtov aiTiaaufxevoi, cWufji'/ffus
treXevrn Toy (3ioy, Lucian, Macrob. p. 825. And sometimes to be ti is
not introduced either by ro fiey or to iiev n : otres fiev ku\ TrpoTov yu;)
ra^eTs tevat es tovs TroXefxovs, — to be ti ku\ noXeiJois oheiois et,etpyti~
pei'oi : being even in former times sloiv to go to tear, — and then
being moreover, in some measure, prevented by their ow7i private
wars: Thuc. i, 118. In the following passage to be tl f<dlows 7a
pey, Ta be: r <x fJev fiipi'firerai rfjv Trporepay irvXiTeiay, tU be ri/y
uXiyapyiav, — to be. ri kuX avTfis e^ei 'ibioy : and something it will
* But rh 01' has sometimes the most fications, that of Being in general: as
extended and comprehensive of all signi- in Plato's Parmenides. — J. S. .
8 TilK ARTICLK. [Chav. i.
have pecvliarli/ its ow7i : Plato de Rep. viii, j). 547. — In the niascu-
iilie, 6 ^e TJS : tr tovt(^ o'l <^i\ni rai Kvpu Trpoaijyov o'l fikv \s.ahovaiovi
benjueyavs ikvtov juti'eo', o'l be 'Yfyt^ni'iovs, 6 be rts Vuil^pvar, o be Tis
liiKay : and some other, Gobryas, and some otJur, Sacas : Xen.
Cyrop. vi. iiiit. — Si»metinics to fjev rt, to be ti are not adverbial : Tfjs
yereirews fiiuutu to /.tey ti // Trarpls /jepiSeTot, to be t i o'l yeivi'i/TavTes,
TO be vl XotTTol (jjiXoi : part of our lives our countr}/ claims for her
share, part our parents, and part our other friends : Plato Epist. J}.
Ill the pliiral, to. /uer, tu be: Heiodot. iii, 80. Piiid. Pytli. ii, Ip.
Soph. Trath. 534. 'la per — to be irXeoy, partly, — but principalli/,
or more: Tiiiic. i, 90. ii'il. The forms are iinitli varied in Pindar.
See Neni. ix, 102. Ol. xii, 7. Ncni, ii, 29- viii, 51. P>th. xi, 70. ii, 56.
Islhin. iii, 18. Ol. ii, 132. — In the same sense tovto yntr, tovto be : cat
ToiiTO fJiev TO) '\(TfiT)il(i) 'A7ro\/\w)'t exp»'/(Taro, roiiro be lelvov Tira —
KaTeKoif-urre es 'Aficpiupew : he BOTH consulted Ismenian Apollo, AND,
&c. Ilerodot, viii, 134. see too Herodot. iii, 106. ix, 27. Tovto peu
by itself. Soph. Aj. 67O. Herodot. ii, gg. iii, 106', 108. vii, 21. Tovro
be by itself, Ilerodot. v, 45. viii, 60. tovto /uei', — y be nv eaobos,
Id. vii, 176'. Tovto f^ev with yuerct be corresponding, in the beffinning
of the following chapter : Herodot. vi, 125. To j^ev — tovto be, Id. viii,
102. Tovto fity — eha, Soph. Phil. 1345. — This idiom is imitated in
Latin by Hoc — Hoc. See Virg. Georg. ii, 351.
XVII. To Xeyofiei'ov, according to the adage, or proverb : aXV
7], to Xeyvfxeroy, KaTonn' eoprTjs iiKOfiey ', but are we come, as they
say, after the feast? Plato in Gorg. and in Phajd. c. 11. — To tov
Xoyov is used in the same sense ; Lncian, Demonax. [p. 999- A. edit.
Salm.] Sometimes, instead of Xeyo/aeyoy or tov Xoyov, the name
of the anlhor, whose adage or words are quoted, is put in the
genitive after to: llapfieyibrjs be poi (paiyeTat, to tov 'O fxi^pov,
aibolas re /^loi ebai ii^ia beiyot re : in the words of Homer ; as Homer
says: Pliito The;vt. p. 183. 'I'he following are elegant variations
of this idiom: fiuXXov avroy XeXr/Bey i) oi Tfjs 6uXutti]<< Xeyopteyoi
')(^6es: he is more ignorant of it, than of the measures, as they say,
of the ivater in the ocean : Plato Theitt, p. 173. 1. 41. >/ Aio/<e5eta
Xe y o fi ey T) uPciyKi] Tvou'iy iivruj 7ra)'70 u a»' ovtol etraiywexiy : he IS
under a Diomedcan necessity, as it is colled, to do whatsoever these
may commend: Plato de Pep. vi, p. 493. Ti\v Mixrwj/ Xeiav
KaXov/j eyrjy, Demoslii. de Cor. [p. 248. I. 23. ed. Reisk.] — In the
same manner to eipi'ifjeroy, /Eschyl. Agam. l632. as Hermann reads,
substituting 70 for rw.*
XVHI. The neuter article, in all its cases, forms idioms by being
joined with the infinitive of verbs ; as to iroifly, tov irme'iv, els to nme'tv,
€v t<^ TTOiely, &c. : t<xs (i\aa(pr] pitas aiirov ovicn^xit ticis o'vtrns iTribei^uf,
fxrf f.i6yoy t^ \pevbels tl)ai, uXXa kuI tw (ft tu f-iaXiOTa t'jaav (iXr]Qe'ts)
* VvwcTu yepccv iiv, &s SthdaKecrOai fiapv as tJ) \ey6fxevov above, but 1 cannot but
TCfi â– niXticovTCjj auxppoviiv (lpT]fj.evov. v. be diftUlcnt of my ojiinion wlien a Prelate
KilO. Ijlomf. — '' IKtiiuuiiius ad \'ig. p. of siitb distinguished learning and abili-
702. legit rh t. ff. €. fjuod iion inlcUigo." ties as Dr. liiomficld has declared he
litumf. lleriiianii, I think, takes Ti» f(p7j- cannot perceive Hermann's meaning. —
fi^yov panntheljcally, in the same sense J. S.
Rule 17—19] THE ARTICLE. 9
ouT(os u)s tyw K-typ»//ioi, rals Trpcty/jafTi crv fxipe pe iv ^p)/ffC((T0at : not
onlij because they arc false, but because, even t/iough they were true,
it was advantageous to the state, that &c. Dtiiiostli. pro Coroii.
Ou yap oro/jaffri tvvs Xoyovs Tron/cro/iCK, T^ /uj/ boKelf t/Xcyx^"' tt kpinrreiy
X^fw*'". for I will not mention any one by name in my discourses, that
I may not appear to accuse publicly what it is necessary to conceal:
Gre<;. Nhz, ad Episc. vs. 21. In this s( use the genitive roD also is
used with tlie infinitive, (ereka or i/vrep being defective,) bnt never
perhaps withon! some negation, <is /n), /u// Tim, fxr]heva, following.
See Sophocl. I'liiloct. 197. Heliodor. /Etiiiop. p. 496". Diony'. Hal.
p. 12. I. 33. Huds, Basil, qnoted by Casaub. on Allien, p. 75. To
is placed before words also taken ntaterially, as v/uels, d civbpes
'AOrji'ctlui, {rd b' vfxels ot<iv e'iiru), r>)i' noXiv Xeyw — ) : but when I say
YOU, whe7i I use the word you : Deinosth. pro Cor. [p. 255. I. 4.
Reisk.] But the article i^ sometimes omitted before wortls so taken :
Ism.: Ti yctp [lovrj [.loi riirTb' drep ftiMaifiov \ Creon : 'AW i'jbe
f.t€i'Toi /.ii) \ey'' ov yap ear' en, Sopii. Ant. VS. 067. do not employ
the word ijbe:'' and in the writings of grammarians lue article is
put in the gender of the word understood before that which is
taken materially; as AetTret »/ els, {irpodeffis being nnderstood,) the
preposition els is defective: Sell. Aristcph. Nub, 1083. So Xelnei
>/ bta, the preposition bia is understood : Sch. Thuc. 1. iv. init.
Tlie neuter article is put before members of sentences also: Trepl tov
vCos uKoveir iifjcis kfxov be'i,' abotit the manner in which you ought to
hear me: Demosth. de Cor. p. 226'. I. 5. [St. Luke xxii, 24. Plat,
de Rep. vi, p. 510.] — and before sentences, either complete and
farming jiropositions, or defective and elliptical : ws to 'H/iepa eorJ,
Kai Nii£ kari, npos /.leu to bieSevy^erov fxeyaXr}V e^et at,iav : as the
proposition It is day, and the proposition If is night, are very good
when taken disjunctively, or formed into a disjunctive proposition :
Epictet. Enciiir. c. 58. See Plato Pliiedr. p. 273. 1. 20. St. Paul,
Gal. V, 14. Id. Rom. xiii, 9- Plato Pha-dr. p. 272. init. : to b' e/ne
KvptovT) TreiOofjevoy tov ddXiav obov TrepieXdelv arubia nXeli' i) -^^iXia !
that I, wretch that I am, should have wandered about more than a
thousand stadia trusting to a crow! Aristopli. Av. vs. 5. — See
Virg. /En. i, -11. Snph. Vhil. 234. Aristoph. Nub. 8l6\ Xenoph.
Cyrop. ii, 2, 1. To ^t, followed by j-d) or /i>;5e, Aristoph. Nub.
269. Ran. 741.
XIX. The article is often deserted, -as it were, by the noun which
should have followed it, the construction having been suddenly
changed on account of a doubt about the proper appellation of the
thing to be expressed ; a form niobt commnn in orations ; as, »/ tQv
uXXmv 'E\Ar/iw)', e'lTe XP'I nuKiar, eiTc ciyvoiav, ctre cat tovtu nyu^orepa
eiTrelr : the — must I call it baseness, or ignorance, or both together,
of the other Greeks: Den^o^lll. de Cor. [p. 231, 1. 21.]— Two
singular nouns after a plural article : ui h' uvt elaopowaai, 'AOrjvaii'i
re kcil "Upt], Horn. II. v, 418,
'' 1 conjecture llie true reading to lie ' To this head the passages quoted
'AA.A.' tJSc fifv (Toi /UTjSe'v uv yap ear' ere. above t'roiii Dcm. pro Cor. and Greg.
— J. i^. Naz. ought to bo referred — .T.S.
figer, n
10
THE ARTICLE.
[Chap. i.
1. The article with an appellative noun sometimes stands for a pro-
per nviine: 6 ^€i7rr(iao(picrTt)s, At/ten^lis ; 6 yeoj-yfjufos, Slrabo ; o wepi-
yjyrjTij'i, Diovi/sius, whose poem is entitled Yhpajytjais rijs ohovfiiyris ;
o eOyticoypufos or 6 tdfoypnfos, Stephantis of Bi/zantium, who wrote
a book 7re/3i TruXewv icat bi'ipui' ; 6 7r«pfi/3drjjs, the emperor Julian, who
is commonly styKd the Apostate, airoara-ris ; 6 tG>i> aracrewv t^i]yr)r>)<:,
Hermogeties the rhetorician ; o Te')(i'iKds, Herodian the grammarian ;
(I re^^rovos Vewpyios, Choerohoscus ; 6 wopOfievs , Charon ; 6 novrfphs,
the Devil; 6 ftovKoXoiJ Theocritus; 6 avyypcKpevs, Thucydides,
(Aphtlion. ; Greg. Cor. de dial.); 6 â– ^(pvaoppiipiiyv, Chrysostom ; 6
deoXoyos, Gregory of Nazianzum ; 6 Troitjrijs, Homer ; 6 fh'irujp, De-
mosthenes. — Equivalent to thq appellative so used is a participle
with its dependent words : o m idi'iKa ypd\pas, Stephanus of Byzan-
tium ; () TToujcras ra AiorvuiaKa, Non7ius of Panopolis, whose 48
books of Dionysiacs are still extant ; ' AXe^nrbpevs pijrwp 6 ra epwriKci
nal^as, * Achilles Tatius, author of the amours of Clitophon and
Leucippe ; 6 to. fiovKoXiKci ypdxpas, Theocritus ; 6 rh Kvn-pm ypdy^ias
(viz. eirri or Trou'/uara), Stasimus ; and 6 vreipacwi', the Devil.
2. Secondly, the article with an appellative marks a thing determi-
natelv, or demonstratively : IboiTes tov aurepa, ky^ciprjaav, Ka\ kXQov-
res ds tov d'ikuv evpov tu naihlov, Matlh. ii, 10, where a certain
particular star, house, child, are emphatically signilied ; see also
Matth. ii, 2. [The article sometimes appears to be employed for a
purpose exactly opposite, — to signify tilings indefinitely; whence it
has been supposed to stand for ris : * kav tis twv fiXwy ciraKou'wrat
virep Ttor, lEWai), V. H. viii, 1. e'lTrep ri^ ciXAw, Plato Pha;d. 25.
see Xen. Mem. iv, 6, 13 : — and interrogatively, Xen. Mem. iv, 5, 10.
cf. Xen. CEc. xi, 20. But in reality what is taken for the article in
such passages, is ns itself in another form ; for the Ionic dialect sub-
stitutes Tea and reS for tov when the latter represents tivos or riros,
and rew for Wjj. Tiie form is probably used by the Attics in the
genitive and dative singular only; but if it should b<' granted that it
is used in the plural also of those cases, (since the plural appears in
the Ionic rewv and Teoiai, and in the pronoun, ortop ami orois,) yet at
all events it is never employed in the nominative or accusative of
either number.]
3. The article with tiie appellative sometimes follows the proper
name as a cognomin<d addition: thus, 'UpukXei-oi 6 (n^uTends, Ilera-
clilus the obscure ; 'Xwmrris o Kairrirmjs, John the Baptist ; and the
appellative is in many instances so added without the article. — In the
following form a pn'posilion with its case is substituted for the appel-
lative : Mj\r««if;i' ^e, t i v kv ^lapad Cjv i, &c. I\Iiltiades the con-
queror at Marathon: Plato Ciorg. p. 5l6. I. 40.
The article is re])eated, for the sake of greater distinction or em-
j 'O PoVKOXtK6s ?— J, S.
* By the same sort of afTected cir-
cumlocution I^ord Shaftesbury designates
Aristotle as the Grand Dlaster of Ulrl,
Homer as the (irmid Poetic Sire, Socrates
^£^enitis. Advice to an Autlior. — J. S.
* *H (papnaKotcnv f) fxiS, ye Ttp -rtx^V'
Aristoj)h. Thcsm. 430. " Sciuiit Gra;ce
docti, TOV, T<f, indefiiiita, eadcmque ac-
centu notata, ct inierropautia omnium
and I'lalo, as the I'lulusupliicdl Palriarcli, essegenerum. f'vpT}(/aSe^aT^ iKTovv\jfx<pa.v.
and liis Disciple of nubic biitli and lofty Soph. O'.d. T. 1107." Brunck. — J.S.
Rule 19.] THE ARTICLE. 11
pliasis : o bijfios l> 'AOrj^cuwy : 6 Tro(fjn)y u KaXus, Joliii x, 12. the
good shepherd, by way of eminence; o'l be "EWrjyes, o'l /.nryOofopoi,
ol avy iiapiiw, Arrian ii, 10.
'J'liere is often a concurrence? of several different cases of tlie arti-
cle, williout any intervening vv(>r<i : as, ol to tQp bainoytoy ytros —
e^f-vp6yrf.s: those whojirst broached the doctrine of the demons, &c.
Pint, de Or. Def. p. 415. tm -r/s tCjv eXevdepujy ^Oopds yofJM,
^liscliin. in Tini, p. 172,1.43. T))y tov ry airi priTopiKuv — re^vrjy,
Plato Pli-cvdr. p. 269, I. 30.
Tlie article repeated, with the intervention of koi, has an indefinite
signification: eJ to kui to tTroirjaey dydpwTrus oi/rofft, ovk ay aneda.-
rey : if this man hud done so and so, or thisaiid the other : Denioblli.
de Cor. [p. 308, I. 3. ed. Reisk.] add Aristid. Oral, pro Qnalnorv. p.
420. ret Kal tu iroiov(Tas, Aristid. ib. p. 356. For tjjis piirase o be'na
is sometimes substituted. — 'O Selj'o is used on the following occasions :
1. wiien a certain j)erson is spoken of, but his name is unknown to
Ihe speaker:' hi-^nv tovtov av, nopOi-iev, Kal tov be'iya, Lucian,
Catapl. 13. t. i. p. 635. — 2. when the name of something spoken
of is purposely suppressed: to belya fieyToi /di) Xa/jflnyerufaay
ovTot, TO biKauTtKoy,'" Lucian, Bis Ace. e. 23. t. ii. p. 822, 51. —
3. when a name is not remembered: Aristoph. Thesm. 620, 621,
622. — 4, when it is indicated that any name will serve the purpose,
one as well as another. In this sense, for 6 be'tya Kai o belra the
Latins say Caius and Sempronius. In the plural, ol belyes tov
bfjfioy (underst. presented with a crown) awdeyTes Itto tov bi'i/jov :
such and such persons.
The article is prefixed to interrogative pronouns; when it always
refers to something previously said by the person interrogated; the
article appearing to be the commencement of an anticipation of what
the person (pieslioned is expected to say, and the interrogative pronoun
to be resorted to, after a short aposiopesis, from inability to proceed.
Te. evb(Ufiore.V TTuay^ei be davjuaaToy. Merc, to — t i ; Aristoph. Pac.
696. — Merc, w, (1). o'la fi CKeXevirey avaTTvdecjdai aov ; Tr. tu — ri;
Aristoph. Pac. 693. — H. irpayfia iropavywy fieya. K. to — ttoIoi',
w ^ey' ; Soph. TO TTo'ioy bi] Xeyen ; Plato Ph<«dr. 265. When there
is nothing in the preceding words to which the article thus employed
can be grammatically referred, some noun with which it may agree is
' In Arisfoplianes, Ran. 918, a person
both present and known by name to
tlie speaker is called o Ziiva. Bacchus
speaks of yi'.^chylus. — J. S.
"• A less (|uestionable example of this
use of rh Seii'a occurs in Aristoph, Ach.
1149, where it signifies rb ojZoIov. In
the ])assage of Lucian (in which there
ought to be no comma after o5to(, I'ut a
colon after /ueWoc) the expression ap-
pears to be an interjection, or extluina-
tion exj)ressive of some degree of pertur-
bation at having nearly forgotten what
oiiglit to have been remembered : so in
Lucian (Vit. Auct. p. -558 )a merchant on
the point of taking away a slave bought
by hiiu without inquiniig what food he
likes, exclaims, rh diiva Se* Sttcos JfSco
TifTi X^'P*' "'"'^'^ eSetTixdrwy. — ArislO[)lianes
frequently uses rh oe'iva thus, as an inter-
jection, not unlike Malum in Latin, and
Plague on it ! in English ; as, ISov, Kard-
K€i(t' avvaas tl' Kayw 'K^uoiJ.ai. Kairoi, rh
Selva, xpiaGos iffr' i^oLCXTea, Lvsistr. <)2l.
but siaij, what was I thhilihi^- ttbuiit ! &c.
It is ex|)ressive on different occasions
of surpri-e, vexation, anger, &c. See
Aristoph. Av, G48. Vesp. 521. Mo\,
Fragm. 1. — J. S.
12 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. Rule 19.
expressed in the interrogation itself: Prom. Qyrjrovs i-rravaa fjrj Trpo-
bepKe/xdai /uopov. Cljor. tu noloy evptoy Titrrhe (papjJ.aKoi' voauv ',
iEsciiyl. Proiri, vs. 248. the remedy which you discovered for this
malady, was what ?
The article is joined with every part of speech, except the con-
junction, in an adverbial sense : to K€<pa\aiov, principally, above
all, in sum; -n a.Xl^O€s, Herodian iii, 8. to urpeKes, Theogii.
167 • in truth, in reality; to ctp^filov, to naXaioy, anciently:
Plat. Hipp. M. 285. Heraclid, de Polit. rovyavri or, on the
contrary: Ceb. Tab. to Xonror, for the future : Thuc. i, 31. 56.
for the remainder, Xcii. H. Gr. vii. p. 626. To Xonrov may be
put for roO Xoinov, but not vice versa; see Xen. Cyrop. viii, 5, 24.
Aristopii, Pac. 1084. Herodot. i, 11. vi, 12. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 4, 10.
— TO XoiTToi', for what remains, to proceed. [In these phrases tiie
article sometimes coalesces with the following word : see Wessel.
ad Herodot. p. 53. Duk. Pref. to Thuc] to oXor, wholly: Plat.
Phaedr. 261. 1. 7- ro Tray, to rrvfiTrav, altogether, entirely, on
Ike whole: Lucian, Dear. Jud. Isocr. ad Nicocl. ro ttoXv, for the
most part, mostly: Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 11. to (jvvoXov, on the
whole, in sum: Diod. Sic. i. ro reXevralo*', at last; to nXeoy,
more: Thuc. i, 69. ro vpoTepoy, before: ib. c. 58. and ro
trpoTepov Tj, before that : Herodot. i, 72. ro varepov, the second
time: Time, i, 73. to bevrepor, the second time : Plat. Phaedr. p.
2S6. TO TpiToy, the third time : Plat. Theag. p. 12£). tIi kp^itiotq,
in the best manner possible: Thuc. i, 31. TovXa^^^ioToy, for
70 iXu^'^aTov , at the least : Plut. in Cic. 865. to fieytaroy, in the
greatest degree, most: Theogn. 111. kuX to fxeyioTov bi), and
what is above all: Xen. Cyrop. v, 1, 22. ro npwTor, at first : Lu-
cian, t. i, p. 282. TO avTo, in the same manner: Plut. A}>oplith.
ro vvy €(>'««,* Att. for the present: Xen. Anab. iii, p. 305.
Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 312. — So ro ai]fiepoy ^Ivai, for to-day :
see Steph. ad Corinth, art. 2.9- Alciph. i. ep. 1. — ro ex f/xol e'lyat,
as far as I am concerned : see Duk. ad Thuc. iv, 48. as far as it is
in my power. — to Xeyopevoy, ro yuy e)(^oy, above. Rules \J, 6. — ro
ayeKudev, formerly, before: Nicol. Damage, de Mor. Gent, ro
fierali/, in the mean time: Lucian, Tox. ro ^ej(pt e/jLov,
down to my time: Herodot. Th. c. 10. to irAXni, formerly:
Plat. Pliittdr. 251, I. 19- 'ro irapavr iKn, for the present, for the
time: Thucyd. i, 134. to â– 7rp\v, before: Iliad, e, 54. ro TrponBev,
heretofore : Xen. Cyrop. v, p. 129- to ttws, in what manner, how:
St. Luke xxii, 2. tu Is â– yei'oi/s bo^ay, with regard to celebrity of
birth: Pans, in Arc. — ro airo tovtdv, to utto rovbe, to yittra
Touro, TO lie Tovbe, from this time forward, henceforth. — ro utto
tovtov, and to e-n-i toutois, after this, after these things: Lucian,
Conv. t. iii, p. 427, 433, 447- to e^ "pX*/^' ^^ 7"'*'; ^^ i^^^ outset :
* " Xeque ilia rh vvv iivai, rb Tt^fxfpov yap furpius t6 ye r-fifxfpov elvai. In
(hai, idem 8ij;;nificant quod rDv ct T-rj/xe- Soph. CEd. C. 1189. (ff 7' ehat &v.}
puv, sed, Ht ill nunc, nl id Itodie sit : i. e. seiisus est, nt fu sis is, ijui ilium malis
quuiiliiiii Itiiilic siilis is( : (juod nos dici- rii/unii'retw. Noi^, ilii fiir dciiii' person."
m,us, Jiir jetzt : fur heulc. Kixop^^^ai llenuann IJc £11. et Fleoii. — J.S.
Chap. ii. Rule l.] "Oj. 13
Paus. Achaic. 401. to e^ v/joiy, as far as you can : Rom. xii, 18.
TO in kkeivM, as far as he is concerved: Isocr. Paneg. 70 kcit
e/iiav-uy, OS far as I am able, or iji me lies, to the best of tin/ ability :
LuL-ian, Dem. Enc. p. ()0S. 922. see Rom. i, 15. .Elian, \ . H. i, 32.
TO KaO' eavTuv, i?idivi dually, ivith respect to his oivn private con-
cerns: Tl)uc. i, 60. Tu Kuff ii^tepcii', daily: Plat. Pliivdr. p. 2-10.
1. 10. TO KuTu aafiKu, according to the flesh: Act. Ap. ii, 30. to
irpbs T))v ew, towards the east : Herod. Melp. c. ly. to irpo tovtov,
formerly, before: Time, ii, 15. tu irpos Trarpos 'AOrjya'tos, on his
father's side; to e-K ittuv, for the most part, ahvays, u?iiversally :
lieroflot. Pol. c. 157.
Tw, i?i that case, then: Horn. II. b, 290. — wherefore, for that
reason, on that account: Horn. II. fi, 250,254-. aiul so all (he
poets. See Miisfjr. ad Eiirip. Ilel. lisy. \'akken. ad Fraptn.
Calliin. p. 82. — In tliis sense Horace uses Hoc, Sat. i, 0", 41. In
llie same signification to, Hoin. II. iii, J76. and and w. Eurip.
Hec. 13. Valcken. ad Phoen. p. 52.
CHAPTER II.
THE RELATIVE "Oi.»
Rule I. "Os fier, osbe, for o fiev, obe: or fxev ebeipar, or be ane-
KTCijav, ov be eXidoftoXTftrav : one — another — another: St. Mattli. xxi,
35. Hei'odian iii, 8. Rom. ix, 21. — So kcu as, and he, i. e. then he
answered or said thus ; and >]IS' 0$, said he, (for e^fj auros,) bomelimes
preceded by the name of the person meant: kui 6'Abei fxavTos, ' Apa
ye, 7ib' OS, &C. Plat, de Rep. i. ; sometimes followed by it : ti be ; ?^6'
OS, 6 (dpaav/juj^os, ibid. b. v, p. 450. 1. 13. so b. i, inil. Luciau
t. iii, pp. 440 et 443. — 'Af' ov for ano tov : tw jjev opOws aei XP*^'
fjet'os, itif oi) be To'is beo/.tevois enapKibv '. and with the other, or out
of the other (wealth): Plut. Public, [p. 177. ed. H. St.] 'O
f-iev — OS be, one — another: Theogn. 205. So Oppian, Hid. i, 585.
in the plural ; and Aj>pian, Pun. p. 59- ^lian, V. H. vi, 1. —
"Os /j.ei — 6 be, one, — another: Rom. xiv, 2. — ("Os in these phrases
is not what is sometimes called the relati\e, or subjunctive, arlicle ;
but a demonstrative pronoun. Anciently this pronoun had two forms,
o, TOV, and OS, ov : both forms were used indifferently for the relative
article, as aj)pearsfrom Homer; and althouj^h later usai;e appropriated
OS, ov, to the relative article, yet in some forms the ancient signitica-
tion has obtained.) To the examples may be added : Mosch. Ep.
Bion. 77, 78. Rhinto ap. Cic. ad Att. i, 20. Demosth. pro Cor. 248.
277> 20. 282. 289- In the second division of a sentence there
must be sometimes understood a case of os different from the case
" Called by some the Subjuuclive Arlitle.
14 THE RELATIVE "Os. [Chap. ii.
expressed in the first division : livwxdi bi /aiv yapiieadai Tw, oVf^' re
7rar»)p (ceXerat, Kn\ iirbiivei avrij, Odyss. ii, 114. i. e. Kal Sans a»'5a-
rei avTTJ. — So Odyss. v, 34. xx, 341. Rliiiiniis i, 9.
'Os often, (as the Lntin Qui,) agrees with a following noun instead
of its antecedent: niv aKpr)v at KaKeivrai KXTjtSes riis K.VTrpov,
Herodot. v, 108. VlepaiKov l,i<pos, tov iiKin'iKJjv KaXeuvat, Herodot.
vii, 54. — so Rurip. Med. 14. Androm. 86'4. Ilel. 289, See Fisch,
ad Well. p. 341. — and sometimes witii a noun understooil, of a gen-
der different from that of its antecedent: vefeXtj be /jiv a^ipifleftriKe
Kfurefy 70 fiei' ovttot epwel. — i. e. vetpoi, Horn. Od. xii, JAs. See
Greg. Cor. p. 3S. and Keen. Sleph. Dial. Att. p. 131, 134.
Sometimes other redundant pronouns are added to os : Jv u /iky
avToJy, Callim. Epigr. 44. wy o /.tey vfiwt', Meuand. Ej)igr. vis
'OXv/jiTioi Oeol ^o'lky -kut avTols, Soph. Phil. 315.
II. "Ocrris is, 1. Quis, Quisiiain, who," without interrogation, and
so >)r(5, o,Tt, (to distinguish it from (in, that, conjuuctior)) through
all the eases. In tliis sense il very fre<piently occurs in the repe-
tition of the substance of a question by a person to whom that (pies-
tion has been addressed; corresponding to r/s in the question: as.
Pistil. : irpus Twv dewr, av h' el ris a>'f,;(Dj'; Melon, oar is e'i/ii eyw ;
Merwr: Aristoph. Av. [997.] See Aristoph. Av. 961. and 152S. in
which last verse the neuter o,n is so used. — 2. Quisquis, who-
soever f In this St use it sometimes follows was in the singular, (but in
the plural Trtijres oaoi, not Tr/u'res olnies,) or has various particles
annexed to it, as ianaovv, o,tI irep, u,n b)), v,Ti irore, o,Ti bi) Trove,
or onbi'inore, onbrjTCOToiiy. oaris nork, JE\. V. II. ii, 13. o,n irore,
Aristoph. Pac. 180. uans bi'iirore, Demosth. in Cliers. init.
OUT ictovv, Phito Euthyphr. c. 6. and ^scli. Dial, ii, 13. Trai' o,rt
Trep, Plato Euthyphr. c. 6. oaris bi), Hom. Od. 0, 400. vvs be n-
vus, some, preceded by nuXXovs fxey, Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii. c. 23. —
Oi;6els (Jansov, nemo non, every one : KurayeX^ ar ///^wj- uvbtls oans
oil : there is no one who would not laugh at us: Plato, Hipp. M. p.
299- see Herodot. iii, 72. v, Q7 . Eurij). Hel. 932. ovbeh ts "^'X'f
Soph. CEd. R. 372. The entire phrase was originally ovbeis eejnVy
vans oh; but afterwards the negative pronoun was put in the case,
whatever it might be, which the construction retjuired in the relative
pronoun: as ovbeya vynva ov KareicXuae rdiv Trnpovrwr, Plat. PIuxhI.
[p. 47. 1. 18. ed. Ras. prim.] Add Lucian, Dcor. Dial, ii, 1. [p.
122. B. cd. Salnuir.] 'Oj. enters into a phrase employtd by persons
unwilling or unable to speak plainly : i)v KvpvaOevs pey, os r/i't such
as he was: Epict. ap. Arr. iii, 26. TrpoelXero fief bibuai^nXov e^
anuPTwy, vvriya bi] Kal irpoeiXeTo: u'hoevcr he tvas : Aristid.
Orat. Fiu). in Eteon. p. 136. ebpaaev o,ti bi) kq) ebpaaey, no mat-
ter U'haf : Ileliod. (Eth. 1. 5. See iEsch. Choeph. 778. So «Vws :
eTrXeva', okws ewXevau, 0eo/ia)e7 iruTfiM, Eurip. Or. 79' P<"'s.
[according to the ingenious punctuation of Ilermann.]
III. (IV.)"Ort$ is used by the poets, where the metre will not admit
" OvK ol5' ({(TTis, / know not iclw : i' Soph. Antig. 178. 182. — J. S.
Hoin.Oil. 0. iJb.— .I.S.
Rule 2—11.] TIIR RELATIVE "O.. 15
of^ffrts: as liy Hum. II. r, 260. Od. ^/, 39. In other places lliey use
iiaTis : see Odyss. 0, 210. 0, 400. Calliin. in Ap. 23. QJ. onta
tor (iyrtyu, Odvss. d, 204. vrivas for oi;<7r<»'as, II. o, 492. ori»'a for
/triia, II. y^, 450.
IV. (V.) "OffTis, [offTis ^>/, and os »S/,] Qui quidem, [Roiii. xvi, 4, (),
7, 12.] in every gender, case, and number: in poetry lis re, [see
Heruianii in I'.rf.'s ed. niin. Soph. CEd. II. O'SS.] for us ptv could not
be used (or Qui quideui.
\ ."Otjris, some, some or other: Kaff i'jvTiva Trpufaaiv, upon some
pretext, w/iatevcr it wns : Anton. Lib. v, and xli.
VI. i'lie Attic writers are foud of using otov for au or ovthos, and
ti'rw tor w or wripi, (but not o-oi' for oy, or orroa,) as arO' otov, ivhere-
fore: ktf oru bupoboKiicrere, an occasion for taking bribes : Demosth.
pro Cor. [p. 242, I. 6. ed. Reisk.]
VII. "Os has been improperly used for the interrogative ris ; ^p bk
eyeKa ravra npotD'iPeyKa tu Xoyw ; CEnoinaus ap. Euseb. Praep. vi. p.
257- ivherefore, on what accontit ? eralpe, ecp' f napei; Matth. xxvi,
50. So 1' rpoTTov, for rha t pair op ;
V'lII. The dative feminine ?/ is, in the part in which, in the degree
in ivhich, in the way in which, as to, so far forth as, &c, as ri fxev
XoyiKos €(TTiv, €(plerai tTjs apeTTjs, jJ ^e (TapiaKos, ej^ercu Tuir yrjitav. It
has sometimes the adjunct nep, luid corresponds to Tavrrj : biaipedrivai
ravTy jyTrep uvveTeQi), Plato Phifid.
IX. K«9' o, or KaOo, tcnB' o,ti, or KaQon'. lohere, in the part where,
in as far as, hoiv, as ; cfi9' a, or KaOa, as, ivhere ; Trap' a, or Ttaph,
wherefore, beyond or contrary to, as â– nap' o he'i.
X. WvQ' OTOV, on account of ivhich, wherefore , on tvhat account :
Eurip. Ale. 247. Iph. T. 926\ Hec. 1 1 13. Pors. 1 1 18. Pors, 'A»0'
tSp, (without an ellipsis,) wherefore, therefore: Lycurg. adv. Leocr.
c. IS. St. Luke xii, 3. — (elliplically, see Theocr. Epigr. xvii.)—
because; bkas eKricras, u.v(f wv airebpaaev, TElian, V. H. xiii, 28.
See Judith vii, 15. Act. Ap. xii, 23. St. Luke i, 20. xix, 44.
2 Thess. ii, 10. Ezech. v, 11. ap. Sept. — So li, Jt,* wherefore, on
which account. '£(;>' tils, e^' J, t^' Jre, on what terms, on condition,
Jor the purpose of: "laam yhp e^' ois avrovs Hvaluprjs aye-at, on
what terms or conditions : Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 11. ovhtnoTe /jei^oiwy
u)p€\dt](Taj-, J) k<f oiairep — t)iv (iatnXeinv napeXapop : than what the
conditions on which they received the croivn allowed: Xen. Ages, i, 4.
'E0', J, on condition that, with a future, Thuc. i, i 13. : with an
infinitive, Xen. Ages, iv, 1. H. Gr. vi, 3, 7 . ii, 2, 12. Anab. iv, 2, 12.
[t^' J, with a past tense, signifies buWi, because: Thorn. INI.] — k(f u> re,
with an infinitive, on condition that: Aristoph. Plut. 1001. Xen.
Hist. Gr. ii, 4, 28. iii, 1, 17- for the purpose of, Xen. Anab. vi,
(S, 13. H. Gr. ii, 3, 8. — Often t0' oh is for e;rt rois k<f o\s, and kf" J
for eTtl rw €(f w : as f.t(tpTvpe'i, €(p o'ls ovi: lirevQwoi ?';»', i(TTe<pnpuiodai :
that I was crowned for my conduct in affairs of ivhich I was not
liable to render account : Demosth. pro Cor.
XL Tiie dative feminine ^, answering to Qua in Latin, signifies,
'■' 'E I tS y St; Koi fai'cei rhv ^uKpaTrju h K/)iTias, Xen. Mem, i, 2, 31. — J. S.
16 THE RELATIVE "Os. [Chap. ii.
1. where ; »] tu riov Beijy ye'ros ohe'i, Plato Pliaidr. p. 246. So ^wep,
Time, iv, 53. — 2. bi/ which way, the way that: ra — frro/jaTa, ^
TO Tirepuv upfiif., Pliito Pliitilr. p. 251. TuOry rpirruiTui y ?/ <pi\oao<pia
v(pi]ye'iTat, I'lato Pliivdr. 32. â €” 3. in the manner or way that, as:
y aoi boi:el, bie^iwu, Plato (le Rep. ii. Xeii. Cyrop. iv, 24. — 4. in
what respect, why: fjavOaieis on e-epn aWi'iXuiv ear), Kai ^ erepa,
Plato Eutiiyplir. c. 12. in respect of being, as, so far forth as,
Qiiateiius : )^p;;rat v7rob)j/uct-i y VTrobrjfia, Aristot. (le Rep. i, C. 9. — 5.
with a cotDparative, by how much, ravry nXelb) SrjTe'ii' icjjobia, ^
kXaaawv obos KnTuXeineTat, Gaza (le Sen. — 6. with superlatives :
as y Tu-)(ji(jTn, as quickly as possible : Xcn. Cyrop. vii, 5, 82. — and in
the same sense with a substai)tive : y Ta\os, with all speed : Pliit.
ill Cie. p. 870. 1. 33. — In most of these instances /.lepibi or obS is
uikUtsIooiI.
XII. 'Os is frequently put in the case of its antecedent instead of
the case which its governing verb would regularly require : as, 'iirant
be ovbev wy Xeyovai, but they know nothing of what they say:
Plato A p. Socr. p. 22.
Xlil. The sense, or emphasis, requiring such a construction, os
is phiceil before its antecedent, as Qua is in Latin: oitep I/ttI
fuaXiud^ virep vp.u)V, — tovto TrapuaTi'](7ai roi/s Qeovs v/jIv : that WHAT
is most for your interest, THAT the gods may suggest to you to do:
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 226. 1. 2. Reisk.] See Mark vi, l6. Matlh.
xxvi, 48.' — (A noun, which ought regularly to have been in another
division of ihe sentence, is, with Attic elegance, joined to the pronoun
relative : as lirco eboKei raCra OeiH I'lfxeXet' for Qeos i^fieXei, Xen.
Eph. p. l6l. l)ul this phrase is not peculiar to Attic writers. See
Valck. ad Hcrodot. p. 574. Leniiep. ad Plial. p. 27. 29. Coray ad
Theophr. 2()S. Fisch. ad Well, iii, p. 340. scq.)
XIV. "O, whereas,'' or in which matter: ht(t(pep6vT(,)s yap robe
e-^Ojj.ey, Con-e. ToXfiaiy re 0( avrol j.uiXiaT(i, ku\ irepl wu eTri-^eipi'iffo^ev
€kXoyic!€aO(ti. '() ro'is aXXois ajjaOia /Jty Qpuaos, Xoyccruos be okvov
(pipfi : ivhereas in others, it is ignorance that inspires courage, and
deliberuiion makes them irresolute: Thuc. ii, 40. [The following
senses of o used as a particle, are to be noted : — 1. as to tvhat : o be
Xeyeis, /3/^ nufjeXdoyrns OKrjravy, ///ueis, &c. Xen. Anab. V, 5, 20. — 2.
on which account, wherefore: o bt) fiaXioTa boi^iT) cdjuy e$r)\wK€yai
'iTnroKfiTaiipi'Vs, Xen. Cyrop, iv, 3, 17- — 3. that, on: AevaaeTe yap
T('>y€ Trams, (i /.toi yepai otj^erat ciXXi], Horn. II. a, 120.]
XV. 'I'he neuter plural a with the particle re siijnities as, as
being, since, &C. to nvro t:iyovy, (ire ovk inroXenroy kavro, ovtot€
Xi'iyei Kiyoui.teyoy : as not deserting, since it docs not desert, itself:
Plato Pliaedr. p. 24.5. are tou 'AiroXXujyoi oi-res, as being Apollo's,
since they are Apollo's: Plato Pha'dr. c. 35. cf. Plat. ibid. c. ^7, 28.
275. /Esch. Dial. iii. extr. tovs TroirjTixs — oh napdbeioijeOa, — tire
Tvpayylbus vfiyrjras: since {or because) they are celcbrators of
despotism: Plato Rep. viii, p. 56S. — With an absolute case: are
' Tliuc. seems to have referred t to in its progress, from wliat lie at first in-
roXnav and iKXoyi^eaOat, but to tiavc tended it to be. Sec'l'liuc. iii, 12. p. 394.
cliangcd Ibc construction of tlie sentence, I. 11. ed. Bckk. — J.S.
Rule 12— is.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 17
tFis idkf yi'is €\ov(Tr]s ra /le^a ruv icotr^nv, since the earth occupies the
centre of the universe: ^Tlsch. Dial, iii, I9. — In Pind. I'jlli. iv, it
signifies, in the manner in which, Kudanfp : ur — evepyerai At'nrv
en-ayyeWoi rt. (3 pers. plur.) "Are bij and oia bi) liave tlie same sense
as are.
XVI. The neuter in the dative is put with a verb for the lalter's
derivative or kindred substantive: as, ols yap evTv^ijKciaav kv
AevkTpois, oil fieTp'nt)s €K€-)^i)r)i'TO, Demosth. pro Cor. for t<hs evrvx'/-
fjcicn: their success, their victory at Leuctra. So ey ols ii jJLupTuvov
o't aXKoc for rols tUv aXXwy h]j.apTi]^aai : the errors of others : De-
nioslli. ih. [p. 231. I. 13. ed. Reisk.]
XVII. *Os sometimes follows an antecedent, with whicli it cannot
grammatically agree : as, ev noXvTpoTrois yap £«^0opa7s inirrTuvTui (the
parents of those who had fallen in battle) rpatpii'res, to 6' evrvxcs,
ot ay TijS euirpeTreaTarrjs Xc'ty^uiTLV, wcnrep o'lbe fxkv vvr, reXevrT/s, vfie'is be
\virrjs, Kai ois ei'eiibai/iiorfi'jni re o (jios 6/jotu)S Kal €»'reXfwr);<Ta£ ^vye-
fierp^iOri : Thuc. ii, 44. le honheur certes est pour ceux, qui, &c. Gail.
That excellent critic Hermann reads t) ols krevbaifiovi'iaai, &c. under-
standing /udXXor, and translating thus : Sciuiit enirii, variis se casibus
in vita usos, potiusque fortunatos esse, quibus vel exitus honestis-
sinius, uti his nunc, vel luctus, ut vobis, contigerit, quam quibus sic
est traducta vita, ut in ea et essent felices, et decederent. — [So the
construction would be, to b' evrvy^ks eKeivois elvai fidXXov, ot, &c.]
XVIII. "Arra is put for ariva, what. When this substitution is
more evident, it has the aspirate; when less so, the soft breathing,
cirra, which last, like tis, is added to other words, and seems to render
their meaning- less determinate, being olten little more than an
expletive. The following are examples: — I. ^rra, in direct interro-
gation : TTws Kal cirrci wore bi€\e-)^di] ; how and what? Demostli.de
Fals. Leg. p. 241. see flom. II. k, 409' ^ in indirect interrogation : et
Tts — eptDTutf] tifias, avra arra errri, Plato ii. (le Rep. see Horn. II. *;,
208. : without any interrogation ; eTriarelXas arra efSovXeTO, Plato
Phasd. c. 65. see Plat. Symp. 4. Soph. 41. extr. Crit. 12. Horn. II.
a, 554. According to Eustath. the word is compounded of a and
the Doric or Megaric oa, which signifies riva. — 2. uttu : etTre /uoi
OTTTOt' urrca -rrepi X')oi el/jard t'crro, Hoin. Od. r, 218. i. C OTrv'ia
lari, arraa earo. See iEscli. Dial, ii, ip. Plato Pha^d. 31. Fiscli.
ad Plat. Soph. 45. Polit. 36. — -"Arra may be rendered some, some
such, nearly, or the like, somewhat, &c. : f/ ravr karh', y roiavra
arra, Plato Phaed. 63. dXXo arra, Plato Phiud. IQ, 52, 57- "rra
aXXa, Plat. Apol. 18. iroXXa arm, Plat. Phaetl. 44, 65. erepa arra,
^sch. Dial, ii, 36. oXlya arra, Aristoph. Vesp. 55. a/JiKpa arra,
Plat. Polit. 3. arra roia^e. Plat. Phajd. 4. 6eti a arra, ib. 64.
olKrpa arra, (i. e. ohrpa ariyd kanv) XoyoTroiovvres, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 6.
rerrap' a-ra pevfiura. Plat. Phajd. 6l. — It is sometimes put absolutely:
eXeyev arra itpoatc^Kvcpios, Plat, de Rep. 5. something. — To be ex-
plained, eXeye*' artva eXeyev. — noXefie'i be a\Xr/\ois kviore avruiy arra
Trjj : some, Plato Soph. 30. — With a substantive: avbpc'mota arra,
Plato Phaidr, p. 259. -y^puniara arra, id. Rep. x, p. 601. epy'
tirra, Lucian, Nigr. — When the phrases in which urra was used
Viger. C
18 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. in. §i.
became so trite, tliat its original and proper signification was not
atteiuled to, it was juiiied wiili some words very improper!)', as with
TTTjiiicn: TTfji'/fc-a cirro, Aristoph. Av. 1513. for nrji'lKa ore.
XIX. i,XX.) "Arra is also a term of respect and kindness, nscd by
youii<:<'r persons in afldressing their elders : <I>o(((£, arra, yepate,
Achilles to I'luenix, Iloni. II. t, 603. see II. p, 56l. Od. tt, 31. 57-
P, 6- 599. 0, 369. Callim. Ep. i, 3. — So rerra was used by
yonni^er to older friends.
XX. When the antecedent goes before an infinitive mood, the verb
of tiie relative is also put in the infinitive : as eiprj, eliai naXXovs
ciWovs ru)V 'E\X//rw«^, ov s fiovXecrdni, &C. for 0? kfiovXoyro: he said,
there were many others of the Greeks, who icere ivilUng, &c.
^schin. c. Ctes. p. 288. See Plato Phx^dr. p. 272. I. 41. ^lian,
V. H. xii. c. 35. So the Latin writers. Corn. Nep. in Tiieniist. c. ?•
Curt. vii. c. 4. § 6. vi, 8, 10. viii, 1, 25. Suet. Cais. 47-
CHAPTER III.
SECTION I.— THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE.
Rule I. Some remarkable changes of the cases and numbers of
substantives, occurring chiefly iu Attic writers, especially Plato, are to
be observed : b be 'Acrtrupios, b BaftuSwra re 'iy^ojv koi t))v iiWrji' 'Affiru-
play, eyw fiki' olfictt l-rrias /xtf a^eiv, Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39- 0'?^' —
Karareiiaai v7rep/.t€V€a Kpnviu)i>a — WarTpa-rrr w t> €7nbf^t\eyalai/.ia(T)i-
fAura (paivwv, Hom. II. /3, 350, 353. See ^Elian, V. H. ii. c. II.
iiiit. Ep. ad Rom. ii, 8. So Ter. Hec. iii, 1, 6. See Linacer de
Em. Struct. Lat. Serm. Sanct. Min. iv, 11. and Perizon. Gra.>v. ad
Cic. Verr. iii, 7I. Ern. Diatr. d© grata negligentia orationis. Brunck.
ad Soph. El. 480.
Duals with plurals: bvolr — /.lepuji' ovtu)v, Aristid. pro Qua-
tuorv. p. 481. hvolv }ifxepii)i', Theophr. Ch. Aduiat. : bvw be ol
v'lecs i'i<TTT]v, Hom. II. e, 10. Heliod. .lith. x, G. toi b' auroi
fiaprvpoi earwv, Hom. II. a, 338. ^lian, V. H. i, 15. in fine, rw —
7i\0ov, Hom. II. €, 275. — All eiiallage from singular to plural is in
Hom. II. a, 549, 550. and Acts xv, 46. See Xen. Mem. i, 2, 62.
i, 2, 42. See Sil. It. xi, 25. — In 1'cr. Eun. i, 2, 88. his necessarily
follows Eunvchum, because the class or kind in general was to be
signified. See Virg. /En. viii, 427. — T'<? plural is used for the
siuiiular to amplify or exaggerate : ifitattpovet ev to'h avfinoaiois
Tovs (piXovs (for Clitus alone), Lncian, Dial. Mort. [p. 248. D. ed.
Salinur.] See Virg. Eel. iii, lO". Ter. Andr. v, 4, 7. Virg. I^n. x, 7^.
81. vii, 359. xii, T^Q. 947. vii, 98. viii, 379. vi, 616. Hor. Od. ii, 13,
3. iii, 3, 71. iv, 12, 8. Sen. in Tr. 328, 568. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 99-
— By this kind of enallage the pissage in 1 Cor. xv, 29. niay perhaps
be explained, if we lake rwi/ reKpwv to signify Chiist. See Rqni.
vi, 3. Rev. i, 5. 1 Cor. xv, 14. A plural verb is sometimes
Joined even with a neuter ])lural noun : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 27- Mem.
ii, 4, 7. Xen. de Mag. Eq. viii, 6". See Eisch. ad Well. p. 306\
JluLE 1—5.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE, 19
Pors. Add. ad Eur. Flee. 1149. Ast. ad Plat. Polif. p. 386. ad Logp.
p. 46.— Change of gender: TfjeirorTcu cttI r?yi' MrtKeboyiar, €<]>
utrep K<n vrporepoy t'^t-fyUTrocro, Time, i, 59- unless epyoy, or some
sucIj word, be understood. In Tliuc. ii, 47.- — »/ ruaos — iju^ciTo, —
Xeyofievoi — €yK(iraarKfi\pni, Xeyoj^etur is a nominative absolute, and
avri^v is to be understood. See Clark, ad Odyss. xii, 75. — to bva-
rrjvoy e/rclvo boic'ipiov Tvpoerii^tijy tov ftiov vvi' ce aviurjiui i'loij, ws
CKeirr] filv ayoxpeXtjs, Luciai), Dial. Antil. et Acliill. [p. 2t)0. U. ed.
Salmur.] Here eKeivq may af;ree with ho^ct understood. See Ern. ad
Xen. Mem, i, 3, 3. — There is no proper cnallage in the passage of
Paus., I. El. post. p. 332. !. 35. but rather an addition purposely
made to slate with greater exactness, what had before been stated
with less : nor in Luke i, 55. because \a\e~iv wpos ma, and Xa\e'iy
TiA, are both forms in common u.*e, and equivalent. — Tiicre are some
instances of enallage in wiiich neilher the sense nor tl;e construction
is completed, as the beginning of tlie sentence might lead one to ex-
pect ; as in the following aiincoluthon : ^^nbvpibrfs o M.vfj(tplrT]s es
ToaovTor Tpv(p7js titu/.€(Xe : Smindyriiles the Sybarite ran into such an
excess of luxury, — (here, after tugovtov, we naturally expect w$, dJore,
oaov, that, as, or the like ; but the sentence proceeds — ) Knl yap -ols
^vftapirais â– na.Tiv epyoy ^y Tpvf^i' kuI 7w /3/w biappeli'. 'O ^e liindvpibrjs
KOI TrXeoy : for it was the main business of all the Sybarites to dis-
solve in pleasure and effeminacy, but Smindyrides still more : JE\.
V. H. ix, 24. — [The difference of cases in Deu)Osth. pro Cor. p. 26S,
1. 9, 11. Reiske's ed., is regular and usual. See .^schin. c. Ctes. p.
578, I. 12. Reisk.]
il. A substantive concludes a member or period elegantly, when
separated from its preceding adjective by a verb: as, ^era ttcio-ijs
e)(^e(jOai r>7s <j)iXo7roiias : and in other constructions : see Arr. de Exp.
Al. i. c. 18. in fine,
HI. Some substantives, especially ibcs, way, ypafA/ji), line, fiep'is or
fjepos, part or portion, -dre elegantly understood, — 'Obus is defective
in evdeias enTpairrjvai, tO turn out of the straight road ; kvuvTiav
iivai or xnr" eravrias <pipeaBai, to go, or be carried, the contrary
way ; ayeaQm ti)v twl dayaro), to be led to execution.
IV. On forensic subjects biicr) is often defective : as, bi" evdeias or
kqt' evde'iay arrayioviceaditi, to meet the proceedings of a plaintiff
or prosecutor in a fair and direct manner, and not to have recourse
to exceptions or other evasions, [see Suid. in t0e7«,] equivalent to
€vdvbiKiq. y^pfiaQni or evOvbiKe'iy. So Kpiveadai T))y enl dayuT<D, to be
tried on a capital charge.
V. 'Ufiepa is understood in rj) tt porepai^, (he day before; rj;
{/(TTepaig, the day after, the next day. See Flut. Thes. [p. 5, 1. 20.
ed. II. St.]
The following exami)les of ellipsis of nouns may be added : —
to Tov loXuiros, {an('i(j,Oeyfift, apophthegm): irpos opOt/y (ytoviav,
atigle) ; wpos opdas ijx'^u}, let it be drawn at right angles: Eiicl.
Opt. Tlieor. 24. r>/v e/jifv avriiKas, {yyw/itrjr, sentitnents.) but
ToaovTov, (biaaTi'i /J UTOS, interval.) els ^bov, (bofjor or oiicor,
abode or habitation.) So ey tov ay edyres l^uvXeviovrai, {oikf;)
20 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. tCHAP. iii. § i.
/iOMSf,) Hcrodot. i. 133. tov nepi rfjs }pv)(fjs rpi'^ttiv, {Kivbvvov,
risk,) Aristid. pro Qualuorv. p. 430. Fully expressed, rov Trepl ^^u^^s
rpexom Kivhvvov, Dion. Hal, in Isocr. p. 98. and Ant. Rom. iv.
p. 209. I. 28. See Eurip. Plioen, 730. and Aristopli. Vesp. 375.
kv Xeucots i.K(pepe(Tdni, {'i fiar Lots, garments,) Artemid. Oneir. ii, 3.
So St. John XX, 12. O Y\\6.tu>v 7iv riLy aotpuiv, {els or tis, one.)
€v rals L^iovvanVy {kopraal^ots if fxepats, festival days.) rijy
apertjy eic veas aaKei, (tjKtKlas, age, years,) Synes. irpb rijs ev
AevKTpois, (fiaxV^t battle.) to ttoXv rjjs pqTopiKiji, (f^epos, part,)
Plato. So Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 7. fully expressed in c. 24. — rfjs
ypv^^ris T V T , {/jiepos) et' w ot kniQvixiai e(<7/)', Plato Gorg. p. 493.
01 iv reXet, {piT€s, being ; those in office.) ottios tuvtu firjbtis TreiKrerat,
(ojoa, take fffrf/) Lysias pro Erat. to. tov 'Hpobdrov, {uvyyphp.-
fjiarci, writings.) ypaiJ.finTiK)]v efjade, (rfj^vyji', art.) a^i'av
urrnTireiv, {t I i-iij pin V, penalty, punishment.') uno ttjs ai/rj/s airelff-
Oat, (^rpnir €$}]$, table.) ye V iicrj (rvfTuacreTat, Kal alriuTii^TJ, (tttw-
aei, case,) Sell. Aristopli. Pint. 93. n'l ttoXiui, (rpiy^es, hairs,)
Epi<;r. Gr. i, 13. -nuTijpiov \pv)(^pov, {vbaros, ivater,) Matlli. x, 42.
u>s ftadvv €KoifA)iOqs\ {vn v ov, sleep,) Lucian, Dial. Cycl. et Nept.
bia KevTfS uveTrXaxToiiev y/j~iv (pofiovs, {vTVOvoias <ir vt: o\y]ipe<i)s,
suspicion,) Dion. Hal. vi. rsj krepcf, (^(^eipi, hand.) e^' oaov,
(xpo^o*', time.) — 'Hfxepa, day, is not properly a substantive, says
Eustalli., but an adjective, signifyiiif^ »?//(/, ;;/ffr/V/, and with it there
is understood (paaii or KaTaamais rov aepos, illumination or state of
the atmosphere: eiretbi) ?iy Trpos I'l/jepay, u'hen it tvas growing
light ; Trpos eirnepav, on the approach of evening.
VI. Tt)v iiTTnr — an evOelas ovk etppurrev. directly, plainly,
bluntly: Plul. Fab. Max. It seems doubtful what substantive is
understood, bhov, (jxijviis, X^^eojs, biriytifrews, ^pv^iis, yvuiprjs, biavoias,
or the like. — [I'or fuller information on the subject of Ellipsis, the
reader is referred to tlie Abridgm. of Bos.]
VH. Upiji'iyopoy cij^ov oi/berepcf XrjTrroy : (understand j^eif)»,
hand; or pepibi, part or side;) they had an advocate safe and
guarded at all poi?its, or, an advocate not to be uwrsled or mastered by
any method: Themist. Or. x. opposed to which is urOpwirovs Oarepg.
Xtjtttovs, Euseb. Deni. iv. c. 9-
VIII. The plural nouns ay mp iff j^ar a, adXa, av aOi) f^iara,
bwpu, tiv/iara, and the like, are to be understood respectively,
according to the meaning of the context, with certain neuter adjec-
tives preceded by the article, and followed such verbs as eopra^eti',
dveiv, TrairiyvptBeir, S^c. as, ret (jioTiipia T?nvr\yvpi$.€iv, to celebrate a fes-
tival for safety obtained ; tU •^npiGTijpLu, for thanksgiving ; to.
p€iXi\ia, and ra tXuoT>/pta, for conciliating and propitiating the
gods; ra biaflaT^ipia, for a prosperous passage; ra ImviKia, for
victory; ra eicriTiipia Oueiy, for the assembling of the senate ; ra
evayyeXia, for good news ; rci yeyiOXia, on account of a birth-day ;
' Here is a verb under the head Kllip- ' "EKuttov T?)y a^las, Xen. Mem. i, 6,
sisof siibslantives. A pronoun and parti- 11. (ti/itjj, price.) — J. S.
ciple had been given before. — J. S.
Rule 6—9.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 21
TCI ya^i'iXin, on account of a wedding ; to. KaroiK^aia, for settling in
a habitation ; ra tTt'i/na, anniversary ; to. Kovpoawa, to celebrate the
offering of the hair first cut off.
IX. Tlie genitive case of substantives is put after verbs to signify
a part only of what is spoken of: ruiy rei^ewv rj; <pt\avQp(,)Trl(f
vTTo x^'ipa e-Koie'iTo, Xen. Or. de Ages, some of the fortresses or
towns, — (which resembles the French, il prcnoit des villes par sa
courtoisie ; des being a sign of the genitive:) KaTahiieir ovk cm
arpoyyv\u)y nXoiiov, il ne permettoit pas qiion enfoncast des
navires rondes: Xen. ib. See Demosth. Ol. ii. [p. 18. I. 14. cd.
Ileisk.] 01. i. [p. 16. 1. 5y, ed. Reisk.] Also when it does not
signify a part ; being governed by some preposition, either under-
stood, or compounded with the verb which the genitive follows:
as 7rau€<T0a< tt)s 6pyT]s, (underst. ano,) lo cease from anger; ano-
â– iTrjb^i' Tov upftttros, i. e. irijb^y anu rov iipfiaTos, to leap from the
chariot.
A substantive is often used by the poets instead of an adjective
expressive of some attribute of a person, and the proper name of the
person is changed into an adjective derived from if, and agreeing
with the substantive before mentioned : as, vlees v'i<M}t'oi re ftir)s
'11 p a KXtjeirjs, the sons and grandsons of the mighty Hercules:
Hom, in Bceot. v. I73. for 'HpaKXoSs fliaiov." See Hor. 0<l. i, 3, 36.
Sometimes the proper name is put in the genitive case instead of
being converted into an adjective: lile-e tk Opta/uoto ftirjv, but
bring the mighty Priam: Horn. II. y, 105. So Upov fieyns 'AXki-
vuoio, Hom. Od. d, 2. lepi) 7s TrjXe fxu'^o to, Od. tt, 476. Qpaav
adevos EupvTTvXoto, Q. Cal. viii, 1/1. — The same form is used
with a?i appellative noun in Hesiod : ev fxeaai^ be bpuKoPTos erjv
(p6l3os, a terrible dragon: Scut. H. 144. [See Fisch. ad Well,
iii. p. 269. p. 295. seq.] See Virg. S.n. xii, 199. Phccdr. F. i,
13. {Corvi stupor, for corvus sliipidus.) — Sometimes the proper
name is in apposition with the substantive of the attribute: as
Aais fi fieya KXeos, the much Celebrated Lais : Strattis ap. Athen.
xiii. p. 5^().
Substantives are used for adjectives :" as, w ^iXin-qs,* friend, for
w ^iXf, Plato Pheedr. p. 228. iras iariv avdpwTros avp^opi], every
mortal is calamity: Herod. Clio p. 32. avayKt) bvolv Oarepny, the
one or the other is necessary. So, scelus for scelestus. See Pliaedr.
i, 3, 16. i, 4, 5. i, 5, 11. See Ern. ad Callim. t. i. p. 138. Brunck.
ad Soph. CEd. R. 85. Abresch. ad iEsch. ii. p. 71. Fisch. ad Well,
p. 297.
Proper names of towns and other places, when compounded of
two declinable words, are sometimes resolved : as, /ueyaXrj ttoXis
for lMeya\dn-o\«s. Their component parts are even transposed, and
" 'HpoKXTJs 6 KapTfphs, Aristoph. Itan. den,Traasl. of Ov, JMctain. b. xv. — J. S.
4G4. — J. S. * This is rather an cxain]ilc of tlie use
" This is common in English : '' Thus of an abstract term instead of a concrete,
in successive course the minutes run, And — J, S.
urge their ;)rc(/efcssor minutes on." Dry-
22 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap, hi,
are separated by other worfls : St/p/a ^ Ko/\?7, Ccclesyria : Arr. Exp.
Al. ii, 13. CTTJ TTjv niar}v biiftij Twv Trorafiwy, to Mesopotamia:
Zositn. i, 4.
A substantive is sometimes pot in the nominative case absohife,
when the rules of regular syntax require a different case: as, ftovXn-
fi€vos t^ KUTn(7K0Tr6v Tua Tre/j-ipai, -ebolev avTW effir»/6eos eo-ai v
'Apamras : ivisfiin"; to send some spy, — Araspas oppeared to him a
Jit person : Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1,31. daviov yavv, u)('e kuXXiov Oai'ely,
(so Aldus rightly,) Evirip. Or. [v. 77 1. Pors.*] — ;\nd sometimes
another word, equivalent in meaning to that in the nom. absolute,
is added in the case in which regular construction would have
required the nominative absolute to be : pouv he ^ure'xet tij apia-efj^, »/
be be^ta,6i)0o'i rris )^eipos eKeh'Tjsol baKTvXoi, I'hilostr. de vit. A poll.,
1. iv. c. 28. but the right, the fingers of that hand are extended.
So Rev. ii, 26\cf. Exod. xxxii. init. Act. Ap. vii, 40. Rev. iii, 21.'rob.
vi, 7, 8. Judith xi, 9. Sirach x, 22. xx, 30. xl, 29- xli, 14. — On this
idiom see Kv])k. ad Act. Ap. xx, 3. Valck. ad Eur. Plicen. p. 101.
seq. Brunck.'ad .'Esch. Pers. 120. ad S. c. Th. 6S3.
A genitive of an appellative is sometimes in apposition with a
substantive not expressed, nor directly understood, l)ut of which the
meaning is contained in a preceding adjective : V^vdvuXia, Aauebai'
poviov (JvTd, TToAews irepicparovs, Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 1.5. In a simi-
lar manner a pronoun or adjective has reference to a substantive, of
which the sense is involved in a preceding noun, verb, or adverb : so
avrniis, meaning biaXoyovs, is by iElian, V. H. xiv, 15. referred to
5 taXcyecrSai,'" which precedes; and aiiTovs meaning vavras to
vaiis preceding, by Ant. Lib. c. 37. See St. John vii, 44. Lucian,
Nigr. 'ABi'iyas—avrols, i. e. the Athenians, [p. 21. A. ed. Salmur.]
See Malih. iv, 23. — l mr o cp o p fi l u> — en) rovrwu, i. e. horses:
Herodot. iv, HO. tus 'AQi/rns, — 01, id. vii, 2. vees 'EXXrjyibes, —
ovroi, i. e. the Greeks: id. vii, 197. — So in Latin: Laconicam,
— corum: Corn. Nep. in Timoth. c. 2. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl.
305. VVessel. ad Diod. Sic. v, 54. xi, 20, 68. Pors. ad Hec. 22.
Fisch. Pra^f. ad Well. Gr. p. 9. seq. and in Anim. ad Well. iii. p.
268, 306'. seq. Valck. ad Plicen. p. 9. ad Hippol. vs. 526. Jungerm.
ad Lucian. t. i. p. 235. A. and Hemsterh. ad t. i. p. 400. Greg. Cor.
p. 37. seqq. et Kan. Brunck. ad yEsch. Pers. 13. ad Soph. OEd. R.
267. ad Eur. Plicen. 1767.
So, an adjective: eyiov avros btKuauf, Kai jj.' ovnra <pr)iJi "AXXoy
ennrXi'ileiv Aarawv, Idela yhp earai, Hom. 11. \p, 56l. [580.] i. e. biKt},
which is implicitly in bixuaio. — A substantive referred to an ad-
verb : TCI jiev eirra^a Trayra biepotpdro bui^ujy' T>)»' fiey 'iav
rvp<l>r](ji Kat 'Eppf) Maiubos vVi, O/Jtccv (Trev^c'ipfrns, rhs 6' nXXas velpey
eKt'tartp, Hom. Od. £, 434. "^TTrayn is equivalent to els kitrix fioipas,
into seven parts; to polpa therefore 7>)»' and rhs liXXas are to be
referred. In Hom. II. t, 383. c k ci (t r »j r, each, has reference to irvXt],
• HiTmann quotes V. 590. of Pors. ed., ifiSj, ^ Tvxftv tovtov, i. e. uxpiKtias,
but no such phrase occurs tliore. — J. S. 'I'huc. i, 74. — J. .S.
Chap, hi.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 23
g;ate, -appeiiiing in tlie preceding compound eKar ofiKi/Xoi, hundred-
gated.
'I'lie folliiwini? uses of the dalive case are to be remarked : — 1. for
a ijeiiitive, as rw ''\ihp(uiioti o rufos, Andrcemons sepulchre : Pans.
Acli. p. 401. So the Itomans; see Virg. .En. vi, o.g6". Ov. Met.
XV, 40. — 2. when it si<»niH(S a motive or cause: Mir/Tt/^oiAov be rrj
Tov l3iov <ju<ppo(Tvyi] nioauvTes : on account of his well-regulated arid
faultless life: Demosth. ep. iii. p. 115. — 3. in an adverbial sense,
some preposition bcinji; defective: brjfioaii}, publicli/ ; Ibta, privately ;
(TxoXrj, scarcely: [/Elian, V. H. ix. c. 24. Xcn. Mem. iii, 14, 3. and
Ernisli's note;] fftyj], silently, attentively : Pbit. PJieedr. 233. I. 29-
hpoj-tf, on a run : Arrian, Exp. Al. I, i. — XP''''^' c/lc^' « time : Lucian,
Tox. p. 6'21. [and with the article; see Fiscli. ad Well, iii, p. 222.]
inrepftuXf], excessively, extremely; vTrepftoXij kuXiiv, Piut. Apopli.
p. 183.' Add ii(rvx\u quietly, by gentle degrees: Herodian i, 4. toIs
oXois, upon the ivhole, altogether : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 318. I. 40.
So the Latins nse the ablatives, recta, forte, sponte, hodie, pridie,
postridie, hac, iliac, Sfc. See Virt,'. ^En. iv, 337- i, 381.— 4. a dative
following a substantive with an ellipsis of an appropriate adjective
[or participle]: enibpofiii rw re/^'O'i""'''' 'I ''"^•» ""^^'"^tand yevnfierr}.
See Duk. ad Thuc. v, 46'. Pcrizon. ad Sanct. Mill, iv, 4, p. 617.
The accusative. [See Chap. i. R. 11.] It is put after adjectives of
quantity or quality, Kara being understood : Toaavras tu TrXijdos
Tpu]peis, ical TT)XiKavras ro jdeyedos bvrafieis: so many tri-
remes, and so great forces : Isocr. Pancg. p. 133. So .Esch. c.
Cles. p. 285. 1. 22. A dative is sometimes thus used instead of an
accusative: fieyiaroi /^eyedei. Pans, in Arc. Less common is an
accusative quite unconnected, in construction, with the rest of a
sentence: tov be ttovov tov kotci tov noXefJov, — apKe'iTio fiev ii^lv
Koi eK€~iva, &c. as to the labour in the tear, &c. Thuc. ii, 62.
See Aristoph. Nub. 1113. Xeii. Anab. v, 5, 19. Act. Ap. x, 36.
Luc. xxi, 6. Ecclesiastic, xl, 2. See Kulin. ad .Elian. V. H. ii, 13.
Dorv. ad Cliarit. p. 642. Interpp. ad 1 Cor. x, 16. Abridgment
of Bos, p. 217. Kust. ad Arist('|di. PI. 55. An accusative is used
adverbially, to signify duration of lime: xP<>»'0»' — ecpeaTwres, having
stood awhile, aliquamdiu : Arrian, Exp. Al. i. p. 31. Archimedes says
fully, \p6vov TToiyaavTes: de Spiral. Dosilh. in princip.
The Greeks put the same cases after verbal nouns, as the verbs,
from which those nouns are derived, require: as ti e/ji) rw 0ew
vKjfpeaia, my subserviency to the god: Plato Apol. 17. because
{/7r»;/jere7v requires a dative. See ^lian, V. H. ii, 41. extr. 2 Cor.
ix, 12. and Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 345. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. i, 4.
p. 8. and ad Herodot. vii, I6. p. 517- Musgr. ad Eur. Suppl. 1157-
Id. and Heath, ad Here. F. 788. Brunck. ad Phoen. 85. ad Soph.
Antig. 787. Port. Lex. Ion. v. ov6fjiura. So Plant. Trin. ii, 1, 20.
See Heusing. ad Vechn. Ilcllenol. p. 264.
24 THE ADJECTIVE. [Chap. hi. ^ ii.
SECTION II.— THE ADJECTIVE.
Rule I. A neuter adjective is elegantly used for a substantive:
as, TO ao(pov Kn\ to Wttikov Tifs 'HWabos yXwffiTjjs, the depth and
elegance oj the Greek language ; ro beivuv rijs (ppuaews, the force
and energy of the diction ; t6 fiij fivdwbes avTwf, the reality of
them, {the events related) the absence of fable : Tliuc. i, 22. [Some-
times the adjective is masculine, o lecpos, 6 veicus, the corpse:
Pans, in Acli. p. 399. App. Alex. i. B, C. p. min. 693.] — An ad-
jective in the neuter plural, derived from a proper name, signifies,
with the article, what is most remarkahle with regar<l to the thing
signified by that proper name; as rii Tptoit^a, the Trojan war:
Thucyd. i, 3. tovs Tiepi tu TpwtKa yiyyniiei'ovs, those who lived in
the time of the Trojan war: Isocr. Faneg. [So an adjective derived
from an appellative : ra ijpw'iKu, Athen. p. I9. A. fiera to. rvpavviKu,
Aristot. Polit. v. 3.] But when such an adjective, whether derived
from a proper name, or an appellative, is in the singular, it sij;nifies
pluraliy, â– kXiiQos, yiros, or the like being defective: as to 'EWrjviicuy,
the Greeks; to ^WXvpiKOv, the lUyrians ; to re jiov\evor, koL to imri-
Kov, KOL rov ofiiXov, the senators, the equites, aiid the plebeians:
Dio. tu fiupftapor, the barbarians ; to v-n-i'iKoov, the subjects ; to arpa-
thotlkuv, the soldiers; to TreSuioVj the infantry ; to kohov, the com-
munity, the people, country, or nation. See Ovid, Met. xii, 7« Cic.
in Verr. [ii. 46, 63. i, 38.]
II. An adjective sometimes assumes the natural gender of its sub-
stantive, instead of the grammatical gender : as Kopiov KuWiaTtj, a
most beautiful girl ; jieipuKia evrvyels, fortunate youths : Synes. See
Horn. Od. o, 12j. (See examples of adjectives, participles, and
articles, so used, ap. Musgr. ad Eurip. Or. 270. Markl. ad Suppl.
45, 237, 272, 91 8, 1141. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. ii, 39. iii, 36. xi, 25.
Fisch. ad Well, i, p. 371. iii, p. 274, 3o6, 314, 317. seq. Keen, ad
Gr. Cor. p. 29-) — <»"d sometimes, without any consideration of natural
gender, or signification, an adjective, pronoun, or article, is put in a
gender didcrent from that of its substantive : as the Attics say tovtu
TU) iif-iepa, these two days: Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 11. tw ^^'ipe, the two
hands: Xen. Mem. ii, 3, IS. See Seal, ad Phryn. p. 84. Markl.
ad Suppl. v. 140. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed. C. 16OO. El. 977. ad
Ari>t<)ph. Lysistr. 323. Fiscli. ad Well, i, p. 315 seq. 365. 379.
ii, 160. iii, 308. It is common, especially in poetry, to join a mascu-
line participle in the dual number with a feminine substantive. See
Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 205. seq. ami Matth. Gr. Gr. § 436.
When masculine participles in the plural are })ut for feminine, (of
which Hermann ad Orph. H. 78, 4, has given examples,) it seems to
be either because some masculine substantive was in the thoughts of
the writer, or because the plural, having a wider and more indefinite
sense, has in general a designation of the preferable gender. Hence
this change of genders is very rare in the singular: see^Iom. II. ft,
Rule l -4.] ^ THE ADJECTIVR. 25
88. epxof^^fadiv ; for lliese genitives plural of participles are used, in
the masculine form, of the feniiuiue gender. When one woman is
spoken of in the masculine gender, the plural number is always used :
and vice versa, when the ]'liir;il is used of one woman, it is in tlie
masculine gender : see Dawes, Misc. Cr. p. 3 10. Brunck. ad Soph. El.
399. 977' Ant. fi'2(). 986". ad Eur. Med. 316". Tors, ad Hoc. 515. So
when a man and a woman are spoken of together, as abeXcpot, Zeun.
ad Xen, C'yrop. iii, 1, 7. But when any one person in general, man
or woman, is siguifiecl, the masculine singular is used, although a
woman may be meant on the particular occasion on which the
words are spoken : as in Eurip. (Ion 97-i-) Creiisa, speaking of her-
self, says, (cai ttws tU Kpeiaau), ditjrus ojy, vwephpn^Cj ; a}id hoiv can
f, a mortal, get the better of the gods? See Heaih. ad Eurip. Med.
805. Valck. Diatr. p. 175. Elmsl. ad Med. p. 211. Hermann, ad
Sopli. 'J'rach. 207. — On the oilier hand, when women are spoken of
phnally, in such a manner that men cannot be understood to be
meant also, the feminine gender is used: y irecjjvKnjjey aofal yua-
Xiffra, Eurip. Med. 386.
Under this head may be mentioned the passage of St. Malth.
xxviii. If). fiaSrjrevaaTe ndfra to. edftf, fiairriCorTes avrnvs, &c.
in which avToiis is to be referred to eQfr], and not, as the Anabaptists
say, to fxaOriras implicitly signified in fiadT}Tev<7nre. See Rom. ii, 14.
and edi'tj, which is a collective noun, must be taken to comprehend
infants: see Sept. Gen. xxv, 23. — This change of gender is fre-
quent in the fl?'fjc/e ; as, ret TOiavra Kivabri, o' neiroitjKaffi fxev ov-
tey, <i'c. Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 97. 1. 29- See Maccab. i, c. 5, 2.
and TibuU. iv, 1, 62. and Cort. ad Sail. Catil. Ivi, 5. The Greeks go
even so far as to say Aats, >; jueya i:\eos, Athen. Deipn. xiii, 589.
Sometimes the adjective is elegantly put in the gender, number,
and case in which its substantive would have been put according to
regular and ordinary syntax, while that substantive is put in the geni-
tive plural after the adjective : as, (juj^vous reitw tCiv Xoyoji', for
Tovs Xoyovs, a multitude of words, a long discourse: Plato Gorg. j).
519' 1. 41. see Soph. Plul. 86. to. Xoina twv cnrep fjar lay, the
rest of the seeds : JLlian, V. H. i. c. 12. In this phrase the article
before the substantive is indispensable. — Sometimes the adjective
in this phrase is put in the neuter, although its substantive is of a
different gender : as to. i^iaa tuiv ttoXituh', the moderate or neu-
tral citizens : Thuc. iii, 82. to. vptLra tCjv rore 'EXX/p'wv, the
first of the Greeks of that time: Aristid. Serm. Sacr. p. 505. see
Propert. iii, 7, 7.
HI. An adjective in the neuter, {-^pji^a, npayiia, cpyov, 5(5ov, or
the like, being understood with it,) is elegantly joined with a sub-
stantive of any gender and number: as, â– )(^pr]a i/jkIit arov fj vrj-
areia, fasting is most useful; TroTepoy iiKpibes ijbiop ri Ki-)(^Xai;
are locusts or thrushes most delicious? Aristoph. Acli. 1115. See
Virg. Eel. iii. [80. 82.] Ovid. [Amor, i, 10, 4.] — In a similar manner
'J'heognis subjoins the neuter article ro to Tfjs apeTijs, v, 317.
IV. The genitive plural of adjectives is used by the Attics instead
of the nominative singular: ean rwv alcr'^^^pwy, fidXXoy be rQy
Viger. D
QG the adjective. [Chap. hi. ^ ii.
« ( o- )( / (7 r w J' : it is a shameful, or rather a most shameful thing : De-
niostli. ii. 01. literally, it is of disgractful things ; i. e. one among
sueh. <l>ov\/3('a, yvi'i) rujf eTrKpay^br : Fulvia, ail illustrious woman :
Fhit. ill Cic. p. StiS. — [ami for anollier case,] r'ir^pa tuiv eTi^ncwi',
an illustrious man: Pint, in Cic. p. 86'7. 1. 30. So a suUstaiilive,
ami ill the siiiijiilar, — vjjjjios epya for vpintrriKu e^ya, Soluil. injurious,
deeds. — See Sail. B. J. c. 3. Corn. N. in Att. c. 13.
V. Comparative adjectives are eniployetl, sometimes, not to in-
stitute a comparison between a liij^lier «lei;rce of some quality,
&c. in one iliing, ami a lower degree of tlie same quality, (ic. in
another thing; but to signify an incapacity or inability in one tiling
to act in some certain manner, or to produce some certain effect,
with regard to another thing : as, ■)(^f>T] /^artuv Kpeirr wr, — Kcpbovs
kpe/rrwr, above the temptation of money, — of gain ; incorruptible :
Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. \gj. Qgo. ?/Soi'j/s KpeirTwv, proof
against pleasure, not to be subdued bi/ pleasure : Heliod. iEth. v, r.
4. arepva Kpeirrot Xoyou, breasts beautiful beyond description :
Athen. Deipn. xiii. p. 588. apidfuiv kp. out of number. See Spaitli.
ad Joseph, ii. p. 413. A. [See Eurip. Ipli. T. 844. Suppl. 844.] eX-
TTibos Kpileraov, beyond hope of relief or amendment : Thuc. ii, 61.
eXiribos Kpe'iarrov, beyond hope of attainment: Pans, in Boeot. p.
56'3. [So opinione valentior, Cic. ad Att. vii. ej). 6 ] irvpafxibes
Xoyov f^ii$(tyes, Ilerodot. ii, 148.
Vf. In a bad sense: Kpeirriov rijs iraibelas, 7inimprovable by
instruction: Aristol. k p el c a o v Xoyov, too bad to be described :
Tiiuc. ii, 50. Kpeltraov cTriKovpias, incurable: ./Elian, H. An. i,
54. See Musgr. ad Eurip. Troad. CO!-. Thorn. M. p. 6'03.
VII. So i'jTTwv TTudovs, unable to bear up against calamity ; ay-
bpa bo^rjs iJTTOPa crtJ tt p 6 s tovs (plXovs atbovs, a man not
proof against the fear of public opinion, and the shame of refusing
any thing to his friends : Pint. Pomp. p. 055. I. 4.
Vm. Sometimes the phrase is varied by substituting an accusa-
tive governed by npds or Kara, preceded by */, for the genitive : as,
ao(p(i)T€pa j) Kad' kavrov, things too deep for himself. In this form it
often signifies merely, in proportion to: as, bo^ai' IXc'ittw T/ ttoos to ika-
Topdwfxa, glory too little in proportion to the achievement : but iepov
apy^d KIT epov )) Kara Tijy 'lutyuiy etTotKqtrii', is, a temple built before
the settling of the Lmians : Pausan. Acli. p. 399- '• I*.
IX. Sometimes an infinitive, preceded by if, takes the place of the
genitive : as, KpeirTovs bi'Tas f; aXuivai, too power fiif to be overcome or
taken, for r»)j aXwafws'.* and sometimes the infinitive is preceded by
»'/ u)s, .Aristid. ad Capit. p. 52y.
X. Sometimes the genitive is put after the comparative degree,
when the rules of ordinary syntax, and perspicuity, would require
another case with f/ : as, raTs -ibv jjiaXtarn tu) (jtpoyely bia(f>ep6iTU)y
ajrXa'is (jtuaetji ■j:poae\(iv bil ov')^^ iITT oy rwy a irobe t ^eior, for »} ra7$
uKobti^eaiy : the simple affirmations of men eminent for wisdom are to
'And without <{ : acrd(Vf<nepoi Jju Demoslli. c. Aristocr. p. C37. 1. 17. ed.
rhr irrrip ttjs vikjjs iy*yKflf Tr6vov, Reisk, — J. S.
Rule .5-12.] THE .ADJECTIVE. 27
be ns nnich atltnded to as demonstrations: Arislot. So Tijs e'lpfjyris
Jur )*/ // lifiiiiri, Ueiiiostli. pro Cor. [p. 2.')5. 1. 12. eel. Pveisk.] bitcat-
CTepnv ev iruidv tovs otKfiovs Tuiv 6Byeiii)t', for y roiis vOfeiovi : it is
more Just to do good to friends than to strangers. So Sopli, Ant.
74. Pliil. OS'2. Ill oilier passages tlie genitive is the case required
by regular construction, but it is irregularly made to depend on llie
coinpiirative, instead of depending on some oilier word wliich is
omitted: as, irvpaniha be icai vvros atrfXiTzeTO iraWuv ekaaffit) tov
TTfjrpos, for r?7$ TOV Trarpos : he too left a jjyr amid much less than
his father's: — \\U'rA\s, less than his father : lierodot, ii, 134. See
Diod. S. iii, 3j. Eurip. Tr. 7^7-
111 the fidloMing passage the <;enitive is to be resolved into two
otlier cases of the same noun, with ?) preceding them : <^^rT(, evKnv
i) fio lorepa (understand 7« Truibin) fhai rw Trarpi : he sajjs, they
(the children) are more like their father than one jig to another :
for */ aiiKov avKui : Theophr. Eth. Ch. c. 5.
XI. Comparatives are sometimes put for supeilalives : as in
Malth. xviii, 4. 1 Cor. xiii, 13. Virg. yEn. i, 347- ami in 'he examples
cited by Steph. de Dial. Att. p. 40. Fisch. in pra^f. ad Well. Gr. p. x.
and in Anim, ad eamd. ii, p. 149. And, vice versa, superlatives
for comparatives ; when they al«a\s have either a genitive or ?*/ after
tlicni, and some signification of comparison added to their own
proper signification: Hom. Od. X, 4S1. ^schyl. Eum. 30. Si. John
i, 15. XV, 18. Maccab. iii, 7, 21. See Davis, ad Just. M. p. 441.
Wessel. ad lierodot. vii, l6". p. 517. Clark, ad Od. 1. c. Fiseii.
Praif. ad Well. Gr. p. xi.
This permutation of comparatives and superlatives is in some cases
to be imputed to the mistakes of transcribers with respect to the
abbreviations of the terminations repos and rn-os. See H. Steph. de
Dial. Att. p. 41. Vakk. ad ['hcen. p. 66'(). Rtisk. ad Lys. t. ii.
p. U)l. Herm. ad Eur. Hec. I'JOO.
The positive degree also is used f<ir the comparative: vj-iiai
btKaiov even' to erepov Kepns f/Tep 'Afljji a/'ivs, Herodot. ix, '26.
(see Wessel.) it is more just that you should have the other uing of
the army than the Athenians. — Mark ix, 45. 47- Phocyl. [Pueni.
Admon. v. 77.] — and the comparative for the positive: see Eurip.
Alcest. 981. and Musgr. Keen, ad Greg. p. 46'. Those wlio first used
comparatives in this nranner, really made some comparison, though
without expressing the thing compared. Afterwards the form was
retained by custom, while the thing con)j)ared was forgotten :
Reizius.
Xil. The comparative and the superlative, with the genitive of a
reciprocal pronoun, form a very strange but elegant idiom, in whicii
a person or thing is compared to the same person or thing at another
time: a<, bvrciT loTepoi aiiTol aiiT wv eyh/rovTo: they became more
powerful than they ever tccre before : (\\\vrMy, more poirerjul tha?i
//iewse/i'CS ;) Thuc. iii, 1 1 . dpeXijs yerijireTni fxCiWoy avriis nlrov ',
will he become more negligent than before!" Plato de Rep. iv.
p. 421. See Fisch. ad Well. ii. p. l 13. env-ov e\\uyi^u)T(iTos
eyei'fTo, he was more eloquent than ever ; a'vrov roj^tcrru tbpi.if.ier,
28 THE ADJECTIVE. [Chap. hi. § ii.
he surpassed all his former feats in running; v\los be, rfj v\pij-
Xurarrj tcjTiv avTi) iavTi'js, vktw upyviai : the height, in the part
where it is highest, is eight fathoms : Herodot. Eut. c. 124, avrvs
avTOv TOTe ^aoerai (jeXnara ex^r, in his best plight ; (pav\6-
Tara biaKeijueyos, in his worst: ^lischin. Dial, (ie Divit. I'ly iy tuIs
Trepi yvra'iKus teat wa'tbas eXevdepovs ubtKian ahrus eavrov fioy^di]-
poTUTOs, worse even than in his other enormities : Plut. de Virt. niul.
p. 261. fueffwv be rvKTwy (ro vbiop ear]}') eavrov depfioraTor,
hotter than at any other time: {WwrAh, hottest of itself :) I^xxxvin,
de Exp. Al. iii, c 4. See Fisch. ad Well, ii, p. 148.
Of tlie comparative degree it is to be remarked, — 1. that it lias
an extenuating or palliative signification: as, vTvofiayyoTepos, Herodot.
iii, 145. a little crackbrained or harebrained : see Stepli. de dial.
p. 39. seq. — 2. that when two adjectives or adverbs are used in
comparing what they respectively signify, not tiiat one only of the
two, which shows the excess, is put in tiie comparative degree,
but the other also: as, irpodvuos fxaXXoy ij cro<po)Tepa, more
willing than wise : (literally, more willing than wiser :) Eurip.
Med. 490. eiToirjffa Ta')(^vT€pa 7) ao^wrepa, Herodot. iii, 65. vii,
194. <pi\orif.i6T€pov 7* aXr]6iyu)T€pov, Diod. S. i, 29- So the
Latin siibtilius, quam verius, and tlie like.— 3. that fidXXoy is
sometimes added to con)paratives, as in Eurip. Hec. datwy b' ay
e'lrj fidXXoy eirvxearepos j) iCor, v. 377. Pors. — 4. that ^dXXoy is
followed by other particles as well as ?*, signifying than : oh ^dXXoy
— oaoy, yEsop, F. I. Huschk. yXvKfpurepoy — oaaov, Tlicocr. ix,
33. see Eurip. Cycl. 147. — On ov fiaXXoy or f.u] fxdXXoy aXXa, see
Scheef. ad .Ssop. p. 97.
As a comparative is made by adding ^dXXoy to a positive, so a
superlative is made by adding — 1. {.luXiaTa. — 2. other particles, &:c.
CIS TCI e<TX"''« fJtaXa aocpus, astonishingly jvise : Xen. Lac. Rep. i, 2.
So TTayv, TraiTws, TravraTraai, Xiar, fieya, ciyav, Kapra, na[jray, Ko/itO^,
laxvpuis, (Tcpobpa, TTuXXov, vTTfpfvuis, SiC. — 3. noun substantives :
vTTepftoXrj, fjeyedei, Paus. in Cor. p. 103. — 4. £ci : ^s ianXovTos,
exceedingly rich: Herodot. Clio c. 32.-5. by repetition of the
same word: ^Eschyl. Suppl. 532. See Fisch. ad Well. Gr. p. 152.
Staver. ad Nep. Ages. c. 2.
XHL As lo numeral adjectives it is to be observed, — 1. that the
genitive is used elliptically : as, bvo'iy <pBua(u, to make sure of one
or the other of two things: Thuc. i, 33. uuderst. darepoy. — 2.
that the Greeks express a number by specifying how much it falls
short of another number : as, n-c vrr/Kovra, /utas beovcrrjs, eXuftey
nlxfi»'Xt'''~"vi Tpn'ipeis, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 371- he captured
forty -nine triremes: and in another form, TrevTiiKoyra, bvo'iv
beoyra, iri], Thuc. ii, 2. Trepi err/, eroj anobloyra, eKarov
yeynytl)s: about ninety-nine years old: Lucian, in Macrob. p. 831.
and in a ihinl, fiiaQo(p6poi. oXiyov airobeoires bia fivplwv, mer-
cenaries little short of twenty thousand: Arrian, de Exp. Al. i, 15.
TTf^oi ov TToXv XeiTToyres fivpiwy, infantry not much below ten
thousand: Polyb. v.— or by spec ifying its excess above the {jrcatcii!
round or even number contained in il : as, bevrep^ uXvfjniabi eni
Rule 13-171 THE ADJECTIVE. 29
Tills inaroy, in the hundred and second olympiad: Pausan. El.
p. 352. rphri tTri benabi, the thirteenth day: and, instead of k-ni,
Ka) is soinetinu'S iisfd, when llie smaller niiniher is cliarigod from
HI) ordinal to a cardinal number: as, rw e»-i Ka\ TpiaKoaro), the
one ajid thirtieth, fur rjji irpioTw koi rp. Herodot. v. see 1 Maccnij.
vii. Gell. xiii, \2. See Vorst. de Lat. fals. susp. c. 27. Cirut. ad
Cic. Verr. iii, 70. — Somclinies the greater number is understood,
e.g. eri] €>:KnibeKa (nrtbtjfjr](7e' rw be kfthofit^ tTrai j/XQev, for ipbij/ju)
en-l beKn : but ill the seventeenth he returned. Soiuetiines a numeral
adverb is joined with a tardiiial number, as e/St^oyuTjvojrakis crrra.
Matt, xviii, 22. seventy times seven.
XIV. — 3. That tu express the excess of half an integral above any
plurality of integrals, the Greeks join with a \vor<l compounded of
ijHi and the name of tiiat integral, the ordinal number niarkiuf; the
numerical place in which that half inte<iral woultl stand if eacli of
the plurality of integrals and itself were numljered as unils : as, tico
talents and a half, rpirov ii/jiTuXaiTor. four druchmcB and a half,
â– nefXTTTuv i]^ibpay_j.ioy, Hesych. TtrapToy i'lUitrv, to Ttrapruv iifiiaTu-
Trjpov.
XV. — 4. That to designate time, a numeral adjective in alns is
often used, which does not agree with any substantive signifying
lime, b\it with some other: as, bevrepalos eK tov 'Adrjraiwr ooreos
7)y ev lirapTTi, he teas in Sparta on the second day from his leaving
Athens: Herodot. Er. c. 106. beKnTu'ios arjiiKero, he arrived on
the tenth day : Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 1. TtTapra'tos kaT^v, he has
been dead four days : St. John xi, 39. See Wetsten. — and interro-
gatively: Trotna'ios — ekelcre aiptKoifnii' ; in hoiv many days could I
get there? Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 129. airu rJ/s ^n^x^^ rpiTulos
afiKveiTai, he arrives on the third day afttr the battle: Arrian,
Exp. Al. c. 3. See Wakef. ad Soph. Trach. l6'5. — These adjectives
in aios are sometimes used as ordinals, and made to agree with the
substantive of time : Eurip. Hec. 32. I'lato Piiicd. [p. 22. 1. 20. ed.
B.13. prim.] Thuc. v, 75. viii, 51. See Pors. ad Hec. 32. Valck. ad
Hippol. 247. Monthly Rev., Jan. 1799. P- 89.
XVI. — 5. That in a few instances the adjective signifying an
ordinal number is to be understood to designate a priority also in
lime : as, avroi hp^fp<i- TpiTij — e]hey ci)piy uTonoy, OH the third day(\,Q.
before he slew Clitus,) he saw a strange vision: Pint. Alex. p. 693.
When it designates posteriority in time, it has a genitive after it, with
or without a preposition : as, it e fi it r 1] bk y eicrr] iif^ep^ utto
Tovruyy, on the fifth or sixth day after these things: Herodot. iii. p.
92. cd. Camer. bevTcpu) bt hei rovTeioy, Herodot. Er. c. 46". in the
second year after these things ; TpiTr)v tifiepay avrov {JKoyTos, the third
day after he came : Thuc. viii, 23. Or it is followed by i) and a
part of a sentence depending on it : as, Trj varepnltf — *; 17 av eXdoi
TO nXo'ioy, on the day after the arrival of the ship : Plato Phaid. 2.
XVII. — 6. That the lime in which any thing may be done or come
lo pass is put in the genitive: as, elov jii^iepidy beKa, ^dWoy be
TpiGiv 7/ TeTTupwy, eis tov 'EXXj/.^ttoito;' uip'iy;j')ai : it being prac-
ticable to arrive at the Hellespont in ten days, or rather in three or
four: Dem. pro Cor. p. 3 1 7- uKovaeaOe bvo'iv )*/ TpiQy ijfxepwr.
e
20 "AyuOis—^AWos. [Chap. m. § iii.
you will hear in two or three days : ibid. — 7- 1 h.-.t tlie relative of a
singular antecedent, uilli vviiicli an ordinal adjective agrees, is fttund
ill the plural: hevr ifjav eT^icrroXiiv, ev als, 2 Pet. iii, I., tiie relative
aj)})I\in!^ to the first, as well as the second, which by inifdication in-
cludes the first. — 8. Tliat to express the number of associati'S of any
person, the name of that person is followed by an ordinal nunibtr
marking his numerical rank, if reckoned last, atid by the pronoun
avTos : as, nef)((.X/7s u ZarOiTrnov aTpnrrjyos wv bekaroi avrus,
being general with nine others: Thuc. ii. 13.* KXeiTriribiis —
TptTos avTcs earpaTr)y€i, Chippides had the command tvith two
others: Thuc. iii, 3. i£,€Trefu\pap — AvaiKXen tt i jxirrov auroy
crpart]yor, 'I'huc. iii, Ip. so i, 61, ll6. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p.
2'25. See Plato de Legrg. iii. p. 69.5. Theocr. ii, 11 9. Diodor. ii.
J). 577- and interroKativelv ; iroaa-nus earpaTi'iyei; or iroaTOS
errrpaTi'iyei avros; hoiv many were joined U'ith him in command ?
and witiiout a question and without specification of number, oXt-
yuoTos, tvith a few others: Beros. ap. Jos. Ant. x, 11. Jos. c. App.
p. 1045. ] Matcab. iii, 16.- 9- That a declinable cardinal number,
exceeding a hundred, is sometimes joined with a collective noun in
the sinnular : as xiXirj Ittttos, a thousand horse: Herodot. See
other examples in Sleph. Tlies. i. 1699. G. So 1 Maccab. iii, 39-
iv, 28. — 10. I'hat when a numeral adjective forms a compound with
tn-<,it signifies one iiite;;er, and such proportional part of that integer
as the numeral adjective before its composition with ejrt indicates :
as Ini-pLTos, one and its third part ; t-n-in/buns, one and an eighth:
Plato Tinuvus, p. 313. translated by Cic. (de Univ. c. 7-) *'^*2"'"
terlium, and sesquiocfavum nuiiieruu).
Section III. — On some particular nouns, adjectives,
AND SUBSTANTIVES. AlphabiticaUi/.
Rule I. 'AyaO.Is. In the vocative, wyfiSe has a light shade of
irony or sarcas-ni, as bone in Latin.^ See Plato Gorg. p. 491. !• 25.
"Ak-pos, chief, most eminent, has a partitive genitive, and genitive of
the thing as to which lie eiiiinence i^ possessed: tCju noiririLv ol
(tKpoi TTji TT iii a e uj a €K(tT(p(ti, of the poets the chief in both kinds
of poetry: Plato Tlieivt. p. 15'2. I. 44.
"A\Aos, like a ronipruaiive, has a genitive: c'iXXo uv aloOii ceuii
eiriaTi'ifXT], knowledge being different from perception : Plato Tlitait.
p. 186'. ciXXa Tuv biKaiuiy, things different from just things:
Xen. Mem. iv, 4, 25. and erepos has the same construction. See
Plato Phicd. c. 19. So a/iK-s- in Latin : Hor. E|). i, K), 20. ii, 1,
240. Pha;dr. Prol. 1. iii, 41. T« aXXa, in other respects: Plat.
Apol. Socr. p. 41. 1. 25. Herodot. ix, 25. So es r' «X\a, and es re
Tu Koinii, Pans. Ach. p. 401. t'rf/aos dXXos, joined, Euiip. Suppl.
573. liarnes. ciXXos erepos joined, Enrip. Or. 339- Pors.
•"Somma ledit Henry de sortir ii <rM o(/;fC3.) Voltaire, FI. de Charles XIT.,
paileiiunier pour son profict; commeil lit I. 2.
i.uY QUATuiisMK." Montiiinne, Ess. v Not unlike wtj irorlUy, in English.
1. i. c. 5. {wilh three others.) " Le Minime mains, and the giiod man, are
ru\ dc Poliigne n'cut que le temps de said of dull or simple persons, — J. S.
inonter a cheval, lui onzil.mi." i^w'Uli
Rule 1—2.] "AWnre—Aydpuirtoi. 31
VovXonroi: IiceXtu // aW r;, ///e rest of Sicili/ : Plato Ep. 8. p.
307. I. 6. ruv fxev r'tWrjy (I'li/poicM ) ofiu\oyi<f KarearriaavTO, 'E<77i«<as
5c, &c. and the rest of the Island, &c.
"AWoTE a.Wos, and tiXXos kol tiWos, are used to sijiiiify inconsis-
tciic\ atiil vaiial)ililv : aXXore tiXXwv eff-t Xiiydiv, he sai/s Ji'sl one
thing and then another: Plato Gorg. p. 48'2. I. <)• «* 5' iubpes
a Wo I Kill (iWoi Trdfih tovs xiwvavs, men change ivith the times:
Afistid. pro Qtialiiorvir. p, Syj. and compoinidcd tilings are said
elXXor' aWtJs txety, to be perpetualli/ changing: Plato Plroed. c.
25. '
"Aficpu (as well as ajupoTepor) refers to two diftercnt things in a
sentence in wliicli it is syntactical!)' unconnected : " AyL(\>u> y«/), tot
roxiaov ara\\>u'^f.is irvpoerjduy, K(ti pot aKopntodey /5f/:>Xrj/je»'w j'/pa t:nfii-
<?eis : for i/ou both relieve mj/ burning malady, and afford grateful
assistance to me, ivho hate been stung by a scorpion: Orpli. de lap.
in Chab. So Q. Cal. 7ro,oaXei7r. i, 20. tpvaet y rpo(pij 7) aft (porepa,
Plato Gorg. p. 542. I. 20. by nature or by aliment, or both. See
Horn. II. y, 179. »■, 1()6\
"Aiiip, even in the sinoidar, is put, not for vir, but for homo, a mor-
tal : Soph. (Ed. C. 066. Aj. 77. It is used for rk, Horn. II. €,
770. Tlieogn. 199. See Hor. Od. iii, !, 9. Sometimes it abounds,
or at least is not to be translated into Latin : as Xcito/jki ai-bpes,
Q. Cal. povtcoXos uir]p, Id. vi, 347. stonecutters, neat-herd.* So
avdpu)Tios, Luc. ii, L5. Maltli. xviii, 23. 'Avijp and t\s are joined,
Xen. C}rop. ii, 3, 5. Act. Ap. v, 1. In the plural, I'obpes, for the
continent, opposed to vrjiroi, Horn. H. Apoll. 142. Pind, Ol, vi, 15.
"Airiitppas. 'ATTofpabes vfifpm, dies nefasti, in L;itiii, on wiiich it
was unlawful to administer justice ; [from uto in a sense of absence,
and (ppaiiv."] Lucian calls the sanie uTrpuKrovs, void of business, in
which nothing can be transact) d ; tTrapuTovf, accursed; /utnpovs,
abominable ; anatiriovs, unlucky, ill-omened. Wnotppabes ii/iipat are
also the seven days in which offerings were made to the dead. See
Moeris Att. and Hesych.
II. 'Aivu'ppabei avBptoTzoi, men shunned by all on account of enor-
mous wickedness ; execrable miscreants. So fjinoropes, TraXa/oalot,
aXiTi'ipiot, aXacrropes, KUTapuTOi, tiayeTs, e^oytaro/, aTroTpoKUtoi. 'A X t-
Tijpios rov A(os, devoted to destruction on account of s'lcrilege
against Jupiter; Z tTis 'EXXa ^os a\ iri'ipie, O pest oj Greece!
[/Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 521. 1. 8. Reiske's ed.]
" Avdp<i)-iros is often said of a woman : as, yy/oz/v rrjy aydpwiroi', the
woman naked: Dion. Ilal. Trept awO. 6y. So Pint, de Aud. Poet.
p. 2(). I. 47. Allien, xiii. j). 576". Dem. pro Cor. p. 518. 1. 43. i^Llian,
V. U. xii, 1. xiii, 33. Xen. Cyrop. v. beginning. Dion. Hal. i, p. 64.
1. 8.* (deoi also is said of a female.
* Here tlie English idiom is similar; k a, (po^rjdriiTfaOe ; n burbavian, when that
IlertlsmaH. — J. S. bnrbarinn is a woman loo? Deniostli. de
"Quasi, fjLT] ola Te oZaa (ppi^eaOat, not llhod. Lib. p. 197. 1.12. dvOpcoTvos eH-
to he named: Kustatli. — J. S. vovs koL iricrTi}, Demosth. in tut-rg. et
'' 'A57J,uu^'uuo•7)S rt€ T^s audpunrou, but Mncs. p. 1 15.5. !. 28. T7)f &vOpwirov eVe'Ssi-
tlie ivoiiiiin bans^ muili dislresscil : De- fo, ib. p. 1159. 1. 27. privu tlella vita
niosib. Krtls. Leg. p. A\)2. 1. 24. Reisk. molti liuomini di ciuscun sesso et eta.
fidpfiapov avOpuiroi', k a) Tavrayvval- Guicciard, 1. ii. — J. S.
32 ' Aydpbjnoi — 'Aifop/jv. [ChAP. III. § iv.
"AvOpMiros, for at))p, vh', a husband : Hydptonos kqI yvii}, a husband
and ivife : ^Escliints. So Mattli. xix, 10. " Av6pb)nos for rts, quidam,
some one, a certain person : Mark xii, 1.
III. 'Afjer»). — 1. bentjicence, liberality : Tliuc. ii, c. 40,
IV. — 2. natural affection and humanitij : o'l aperT/s r< fieToiroiov-
fxevoi, Time, ii, 51. goodtvill, benevolence, philanthrophy. Time,
iv, 86". So in Latin, virtus for benignitas: Plaut. Mil. Gl. iii, ],
82.
V. — 3. celebrity, renown: hvvafxis — (pepovfra es fiey tovs noWotJs
ape-/))', Thuc. i. [f. 33. i)ro evbo^iu, liaipocr. See the Elym. So
Andocid. See Suul. Wass.]
VI. — 4. the proper virtue or excellence of any thing in general: as
ap€n)y yiis, (he goodness of the sail : Time, i, [c. 2.] upert) rf/v j^w-
pcis, the goodness or fvuilfulness of the country: Plato <le Leyg^.
yElian, V. 11. ix, it). upeTt) awfiuTUi, health, good habit or constitu-
tion of body : Plato Gorg. p. 517- TroirjToii apert), the proper excel-
lence of a poet: lit. v, 21. and // ep to'is yiierpots aperr), metrical skill:
ib. ii, 13. Id Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, \6. aperi) comprehends strength
of body, fortitude of miiid, skill in horsemanship, riches, power.
VII. — 5. virtue, duty, honor: ywaiKeia aperr), Thuc. ii, 45. nept
ToTi hiKaiov Ka\ rfis aperijs, Thuc. iii, 10.
VIII. T))v ap^i)y, np)(^riu, ro KnTap-)(ci<;, from the first, at first,
at all: yaXeTrujTepov, €K TrXovat'ov rreyqra yeyeaditi, H) dp )(»/»' /u>) ttXov-
tTicjui : it is more grievous to become poor ajter havitig been rich,
than never to have been rich at all : Xen. Anab. vii. [7. 17-] eV"?' ^
Ttjv ap^))v ov bily e/xk bevpo eiaeXOe'iy, 7), tTreibi) el(jii\doi', ovj^ uhjy
re ehai to fir} airoKTe'iiai fje : at first, at all: Plato Apol. Socr.
p. 29. I. 21. See Plato Lys. 2(55,32. Gorg. p. 478.1. 24. Soph.
Phil. 1232. Aniii;. 92. El. 439. Herodot. i, 9. iv, 25. Time, vi, 50.
Xen, Q^c. ii, II. viii, 2. Symp. i, 15. iEschin. in Ctes. p. 509. (70-)
Lncian, Symp. 8i2. In the same sense is apxi)y, Pans, in Lac. p.
211. I. \6, Kar' dpj^as ore : kut' ap-^as or I'lkdor, as SOOn as I had
arrived: Plato Ep. iii. p. 310. 1. 19-
IX. A delinquent taken in Ihe fact is said to be eaXuKios en avro-
0(i')pw, or simply avrnipojpos, or irepi(pwpos, or ev^n'epicpwpos, from (pcop^v,
to delect, to catch in a theft ; and those three substantives are joined
with eiiai, yiveaQai, aXioKeadni, <pavr)yui ; as, 6 (pevyuv kir nvTOffiwp^
yevu fievos, the culprit having been caught in the fact. 'ETrauro^wpw
is properly used of thieves taken with Ihe stolen goods on them; but
it came to be applied to persons detected in the commission of any
crime, as adultery, John \iii, 4.
SECTION IV.
Rule I. 'A^ p/u//. — 1. a power of shunning what is destructive :
Beat. Daniasc.
II. — 2. substance, fortune, means of living: as, fxtj^e/^ilrti' u^opftriv
F)(ft Tov ftlov, il na aucun moyen de vivrc. See Xen. Mem. iii.
[12, 4.] Demoslh. pro Phurn). p. OOl. I. 6. and means, in general ;
Rule l—6.] ^aaiXevs — ilriXos. 33
occasions, facilities : ttoXv yap nXeiovs ufopnhs els to t>)»' 7rop«
deojy euyoiay e\eiy r1/jw vf^'iy eyovcras, >/ eiceiyo) : que vous avez beaucoup
plus de moyens que lui d'obtenir la bitnveillance dts Dieux : De-
mostli. Ol. ii. p. 8. 1. 51. See Xen. Mem. ii, 7, H â €¢ Scliol. Eurip.
cited by Hindeiib. ad Xen. and Suid.
III. — 3. a deposit, a fund to draw upon, in a bank ; this llie later
Greeks called kyd))Kr], wliicli comprehends all precious possessions.
IV. — 4. for opju)), natural desire, instinct: Plut. — 5. in a rlielori-
cal view, pretext, handle, occasion, for narration, for disquisition,
for argumentation, &c, Dion. Ilal. de Lysia. Pint.
BaffiXeyj, by itself sometimes, and sometimes with fAeycts or o /^leyas,
siguirtes, by wav of eminence, the king of Persia : Demosth. de
Rhod. Lib. p. 83". 1. 5. Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 33. iiilian, V. H. i, 22. [cf.
Arisfoph. Ach. 64,?. Corn. Nep. in Aj;es. 2.] Plato Gorg. p, 524.
Aristid. Or. in Rom. p. 352. Arrian, Exp. Al. c. 1. iElian, V. H.
xii, 1. .Esch. Dial, ii, 4. Eustath. ad Dion. Perieg. v. 1056. ruiv Flep-
(Twy is added by Dinarciius, in Demosth. p. 96. 1. 26. and by others.
BovXrjfxa sometimes means scope, drift, purport: tovto yap fxoL
boicel Tuiy prifxuTiJV to ftovX-qjxa eJyai, Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p.
423. and by the same kind of personification the verbs fiovXeadai and
IdeXeiy are applied to inanimate things to signify tendency, approxi-
mation, ability, &c. in them : fiovXerai fiey tovto, o vvv tyw opw,
flrca iMov dXXo tl tG)V ovTwy, lybee'i be, &c. Plato Pliaedr. c. ig. tU
fxkv ovy ^b)pia kuX tci beybpa ovhiv fx edeXet tibdaneir, Plato PhtCdr.
p. 230. cf. Xen. Mem. iii, 12. extr.
Bly. in the dative, with a genitive after it, signifies against the incli-
nation or will of what is expressed by the genitive : as, fiia. ijfjwy,
against our will: Tliuc. i, 43. /S/^ 6u/liov, umvillingly, contrary
to my inclination: Eurip. Ale. 832. fiif}. tuiv hr]iiap\u)y, in spite
of the tribunes, in defiance of the tribunes: Plut. in Cies. p. 719-''
[See Abresch, Auct. Dil. Tliuc. p. 222.] Sometimes the genitive
is understood : as, fti(f ovy — o'i^o^iui (pevyujy, Plato Symp. 32.
V. AeiXr), by itself, signifies twilight, either in the morning or 'in
the evening. It is often joined with words denoting different parts of
tile day : belXris ew'as, early dawn ; biiXrjs 6\pias, late, in the evening,
about sunset ; belXrjs ^f.ai)^iflpias, noon.
VI. AijXos, iibriXos, (^avepos, and other similar adjectives, instead of
being put in the neuter with the inipei'sonal verb, followed by ws or
on, or by an accusative and infinitive, are elegantly made to agree
with the nominative case of the verb, followed by a participle also
agreeing with that nominative: as, byXvs eoTi irapayofiijaas, he has
evidently transgressed : for b>'iX6y toTiv ahroy napayvfii'ifjui. So <paye-
po$ with a future participle, Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 231. I. I6. ed.
Reisk.] and ubtjXos : eort be ovi: dbi]Xos tpwv, it is plain that he
means to say : Demosth. in Mid. Instead of a j)articiple, ws, or oti,
is sometimes subjoined to the verb: ws ov TrpoOvjuos yue el biba^at,
bijXos el: Plato Eulhyphr. p. 14. 1. 20. ii is plain that you are not
' 'Avfcfi^av Tos trv\as rii^.':f &iu -roiv spite of the multitude: Demosth. adv.
iroWSiv: they opened the gules to us in Lept. p. 473. 1. 3. Reisk. — J.S.
Viger. E
34 Alaira — "Epyoy. [ChAP. III. § iv.
willing to teach me. I'm in Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 12. cf. Xeii. CEc.
vii, 8. dht]\os €(77-11' et. Pint, in C-xs. p. 710. Kuray^X^s /iov,
h7]\()s el: yon are plainly laughing at me: Aristoplj. Av. 1408.
For Oilier adjectives so used, see below R. J. 10. Chap. vi. Sect,
i. H. 13. Dio.l. Sic. xi, 27- See Fiscli. ad Well, iii, 313.
A/dira is not only a certain mode of living, but « place, an apart-
ment : Tcii rwr depnnotTuiv biairas, the bedchambers of the servants:
Pint. Direfce, Plin. ii. ep. 17. It also hij^nilies an arbitration, npiats
â– K()i> tiKTjs, JVksris Alt. 'Eibiuirijfxo, an abode, residence.
VII. AiKuios is used in the same manner as br/Xos, Sic. See R. 6.
Ttp' turiuv ovTos tcTTt biKaios c'x^"' *' '* just that he should
bear the blame: Deniostli. pro Cor.
VIII. AtKniof, a defect, an objectionable particular ; forming a
plea, or just grouiid for accusation or opposition : a\Ovii.i)]i> ar el
TOVTo j.i()vov bo^iiifii bikdioy KaTijyopely tuv rofjLOv, Demosth. adv.
Lepl. [p. 477- I. (i- ed. Rcibk.]
'EyKvtcXia TraibevfiaTa, the liberal arts : Plut. Trepl nnib. c'ly. called
collectively eyi^vi^Xmraibeut. See Schott. OI»s. Hum. ii, I.
IX. 'F,^i)u\r]s bii;r], [from t^t/AXw, to eject ; or e^ovWeir, o euni'
e^udeif Kai h-ftuXXtiy, Ilesych.] an action or prosecution against a per-
son ivho expelled another from his property, or detained it from him :''
Demosth. in Mid. [p. 528. 1. 12. ed. Reisk.] Aristides uses the
expression metaphorically, saying that no one could l^ovXrjs Xd^^^eiy
Tijs yijs against the Athenians ; because they passed for airox^ores,
and therefore could not be accused of ouster with regard to Attica.
Panath.
X. 'Ett/^o^oj is elegantly employed like 5>J\oi, &c. R. G.
en ibolos — etrro' a\pe<TOai tov Katpoij, he is expected tO seize
the opportunity : eTribolos eanv — 7rnOe7»', fie is likely to suffer.
See Chidend. ad Tlinm. M.
XI. "E/jyor sometimes signifies interest of money, as in Demosth.
in A|)!iob. [p. 816". I. 1(). Reisk.]'' office, province, business : kch irpoa-
ern£e rw naibl tuvto e-^eiv epyor, and he assigned this to the boy as
his business: ^lian, V.H. viii, c. 15. See Aristoph. Av. 862. Hence
epyny eariv is rendered decet, it becomes, it is the part of, as in ovv
er'epyov eyKadevbeif, orrrts ear eXevOepa : it no longer becomes, or
is the part of, any freeman to slumber in this affair: Aristoph.
Lys. 6\5. [6l4.] and by a;iother gradation it signifies custom or
way, eDdil WOqralwi' epyor, eXeZ/aarres avrous, — enotiicrare : you
did as the Atheninns are accustomed to do: yEschin. Ep. xiii. See
another example in Sect. i. R. 1. p. 84. and in this sense epyov is
somelimes suppressed : iibiKovfiev ttr, — Ka\ ovx ijfxCJr eirnwvfjey : we
should hare acted unjustly, and not like ourselves ; or, not after our
usual manner: Aristid. Or. Leuctr. ii. p. 72. Sometimes it signi-
«' Sec Demostli. in Mid. p. 540. 1. 21. of a law-court. — J.S.
Reisk. and 5\:\. 1. 27. adv. Callipp. p. ' Tb dpxaio''. '/le prlncipul ; rtt Ifpyov,
1240. 1. 22. where the i^ovKr) consists in the interest : Deiu. in Aphob. j). 819. 1.2.
refusing to pay, or deliver uji one's goods Keisk. — J.S.
to satibfy, a debt incurred by a sentence
Rule 7 — l-t.] 'Ereof— "Ero</ios. 35
ties d{fficuUi/, arduous tindirtdking : epyov fit) awiiQei uvti, KaTa/.ia-
Oely ravTO, Aristot. H. All. vi.
XII. Ill tlie pliiriil TO. epyn often signifies cultivated lands: Iloiii.
II. fi, 283. Od. /3, 22. br}u)(Tas KaXa epyn, Solon. Xen. in
Kvftjyer. p. 978. — and opyhs, 6bos, is uncultivated land. "Epya apyy-
fteta, or simply apyvpsia, or apyvpia, silver mines: Xen. de Redif.
iv, I. 5. 11. 13. 14. Xen. Mem. ii, 5, 2. iii, 6, 12. Demoslli.
Cliers. [p. 100. I. 27. Reisk.] "Epyoi^ is joined with I lie verb yiyvetj-
Bnt, to signify accomplishment, fuljilment, effect: as, he'i Tr)t' t pa^iy
epyoy yey or erni, that the enterprise, or deed, (the simi^liter of
Ca'sar,)M'fls accomplished in that place : Fluf. Ctes. p. 73.9. -n-ptu J) r/)i'
vTTotj-x^eaiv epyov aoi yereadai, before you have fulJiUed ij our pro-
mise : Lncian, Deni. Enc. p. yoi.. raya tT]s vf^terepus yeyovev epyov
6\iyu/pi(is, perhaps it teas the eff'ect of your negligence : Lucian,
II). p. 910. — or, that upon ivhich any effect is produced ; the subject
of it : fiutiov Oayurov epyop tyeioiTo, the victims of a violent death:
yEiian, vii, 2. fteXiov epyov Ka\ ro^eias yeyertj/jevoi, victims,
&e. Heliod. ^Elli. i, I. ice'irni \apU\eia, i^nl noXe fiias j^etpos
epyov — yeyerrjrai, lb. ii, 4, tt oX e fu ov epyov {.la-^^jij-itvovs y e-
veadni, lb. vi, 13. — It sif;nifies any great event: 'TpwiiKov epyov,
the Trojan ivar : Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 1 1. e^ avrov rod epyov, imme-
diately after the calamity: (of the sacking of Thebes,) lb. c. 18.
npo Tov epyov rod ev Mnpadu)vi, before the achievement or victory
at Marathon: Pans, in Ach. p. 425. [and in the plural, drro twv
Trepl MapaO'Mva epywv, Dion. Hal. Ant. R. v. p. 29lO Also a crime:
TO epyov TO Trepl rov "Irvv, Tliuc. ii, 29. — An undertaking or
enterprise: epyov fji) e^eo-Sni, eor' av a^iKero avros, not to e?)gage
in the undertaking, (a siege,) before he himself arrived: Arrian.
Meya epyov in apposition with a noun to signify magnitude : 6 be
â– ^(^epf^tabior Xufte \etp\ Tvbelbrjs, /jeya epyov: Horn. II. e, 303.-^
XIII. 'Ereoj' is by nature an adjective, from ew or el fit : el ereov
KaX^as finvreveTui : ti'ue, a.XT)des, Hom. II. /3, 800. But it is com-
monly used adverbially, signifying, — I. really, seriously, in truth:
II. Tf, 359. o, 53. Aristoph. Vesp. 8. — 2. obsecro, prithee, I pray, en
vtrite, en bonne foi, in reality: (interrogatively,) cv b' el ris ereov',
Aristoph. Eq. 730. See Aristoph. Nub. 93. 1502. Vesp. 832.
XIV. "Eroi^/os sometimes signifies, in store, ready for use, or for
supply : pnurol — TrXi'ipeis eirippeorros eroifxov yaXaKros, Pint, in .'Emil.
p. 262. koXttovs pevf.iaTa — e^ eroifxrjs Kcti VTroKHf-ifrrji (itpievras up^i'/s :
cavities or reservoirs emitting streams from a source always subsisting
in readiness : Pint. lb. 'E£ erolfiov, readily, at will : arprirKo-as e£
€Toifiov XijXpi], Isocr. ad Phil. e£ eroif^iov KaXo'is K(fyadols (piXov
eh-nt, Xen. Mem. ii, 0, I6. e£ ernlf^inv rayndu adpoa (rwprjbov
KeKXripovofirjKorn : without trouble, ready to his hands: Philo dc
Legal, ad Caium.
/ According to tlie foregoing account duct of any action or opemiion, wliich it
of epyof, its meanings must be very various might not, upon sucli a plan of expli-
iiidecd, sonic myriads peilia[)S ; for there cation, be said to sigiiifv.--J. S.
is no actiou or operation, no effect or pro-
36 Evu)i'vfios—^'lffos. [Chap. hi. § v.
EvwKi//Lio$, the left, was originally substitulcd for dpiorepos, as a
word of bettor omen, being tierived from eii and i'jvofxa. Afterwards
the use of it prevailed without any superstitions regard : ? Tliuc.
i, 48. iii, I07. Arrian, de Exp. Al. i, p. 6 1. 1, 6. p. 7. I. 26". p. 14.
I. 7. p. 31. I. 5, 19, 31.. p. 57. 1. 2, 4, 7. Matth. xx, 21, 23. xxv,
41. xxvii, 38. Rev. x, 2. Act. Ap. xxi, 3. See Huds. ad Tiiuc.
i, 126.
©firepoi', (formed of to 'erepov,) preceded by bvo'iv, is especially used
in dilemmas. Avoli> Oarepoy, either — or; one or the other: being
often used absolutely (and sometimes parenthetically) willi an ellipsis
of uuayKT], it\r]6es, craves earii', or the like. See Aristid, pro Qua-
tuorv. p. 469.
SECTION V.
Rule I. "Ittttos in the feminine signifies cavalry :* Herodot. i. 80.
where loo, ?/ KufjijXos, a troop of camels. So // (jovs, a herd 0/ oxen : see
Thorn. M. p. 169. "Ittttos in composition with other words augn)erits
their significations: 'nnrnyrMfjwp, exceedingly discerning : eyj.o hk
TovTwt' Ovfxoy iTTTroyyuj [.10 %'n, iEschyl. in Jacul. 'i7tno(oaf.Lova
l')'lluaTa, high-sounding words, rant: {'nnrnTV(jHa, Lucian, de Conscr.
Mist. c. 54.) Aristopli. Ran. 839- [821. Br.] called p'//Lxa0' 'nnro-
Kprjfxvd, Aristoph. Ran. 96O. [929. Br.] i. e. excessively rough and
rugged, as it were. 'nnraXeKTpviov, magnus galhis, Aristoph. Ran.
[932. 937. Av. 800. Pac. 1177.] See Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 237.
Bovs has the same effect in composition as tTTTros : ftovnais, a great
boy, a lad: ftovXi/Aos, ftovXi^ih, ravenous hunger: see Aristoph.
Pluf. 874. called also ftovftpMaris by Horn. II. w, 532. and Callim.
Cer. 103. and povvreiva by Callim. Cer. 24. ftovyaios, a braggadocio :
Hom. II. V, 824. Od. a, 8. ftovveftpos, a large hind or fawn: see
Etyni. M. Mrer. Tricl. ad Soph. Aj. 232. Tpls also is added
to adjectives to increase their signification : TpiafinKupios, thrice
happy, very happy : rpiftup^apos, extremely barbarous. So the neuter
of TTcts : TTuvaoipos, consummately wise: TrdyKoXos, most beautiful ; and
irayKoKois, adv. Plato Phiedr. p. 171. â– Kafx-Kovr^pos, utterly bad:
Aristoph. Ach. 934. Sometimes with superlatives: Trci/i/ueytoros,
;Elian, V. H. x. c. 2. nafiTrpuiTos, Pind. Isthm. 6. Hom. II. «, 93.
TTctyvtrrnros, and adverbially TrayvtrraTov, for the very last time :
Aristoph. Ach. 1133. Eurip. Or. 367. 1021.
II. "ItTos. 1. 'iaop "tno) eiTKpepety, to make a just requital, par pari
referre : expressed also by fxerpely T))y irjrjy, {fxolpav viz.) or toIs 'ktols
ufjieifterrdai, with an accusative of the thing or person : as rfjy evep-
yeaiav, the benefaction : or riy evepyeriinayra, the benefactor. But
'iuoy 'ifJtj) sometimes means equal parts of wine and toater : and the
phrase is used adverbially, or unconnected syntactically with the rest
of a sentence : as, (piXoTr\(jias "laov "laf iceKpapei'as, love-cups of equal
f But see H. Slepli. Thcs, ii. 1332. * "Iitttou fitXalvris 7}yt/j.wy rpjer/uupfas.
c— J.S. .-Lscliyi. I'ers. 320. Blomf.— J.S.
Rule i — 6.]
'Icroj.
37
parts of wine and water: Alexis ap. Allien. Dtipn. x. p, 431. See
also Hippocr. de Nat. Mill. p. 370, 1. 48.
III. T<iv 'iawv Tvy\hveiv, to meet u'ith one's deserts ; either in a
good or bad sense. 'Atto tov 'iaov, or anu rfjs 'iaTjs, on an equality,
with equal rights, on equal terms ; and e/e rov'iaov, the same : Julian,
JVlisopog. p. 359' 3"d in\ rfj (o-j?, to which koi of-iuitf is sometiincs
added: Time, i, 26. arjd in the plnriil, cttI toIs iaois kqI
ofioiois TToXiTevecrdai, to live in a state on an equality u'ith the
citizens. Rut tl 'iaov, e^i^rjs, and kiviar]s, signify equally: Jidinn,
Misopog. p. 358. Anlonin. els hivr. 1. ii. c. 8. ctt' tarjs u^iujs, worthily,
suitably, adequately, as the subject deserves; pro rti digniiate :
Lncian, Doni. Enc. t. iii. p. 498. ed. Amst. p. 89 1.
IV. The following constructions of ra "irra are to be reoiarked : ov
/uereoTi twv 'iawv, ovbe rujt' ofuolwy, w avbpes 'Adrjva'ioi, irpos tovs
irXovaiovs rols iroWols iifiuiy : the generality of us, or, we, the
main body of the people, are by no meaiis on a par with the rich, in
obtaining redress, or maintaining our rights : we have not equal
favor shown us: Demostli. in Mid. [p. 551. I. 9. ed. Reisk.] twv
'iawv oil fi€Te'f)(^£ vols ciWois, id.'' i
VI. "Icror, with a dative, signifies, — 1. in a philological or gramma-
tical use, equivalent : as, /ij) eyyicrijs ube (Exod. iii, 5.) 'ifror rw Mi)
irpoatdi Toiaiirr] biaiTKe\pei : i. e. the expression fi)) I. ^. is equivalent to
fji)) TT. T. b. — 2. adverbiall}', equally with, as much as: Iaov yup cfiv
Tra/TLv a.7n'])(6eTo Kr)pl f^eXaivy, car Us le haissoient tous comme lamort :
Horn. II. y. So in the plural : Tri/ica 6' erpecpe b'la Oeaiw 'laa (j)lXoi(7t
T€Ke(T(7i, Horn. II. e, 70. in which sense ev to-w is used. With el kqV:
ev ^af, el Kai fxrjbey av ^jadero. Just as if he had perceived nothing.
With a dative : ey 'icr^ fjtjbey tj atirjfxev u),Just like one ivho had per-
ceived nothing: [like this is ev ofioitD, the same thing: Thuc. ii,
25.] and in the same meaning plurallv : \aa Kai reKvibiov iibiurov
KUTacpiXel, equally with, as much as ; 'irra Kal iKerni eafiey, we are
the same as suppliants : Thuc. iii, 14. SeeHor. Od. ii, 18, v. 32 — 34.
i, 4, V. 13. iii, 1, v. 13. And with an infinitive : ttoXXoJ ovtwgi noisaTro-
t^pivovTai, 'iaa i:at pt) liKovaai ^i/re eV : ' many answer as if they had
* Viger says that in tliis passage the
idiom ToTs SaAojs TjfjAV is to be noted, as
cxacll)! answering to the French a nous
nulres ; but 7)n'lv is not in the passage as
quoted by V'iger, and I liave not been able
to find the place in Deniosth. — Hooge-
veen affirms that 6.X\os so abounds in
Lucian's dialogues, but does not refer to
the place. I therefore give the following
examples of &KKos so redundant : ahrap
'OSvacrevs Tipir^T iv\ (ppe^riv rjaiv aKovoov,
r)Vt Kal "AAAOI <I>AIHKE2, Horn. Od. 6,
3C8. elyapToi Kal XPVf^' tyxiip^ov "AAAO
yevrjTat, lies. Op. 341. The meaning of
&A\o in this last passage is discussed, or
rather abandoned, by Steph. in his The-
saur. t. iv. c. COG. d.e.f.g. — Kal al fidxai
>€, ««l in ddvaroi, 5(0 ravTT]i/ ttji' iiafopo.r,
To7s Te 'Axaio7s Kal to7s ''AAA0I2 TPi72IN
iyivovTo, Plato Alcib. i. p. 218. 1. 27. ed.
Babil. prim. & Koiva, fi; Ai'a, Tracriv inrapxn-
rots ay(i>vi.^o^ivoiS napa ttj? rir "AAAflN
'TMnN (pvaeus : Deni. in Aristog. p. T'Jl.
1. y. Ilcisk. So in Italian : I\Ia voi althi
riile; Chicchesia potra, dire &c. St.
Rlrttth. XV. a. transl. of Martini, Arch-
bishop of Florence. Un pensar al fine
puo dare la viia a noi altri raeschini.
Inscript. in Notes on Byron's C'h.
Harold, c. iv.— J. S.
• I wish Viger had given some autho-
rity for this phrase. The following is an
example of laa Kal with an infinitive, hut
in a very diflcrent construction : Niko-
arparou irori — av ay ivilicTKovr 6s ri tov noi-
rjTou avT(^ T€ Kal KparrjTi, rhu /.^tv ovi'diaTi-
3S Kaipni — Kvpia. [ChAp. III. § v.
not heard a syllable. And with oirep av : 'iaov av e'lrj Trelaai, virep
av, TO Xtyonevov, 'Kidoy ixprjaai : that one might as well try to boil a
stone, as the saying is, as to persuade him : yEscli. Socr. Dial, irepi
TrXour.
VII. Toy es Iffoy ra epya ofiotws Ka) rovsXoyovs — KadicTTayra, wh0
has made good his tvords : Thuc. i. — wliicli might have been thus
expressed also, 'icra toIs Xoyots to. epya k. When number is
spoken of, it signifies as many: nevTijKovTa ^kv TralSas, 'laovs hk
aybpai, Thuc. i, 115. So Arrian, de Exp. Al. ii. c. 2. Some-
times a dative of the thing equalled is added ; as, ^eTpas be rerrnpas
el\e, Ka\ (TKeXi] tu Vera tu'is x^P'^K Plato Symp-p-lSy. Sometimes
the accus. apidfiov follows ttros, as in Arrian, Exp. Al. i. p. 12. in fine.
[For "loov "laif see R. 2.]
Ti'iijov, as a substantive, justice, right, laiv : TroXe/iw fxaWov *; rw
"laf ijjiovXiiQrjfiav tU eyKXi'if^ara {.leTeXdeh-, by war rather than by fair
discussion of right : 'I'huc. i, 34. As an adjective, with a genitive :
Tijs a<f>' lifjuji' alrias ro laor e£ere, equal blame : Thuc. i, 3y. Its
compound ij/jtavs, instead of being put in concord with a substantive,
has sometimes a genitive of that substantive after it ; as, KOTaru be^iov
Kcpas — Twy 'Aypidyur iruydrjaav o'l //yu/aecs, Arrian, Exp. Al. iii,
c. J2.
VIII. Kaipo), opportunities, means, capabilities, either for good or
evil: ywpiov — 6 /iera fieyiarcjy KaipCjv olKewvTai ku\ TroXe/jovrai,
Thucyd. i. p. 26'.
IX. Kcikci, trumpery, trash: twv filv Iv Qp^icr] kokuiv (ti yap
aXXo Tis av e'inoi ApoyyiXov icai Ka^vXrjr Ka\ Maareipot ;) eTriOvfielv :
to hare a desire for the beggarly places in Thrace : Demosth. de
Chers.
X. KaKwffis TTji e-Trapy^ias is repetundarum, extortion ; or spolia-
tion of a province ; hul peculation is kXott/) ru/y brj/joffiwy (xpr}fiaTa>y
viz.)
KaXa (neuf. plur.) signifies any excellences in general : Lucian,
Dem. Enc. p. 900.
XI. Ta Kotya, ior affability , condescension, civility : roTs koivq~is
KQi (ptXavdpujnots f.7ra')^0eh tov arhpos, Fhit. in l^ubl. p. 99- ^'
XII. Kara)(pew$, VKu-j^pews, vrr^yyvos ovtxia, property encumbered
ivith debt, pledged, mortgaged. d> en-n^os (often joined with viToQi)Kri)
ovffia, the coMlrarv : ovtrin ^cnepa (Demosth. de Pace) [p. 59- !• 5.
Reisk.] real property, ov immoveable goods : ovaia afariis, personal
property, or moveables.
XIII. Kvpia ()ipepn viz.) the day fixed for a trial at law : Eurip.
Or. 48. Achill. Tat. viii, 405. 7»)i' Kvpiav vfjoXoye'ty, to undertake
or find sureties for appearance, vadimonium promittere ; anayT^v els
ri/y Kvpinr, to appear 071 the day, obire vadimonium : rijs Kvpias airo-
XelTTfadai or uarepelfrOai, to Jail uf appearance, vadimonium deserere.
Kj^pi'a is also j)ul for any appointed day ; as is utpiopiapeirj, tokt)),
iiiroTeTaypivt], vtropiapeyrf.
6(ffdat, -rhi/ 5' t fT a «al /urj aKovcai: Diog. Lacrt. ia Poleni. \). 145. I. 27. ed.
II. St. 12mo.
Rule 7— 16\]
Kv/3(0( — Aoyor.
39
XIV. So 7] TTpodeiTfita is used cither for a fixed and appointed day
in generiil, [see Liician, Nigr. p. 3d- C. F. ed. Salnuir. and Galat. iv,
2.] or for one fixed for some legal proceeding : wlience Irrepi/j^epos
Tijs irpode(T/jins, one who has failed to appear, or to comply with the
sentence of a court, by the time appointed ; a defaulter ; or simply
vTreptj^xepos, [Denioslli. in Mid. p. 518, I. 2. 540, 1. 23. in Lacr.
p. 92J. 1, 1. in Stepli. i. p. 1 123. I. 4. ed. Reisk.] or eKirpoBeaiios, or
VTrepirputieafios. Hence virtpiifxepov Xafte'iy, and (lairpaTTeiv, Den). 11. C.
and v7T€pT)fi€pia, the last day allowed for the above-mentioned purposes/
lie who appeared on the appointed day was said to he tfi-npoQeapios.
XV\ Related to this sultjfct is the phrase fpnt-it] bUr), or eprjuohiKiov,
or simply epiff^ir] : i. e. « cause in which there teas a failure of ap-
pearance. Hence epijfiTjy Xn/3etr or eXelv, to have judgment
by default ; ept'j/urjy KciTriyope'iv, to accuse a person in his ab-
sence: Plato Ap. Socr. p. 18. 1. 28.
XVI. Kvpios ro/jos, a law in force; one which the j)eople rdls
yl^ri<pi(rfia(n tcvptov TrenoiriKe, has* passed by their suffrages ; uKvpos, re-
jected or repealed ; o'vic wv, as >/ fn) ovaa bUn, a cause heard, decided,
done li'ith. " Atcvpoi ribv kavnov, or twv irpos avruvs, persons deprived of
the management of their affairs, as oiKocpdopoi , guilty of oho(pdopia,
spendthrifts, miners of their fortunes and families.
Kvpuirjis, and Kvpos, power, efficacy, distinguishing character, vir-
tue or faculty, essence : Plato Gorg. p. 450. 1. 20. 40. [p. 304. 1. ip,
28. ed. Bas. prim.] expressed by t^etpaXaiov, p. 453. and in another
form by the verb Kvpow, and its participle Kvpov/ierus, p. 451. 1. 17,
32. and 1. 27.
SECTION VI.
Rule I. Aoyos. [See Niceph. Greg, techn. graram. p. 344. ap-
pended by Hermann to the treatise de emend, rat. Gr. granim.]
See Plato Theaet. p. 206. 208. Aoyov alrely, to ask leave to speak ;
Xoyof biborai, to give permission to speak; Kuyov XafieJr, and Xoyuu
Tv^e^y, to receive permission to speak.
II. Aoyov hibuvcn, uTrobtboiai, inroiT^elr,'' to give account, to render
account: see Plato Cratyl. p. 426". Pha^d. p. 63. Gorg. Aoyov i.uT€i%',
Xnfiftai'eiy vapa Tiyos, or cnraiTe'iy, to demand or take an account from
him: Demosth. de Chers. [p. 101. 1. 1 6. Reisk.] Phil, i, [p. 49.
1. 19.] de Chers. [p. 99. 1. 15.] and [in Onetor. p. 868. 1. 5.] Some-
times \oyov bibotai is to submit to interrogation, to answer questions :
Demosth. 01. ii, p. 9. 1. 44. like which is ev r^ fxepei hibovai
eXeyj^ov, to expose one's self to refutation in one's turn: Plato
J See Demosth. in Euerg. &c. p. 1162.
1.27. Reisk. lb. 1154. 1.8 J. S.
• More properly perhaps have: but
Spenser construes people with a verb in
the singular, although in the same sen-
tence he puts a possessive pronoun re-
ferring to it in the plural : " And all
the way the joyous people sings. And
with their garments strowes the paved
street." F. Q. i, xii, U.
* Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 371. 1. 18./
Reisk.— J. S.
40 Aoyos — M^pos. [Chap, in, § vii.
Ctorg. p. 474. 1. 11. and Xvyov bibuvai, to enter into con-
versation.
III. Aoyvi' eavTtp biburat is to consider a matter, to weigh it well,
to turn it in one's mind: Plut. de Orac. Def. p. 419.
IV. Aoyot' irap€-)(^etv, ihs, to give people a pretext or occasion to say,
that, &c. appreter a parler, — dabimus sermonem iis qui nesciunt,
&c. Cic. Ep. ad Div, ix, 3.
V. Aoyoi, — 1. with reference to the meaning rather than to the
words themselves: rires oZv i)aav ol iraph tovtov \6yoi Tore prjQey-
T€s ; what then was the language which he held at that time?
Demosth. pro Cor. — 2. considered as mere words, \6yoi ravra Kal
cKri\pis, Demoslii. [What we familiarly cdW/udge, or humbug.]
VI. E($ Xuyovs €\Oeli', or lerai, or KctraarT/iaJ, or cvveXOe'iu, or irvvie-
rai, or cKpiKeadut, to enter into conversation : rCjv i/jol iiiriKOfxeviDV is
Xoyavs, 0/ those who have talked with me: Herodot. ii. — and ep Aoyw
ehai, to be engaged i7i conversation ; itre en propos avec quelquun.
VII. But ev Xoyois civai, or -koXvs e.X. e. is, to be much celebrated :
and on the contrary, ovt' ev Xoya, ovr if aptdfi^, 0/ no name or
account : Orac. ap. Suid. de iEginetis.
\ III. Aoyos, by itself, it is rumoured, it is said: ws Xoyos, as it is
rumoured.
IX. Aoyos with a pronoun, opinion: ws a 6s Xoyos, as you
maintain: Plato Gorg. p. 477. Kar ep.ov ye Xoyov, as I think,
according to my opinion.
X. Aoyos Treius, sermo pedestris ; eitlier prose, properly so called,
as in Strabo, i. p. 18, (and in which sense Plato opposes tc^j; Xeyeiv
to /nera fxerpojv: cf. Lucian. de Conscr. Hist.) or, a style plain and
prosaic, although metrical. — Aoyos alone is also used for prose, as
in Aristot. Poet, i, 19. iii, 26. and in the plural, Xoyoi, Plato Gorg.
p. 502. and Xoyoi ipiXoi, as in Plato de Legg. ii. p. 93. ed. Bip. Hence
Xoyioi, prose-writers : Pind, Pyth. i, 183. Nem. vi, 51. but in v. 75.
XoyiQvs means writers in general.
'Ev Xoyu), with some genitives, is under the name of: as in
Herodot. Er. c. 23. 'Efi Xdyw, in a tvord, in sum: Plato Gorg. p.
524. 1. 31. Phaed. c. 45.
'I/cai'os Aoyos, ample scope for holding forth or discourse : Plato
Gorg. p. 512. 1. 23. Xoyos ttoXvs ay e'lrj bteXd€7v, it would require
a long discourse to enumerate or recount. «XX' el /ut*- OappaXeios
tyw cj^w Trpos duyuroi', y /j)), aXXos Xoyos: is another matter, is
foreign to the present purpose: Plato, on be daXX^ \cupovau', —
tiXXos earai Xoyos: there will be another time for discussing:
Atlien. Deipnos. xiii. p. 587. See Aristot. Poet, ii, 24. Elh. Nic. i, 5.
Magn. Mor. i, 4. 5.
SECTION VII.
Rule I. Mepos. — to. ey fxepei, Of rii en-i fxkpovs, or ra Kara fiepos,
•particulars. So ra Knff eKaarov.
II. 'Ey i-iepei, or Karit fjipot, one by one, separately ; also, i?i turn:
Uui.E 1—5.] Mf^j— M^ffos. 41
Plato Goig. p. 46"'2. Thiic. iii. c. 49. Also Kara fxipos, by portions,
part at a time : ^vpinm â– Kaparalafjierns Kara, ficpos TpiaKorrlats, Vint,
Cws. p. 715. i. e. in different battles al diffti-ent times. 'Awo fjqiovs,
in some measure, in some decree: Rom. xv, 15. 24. So et: fuepuvs,
2 Cor. ii, 5.
III. 'liv /.lepei, in the part or place of, i. e. for, as: ev evepye-
(Ttas lid pel, for, or us, a kindfiess: kv ov betas fiepei, in no ac-
count or estimation : Dcmoslli. Ol. ii. ev IhiuiTov fiepet, in the
condition of a private person : Isocr. in Evag. p 382.
IV. Mepos, one of a number or compam/. See Virg. Mv. ii, 6. x,
427. 737. Ov. Her. Ep. iii, 40'. viii, 40'. de" Pont, iv, 1. [35.]
V. Mepos, power, abilities; or part or concern: ro efiov ye
fj epos, as far as I am able, to the best of my abilities ; tu abv nepns,
as far as you are concerned, as far as in you lies: Plato Crito § 5,
J 1. TTHtTijjy ipij/jovs, ttAj/j' oitov to aor fiepos : but for you, unless
you prevent it: Soph. Q^d. R. 1509. Sometimes pipos \s elegantly
suppressed in the jjhrase : a<^, to y kpov eroipov, eav ovros eOeXrj : for
my part, I am ready: Piato Theag. p. 128. I. 20. ro yovr epi)y,
ALUan, V. H. i, 32. In the same sense, to ev epk, or eh ipe JJkov
pepos, or without pepos : as, to els avrov ri<or. Also oaov e/jot ye
pepos eiTtlDaXXei, or to pot eTrtftaXXov. See Lelow Sect. ix. R. 6.
Meaos. — 1. TO fxeaov, medium, middle condition or course, by which
to avoid the extremities of some alternative : ^EschiQ. c. Ctes. p.
287. '• 24. [p. 483. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] where viTr}p\ey is equivalent to
uioyc^ j^)'. — 2. ei' /LtetTw is said of, time intervening: vvi, ev petjf,
kai TTupripev — ets t))v eKKXrjmav : after a night had passed, we &c.
iEscli. c. Cles. p. 284. 1. 30\ ■)(^p6yos ey peato, (cat — avaKaXovat
Toy 'Iwcnvriy, after some time they recall John : Euseb. Hist. Eccl. iii,
23. See Propert. iii, 14. inil. Ov. Met. iv, iSj- Fast, iii, 8O9.
Virg, .^n. ix, 395. Cic. Catil. i, c. 2. In the same sense, ov iroXv
TO ev pecTU), kui 01 aTparu'irai, &c.not long afterwards: Photiusin
Exc. Herodiini. — 3. but, without Kal following, ey peato is said of
an obstacle: tI — ev peaio too av ppiiai'. what hinders them
from being miiltdi' Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 113. [v, Dorv. ad Charit.
p. 601.] — and 4. without Kai, to ev fjecrb) signifies difference : as, ttoXv
TO ev /ueorw, there is a great difference. And, with allusion to a
race, ov juiKpu rw fie aw, by no small distance or interval, by no small
superiority :' Hi Wod. JEtU. vii, c. 10. — 5. ev /meao), publicly, openly,
inpublic: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 495. Plut. in Cajs. p. 721, v.
Dorv. ad Charit. p. 547. 'Ev pe(T<f), near, at hand, ready: Theocr.
Id. xxi, 17. Xen. QLc. v, 7- Anab. iii, 1, 21. See Ter. Ad. iii,
4, 7. and cf. Bergl. ad Ak-iphr. iii, 3. p, 235. — 6. fieaos, with two
genitives, may be rendered between: Ttis be ev Kopivd^ pd^ris, teal
Tijs ev Aex^'V. pe^os apxor EvftovXibris : Aristid. pro Quatuorv.
p. 474. TO. }]pi(pii)va pea a Twv afwvojv Ictti kuI tuiv (j)(t>vy}evT(i)y.
V. Ov. Met. X, 174. 233. Hor. Od. ii, 19,28.-7. peixos, with a
genitive, signifies in the middle of what is expressed by the geni-
tive ; as, vavv fjteerrjv KXvbuvos, a vessel in the midst of the
waves: Gregor. Naz. Carm. de se ipso, v. 52. So Miittii. xiv, 24.
V. Virg. ^n. ii, 508. x, 56, 379- x", 564. — 8. [The example inulcr
Viger. F
42 Moipa—Miyas. [Chav. 111. § vii.
this head has nolliing peculiar to the word fxefros.] — 9- ^'« fxeaov,
in a parenthesis, Sc\i. Thuc. e. g. i\d iii, 20. but ty tw bia fxeaov
j^poiy, is, in the mean time : Herodot. Ur. c. 27- — 10. fxeaos bi-
Kaariis, Thuc. iv, 83. an arbitrator, an iimpire : v. Ov. Met. v, 364.
fieaos TToXirrjs, Thuc, a citizen of middle condition ; between the
richest and poorest. Metros, a middle-aged man : epya veojy, (oovXul
be fieauy, euj^ai be yepoiriot', v. attributed to Hesiod. — 11. ftecrov
Xa/i/3oreu', to take by the middle; also, to intercept: Plut. TrapaW.
'EXA. Kcu 'Pw^. p. 305. 307.
VI. Mot'pa. — 1. whatever is allotted or appointed bj/ providence :
Odyss. r, 592. ^scli. Dial. i. extr. [p. 653. 1. 33. ed. Basil, prim.]
Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 18. Odyss. v, 171. — Hence, by consequence, 2.
whatever is just, right. Jit, decorous, kv fioipc}, and cora fjolpau,
rightly, properly, duly, becomingly, Honi. Od. x> 54. Od. t, [352.]
Od. [y, 48.] Od. 0. [496.] Od. fi, 35.' — 3. state or condition of
life, Plato Cratyl. p. 398. 1. 20. and estimation or repute. See
Plato Crit. p. 51. I. 10. — 4. Molpai, Parcce, the deities presiding over
fate. 'Ev fioi'pq, with a genitive, is used in the same manner as ey
fiepei above, R. 3.
VII. M;jSet$ followed by fo'/re — fi^'ire, and two substantives, with
the first only of which it agrees in gender : fir]be/uiuy fxtire x"P"' /"''''^
(xvbpa, c^c. Demosth. de Fals. Leg.
VIII. ^Iri^avi), possibility. Ou^e/j/a [jLy]x,nyr), with an infinitive, it
is impossible, or it can by no means be, &c. ei ovy yttTj^oi^?/ rts
yevoiTO, wore ttoXiv ye-ieaOai epacTTwv, &c. if therefore it ivere
possible, if it could by any means come to pass, that, &:v. Plato
Symp. c. 6. cf. Plato Apol. c. 15. Phied. c. 3G. Hence an-qy^ar'm,
perplexity, dilemma, straits, and unr^^^fiyeio, to be unable: jElian,
V. H. i. 3.
IX. Interrogatively, ris fxriyavrt ; how is it possible that? &c. With
or without a negative : see Plato Phzed. [p. 28. I. 35. ed. Basil.
prim.]
X. MiKpov and fueya, or /.lelSov, are elegantly joined, both in affir-
mations and negations: tirrjpeuSmy cfiol (jvrf)(^i7)s, kui f.iiKp(i Kcii
ftei^u), in every possible ivay : Demosth. in Mid. fj/jre n XvnelcrOat,
fii'jre ijbeadai, fjii'iTe fieya/jiijTe a^iKpuv: in any degree, much or
little: Plato Phileb. p. 32. See Plato Apol. S. § 7, 6, 10, 13.
Sept. Num. xxii, 18. v. Bergl. ad Alciphr. ii. ej). 4. p 260. and
Schwartz, in Anini. ad Jo. Olear. de Stil. N. T. — So, uvb' eorh', oiire
/Lte'iivy, ovr' eXarroy \p)'i(}ucrfia ovber, Demosth. pro Cor.
XI. MiKpov, by itself, for fiiKpov be'iy, almost, very nearly : wnre
fj.1 Kpov avyrpiftfjfat, SO that he very narrowly escaped being tram-
pled to death: Plut. Pomp. In the same manner (JXtyov : uXlyov
Tols eybeKu TrnpeboQt), he was very near being, &c. Lysias c. Alcib.
See Plato Pha;dr. p. 258. 1. 44. oXiyov irancu, nearly all.
XII. M^-yas and ttoXvs, though in concord with nouns, have some-
times an adverbial sense: /ityas avlenQm for /ueyoXws, Demoslh.
01. ii. \\vd(>)yi, OpaavyofxeyM, Ka\ woXXtp peovri KaO' vfiuiy : behaving
' See also Horn. II. o, 2S6. II. tt, 307.— J. S.
Rui-Ts () — 13.] 'SeayiKos — OiKelos. 43
icith insolence, and inveighing against you without moderation :
Dcmosll). pro Cor. elirore ttoXvs dyap -Kveoi, ivith excessive, vehe-
mence : Pliilo (le Legat. ad Caiiim. Meya, in the neuter, is joined
adverbially with adjectives, us, /j.eyn oXfiios, very rich : Herodot.
!•>. 24. .Elian, V. II. viii, \J. /i t y' afieiviov, greatly superior:
Horn. 11. \p, 315. fiey cipLiTTos, by far the best: 11. /3, 274. and with
verbs, as in lloin. Ikcot. v. 291.'" — and in the same sense, ra fj.e-
yaXu ao(f)(js, — ra fteyinra w^jeXelr, Kara being understood.
XIII. Neovuos (literally jMi'e7jJ/e) is applied to every thing w/«e-
ment, excessive, immoderate: veaviKi) airovh)), ardent zeal: Hero-
dian i, 7, 3. reaviKt) bicifopa, a vehement controversy : Pint. Num.
and veai'iKuis jiaiy^aOai, to be furiously or desperately mad : JiL\.
V. H. xiv, 37.
No/iw, abl. TeTpa.TToi'os pvf^^), after the manner of a beast : Plat.
Phanlr', p. 250.
SECTION VIII.
Rule I. 'Ohos, a journey : if 6^^ cTiat, to be on a Journey :
Synes. Ep. 44. ti tou nAdrwws eh ^iKeXlav vbos, JE\. V. H. xiv,
33. f(s 6b uv eXOeh-, to go on an embassy : Eustath. II. A.
'Obijv TTotetc, ijboTToieh', and oboy obonoie'iv, to form or make a road :
oboTT ii'i (T€ i€ y av avrovs," ku\ el crvy TedpiTnrois ftovXotvro cnriivai,
Xen. Aual). And wpooboTroie'iy, figuratively, to pave a way for, to pre-
pare : TTpooboTToiw (701 TovTo, I sJiow you the ivuy to it , [fuciUtate
by preparation.] That which is prone, or has a tendency to aiiy
tiling, or is prepared for it, is said irpooboTroielaOai.
'Obus is said of a way of life : JEsch. Dial, iii, 8. Also o^ death :
V. Hor. Od. ii, 17- [v. 12.] Cf. Dorv. ad Char. p. 522.
II. Upi) vbov, obvious; also advantageous, or contributing towards
anything.
III. 'iJbov TTcipepyov is by the way, by the by, by way of digression:
Cic. ad Attic, [v, 21. vii, 1.]
IV. In the dative, obto ftablSeiv, TrpoUvai, and the like; to keep a
due course : ibt^ ds uXeQpov (iubiiovcn, they are going straight-for-
ward to destruction. Wiih kv : kv ubJ (SablSeii', allcr par chemin :
but obio (Sabiieii' simply, is to conduct one's self virtuously and
ivisely.' KaB' ibov 'irpoyjopeiv , to proceed regularly ox prosperously,
Lucian, de Gymn.
V. Obov eXdely, (which is commonly to travel or go : M\. V. H.
vi, 5.) epxeudai, or lerai, is sometimes, to form an ambuscade, to be
posted in amhiish : as obov IXdei^evai," Horn. II. o, 149. [1-51.]
'Obus, Eustath. observes, is used in contradistinction to a pitched
battle, and obov eXdt'iv signifies, to go foraging, or reconnoitring, or
to take the height of an enemy^s ivalls, &c.
Ohe'ios. — oIkeIov, a characteristic, a peculiarity : t6v rpoirov eyvw-
aav, Kn\ tG)v i'lXXwv oIkciwv ejATreipoi eyerorro, Plato Phaedr. p. 232.
in tin.
"• See II. a, 78. Odyss, X, 484. — J. S. " Wliicli the Sclioliast interprets, ei'r
" The true reading is supposed to be iviZpav KanKQilv, — J. S.
ouTQts, iii, 2, § 15. — J. S.
44 0(\('a — Otos. [Chaf, III. § viii.
Okia, a house ; oIkos, goods, personal estate; oIkovo^os, a steward;
oiKorofins, said of a womiin, a housewije : Lysias pro Erat.
VI. Ows, (corresponding to toiovtds, expressed or undersCood,)
with ail ilitinilive, as: roiov-ov^ arOinljTrovs, o'iovs fieduadevras op-)(€~icr-
6ai Toiavra, out, &c. men of such abandoned characters as to get
drunk and dance in such a manner, as, Sic. Demobili. Ol. ii. See
Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 37. ii, 9, 3. iii, 11, I. and Schwarz. ad Theophr.
Ch. c. 1. also Plato Plia?d. c. 28. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, l6. Mem. i, 4,
0. With a finite verb : toiovtovs o'iol (paiyovrai, &c. Xen. Mem. iii,
6, ]6. if. ad Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 3.
VII. For 0(70S, with ■)(_p6vos : ovre tuv *E\Xa§a Kpart'iiras ro'is owXois !>
^iXimros, o'lov Kara$ev^ai Kcit Tiddaarevaai j^pupov err^^ev : sufficient
time to subject and tame them : Pint. Alex.
In the followinj; unusnal forms olos appears to be redundant : el
f.tkv yt'tp r(s uvr]p laTiv kv avTols, oios e f^Tce ipo s iroXef^mv kci) ciywvwj' :
for if there is among them any man experienced in tear and engage-
ments: Demosth. Ol. ii. el ^er rot in> uvriXoyiKos olos ai/jp,
but if a contentious man ivere present : Plato Tbea;t. p. 197. but i!i
reality there is an ellipsis — {toiovtus) o'los {tanv ai'T/p) efirreipos, dtc.
Sometimes olos, agreeing with a substantive, has afier it an accusative
of another substantive expressing some quality of the former ; as,
virep oluiv (n'TU}v 'AOrjvolwy t))p uy^apiariar, for the Athenians,
so ungratiful as they are : Lucian, Dem. Enc. i. e. vrcp ov-i,)s
(f)(^apiijrwv old elaiv ol 'Adqyaloi. — Sometimes, by attraction, it is,
will) its noun or pronoun, put in the same case as its correlative
Toiovros, although ordinary syntax vvi-uld have required another ; as,
X»pic6fX€ioy o'/(j) (Toi cii'^p't, obliging such a man as you : Xen. l\Iem.
ii, 9. 3. i. e. urtpi toiovti^, olos au el.
VIII. Oios for dis, as: aW oloi nurres ye uTrpayfioves ical (jiiXo-
irpayfjioies rvy)(_i'novair, but as all idle people are apt to be busy med-
dlers. Tor ws, hoiv, I. c. in how great a degree: olos p.iyns kuI
be IV 6s Ktyhvvos y'jywvialir] \ how great and dreadful a battle was
fought! Lys. in Orat. Fun. [p. 98. I. 11. Rrisk.]
Olos put alone, to indicate qualities or character indefinitely : ovre
Tip TToXejjiuo eTreXf)6yTi aynyuKTriiti' e^ei, (for irape^ei, v. not. ad (.ireg.
Cor. ed. Scha;f. p. 863) v(p' o'lwv Ka».o7r(j0e7, ovre, &c. neither to a?i
enemy who has invaded her does she afford a pretext for indignation
on account of the character of those by whom he suffers, nor, &c.
Tliuc. ii. c. 41. intiuialing that it could be no disgrace to be over-
come by the Athenians. — Kal olos, like is que, or et is, in Latin,
in the sense of khi tuvtu : ttoXXuI fjev cnre^Oeiai ^loi yeyorutrt, kuI
01 HI yf^aXenajTUTai Kfii ftapvTarai: I have incurred many enmities,
and those too most rancorous and oppressive: Plato Apol. c. 9 —
privatas cansas, ct cas teniies, agimus, ttc. Cic. ad Div. ix, 21.
IX. Olos, ready, willing, prepared; as, olos etf.n virep irarpibos
kitbvieveiy. — Prone, apt; oios peTutpfpnv tu rxKevr), cic. Theoph.
Etii. Ch. [c. 10. p. 55. I. 5. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] rwyx"''*'' «»' oloy
uvaneiOeirOui, is of a nature to be easily persuaded : Plato Gorg. p.
493. Xoyoi oloi el s TU biKaoTt'ipia, suited, accommodated, to : Plato
Eulhjd. Olos, aufl oh'n re, able: olos Te Xfym, able to speak. [A
shorter phrase for the c<piividfnt and more regular ouv, roiovros ware
Rule 6—13.] OIov. 45
Xe'yeti'. re is a remnant of antique langiiagi', sigiu tying fere, as I lie
Latin que.] — In tlie niidtlle of" a sentence r ttoXcis unoaas euny olos
re ws TrXetaras ufelffdai tov irvXXoyuv riov 'A)(a*d)i' : as many as he
possibly could: Pans, in Acli. p. 418/ In tlie neuter ouJv -e,
possible: ov)(^ ulov re eariv, it is impossible ; [in the beginnin<j of a
sentence ecrTi b' oi'^ olov re, Isocr. Paneg. p. 131.] and in other cases,
e. g. the genitive : f/ bvtniTo tiKoveiv tK tov fxfi o'lov re ; could he hear
after previous inability to hear? TEsch. Dial, we/jj -nXoiir. p. 72.
and in the plural neuter: x"'P"^^* iroXXal elm, bi' wv ov^ ola re
€JTi 7r/\ee«v : through which it is impossible to sail : Herodot. ii.
X. Ovbk^' cloy, or fir)hkv oiov, preestat, it is better: uW ovhkv
o'lov tor' aicoDffta tCjv kirwv. but it will be better to hear the verses;
there is nothing like hearing the verses : Aristoph. Av. c)66. ovbeu
yap 01 ov ctKoueiv avrov rov vofiov, car il n'y a rien de tel, que
d'entendre la lay mane: Deraosth. in Mid. [Nihil vefaf h vlbey
Xe'ipoy with an iiifiiiitive ; it may be as icell to, &c. See Schol.
Aristoph. Nub. ad v, [)J . \). jg. I. 50. of Bekker's ed. printed for
Priestley, 182b". and ad v. J 45. p. 82. 1. 5.]
XI. Ovx f'*'"'* sn<^J )"') o'loy, not only not ; '^I'x oTov ibipeXeli' 8u-
vair ciy rous (piXovs, aXX' ovb' aurj/v aw^eiv : she ivould be so far from
being able to benefit her friends, that she ivould be unable evtn to
save herself: Pol^h. So hi) oluy in b. v. — See Wessel. ad Diod. S.
iii, 18.
XII. Olor alone, /or instance, for example ; and in tlie same sense
o'loy b)) Xeyuj, nr frj/j'i, an I oioy ri Xiyio. (J'iov, and olorei, for waei,
Cjaavei, umrepel, wairepareX, as it were, as if. And oluvirep el
following vfjoioy, Xen. Cyrop. i. c. ig. "Opoioy is sotnetimes fol-
lowed by wa^repayel, or warrep ay el, as in ^schin. Ep. xi. and
by ws, or uirei, as in ^Eschin. Dial, de Rlort. c. 14. oi/j^ 6f.ioioy —
k-fii, ii is not the same as ; or, it is one thing to, &c. and another
thing to, Sec. Aristiii. pro Quatuorv. p. 225.*
Xill. Old, neut. pUir., and ola ye, and ola S»), for are h), utpote,
quippe : oln b)) tpftaXoyros rov vbaros, seeing that the xvater had
flowed in, the water having flowed in: Herodot. ii, p. 111. B.
avrus — T))v rrjfroy, oia b}) Gcov, ehpapojs bieKt'xjfurjTfy: as being a god :
Plato Crif. p. 113. v. Sopl). Aj. 1042. CTrJ a-avpo'io fiopov rerXrjKas
eTrtaive'iv Oln flpoTOi' (in thy nature as man ;) rpiTnrr] be -n-vXas Xines
'Auboi-rios Ola Oeos : {in thy nature as God; as bring God;) (>rfg.
Naz. carni. xiii. Ola, in siich a manner: ola r))v ravy ael kvkXm
irepuaTarai naXXr] TTuyrvbmra, Arislid. Panatll. oV ayopeveis,* in such
P " At sequente substantive dativi ca- o Th vpayixa S/xoiov i$6Kei /xot, KaQ-
sus, pro intelligeve, kc. ijoiiilur. Piat. direp tiv ei m, &c. Lucian, Heviv.
Ion. e« 7ap Te'xi'T) oiJs T€ ^o-fia, .sj «r/e J-a- p. 408. A. ed. Saliiiur. lifxaiov ws ^1
teres." Ilongeveeii. — but in that passage, tis, Lucian, Reviv. p. 411. E. ofioiov —
[which is ill J). 3(il.l. 15. ed. Basil, pnm ] Hffirep iiu el ris, Dtmosth. in Lair
rex>'V '^O's ""' dc|H'iul on ofos. — iravTl p. 032, 1. 15. Ileisk. Lucian, de Merc
Sri^o'^,'6Tirex''r) KaliiricrT'fi/xri â– repi'Oij.Tipou Cond. p. 489. D. S/xoioy uxrirep el
Xiyeiv aSivaros e7. et yap rix"]) (At'7«ii' rts, Arislot. Rliet. c. 20. Lucian, ller-
scil.) oUs re ^ada, Kal wtpl twv aWwv mot. p. (JOS. C. C13. A. — J. S.
^-.-ii-MT/Tif* n-.rH..-.-r.i.. \/'^,^,„ ,SAf T-* 'k,, 3i^ii^ * Set? tUr -*i--".-i-.« -^^ vi..^ », ro :..
Aoyi^i'fi,ivos.
r
7roL7]Tc!>v airavTiDf Xiyuv olus t' ii.y ^a6a. * .See the Abridsm. of Bos, p. 73. in
46 'Op-/;/— "0(Tos. [Chap. in. § ix.
a mnnntr do you speak, (in u had sense,) or on account of what you
say: IJom. Od. p, 479- '^t 3S8. See also Horn. I!, e, 758. In a
feiiiiilar sense oVctu Q. Cal. Paral. ix, 424.
Tlie following is a summary of Uie uses of tlie particle o'lov : — 1.
as, followed by ovTii), so : Plato Pliicdr. p. 225. — 2. as, for example:
Plato Plia-dr. p. 340. — 3. about ; oloy bha arablovs, Tliuc. iv,
.90. — 4. 171 what a manner ! how ! Horn. Od. /3, 239. Aristoph. Pac.
33.
XIV. 'Opyvj, conimonly anger, sometimes means rpowos, natural
disposition, manniTs, affections, desires, feelings: ou tt} hv-tj opy^
(it'cnreidufjeiovs re TrnXf/jeTc, Knl iv rw cpyw Trpt'i <tcto» -as, '1 hue. 1.
[c. 140.] p. 92. — [ftpyi) and Tpuiros are Ijowever distinguished by
Herodot. \\, 128. See Theogn. v. 958.] tcis opyas upoiovy, to as-
similatemcns manners or dispositions: Thiic. iii. p. 227- Hence
evopyrjTws, modtratdy : Thiic. i. c. 122.
XV. In the plural, opyas eTnijiepeiv, wit!) a dative, to comply ivith
the wishes of a person ; to gratify : 'Aoruoj^oi/ — e 7rt(f)epo jtu opyas
T(o-(7fi^fpj'f(, Thuc. viii. c. 83. [p. 253. 1. ll.ed. Bekk.] and Cralinus
(cited hy the Scholiast of Thuc. 1. c.) says, t)\v MovaiKi^v atcopecrrovs
eTTujiepeir opyas ppOTols aiucppoai.
SECTION IX.— "O 00s.
Rule I. In the plural, for the relative 0$ : twj' urj)(^o\ovuivwv vepl
Tt)y 'EjWnta, orroi peWovaiv eh uKpoy eXavvtiv ttis y\wrr>;s : as many
as; all icho. In this sense it is mostly subjoined to Trds ; and the
verb substantive is often understood; as, 7ra>'G' ocra S.Q)a yEpau'ia
Kai epvbpa Kcil Trrqva to iraXaiov vjitx^ityva yy, Philo Jud. de Cont. Ling,
p. 25 1 . for in uhatever case Trds may be, ocroi follows in the nominative ;
as, rovs ey ohparu tt uvt as oaoi nXaytjres ktu uTrXayats u(tt epes,
Philo Jud. de Monarchia i. And so, when, instead of a genitive
following partitive words, a nominative is put, with whidi oaoi agrees ;
as, ou Tis TOi Tcr fivOoy uyoaaerai, oacroi 'Aj^aioi, of all the Greeks:
for ov Tts 'Axatwv, Horn. II. i, 55. in the sanie manner orroVos
is used, but less frequently: oKvaai rov awfxaTos vnr^peaiui ij rys
j/'U)(>7s, llippocr. de Insonui. paulo post iuit.
II. Whence ef' onuy (or oaa), â– tap oaoy, kuQ" uaor, SO far forth OS,
as far as, inasmuch as, &c. Kafl' oaov av ay^ib, Kara roaovroy (inr}-
Oi'icru/ : as far as I may be able. T>f/)' oaor is put before superlatives,
to increase their force ; us, vrrros l(f oaov ijbitJTos, the sweetest sleep
that can possibly be: Liician, in Navig. And so orroy alone: oaov
r^x'To, Eurip. Tio. 295.
III. rifip' o'aoj' signifies also except that, baling that.
IV. rifi^j' uTiiy signifies aUo wherefore, on which account ; and els
oaoy, so far forth as; in as far as. 'E$ ooroi' is also joined with
sup<Tlati\es to augment their signification: iy kvkXm irepttppunaoviytv
is i'lrrov fiatcpoTUTuy, to as great an extent as possible: Arr. de
Exp. Al. ii. c. 19.
Rule i — lo.] "Ocos. 47
V. ria/i' (jcroy, C072trarili/ to, beside: xpy'taaoOal rivi -nap' oanv
(or Trap' Z) TtetpvKt, to put a thing to a use for which it is not natu-
rally or properly suited ; -rrap oaov el, unless; Trap iaov he'i,
beyond propriety.
VI. ' Oaov anil oau, witli eTrt and a dative, signify reach of ability :
n(pe\oiX€t'T]v yfias ■y^iJi'i/.iUTa ttoWu, uaov lir' avrfj, as fai' (IS in her
li/y : Luciai), Asiii. In the same sense, uaov, or ti'aa, ye iJKei err' t/^e,
or e($ ejLte, or els vaov iJKu) bvi'ui.i€ws, to the extent of my power. "Oaay
c'tTTo is as far as one may Judge froin : vcrov uno tov avjiiroaiov, rov
TI\uTwyd fjoi boKe'is Xeyfiv : as far as I can conjecture from your
using the tvord av^iruaiov, [iiiclu(K'd in airto-u/iTrocrtu^w preceding] :
Liieian, Lexiph, [p. ^55. D. ed. Salmur.]
VII. "Oo-os is added to other words, when it has an aiif;nientalive
force; as, /ivpioi vaoi, irXelora orra. -^piinaTa eXafle Qav fXdfj- a
uaa, Plato Hipp. M. p. C82. 1. 27- V. Hor. Od. i, 27, 6. ox>^os
vvep(l>v ))s offos, Arislopii. Nub. 750. TrpoT^a e;nbibovs TrXetfrrTj c
oai]r, Heliodor. vi. S. So after a substantive: irXijOos ucrov
Ixf^vwv, Athen. p. 224. B. V. Casaub. ad Allien, p. 395. In the
same way IjXIkos : ipiXepyot' bo^ai cot j^pijoroj', — Qciv^aoTuv ijXiuov,
Demosth. pro Pliorm. p. 6"05. I. 34. [p. 957. 1. 28. Keisk.] — and ws,
Eurip. Ipli. A. 54:5. v. Biunck. on Aristoph. Lys. 1J4S.
After an enuuier.ition, kcu aXXoi uaoi, kcu aXXa van, signify and the
like.
V' ill. "Otja K^fje (for i.fi< e/je,) elbirnt, is as far at least as I know ;
OCX a k<^ijioi boKeh', as fur at least as it appears to me. So orrn i.(Jfie
tviatjOai. And ye, <jf wiiicli (.ui alone in this piirase seems to have
the foree, is sometimes added : ou)^ oaa ye i:(^i,ue bpq.r, Luciaii, in Jov.
J rajr.
IX. "Oaor, as long as, as far as, as much as, and the like, (accord-
ing to the purport of what precedes it,) with an inlinitive of a pur-
pose, motive, or end; as, nepte/Aeire â– ^^poroi', uaov naraiTTfi'ycn to.
Kivovfxera toip Trpay/jaruv : he waited long e7lough to, &c. aXXZ/Xwi'
bieart]ini' orjov ovK if e/.(/^5oXa7s yeyeadai twv vaaiLr, SO far as not
to be U'ithin reach, iScc. ) eyud^erot re ra avru)%> ei^acTTOi, orrov inroCrji'l
bestowing Just so much culture each on their territories as enabled
them lo live: Thuc. i. [e. 2.] (capTrof^opZ/crw uacov en icnrela ai aoi,
rpuye : I shall bear fruit enough, villain goat, for wine to pour on
thee when thou art sacrijiced: epigr. attributed to Kvenus. 'Ihe
form is hjller in Arrian : roaovTuv Kadel^en, tTis yi'is, uaop e^npKel
evTCT aipdai rw aw^ari : you shall possess as 7nuch of the land as
suffices for the burial of your corpse: Exp. AI. vii. c. 1. In the
following, tc,e(TTiy, or soineliiing equivalent, seems to be understood :
TTtiovmy iaov ap-Traffd i, the dogs drink as much as they can take
by snatches : MX. V. H. i, 4. vaa<i)TZQv, oanv -olm Tptrrl bciKTvXoiiTi
Xafteli', peXiTi pllcis : as much as one can take up icith three fingers :
Hippocr. de Morb. p. 4y6',
X. Y]poe)(fiv evQvi e^ 'VX''* ''"X ''^"''^i' XaiOaieci', to become at once
too eminent to be concealed: Aristid. Panath. p. 202. [from Bud.
P- 479-] Tlie construction seems to be such as if he had written,
TT^Ofej^eu' ov ToaovTor wore XaiOurety.
48 "Orros. [Chap. m. § ix.
XI. "Oanv re in the more ancient writers, as Homer,' and Herodo-
tus, and ouoy alone in the more niodtrn, occur for about: oaov re
Tpiu)v y^epeujv oboy Inrkynvras, Herodol. V. c. Jv, l'.^2. [See oil Sect,
viii. Rule 9. o'los tc] o(70v efjbofji'iKopra arahiovs, Arrian, i. p. 36.
1. 22. ofTov bv Ti rpta arubia, Plato Ph'<pdr. p. 22y. And with
ts redundantly: oaoi' es ^^tA/ows, Pans, in Ach. p. 421. 1. 35,
Xn. "Oaof, only : bq.ba Tis }ifi^ievr\v Xa/Swr, 6<tov VTtrjveyKer , f7ra
fii (KpeT-nt : one htuin^ taken a lighted torch, only just puts it
under, and then ivithdraws it again: Plut. in Publ. See Plato
Kpigr. 3. Diosc. Epigr. 4. 'J'lieocr. i, 45. xxv, 73. Avist. pro Qnat.
p. 31.9. rrXiiv vaov Aoyw, except in mere words only, (opposed
to reality,) Pans, in Arc. p. 457- "nd p. 462. oaov y ar ahroi
/.ii) â– noTi\pavu)r )(^fpo~tf, only 7iot touching it myself: as far as I can
without using my own hands to do it : wSoph. 'J'rach. 1216.
Xni. "Ocror avTiKct, 6/TOV cvrrii), otjoi' chbeirw, iaov ovK ijbr], jam Jum,
foriltivith : oaor avriKu rov npayfiuros iixi/Ofxai, I Will presently
Sit about the affair ; kaopfvov oaov ovheiru), on the point of being ;
about to be immediately : Herodian, i. c. 13. oaov ovk ifbT} aTrijK-
Oe»', il nc fail que de parlir ;" tqv ouov ov nnpoi-u iriAepov, the war
ivhich is en the point of commencing : Thuc. i, p. 26. See Dorv.
ad Char. p. 6u2. seq. ed. Lips.
XIV\ The expression is applied to other things besides ^/»?e ; as,
oaov OVK avToirrrjs yevopevos, having been almost an eye-witness ;
all but an eyc-ivitness.
XV. With G^^ebor, redundantly: erj^eSoj' oaov iJKoyros, Euseb.
Praep. 13.
XVI. "Otov, ijXlKoy, owr, Imdlov, between two substantives, agree
with I he first rather than with the last ; as, irayjDi oaov, or ijXiKov, 6
bc'iKrvXos, the thickness of a finger.
To specify quantity, oaov is put absolutely in the neuter : — 1, be-
tween two substantives in the same case, without regard to number
or gender; as, /it'^as rhv ottov aiXfiov oaov rpiwfioXov, having
mixed as much as three oboli of benzoin: Hippocr. de Nat. Mul.
p. 570. rptftoXovs oaov Koyy^riv, lb. and with arj ellipsis of
the first substantive, Xen. Cyrop, iii, 3, 15. — 2. with tiie first sub-
stantive in the genitive : biK-upvov Kpr]TiKov oaov d/Jo\oi', Hip-
pocr. lb. — 3. with a participle: Xevk-oiov Kap-rruv, oaov *»' roTs rpiai
baicTvXnis Xaftwv: seed of tvhite violet, as much as you can take in
three fingers : Hippocr. lb. — 4. with an infinitive; see an example
at the end of Rule 9-
"Oaa, for the purposes of, in the capacity of, for, as: r^ Xtl^w bk
— oaa uKpoTToXei — kypGtvro, Pans, in Arc. p. 527- vvKr\ pkv oaairep
yipe.p(f c-^pijro, Xen. Aues. vi, 6.
"Oaus, with a substantive, is sometimes equivalent to a superlative
•■B69pou opv^ai '6aov re irxryovaiov gone but an instant. Nc tohs <^tonnez
fv9a Kol ivQa, Odyss. k, .017. — J. S. pas de voir le Viconitc de la soite : it tie
' I take ihese Greek words to mean,
he is all hut gone, he is on the point of
going ; wlicreas the I'Vencli givi-n by Vi- die. sc. 12. — J- S.
ger signifies, he is just gone, he has been
fait que sortir d'uiie maladie qui lui a
rendu le visage i)ale. Molicre, Prec. Ri-
RVLE 11 — IC] "Oaos—Uali. 49
adverb: liffuf rax"^' with the utmost speed: Soph. Aj. IOO9.
"Offw ill tlie dative, wit!) or without er, signifies while: oaip be
vvroi avveari'iKatjiy, ev tooovt w, &c., Pans, in Messen. p. 228. 1. 23.
Also until : er orr^ ^' ay iraXo' e\9w<ri, Od^/jra /Lo/re hrftrai — fir]hkva,
fti'ire, &c. Thiif. iii. c. 2S.
With words of time it may sometimes be translated every, or by
an adverb: (p'':puvi (iirotpcpeiv oaa err), to pay tribute every year, ot
annually : Art. de Exp. Al. i. p. 55. 1. 36. and iii. c. 17. iv. c. 8.
oaot fiijvei, every month, monthly : Deniosth. in Timocr. p. 480.
1. 32. [p. 7-tt. I. 25. Reisk.] oam ^/uepor, Thuc. Viii. 64.* or in
one word oatjijfpai, Aristoph. Pint. IOO7. [IOO6.] Arr. Exp. Al. iii.
c. 26\ every day, daily, oaai ivKres, Lucian, Philops. p. 479» B.
every night, nightly: avtbu'iyofiev aWi'/Xois oirai re iifjiepai Kal
ocrai vvKres, Danmsr. in Bibl. Phot. p. 068. The phrase appears
fuller in Honi. Od. l 93. See Hor. Od. ii, 14, 5.
"Oaov oaov is used for a very little: Aristoph. Vesp. 213. atrdpov-
aiv ouov oaov Tijs ^i^pas, they sow but a little modicum of the land :
Arr. Ind. s. 29. ^iKpov oaov oaov, Hebr. x, 37. See Wakef.
Siiv. Crit. vol. v. p. 146. sq.
SECTION X.
Rule I. Ovpos, or ovpios avenos, (called by Homer Atoj
ovpos, and ufieros ovpos,) a fair tvind: kut ovpov (pepeadat, to sail
be/ore the wind.
II. In the same sense, es ovpov Karuariirai, ovpla ?rXw j^pi'/TaCTSai,
ei ovpias (5T»'oi/s viz.) nXelv, and, in one word, ovpiobpufielv, and kqtov-
pujaat. Also ovpiq. delv, Aristoph. Hence enovpi^to, to propel with
a fair wind; and ti!i;uralively, to succeed (v. transitive;") and
eTTovptniw, Lucian ; and (.nroupow, Polyb. [1.] to spread the sails to a
fair wind. [This is Bndaeus's explication. Viger adopts Suidas's, ^o
sail prosperously ; making il a verb neuter.]
III. The Greeks sometimes say the sons (tt nib es) of persons, when
Ihey mean the persons themselves; thus, pnropujy, iarpwy, (piXuaotpwv,
ypaipetov iralbe s, for rhetoricians, physicians, philosophers, painters.
Avariiv(jiv va'tb es, unfortunate, unhappy persons ; KeXruiv iralbes,
Gauls. So Kww»/ iralbes, IE]. V. H. i, 29. QerraXoJv Tralbes,
iii, 1. nalbes ArfXiwv, iv, 28. but in al! these last passages persons
are spoken of as relating events wiiich had happened in former times,
and had been handed down to them by their forefathers.
Hals, the concrete lerni, is sometimes used for vaibia, the abstract ;
as ev iraib\,in boyhood. .\iid so fxeipuKiov : bu>:pvov kv avrt^ cKpelvai
« The true reading is djriufpai. See it is a verb neuter : rp4xe vvv, Tpf'xe vvv,
Bekker's edition.— J. S. koto toi/j K6paKas inovplaas, Thesm. 122G.
" 'AAA' o6ti Tainr} chv (ppduyj/x iirovpt- — J. S.
<ras, Eurip. Androni. 611. In Aristoph.
Viger. G
50 rids. [Chap. hi. % \.
ei' f.ieipri Ki(f) airoOarofTi, having died in youth : Pliilostr. He Vit.
Soph, in Hermutr.
IV. E(s itciTav, {â– ^peiav or tiie like), 'fit ^eXencrQeis 6 bTjuos, els
TTurrav i'lbrj ridaaos avro'ts eyeyotei : fo7' all purposes : Plut. ill Pomp.
1. Witli the article, navTes is used to signify the extreme or utmost
iiuml)er of what is menlioneil ; (equivalent to ro ui/^iTrav, Plut. L\curg.
p. 41.) as roeti otseras tovs Truirns trvveTrt'iyeTO, he tOok ivith him
three domestics in alt: Allien, vi, e^nKocriui yuaXiora ol -rravres,
Tiiuc. iii, 85. ra j-iei/ irufTci yeyoi'ws err) 7reir//*:orra (cat e^,
Plut. in Ctes. (is ehai ras ttiktcis bei:a, SO that they (the Sibyls)
ivere all together, or in all, ten: JE\. V. H. xii, 3.). See Clark,
ad Horn. II. ?/, l6'l. k, 570. Burn), ad Grat. Cyn. 1 6. But when
the article is omitted, the word sit^nities either all without excep-
tion, as, Movaui krrea ttckjcii, all the nine Muses, every one of
them: or, when things of different kinds are mentioned, it signifies
that the number stated is to be taken as meant of each kind ; as,
KTi)vea re yiip tu dvaijjn n ay r a Tpi(T)^l\ia edvae, Herodot. i, 50.
V. Wessel. and Valck. ad Herodot. iv, 87.
2. "ATram, with all zeal or care:" tin-ao-t yhp ijOeXe roiis iralbas rfjs
kv 'Pw/ijy hiairt]'; ■)(^pi](jTi']i aTToXrtveii', Herodian iii, 13. — 3. iu the
accus. neut. plur. eilipticall\ : ri yap rjfuv boKel rpe^etv roy ovov tov-
Tov, TTfirra uraraTrtVroj'ra ; tumbling down every where, ox always :
Lucian, Asin. [p. 131. A. ed. Sahnur.] irdvra 6' eriKa 'i'rjibiws, in
each mode of contest : Horn. II. e, SOZ- fn all respects, Aristoph.
Nub. 1432. Ran. 1248. Theogn. 441. 1159. ^1- V. H. xii, 25.
irdvr ara\t:is, utterly void of courage or spirit: Soph. El. 297.
[301.] Fully expressed, Kara narTa, Act. Ap. xvii, 22. — 4. Tray- a
yap Ti'jaar i) rpa'^e'tnt irirpai, — >*/ \puf.ifAOi ftiidelat : for all tcas Craggy
1'ocks, or deep sands ; for there ivas nothing but, Arc. Pliilo Jud. de
Vit. Moys. i. — 5, Sometimes was, in concord with a subslanlive, is
efpiivalent to the adv. irairtvs; as, vd/ra aray/cij fxiae'iv tovs
alriovs, you must unavoidably ; you cannot but, &c. Epict. Euch.
c. 38. and c. 18. Aristoj)li. Pace 373. uttus Kirbvyos, l^ind. Nem.
8. Trdrja /3Xu/3r?, (/Egisihus,) utterly pestihnt: Soph. El. 297.
[301.] -nay - ovvarr iov errriy, it is quite the contrary: Plato
Soph. V. Virg. /En. v, 800. See Ikunck. ad Soph. El. 301.
Phil. 927. — G- TO nay neXayoi, the open or mid sea. — 7- for oXos :
Tt)y <f>riTyr]y tovtrav ■^(^nXi^eijv irdaay, Herodot. ix, 70. — 8. bia irarToSy
always: vSoph. Aj. 704. Herodot. i, 122. — 9. ^^ J"" T^dv, omnino :
yEsch. Choeph. 6"S2. 939- Eiim. 81. — 10. Trnira elrni rtyi, to be
every thing to a person ; to be all in all to him : Herodot. iii, 157.
vii, 156. V. Berg. p. 236'. ad AUiphr. ii, 3 — but with the article,
?)i' re (It t'y r<f) Xoyto ra Trarra >'/ Ki/i w, is, and he talked of nothing
else but of Cijno : Herodot. i, 122. — 1 1 . ttcIs for irnrToba-nus, Trayro'ios,
of every kind: oliDvolai re ndcri, Horn. [II. a, 5.] — 12. to nny, the
vulgar, the common herd: Pind, 01. ii, 153."
" Tliis interpretation of Iloogereen's, "Adil: — M.ds -rruv ■rrpoi\-i]}^vQ( yuox-
omni studio \o\ cura, appears very (pies- dripias, for €ij -nafrav /uox^'/pit'', l^f-
tionable. — .I.S. inosth. Ol.iii. p. 2y. I. 17. Rt'iak. tis -nav
RULK 4 — 7.]
1 Wcifjoi — IlXtov.
51
V. riAoV/Lio's or TrXte/tyuos. — fri TrXoi/jtoy ovTt»v , afjyji yhft tfif ^era-
irojpov : the lime for safe navigation being not yet passed : Pliilo in
Legat. So in I lie conipar. 'I'liiic. i. p. 5. [c. 7-1 and, TrXwV/jwrepa
iyevero izaf) (i\\)/\ous, their intercourse by sea was rendered easier
and safer: Time, i, [c. 8 ] YWdiinus, (of a place,) safe for naviga-
tion ; nXai/uos ynvs, sea-worlhy : [Time, i, 21).]
VI. YluXi-ein, political conduct ; measures of a public man : De-
inostli. pro Cor. [p. '-257. I. 7. Reisk.]
VII. rioXi/j, in great force, having numerous forces : iroKvv fxev iu
yf], TToXui' be tv OaXuafft]: I'liif, (ic Fort. Honi. lloXvs is also said of a
j)erson nuich spoken about : TroXvf fth- tov 'A\ei,a}biJ()y kuI *bi\imrov
ey rals biaf3oXa~is <p€pu)v, perpetually naming, (or, objecting to me)
Alexander and Philip in your calumnies : ^sch. c. Cirs. [p.
615. I. 5. Reibk.] cf. .Esch. in Tiinarcli. [p. l63. I. 7- Reisk.'] aol
be TToXvs fxey u KaXXlrrrparos, Callistratus will be an ample topic :
Lucian, Dern. Enc. p. 8y2.
rioXus, witii a gen. much, a great part : rjs (\ujpui) uyeiv i:a\ cpipeiv
larl ttoAXjji', Deniosll). Phil. in. p. 50. 1. 13. In the phir. with
the article and a gen. most, the greater part: ri](Ti(l>Twv tovs
iroXXoiis wkiaay, Tliuc. i, 12. Xen. Anab. v, 6, 1.9' VleXoTrov-
a TToXXa, Time, i, 2. and the superl. in the singular has
iiKeXlas TO TtXe'iar (IV, Thuc. i, 12.
viicrov T
the same sense
nXtoj', for TrXeoj'e/iTjjyL/n, advantage: ri irXeoy tov rei-^ovs i]y ;
where teas the advantage of the ivall ? what use in the ic^all? Aristid.
pro Quat. p. 315. ohhev nXeov civroJ yiyierni, Tt)v Kpiciv uwo-
fvyoi'Ti: he has gained nothing by his acquittal: Arr. Exp.
Alex, iii, 27. See Isocr. Paneg. [p. 98. 1. 1. ed. Battie. Cantab.
1729'] *'* ravToy TrtpiTpey^eiv fivpit'tKts, vvhkv irXiov TroioOrres:
to no purpose, tvithout advancing: Plato Tlieeet. 0< ttoXXoi, the
multitude. VloXi/s is said of what exceeds, or is superlative in
any respect:^ ttotui.ios ttoXvs, rushing ivith a vehement tide: see
Virg. iTEn. vi, ()59- ttoXv KUkor, extremity of evil: Thuc. ii, 31.
iroXvs XaXuiy, talkative to excess: JFA.V. H. xii, 14. -rrolijcris etrri
Ti noXij, the meaning of Troirjats is very comprehensive: Plato
i\6wv, having undergone extremily of
suffering: Demosth. in Conoii. p. 12(51.
1. 5. — 14. TO Tray, adverbially, wholly,
entirely, altogether : Srb KaXhv â– noOopwrra,
rb irav Mdos\ 'I lieocr. Id. iii, 18. ivifi-
prjfiariKcis, av7\ rod Si6\ou, Scliol. — 15.
â– n-dvT exeis, ynu comyrihend the matter
thoroughly ; you fake the thing exactly :
Aristoph. Av. 14G0. — 10. iravru^ p.a\\o:',
most certainly, indisputably : Plato P!ia;d.
p. 28. 1. 37. ed. lias. prim. ; really, in-
deed, Plat. Plisedr. p. 196. 1. G.— 17.
e'/c iravThs, hy all means, indisprnstibly ;
XpV *'' TravTos ^ rhv ZiaveixovTa'i\iuiv
«X«"'> ^ "rh" UpoiJ.T]d(ws fifpida ipipiadai,
Lucian, de Merc. Coiid. p. 48.5. c. ed.
Sahnur. So (^airavros, Lucian, Reviv.
p. 116. E. ed. Salin. — 18. ei ft?/ Trepl
•navrSs fxoi ijV OMilv eV STjixoKparia, if
it ivcre not my paramount care, my chief
solicitude, above all other considerations
with me, all in all to me : Solou's leit. to
Crcus. in Diog. Lacrt.^ — J. S.
*' rioAi/s /xfv yep & ^'iKnnros ecrrai, for
there will be a great deal about Philip,
(in DeniOKthtnes's defuiice of Timarclius,
viz.)— J.S.
y Oi/Vto S' 7V iroXls, SiffT, so mighty
was he, &:c. Aristopb. Av. 488. ovrws
^u Kal eXiffSai (tal KaTa(ppov^aai ttoKvs,
SI) great was he both in, ivc. Uiog. Laert.
in Aristipp. -iroXhs yap, iroKvs, nal
To>//77po's tariv dudpcciros : immoderately
tronblesotne: Deniostii. adv. Losol. ]).
1024. 1. 3. Reisk.
The folluwiiig phrases may be added :
52 ripay^a — Irj/jiewy. [ChaP. III. § xi.
Symp. wfja TToWi}, late : Mark vi, 35. iroXvs for TroXXckts, Callim.
Dian. 27- Heliodor. vi, 4.
Vill. Ylpdyfja. — AvToJ ovbev ear if en ir pay fxa TTpos riis avidrjKas
Tavras, he has no longer any thins; to do with, &c. any concern in :
Deniosth. eky be \LeubFi, ovbey bi) 7rpdy/ua : 7io mailer ; it does not
signify: Plato Symp. npriy^a (.levroi ovbev f tto it'i trav t o, they
cared not, they concerned not themselves about it: Herodot. Er. c.
63. ol er TTphyjxaai, those entrusted with public ajfairs, icith the
government of a state: Thuc*
Like xpfina, it is said of any thing that surpasses: YlnyeXotreia hk
Mcya Trpay^a, Eubul. ap. Ath. Deipii. xiii. p. 339." «« admirable
or excelltnt woman.
IX. ripa^fs, in a forensic use: r»)v irpa^Lv elrai (^ eyds Kai ajjcpolv,
a form adcied in some legal instruments, to signify that tlie parties
are bound jointly and severally, each to be bound and liable for
the whole.
X. Ylpii^is, stratagem, trick, intrigue, [and so vpayfia, Greg.
Cypr. in Ep] and 7rpalit:oTrelv nva, or ttoXiv, Ac. to circumvent^
outwit, trick, a person ; to take a town by artifice.^
XI. Y\p6iT)(ji]na., ornament, glory: lapbeis, to Trpoey^ima r»7s —
fiyefjovias, Plut. in Alex.
XII. rip(jffx»]/^a, mask, screen, pretence, color, pretext : v. Thuc. i.
p. 64.
XIII. In this sense it is often put absolutely, and opposed to ro 6*
aXrjdes: ostensibly, so and so, but in reality, &c. — In the same
manner Trpo^ao-ir jxkv is opposed to rij S' aXrjOei^, as in Aristid. pro.
Quat. p. 309. and to epyw be, as in Paus. Cor. p. 132.
XIV. Ta irpwra for o Trpuiros : "laQi Tvjf 'AOrjiaiwy r a irpdra,
Lucian, in Tim. V. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 147. Brunck. ad
Eurip. Or. 1251. liec. 784.
SECTION XI.
Rule I. To confirm any thing which has been said, the Greeks
use the words a-rjfie'iov, reK^iipior, unobeiln, fxupTvpior, See. with ^e
in an unconnected position, at the commencement of the next sen-
tence or member of a sentence; as, irpus n^y xpr/juarwv t^Tfj/jiv olbe-
Opaavs el iruAKov, Arist(!pli. Nub. OOl. cully; without tr. or d.: Xen. Anab.
i.e. Travu, Sui'l. â– rr6w' tTri TtoWols vi, 3, 3. So &viv irpayp.a.Tuiv, Demostli.
v/jLVvcTiv Tbv AiSvvffoy M^ Trciiror', &c. 01. i. p. 14. I. 28. wvov/xtvos Tififjs
Aristopli. V'esp. 1046, oath upon oath. — fipaxfia^ l^eydKa rrpa.yp.aTa, great pos-
J. S. se.ssiotis: Plut. in Crass, p. 997. 1. 20. ed.
* So yeveffOat ip rots irpdyp.aa'i, Plut. H. St. — J.S.
in 1 lies. p. to. I. .'). cd. St. — ,I.S. '' KXeojueVous irtrrpa^ iKOTrriKiTos
" Ironicallv: ourual Si AdupiTOS (paai)- aurohs, Inning' overnuched or onltcilled
XiTTjy, neya -rrpayfxa, 'laroKparovs paBrj- (hem: Polyl). ii, 46. Trpa^iKoirricr as
fiis : Dciiiostli. adv. I.acr. p. 9liH. 1. C. rhv ^hKpoK6pivQov, having got possession
Under tliis word may be addi'd, ds of it liy stratagem: Polyb. ii. 43. and in
rh irpaypa, to the purpose : DcnioBlh. Polyb. i, 18. it is au intransitive verb. —
]iro Phorm. p. 9()l. 1. H. (Tvu irpdypaaiv, J.S
— iviv irpayp.6.T(t)v : with trouble or diffi
Rule 1—5.] Idfin — T«i. 53
TTtvirore o tFi/uos icrirovbaffe, npos t'e ^('£f?s, ws ovbe irpos ev ruiv uWuf
T € K ft )'ii) to V be' ■^^pi'iiuciTa /jey yup TrAflarci Twy 'LWZ/rwv wore a^wr,
TO. iravff virep (piXoTi/iiai aiiiXtoaev, &i:. a proof of it ; as appears
from this, Arc. Deniostli. adv. Aiulrot. [p. 617. I. 12. ed. lleisk.]
Aristot. Elli. vi. c. 5. /ueya be o-jj^eToj'* ews fjtv yap, &f.
Aristid. pro Quaf. p. 353. — Sometimes those words are not used
so elliptic-ally, v. Herodot. Pol. 221. Aribtid. 1. c. p. 24/. Plato
Apol. S. p. 40. AijXop be, rw, &c. Aristot. Etli. \i. c. 2. In the
same sense Xenoplion uses e(V;\w(7e;', Cyrop. vii, ], 30. cf. Mem.
i,2,31. In the like unconnected position, to be ptfbiovpyrifju' tTre'i
yhp, &c. but the knavery was thus; when, &c. Euseb. Pnep. Ev.
p. 220.
Iw/jia signifies a person, an individual: iEsch. in Tim. p. 173. I. 28.
Virg. ^n. ii, 18. v, 318. Eiirip. Med. 24. vftpeis opwires eh tU e\ev-
Bepa (T(l)/LiciTa yivofxevas, Dinarch. c. Deinoslli. p. 94. I. 54. [Here
tiie body of the person is the part chiefly regarfled ; as it is in iEschyl.
Prom. 865. and in Lycurg. adv. Leocr. c. 30.] Kara awfj-a, indi-
vidually : (cat av\\y'}(ibi]v aTravrns, Koi \iop\s eKucrrovs Kara aw ft a,
iEsch. in Ctes. p. 405. 1. ult. Reisk. Iwfxci, a slave, Tob. x, 1 1 . [v. H.
St. Thes. iii. 1213. B,— J. S.]
1ili/ja, a corpse, a carcass: v. Pind. 01. ix, 52. Nem. ix, 55. Horn.
11. iii, 23. xviii, l6l. xxiii, 169.
II. TeXos, a troop, Herodot. ix, c. 42. — Magistracy, public office
or station: e'^w rutv /Sao-iXewr, koi twv fxaXiara ev reXei, Thuc.
i, 10.
TeXos be, es TeXos, Ka\ reXos, and reXos alone, signify at last: He-
rodot. Er. c. 66'. Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 51. 1. 11. Lucian, Dera.
Enc. p. 923. Xen. (Ec. I7. § 10. Time, i, 109. Xen. Cyrop.
i. p. 25. and ii. p. 42. And in the same sense to TeXevralov,
Lucian, 1. c. p. 902. Plato Phaed. p. 91' J- 35. and tU TeXevrala,
Demostli. Ol. ii. p. 6. and nepas, /Escli. in Tim. p. II9. 1. 29-
[p. 84. 1. 13. Pieisk.] and repfjia, Phocyl. 131. — But to reXos,
and bia reXovs, sometimes sijjnify, it'/zo/Zt/, utterly, absolutely: Pho-
cyl. [v, 47.] Xen. (Ec. 17. § 10/'
Te^i'»j. TtiifTT} Te)(^rr] is by all means, ^ with all possible speed : Ari-
stopli. Eccl. 530. 366. lOeiy Te^vy,* oyetily, without disguise:
Herodot. Call. c. 57. See Larch, (vi. p. 120.)
III. Ti$ has sometimes the article before it; see Ch. I. R. 19.
and Aristoph. Av. 1039- Nub. 773. But o be tis is some other,
another: Aristoph. Av. 1444. "F.)(^ovirt be bt) ri tovto ; but what is
this which they have? Plato Phaedr. p. 259. V. Lucian, de Sacr. 13.
t. i. p. 536.
I\'. T(s for TTolos, as, ris yap eyut npus TOcrovTOVs ; what am I
against so many? See Hist. Susann. v. 54.
V. Various particles are subjoined to tis, expressive of the wonder,
<^ Add Ti\os, a market toll: Aristoph. KaOftrrriKee (k ttjs lOii-ns (openly, avow-
Acliarn. 800. — J.S. idly) Aa«e5ai,uoi/ioim TroXei-uos. ix, 36.)
<* See Aristoph. 'I'hesmopli. 65. — J.S. KaraSS^as avrovs l9eni Te'xfj? aTroXmuv
* (In which sense Herodotus some- avrhvilin good earntst.)\'^y ^G' — J.S.
times uses the phrase ck ttjj i6«(»j$ :
54 Tis. [Chap. hi. § \i.
ignorance, &c. of tlie inquirer ; as, ris dpn, tis ttote, tL b/iTrore,
ri b)JTu, &c.
VI. Ti yap aWo — *; with a verb: Alex, ri ye\(~is; Diog. ri yap
aXXo, j) avef^ivi](7i5r]v, &c. ivliy because I recolhcttd tchat ilie Greeks
did, to be sure: Lucian. [Dial. Mort. p. '253. C. ed. Salmur.] — and
7( ycip cif (iWo ; it is unavoidable ; how can it be othericisef is some-
times put at the end of a sentence.
Kat 7J yfip, in a tvord, to be brifj : Lucian, Tox. p. 609. — T/
yiip; serves as an affirmative answer: to be sure, certainly, Quidni?
V. Eurip. Or. [v. 476. Pors.] — Tt with a suhjunclive mood ex-
presses a (loulit as to wliat shall be done, when <loii/g is ])racticable ;
as, tI (pu) ; \Vitli an optative and ay, it expresses a doubt wluther any
tiiino; can be done at all; as, ri brjr' ay ///uels bpuyfiev ; Soph. Phil.
1393. ivhat then can we do!' i. e. I fear we can do nothing at all.
But the poets frequently omit the a*', as /Esch. Choeph. 39'-. Soph.
Ant. 604.. — Sometimes ri is to be supplied from a preceding iiiterro-
galion: ^sch. Eum. 791. 821. Eurip. Ion, 1440".
VII. 17 yup, el Hi), and ti be, el /.n), in answers, ivhat but. How
did your wife appear to attend? dec. ti bk, el fxi) vKioyie'iro ye eiri-
fjie\))fT£a6ai ; u'hy so tvell (hat she promised, &c. Xen. (Ec. p. 844.
and in the same manner presently afterwards.
VIII. "AXXort* is used in questions; as, aWori 7) wepl TrXelarov
TTotrj, oTTws ; &c. do you not esteem it of the greatest importance ? are
you not very solicitous that? &c. Plato Apul. p. 24. 1. oO. ciXXort
j) at TUVTi) oiKeofTes AlyvTTTiwy -Keivijcovtriv ; Herodol. ii. c. 14/ And
without ?'/ : aWoTi ovr, >'/»' b' tyw, ovbk laTpos, KaQ' oaov larpos, to tio
larpw (TVfi({>€poy (TKoire'i ; Plato de Rep. i. p. 242. [When T/ is omitted,
the interrogation is in uWo ti alone; not in the other words of the
sentence.]
IX. 17 interrogative is used in a form wherein dotd^t is expressed
as to a proper aj)pellation : Z tI ar" e'tjrw ; hon< shall I find a name bad
enonghfor thee? Aristoph. Nub. 1381. [13()0.] w tL av cittwv ae tis
opdwi Tipvaeirtoi; O! what name can be applied to thee bad enough
for thy deserts? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 315". init.
X. 'A\\a Ti fuiy ; what else then, if not that? said by an interro-
gator when a prior question has been answered in the negative:
Plato Synij). c. 23. cf. c. 25. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 23. Theocr. Id.
viii, 15.
But sometimes r/ ^u'/r; is an aflirmative answer: to be sure, of
course: Plalo Soph. c. 5. Fhaulr. p. 229. cf. ib. p. 272,273. And
Ti yap ou ; and wuis yap vv ;« have the same use.''
« "AWori (or IxWo ti) occurs in such
interrogations only as are used to elicit <in
acknotrU'il'^emenl or concession ; never in
such ;is are enijiloyed nierelj' fortlie sake
of information. — J . S.
/ Add Xen. Anab. ii, 5, 2. iv, 7, 4. —
J.S.
* Socr. oAAa /x^v ttvofios 7' rj AoKeSai-
fxaiv. Hipp, irajs yap ofi ; most assuredly :
rialo Hi]). M. |>. ;5I(i. 1. SG. 13:is. 1.
* Iloogovecn wrongly translates rl oZv
rovTo; in Plato Hip. M. j). 208. [318.1.
51. Baa. prim.] by Quid Ha! The wliole
j)assage stands thus : Socr. liireipos ii tov
afSphs, Si 'Inirla, ws cx^tKlSs iffri, Kol ov-
Ser ^aSitos airuSex'^f^fi'os. Hip. tI udv
toCto, S> 'S.wicparts ; (what tnatlers that ?
tcluit docs that si'^nify!) -rh yap opQu^ Ae-
yotiivov avdyicT] auTcp dTroScxeffflo', ■») hh
aTroStX"/"''''?' K0'Tayt\aa7tf> tlj'ai. — J. S.
Rule 6—14.] "Tis. 55
XI. Tis is cleganlly atlticd to many words, imparting (o llieni
somewliat of its own indefinite si^nitioalion ; as, vulas ris, Aristopli.
Nub. 763. [735.] riato SopI). 1. Aristid. pro Quat. p, 2g6. ttws
Ti', f.teyn ri, ovbey ri, scarcely at all, or not at all: Herodian, i. c.
16. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 42. cfiitcpov ti. ttoXAw ro't yfipwy, Aristid.
Or. I'lat. iii. p. 405. ttoXXw mi npioTos, lb. p. 402. biroaov ti
iicKpepei, how much it differs ; Toidibe ns, Xen. Mem. i. 1, 1. Cf.
Plato Symp. c. 2.
Tis is often understood ; as in Sopli. CEd. R. 314. Aj. 154. (E(\.
R. 6l2. 517. Xen. Symp. v, 2. cf. Xen. Ajjes. i, 22. and Fiscli.
ad Well. p. 294. ; and especially before jjenitives used partitively ;
as, Kcit' ya/jrj TTOT (tvTOS, »/ Toil' i^vyyeviLy, y tuii' (j)i\wi' : and if he, or
(any one) of his relations or friends marry: Aristopli. Nub. 1126.
[1112.] See Soph. El. 1323. Act. Ap. xxi, 16. and Hor. Od.
iii, 13, 13.
Xli. Tis indefinite is found in interrogations. See Demostli. Phil.
i. [p. 43. I. 8. Reisk.] t\s erboy ; is any one ivithin? iEsch. Cii.
652.
Tt for o, V«, that ivhich, what : Mark xiv, 36. cf. vi, 36. viii, 2.
Matth. XX, 22.
XIII. Tts, on Fr., one, i. e. any person : AaKebatjjioya ttoXewv
fioi'ijv ov TrpobaOelaar — evpot tis av, Pans. Ach. p. 415. See
Horn. [II. /3, 271.] i^sch. Euni. 154. Theogn. 181. Instead of ns
and a verb in the 3rd person, a verb alone in the 2nd person (as in
Latin) is employed : Horn. II. e, 85.
XIV. rids Tts, every one. nuvff eKaa-n, every one of the parti-
culars, Basil, ad Doniit. In the same sense, avros e/.aoTos Trpw-
Tos effTTcvbei' ap^ai fjuxn^, each, every one. Pans, in Mess. So
•jravres oaoi, and ttus u with a participle, Luke xviii, 14. John
xviii, 37. xix, 12. Also eicaoros tis, and avros th. Tts alone is put
for e'koffros, each, every one:' vvr tis, w arpuTiwrat, — t-7re«yeT0w :
Pint, in Fab. v. Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1, 6. vi, 4, 20. Abresch. ad
.SLsch. iii. p. 85. Iirunck. ad Soph. Aj. 245. Tts, though construed
with a verb in the third person, sometimes signifies the person speak-
ing; as, TTol TIS rpexperai ', Aristoph. Th. 603. — Tts and ti for a
person, and a thing, of importance: Epict. Ench. c. 18. Act. Ap.
V, 36. Tlieocr. xi, 79. In this sense it is opposed to oi/rts in Pind.
Pyth. 8. to ovbe)s in Epict. Ench. c. 31. (see Aristopli. Eq.
158. For ovbeli in this sense Lucian uses to /urjbev, IMort. Dial. t. i. p.
282.) and sometimes ^eyas is added torts in this use, Act. Ap. viii,
9. See Ov. Fast, vi, 27. — Aeyet*' ti, to say something of weight
or moment ; something to the purpose : Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 12. ^Escli.
Socr. Dial, ii, 7, 23. Sopli. ffid. K. 1475. Trach. 865. to which is
opposed ovbev Xeyetv, Plato Apol. 1". [which, however, seems some-
times to mean to be of little weight: Eurip. Suppl. 595. v. Her-
mann's addenda ad vs. 6l2. ^Esch. Agam. 176.* ex Schutzii corij.]
» This is au imitation of Horn. eZ fxiv Dr. Blorafield conjectures, o. a. Se7|at
Tiy 5Jpu 6r)i,a.aQw, &cc. II. /3, 382, 383, ir. a?. ^' twn se qnidqttiim fuisse vstendet."
384.— J. S. — J. S.
* For ovSiv fee A^^ai â– Kplv tv, (v. IGl.)
56
T«S-^XopjS.
[Chap. hi. § xii.
— "Exetf Ti, to be rich: TEscli. Dial, ii, 13.-' tI elherni, to have
much knou'lidge or wisdom: Plato Apol. 6,7, 10. A flvai, to be
oj great account or consequence: Id. ib. 33. t\ Troie'tv, to be well
employed: Id. Syiupos.
T(s for TToTos, Soph. Tracli. 311. v. Valck. ad Fragm. Call. p. 23.
Tti sarcastically substituted for av : roOr' els ariaf Tovnns e/j^erai
Till, somebody will stifferfor these icords, i. e. i/ou, Teucer, (to whom
Meiielaus is speaking,) shall repent of them: Soph. Aj. 1138. v.
Luciaii, Dial. Meretr. 3. p. 285, 61/
SECTION XII.
Rule I. Toaoyrov, thus much only :' ToaovTov v-ireiTrijy, adding only
this: Deniostli. S<) roo-oi'^c,* Herodot. ii. p. 111. — Toauv-ai- is fol-
lowed by I'xjov, V. Herodot. vi, 137- o'v roaovrov — TreiTOeyres,
o(TQv <l>o(iovfxeyoi: not SO much through persuasion as fear : Tliuc. i,
88. "^repos tooovtos, as much again: erepov tucjovtov ypoyov,
Isocr. Pancg. p. 141.
II. <l>9dvos, grudge. <{)d6yos ovbe]s expresses readiness or uilling-
ness : aW ovhels (pdovos, (in answer to a request,) and willingly
too; ivith all my heart : <pQ6vos ovhe\s, w 2o\w)', (in answer,) «u7-
lingly, O Solon : Plato Tim. p. 23. 1. 36. So olbeis fdoyos, w leyoi,
(inanswer,) Ceb. Tab. [p. 8. I. 6. ed. Simps. Ox. 1738.] a fieyroi
Tvyx^ytjj iiKrjKoujs, (pdovos ovbeis Xeyeiv : Plato Pliaed. Also Plato
Soph. c. 1 .
Xapis. — ^('tpir exeir,"' or elbivai, is to be thankful, or grateful;
with a dative of the person, and a genitive of the thing; as, ex*^ '""â–
â– )(^apiy Tovrov: v. Den), pro IMegal. p. SI. 1. 14. Xapiv (or x"^""
Tas) inrobiboyai, (I)eni. Ep. ii. p. 111.) or reXetj', to make a return
for a kindness, "^apw a-rronTepeiv, to be ungrateful: Pinto Gorg. p.
520. 1. 26. 6(jj€i\ijj aoi \upiy tovtuv, lam indebted, or obliged, to you
for this, kv -^apiTi, as a favor. (jt)v yjipiv, for your nake : see Cli. I.
U. 11.
J But ix^i^Ti; in Aristopli. Nub. 723.
is, hax-e you f^ot tniy device yet ? — J. S.
* Add ; Tts, in a very emphatical
sense, for any person or Ihinsc trlnttcci'v,
without liny exception : irpaorepovs yeuicr-
6ai Tivbs, Demosih. di- male oh. log. p.
852.1. 8. S> yri kuI Oeoil Ka\ tovto rh
aff(0T]ixa ikarrSy Tiros Tiye'iaOe ; Deni.
in Aiulrot. p. 618. 1. .'j. v. et adv. Lep.
p. 284. 1. 17. Ti, why, wherefore: Ari-
stopli. riut.252.— J.S.
' Not much unlike this is its sense in
Plut. Lysariil. &(ljdri trvphs n(i> ovSev fpyov,
ovS' ix^'^^ ToiTovTov, not so much as a ves-
ti;ie: p. 804. I. 22. cd. H. St. but [
conjecture, &. ir. p.. o. tpyov ovi' J'x*'*'^
TO aO VTOV, — J. S.
• Sec Ch. V. ^ ii. R. 7. [cf. ix. 6.
§ 12-14.]
"â– In Aristoph. ouSf/jiiay ex'w ye r^
picf! x'»P"'» iSi / liave no enjoyment of
life ; my life is a burden to me : Lys.
S^iO. and ToTr 8e ffiTiots X"P"' ouSffiiau
oI5' fa6'iiijv, is, / h(tre no relish if my
fitud : ill. 809. — On this word the follow-
ing pliias-cs may be added: tTrtl ovk &pa
TiS x<^/3ts ?ify VidpvaaOai, llom. 11. t,
310. uTreVxsTO Poridj'icreiV fxtrii. neyd-
Atjj x'^P''"""^- ^'*'''y ''Ciidihj, very wil-
lingly: Polyb. E. L. 31. vefxetf xo-p^'i
to gratify, (with a dative,) Aristopli. .Vv.
384. viroupy(7y X"P"'> Aristot. Ilhet.
ii. y. itoW^]v x^-P^" nar aBfjxtv 01,
having received it as a great lienejit, fur
which they were to be ever ready to make
a gratiful return : /Escli. in Ctes. p. 432.
1. 12. Ueisk.— J.S.
RUI.E 1 — S.] Xapis — Xpfjfia. 57
Xt'ipis, grace; the free undeserved favor of God; in tlio N. T.
I)iit ^x'^"*^"*' X"'^"' '" 'l^^""' ^^*> -8. should be reiulered, let us be
thankful; let us cherish gratitude. — npos x"P"'» ^"^ efCKa or
Xupf : [see Cli. I. R. 11.] npos x«p'»' ^oywr, Sopli. Tr. 178. Ant.
30. V. Biutick.
III. Xeip.— tc y^eipos (or ■^^eipuif) fia)(^£(ydai, or rroieli' ev ■yfpm fxayr]y,
to fight hand to hand: whence »/ ck yjeiphs, or avaTdbrjy, or e*; avera-
(7€ujs, or >.ara avrj-aair, or poetically avToayehov, fiuxVt close fight :
avtrrubtjv yap vvar]S Ttjs fiayr]%, nai twv itXriyibv Ik •)^€ipos yivofxev(t)V,
Diod. S. xi, 7. See Demoslh. in Panath. t. i. p. 243. Hermann, ad
Soph, Aj. 27. in Erf. ed. uiaj. So e$ ye'ipas. Soph. Tr. 441.
V. (Ed. C. 97o.
IV. Tt/s Koivokoyias €K ■)^€ipos y€vo/iivT}s, at once, on the spot:
Pol>b. V.
V. XeipuJv vofios," blows ; fighting; employment of force or the
sword: v. Wessel. add. ad Diod. S. t. i. p. 277. Musgr. ad Eurip.
Bacch. 738. vwd x^lpa, under power, subjected:" Soph, El. 10f)0. v.
TIjom. M,p. 896.
VI. 'Ev -f^epfjly, (nearly the same as ev -j^etpwr vo/ju,) in battle;
while engaged ; in the affray : tovs fiev ev ■)^€p<rlv aTriKTeivav, tovs
be iuJVTas e'AcijSo)'.
VII. Xeipivu abiKior (ip^cit, or Kari'tp^ai, to be the aggressor,^ Xen.
Cyrop. i. c. 30. to begin hostilities, Maccab. iv, 40. and ap-^eiv
ahUbiv, (neuter,) NA. V. H. i, 14. els â– x^elpas levai is said of an
amicable meeting, as well as of a hostile encounter.'?
VIII. Xpeos. — y^pewv cnroKOTrat, (iiovce tabulce,) an iniquitous ex-
tinction, by an order of government, of all private debts without Just
payment. This was called aeicra-^^deia also, and xpeujKoiria.
SECTION XIII.
Rules I. II. Ill, Xpr/fta (like vpayna, Sect. X. R. 8.) is said of a
thing that surpasses in any way : as, avos y^piip.a fxeya, a huge boar:
Herodof, CI, c, 2>6. daufxanroy ti xP'/f" napOeiov, a most beau-
tiful virgin: Charif, ^PV^" iroWiLy vewv, a great multitude of
ships: Herodot. Er. c. 43, Qe'iov eTrioKOTrtoy y^pTjua, divine para-
gon of bishops! Euseb, Pr, Ev, i, to -^piina twv /cottwi' vaov \
what an immense number of labors! Aristoph, Ran. [1278.] so Nub,
[1.] See Aristoph, Vesp, 927, [933.] Heliod, ^th, x, 23. Aris-
toph, Plut, 895, XA. V, H. ii, 13. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2. e\a<p6v, KaXov
Ti xpfi/j-a Knl fxeya, Xen, Cyrop, i. See Cic, ad Att. i, 12. [in Sen.
p. r. 6.] Seneca Ep. 95. [p. 602. 1. 19. ed. Lips. Antverp. l6l5.]
" Similar to tliisis the English expres- 1 Add, eh x^''P'^yv o'vvrj\pa.v, (vaw sc.)
s'lon, club-law. — J. S. close: Eurip. Heracl. 430. {in manibus
'YTT^xe'^pa, "iT- /'«"<'>■a' ^"ce. Aristot. terra;, V'irg. Geor. ii, 45.) but Valck.
Meteor, ii. c. 9. So suh vianum, Sueton. and Hcatli read ws x- 7- "■• — '''""^ '"P"'
Aug. 49. — J. S. fffTUTas avTuiv els ras x^'P"* \afxfidya!v :
J' Demoslh. in Aristocr. p. G35. 1. 27. tuking them in hand ; expostulating with
in Euerg. p. 1141. 1. 8. 1143, 18.— J. S. them inpriiate: Tol^b. i, 70.— J. S.
Viger. H
.58 Xpvaoi—^ilpa. [Chap. HI. j 13.
Ov. de Pont, ii, 3?. Phiedr. iv. fab. 7. Spanh. ad Callini. h. Diaii.
100. Fisch. ad Will. iii. p. 2SS. seq.
IV. (V.) Money employed, or put out at interest, was called ei'epya
â– )0)))^uTa : unemployed, apyii'x^. Tlie interest or profit, epyov or tpya-
aid. Hence IpyaieaOai, to be employed in money-making ; to increase
one's fortune : Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 37. xp})uaini> tpyuieaOat, De-
niostli. pro Pliorm. p. 605. \. 32. to turn money . eipydaaro ev
avTo'is, (the live talents,) traded tvith the same : Mattli. xxv, \6. To
yjiTjixu, in the singular, is said of a particular sum of money: Act. Ap.
iv, 37. The: principal, ox capital, \s\x?, (:a\\\iA 70 upyu'iov, to. upy^a'ia,
upvaloi' bai'doi', np-j^ului' KecpaXatov, and Ke<{)uXaioy, /Eschm. C. Ctes.
p. 289. 1. 12. and this last is used simply lor a sum of money : Act.
Ap. xxii, 28. The interest, ol rukoi: v. Athen. Deipn, xiii. Surplus,
or odd money, to irpuaov, or to irpos.
\. (VI.) "An/ja xPhp^^Ta, the fortune or goods of those who were
uTipoi, i. c. excluded from public offices and honors, and devoted
by the laws to ijjnominy : XP'/A*"~" evr/rz/ia, the contrary. Those
first mentioned mijiht be seized bv anv one with impunitv.
VI. (VIl.) Xpvaos t>' vojAiaficiTt, or wt vouirjjxn, or erricnj^os, comea
gold; x^- "''â– ^iL'oSj gold bullion; yjtvaoi ev KnrarrKevals, gold plate ;
Xp. tv vXij, or ws v\r], gold in bars or ingots ; xpi"^''s ws Ttpoi^6fTi.i]fia,
golden vessels or plate. The same expiessions are used of silver:
Plut. in Pomp. Philo de Legat. ad Caium, and de Provid.
VII. (VIII.) Xojpa, rank, character or predicament : -Qv ovk vituv
eyovtrt j/oipup : — ey- ■x'^P9- ~^^ evehpevovTos aXutvai.
VIII. (IX.) To(s pev linov hv^er enaarov Kar(i/3fe/3\)jrat, T(j1.% be € y
X^^P^ etcaara reraypeya Kelrai : in their proper places ; in order :
Xen. (Ec. iii, 3. cf. Cyrop. iv, 5, 37.
IX. (X.) Kara )^Jjpa>' e'xeu', or peyeii,'' or arpepe'v, to remain un-
disturbed, unremoved, in statu quo. Xwpa, dignity, rank, honor,
station, {locus,) Polyb. i, 43. Jos. Arch, vi, 10, 1. Xc'opa, the
country, in contradistinction to the town, Xen. Ilicr. \, 5. Polyb. i,
1, 72. Hcrodian vi, 4, 11. cf. Grajv. Lect. lies. c. viii. p. 38.
X. (XI.) "flpn, proper time, full time, high time J "fI,oa, puberty,
maturity, marriageable age : i'jbr] b' els uibiius a/pay iji^uvitijs tTis Kopiis,
Plato Crit. p. 113. 1. 32. Marriageable girls are said ly wp^ yeiea-
dat, Ilerodiaii i, 2, 3.
The following u-es of wpa, siiznifying time, are to be noticed : — 1.
wpa tFis hl^iepas, a twelfth part of the natural day : Xen. Mem. iv, 3,
4. Herodot. ii. p. 153. ed. Wess. — 2. wpa tTjs vvktus, u fourth part
of the night : Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 4. which is called also j; (pvXau). —
3. wpd, midnight: Sappli. fragin. ap. Hephgest. * {yvkToi upoXyos,
Horn. Od. b, 841.) — 4. upu pijvis, one part or division of a month ;
' 'S.Kiiniov, trinpov Set robs /xfv &\\ovs ti ttot &v5pes ovk ti'ikovctiv ',_^P°- 5' ^v 7ra-
vStiovs, otn inl Toh oZiKovai r)]V ir6\iu A.OJ : lb. 877. Hipa croi, & PeATiare, rhy
v/jie7s avtypd-parf, aKvpovs dvai, r^ySe Si Kpo'KruwaiSairaiSsvfiv: then, my worthy,
Kvpiov ^ Toxjvayr'iov, tovtov ix\v kvaui, yuu hud better teach ('rwsiis s sun: Lu-
KOTcl x<^ P"'" 2e /jLtftiv Tuvs &\\ous ciau, Vit. Auct. p. :ifn. 1). Salmiir. — J. S.
idv: Demosth. in Tiinocr. p. 701. I. IG. * P. G5. 1. 11. iu the ed. of Dr. Gais-
— J. .S. ford.— J. S.
' "npa fiaSi^fiy, Aristopli. Eccl. SO.
Rule 4-10.] THE PRONOUN. 59
one of the three decades, into which the Greek months were divided:
Xfu. Mem. iv, 7. 4. — .5. wpra triourou, one of the four seasons
of the year. "Dpot in the |)lural : -stavja uan wpat (pvovai, Xeu.
Anal), i. p. 3.0- ed- Hulcli. inin. — 6". up-t, by way ot" eniinenco,
the spring: I'olyb. ii, 9. itiul the summer: (7altn. de Fac. Alim. ii.
Cf. Oraev. Lect. ad iles. "Epy. 31. — ?• ujpn, proper season, fit time:
!] Tov (jTTopov oipa, Xen. CEc. xvii, 1. Cf. Trill. Obs. iv, 28.'
CHAPTER IV.
ON THE PRONOUN.
Rule I. Periods are elejjamly ttrminated liy ibe pronouns eyw,
ijfjerepos, v/jerenos, ovros. V. Ceh. Tab. [p. 40. I. 2. e<i. Sitnps.]"
Demoslli. pro Cor. [p. 227- I. 6.] lb. [p. 228. I. 12.] lb. [p. 2^0. I. 6".]
[V. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 24-5. I. 29. Aristopli, Av. l627 .] — Iv
lermini'.tes in St. Jolin iv, 19. cf. viii, 4S.
II. In the Greek, as in some oilier i.inguapcs, t!ie (l;iti> es of pii-
mitive pronouns are sometimes elepanlly "r emplialically re«lun<lanl :
fxoi," (701,"^ ''//J'''» Sopb. Aj. 216". u/zli, Sopli. CE(i. R. 1401. — Qui
MI HI, ubi ad uxores ventum eat, turn [dtmum] fiunt series: Tir.
Pliorm. V, 8, 21.
III. A possessive pronoun sometimes Kgrees wilb a substantive
signifying something with regard to vviiitli the personal pronoun im-
plied in tiie possessive is passive or the object, not an agent or source;
as, evyol(f yao epcL rfj arj, for I shall say it ont of my good-ici/l
towards yon : Plato Gori.'. p. 4S6. I. 5. iros TrodoSjWy longing
for yon: Horn. Od. \, [201.] Trpoio!^ ttj (tT], through forecast for
your welfare; out of precaution used on your behalf : Eurip. Andr.
600. c^ri bwpea, a gift bestowed on me: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 32.
IV. A possessive is transferreil from its proper .substantive to
another: tov e^iuv whiru)v iroyoy, my pain of labors, for kf^wv, the
pain of my labors: Euiip. Plioen.
V. Words are often put in apposiii'^n or in concor.i with the geni-
tive of a personal pronoun implied in a preceding possessive, or to
which personal genitive that possessive is equivalent in sigriificatidu ;
as, TUfia hiupiraaovai tov KuKobaifj.01 os. So Ariiioph. Plut. 33. â– "
\l. Avras is sometimes employed as a reciprocal pronoun : /;ara-
<}>vyt)y nvTM — nopiCniTo, he might provide a refuge for himself:
' Add: avanraveffOai kuQ' wpav, early, 6 fj.^ (lipaiffi A7jfj.6(TrpaTos, Al•i^toph. Lys.
betimes: Polyb. i, 4). tj»c€ ttoAA^s 391. — J. S.
11} pas, late, in the etcniug- : I'olyb. v, 8. " ''E(p7jv iy^ closes sentences in almost
ovTuis iv Sipa, so early in the morning: every page of Cebrs. — J. S.
Aristoph. Ecci. 395. is rhs &pas, for ^ Aristopb. Lys. 707. Nub. 1!6.
ever: Aristoph. Han. 380. (i>pa, age. Achain. 4.'j8. — J. S.
See Plut. Alcib. p. 350. 1. 1. II. Stc,,li. ^ » Aristoph. Nub. 20G. Eccl. 136. Ran.
Ages. p. 1120. 1. 19. Mri &pci.i(nv'iKoiTO, 1119. — J. S.
perdition take him! Lucian, Dial. JNli-- ^' "^Wfxirtpov tiv fit) ircvilv Koiluitdai
retr. p. 734. D. Salm. fjJr) wpas 'iKoicrd', ra roiavra, rccf /col is TuSe avra Trpo-
Aristoph. Lys. 1037. tiCixovto /j.)] ILpav ayaySvraiv : Lucian, Jup. I'r. p. 206.
&efMi(TTOK\fovs yiviffQai, I'lut. 'J'heiiiist. D. ed. Salm. — J. S.
p. 223. I. 6. and ellipticajly, as an epithet:
60 THE TRONOUN. [Chap. iv.
Enseb. Pia;p. Ev. I. vi. for eavr^. And on the other haiuJ, ov, ol, e,
icivTov, are often not reciprocitl ; as, elff ihs ortovy et,ov eavTf TroteTr, —
tor avT(p : Demostli. in And rot.
VII. 'Erivrov in the first person, for if^tavrov, Isocr. in Biisir. In
the second person : oi/Vw iroitevets tovs envrfis (piXovs, thus Ihou itl-
structest thy friends : Xen. Mem. ii.^' Avr/yr ii> the second person,
St. Luke xiii, 34. Suas for nostras is in Ov. Ep. v. 46. See Fisch.
ad Well. p. \72. In the phrase avros Kaff i>vtov, or nvTos irpos uvtuv,
t!ie j)roi)oun is used witliout respect to person. Avr>) n-pos avn)y, in
the first person, alone, by myself: Soph. El. 281. [2S5.] In the
third person, avr)) xaO' avr>)v elXtKptyijs >/ hiuvota, the under-
standing free and disengaged from external objects: Plato Pliaid.
c. 10. cf. c. 1?. 14. &c.
VIII. Avros evctoTos is the same as ecarrros alone : Herodot. vii, ip.
viii, 124. Demosth. Trept avfx^op. and ahrnkKaaTos has the same mean-
ing ; but ai/OecaoTOs (qu. 6 avros Trctpu or ev ecaory,) signifies, «Msft7'e,
rigid, severe, rigorous, strict : avOei^aar ov riva kcu iriKpoi', Dion.
Halic. ad Pomp, (speaking of Thucydides.)
IX. 'O avros [Atlic ; and in epic poetry even without the article :
V. Scluvf. ad Greg. Cor. p. 303.] the same: kutu tui> ahrov tovtm
TpuTTov ev TreTrotrjKOTU t))v ttuXii', Lucian, lyv. ala-)(^p6y tariv uvdpu)Tr(o
TciVTu TTucr^eiy roes ufporeTTarois tG)v Oripiwv, Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 5."
V. Ern. and Drakenh. a(i Sil. xv, 400. and Cort. ad Sail. Cat. c.
80. iraaa yvvi} — // avri) earty, all women are the same : Plut. Conj.
Preec. }). 144. eirat /i*) r>)v awrvi/ ra'is ri/)^oy<rais yvvai^iv, 7l0t to
he the same as ordinary ivomen : ib. utto r>/s ouri/s (Tire'iadai, from
the same table : Synes. Hence kutcl ravra, after the manner of,
like ; with a dative : KaXoiivTui — Kara ravra "EXXtjaiv, Paus. in Ach.
p. 410. ydXa irheiy Kara ravra ro'is fipktpeaiv, Lucian, Alex. p. 530.
And TO avTo, by itself, so, in the same manner, following KaQairep in a
simile: Plut. Apophth, Ai)-os, for the soul of a person, in contra-
distinction to his body; (to the t'lhdjXov in the infernal regions; Hom.
Od. X, 602.) — for the body, opposed to the soul, Hom. II. a, 4. —
for a person, opposed to his p<*(»8«&sioiis, Od. r, 329- 332. — or to
others present, II. 0, 4. r, 302. — or for something as distinguished
from what surrounds or is near it, Od. y, 17 !• — or for the whole
as distinguished from its parts, II. r/, 4/4. — of a person as acting
without cooperation, II. 0, 'J!y. p, 48. r))v avros (piXeerricey, 7vith
tvhom he teas in love, and whom he wished to love exclusively, without
any rival : II. i, 44<). Auros, emphatically, for even, very, (in the 3rd
sense in Dr. Johnson's dictionary ;) Iliad 8, 450. /i, 429- v, 6l4. —
y C. 1. ^ 30. where 1 find aavrris. — re])eated, and gdverniiig the accusal, of a
J. S. relative : iirolritrey tiv 'iinp kuX 6 Pa<ri\evs
* So (TToirimv hv ravrh T<f PacriKel : iTrolrjrrey : for the verb is never the sub-
At' would hare done the same as (he liitig stanlivo verb, but always one involving
of Persia did: Deiuosth. de Fals. Leg. both a copula and a j)reclicaic : where it
p. 383. 1. 10. lleisk. It is to be observed is otherwise, there is no idiomatical pecu-
that in this idiom the dative is equivalent li'irity in the phrase. See Aribto[)h.
to the uoiiiiiiative of the same noun or Plut. 253. — J. &.
pronoun agreeing with the same verb
Rule 7—10.] THE PRONOUN. 6\
ov instantly : htdpovaev — nvrf] nvv (jtopfjiyyt, h« started up imme-
diatcli/,Just as he was, with his harp in his hand: II. i, l^.j. It
iiulicalos love, tender feelinj;, and allectloii, ()<!. ^, 141. Auros,
voluntarily, spontantously : 11.^,231." Alone:'' II. r, 729. Hence
avToi eiT/jey," tve are alone, and their/ore may speak oiirminds freely :
V. Henist. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 230. Hensd. .Spec. crit. in Plat. p. 30.
Heindorf. ad Plat. Parm. p. 220. Hence it signifies apart or
familiarly: Od. rj, 237. r, 104. y, 19. 327- ^33l.7-,288. 0, 396. It is
added to a name for the sake of explication : H. Cer. 1. Sometimes,
on the contrary, the name is added lo the pronoun for the same pur-
pose : II. a, 143. It is used for the sake of contradistinction, like
hie and ille : II. 7, 282. ^Eschyl. Prom. 440. v. Heindorf. ad
Phit. Lys, p. 4. and it is so used in all persons, and without the
addition of a primitive or personal pronoun : v. II. v, 252. 448.
Od. (3, 374. It is sometimes a reciprocal, 11. /, 342. Od. k, QJ.
and is added to a personal pronoun, where there is a reciprocal
sense, either in composition, as in Soph. [CEd. R. 1080.] or sepa-
rately, as always in Homer. It is sometimes a relative pronoun,
him, her, it: in this use it has less emphasis, and the nominative
is never employed. It signifies the same ;'^ in which sense the
article is always joined lo it by Attic writers, but not by epic. v.
Schaef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 303. 'Yvd ro avTo is, about the same time:
so Kara to aiiro, at the same time. Avro /.luyoy, merely, nothing else
hut : V. Valck. With an ellipsis of avv it answers to our English
phrase and all: noXefjiiwy TrXfjdos avTols oTrXots eXaftev, arms and all ;
avroTs arhpaai : — oi/rw tio 'iittt^ KareTrorrlcrdr]/
AvTws (so it is always to be written in Homer) signifies, — I. just
so ; iti the same manner; the same: Sopl;. CEd. R. 531. Hence
waavTtDi ((is i' avT(t)s in Homer,) and w6' ai/rws. Soph. Tr. 1048. —
2. with reference to a past state, still: U. a, 338. with rt^ftrence
to a present state, just as I am, just as you are, &c. II. e, 253. II.
[<r,] 198. Hence — 3. Ka\ avrios, even so, i. e. nevertheless : II. i, 398.
and \p, 620. (where it may be rendered, gratis, gratuitously.)
Hence — 4. merely ; nothing else but: Od. v, 379. and with a verb,
IT, 313. — 5. ivithout reason, rashly, at random: II. S., 55. p, 143.-^
Od. h, 665. fjt, 284. — 6. in vain; to no purpose : II. o, 128. 513.
IT, 117. ff, 584.
X. (XH.) AvTus enters often, and sometimes elegantly, into com-
position with other words ; as, avreTrayyeXros, self-invited ; one U'ho
does anything of his own accord, without bidding: Deraosth. pro
" So avT66ei>, of his oicn accord ; oUre <* See Aristopli. Plut. 253. and Br. Tof-
avTddev SioyouTo â– napuXafx^dvuv Trap' rb tuvto, the very same thing : Aristoph.
ffiov T^v pavf, oCt', eVeiS?; — 7]va.yKdad-n Plut. 153. — J. S.
iirl T^iv yavv airUvai, i\dwv T)6i\ria€ jxoi "^ AJil, avTOv, hue, hither: Aristoplio
SiaSf^aaOai aiiTtjv : Demostli. adv. l'ol_ycl. Av. G03. v. Dindorf. e| oiiTTJs, imme-
p. 1215. I. 28. Reibk. So Tlut. in Arat. diately : Tlieogn. 231. and in one word
p. 1887. 1. 20. ed. H. St.— J. S. e^auT^js. Polyb. xiii, 5. ahrh tovto. See
* Demobtli. Phil. iii. p. 123. I. IG. Toup. ad Loiigin. Fragm. v. — J. S.
Polyb. vi, 48. Tlicocr. Id. jr. It). — J. S. ^ Where it may be rendered umie'
* See Aristopli. Atli. 504. Thesni. 472. servedly. — J. S.
— J.S.
62 THE PRONOUN, [Chap. iv.
Cor. [j). 247. 1. 24. Rcisk.] — {nv-okiXeverms, Aristid. pro Qiiat.
J). 475.) rnvs avTatbpus Kureirovriadi], together ivith her crcw ;
(iiKiui avTuibpovs, irith their inhabitants : Plut. 7r'i|ja\A. 'E\\. ».ot
'Pw/i. p. 30(). 'iiT-noi (ivTO<poproi unTeKpij^ilaOri, loud and all ; eivW-
â– K)]\uTOvv tcvTraptnaois nvTOKXubais k-ci'i uvTOKcjjins, Jor oavs they used
cypresses with their branches and leaves on: Lutiiin, Ver. H. i. [p.
741. E. ed. Salmiir.] avrelouato^, one's own master ; to avTe^ovuioy,
uncontrolled libtrty or power ; uvToue(jja\cs, a primate ; n'vTijKooi, an
ear-witness ; ctvTOTrrrjs, an eye-witness, Plut. I. c. p. 310. wl)ente
tivTo-^ia, ixin\ aiiro\l/ei: nvrdfioXos,^ a deserter to the enemy, or one
who comes spontaneously; uvToicjxds, avruT€}>f]s, av-obiKos, indepen-
dent ; nvOobioi, fresh from a journey; avroKXrjTos, self-invited ;
avrobibaKTos, self taught ; avrovpylis, one ii'ho works with his own
hands, Palieph. Fal). 3.* ai;r(Jx"p, one jvho executes anything tvith
his own hands, Arii-topli. Av. 1135. especially (in which sen^e c.vrn-
BaraTos also) homicide: Soph. El. 958. 1022. Hence avroy^eip (as
well as av-otpupos, avrodayaros, alroKTorns) signifies a self-murderer ;
whence the adverb avTo-)^eipl. avronpuTwTroi, oiie who does any thing
in person ; aurdyyeXos, one who brings intelligence himself : v.
Niceph. Greg. § 62. Amnion, p. 2. and V^alck. avdhrris or avro-
€iTr}i, the same as avro-x^eip. Soph. CEt\. U. 10(5. civT6xpr}fia, adv. in
reality, indeed; avToxpti/^d- bir'tKoros, AriNtid. pro Quat. p. 3(0.
avTo(5oei, at the first assault, with the mere shout of onset: Thtic.
ii, c. 81. uvTodev, see on THE advI':ri5. aiidTji-ifpov, (poetically
avrri/jcip,) on the very same day, the selfsame day ; [ai^r/'js &pas, in-
stantly, forthwith: Pint. Insl. Lac. 34. Herni.] aureperijs, one who
rows oil occasion, although rowing is not his proper and regular
function: Time, iii, c. 18. [i. c. 10. vi. c. 91-] uiroa; Q.owttos, the
specific essence, or abstract idea, of man : Plato, v. Arislot. Eth. i.
c. 6". itvTOToavTo, ipsum illud ipsum :* Plato Alcib. i. So with proper
names : Avdo/jripot, a very Ilotr.er ; Avro/jjopeai, a very Boreas,
another Boreas: Lucian, 'i'lnion.-'
e One who conies 0/ AimsfZ/" from the SiKatocrvvri, Clirys. iii. p. fill. 1. 19.
enemy, and is nut brought against his avroSa^, Aristoph. Pac. COT. avroada-
vvill, as a prisoner of war. — J. S. vaaia, Clirjs. iv. j). 235. 1. 35. avro-
'' Eurip. Or. (110. Pors.— J. S. ^a>ri, Chrys. ii. p. 579. 1. 1. auTofla-
* That uliii:li is itself 'Atpremety or Krhs, I'lut. iMuial. ^ 1:44. A. avTuOrtpwu,
really, l<y letiy of iminenci, \>. 2"2j. 1.3. (hr\s. iii. j). IC. I. 3'.). avTOKiKivffToos,
ed. Basil, prim. — J. S. Clirys. v. p. 995. 1. C. avToKiQivos, Clirys.
j The following also will contribute to i. p. 30. I. 42. avTo\6yos, Orig. c. Cels.
show into what a variety of coiniiounds p. 79. 1- 32. ahrofiaKapdiTis, Chrys. iv.
avros enters. The passni;es and interpre- p. 325. 1. 31. avT(\uavia, Chrya. i. p. CI.
tatioii') 1 have given in the new edition of 1. 19. avrofiarl, Chrys. v. j). H4(i. I. 31.
11. Slepheos' 'I'hesaurus. avrdyptTos, avTop-iirup, Siinonides. avToviKphs, Chrys.
Siinotiides. alnoaXrfina, Clirvsost. t. ii. vij. p. 93. I. 22- avronriyii , Chrys. ii. p.
p. 5H7. 1. 15. Sir H. Saiifle's edition 608. 1. 14, avrSiroios, Soph. (Ed. C.
Orig. c. Cels. p. 135. 1. 55. Canlab. Ki.jH. G'.!8. avToiriKpia, Chrys. iii. p. 840. 1. 32.
av7oPa(Ti\evs, Clrys. iii. p. 30. 1. 36. auTopi'fa, Chrys. ii. p. 608. 1. 14. aiiro-
avroaMfias, Chrys. t. v. p. 564. 1. 26. (rap^, Chrys. viii. p. 9. 1. 23. avToa'iSapos,
avTo-yfivva, Chrys. ii. p. 457. 1. 26. Eurip. Ilel. 361. avTOcro<pla, Chrys. vi.
auTiJSopos, Plut. JMoral. § 694. B. avro- p. 97. 1. 20. aiiTOTpa7iKoirf9rj«oj, De-
Rl'lk U, i.!.] TlIK PHOiNOUN\ 03
AvTcis is somoliines biibstitutcd for o$, when a repetition of 6s in a
case (litterent from its preceding one would he recpiircd by re{;uiar
••oiistruclion : o'u b)) tTriTfjtxpoi.iey tip <pufie.v Ki'ibeaOut, kuI be'iy nvTovs
iifbpas ayaduvs yevinOui, yvva'iKci mfxelaHai, I'hlto (le Rep. iii. p. 395.
1. 34. V. S. John xv, 5. Revel, li, 18. xvii, 2. I Cor. viii, 6".
AvTos occurs ill various forms of laiitoloav: see Malth. viii, 23.
Luke xix, 2(). Xeu. C>rop. ii. p. 51. cf. INIatlh. iv, 16. viii, 5. ix,
27. V, 40. John XV, 2. xviii, 11. Revel, vii, 9. Act. Ap. vii, 21.
V. Jens, ad Lucian. t. i. p. 296. So Cic. pro 1. Manil. c. xiv. [§ 40.]
Ot is in like manner superfluous in Paus. Phoc. p. 660. and a<piai
u\ Paus. Cor. p. 90. AWos is defective, when its antecedent noun is
referred to two verbs requiring dift'erent cases. See Isocr. Paneg.
p. 98.*
XI. After TnvTo, this, the conjunction uti, that, is very frequently
placed; as, otSe rovro (v-nXJJs tKelros, ut t, &c. he very well knoics
this, that, &c. Demosth. Piul. i. ovk ayvoilt rovd', on, Demosth.
01. 1. Sometimes on precedes rovro, as in Aristoph. Av. 11 76.
and sometimes lin is the last word of the sentence : ov Traverofiai,
TOVT 'ia9' oTi^ lb. 140S. Sometimes, rovro being last in cullocalion,
the article to, with some panicle, precedes on, or ws : as, to he,
ws KXeti^rtJTOs — aixpos eyti'cro, — rovro i'lbr] rjKovtTas : iEschin. Dial,
de Virt. v. Nepos in Alcib. c. 6. Virg. Eel. iii, 35. Cic. Catil. ii.
c. 8.
XII. (XIV.) Qvros is sometimes added, when the construction
would be complete without it, for the sake of explication (especially
alter digression); as, 'Apiarobi'i/io) reKen- ri)v yvv a iku, ttj oyofjta
elvai 'Apye/rji', * ravrrjv be rei^eit- bibvfia : Herodot. Er. c. 52.
v. Ter. Heaut. [i, 1, 82.] Cic. pro Mil. c. 26. [Cn. Pompeium,
— hunc, &c. § 70.] — or for the sake of emphasis, as in Demosth, pro
Cor. [p. 268. 1. 15. Reisk.] ^'i/ucrot tov vararov a\e\ inroyevofievov
Tu>y (3aai\e(t)i', roiirov bi) yei'cadai ciptaroi' : Herodot. Er. c. 58.
v. Lucian, Macrob. p. 828. For the sake of emphasis it is repeated
in St. James i, 25. Instead of an addition of ovros, there is some-
times a repetition of a noun ; as of a proper name in Paus. Lac.
p. 162. 1. 27. and of two proper names in lEX. V. II. viii. c. 9. The
case of ovTvs, when thus added, is not always the same as that of the
antecedent word to whith it refers; as, ras be aWas, — ravrais —
irporideucri ayuii'ci : Paus. in Lac. p. 185. 1. 10.
OvTos is defective after several propositions followed by 5e ; as,
Kcit aWa TToWa Ktu irnvrola eyevero riiai na-^ijiri, kv be bt) Kai, &C.
understood, rovreoiai, Herodot. Terps. c. [)ci. ura iraaav fxev u\\i)v
'EXkuba, ey be (ravrrj) t:<u nepl 'l(tjitrjy, Herodot. Er. C. 86. The
pronoun is expressed after eybe in Lucian : ly be bt) tovtols ^ikoao-
fovs Tivhs, de Parasit. See also Lucian, t. i. p. 438. 1. 63. ed.
Amst.
niostli. pro Cor. p. 307. 1. 25. avT0(p6v- Chr. tKiivos ai/rSs ; PI. avroraros. Ari-
TTjs, Soph. El. 272. avToxo\^, Chrys. iii. stopli. Plut. 83. avrdraTa, Cic. Alt. 1. 6.
p. 840. 1. 32.— J. S. ep. 9.— J. S.
* Add, that avrhs has a auperlative :
64, THE PRONOUN. [Chap. iv.
A pronoun is iiinlerstood after ^•at npos in Eutrop. Mctapiir. v.
c. 6. utter (7V)' be in Tiieo<^n. 7-+- «"fl after frvr re in Orph. Hyiun.
[Ivv is used adverbially «itii be or re : see Nic. Ther. 628. 650. 843.
853. 86<). 881.] So )(wpls be, for j^wpis 6e tovtu)^.
XIII. (XV.) Pronouns, and more especially ovtos, are now and
then found in irregular positions, in which they occasion some degree
of obscurity; as, c7rj)(etp7/reo»' vjjQv e^eXeaOai t))v biaftoXijv, fjy
vfiels €1' iroXX^ -^pavu) e-^ere, raiTTjv ey cvrwai oXiyw -^^poio)'. Plato
Apol. S. for fcTtj^. vjj. ev olr. oX. -^p, ravrrju e^. r, b. â– i}u v/j. ev it. y^.
'iyereJ^ In Act. Ap. i, 22. tovtwv is removed to the distance of two
verses from rwv aweXQdvTiiyv a.vbpu>v in v. 21. to which it refers. See
Nepos in Pelop. c, 2.
XIV. (XVI.) Kai raura \ikv bt) ravra is equivalent to, so much for
this, at tlie conclusion of a subject, or head of discourse; but kuI
ravra alone is used for aggravation or exaggeration ; and that too ;
and that:"' av be p.oi bowels oh lipoaeyeiv tov vovv tovtois, Kal ravra
ao(pos S)v : hut you seem to me to pay no attention to these things ;
and that too although yon are ivise : Plato Gorg. p. 508. See Demosth.
contr. Phorm. [p. 922. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] id. Epist. iii. [p. 1-185. 1. 18.
R.] Id. pro Phorm. [p. 958. I. 14. R.] v. Hoogev. Praef. ad Doctr.
Partic. p. 9-" Kat rnvra is found, although rarely, at the end of a
sentence : WepiKkeovs be ovk ecpeiaw, TedrT]K6ros kuI ravra'. but you did
not spare Pericles, and that too after his death: Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 504. Im this kind of phrase ovroi is not always put in the neuter
plural : it has sometimes the gender, number, and case of a preceding
noun to which it is to be referred : yvvaiKos, ku\ ravrris veKpds,
Heliodor. yliith. c. 1. elvai eXevdepoiiri ?) bovXotat, Kal r ovroiai uts
^ pair erri (Ji : Herodot. Er. c. 11. ftnmXea rov u(ptyfievov kinaT anxems ,
Kal rovrov abeXfov rralba rov efiov : Heliodor. iEth. X. c. 23. See
also Herodot. CI. c. 147.
TovTo with verbs of naming is of the same import as so: rovro
yap haXelrOjfor so he was called: Lucian, Ver. H. i." So Lucian
in Conv. [p. 856. D. ed. Salinur.] 'Aptorore'Xrjs rets vvy 'HpuKXeluvs
ar7/\as KaXovfieras, irpivi) KXrjOfivai rovro, (priui Bptapeu) KaXelcrdai
avras : /FA. V. H. v, c. 3.
When euros is employed to represent the subject of a proposition,
it is put in the neuter, although the predicate be a substantive of a
different gender; as, rovr' eany art/ila, Epict. c. 31. This ])ractice
is difierent from that of elegant Latin authors with regard to their
' P. 7. 1. 42. ed. Basil, prim. Almost bor? Thomson, Spring, 3G7.— J. S.
every one must be sensible, I think, of " See Aristoph. Eccl. 401. Xcn. Anab.
the superior energy of the arrangement i, 4, 12. jMem. ii, 3, 1. Demoslh. de
chosen by Plato.— J. S. lleb. Cherrh. p. 103. 1. IG. 11. In Phil.
"â– Ve ik/raud; Ay DTHATyour brethren: iii. ]). 114. 1. 3. p. 117. 1. 29. de Rhod.
1 Cor. vi, 8. The consideration of — so libcrt. p. 197. I. 12. Tribuno plebis
small a standing force on our own side, quastor non paruisti, cui tints pn^sEii-
AND THAT TOO in a countrij destitute of tim collega parerel : Cic. ad Div. xv, 21.
forts and strong; places, &ic. Addison on — J.S.
the War. And the plain o.r, shall he " KaKciralvovres rtf iKivOdpif, {rovro
bleed, — AND THAT, perhaps, To .lurll tlie yap 4Ka\(7ro) : p. 738. E. ed. Salmur.
riot of th' autumnal feant Won by his la- —J. S.
Rule 13, 14.] VERB ACT., P.ASS.. AND NEUT. 65
pronouns in such cases ; \et there are exceptions : see Virg. JPai. iii,
173. Ovid, Her. Ep. ii, 5(). iii, S. Curt. ix. c. 10. § 24.
Tovro sometimes involves the meaning of several preceding words;
as in Plato de Hep. iv, 4'-2 1 .^
OvTos for belta ; an indefinite person : kal av, cot ovtqs, redfij-
|e(T0e, Antonin. e/s eavr. iv. c. 6,
TovTOis answering to o'ls, and rjJ to tovt(^ : DemostI), pro Cor.
[p. 266. 1. 1'2. R. and^x 26'8. I. 15.]''
CHAPTER V.
SECTION I.
-On the verb, with respect to kind
OR FORM.
Rule I. Verbs, having an active form, have sometimes a passive
[or reciprocal] signification ; as, aXttrKu), {to take, to capture, to
convict, to condemn,) chiefly in its preterperf. eaXw^n, and 2 aor.
ijXujv, or eaXwv, Att. v. Arrian i, \J v. Hindenb. ad Xen. Mem. ii,
5, 5. Abrcscli. ad iEschji. 1. i. p. S6. Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch.
1041. Or. 296. et Soph. (Ed. C. 74.
II. 'AvaKafiTTTeiv, to he rejltctecl : to. be els a\X?j\a avaKafiTrrei,
Aristot, Metaph. i.
III. 'AyaXafifiayeiy, to be restored to health, strength, &c. Theophr.
V.'
IV^. 'AyTaTTobibufii for avrairoblbofiai.'
V. 'ATraWarreiy, to be freed, to be discharged : mfxvei re ttoWuicis,
Kal airaXXuTTei pcjoy, and come off more easily: Aristot. Frobl.
§ 5. v. Bud. p. 318. Fitsii CEcon. Hij)p. in cnzaXXarTeiy.
Au^w and av^/u'w are sometimes intransitive: r]v'i,r}a€v »; itXayr),
P 'Apyhs 5e koI a/xeX^s â– yevijcrerai fJ.a\-
Kov aiirhs avTov; (TT/XoKTrjcras X"^P^^^' ^^O
UoXv ye. Ovkuvu KaKiwv x^Tpf^s yiyve-
Tai ; Kal rovro, e(f7j, ttoKv. p. 404. 1. 0.
ed. Bas. prim. — J. S.
? Add ; ovK, S> 'yaQol, ravr' icrTi iru
ravT]! : matters are not yet ir that state,
are nut arrived at thai : Aristopb. Eq.
843. els rovTo, to such a pitch or degree ;
with a gen. ^'s tout' eXijKvOe t ov vo-
fj-i^eiv ui.w Ka\ Xeyeiv Kal ypa.<peiv twelve
irav '6,Ti hv ^ovKrirai, i'^Tre, &c. De-
moslli. in Androt. p. 598. 1. 14, R.
TavTa is an answer to a command, and
expresses obedience : toCt'. & Sec-roU''
Aristopli. Pac. 27.i. So Vesp. 142. 851.
The full i;hrase is TaCro SpZ : <nrev5e
raxe'wSi Isic. ravTa dpu. Aristoph. Eq.
4'J5.— J. S.
' TlapayeyTjp^Kws, ^ irapavnias eaAwKcLs :
convicted of imbecility: iEsth. c. Ctes.
p. 642. 1. 10. R. aKwyai ^evSofiapTupiwy,
Viger.
^sch. in Tim. p. 107. I. C. eciAw vith
XriarSiv, /Esch. rie Fals. Leg. p. 197. 1. 1.
In a passive form as well as sense : Ari-
stoph. Vehjj. 893. ^sch. c. Ctes. p. 62.5.
1. 3.— J. S.
* 'KvaKaii^aveiv, to be renewed : I'lut.
Mor. t. ii. p. 961. 1. 9. Wyttenb. in 8vo.
Trpooavi. ,^vlas ijSri Trjs Svfd/j.eais, the
army having now recove'-ed from its fa-
tig::r - and sufferings : L'olyh, iii, CO. —
J.S.
' The following passage is not lij\ble to
the objection, groundless as it is, of Hoo-
geveen to Vigc.'s from Plato : €i tJ) Kara-
oapddvecv /xev tiVj, rb S' aveye(peadai /xi] av-
T airoSiSolr}, yi.yv6>j.evov eK rov KaOevdov-
ros, &c. were not opposed to it as correla-
tive : Plato Phffid. p. 28 I. 29. eJ. Bas.
prim. Add, el yap ju:") del arT07ro5:5ot77
TO. erepa to7s ^repots yiyvifxeva., wawepel
KVK\(f) irepi'idvTa, oAAi evdeld ris eXr} i)
yiveais, &;c. Id. ib. p. 72. 1. 10. — J. S.
I
66
VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. § i.
Clem. Alex. Adm. ad Gent. p. 30. T)vlT)fTey 6 Xcxos, Act. Ap. vii,
17. a Xoyos Tov deov i]v^aye, Act. Ap. vi, J. v. Luke ii, 40,
BciXXw also and some of its compounds are used intransitively or
as reflexive: /3a\X' es Kopaicas, go to the devil."
ElajjuWh), to run in, to burst in, to make an irruption, to in-
vade: bta be T}js QeaTTiiioTibos 'A^^epwr Troruftos ftiwi' irrloiiWei ts
civ~7it', TliUC. i, 46. els T))) — Aai^ebniiJoyitDy ^^wfjai' eicre/KtXot', Dl-
narcli. c. Demostii. p. 101. So e/jftaWio, Air. Exp. Alex, i, 1."
So iKbiboiai, to discharge itself, to disembogue, v. n. 7ror«/^to$ FXoD-
K0% ei^bibioa ly ts 6(i\ri(Taai', Paus. in Aeli. p. 431.''
'ETTtbiboiai, to make a progress, to advance: Plato Cratyl. p. 410.
in fin. Isocrat. Paneg. in fin. [p. I.91. 1. 8. ed. Battie, Cantab. 172').]
Demosth. Phil. ii. p. 49. 1. 45. PJato Hipp. M. p. 283. I. 43. Hero-
dian iii, 13. Isocr. ad Demonic, p. 8. Nicocl. p. 64. tmblboyai,
to be recruited by food: Hippocr. Ajdi. ii, 31. 32. speaking of the
body. eTTibebioKev ey r>; TroXei tv ofioXoyelr irorripovs eiiai : it has
become very common: Aristot. Rliet. i, 15. p. 7(). o'l enibebtttKores
avTols, overweening, arrogant perso?is, swollen with pride: Schol.
AristopI). Nub. 364. [p. 95. 1. 20. Bekker's ed. (for Priestley 1826.)]
So the simple verb : 6 b' iiborrj bovs, but he, having resigned him-
self to pleasure ; having indulged his desires: Eurip. Plioen. p. 112.
[v. 21.]
VI. The 2 aor. and preterperf. of 'larriiM, and especially of its
compounds, have a passive sense ; as, Kar aoTTivai els apx>)f, to be
placed in office, in authority/ or command : Isocr. for KuracTTadrirai.
And KnOeaTr]K€, it is established: Ka9^ ur/j^e TuyaOa — elyai, are ac-
customed to be, usually are: Time. iii. c. 43.' v. Polyb. v, p. 378.
Demosth. Ol. i, 14. ii, 9- "'1 7- Ka0/fw is very frequently used
as a verb neuter; and Kafnrru), Rom. xiv, 11.^ and kXi'i'id, Luke ix, 12.
eicKXh'u), 1 Petr. iii, 11.- Ae/Trw has sometimes a passive sense,
especially in a grammatical use: Xe/7ret »/ els, the preposition els is
understood: Schol. Aristoph. ad Nub. 1083. [IO70. p. 121. of Bek-
ker's ed. printed for Priestley, 1826.] r« cTrofiera XetTret, tvhat fol-
lowed is lost. AeiTrei alone in the margin of a book signifies that
there is a chasm or vacuity from part having been lost or destroyed.
" 'Es KdpaKas alone, pest! the deuce!
Aristoph. \'esj). 852. equivalent to tI) Se2-
va, says Brunck. (see note on chap. i.
^ xviii.) V. Aristopli. Ach. 804. — BdWai
with a niiddle signilicalioii : (paia ^a\e7v
Ifidria, to put on mourning : Polyb. E. L.
93.— J. S.
" Add, fjidxofiai fiSvos avr ifie^\t)KOLis,
J will fiif lit opposing myself siiigle-liuiided :
Arislojjh. I'^ip 707. Trapa0d\\fiv fls
viKiv, to go to : I'olyl). xii, 3. Trap($a-
\e KpdvTopi, lie became Crantor s disciple :
Ding, l-acrt. in Artcsil. Trapa0a\fiv
nXaTajci, Id. in Aristot. irop«'j8o\€ 2a)-
Kpdrti, Id. in Aiitistli. irpofidWiiv, to
he before in a march, Polyb. iii, 51. — J.S.
'" Add, olov ^fdiSovs T^ "AytSt, fa-
voring- him, being softened in his favor :
Plut. Ag. et Cleoni. p. 1-173. II. S(.
T-Tjs wpas TrapaStSovar] s, on the arrival
of spring : Polyb. K. L. 35. — J. S.
•■It occurs as a verb neuter in Ari-
stoph. also : oTav ph' Tj \liJLvr] KaracrrTJ,
\afx0dvovaiv ovSfU : when the lake is .still
or undisturbed, they calch nothing: Eq.
8G5.— J.S.
'J v. Sopll. n",(l. C. 86. aVMcdlXTTTdV ,
to walk backwards and forwards : Uiog.
Laert. in Aristot. p. 1G5. 1. I'J. in Zencn.
p. 239. 1. 31. cd. II. St. form, minim. —
J.S.
- Add i.noialyfiv, Soph. (Ed. R. 1192.
—J.S.
Rule — i:.] VRRB ACT., PASS., AND NF.UT.
67
'AnoXelTru) is a verb iieut. in Isocr. ad Dcm. p. 1 1 . ami tWei-irio in
Kpict. Eucli. c. 12. and with a gen. iWeiiruj ewiariifjri^, 1 want, or
am deficient in, knowledge: Plato Tlieag."
VII. MeraPaWeiy, to be changed: fie-eftdXev {vb(tip) els utpoi
<fefo', Plato Tim. p. O'O. v. Jos. Ant. Jiul. i. c. 11. § 4. /xe.a-
/Sci/XAeti' -irpos, Pliilo (ie Leg, ad Caiuni. But fxerafiuWeaOai is
comnionly the same as (ivro/joXely : v. Pint, in Alex.
^T1I. \\upaKiveiy,to moveindecoroualy : Aristoph. WawJ' to be mad :
TToWai fikv inrv naptiKeKivqKOTuiv biacpOeipoi'Tai, for TrapaKeKirrjine-
vwv, Xeii. Mem. iv.' Wnpoiveir, to be mad-drunk. Il\r]Oviu>
occurs in a piissive sense: -iroTcti^ioi vXnO uvovres, swollen, full :
Pint.'' And (7j3eyividi \n the preSeip. tnfji]t<a,' and the second aorisl
€a(ir]v in Horn. II. i, 467.
IX. !Lr^)€^w is nsed intransitively, especially in the first aorist : Act.
Ap. vii, 42. and the compound tTrcuaffrpe^eo',' to return, to double,
to be rallied ; and vTrouTpefen-, the same. 'YnnnTpeipeiv is also, in a
rhetorical sense, to double, as it were, in speaking ; to return upon
what one has last said, and make a parentiietical remark upon it
before proceeding in the course previously comnienced : Herniogencs ;
who gives as one example, roO yap ^iukikov aviTaiTos TroXe/jov ov bi
ffie' ov yiif) bi) eywye eTroXi-evofArji' ttw Tore' Trpwrot' /jh', &C. Dciliostll.
pro Cor. [p. 230. 1. 2J. Reisk.]
X. Sre/^etj', to be arrayed in martial order. [Irelxetv in this
use is not passive, but intransitive, as it always is : to march in array :
II. X, 331.]
XI. 1vvuT!Tb) is reflexive, when it signifies, to adhere firmly :
Tlieophr. or, to encounter, to engage, to conflict ; as, avicnvTeii' toIs
TToXefjiois' a. eh rlis -^elpas, Volyb. a. els /jci'^r]v or els voXe/JOV.
And so Trporjfji^ai, to approach or advance close to ; to arrive at.
XII. TeXe'ir, to be classed or ranked ivith or under, to belong to,
to be reckoned or enrolled among : al es to 'A)(f^t^o^' TeXnv (rat ttu-
Xeis, Pans, in Eliac. i. reXelv els inbpas.^ TpeTrio also, and its
compounds, are u^ed as intransitive; as, Trepi-peTru), Hesiod, Theog.
58. See Curtius iv. c. 6. 29. vii. c. 1. Virg. Mu. i, 108. Suet.
"Add diaXfLTreiv, lo he placed or stand
(it ititervnls : '6cov ir\fdpov 5aau irWvffi
SiaAe nrovcrais, Xeii. Aiiab. iv, 7, 4.
TrpoAeiTreif , to faint or swoon : at '70),
TT poXeliro), Eurip. IJec. 438. Pors. ex-
plained €K\€i7rco, Paraphr. — J. S.
* In Brunck's edition v. 044. tr/cJirei
pvu, ^v ft! viroKivijffavT ^5?;s : wrilliing,
jlinch'mi; : said by Xanthias about to be
Hogged by yl.acus.— J, S.
<^ Not simply by vacn fitrore percitis, as
"\'iger Iranslat'.'S it, but by men mad after
sometiiint; ; in tlie tbird sense of tlie
word in Johnson: noWol fiiv yhp Bta -th
KaWos virh tUv iirlroTs wpaiois â– napa-
KiKivr\K6Tuiv 5ia(p6eipovTai, (arc dclxiarhctl,
not occiduntiir): c. 2. § 35. Add, airoici-
vilv, ^I'.neas Poliorc. c. 10. pedcin porta
efferre : Casaub. to go beyond or pass
the gate. — J. S.
'' KaduAov ir\ri9vvovTa irpos rh SiaKtv-
Swivsiv, wlwUij bent on figkting: Poiyb.
iii, 104. See Soph. (Ed'. C. 930.— J. S.
' 'O Xi'Xfos airecT ^ri Kft, the lamp had
been extinguished: Plato Symp. p. 193.
1. 17. ed. ISas. prim. — J. S.
f'OTav 6 ij.iuTeiuij fiiaiocs, 'O S' iirava-
(TTpi<piiv SvvriTai, KatrepeiSecrdai rapoos :
Aristopli. Ran. 1102. wron^'ly, 1 think,
translated, rcfntarr. Add, avTi(TTpi(pnv,
to be reciprocally predicable : travTa Se
TO. -Kphs tI, irphs avr itTT pe(povTa Kiye-
Tcti Aiistot. Catep. c. 7. — .1. S.
I' Tiiel^ompduiKl SiaTi\e7v is frequently
used as a neuter : see Xen. Anab. iv, o,
'.). i, 5, 27.— J. S.
68 VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. ^ i.
Claud, c. 22. Gell. ii. c. 28. iv, c. 6. Virg. G. i, [l63.] Mn. x, 362.
G. iii, 565.
The following tweiy be added to the foregoing verbs : ayet*^, to go :
Xen. Aiiab. iv. p. 220. John xi, 7. â– n-pocruyeir, to approach: Act.
Ap. xxvii, 27. aviayeiy, to be impending or brewing : JE\. V. H. iii,
9.* eviaxveiv, to he rtcruited or restored: Act. Ap. ix, 19.' d^i-
ei/ieiv, passively, Hippocr. kut Irjrpelop p. 67 1, 14. uvcKpepeiv, to be
restored: Ilippocr. tteuI yvv. p. 26S. 22. cf. Aphor. ii, 43. huiva-
naveir, to rest: Hijipocr. Aph. ii, 48. vi, IS. Some active infi-
nitives are put in a passive sense after ceitain adjectives; as, p^'wv
(pvXuaaeiv, Eurip. Med, 320. hvvaTus Karavoijaai : ifhvs Ihtiv : iroKets
)^fi\e7rat Xnfteiv '. u^ios cii:ovaai : V. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 386. and
534. Locella ad Xcn. Ephes. p. 239- Dawes,_ Misc. Crit. p. 100.
Many intransitive verbs are used as transitive : 7)^€v \epa. Soph. Aj.
40. TTSTpa Xa^TTOvaa treXus, Enrip. Ion, 235. 'Ifuepa pehtJ yaXo,
Theocr. v, 124. v. R'^isk. in Misc. nov. Lips, vi, p. 520. Dawes,
Misc. Crit. p. 495. Abresch. ad Thorn. M. in eXTrlSw. Brunck. ad
Eurip. Or. 1427- Nicepli. Greg, post Hermanni librum de emen-
dand. rat. Gr. gr. p. 350. § 1S8. Neuter verbs as passive; as,
Tedvi,Kef v(f vfxiLi', he tvas killed by you : Plato Ep. See Xen.
Hier. x, 4. Agesil. ii, 4. eKTrinrea' vno tlvos, to be driven into exile
by some one. v. Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 287. B- Bauer. Lect.
Thuc. p. 17. Vechn. Hellenol. i. c. 6. Cuper. Obs. ii. c. 20.
And middle verbs as passive: fjapTvprirrerai, it will be testified:
Xen. Apol. 26. ihipeXy'jnr], you will be benefited: Xen. Mem.
iii, extr. [iii, 7, 9-] ^vXule-ai, ivill be kept or guarded: Xen.
Q^c. iv, 9. KurnyeXacreTui, will be laughed at: Plato Phileb. c. 33.
cf. Kust. de Verb. Med. § iii. And, vice versa, passive verbs as
middle : tTr/yueXT/yr/cc/Lievat for eTrtfxeXrjffo/u^vai : Xen. Mem. ii, J, 8.
XIII. The aorists, es-pecially tiie first, of verbs in ofiai, wJiich
have no active voice, have generally an active, though sometimes a
passive, sense; as, from biaXeyo^ai, bieXe^dijy, I discoursed ; from
laofxni, to cure, ladels, with both an active and passive sense ; from
irnp(ihe\o^(ti, to receive, irapahe^Qeis in both senses ; from deaofxai,
etieadrjt', /viewed, or was viewed. So e7rt/ieXij0»'Jiat ior iLTn^eXi'iaaadat,
Xen. Mem. i, 13, 11. i, 4, 13. ii, 10, 2. The same observation
applies to the preterpoift'ct also of those verbs ; as, â– KtiroirivTai ti)v
tlKora, for TreTTon'iKatTt, Pans, in Eliac. p. 310. tvTedetfieros ret
â– )(jnifinTu els Tip' vuvv, having put the goods on board the vessel: De-
mosth. adv. Phorrn. p. 589". [p- 917- I. 8. Reisk.] v. Cic. pro Mil.
e. 13. [§ 33.] and P. Manut. ad 1. It is particularly remarkable that
verbs, which in their active voice have a neutral or passive significa-
tion, have often in their middle or passive voice an active si<;nifica-
tiou ; as, from rayeveiv, which is neuter, (^^'Isch. S. ad Th. 58.)
TayfufitOfii, to send a person to a post or station.
XIV. By a very elegant idiom, a noun, which, if the sense only
were regarded, should be the subject of a verb subsequent in the
* "Tirf^dyttv, to escape, to po forth: * ^vfcirtcrxiifii' is intransitive in Polyb.
Aristot. Probl. ^ 5. <iu. 21.— J. S. vi, fi.— J. S.
Rule 13- i6.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT.
69
conslniction of llie sentence, is governed by some oilier verl> pie-
ceclini; in the constiuclion ; as, Onvfiaiu) anv, on 6 av-os on' aavro') act
biareXe'is : for davfjuiu), on (tv — biareXeh, I admire your being
alwai/s consistent : tijv re yTjv, onoar) eaT)v, eibernt, literally, to ktwiv
the /and, how much it is: Xen. Mem. iv. [7, 2. knows the mea-
sure of the land.^ u M/XwJ' top KiKepiova beiaas, fi)) — y^elpov hutym-
v!ar]rai: fur beiaas /j)) u KiKepwv ')^, b. Milo fearing lest Cicero might
plead the ivorse : Pint, in Cic. p. 878. I. 30. tous Kpnas, a Kepbaiov-
air, — j3uv\6 fiend' v/j'iv ^pi'inni : f(ir a o'l Kpirai Kepb. Aristopli. Nub.
[1099. Bekk.] See Aristopli. Nub. 145. Acli. 6*0. v. Ern. arl
II. XX, 310. Valck. ad Eur. Plioer. p. 555. Latin writers have
imitated this idiom : see Ter. Eun. iii, 5, 18. Hor. Od. iv, 14, 8.
i, 35. 9.
XV. V'erbs are often used in sucIj a manner as to form direct
phraseology, rehearsing the very words of some ptrson as spoken or
to be spoken, when the tenor of the sentence leads one to expect
oblique or indiiect recital : uKoveTe, ws aacpijs brjXol, kuI biopi^erai,
(in rnvra eyw neTrotijKct aKih'ru))' 'Adr)intu)v : Demosth. pro Cor.-'
that he did these things in spite of the Athenians ; literally, that I
did these things. So in St. John i, 19- it is said that the Jews sent
Priests and Levites to ask John who he was ; and the Greek words
are, 'iva epwryjawmv civtov, aii rls el; and in v. 20. John is said to
have confessed, upon being so questioned, that he was not the Christ :
in the Greek, i.at ij>fjo\6yT}(7er, oti ovk elfil kyut 6 ^pitrros. See
Demosth. pro Cor. [242. 1. 19. ed. Reisk.] Plut. in Alex. [p. 1228.
1. 1. ed. H. St.]*
XVI. (XVII.) A verb in the singular number is sometimes con-
strued with a substantive in the plural; as, ovk eve^efvcTo toIs jd'ev
al rptx^^t To'is be Tu irrepix : for cje^e^i/ojTo : Aristot. v. Pind. OI.
xi, 4. sq. Manetho iv, 354. Eurip. Bacch. 1348. v. Hermann,
Comment, de nietris Pind. ad Olynip. viii. This is the ordinary
construction wlien the noun is in the neuter, although there are ex-
ceptions : see Hom. II. /3, 135. Revel, i, 19. 2 Petr. iii, 10.' But
the Attic writers never join plural verbs with neuter substantives in
the plural, except when animate beings are spoken of: see Pors. in
addend, ad Eurip. Hec. 1149-
A verb is often put in the singular before several plural nomina-
tives, if the nominative immediately succeeding it be singular; as,
crvrepel <Pi\t7nros, Kal 'Airiyevrfs, Ka) ayTiypa<pevs, Kai Tives liWoi:
Denjosth. adv. Androt. p. 704. (v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 487-) and
J P. 239. 1. 12. Reisk. where eyi
means Philip, of whom Demosthenes is
speaking, not Demosthenes himself. —
J. S. _
* Add, ol 5' iiiTov, '6ti IkupoI fcrfi.ii' els
T^jc x'^P"'" 6V3"^^E"'. &c. Xen. Anab.
V, 4, 1. ravra TtivTa TOiii Sr]\ov6Ti ovSiv
6.\Xo ivdiiKyv/xivos t) 8t< €701 ovdlv ireVof-
eu Ueniosth. in Mid. p. 579. I. 5. Reisk.
where iyin means Midias, not the speaker,
Demosthenes. See also Demosth. de
Fals. Leg. p. 353. 1. 24. â– Koicr] ^afraa-'ia
rpaxf'icL (jLiKiTa i-m\ty€iv 5ti (pavraaia e?,
Epict. Ench. c. 5. where Wulfius very
unnecessarily proposes to read icrrl for
e?. See also Epict. Ench. c. 11. — J. S.
' In tlie passage in Ceb. Tab. [p. 37.
1.12. Sitnps. Oxen. 1738.] iravra {kcik^)
aKoXovdovatv, these evils are represented
as living forms. See I. 9. So in the passage
of St. John's Gosp. X, 27. animals are
spoken of. — J, S.
70 THE INDIC, IMPER., c^c. [Chai'. v. § ii.
ajtfr several plural nouiiiialives, if that iinmetliatelv preceding it be
either siiigukir, or neuter piiirul ; as, ftpoiTui kcu aT7f>mra\ kuI ii/^'^/a^pa
i:ar€\ufx(5aye, Charil. p. 46. 1. 19- bukpva koI bei'iaets kui OpT/t'os
kyivero, Diod. S. XX, 7'1. v. Dorv, ad Cluirit. p. 271.
There is oTteii an irregular transition from one number to another;
as, refiiTvas Tvpariois iibotas, oroi' OeXr], viz. 6 TVpayios, or TVpavvos
Tis, Eurip. Suppl. 453. v. Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. p. l^j. Protag.
p. 4f)t). and Herodot. Melp. c. 22. — and, with reference to evnoros
understood, in Galat. vi, 1. which is expressed in a like change
of numbers in FEA. V. H. i. c. 31. or tliere is a confusion of
numbers; as, "ILXtov fiaprvpofieuda bpu/a u bfj(w ov (iovXofiai: Eurip.
II. F. 858. where, if graiuuiatical rules, ratlier than the object of
the thoughts, had been attended to, the expression would have been
either fiapTupofxin hpuxra, or paprvpofieda bpwt'-es. See Pors. Suppl.
pra^f. ad Hec. p. 38. v. Ter. Eun. ii, 1. [1.9.] Ov. Trist. i, 3, 10.
Tiie Attics often put the plural for the singular: see Valck. ad
Phcen. p. 3G3. Bruiiik. ad Sopli. Phil. 493. 524. and the tra-
gedians especially do so for the suke of emphasis : Brunck. ad Eurip.
Bacch. 543. ad Soph. O^d. R. 366". Antig. 5(55.
A verb is sometimes joined with several substantives, with one
only of which it can be properly construed : Hesiod, Theog. 6"40.
V. Uorv. ad Char. p. 3^5. sqq.
SECTION II, — On the idio:ms of the indicative, impera-
tive, OPTATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS.
Rule I. — The indicative mood is sometimes put for the optative
or subjunctive ; * as, vhikv"^ -wnore nvrrj ovre elira, ovre e~oh](ra, e^' J
j](T-)(^viOr) : for ai> alaJ^^v^^€ir], at u'hich she might have felt shame :
Xen. Mem. ii. (So the Latin authors: see Plaut. [Amph. Prol. v,
17.] Ter. Andr. v, 1, 26. 18. Ov. Met. x, 635. i, 679. Virg. lEn. iv,
19. Ov. Trist. V, 5, 42. Juv. x. [123.] Virg. JEn. xi, 112. Suet.
Caes. c. 52. Cic. in Mil. c. 11. [§ 31.] Virg. JEn. ii, 55. Hor. Od.
iii, 16. 3.) And when a future indicative follows el, what is sig-
nified by that tense is often spoken of as dependent on some person
not signified by the nominative of the future; as, einep tis vpTiv
vpoaeiei tuv ruvv, if you would have people attend to you ; if you
would make people regard what you say to them through your am-
bassadors : Uemosth. Ol. i. [01. ii. p. 21. I. 26'. ed. Reiak.]
II. (VI.) The imperative is often used (as in English,) for the pur-
pose of caution or instruction rather than of command; as, pn) yap
o'ieaOe, Demosth. passim. See Eurip. Ipli. A. 734. and Markl.
III. (VII.) The injperative is sometimes equivalent to the future
indicative ; as, (rrudijri, you shall stand ; your statue shall be set up:
* So in Italian : S'io fossi giil stato, io Slradiollo (ircco. Giicciapd, I. x.
ti md.strai-d Di niio amor pin vltre cite le '" OvSevw-n-ore avT))v oSt' tlwa, odr'
fronde. Uanti., I'arad. c. 8. La quale fwoi-qaa uvSiy, i<p' u V' JMt'i'f"'. ''< 2, 'J.
ignoranza contimuava vicdesimamente, — J. S.
— 36 per sortc non fusnc slaio prcso unu
Rule l— 5.] THE INDIC, IMPF.R.. Ac. 71
Phito Plianlr. p. Q36. I. 14. (like Virgil's aureus esto, Eel. vil, 3.5.)
vlnda ifi' a fioi yeieaOu) ; do yon knotv now what I must have done'f
what (hiuga are to be done for me? Eiirip. Ipli. T. 1203. «\,\'
maB" o bfjdaiii' ; but do you know what you are to do? what yon must
do? Aiistnpii. l';ic. 1()()1. To uiukTslaiui tli«^ iiHture of tiitse latter
phrases, we must consider tliern, as if tiie imperative were placed
first: bftdirov, (or Troiijrroi', Eurip.) oiad' (i ; Beiitl. ad Meiiaiidr. p.
K)7. KaM). ad Greg. p. ?• se^l- Bninck. ad Soph. Q^d. R. 513. Pors.
ad Hec. 2 '2.9.
And on the other hand llie future indicative is often used for the
imperative; as, aW civi' vpof^njv Oaeis ye tovto /ir]b€%'i Toi/pyov'
Kpvcpri bt- KevOe : Soph. Antig. 84. v. Eurip. Here. F. 792. Mussr. ad
Eunp. Ion. 1337. Matth. v, 2\. 48. And so in Latin, V'irj;. .^n. ii.
[547.] Cic. ad Div, v, 12. Hor. Ep. i, 18, 96. Curt, viii, 14. And
with a ne<;ative the future indicative is useil interrogatively for the
imperative; as, oi»)( oaov tu^os Xw^j'/o-ern/ th; go, aome one, with all
haste ! Eurip. Andr. 1062. ov navaij — Xeytof ; cease to say : Hero-
dian ii, 1, And in the same manner the prcse7it tense el, which has
usually a future sense, is used in Soph. Philoct. C)75. v. Zeun. ad
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 22. or Hoogev. de Partic. p. 003.
IV. (VTII.) The optative mood is not put for the indicative, as
some have believed. In the passages in which it was thought to be
so employed, it makes no affirmation, as the indicative does, but
speaks of things as supposed. If I say eXeyes, vti Zievs rt)v hiKuioav-
vr]v ETre/jxpe, I indicate thiit I myself also believe that Jupiter did
so: but if I say e\eyes on Zevs r/"/i' b. tt e /i i// e t e, (Plato Protau.) I
merely state the supposition of him who said so, whether true or
false. So those words of Xen. (H. Gr. ii.) Avaaibpns be ^iXoi^Xea
irpwTOv lpu)T}iaas, us tovs 'Apbplovs Koi KopiiOlovs K(it aKprj (iv i a e i€,
Ti e'lt] a^ios irade'ii', &c. are thus translated by Gail : Lysandre
demanda a Philocles, quel snpplice meritait un homme qui aurait
pttcipite du haut d'nn roc les Andriens et les Corinthiens : and
Hermann approves of the translation.
The optative is put for the imperative:" ^<i)p(~ts av e'/crw avy rax^'>
go in quickly: Soph. El. 1498. The Attics join the optative
with av in the sense of a future ; as, jiiroi^' ar, I will remain : Soph.
Aj. 88."
V. (IX.) The subjunctive properly expresses possibility, without
any indication of thought or expectation about that possibility : ovk
e^w oTToi T pinrio[jiai, is, / have no resource to ichich I can betake
myself; but ovk e^w uirui rpaTroinr}v av, is, I have nothing to ivhich /
can hope or expect to have recourse. Tpanolfirjv without a»' can be
joined with a past tense only ; ouk cJ^oj' ottui rpa-iroifxijy.
" Tfj 5' laThv (TTriaaiTo ywr], -KpoPiXoi- is in the second aorist, if it have a distinct
t6t€ fpyov : Hesiod, 'H/u€p. 15. 6ioiT &v. second aorist ; otherwise it may be in the
Run! Away! Aristopli. Eq. IIGI.— J. S. present tense, but is more frequently iu
" With re.^pect to the older poets, the first aorist. Every schoolboy knows
wlienever a wish or a prayer is expressed that ju^ yiyvono, or jut; rvyxa-vot, would
either by the simple optative mood, or not be Greek. Edinb. Rev. Feb. 1812. —
with juTj, ei, eWf, et yap, «f0e yap, the verb J.S,
72 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. ^ iii.
In t/ Xfyw ; tI (pSi ; and tlie like, suhjunctivcs are not put for in-
dicatives; but, except wiicn there is a sigriifjcatinn, peculiar to the
subjuiu'live, that something ought to be done, I know not, I am in
doubt, tell me, or somewhat equivalent is to be understooil : v. Her-
mann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 1J)2. On /3oi)\et e'tTrw see Hemst. ad
Lucian. t. i. p. 207. The suijinnctive mood often expresses doubt
or irresolution ; as, e'inwuev >*/ cnyCJi^ev ; 7) rt bfjaao/jev ; Eurip. Ion,
738. aWci br/T e\du) ; Eurip. Or. 778. v. Vakk. ad Plioen. p. 277-
ad Hippol. p. 247. Dialr. p. 211. ad Ilerodot. p. 332.
In the first person plural only it is eujplojed in exhortation ; as
SECTION III.— On thk infinitive mood,
AND CERTAIN TENSES.
Rule I. All the diftprent cases are joined, according to circum-
stances, with the infinilive mood. When the construction is not in-
fluenced by any word preceding in a dift'erent case, the accusative is
generally employed ',p and sometimes an accusative is to be understood
with it, even when a different case of the same word has preceded ;
as, b€Of^nl vfiijv — ret bUaia \l^t^(pi aaadat, evOv fiov fxevovs on,
&c. Lys. adv. Thcomn. p. 36'4. ed. Reisk. (v. Markl. ad h. I. and
p. 620.) When the word joined with the infinitive is to be under-
stood of the subject of the verb upon which I lie construction de-
pends, it is put in the nominative. The following- example exhibits
both an accusative of a word not signifying the subject of the prin-
cipal verb, and a nominative of a word which does signify it ; to /ueu
fxvpidicis fivpiovs ic€ici]pvy^da I TrapaXeiTfu), kcu to ttoWukis avros
€CTTe(pai>u>(xdai Trpore/Doc : Demosth. pro Cor.'' If ever an accusa-
tive is used, when the subject of the leading verb is indicated, it is
always with the accompaniment of a reciprocal pronoun : kvojAiiov
ebJVTOVs 7rpu)Tnvs yereaOui irdi'Twv dfOpujTrwv, Herodot. ii, 2. He
might have said tn')fxiS.oy irpioTOi yereadui, but not evofii^uv npujTOVS
yereaQai without eujvrovs. On the other hand, a nominative is some-
times found where an accusative might be expected ; but then it is
referred to a subject existing in the thouglil, and not in the expres-
sion : ecTTcii (j)pey6s aoi rovro KtjXrjTiipioi' lijs 'Hpa/cXc/as, wore /Lii'yriv'
€laibu)y Srep^ot yvvaltca icelvos dyrl'aov TrXeor : Soph. Tr. 574. i. 6.
Kr)XriO}]ij€Tai o 'Upa^Xf/s, &c. v. Clark, ad Horn. II. i, 17O. Dorv. ad
Char. p. 230. ed. Lips. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 303. The Latin poets
have imitated this Grecism : v. Iloral. Od. iii, 27. [73.] Ep. i, 16.
P UpofxriOta /.' (IvaKpris ; Lucian, Prom, ynw master : I,ucian, Vit. Auct. 382. D.
cs &i.c. p. 14. A. — J. S. <pr)<T\ yap ovtos afie'ipuv yfyfvrjaOat ffrpa-
1 ^r)fn\ — h(jipiwv S'lKaios thai Tuyxd- rriyhs 4fjiov : Lucian, Dial. JVIort. p.
v(iv, Dcinosdi. pro Cor. p. 2i:j. 1.0. ed. 210. E. See Lucian, Conteinpl. p. 32-1.
Rcisk. <PtiixI unoios ehai avrcjl, Lucian, A. Tluic. ii, 81. p. 339. 1. 'J* cd. Bekker.
Prom, es &c. p. 11. A. irflau tJrat 5e<r- — J. S.
Trdrrjj, / «•('// convince you lliat 1 am
Rule i — 5.]
THE INFINITIVE, &c.
73
[30.]' Examples of the clutive with the iofiiiilive may he seen in
Aristopli. Plut. 2S5". Xen. Mem. i, i, y. iind CEc. xi, 6".^ and in Latin,
Cic. e|). 16". lid Brut. [p. 2l6"9. I. 15. ed. Veiburg. form, min.] Hor.
Art, Poet. 372. V. Erii. ad Xen. Mem. i, 1,9- Bach, ad Xen. CEc.
i, 4. :u)tl Dorv. ad Char. p. 52.
II. (III.) The infinitive is often equivalent to the Latin active
supine; as, iiKovaiv uawuSendui, they come to salute J So Virg. jEn.
i, 531. An infinitive of one verb of motion is thus placed after
another verb of motion : Horn. II. h, 199- ^> ^l^* Tob. v, l6".
IIL (IV.) Sometimts the active infinitive may be interpreted by
the Latin passive supine; as, Ka\os Ihelv, j)ulcher visu ; or by an
adjective and sidjstantive ; XevKus Ibelv, albo colore: Plato Pliccdr. p.
2o3. ^HvQus ihelv , Jlavo colore \V\ii:'\s : Oppian, Hal. i, 156".
IV. (V.) It comes after kv kuXu, KaWiarb), hiovTi, biKaiu), npoarj-
KovTi, and the like: vTiv yap If koAw (ppoue'iu. Soph, El. 384. i. e. to
(pp. €(Tr]y ei' (caAw, for tiow is the right time to consider, (or to act
prudently :) when the genitive of the article is sometimes joined with
it ; as, erjTiv kv kqAw tov Tvoielv.
V. (VL) It is used nistead of a participle, or of the indicative mood
or subjunctive, witii ws or tlie like : boKdv ejuo'i, as I think : (for efiol
boKovt', or ws e/iOtyn boKe'i,) Soph. El. ws ifjoi boKeetr, Herodot.
tiVov ye fx tibiiai, as Jar as I know: Aristoph. Nub. 1254. €«\oo-a(,
if one may decide by conjecture: Soph. (SJ^\. R. 82. ws ekcWca,
Herodot, i, 32. avyeXoyn e'nre'ii', to be brief: Demosth, Phil, i. p. 15.
ws TiiTTu Xafie't)', to define or describe loosely or generally, with
less precision : Theophr. Char. i. de Plant. Demosth. de fals. leg.
p. 402. 1. 21, Herodot, i. 6l. Aristoph, Eccl, 450. Demosth, de
fals. leg. p. 355, 1. 28, Liician, Tim. § 19. Demosth. c. Aristocr.
623, 26'. Arislot. Rhet. i, 2. Dion. Hal. iv, 409. Demosth. ad
Phil. Ej). p. 6"0\ Herodot. ii. p. 12. I. 12. p. 50. 1. 30. p. 49, 1. 32,
&IS erros elTzelf, to speak compendiously: Plato Phiedr. c. 25.j 29-
Infinitives of comparison are frequently thus put for a particijde,
though not an impersonal one ; as, ttiOi/k.wj' KaXAt^-os alrrxpos f'tXAw
yerei ffy/j/jaXcj*' : the most beautiful of apes is ugly compared with
another species of animals : Plato Hipp. M. p. 289,
Ael*- with /Ltik-pov, or oXiyov, is put absolutely or parenthetically,
for almost, nearly ; as, oXiyov belv kj.inv-ov €ne\a66fjr]v, I almost
forgot myself : Plato Socr. Ap. [p, 7. I. 2. ed. Bus. prim, e/xavrov.']
KareftuXoy yovy, fiiKpov ha'iv'. Lucian. v. Isocr. Evag. p. 474.
Dem. pro Cor, 231, 30. rToAAoO belv is the contrary ; as, o, iroXXov
heiv, enrol ris uv : which any one ivoiild be far efiough from saying.
^ The following is an example of a
genitive «itli ihe infiniiive: ^iirMfxijv av-
ruv 5ia tijy irolr](riv olofj.ivwv koI T?.\\a
ff o<pwra.T<tiv elvai avdpdnruv, & ovk
^o-oi/: Plato Apol. S. p. 9. 1. 13. ed.
Basil, prim. — J. S.
' EUxofJ-ai — rifili' — yeveaOai — irtaTois
elvai Koi fie^uiots SoKelv Sta/xet'eiv, De-
mosth. adv. Lept. p. 1(51. I. 20. cd.lleisk.
Figer.
and with an ellipsis of tji'j, Deinostb. adv.
Lept. p. 49-1. I. 1.— J.S.
' An infinitive ^gnif^ing purpose or
end ; equivalent to the subjunctive with
'tva : iyib 5e /cii\i'x»'irf«' tc aoi koX tpapfxaicov
Sidcv/xi, T&v rdijiv avriKvrifilois eX/ci'Spia
iTepia\€i(pnv, Aristoph. Eq. 907. —
J.S.
K
74 Ti!E INFINITIVE, tic. [Chap. v. § iii ,
To express the same sense, be'iv is sometimes made finite, and another
infinitive is put after it; as in Deni. pro Rhod. lib. p. 79- (j\iy<'V 6t
8eto Xeyeti'. V. Thuc. ii, 77. Pint, in Deniosth. p. S4y. I>otr.
Evag. p. 476- «md 456. and for fiiKpov tberjoev, fjtKpor inrfiXnre is some-
times eletrantly substitnted ; as in Pint. Ca^s. p. 719.
VI. (VII.) It is sometimes, hke the Ent;hsh infinitive, equivalent
to the Latin gerund in dum : as, ehioKev uvrrj iriwlKa exef ^« ^"''7
Ta Ki/Trpia, iEi. V. H. ix, I6'. v. Tlieogn. Il6"4. Lys. pro Polystr. p.
666. [1. 2.] Reisk. and Virg. IPm. \, 248. 262. 307. 538. ix, 362.
V. Abresch. ad Catiier. p. 34. Ciisanb. ad Atli. i, 7. p. 24.
VII. (Vill.) Ill indirect or obli(|ue speecii, as it is termed, (as
when one states the substance of what anollier has said, and does not
repeat his very words,) the infinitive is put after u>s instead of the
indicative; as, ws Ibeli' -uv WyaQuirn,'" ivhen Agniho saw him:
Plato Synip. c. 2. v. Ilerodot. i. p. 5. 1. 18. ed. Camer. cf. i. p.
18. 1. o5.
Tiie following uses of the infinitive after ws are also to be remarked :
u>s olov eiTTcti', as for example : Epiphan. /caret aipta. i. p. \7 • tovtu)
iTTUffiv Tii'\ Cjs eyu) 'boKovr op^iv, TCii^eii' t»' uW)'iXr}fTii' : these, as I
thought I perceived, were commencing a dissension among themselves :
^sciiyl. Pers. 187. Here, instead of the proper word eTev^oi, an
infinitive is employed, depending on w$ ebuKavy ipqr. v. Erf. ad Soph.
Ant. 732. Latin authors have imitated this construction : see Cic.
de Off. i, 7. 22. de Or. iii, i, 3.
J'here is sometimes an ellipsis of an infinitive."
VIIL (IX.) The infinitive is used to express what is decreed or
ordered ; as, to v////'/;iT/,ia tovto ypu^jw irXelv Im rovs tuttovs, Iv ot$ av ij
4>/\(;r7ros : Demoslh. pro Cor. i. e. a psephism ordering to sail, &c.
and it is sometimes substituted for the imperative mood :* as, e'lKere,
pi)be deoh fxe r eaiytfiev icpi /u'lj^eff^nt : 11. f, 606. lav Tis nwo-
KTeivTj Tvpavvov, rifuas Xai^ftare ir, Moeris in v. Xa/ufiuveir, from
Aristoph. Av. It is used also to express a wish; as, w Zev, tKyerea-
6cu fioi 'AO/;i'a/ows ritraaOcu ! O Jupiter, that J may he able to avenge
myself on the Atheniaiis! Herodot. v, 10,5. — or admiration, indigna-
tion, or other emotions ; as, ak rnvTa bpaoai ! that you should have
done these things! when the article is often added: Aristoph. Nub.
816. or the article and li : Aristoph. Nub. C(^<). Av. o. 7- Ran. 741.
IX. (X.) Different tenses are often promiscuously used by the
best Greek writers : liiis is so remarkably the case willi regard to the
" Apollodorus's friend is relaliug wliat tSappei is used as a transitive: neither
Aiistodemus had told liiiii ; tliat lie, Philip placed unn confidence in Ihem.nor
Aribtodemus, lind gone uninviied to Aga- tht'ij in Philip. Tluro is 1111 ellij>;^is of an
tlio's; €'jdvs 5' oZy, its ISdi' rhv'Ayd- irifiiiilive in budi i)hrascs as ojs ^lAe?, and
Gttiva, 3>, ipdvai, 'A/oi<7To5r;jue, eh icaKhf oTa or diro'ia (piAtT. — J. S.
TjKeiy oTTois a'vi'Sfnrvf]a7}i. p. 177. I. 4. ed. * So in Italian perpetually' : e. g.
Basil, prim. — J. S. No)i Asi-tiTAn miodir piil.nc mio cemto.
" 'ILcre is no cllipsia of an infinitive in Dante, Purg. c. 27. — Danlc, perchc
Vif;er's example, oSt( i-lMiriros ^Od^^ei Vii(;ilio sc nc vada, T\'on i-iANCtiiE, &c.
TouTouf, o(/0' uXiToi ^iKivnof : Dtniostli. Id. ib. c. iiO.
01, iii. [p. 30. I. 1.-,. ed. Rrlsk.] Init
Rule 6— lo.] THK INFINITIVK, &v. 75
tnii;e<lians, that Porsoii (ad Hec. 21.) saj's tliey seem to have studied
variety in using them indiscriiDiiiattly. v. Hemst. ad Liician. t. i.
p. 295. Valckeii. ad Hippo), p. \L)J. Bmiick. ad /Esch. Prom. 1036".
act Eurip. Med. 1141. ad Hec. '21. ad Andr. 804. Abresch. ad Xen.
Eph. p. 24-1. Eiu. aci il. b, 161. and Callim. in Apoll. 14. Dorv. ad
Cliar. p. 20'8. Duk. ad Thiic. p. 125. Hiiideub. ad Xen. Mem. iii,
4, 4, Wopk, Lect. Tidlian. p. 279. Clark, ad 11. a, 37.
The pretcrinipcjfect is sometimes put for an aorist. Its proper
signification is of an action or slate not p'st or over at a certain
former time, or of what was wont to be or be done formerly, but no
longer at llie lime wlieii the tense is used.
X. (XI.) The aorists are used as a present tense signifying usual-
ness ; as, fiu:pqv TTTalajin are')(^airia€ Ka\ bieXvae TzavTci, a smull
miscarriage nsualltj throivs back and breaks up every thing: De-
mosth. 01. ii. [p. 20. I. 27. ed. Reisk.] os re Ka\ aXcijuoi' aibpa fofteT.
Kal a0e/Xero rkqv 'Prj'ibioos. Hom. 11. tt. [689.] In other cases it!
wliieh an aorist is said to be put for a present tense, there is a real
indication of the past, though difficult to be expressed in another
language: eln-oi', edictum volo : Eurip. Med. 272. hntiirov, impe-
ratxim volo: Euiip. Suppl. II70. KaroiK-eipa, misericordia facta
sum: Ip!i. A. 469.'^ Tlie present and the aorist in oilier moods
than the indicative difl'er chiefly in this, that the present signifies
something of considerable duration or often repeated, the aorist some-
thing (piickly despatched or done but once : ypai/zoi- (3ifi\ov cannot
be said, since the performance requires time : bos rriv ^e7/ja can,
because the thinjj can be done in a moment.
T\ie futjirc sometimes si<;nifies possibility : w (piXrar, e'i ris <p06yyoi>
eiaaKovaerai Qi'1}twv irap' "Aib)], aoi Tub\ 'llpuhXeis, Xeyw : if any one
can hear. Sec. Eurip. Here. F. 490. It has been supposed to be put.
for tl:e present* in many passages in wliich il will be found to retain
its ovvu proper signification: in the Medea of Eurip. when the chorus
has informed Jason of his children's death, he answers, (v, 1310.)
o'luoi Ti Xeleis; what will you proceed to tell me after this com-
mencement ? V. Hec. 515. 710. 1114. ed. Pors. Tins signification
is very manifest in the following passage : Neopt. Trap' ovnep eXaftov
Tube TO. Tv^\ avOis ■naXir — . Ulyss. w Zeii, ri Xei,eis', ovri ttov bovrai
roe~is ; Soph. Phil. 1233.
The preterperfect of some verbs has a present sense ; as, â– ^refofirjiitat,
I am afraid, Time, i, 144. behoiKci, Theogn. 38. tcenXij/iai, Eurip.
Hec. 550. and of such verbs the pretcrpluperfect is used as a pre-
terimperfect. v. Thom. M. in ebebaifceii', p. 204.
^ TluTc is a marked distinction be- 1.1. — J. S.
tween the present tense and second aorist * So in Italian: MANDAN: // tit-
in Lucian's Gallus : ^•/j.rii' yap rhu EvKpd- nnilto svani. Artas. Fia vera? e come?
TTj** — atrodvqcTKeiv, flTajTrpuaicaAiffafTa, IMetastasio, Artaserse, iii. 10. and in
fjLf, Kal Sta9r}Kas dinevoi'. — /xiKphv iinax<iy- French: Lis. Ah mis,ralile \>cre, que
Ta, aTToOavi'iv : p. 2 15. B. ed. Salmur. ferns Ui,quan<l tu sauras cclte nouvelle ?
The j^lolic amist was used, says Eusta- Sq. Que sera ce? MoLitnE, L'Ani.
thiue, to express a "ish for the speedy INIed, i. 0.
accomplislimeiit of oiia'i denires, p. 37.
76 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § iii.
Xr. (XIII.) The second aorist in bov, and the prelerperfect in ca,
of verbs of the fourth conjugation, are scarcely in use. Instead of
them the first aorist is most frequently employed.
XII. (XIV.) The aorists and preterperfects* passive are sometimes
used for the same tenses of the active or middle voice : btaXexQv-
vni (or biaXe^ncrdat, to have conversed; evXafiljdrji-, I acted with
caution ; epyaadels, having wrought ; hiavoT)Ben, having thought or
intended, Tluic. i. hvvr]Qfivni, to be able ; KaruKTiadriy, I have shown
pity or compassion, Eurip. Iph. A. 6s6. k-^r^ipinfxevwv, having de-
creed, Thuc. i, hehuypiqixh'rjs, having given, 2 Petr, i, 3. V. Stepli,
de dial. Att. p. 65. Markl. post Siippl. Eurip. p. 281. Fisch. prvcf.
ad Weil. Gr. p. xii. seq.
XIII. (XV.) Of verbs in ew the future in eau) is more frequent and
elegant than that in I'/irw ; and the e is commonly retained in the
tenses derived from it: kiraiviu), -veaw, -veKa, -ridr)v. Even from
evpi'fau) comes evpedrjv, and from epi](Tw eppiQr)v ; f and the poets even
prefer lengthening a syllable by doubling the characteristic letter to
exchanging this e for »j : thus icaXeo-fraro, Horn. II. a, 54. fin-^eaaa-
fjerw, II. a, 304.
XIV. (XVTI.) Of passive verbs, that have both aorists, the second
aoriit is oftener used than the first; as, 7rX>;rro/iat, ewXayijv oftener
than (:ttXi])(Qi]v. [eTrXctyijv with respect to nund, I was dismayed;
l-X-fj'/Tjv \vith respect to body, I was struck.]
The first aorist niifidle in both an active and passive signification is
very common ; but the second has nineh oftener an active than a
passive signification ; as, et.Xd/irj)', / took, or chose; seldom I was
taken, or chosen : from (dpeojiai.
A transition is often made from one -person to another : fiom the
first to the third in Mark xi, 32. from the second to the third in
Ps. cxliii, 9, 10. Eccl. xlviii, 8. from the third to the first in Acts
i, 4. xvii, 3. from the third to the second in Luke v, 14. Macchab.
i. sub fin. Acts xxiii, 22. See Xen. Cyrop. i, 4, extr. [In all these
passages there is a transition either from oblique or indirect phrase-
ology, or H'cital, to direct, or vice versa,] v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 89-
and 3+7. p. 253. 273. ed. Lips. Hermann, ail Eurip. Ilec. 1253. and
ilaphel. Annotatt. philolog. ex Xen. ad Act. i, 4.
[Before proceeding to the idioms of some particular verbs individu-
ally, it may be proper here to speak of two classes of verbs. One of
these is of verbs which always end in i8w, and signify similitude or
imitation; as, XifjeviSeiv, to be like a harbour, )^o\y?cn. iv. Hence
verbs so terminated, and derived from pro|)er names, signify, to be
of the side, or party, or sect of, to favor, to follow: as, MuKebotl-
ieif, Pint, in Uemosth. ^iXimriieiv, ib. p. 854. 'lovbaiieiv, ib. p.
8()'4. 1. 23. AnpofrOerieeiv, ib. p. 872. 1. 49- But 'KXX)iyi8eii- (/Esch.
c. Ctes. p. 299. 1. 11.) is to speak Greek; a.\u\ 'EXXriri$e(jdat utto
Tii'vs, (Thuc. ii, 68.) to learn of him to speak Greek. The other
* ouTco TToWo ital fieydXa Koi ixtix'tJ^a Bas. 1. — J. S.
7«V7) /caToS€5oiiAa)/i€'j'i7 iji/ ij Tlepa-wv t i^i)(dri Plato Tliesct. p. 79. 1. 10. cd.
apxi). Plato, ftlcncx. p. 3G7. 1. 2. ed. Bas. 1.— J. S.
^ iv. Rule 1—5.] OF THE VEK15S ayaivi^v, Szc. 77
class is of verbs appropriated, or used e7r(r7j5e('ws ; as, Trotcli'is
irsed peculiarly of the perfi)rmanees oi pods; Xe ye ir, 0/ orators ;
(Tvyyputpeii', of historians ; IcrTopr] rr a i, of geographers ; hihna-
Keiv, of preceptors ; btaXeye/rdat, of Socratic philosophers, nho
were expert in iulirrogaliiig and answering ; a vp ftovXeveir, cf sena-
tors, &c,]
SECTION IV. — Of the verbs ayan^v, arepyeiv, aTta^prjr,
aair(t$eadat, ayeir Kni ipepetv, anoXavetv.
Rule I. Tiife verb uymr^v sometimes signifies to prefer ; as, uyn-
â– !T^v Ta bwpa ai'Ti ruiv Kotrrj iraat rols "EAX)j(r< avf^cpepuyroji', to prefer
bribes before the common advantage of the Greeks : Deniosth. pro
Cor. and with npu: ay uTrr/ tra i rijf I'lrrav irpo tTjs eXevOeplus, Plut.
in Camiil.
II. h sii-nifies also to rest satisfied; to be content ; to think one^s
self well off; cvk aya-rr^s oif ei^rjXos VTrepcpLuXoim fied' Sj/jli' baii'v/rai ;
Horn. Od. 0, 289- iilld with el or i'/v : >/ya7ra be, el bvi'ui-o — d'/j/
â– ^foypav abijiorov biacpvXuTTeiv, Xen. iii. Hist. Q^c. xi, 10. With an
accusative: uyanaip ra naXai vev o fxia ^ira. With a dative:
uyaTvtbv To'is vnup^nvtriv uyaOo'is, Lysias. And with a dative go-
verned by a preposition: ctt) toIs Iv rij TrnXiTfJ<^ Kctdeffrwcriv
(lyuTT^iv, With a participle : ovk liya-n a s fxera (^wnliovos uttoOi'i^-
GKcov;^ and with an infiiiitive ; uyawwv — tovs a/)(/uaAwroi^s — -cnro-
Xaf^ely, Herodian, iv. sub fin. and ii, 15, 8.
III. Nearly synonymous vvitli uyuTr^f are arepyeiv, arpefiely, iiav-
\nteiv, evucTfieticeiv : of which arepyeiv has the same constructioiis
as ayawrji . 'Arpe/jie'tv and }jcrv\a^eiv are generally construed only
with cTTt and a dative case: evaffjuej^t^etr with a dative case alone.
'AffTTuieadai, besides its signification of kissing or saluting, has the
following, — 1. to love, Xen. Ages, xi, 3. — 2. to be content or satis-
fied ; with an accusative of the thing with which one is contented :
Max. T. Diss, xxi, 1. — 3. to embrace, or choose, as a cause or party :
TCI 'Po)fiai<i)v aanu^erjdai, Plut. Cjes. c. 23. — 4. to receive ivillingly,
to entertain; aan-aieadai to jjivdiobes, Lucian, de Conscr. hist. p. 6^6.
— 5. to praise, Lucian, Muse. enc. p. 331.^ — 6. to receive as a scholar
or disciple, Plato in Theag. p. 92.
'Attoxp*}!', to content or satisfy, with a dative of the person
satisfied : el yap ?/(tvX""' ^X^"' i'ldeXet', airoj^^priv eviuis vfiuiv liv /uoi
boKel : I think some of you would have rested satisfied : Deniosth.
Phil. i. p. 19. 1. 45.
IV. "Ayeti' forms circumlocutions with hia and a genitive; as,
ayeiv Tiv'a hia Tifiijs, to honor a person ; ci. but (fipovTibos, to take
thought about ; a. bi" aibovs, to reverence.
V. With a dative and ev it signifies to esteem, reckon, or regard
" "Zv 5« — ayairai — tovs a.py(\6tpovs to sliow tbat it does not signifv to praise.
TTfpiTpdiywv, Aristo))li. Vesp. G72. — J. S. — J. S.
-' Tlie passage referred to seems ratlicr
pCt^ty ^ty/TM^ (turt^^orrat^ cx^/^^ -''^^_ fCCc/. /Zc
78 "Kyf.iv, 'A\oi/e«i', &c. [Chap. V, ^ iv.
as I thus, TOW! <l>i\ovs tJ' abeXcpols ayeiv. And so with Tropa and
au accusative; as, Trrjf/ ovbei', ncifjci woXv, Trapa nXe'ioi', ciyeiv. And
with a genitive case alone ; as, twi' buibeKu deiLy 'HpocAea ayavaiv,
they recko7i Ilercults one of the ticelve gods : Air. Exp. Al. ii, \6.
VI. Also with an accusative it signifies to account or esteem ; as,
Tus be rwv cipj^ovrwv {ufiapTias) j^eyc'iXas I'lye, Xcn. Ages.
VII. "Ayeiy Ka) (pipeiv, (applied both to persons and things,) to
harass, to plunder, to spoil, to ravage: ayeiv Kal (pipeiv -oiis
â– !ro\e/.ii(jVi, k'a< Kara yyjy, ku) Kara OaXaTTciy : Isocr. in Archid. ciyeiv
hul (pipeiy â– x^i'opay, Dcinosth. Phil. iii. p. 50. 1. 12. v. Horn. II. c,
481. Virg. ^n. ii, [374.]
"Ayfty and its compound imaycty signify idso, to lead to prison ;
as ill Polvh. V, â– 2J. and E. L. xiii. Isocr. in Aniart. p. 594. Plat. Caes.
14. and, to had to execution : Xen. H.Gr. ii. p. 321. ed. lirjl. XA.
V. H. i, 30. Lycurg. Or. p. 198. 12. ed. Ilcisk. Arr, Exp; Al. vii, 8,
7. So duccre : v. Gesn. in Thes.
'AitoL'w has after.it a genitive of a person: a^oueiy fiov, Plato
Eulhypli. p. 3. 1. 39> An accusative of a thing : ravra ciKovffns,
Plato Apol. S. PiOth together : uKuvoaTe |ucu /3paj(t'a, Dinarcli. in De-
niosth. p. 98. 1. 38. v. Plat. Apol. S. p. 17- !• 8- It has sometimes
a genitive of the thing with irepl, Plato Phiud. p. 61. 1. 36. and even
without vepi: uKove b>) fiuXa khXcv Xoyov, Plato Gorg. p. 523. init,
V. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 41.
Wlien uKovoj signifies to be called, it may take a nominative both
before and after it:' iabXus u^nvw, Tliuc. v. Hor. [l^p. i, 16", 17-]
'AttoXo/j/j/u w is said of contrary winds : to detain or impede: orav
7v)(U}'7LV 01 ciyefxoi aTToXaj36yTes avrovs, Plato Phied. p. 08. [p. 22.
I. 27- ed. Bas. priu).]
VIII. 'ATToXctuw, both in a good and bad sense, to profit or sujfer
hy, to get, takes after it, — 1. a genitive of the tiling alone. — 2. a
genitive of the person alone.
IX. — 3. a genitive both of llie thing and of the person. — 4. an
accusative of the thing alone ; the accusative expressing good or
evil.
X. — .5. an accusative of the thing, and a genitive of the person or
thing, or of both together.
XII. — 6". In any one of these constructions an accusative of what
the good or ill regards, governed by npiii, is sometimes added ; as,
Tijs ^(iticpaTOVs Trpas avruy evi'oias Km (piXtas ov lutcpu irpos bu^^av
uTreXavtrey : he gained no small advantage ivith respect to reputation
from the friendship and goodwill of Soci'otes towards him : Pint.
Alcib.
XII. — 7. With a genitive alone of a person or thing, it signifies, to
' See Demosth. pro Cor. p. 241. 1. 13. Adonises and Ihjncinlhuscx. IMilton Las
ed. Reisk. itrOxhs aKovco is cited by H. imitated tliis idiom: Or llEAR'ST
Staph, in his Tlies. as from Theocritus, thou rather PURE ETII I'^liEAL
'AttoiJa) takes other cases also before and STREAM? Whose foiiuliiin u-ho can
after it; Ser *A5a;;'»5ay aiiTohs ical'TaKlv- tell? Par. L. iii, 7. See llor. Kp. i, 7,
Oyus aKoietv, Lucian, de Merc. Cond. S7. — J. S.
p. 4'J'l. B. cd. Saimur. they must hr called
§ V. KuLK 1 — ').] hoOXo/uit, yeyi'^y, \C. 79
innhc uport oj : iroXvy he j^poyoy olrw Kcirnptjyevaaiufyoi Ka\ ctTroAair-
aayres tov ayt)(>il>TTOv : Plut. Foiiip."
SECTION V. — Boi5Xo«a», yeyy^v, TiKTeiv, yiveaBat, yiyytJtJKeiy,
biaj(^iope'iy, btuiKCiy, <pevy€tv, eire^tevai.
Rule I. BooXo/uai sometimes signifies, to inlend, to aim or en-
deavour, to effect: y be (pvais fiovXer a i fxey rovro irately noXXuKu,
ov fiivToi bi'vcnai, Aristot. Polif. i, 4. See al-o Polit. ii, 6'. and Rliei.
ii, 23. also the passage cited from Plalo, under ftovXrifxa, chap. iii.
Sect. iv. R. 4. necpvKe yhp »/ \vriiov Xe^ts e'^eir to -^apiev, y be 'Itro-
tcpc'irovs l^ovXe-ni: for the diction of Ly si as is naturally graceful ;
that of Isocrates affects to be so : Dion. Hal, ftovXeirdat, to signify,
to mean: to f.tey -i)s 'Yr^Qvos ovk eyvoG) ri /SowXerat, Plato in Cratyl.
Veyyrjy. As yevray is not only used properly of tuales, but impro-
perly of females ; so -iKreiy, commonly appropriated to females, is
sad by good authors of males also : abovcriv — Tijy "Hpay yevn'fcra-
aOui T <)y "li<pcii(j-oy, Lucian. ^avrridooy — KaXv^/zw — yeivaro, Hes.
Theog. [1017. See v. IOI9. IOO7. 962. 978.] tov adaymos re/ce-o
Zeus, Horn. II. ft. See Iliad e, 151.*
Under the verb yirecrdai the following phrases are to be remarked ;
CTTi T}}s yiuj^t]s ytyyeadai, to be of opinion that ; yivetrdai ew\ ri'is
eXirtbos, to be in hopes.
II. Feyeadai bth (poftov, to be in fear ; y. bi opyyjs, to be angry ;
but fiids yeyeadai yywfxrjs, to be unanimous: Isocr. Paneg. p. !34.
bin noXXuiv f^inOqjjK'tTbjy yeyn/neyos, having been conversant in many
kinds of studies : Lucian, Macrob. p. 831. [642. E. ed. Salmur.]
[Many other verbs, as ehai, 'ipyeerQai, fioXe'iy, -^uipe'iv, are used in
phrases of similar construction and meaning, v. Valck. ad Phoen.
p. 177- and 526.]
III. Teveadru €ir\ with a dative, to be placed in authority over, to
have command of : bibarrKuXovs bel kcu (ip^oyrcn e-jrl tovtois yeven-
dai, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. v. Dinarch. c. Deniosth. p. 101. 1. 46.
also to be tinder the protection of; to trust to ; as, yeyoftevos ftt'
aybpeiorepois, umoTajTwi' /careyeXa. With e-'t and an accusative:
err' u^cpoTepa yiyjofxeyot mis yvwj.i(ns, being opposed in their senti-
ments ; taking opposite sides in the debate: 1 hue. i, 139-
IV. ITpos KaKov TO irpdyf^d fjoi eyevero, the affair turned out badly
for me ; Ttpos uyuOov, the contrary.
V. With Ttpos, ey, em, and a dative : to apply to, to be engaged in:
vporepos npos toIs irpuyfifim yiyyeadat, Deni. de Cliers. p. 36. 1. 44.
yiyreaOai ey Xoyois Ttyi, to be engaged in discourse with a jjerson :
Plato Tiieag. p. 130. 1. 12. But ey toIs Trpayi.ia(ri yeyeadui, (Plut.
" 'AwoXaieiv, to delude, Plut. IMoral. '&pi(TTov, &cc. Eurip. Suppl. 1092. irarphs
t. iii. p. 370. 1. 6. of Wyttenb. edition in it/ xep<^'> toD reKOVTOS. Id. ib. v. 1 133. —
octavo. — J. S. J. S.
• "Otrris tpvrtviras, Kol Viv.via.v reKiiy
so riyyeadai, &c. [ChAP. V. § v.
Tlies. p. S. 1. 43.) is to be at the head of affairs, to have the govern-
ment of the state. Sometimes it is fulloweil by nept and an acciisvitive,
in the same sense as vpus and a dative : Ceb. Tab. [p. I7. 1. 3. ed.
Sin)ps. Oxon, 1738.]
VI. KaXws yiyyorrai, theif are well, or in a good condition : Plut.
and impersonally, yiferai fioi (caXiDs, it is well with me. Viyvetrdai,
without KaXuJs, is peculiarly said of" sacrifices/ when they are favor-
able. FiyreoOai is said also of things in j;eneral, when they succeed,
are brought about, or accomplished: see Tliuc. vi, 74. iv, 131.
Plato de Rep, iv. p. 502. de Lejig. vii, 801.
VII. With uTTo and a "lenitive, it sifjnifies, to have finished, to be
fresh or on the return from, to hate done ivith, &c. aixo twv lefjuiv
ye.vofie.vw' and Tf/s nvpds yevofieros, Plut. Alex, yevofievos and twv
Tzpalewv eicEivwv, Plut. Themist. Sometimes with this construction it
signifies /o 6e fl/;flr//ro/n ; not to associate ivith : Xen. Mem. i, 2,
25. '&0 ano Qvnov elvai, to be disagreeable; iizo gkotou, beside the
mark or purpose : v. Schaef. Melet. crit. p. 51. and adnot. ad Greg.
Cor. p. 210. s,
VIII. "EKTTobcjv yiveadiu, is, to disappear, to abscond, to be removed
or put out of the way.
iX. Teveodai. euvrov, or ev eavr^, or ev eav-ov, is to come to one^s
self; to retuS*ii to one's senses ; to be one's self again : see Demosth.
Phil, i. [p. 42. I. 10. ed. Reisk.]'^ v. lleind. ad IMat. Charm, p. 62.
Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 950. and in add. ad Arisloph. Vesp. 642.
yevitjdai rivos, is to be in a person's power.
TiyveaQai is used also, — 1. with a substantive to express pcri-
phrastically the signification of some oilier verb ; as, K-wXur^/s y'lyvea-
dai, to hinder, Thuc. iii, 23. ipvyas yiyveaOai, to be exiled, Plato
Phaxlr. p. 241. e^apvos yeveaduc, to deny, Lucian, t. i. p. 394. ed.
Amst. V. Plato Phiedr. p. 229. [P- 196'. 1. 24. ed. Basil. 1.] John ix,
22. And, with a nominative expressed or understood, in a phrase
significative of perplexity, destitution, desperation : ovk 'eyovTes o ri
yevu)VTni, Thuc. ii, 52. [p. 296. I. 5. ed. Bekk.] — 2. with a geni-
tive of price or value : ttoXXov apyvpiov yiyveaOai, to cost, or be worth,
a great deal of money : Xen. Oblc. p. S69. — 3. with a dative, for, to
be present: to baifidviov 0>)s <juvt(^ eKutrrore yiyreaOai, Plato Eu-
thyph. p. 3. [p. 1. I. 30. ed, Bas. 1.] and, synecdochically, with
an accusative of the part present: yevecrde hi) /.loi — ttjv biavotav — ev
rw OeuTpo), i.e. imagine yourselves present in the theatre: iEsch. c.
Ctes. p. 296. [p. 540. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] — 4. with an accusative
and an inhnitive after it, for, to come to pass, to happen : Theogn.
639- Aristut. Pnlit. viii, 3. § 15. Luke xvi, 22. Act, Ap. xxi, 1.
xxii, 17. and with wirre before the infinitive: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 2, 2.
— 5. with an adverb : x'^'f'* yiyveaOai, to be divided: Xen. Cyrop.
iv, 1, 18. See viii, 7, 20. John vi, 19, and 25. — 6. with a pre-
' riyveadai is said also of a ilhinity stopli. Ljs. 631, — J. S.
favoriug or saiicliouiug an enterprise : "^ See also Dci-.iostl), Ol. ii. p. 26.
uvrhs yap fj-oi y iy vtrai Trjs Oeois ^x^P"^ '• '^^' cd. Reisk. Xen. Anab. i, ti, 15. —
Trard^ai. rf/rrSe ypahs •Tr]v yvaOov, Ari- J. S.
Rule 6 — 1'3.] riyvuaKeiy, &c. 81
position: nepl hufiuTioy yeyovev, Euslalii. v. John vi, 21. — J.
with a participle, periplirastically : //») npobovs yfids yefi], do not
betray us: Soph, Aj. 589. v. Pliiloct, 773. Plato Plix^dr. c. 20.
21. 0"2.''
T(.yvu)aK€iv signifies to decree, (whence ty>'W(7^tera, decrees,) to
resolve, to determine: eyito Kirbweveiv, Flut. v. Aristot. Poet, vii,
26.'
AiareXeT)', to continue, witli a participle ; as, \puifievoi. hiareXovfiev,
toe continue to use, or using : Isocr. c. Soph. See Plato Ap. S. p. 31.
1. 7. or an adjective; as, SiareXw evbaifiuy, Xen. Ages, i, 37. x, 4.
Cyrop. i, 5, 10. Mem. i, 6, 2/
Aiacpipeiv. bifijytpofiev ovbei' eKTrXij^ei twv opwrrui', we were no less
astonished than the {other) spectators : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 918.^
X. ^in-^^wpely, said of money, is, to be current, to pass : Lucian, de
Liictii. [p. 430. D. ed. Salmiir.] ''
XI. Atwcetv sometimes signifies, to travel rapidly, to post : t Sj wice
ftorjQi'iniov, Plut. Pomp.'
Sometimes, (both of persons and things,) to seek the company of,
to pursue or follow^ as an object of desire, emulation, imitation:
Tovs evyvwjxovas biojKeiy, Xen. bevrtpa Xe/crpa biivKct, seeks to marry
again: Epigr. Gr. bltji^e jSacrLkecjv eTrirrjbev/Aara, Isocr. Sometimes
it is, to persecute; sometimes, to shun or repel: Xen. Ages, iii, 1.
Anacr. xxxiv, 5. of. P. Victor. Var. Lect. xxxvi, 71.
XII. Sometimes it means to accuse, to prosecute ; as, biwKeiv rira
(p6vov : and sometimes biKTjv is added : Isocr. adv. Callim. p. 733. and
tpevyeiv, on the contrary, is to be prosecuted, to be defendant : (peu-
yovri biKTjv vtto Karwj'os, Plut. Cic. p. 878. I. 37. 'Ajro^euyetj' is, to
be acquitted,
AvyauOat TrauTu, to be omnipotent; bvvairdai 8uo d/3oXoJ/s, to be
worth, to be of the same value as, two oboli ; r>)v avTi)v bvvaraL bov-
Xuffir, amounts to the same subjugation ; carries the same subjuga-
tion or slavery with it : Thuc. i, 141. [p. 210. 1. 1. Bekk.]
^ Add, yiyv6y.ivov apyvpiov, money
raised by the sale of things: Xen. Anab.
V, 3, 5. Ta yiyvifxei/a, the proceeds: lb.
vii, 6, 30. TOVS yiyvofievovs Sacrfiovs, the
tributes established OT due : lb. i, 1,8. —
J.S.
<â– Add, yiyvdiffKiiv, to know carnally:
\iyerai 6 ^ovk6\os ttji/ Kimpiv yyuvat,
StjKovSti alcrxvi'at, Schol. Tlieocr. Id. i,
107.— J. S.
/ Add, 8iaT€\e?r, to complete, to finish,
to accomplish : avTovpy(7f airavra Kal
5ioTe\€r>/ & PouAoiTo, Aristot. de Mundo,
c. 6. absolvere, Bud. — J. S.
? Add, oviiv 5ia<l>(pit fioi, with an infi-
nitive mood, / have no objection: De-
inosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1239. 1. 14. ed.
Reisk. In the same sense, oi> iiatptpofiai
with an infinitive, Dem. Philipp. iii. p.
112, 1. 29. SLa(pfpi(j6ai, to care about, to
Viger.
concern one's self about : v. Casaub. ad
Epict. c. 34. Sia(p4p(iv, to spend, to pass,
(of time) : Tiiv re vvktu kukws K\a[<ev 5i7j-
viyKiv, Plut. Alex. p. 1274. 1. I. ed.
II. St. to get over: et Sioiaei vvKra t^V^.
Eurip. Rhes. 600.— J. S.
* In allusion to this sense, Polyb. says,
Kol rh fj.fV irapa to7s &\\ots S laxoipf'tv,
i(Tws ou QavixaaThv, that the fraud should
pass with others: xvii, 30. — J. S.
« See Xen. Anab. vii, 2, 11. — J. S.
J "There dined with us an Irish kniglit,
one Sir John St. Leger, who follows the
law liere, but at a great distance." Swift,
Letter, November 17, 1711. Here fol-
lows is used, with reference to " the law"
in the twelfth sense, and with reference to
'' at a great distance," in the tenth sense,
of tlie word in Johnson'3 Dictionary (IMr,
Todd's edition). — J. S.
S2 THE VERB el/.iL [Chap. v. § vi.
SECTION VI.— On the verb e£>'.
Rule I. "EaTiv os is ])ut for ns, some one, eanv, or daiv, o'l, or
v'lTiyes, for some, eT-iy vh for to some: aiui so in all cases, numbers,
and genders: a'lroi' re KarcKo/jiCiuy, — Kai elaly ot kciI yj){]^a-a, and
some brought money too: Time, vi, 88. (iovKofiivovs euTiy a,
elwe'iy ancKreiyay. 7i y o ri kui — eTedpaverro rj;s ToXfiijs Tod'ApioftOtrrov,
the boldness of Ariovistus ivas somewhat broken : Plut. Ca?s. p. 717.
V. Tiiiic. i, 12. ii, 13. '26. iii, 92. Arr. iii, 14. 23. and Fisch. ad
Well. i. p. 343. seq. See Hor. Od. i, 1, I9. and 3. Propcrt. iii, 7, 17-
II. "Errny ore, (and eV9' ore) sometimes : alinrep ovy k)(pTiTO S(j/>par»/5
e.aTiv ure: JElmn iv, 11, but it generally occurs in the beginning
or middle of sentences, Ou/c ecrTiy ore, never: Ileliod. i^lli, and ovic
effTiy cTTore, Dio. v, Ter. Phorm, v, 7. So eo-iv ws, in some manner.
"EffTiv oTTios, it is possible that: Soph. Aj. 379- Eurip, PhcEn. ld58.
ovK ecTTLv oirios oux ofioyoiiarojjLey, we shall be sure to agree: tee
cannot but agree in future: Isocr. Paneg, p. 150. v. Heliod. IE.\.\\. v,
16. and Hor, C. iii, 1, 9. eany oitov, somewhere, in some places,
sometimes; and interrogatively ; eanv oirov av Trapijy yyayi'iKrrjaas :
did you any where, (or in any stage of the proceedings) though
present, express any anger? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 31 6.
III. E(/Li(, in different persons, numbers, and moods, is often under-
stood ; and etrrii/ especially after a>oy/>j/, heivuv, eiKus, ovbiy cloy, (see
C. in. § viii. R, 6.) V. Schief, in Mel. crit. p, 43. s.
IV. So after ws Xoyos, as it is reported: obbey j^aXeTror, there is no
difficulty: Plato Hipp. M, p. 200. 1. 20. v. Flato Apol. S. p. 28.
1.10. Aristoph. Eq. 213. Isocr. Nicocl. [p. 9^. I. 4. ed. Battle, Can-
tab. 1729.]
V. "Effrt be' at the beginning of a sentence, for eyei be ovtms, now
the matter stands thus: Demosth. de Chers. p. 36. 1. 5. [p. 91. 1. 7-
ed. Rei<.k.]
VI. "E(T7-t fxaXitrra tovto bios, this is chiefly to be feared : Demosth.
01. i. and so witii other substantives and ovtos, as e\n\s, Kiybvvos,
&c.
VII. ^Hy for errrly,^ Thuc ii, 61. [p. 305. 1. 4. ed. Bekk.] So
Xpijy, ebet, TrpoffTiKey, cTrXeo and tVXero, tVc. for the present.
VIII. E'iT] with an accusative and infinitive after it: e'itj, — to fxvdCo-
5es viTdicovaai, may the fabulous prove tractable and obedient, &c.
Plut. Thes.
IX. VJey, the third person plural, is used in transition to a fresh
topic or head from one despatched or done with : so much for that :'
V. Plato Apol. S. c. 22. extr. or in introducing a particularisation
' Aristoph. Acb. 707. Lys. 445. ' See Demosth, ia Androt. p, 597.
Vesp. 183. 1509. Acli. 157. v. Brmick. J, 17, in BcEot, de Nora, p, 998, 1, 9. 999.
ad Aristoph. Tlicsm. 74.— J. S. ). 17. 1003, 1. 11. ed. Reisk,— J. S.
Rule l— 13.] THE VERli e<>'. 83
or further (Icvi-lopenieiit of what has aheady been said more gene-
rally : well then: v. IMat, \\.. S. c. 3. It may be rendered uell
then also when it is used in allowing, or not dispniing, the validity of
an objection urged, and proceeding in consequence to modify by
interrogation or otherwise what one has to say further: v. Plato
Phaid. c. 6"4. or when, a thing being granted, or taken for granted,
one proceeds : v. Plato Crit. c. 7. S\mp. c. 4. It is used in first
accosting persons, especially before asking a question, like well in
English : Plato Crit. c. G6. .Esch. Chocph. 7 17. and before a question
asked through impatience to hear further: Discip. e^fles ^e y rifx'iy
belKvop ovK It'll' eaiTcpas. StrejJS. eiev. ti ovv TTfjhs Tu\<ptT' tsroAa/u//-
uaro; icell ; what did he contrive i' ilc. Aristoph. Nub. 176". It is
used also by persons answering w hen called : eliv y', clkovw : well, I
hear : ^sch. Clioeph. 6"55. Aristoph. Pac. 6"6'3-
X. The infinitive eliat, especially with hwv, is often redundant in
Attic authors :'" rhv be uyiLva ovu ev no koXttio eKwv elvai Troiiiaofiai,
Thuc. ii, SP. with tKoSfrn, Plato Phaedr. p. 252. init. with eKovres,
Plato de Rep. vii. p. 518. Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 120.
'Ekuu is used without tlrai in Xen. Anab. ii. pp. 281. 303. 345.
Luc. Dom. 595. Demosth. 244, 10.
EJyai is redundant with other words iu Herodot. vii, 143. iv, 33.
ii, 44. Lucian, JbT. and Bis Ace. 322. Xen. Anab. i. p. 260.
Leuncl. Long. Past. i. p. 14. 9. v. Thorn. M. p. 290. seq. II. Steph.
de dial. p. 26. Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 164. Brunck. ad Soph. (Ed.
C. 1189.
XI. Ehai is added to the phrase formed by ru and €ki with a
dative ; as, to kw eKeivois thai, as far as in them lies ; us far as they
are concerned: Thuc. viii. [48. p. 205. I. 15. ed. Bekk.] v. Lysias
in Agor. 481. in Ergocl. 825. It is also added to signify an end or
purpose: Horn. II. e, 315. X, 20.
XII. It signifies relation, especially of a child to a parent ; as,
^fiiKpov TTurpos elyai (paai rov Nt(>coTparov, they say ISicoslratus is
the son of Smicrus : Isa?us. (paa\ /jey ovi' eirai Qpadvfxa'ynv NtKti-
cTparov, that Nicostratus is Thrasymachuss son : Iil. [And in sucix
phrases KaXelrjOai is sometimes used by poets instead of elfai : as by
Pind. Pyth. iii, 118. Eurip. Rlies, 298. Soph. El, 36'5.] So the
participle: YlToXe/ualov nai EvpvblKris ovaav, being the daughter of
Ptolemy and Eurydice.
XIII. Also of a slave to his master ; and it is used with a genitive
more generally to denote any kind of possession, whether proper or
fiourative; as, /u») tov Xeyovros 'ladi, Aristoph. Eq. 856. So Soph.
CEd. R. 917. See 1 Cor. iii, 22. Demoslh. ad Pantacn. p. 982.
1. 3. ed. Reisk. vfiujv uItuii' Zvtcs, being your own masters, not in-
fluenced by others: Demoslh, p. 456. 1. 9-
^ "'EiiiiV ihai non est simpliLiter [i^ c'tojcf ; (/'yoHCrtJi /le/yj ?V.] Vcre tamea
sponte, sed quantum quis sponle quid cum pleonasmo dici crediis apud Herodot.
facial. ouSe fj.i]v <pi\ois ye, ovSe leVoiy eKu)i/ re elcai Kal deivov iiriSvTos ovSevus,
e«wr elyai 76'\a)Ta Trape'x«i5 : Xen. Cy- vii, 10 1." Hermann. See also Herm. de
rop. ii, 2, 15. ut id quidem spoiite facias, EUips. et Pleon. § 210. 211. — J. S.
84 Elvelv, &c. [Chap. v. § vii.
XIV. Efj'aj, that it be lawful ; (the words of a law ;) Demostli. in
Timocr. [p. 712. 1. 22. eel. Reisk.]
XV. Elyai, to remain in existence, to remain safe, to he preserved :
Demosth. de Pace." Oeayjjs tdrt, cat crwccrai : Heliod. ^th. vi, 5.
[See note q below.]
XVI. YXvdi els, with an accusative, to make a progress in, to ad-
vance in : " Greg. Naz. Or. xxvi.
With a dative, to be advantageous :p tI tout earai rfj ttoXei, De-
mosth. adv. Lept. p. 463. 1. 5. and with 7rp6s and an accusative :
Demosth. p. 1241. 1. 23.
With nefA and an accusative, or eu and a dative, it signifies to be
occupied in: rrepl o-w/taros 'iaaiv k(70fiivov, Plato Phaed. p. 248. I. 39.
iv yecopyia elvai, yEl. V. H. i, 32.
XVII. Sometimes a third person singular of e//ui, and a dative case
and a participle agreeing with it, are put instead of a nominative
case and some other verb with which that nominative would agree ;
as, eireih^] Traai (3ov\o/jL€i'oi5 y)v, Dion. Hal. iii. p. 196. for e. iravres
ifiovXovTO. €1 aoi ifhofikvf ecrri, Plato Phaid. c. 24. So with irpoa-
bexo/^ei'os, Arr. Exp. Al. i, 23. with iiy^Qonevos, Xcn. Cyrop. iv, 5, 10.
and by Homer with acr/xeyos, II. ^, 108. This idiom has been
imitated by Latin authors, Quibus bellum volentibus erat : Tacit, in vit.
Agric. V. Macrob. Saturn, i, 7. v. Vechn. Hellenol. ii, 9- Dorv. ad
Cliar. p. 439. sq. Markl. ad Max. Tyr. xiii, 5. Keen, ad Greg.
Cor. p. 173. Wessel. ad Herodot. i, 90. p. 46. iv, 120. p. 334.
Valck. ad viii, 101. p. 666. rireadui is used in the same manner:
Heliod. JE[h. ii, 29. vii, 11,
Sometimes in the later Greek authors Kal e'ijj, expressing a wish, is
added to eau, or eari re : (as in Latin, est mihi, sitqite, precor, in
Ovid, Fast, vi, 2 19. and in Mart. ep. ix, 18.) Psell. in vit. Const.
Due. Philoslrat. in Aspas. ex conject. V^alesii.*
SECTION VII.— Of the verbs ctVetv, eXmSeiy, i^epxeadai,
e^iefai, eoiKa, e'x*^*
Rule I. EtVeTv in Attic writers is sometimes redundant : koI tov
^A.aTva.yr)v (TKwxpaPTa elrrely, oh^ op^s, ^avai, ws kuXuis olfoxoel ', Xe-
nopli. Cyrop. i. ^at elTre*', to 'HprUXets, e/fji], Plato Rep. i. p. 337.
v. Plat. Theag. p. 129- Sometimes a. participle of one of the taulo-
logous verbs is used : 6 be — elne <phs, Herodot. Er. c. 67-
» P. Gl. 1. 13. cd. Reisk. wliere for not in tarai. — J. S.
wffTC ilvai lleiske tins printed (rws re ilvai 'i Add, ov^ev dix), I am undone, T am
jrom Ills own conjecture. — J. S. ruined: Aristoph. Vesp. O'JT". and oy/c«V
" Vif^er appears to be in error here, elfi iyio, it is all over with me: Aristopli.
tl Kol fir] avTol Tociovrov ^crav tls aper^v, Aeli. 1185. but ovSfv (1 in Aristopli.
seems to mean, even aUh<iuy;h titcij them- Ecc). 111. is, you are of no importance,
selves were not so very eminent in virtue, you are nobody, thai /uero ywaticoi, said
— J. S. of sexual intercourse : Aristoph. I'lut.
P The intimation of advantage is in ri, 1081.— J. S.
Rule l— p.] 'Exwaw, «fec. 85
II. It often signifies, to give one's suffrage for, to decree ; as, elne'iv
(j>v\aK)iy, to decree a guard: Deniostli. [tie Cliers.] p. 103. 1. 10.
ed. Reisk. eb<i)Kuy avroi t)]v upj^^tjv, \€Vi^iov ^l>i\iTnrov yviljfiriv el-
TTovTos, on the recommendation of Lucius Philippus ; Lucius Phi-
lippus having authorised the measure by speaking and voting first
in favor of it : Plul. in Pomp.'^
"EXniioj and eXTrofxat properly signify merely to expect, or to think,
and are tlierefore used in speaking of evil/ as well as of good ; as,
f.i€yi(jrr]P (TViJ<l)(,pav — (/Xtticov -KeiaeaQat, Lys. Or. Fun. p. 505. V.
Herodot. Er. c. loy. lloni. II. v, [v. 8.]'Oppian, Hal. i, 88. also
Virg. .li,n. iv, 419. ii, 658. x, 291. xi, 275. Catull, carni. 83.
III. 'E,lepxeaQai and tittrai are sometimes used absolutely, for, to
march, to go forth to war: Demostli. Ol. ii. [p. 21. 1. 18. and 25.]
IV. ' EoiK-a sometimes indicates inclination or intention : eoiku he
tcai vvv vTroKarnftjicreirOai, and now too, I think I shall go doivn — Je
pensequeje nien vais descendre : Lucian, in Cliaron. [p. 328. B. ed.
Salmur.]
V. "Eoiice, with a dative, it is Jit, becoming, consentaneous.*
VI. 'ils eoiKe, parenthetically, a kind of slight affirmation; it seems:
6 yap b)) ^poi'os eKelvos i'lveyi^ev avdpwirovs, — ws eoiKev — vweptpveis,
&C. Pint. Thes. [p. 6. J. 27» ed. H. St.] So, iraiiov yap, w$ eoiKe,
KetpaXrj rovs ei'Tvyxnporras 6 Tep/xepos, aTrwWuev : for Termerus, it
seems, killed those, who fell in ivith him, by strokes of his head :
Plut. ib. [p. 10. 1. 5. ed. H. St.] In these two passages, the phrase
is nearly equivalent to, as the tradition is, as appears from history
or report, v. Plut. Thes. [p. 24. 1. 8. ed. H. St.]
VII. In the following passage also, in which ws eotjce signifies mucli
more than appearance of trulli or probability, it may be rendered by
it seems : a\\' ovk i]v ravra, ws eoiKe, toIs 'Adrjiaiois Trdrpia, 01/6'
avetcTci, ovb' efK^VTu, Demristh. pro Cor. [p. 295. I. 24. ed. Reisk.]
VIII. And in the following : fieWuy be Ibiov fiiov -kuvtos, w$
€OiKe, \6yov biboyut Ti^xepov : Demosth. pro Coron. [p. 227. !• 25. ed.
Reisk.] [The necessity of entering into a justification of all his past
actions was apparent to Demosthenes from the accusations of ^s-
chines.] ws eoiKev, it is plain, as is manifest : Plato in Con v. [p.
176". I. 17. ed. Bas. 1.] forsooth, it seems, ironically : Demosth. pro
Cor. [p. 298. I. 23. ed. Reisk.]
'E7r«Xayu/3c5i'6<T0ai, with a genitive, is, to seize, to lay hold on, to cen-
sure or reprehend, to get, to gain, to come upon.
IX. "E^w is joined with many adverbs in various modes of con-
'■Of tlic compounds of ei7r€(;/,KaT€tire?j', 1350. 1. 11. ed. Reisk. imfi-Kuv for irpo-
to inform against, to accuse, (Aristo])h. enruf, Aristoph. Plut. 997. Vesp. 55. —
rac.377.) is sometimes simply to tell; as J. S.
in Aristoph. Nub. 224. 1278. Plato * ToutI ixa A" iyoii rb KUKbv ov iroT
Theaj;;. p. 239. 1. 20. ed. Bas. 1. irpocret- ^\iria &u : Aristoph. Av. 950. — J. S.
iruv, to say in addition, to add : Demosth. ' In the passage cited by Viger from
in Aristocr. p.395. 1. 20. ed. Herwagianse Demosth. Olynlh. ii. [p. 18. 1. 10. ed.
secundaj : but Rci^ke, p. 028. I. 13. has Reisk.] it appears to have its proper and
irpoenraii/. — TrpoennTv ti'A (pSfov, to give ordinary sense ; resembles, or is like, and
one votice of a prosecution against liim fur is to be reudered, is like lite effect of.
murder: Pbeudo-JJciuosth, in Isc«.r. p. — J. S.
86 "Exetr. [Chap. V, § vii.
btruction ; as, abwoTios e'xen', to be unable: v. Arr. Exp. Al. i.
V. 26. o)S t\a(7-os t:oii.i6rr}Tos T/ ftovKitrrews ea^e, according to the
degree oj readiness or inclination of each : Pint. Caniill. nvrws
€\(o rris yya}/iiT]s, this is my opitiion: v. Liician, Deniosili. Enc. p.
890. ro'vTtov oXiywpwi e)(^eiy, to neglect these things: Deniosth.
Phi!, iv. p. Co. e'x^"' ti/iotws rtil, Herodot. iii, 24. ttTrex^ws
e-^ovT€s TTpos avToi', bearing ill-will towards him: Herodian i, 12.
KnXujs e'xet, ai)d KaWia-a txei, are expressions by which an oft'er or
invitation is civilly declined :" Athen. Deipn. xiv, 12. Tlieocr. xv,
3. like recte and benigne. v. Ter. Eun. ii, 3, 50. Hor. Ep. i, 7,
]6. and 62. KaXws e'xft, "ilh a dative, is becoming or honorable
to : Xen. Mem. i, 3, 3. -^
X. With prepoiilions e'xeti' forms various circumlocutions : a/i^I
or irep] t\ e'xeM', to be occupied about something ; e^etv S«a ^pojr/-
bus, to think or study about: Lucian, Dem. Euc. p. 907. hta
arofxaTos e'xf', to mention frequently : Athen. Deipnos. xiv, 3. eyia
ak €v opyi], I am incensed against you: Tliuc. ii, 18. €)(^eip iv
alriais or bi ahlas, to blame, lirl o<piai e-)(pvTas, being hostile ox
adverse to them: Herodot. Er. c. 49-
And with participles also: aiywvTa eyeiv, to keep silent : Arriati
iv, S. but tbii'fly with participles of aorists : tov \6yov be aov 7ru\ot
6av/ju(7as e'xw, ^ have long been wondering at your discourse:
Plato Phajdr. p. 257. 1.21. v. Hcsiod, Op. 42. 7rr»}£ar7e$ filxo^t
they kept cowering: Eurip. Cycl. 406. e'xei Trepavas, he has
done or perpetrated : Soph. Aj. 22. properly, he is m the state or
condition of one who has done ov perpetrated. — In such expressions
regard is had both to the time of the participle and of iyeLv. v. Valck.
ad Phoen. p. 267. setjq.
Sometimes a jinrticiple of e'xetv is joined pleonastically with a
finite verb; as ^Xt/npeTs e^wv, you trifle: Plato Gorg. \-qpeis
ey^wv, you prate idly: Cratin. SeeAristoph. Nub. 509- Plalo Phajdr.
p. 340.
XL With Trpos, or eis, eye^iv is, to relate to: es tovtov tov arbpa
e'xei Tu /juv-evfxa, Pausan. El. i. oaoy ex^' vrpos t/jt, as far as f
am concerned.
XII. "Exen-, to cause or create: exeiv <pOvroy, to move envy:
^schyl. Prom. 865. ravr' apy))v e'xe«, these things excite anger:
Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 57. Trpayj.iaTa exef tiv\, to give him trou-
ble. (But, witlx'ut a dative, Trp/ty/iiara e'xeti' is, to have trouble: Dem.
de Class, p. 74. Plat. Theivt. p. 174.) Sec Hermann in addend,
ad Gregor. Cor. ed. Schicf. p. 863.
XHl. IloXvv i'jbr] TOV XP'^'O'' ^X'^' /"'' ""P*^* avTov iTTiiiTeiXas, IS, tt is
notv a long time since I wrote to him: Cbrysost. in Ep.
XIV. "Ex'^iv is sometimes nearly equivalent to scire, to know:
ovn yap oirtus JDorfOut e'xw, our' uv virus fxi) (^orjOi'iau) ex*^' Elat. de Rep.
ii. olb' u Ti xP>l TTote^'' t'^fe, Demosth. p. 425, 10. ed. Reisk.
XV. "lix^iy forms circumlocutions with many accusatives ; as,
« So iravv KaKus, wiiliout tx«'> Ari- 568. and KaAws alone is a civil refusal iu
stoph. Han. ol2. ami kcSaAiitt', inaww, the same •omcdy, v. 8b8. — J. S.
Rule 10—15.] "Execv. 87
iiTToXoylav exeiy, for azoXoyeladat, JE\. V. H. ii, 3.9- ftiov e^etJ',
for ftiQvai, lb. iii, QQ. yvufxrjv ex^iv, for yiyi'u)(TK€ir, {to decree or
determine,) lb. iv, 8. be'nrvov ej^eti', for bemreh', lb. iii, 39.
bv(rTV)(^r]^a e)(^eiv, for bvaruj^ely, Lys. p. 7-t6. cd. Reisk. eTr/Socrti'
excu', for eTTibibovai, Xen. Qi^c. XX, 23. epyoy e^eti', for ipynierr-
Oai, Xen. Mem. ii, 10, 6. Ages, xi, 12. Kaipov e'xf"'. '0 ^e stff-
soiiahle or opportune : Tliuc. i, 42. kukov exeir, to be diseased;
to he faulty: Plat. Gorg. p. 478. \6yov e^etv, to be reasonable:
Pli\to Fheedr. p. 62. ovof.ia e'xetr, to be called ; to be represented,
(falsely, and in opposition to being in reality ;) Ilerodot. Pol. c. 13S.
tpvaiv exeiv, to be natural; to be j)robable : Deniostli. 01. ii.
Herodot. ii.
With some accusatives it has a reciprocal construction ; as, for
instance, either iiav^iav e^w, or iiavy^ia eyei fie, Herodot. Er. c. 135.
V. Odyss. E, 215. Iliad y, 342. (3, 2. Plat. Apol. c. 27.
With accusatives of art, science, and the like, it signifies to knoiv ;
6 T))v apidi.iT]TiK))v e-^wv, he that understands, or is master oj, arith-
metic: Plcit. Ion. p. 531. T))v (piopiip aKpi(ie(jTepav eyeiv, to under-
stand the language more exactly : Ceb. Tab. [p. 44. 1. 8. ed. Simps.
Gxon. 1738.]
With an accusative neuter of an adjective in the comparative de-
gree, it may be translated by esse, with an ablative in Latin ; in
English by an idiom not unlike the Greek ; as, eXacraw exeiv, to have
the icorst of it : Time. iii. c. 5. In the imperative, e'xe hi) is, attend
now, mind noiv ; e'xe bi), kcu fxoi Tobe eiVe, Plato lo. p. 535. [" Non
male Ficinus vertit, animadverte quid velim." Hermann.] To /iec
Tex»'>?s re col arej^^iias Xoyuv Trepi, iKavojs e^eru), let this sxij^ce : Plato
Plijedr. p. 274.
"Exetv sometimes signifies, to be rich: Lysias p. 579' ed. Reisk.
Soph. Aj. 157. Demosth. p. 1123. v. Aristoph. Plut. 596. and
1 Cor. XI, 22.-'
"ExeffSat, with a genitive, signifies, to lay hold on, to keep holdof:''"
€)(^ovTai Tov ottXov, iEl. de N. Anim. v, 3. tovtov e-^6[jei'0s yyoiifxai
ovK civ TTore ireuelv, Plat. Phajd. p. 100. 1. 40. To cleave to, to adhere
to, to apply to: rCJv fleXrlerruv ex"". Epict. Eiich. c. 2*). v.
Theogn. 31. <piXo(To<pias cy/jfievos, Plat. Ep. 7- P- 340. 1. 33.
jiadr]fidT(x}v eixero, Aristid. Or. Fun. in Eteon. p. 136. rijs TrXr^yijs
ex^rat, he applies his ivhole attention and care to the stroke he has
already received, to the neglect of his guard against succeeding ones:
Demosth. Phil. i. p. 31. [I. 20'. ed. Reisk.] To buckle to, to set
about: rijs iboiir opias e'f^ero, Herodian ii, 11. tTis lepovpyias
exw/^e0o, Heliod. JEth. x, \6. To cherish; e^^endai tovtuv riov
uybpiuv. Plat. Ep. 6. To folloiv closely and unremittingly for the
purpose of fastening tip on ; to pursue with constant scrutiny in
order to expose, stigmatise, SfC. e'xeo-Qai rwr abiKrjin'iTwy tov 'â– '^iXimrov,
Demosth. pro Cor. p. 251. To be attached lo or connected with,
" Add, irov ffxfl<reiv 5oKe?y ; Aristopli. "" Also, with a genitive of a person, to
Ean. 188. a naiitical term : lehul port (or spare, to keep one's ^ands off; Aristoph.
land) do you think you shall vuike? For Av. 1336. — J. S.
irdvr' exfis see note w, p. 50. — J. S.
88 "Hew, Arc. [Chap. v. § viii.
and therefore to participate in the character or qualiticfi of; toIs
uXrjQetas exof^eiots iteiQufxevos, Euseb. in Hierocl. c. 12. To depend
on, to be in the power of ; aev 6' cj^crat bovvm (5iov >}5' iKpeXeadat,
Horn, in Terr. Matr. v. Horn. II. i, 102. Plat. Protag. p. 324. To be
next in order, time, rank; to. e-^^^uj^eva tuiv €tpr]neio)v, Heliod. vEtli.
V, l6. V. Xeu. CEc. \'\, 1. ep tu i^^ojiivto kviavTtD, 1 Macliab. iv, 28.
e-)(pp.ev6s fiov KaOi'iari, [l] Esdr. iv, 42.'
SECTION VIII. — Of the verbs t/Vw, KaToXapftarw, KeTfiai,
Xavdai'iv, fjeWtx), viKciw, vofxHio, o'lba, 'irrdi, olfiai.
Rule I. "Htw is joined with participles present, past, and future :
iJK€i (j)ep(oy, he brings: Isa;us. yKev uvnarpcipas, he returned: De-
mostli. i]Kui avfjfiovXevawv, I come to counsel ov advise: Demoslh.
II. With TTopj'jdj, €v, and enl ttoXv, a genitive following : iropfju) tT/s
i/XiKias T/Vwv, far advanced in years. Troppw, or ev, or en-l noXv, rijs
iraibeias j'/icet)', to make a great progress in learning, ev t/kciv tUv
â– ^pTj^uTUJi', to be rich : Herodot.
QeXu), and tfleXw. 'E0e\w has sometimes the sense of yueXXw : He-
rodot. ii, 11. ii, 14. also of biivafxaL : Herodot. i, 74. avXeioi be r
exetv ovK eQeXovai dvpai, Solon, v. Plat. Phaedr. p. 230. 1. 3j. and
Hor. Art. Poet. Sp. Also of soleo, eiwda, Herodot. Polyh. 157.
Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 503. v. Bach, ad Xen. Ilier. i, 30. and Hindenb.
ad Xen. Mem. iii, 12, 8. OeXw is used in speaking of the meaning
or purport of words, or of the nature of things: ri diXei to erros eJpat;
Herodot. Er. c. 37. v. Act. Ap. ii, 12. xvii, 20.
KaTaXafAftaveiv is sometimes used impersonally : 'ETrwTrea Kar-
€Xa/3er anoOuye'iy, Paus. in Cor. p. 95. it came to pass that Epo-
peus died. [See H. St. Thes. ii, 571. g-]
Keladat is said of laws enacted : rots rofiois tocs i;ei jievois efiot]-
" The following significations of deri-
vatives and compoi;ntls of ex^ ^re worthy
of obseiTation : cx'JiU-aTif'ef;', t'l dance, to
cut capers: Aristoph. Pac. 321. (iraixTre-
Xfiv, to cloak: Plut. Sert. p. 104G. I. 13.
ed. Steph. avix^'-v, to solemnise, to cele-
brate: Aristoph. 'i liesm, 948. to inhabit :
Soph. GLd. C. G74. to emerge from, to
escape: Sopli. Qld. R. 174. â– trpoffavix^^Vj
to wait, to remain quiet: Polyb. v, 17.
Trpoo-acexecflaj ^ijv, to endure to live : Po-
ly 1). E. Pcircsc. p. lOG. avOi^erai (Too
ruf irarpwoiv xp')i"aT&!J', will contest with
you ut law the right to them: Aristopli.
Av. I(i58. airexeii', to receire: /Ksop.
Fab. 47. Plut. t. i. p. 1G5. 1. 21. 219, 22.
iii. 1248. 1. 17. cd. Steph. Sif'xen', to re-
move, to put auay : Plut. Alcib. p. 3.'»2.
1. 10. Sie'xfii' Tas x^V*^' '" 1'^' anxioiisty
desirous of a thing ; to exert one's self to
bring it ahoiit : Polyb. iv, 52. eire'xeii',
to purpose, to desigti : Uiog. Laett. Anax-
iint-n. to restrain, to repress, to repel:
Aristoph. Vesp. 338. Pac. 1121. to
hinder; to prevent: Polyb. ix, 1. to
sue for, to canvass for, to aim at: Ari-
stoph. Lys. 490. to cease: Arislopli. Ecj.
915. to persecute: Horn. Od. t, 71.
KaTe'xeiJ', to dwell : Theogn. 2G2. to take,
to take down: Polyb. ii, 32. to last, to
hold, to continue : Aristoph. Pac. 944.
SiaKaTe'xfi*', to take possession of: Polyb.
iv, 55. Trpotrtxeii", to hare besides; to
have in addition : Plat, de Rep. vii. p.
43H. 1. 1. C(l. Basil. 1. •jrpoo-e'xf"' Aj/i^ra
(an accusative instead of a dative) to
make; to sail into : Polyb. ii, 9. irpoe'x«i>',
to be more ancient, to be before: Uiog.
Laert. in Cleob, p. S4. 1. 8. cd. H. St.—
J. S.
Rule i — 4.]
Aaf6drw — MeXXw.
89
6ovy, Lysias c. Fniin, kuXuis xet/uliovs ro/iovs, Lucian, Abdic. Hence
& bt) Tre-rrpuifjieya Kelrai, Or|)li. Argon. 104-. i;tlaOui e'is rt, to be des-
tined or inevilabli/ appointed to it: 1 Tliess. iii, 3. Pliilipp. i, 17.
But KelaOai eh tttuxtiv, ikc. Luke ii, 34. is to be appointed or set as
the cause of it : Kcladui ki> (parepu, to be manifest ; tv a(pare~i, to be
obscure or uncertain : Tluic. i, 42. Kelrai Tjj TrvXet oio/jiu, the name
given to the citij is — ; Flat. Cratyl. ra aiDTijpin irvXeajs KcIrai lt>
uvtif), 1-ests with, depends on : v. Dinarch. f. Demostli.''
III. Aai 9arw is often Joined with a particijtle ; wlien the latter
may be translated, as if it iiad the same form as the part of Xavdaru)
with wiiich it is joined, and the former by secretly ; without discovery
or observation ; as, eXaOey v7r€i;(j)vyMy, he escaped without observation :
— or by, without perceiving it, or being sensible of it ; as, eXaOey ets
fjecrovs tjiiTredMy tvvs TroXefiiovs.' eXadofiev tjpTti avrovs Trri/c^oM' ovcey
hia^epoyresy Plat. Crit. p. 49. 1. 11. tve differed nothing from chil-
dren, ivithout being aware of it ourselves, in the following passage
the jiarticiple is understood : enaiov rij jda-^nipq u ri hvyni^iriy \nvda-
veiv {TTctlojy viz.) : Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 53." And other verbs are found
in a similar construction : as, xpvatD Trar-uv fx' ov yiyvwiTKeis, Arislopb.
Nub. 909. f:-!n!TTaj.ieyos TtuXai uiretcpvirTOv, Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 14.
Sometimes Xayddyio is followed by on and another verb; as, oh Xar-
ddyeis /jte, otl Xeyeis rama, &c. Xen. Mem. iii, 5, 24. V. Xen. CEc.
i, 19. and Hindenb. ad 1. pr. — or Ka\ : as eXaQov Koi dxeKreivuv, for
kXaQov dT{OK-eiva.yTes. — or §e : v. Iliad )(, 277. Sometimes the con-
struction with the participle is reversed, the participle employed
being one of Xoi Sdiw : eKirXow itoieirai Xr.diov TYiv (pvXuKijy : for
TToiovfxeyos eXade, Thuc. i, 05. TrpoiJXeyoy Xav6dvoyT€s, Herodian
ii, 14.
Other verbs, especially such as signify continuance or conclusion,
are construed, as Xuyddyu) is, with a participle; as, fjiayduywv binreXe},
he continues always learning: v. Plat. Gorfj. p. 491. 1. 25. XnOiov
aiiTus eavTuv, having forgotten himself : Euseb. Pra?p. iii.
IV. MeXXw in its ordinary sense is always followed by an infinitive;
y Here some unusual senses of several
compounds of \afx0 dvo> ma^ be meii-
tioneJ : Sta\aij.^dveiv, to share, i. e. to
receive in slmres : Xen. Anab. v, 3, 5. to
seize or arrest: Plut. Arat. p. 1893. 1.31.
cd. H. St. to seize hi/ the middle: Ari-
Eq. 264. to intersect or divide:
stoph.
Polyb.
Polyb.
Pol^b.
V, 59. to fence off, 01 fortify :
i, 42. to deliberate, to consult:
iv, 25. to determine, to rcsolee :
Polyb. iv, 5. to be assured or convinced
of: Diog. L. in Zen. p. 240. ed. H.
St. (K\aix$dveiv, to learn, to acquire the
knowledge of: Polyb. ii, 39. 4^(\aix\^ev
&rav, (Ionic) gets or receives: Diog.
Laert. in Biant. p. 32. 1. 15. ed. H. St.
UUit : Is. Casaub. cvWaix^avtiv, to
join, to coniiccl (one ^^ord with auotlicv) :
Aristopli. Eq. 21. lo squeeze together,
Viger.
to cl'ise ; ^vWdf/.^av avrov rh (rr6fj.a, slop
his mouth: Aristoph. Ach. 920. uttoAoju-
^dviiv, to understand, to fake one's mean-
ing : Plat. Goig. p. 307. 1. 33. ed. Basil-
prim. vno\aiJ.pdvf(r6ai, to he thought or
judged of as to character : Demostl). in
Aristocr. p. G23. 1. 5. cd. Reisk — J. S.
' The constructioti of this j>lirase has
been imitated by Virgil : sensit niedios
delapsus in hostes : yEn. ii, 377. — J. 8.
" An infinitive is sometimes substituted
for tlie participle ; as, fti; Xavddvwaitf
— ras fj.iyl(rTas Kai KaWlo'Tas ir po'i ivai
Tifx&s : lest they heedlessly lavish nnd
throw away, &c. Polyb. v, 90. e \adiv &
Bpovros Kara TrvKas ipx^'^^ <'â– 'â– irpbf
tJtto!/ k\w^t), Plut. in Brut. p. 1804o
1. 2. ed. II. St.-J. S.
U
90 MeWw — Ntcfiw. [Chap, v, ^ viii.
as, //tXXw TToie'iy, I am about to do. fie\\u> KiOaplieiy, JE\. V. H.
iii, 32. oyo^riirai /.leWuiv, Lys. p. 412. cd- Lonf). jtteXXovrwf aKiuiai
Xi/JM, /El. V. H. V, 20. oirep /xeXXw iradeii', /Escii. Prom. 626. fieXXuj
v/.ids bi^u^eir, Fiat. Apol. 6.
V. The infinitive is sometimes understood : as in rn ^ey cfieWey,
u>s eboKet, tu>v beivCbv, th b' i'jbrj vaoTip : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 292.
1. 15. eil. Reisk.] yettirFerrQat, (TVj^lh'irTfaHnt, or \\\v. like. In firjbels
(f)96i'b) TO /ueWov uKovtjr], Demosth. in Lept. Xe;^6>;(Te(r0at.
VI. The infinitive suppressed is sometimes that of a verb pro-
ct'diny in the sentence; as, Tin fx€i> eiropBovi', tus be e/ieWov, (7ro,j0>/-
aeit' \iz,) Tdls be yrreiXovy tCov TTfiXewr, Isoer. in Hel. Laud. — or fol-
lowiiig:, as ill Tiiuc. .i, 131. [p. 195. I. 3. ed. Bekk.] and Athen. Dcipn.
iv. p. \66.
V'll. INleXXw sometimes signifies, u'hal must necessarili/ come to pass,
what must bv, tvhat ought to be, ivhat is to be: kui tyieXXei', tvanep
euds, €ts ndpuivs /SuXXwv, del twcs Tev^eaOai (tkottov, he COuld not but
hit some mark : Dion. Hal. v, 24. v. Horn. 11. t,, 12.5. Od. a, 232.
b, ISl, 377. CT, 137. x> 322. Pyrrinis, in answer to the soldiers
who called him an eajjle, ri yap ov /ieXXti>, roTs uyuerepots onXois, unTnep
tJKvwrepois, alpu/jtevos ', how can I but be one, raised on high as lam
upon your arms as upon wings? Pint, in Apophfli. — In the Pha^do of
Plato, Socrates, to one saving odev be a~e\iiro}iev, e<rct»'eXGw/tf)', e'i
aoi iibojLievu) la-li' answers, riXXa i]bofier(o ye' ttws yap oh fieWei ; how
can it be otherwise? 24 extr. — v. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 405. Xen.
QLc. xviii, 1. and Bach, ad I.*
Tt e/ueWoy KeXevaeiv ; y ti avfjit^ovX€V(jeiy avTrj Troiely, what COldd
Ibid, or ii'hat advise the state to do? what ought I to have ordered,
&c. Demosth. pro Cor. beiKvuei, Troiap vboy avroiis bet ftablSeiv, el
awieudai ^iXXuvaiv tf rw /3/w, if they are to be preserved, &c. Cel).
Tab. €1 fiiXXei 6pOu)s bioiKelaOai >/ rroXis, if the republic is to be rightly
administered.
\ III. (XI.) MeXXetr signifies to be dilatory, to delay : fieXXi}Teov
ovbev cTi, Plal. Crit. p. lOS. 1. 40. v. Aristoph. Pint. 606. Acts
xxii, 16. And in this sense it is used of things which are de-
layed : t-^Qpav ov lueXXovtrav, Thuc. i, 42. tu y^pij^nTci yu») /.leXXij/jeir,
Julian, ap. Herodian. ii, 6. and to fiiXXov, delay, backwardness, pro-
crastination, Eurip. Or. 426. Thuc. i, 84.
IX. (XII.) NtK^y is sometimes to gain a cause ; to have a sentence
or verdict in one^s favor : sometimes simply to excel: lion). II. xviii,
252. The accusative vtKrjv is put after it : Horn. Od. xi, 544. also
an accusative of that in or by which superiority or victory is gained ;
as, vti^^y 'OXvfxiria.'^ ttuito {cieOXa) tii'/ca, Hom. II. iv, 3S9' viKu/y
bpofjoy, Pind. Ol. iv, 34. xiii, 42. 01 fji'iropes, ol vtKwyTes ras yyujfias,
who have a majority in favor of thiir counsel; whose votes, or
covnsil, prevail : Pl;it. Gorg. p. 456. vik^v \//>/^((T^a, to get a pse-
phism or decree proposed by one passed.
* Seo Aristoph. Nub. 1:501. Ran. 208. ed. Reisk. iviKa to TlvQia — T(f T(&piitircf>,
Vesp. 460 — J. S. Pseuilo-Dcniosih. iu Ncfcr. p. 135C. I. 5.
* Demoath. in Thcocr. p. 1312. 1. ult. — J.S.
Rule 5-— 14.] No^/5w— 0;fa. gi
X. (Xlll.) The suflTrage or counsel itself is also said to conquer or
prevail, iiK^y : »)j' yhp MeuiKXtovs yiw/ur) npurepot' leiiKrjKvla, Tliuc. ii.
7) tp?/ {yywfxT] viz.) iih^, Plat, fie Re|). iii. p. 397-
III tijis sense it is sometimes put absolutely with an infinitive
after it ; as, ws S' oZy ivUa (pevyeiy eh ti)v A'iyv-Tov, ivheii, there-
fore, the majority were in favor of escaping to Egypt: Plut. Pomp,
p. 660. [p. 1205. 1. penult, efl. H. St.]
XI. (XIV.) NiK^v and iKtiK^v signify to prevail, to obtain, as a
custom, a report, an o})ini(in, c'V'C. in wliicli sense they are sonietiujes
put absolutely as iinpersonals : tov eni 'lA/w (underst. ttoAc/io*')
KXtyQj/""' Tpwovciv, Kai ov^^'KWtivtKov, f^€iiKj)rTe '. Pans. Messen.
The verb Kparelv has the same significations and constructions as
XII. (XV.) No/j/5etv is sometimes to institute or establish by law;
to practise or observe by law or by custom ; to use : 01 "Iwjes er« kcu
vvv vofiiiuvtji, celebrate by custom, (llie Bacthanalian rites, viz.)
Thuc. ii. rows /l(0«)(oi)v ro^icovat ttoWcu -wv ttoXewj' vr^-Kotva aizo-
kreireir, sanction by law: Xen. Hier. iii, 3. Hence tu revo/uiafuera,
the institutions of a state; rrapa to t'eio/uierfiiroi' 'Pwjua/ots, Sozom.
viii, 10. vo/jicior iTrnoTpocpiai, Pind. Isthm. ii, ,55. v. ^Esch. Choeph.
1003. {999. v. Abresch.) Virg. lEu. vii, 69O.'' (puyvtiv vopiioi'Tes,
Herodof. ii. With a dative; r^ rofiia^ari ro/jISaveri, use: M$vh.
Dial, ii, 24. v. Thuc. ii, 38. and Abresch, Diluc Thuc. p. 193.
vofxiS.€aQai, to be in use: Plat. Gorg. ottws rw*' royuiCo^jeiwi' rvj^wo-*,
i. e. kvayianurwr, jei o/ticpei/w*', Deniosth. p. 733. ed. Reisk. v. and
p. 1399. ^oiuiovTa Xiytiv in Plat. Plieedr. p. 257- 1- 32. is, to speak
in earnest ; to say what one really thinks.
XIII. (XVI.) Olba, I know, is used instead of the present e'ibuj,
and the compound erv} oiba luslend of avyeibu) or aweibo/jai : v. Acts
xxvi, 27. In the second person olada : v. Plat. Gorg. p. 485".
OJb' on is used parenthetically, and is generally preceded by ev :
ifKovcTe fiev ovv, ev oJb' oti, kuI Vfuels 'luauyos oro/ua .' Xen. H. Gr.
vi. V, Deniosth. de fals. leg. p. 201. 1. 37. €\w/.tai n wr, ev olb' oti,
KaKCjy oyruyy : Plat. Apol. 27. vvliere there is a confusion, very com-
mon in Greek authors, of two distinct phrases; viz. eXw/uai n rJJv
kokQi', and e\w/ia< n rovrtoy, a ev olb' oti Kocri e'ffrt. Kv does not
always precede olb' oti thus used : Arislopli. Lys. 60. Dtmosth.
Phil. ii. p. 28. Aristid. Or. Leuctr. p. 91. OJb' on often concludes
a sentence: v. Aristoph. Vesp. 1339. Pat'. 364. Pint. 890. Eurip.
Phcen. l6li.
XIV. (XVII.) And in the same unconnected manner eu «(t0« and
(V 'lad' OTI are used, both in the middle and at the end of sentences.
See Xen. Cyrop. v, near the beginning. AiTX^f'oi/jijy ay, eii "laOi,
cTr' uvTw : Lucian. Ey tat)' 6Vt concludes a sentence in Aristoph.
Plut. 183.
^ Willi an infinitive: oiItw 5iij7ei(70ai fxi<rrfvojj.ivov -KapaTois PLiT()iKu'is,ohlaining
von'i^ova' ol (Tot/joi, Arislopb. Vcsp. 1190. or precailing as leg'dimate: I'olyb. E.
An infrequent use of vofxiffriveiy may be Ptir. p. 77. — J. S.
noticed here : rod xopa'<'''^pos roinou vo-
f)2 Karayivu)aiC€tv — Aeyeiv. [ChAP. V. | ix.
OlSrt is used pcriphrastically ; as, ai'/\a betXav Olada (pvyav, Antipal.
Tlicssal. xxvi. and fi>r solere, to use or be wont: pails vbaros — i:ai
TTerpuv dlbe [can] tcniXniveiv, AristaM). i. epist. 17. v. Bartli. ad Claud.
p. 892. and Abrescli. ad Arislecn. p. 336. and fiavQaveir, Casaub, ad
Allien, p. 718.
XV. (XVIII.) O'lfiai, parenthetically, is nsed both seriously and
irouicallv, like credo and opinor ; it Diay sometimes be rendered iiti-
que, nimirum, to wit ; profeclo, truly: okias, ol/iai, kciI TrXolov to.
KurooOei' IrT^vpoTara eivni be'i : Demosth. Ol. ii.'
XVI. (XIX.) O'iei, the second person, is often equivalent to
obsecro, tandem, pray : oi/c I'ltokuv, o'iet, j/yj/aeroi ; wilt he not, I pray
you, think him a person of strange and preposterous notions? Plat,
de Rep. vii.
SECTION IX. — Of the verbs KaTayiruKrKeiy, \eyeiv, ofxoXoye'iv,
6<p\i(Ji;dveir, irapidTHPCii, TraTxeir, Trepiibe'iy, Trtpiop^y.
Rule I. KarayiywfjKen', with a genitive of the person and an
accusative of the tiling, signifies to condemn in, to pronounce or
think guilty of, to judge worthy or deserving of:f as, Ka-aytywaKut
aov7ro>xXrivcifiaOiiiy. KarcyvoDy vfiwy fxfdufiiay, Chrys. in\ pop. Antioth.
And uf\i(TKdyeiy with an accusative of the thing is used in tl'.e sense
of the passive KamyiydiTueordai ; as, i]XiKrjv av ilxpXtjKores ncipdyoiav
7ir€, what an opinion of folly you would have incurred : how sense-
less you would have been thought: Demosth. Ol. i. alcrxy'V^' w0X>'/-
Kare, Demosth. adv. Aristocr. p. 660. So Philipp. i. p. 52. yeXuira
v^XitTKcuovai, they incur derision: Chrysost.
Sometimes, however, KarayiybXTKeiy has an accusative of tiie person,
and a genitive of the thing; as, tovtov /.u) KaTciyiywffKeiv ipoyov, Lys.
pro Erastoth.
Aeyw sometinies exaggerates or extenuates : /urjSei os oyros ev aurj;
iroXefjiinv Xeyu). and I mean too ivithout any enemy in it: Demosth.
Ol. i. [p. 17. 1. 1. ed. Reisk.]'? ovbey Xeyeiy, to be of no tveight,
' The following passnges, in which oI/jlui f But Ka.JWyvov% rod yepovros rovs rpd-
is used cLTvoffTariKus, OT unconnecle.lly , irovs, in Aris\o[)h. E^. 46. is, having made
where tliere is not opiuion merely, but ab- himself Ihorouiihhj acquainted icith the
Bolute certainty, are worthy of notice : disposition of the old man.— J. S.
iKelvos pkv, (i'hiliij) %v, olp-ai, aUpa /^ Atyoo, I mean ; that is to say : De-
eXt""} KOI vf/vx^i' Mi'aj' : Demcsth. de fals. mosth. adv. Eubulid. p. 1306. 1.1. ed.
leg. p. 412. 1. 2. ed. Keisk-: ou yap, lleisk. The following uses of Xtyu and
olfxai, S> TrdTTTre. :SdKas ai/ry oiVoxoe? : Xen. its compounds may be added : \iyeiv, to
Cyrop. i. See Plat. Mm. p. 337. 1. 4H. furnish with a lied; to dismiss to rest;
ed. lias. Land Erunck, Suppleii). Emend. Xi^ov vvv fie TaxiffTa, Horn. II. oi, C3.5.
ad Aristoph. Lys. 12.56. / suppose, and Kolpiaov sch. and intransitively, to lie
J trow, have a similar meaning ; and are down ; fpx^o v^" TV(pf6y5e, ptr' &KKwy
similarly used in the second person, when Xf^ov kraipwv : Od. k, 320. SiaXiynv,
a figurative cpiestidu is proposed about to siUct, to cull, to choose out : Vo\yh. \,
what can be doubted neither by the in- 8. tiiaXiyovaav tV "^V, clearinp; out the
terrogating nor ihc interrogated party. — orifice or passage, to make il icid(r : Ari-
J. S. 8toph. Lys. 720. a.yaXiyta6ai, to be re-
Rule 1 — 4-.] 'O/JtoXoyelv — 'OtpXiOKuveit'. 93
force, or importance : Eiirip. Siippl. 595. v. addend, in ed. Her-
niaiiiii ad v. 6l2. yEsch)l. Agnm. 176, e\ Scliutzii fonj.f Oh Xeyw
is a form by wliicli one, who has said any tiling ominous or dangerous,
desires it may be unsriid : el S' eVeoTt ve/neiTis, oh Xeyw : Sopli. El.
1107. V. iEsciiyl. Again. 880. Eum. S69.
'OfxoXoyely, to promise, to accept an invitation: ufioXoyrjaa S" els
Ti'jfiepoy TrapeacfrOai, (viz. to supper at Agatho's,) Plato Symp. With
ijjioXoyeiv signifying to agree to anything, (7vy\<i)p€~iy, avfKpdovelv,
avvTiQeadai, avfi^^aiveiv are iieaily synonymous.
II. ^0(p\i(jKhv€iv and ocpXeiv are put singly for, to be condemned, to
be cast : eav be 6 (pevywv ofXr], but if the cr.lprit be condemned: Plato,
And with bUr)y: bebia fxev fit) ixpXuj^ev blKrir, IsKUS p. lOl. 'Ept'i/jiTfv
bii:r]i' ocpXetv is, to be cast for failure of appearance: Antiphon. p.
711. ed. Reisk. And with biaiTav : w^Xe Ti)y biairav, the sentence of
the arbitrator ivas against him: Demosth. adv. Aphob. v, Dion.
Hal. IsiEO p. 36"2. Sometimes a genitive of the thing only is added ;
as, nfXfjaai beiXias, to be condemned of coivardice : Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 237.
III. Public debtors at Athens were said 6(pXi(iKaveiv -w brj/joaiu) :
and a judge, who imposed a tine to be paid to the commonwealth,
was said irpo(TTifiq.v tw bqiAOuiw.
IV. The second aorist of 6(peiXu) is used either alone or with el, eWe,
aide, ws, to express a wish ; and is varied in nuniber and person in
accordance with the subject; as, w</)eXe $rjy Bpovros, O that Brutus
icere alive! Pint. iradovTi-iv a /i/;7ror' wcpeXoy, when that hud befallen
them, which I wish had never befallen them: Demosth. pro Cor. el
yap io<peXov, e(j>r], would that I could, said he: Plato de Rep. iv.
[p. 408. I. 9. ed. Bas. 1.] e'id' &(j)€Xe fioi Krjbefjtoy ?) ^vyyevrji elvai ris,
would that I had some protector or relation! Aristoph. Vesp. 731.
With nt0e, Iliad a, 415. ws wtpeXes avrvQ' oXeadai, O that thou
hadst there perished! Horn. II. y, 428. uxpeXe with an accusative
and infinitive, Lucian, de Dea Syr. 25. It is to be remarked that
S)(l>eXnv is used only in wishing that something had been, were now,
or may be hereafter, which was not, or is not, or will not be:
uiipeXov davely, I ivish I had died: but I did not die : &(peXoy ju?) $fjy,
I wish I were not alive: but I am alive: /lo) yap &(j>eXoy addyaros
eaeadai, I wish I were not to be immortal: but I am to be so. And
this is the case of the past tenses indicative of other verbs when
joined with particles expressive of a wish; as, eW elijy, I wish it
ivere permitted: but it is not permitted. In wishing, on the con-
trary, what may come to pass, the optative mood must be used, for
oi^eXoi/ cannot; and the optative singly, or with el yap, or with ei
alone, (Soph. (Ed. R. S63.) or with ws or ttws tic, is u<ed only when
one wishes something of which he really hopes for the accomplish-
ment, because he believes it to be possible. But whenever e'ide or
peated, to he often mentioned: Xen.Anab. course: Aristoph. Plul. 1082. Eccl. 890.
ii, 1, 12. airo\(yecrOai, to resign, to give said of a woman, Pint, in Solon, p. 1C2.
vp: Plut. Pomp. p. 1152. 1. IG. ed. H. 1. 31. ed. H. St.— J. S,
St. dia\(yi(76a.t, to have carnal inter- t See Note * p. 55.
9*
TlapiOTayat.
[Chap, v, ^ ix.
aide is added to the optative, it expresses a wish tliiit somcthiiifj were
now which is not, or may be hereafter, which most probably will not
be. See Oiiyss. xx, 6l. vii, 331. xiv, 440. xviii, 201. And eWe
with an infinitive has the same force : see Antij)ater Thessal.
Epigr. 35. Orph. Argon. ]l64. (1157.) Crinagor. in Epigr. 20. It
may often, however, be not altogether a matter of iiidilferciice
whether we use an optative with eWe, or &ipeXoy with the same par-
ticle ; for, as lofeXoy, even when used with regard to the present or
future, l)as still the signification ol a past tense, it cannot but indicate
something which has already taken place to prevent the accomplish-
ment of the wish, as in the foregoing examples ; whereas, of itself,
the optative with e'iOe iiuiicates only the improbability of such accom-
plishment, as in the example Od. xx, 6l. Penelope wishes for some-
thing which, however possible, is nevertheless quite unlikely to come
to pass. Had she had any expectation of obtaining what she wished,
she would have used el yup, or some other particle.
V. (VI.) '(J(j)e\oi', with o, is not varied in person and number : ws
ocpeXvy ye kqi >/^e7i, and I ivisfi ive did also : Julian. It is used for
e'ide, I luish, and is joined with an optative, as Ps. cxix, 5. with the
imperfect indicative : ocpeXov ye firihe 7]v -n-poebpla I Greg. Or. 28.
with a future. Gal. v, 12. with an infinitive: /utre Ibely mpeXov,
Herod, i, ill. "il^eXe also is sometimes joined with an indicative:
^^eXe juiyS' eyeroiTo dual vees ! Callim. Epigr. xviii. v. Arrian,
Diss, ii, 18. On wipeXov and v<pf.Xov see also Pisch. ad Well. iii. p.
147' seq. inlcrpp. ad M<jer. p. 285. seq.
VI. (VII.) Of Trapirr-rjfii and Trapiarafini the following senses are lO
be observed ; toIs biicaara'is riv (pevyovra itapaarriaai, to produce or
place the culprit before his judges ; 7w avaftarri tuv tmror napaaTyaut,
to bring the horse up to the rider.'' Ilapaarrirjai yi'w/jTjv, boi^^nr. to
cotive}/ or instil an opinion ; buiXoyiafiu}', to suggest a thought ;
iEsch. de fals. leg. p. 324. irapaari^iiai evi:aipiay, to afford an oppor-
tuniti/ ; IT. duppeiv, to inspire confidence ; itscli. c. 'I'imarch. Xuyor,
to introduce or give occasion J or discourse ; opyijy, to excite anger ;'
Demoslh. in Mid. p. 537, 22. op^fiu, ardor, alacrity, Polyb. iv, 5.
iriiTTw Tols uKoiiovai, to produce belief in the hearers: Polyb. iv, 30.
vTroxpiav, to arouse suspicion ; (pujjor kuI bios, Uemosth. in Aristocr.
p. 654, 24. and more generally, to prompt, or suggest to the mind :
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 226. I. 3. ed. Reisk.] and with an infinitive,
ibid. [p. 228. I. 4.]
VII. (V'HI.) Yl'ipiaratrOai, to produce: fiaprvpas TrapitT-avrai, they
place their ivitnessts by their own side ;J they have them in readiness
to give their evidence : Isajus p. 75. v. and p. 207.
* TlapaffTTia-ai Xifx^ou, to gel or proriile â– ' Sec Lucian, Nipr. p. 25. c. ed. Salniur.
a boat : Polyb, E. Poir. ji. lOG. com- Xen. Anab. vi, 1, 11. vii, 8, 2. irapa-
parrirc : Kniesli. — J. S. (n-nrracrOai, lo ]il<we Inj one's side, in order
' 'EttI TOtTovTov TTapiCTTri 7h ttAtJOos, so to give a greater solemnity to a pro-
enragid teas the 7nHllitudi' : Polyb. K. L. testation or oath, or lo make it more valid
41. adeo coneilata est mulliludo : Is. Ca- or credible : â– Kapaerrriadfj.fyoi rovs naiSas,
»aub. Ern. — J. S. — ■Klariv inidt'iyat yjdiKrtaav kot' iKWuv :
Rule 5 — S.] Tlapicrrayai. 95
TlapiaTaadai is also to atttiid or stand by, as a public officer or ap-
paritor by a magistrate, as a partisan, as an advocate, &c. with a
dative of tiie person attended: see Deniostli. de fdls. Leg. p. 36'6.
adv. Stepli. p. 1120. Also to come ittto onr's m/wrf: see Eurip.
ilhes, 780. (and so elaep-^EoQai, Eiiiip. Ip!i. A. 137-t.) â– KapiaTaTui
f.ioi Tovro Tvoie'tp, it comc.s into my mind to do this ; vvlieiu e kK tuv irn-
piaTUf-iirov Xeyety, to say what comes uppermost ; to speak extempore.
VJII. (IX.) Wao to be courageous; as, ovru) ndpefrrri Tui Ovfjf, da,
&c. so full of spirit and promptitude ivas he, that, &c. whence na-
pn(7rt)fin and Trapuff-naa,^ boldness, piesence of mind, [and to Trapeart]-
Koi, audacity, assurance : Aristoj)h. Eq. 399- J- S.] and irapncTTartKus
uyi)p, abounding with alacrity, spirit, presence of mind : Folyb. xvi,
4. Also, to reduce to subjection ; as, tiji' olKov[xevriu TrapatTrijaacrdat, to
subjugate the whole world.
tlapioTna'dai is said too of wiiat is within a person's power or
abihty : v. Enrip. Androm. 231.
It signifies also to persuade, to incline, to impel, to incite: napea-
Ti'irraTO tuv veaiiTKOP tt/jos to Konoire'ii', &C. Polyb. Exc. Leg. 85.
napaa-y'iaaadai Toiis aKOVoyras els to fjiciWoi' avr^ avrayaraKTely,
Polyb. ii, 59.'
Demosth. in Apliob. ili. p. 800. 1. 17. ed.
Reisk, See Demosth. adv. Eubul. p.
1305. 1. 11. in Aphob. iii. p. 852. 1. 15.
Lucian, Philops. p. 4G6. ed. Salniur. —
J. S.
* Tlapda-racris, perturbation, alienation
of mind : Sia rrjv Trapdcrraaiv rfjs hiavoias
dpfiCL)VT€S iirl Tt> vflXiTdai 4v TOiS ottAois
aTTiirvlyovTO : Polyb. iii, 85. Trepix<iP'hs
oicra TTpbs ras Oi'jpas airrivTa, /cot iiiTo. ira-
pacTTdaeais T/crirafero rovs veavlaKovs : Po-
l_yb. X, 5. IcBlitia cum stupore: Eruesti.
—J. S.
' Add, irapiffTOLffQai, to show. Polyb.
E. L. 144. to occur, Pint. Moral, t. iii.
p. 157. 1. 10. ed. Wytlenb. 8vo. and
also the following senses of Ifo-TTj^i and
some of its other derivatives and com-
pounds : TTplf &v ye aru rpexoiv, l/e/ore I
cease running: Aristoph. Ach. 176. 'l(nr]
P6ewv 5rifJ.hv, stie weigtied beef fat : Ari-
stoph. Vesp. 40. iiTKnadiJ.fiieit', to dis-
turb, to annoy, to botlier : Pint. Moral,
sect. 778. b. ed. Wyttenb. irjs aij.d^7]s
f\4yfro crraO/jiricTaadaL tovs dtnepiaKovs,
to liave marked the situation of: Calli-
macli. ap. Diog. Laert. p. 9. 1. 1. ed. H.
St. ffTa6p.a(j0ai, to conjecture : Soph.
CEd. R. 1111. airai'iffTaffOai, to depart :
Theogn. 528. KanlavaaTriuai, to resist:
Plut. Phocion, p. 1370. 1. 10. ed. H. St.
awe^avacrTTjvat, at the same time to op-
pose or contend with: Plut. Cies.p. 1303.
1. 29. Steph. iTraveaTT)KT! , sliult have
lieen built : Aristoph. Av. 654. trtavlcr-
raaQai, to rise against, with a dative :
Aristoph. Av. 1584. also to attempt to
violate, Theopomp. ap. Polyb, E. Pei-
resc. p. 20. ed. Ern. ano(rrr](racr6at,
to weigli : Demosth. ndv.Timoth. p. 1199.
I. 24. ed. Reisk. anoaTaTe'LV, with a ge-
nitive, to desert: Aristoph. Av. 313.^0
differ, to be unlike: Soph. QLd. R.
743. i^a(pi(TTaff6at, to decline, to stand
aloof from: Soph. Qild. C. 501. crwe-
iricTTriaai, to attend, to be attentive: Polyb.
ii, 58. and transitively, to render uttetilive :
Polyb. iii, 59. KUTaffrrjifai, to be calm or
tranquil: Aristoph. Eq. 865. KaOeffTfi-
Kaai, are stationed: Aristoph. Av. 1161.
irepua'TacTOai, said, not of several, but of
one, to liarass, to tease, to molest, to pes-
ter, to worry : Ding. L. in Menedem.
p. 90. 1. 26. cd. H. St. Trpoia-ravat, to
take care of, to attend to, to supply, to
make offerings to : Soph. El. 1378.
Tzpo'iaravai irphs rb p^, with an infinitive,
to be an obstacle to, to serve to prevent or
lander : Ari>tot. Probl. sect. ii. ])robl. 38.
avfiaTavai, to present a person to anoilier
as stirely for a debt : Demosth. adv. Spud,
p. 1029. 1. 26. p. 1032. 1. 27. (T. tos ri-
pas Tov aiTov, to raise 01 enhance the price
of corn : Demosth. in DionysoJ. p. 1285.
1. 6. av(rTr\vai, to be fully formed ; to be
complete or perfect : Lonyin. § xi. v. Toiip.
to confront, to engage, to stand against in
conflict: Aristoph. Vesp. 1031. crvffTTi-
crdpLivos ipya, liaving constructed or fabri-
cated works [iur a siege) : Polyb. v, 71.
vTToo'Trjvai, to give place to, to yield to :
Horn, II. o, 160.— J. S.
g6 llacTxeiv — Hc/JuSeTi'. [Chap. V.
IX. (X.) lilacTxeiy is sometimes to be treated, or used, to have done
to one: ovb' av unovy â– naa-^}) ris vtt' avTiiv, not eve?i if one be ever so
ill treated by them ; ivhatevtr usage one may have received from them :
Plat. Crit. c. 10. Willi eu : fiXarruiv b Tradwv ev rov Tron'iaavTos, he
that has received a benefit is inferior to him who has conferred it :
Aristot. Eth. With ayadljy : ris €\n)s vno tovtov ayadov ■treiaeaOai ;
Lysias : wiience dr7-fi/7ra6e(i', to have a kindness returned to one ; and
uprevTroiiiirai, to return a kindness.
X. (XI.) To be in any state of mind or feeling : oiioiiraTov Ttaa^ii)
Trpos Tovs <pi\o(70(povpras, wcnrep Trpos tovs j/zeXAt^oyuerovs, nat nai^oi'ras :
Plat. Gorsj.
XI. (XII.) To do: Aristopll. Nub. 814. "» ri av tis nadui -npos
ardpojirovs p-iire 'ipyf /JijTe Xoyu) ireicrdi'iirti bwa/jerovs ; what can one do
tcith, how can one act towards, mcn,&c. '! Galei), eiraQov tI 'O/ji'iptKoy,
they acted, in a manner, like Homer himself: Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 250. V. Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. til4. Spanli. ad Aristopli. Pint. 603.
and Valck. ad Eurip. Fhoen. 90'2.
XII. (XIII.) Boll) persons and things are said to suffer, irurrxeir,
whatever of any kind happens to them :" ovbev beipov Traa-^eTe uno-
porJvTes, it is no wonder that you are -perplexed <>r at a loss : Ceb,
Tab. [p. 6. I. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] v. ^1. V. H. lib. ult.
c. 47. And the plirase tI naikJy especially signifies to die or to
perish:" Thuc. iv. p. 97- vvhence ttuOos, death or slaughter: He-
rodot. i, 13. But tI nuduy may often be rendered why ; as in Aris-
toph. Nub. 400.^ Tt fxaQujv is a similar phrase : * rt yhp yuaOoir' is
TOVS Oeovs vfipiieruy ', Aristoph. Nub. 1510. [1489. Bekker's edition
printed for Priestley, 1825.] This latter form is used in oblicjue or
indirect phraseology as well as in direct, b ti being substituted for -i ;
when it may be rendered, because: ttoXv /uevTOi, ecpi], tiKaiorepoy Tuy
v^irepov irarepa TVTTTOtpi, 6 ri jiaQiov ao^povi v'lels ovT(i)i e<pv(Tcy : for
having begotten such iciseacres of sons : Plato Eulhyd. c. 64. p.
299- '!• '"' u'i,ius eifii TTude'iy 7) uTror'iaai, n jiadwy ey no l3t<j ov^ ifav-
X'ny 7]yoy; Plato Apol. c. 26. p. 36. b. v. Plat. Euthydem. c. 30.
Eupolis ap. Stob. serm. iv. p. 53.
XIII. (XIV.) "() TI xP') Trade'tv ?) cnror'nTai is an Allic and forensic
expression for, what punishment must be suffa'ed orjine paid : iira-
yeiv TtfiTifia, b ti xP') rradeiv j) anoT'iaai, to impose the penalty , whether
corporal punishment or fine.
XIV. (XV.) Wepiibeiv and nepiop^y, (and 7r€pi6\peadai for the
future,) to see without endeavouring to prevent, to suffer, to permit ;
Tt)v Tuiv 'Po)puio)y apX'/'' A"' "rnpiibely e ppt ^ /j e yt) y, Ilerodian ii.
ToaovTOvs TiLy avpf^a^'^y irepiop^y bovXevovT as, Isocr. Paneg. oh
TrepioxpeToi /u b delos uviiriroy, Aristopll. Nub. bvyofxiy npoa-
Xn(3€~iy TT €pi6\p€ ade, Thuc. i.
" Ti yhp irdOai ; for what can I diil J' Ti TraSoCtrai, iXirep ve(pf\ai y' flalv
Aristoph. Lys. bB4. So ireiffoixai, Nub. a\7)dws,6vr]Ta7s e^acnyvvai^iy ; Aristojiii.
791. Eccl.911.— J. S. Nub. 3J1.— .1. S.
" See Aristoph. Nub. 4G1. Pac. 701. v V. Aristoph. Plul. 908. Deniostli.
— J. S. adv. Lept. p. 495, 1. 19. ed. Reisk. Id.
" See Aristoph. Eccl. 1105.— .T. S. in Steph. i. p. 1113. 1. 4.— J. S.
§ X. Rule i — 6.] Ilo<ei»'. gj
SECTION X. — Of the verbs Troielu, noie'iadai, nparreip,
TrpoffTTOieladai.
Rule I. Tloielp and epyaSeiydai are used in speaking of benefits or
injuries ; as, kukuis or TroWa caca or KaXa rbv l^dpof iroiely or eoya-
Cerrdai : and ttou'lv and Trparretv thus used have sometimes a dative of
the person : Dinarch. aclv. Demosth. p. 13. Lys. adv. Eratostlj.
p. 417. Deinostli. pro I'lian. p. 853. Id. ad Phoenipp. p. 1045.
L}s. adv. Agorat. p. 472. Xen. Hell. iv. p. 540. Isai. pro Nicostr.
p. 78. ^1. 11. Anini. i, 58. Acts ix, 13. xvi, 28. And nuieiv
and bpfiv are sometimes put singly for caKOTroujirai, to do harm, or
injure, Eurip. Med. 289. Anacr. Od. xii. Demosth. p. SGS. 855.
Xen. de Re Eq. vi, 4, 5. v. Cuper, Obs. i, P-
II. Woii'iv is often joined with kuXojs, eo, and other adverbs, and
followed by a participle; as, cw Trotels be Kal av (l)pu$(i)v, but however
you do icell in speaking of it to us: Aristoph. Pac. 1311. Ka\Qs
inoii](7(ts Trpoenriov, you did well to mention it before-hand: Xen.
Cyrop. i. p. l6.' v. Acts x, 'io. 3 John v. 6. or with a
neuter adjective, followed by an infinitive and to, as kuXuv enoit'iaare
TO (Tuxrai T}ji' ri}(7oi', Demosth. pro Cor.
III. YJoie'iv Tii'a uvuvqTov with a genitive, to deprive one of the en-
joyment, fruit, or advantage of what is expressed by the genitive:
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 275. 1. 5. ed. Reisk.]
IV. ^lahiKaaiav Tcoieii', to have recourse to a trial by law: De-
mosth. in Timocr. [p. 704. 1. 9- ed. Reisk.]
With a noun signifying time iroi(.~iv is to pass, to spend: v. Acts
xviii, 23. XX, 3. and Casaub. ad Act. Ap. xv, 33. ovh' eTrolrjaav
y^puvuv ovbefci, nor did they stay any time, linger, loiter: Demosth.
p. 392.
V. n.ote~iadaL is sometimes, to adopt: v'wy eiroti'icraTo o-e/ j^Lsch. p.
212. i]v kiTouifTUTo y.r}T€pa, whom he adopted as his mother: Plut.
in Alex. In Isseus, de sort. ApoUod. [p. 159' ed. Reisk,] 'KoielaQat
and TTOi'qais are found unconnected with any noun signifying the sub-
ject of adoption. 'Ekn-oteTi^ is, to give in adoption,' Isieus, whence
ktiTioir]i7is : the opposite of which is €iairoh]ms.
VI. Yloie'if or Yloielcrdai followed by a preposition, or an adverb,
forms many periphrastical phrases; as, tovs fieXXovras eariaadai
Ixvev (J\pov TToiiiffeiy, to deprive of their dish: Plat, Hipp. M.
p. 290. 7roie7»' and oxpews, to send or remove out of sight; e'iau)
•■Ttie signification of naXws Trou7v is adv. Plinenipp. p. 1043. I. 15. where tov
remarkable in the following passage : elal TroiTjo-ajiteVou is opposed to tov (pvcru Tra-
fjiiv is TO fidXirTTa auTol irXoviTiut, koI ku- Tp6s. — J. S.
Ai J TTotoGo-i : and I ivislitkcmjoy n/il ; ' But in Aristoph. Pac. 708. e/cTroieTtr-
and I rejoice that Ihiij arc so : Demosth. 6ai. is to procreate: rairrv (on-wpot personi-
in iMid. p. ,532. 1. 20. — J. S. fied) ^woikwu, (kttolov (ravrw ffoTpvs, ge-
' See Horn. 11. t, 491. Plut. Moral, iterate ox breed out of Iter for yourself. —
§ 834. B. ed. Wyttenb. and Demosth. J. S.
Viger. N
gS Uoia'i/jOai. [CllAP. V. § X.
7ro(»7(Tni, to include, to inclose, to receive within itself, Pula'pli. 50.
e.KTTobwy Troielirdai, to put out of the iiuii/ ; to despatch, to destroy:
Isocr. ill Evas. e'<7w tTis yvuBov iroiriaai Tor huKTvXov, to introduce
or insert within: Xen. de Re eq. vi, S. iroieiaBm es 0u\o\>/i', to
imprison: Tluicyd. iii, 3. Trme'iy kv alayjn'r], to disgrace: Deiiiostli.
(le Cor. p. 332. 1. 37- noie'iaOcu kv ulTi<ji, to blame, to accuse: Paus.
ill Aril, p. 411. iroie'iu kv ^leai^, to surround, to inclose, to hem
in : Time, i, 6'2. iroielaQai ev vufiui, to sanction by law, to reckon
lawful: Ilerodot. Clio c. 131. â– nDielrrdai kv oXiywjjiq, to neglect:
Thuc. vii, 3. TToie'taticu If opyjj, to be angry with: Demoslli. Ol. i.
itoieladni kv bevrkpa ru^ei, to make a secondary concern ; iroit'iv kv
Xupiri, to gratify, to act acceptably : Plato Pliajdr. c. 64. irou'iv
ky x^f^t '■')'' J"«''X'J''» ^^ J^S^'^ hand to hand: Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 10.
TToielrrOui kv uTroi^/a, to suspect : ^scli. adv. Tim. p. 35. Trouliy^ai
evTos, to encircle, to receive into the middle: Tiiuc. ii, S3. Troie'iv
k^ "laov â– navTus, to rech'07i or treat all alike: Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 505. TTOie'ii' e^io, to put forth or out : M\. V. H, x, 2. Acts
V, 34. Xei). Cyrop. iv, 1, 2. noie'iaOai k-ni riii, to put into his
poiver or possession: Plul. Tlies. Troie/o-Oat Tre/ul knvruv, to seize:
Isocr. Panatli. p. 552. Troieli' TroppioTaru), to remove as far as possible :
Isocr. ill Nicocl. p. 66. Ajipian, Ik-ll. Partli. p. 267- X''^P'* Trotelo-flaj,
to remove out of the ivay of, to free from.
VII. Yliarets •KoieiaOm npus tiiu, to give assura7}ces to one, to bind
or pledge one's self to him: Allien, viii. v. l6. Pol\b. v.
Vni. lloif'iaOdi i\u(\ its accusative may often be rendered by one
verb of sif;iiificalioii similar t«) tlie acciisalive ; as, •yjw/jrji' noie'iaOai,
to think, to Judge, to intend, to resolve: Arr. Exp. A I. iv, 27.
Tl;uc. i, 128. ii, 2. knlbei^tv nuieladat, to show : Plato Pliaed. c.
47. p. 99' d. c. 110. ed. Ileind. [p. 39. I. 52. ed. Dasil. l.J Ka-
Ta(TTp()(p))v TTOie'iffOai, to overthrow, to subdue: Ilerodot. Er. c. 27*
Kkphas â– nnieltrdcu, to gain, to make a profit by : Pint, in Cic. upy))u
troif'inOm, to be enraged al : IJeliodor. yEtli. ix, 2. (pvyi'jv ixou'iaijai,
to Jly : Time, iii, 33. And in the active voice: T.oiel)' i/rrar, to be
conquered : Polyb. xi, 2. iroielv vbuip, to rain: Aristopli. Vesp. 26 I.
Tlieoplir. in Garrulo ; and n-oielv iieroy, Aristopli. Vesp, 263. and in
the active voice with adjectives, in a similar nuxniier : k^nlperoi' Troieli',
to except: Plato Ep. ii. -noieli' eicOero tu (3pi(pr], to expose: Acts
vii, ly. V. Ilor. Serin, i, 4, 59. Ov. Met. v, 480. Ter. Ileaut. ii,
3, 100.
IX. (X.) Xapiy TToulaOai is to be grateful OT thankful : Demostli.
de fals. Lefj. p. 212. I. 25.
X. (XI.) Y\oifla6(u v(j)' kavroy or <*<// tuvro), to bring into one\s power ;
to reduce to suhjeclion. And â– 7V(ntla()(n kuvruy ctt' ktpvaiav, to get
himself into power: Ilerodian i, <). But els kavruv Trmovftevos r«
TouTiou afuiprii/nnrci, is, faking them upon himself, making himself
answerable for them: Demosth.
XI. (XIII.) "Epyor TToielcrOui is, to make it one's business, to endea-
vour earnestly : Pint. Tlies. Plat. Tim. So tthi', and nuira, irotely,
oTTws, to spare no exertion, to use all means to — .' Plato Pliiedr. p.
252. 1. 4 1, de Pup. vi, p. 488.
Rule / — 14.] JloielaOat. (JO
XII. (XIV.) YloielffOai, to uecount, to esteem, to reckon: evrv^j^ua
TToielaOcu Toy Kaqwr, to reckon the opportunity a piece of s^ood for-
tune : Pint. Pomp. TrofiTTi)!-, uW (!V (TViu(]>np(it' TO â– n-pCiy/ja iroiouneros,
Greg. Naz. Yloie'iaQai, to pretend, to lay claim to : ruxno to yudh]-
fxa TTowvijat beii'cs eJrai, I'lat, Tlieag. p. 128. I. 17- ifxuvTOv Troioufxe-
vos TO f.i('iOr]f^tn ehni tbs evjjri/ja, Flat. Hipp, Mill. p. 372. I. QJ •
XIII. (XV.) 'll^(!)\r) Km TrpvwXr] noiel}', is to destroy utterly : De-
inosth. pro Cor. [p. 332. I. 21. ed. Ilcisk.]
XIV. (XVI.) Uoiely Till Tor \(jyoj', to give, or to be, to him the
cause or occasion of his discourse: Aristiil. I'aiiatli. l^wt â– noialrrOui
\6you Tov yu// rt avoiirws J) /.KiriKuts e(7re7j', is to take thought or care
not to, &c. Pliilostr. de vit. Apt)ll. v, 35. And ttoXiiv Traie'icOai Koyov
upeTTis, is to hold it in great esteem: Pliilostr. in Heroic, c. I 1.
As the signification of Troiflf is so general, it often becomes a sort
of relative verb, and stands for any otiier verb, to avoid its repetition;
as, ys (bvrafjeus) jy^ueTs onoray (.pe/rrw biajoifjumofiev, (yv l3ouX7]devT€S
fx^blios ay ironjtrainei'), &c. Isocr. Pancg.* where it is remarkable that
llie relative (>/i) is referred to hwuf^iews, instead of being put in the
neuter (5) and referred to the action expressed by the verb. Some-
limes iroie'ty, or bp(iv, (for they are both so used) represents a verb
(or verbs) following instead of preceding ; as in this passage of
Tlmcyd. in which it is to be observed that the verbs represented by
bpare, and following it, are, by attraction, made to correspond with it
in form, instead of being- put in the infinitive, as the construction
wonld otherwise have required : ttojs ov xpy) Trcivras u/j-vyeir nvrw, t;ai
fii), « rvy v/de7s bpdre, — tov koiiov riys rrioTtjpias a^teade, teal ifxe —
be nhtas ej^ere : ii, 60.
Alyuft TToiely, TrpuTTeif, or bpcjy, to shed blood ; to slay : Polyb. xv,
31. ILnrip. Or. 406. 1140. cf. Cuper, Obs. iii, 19.
Yloie'iy with an infinitive, to grant, or to assume, or to suppose, for
the sake of argument: Xen. Anab. v. p. 555. Also to force, to make,
to cause to : eiroirjiray Wyr/iTiXaoy tTrajn^wpJ/o'n', Xen. Hell, vi, vre-
TTon'iKaTe tovs pt'jTopas yueXer^v kui (piXoooipe'iv, Isocr. de Pace 3) 7'"
* So in Eriglisli, and in other modern ally, to be allowed, to be in the power of;
laiigiKiges : — Italian ; a chi conosce i ifio] oy/cer' iiciTo'iet Povheveadat, it is no
modi tuoi, come J'O io : Boccac. G;orn. longer in my poiver to — : Diog. L. in
7. Nov. 5.— French; Ah! que j'ai de Tlieophr. p. 179. 1. 25. ed. H. St. form,
depit que la loi n' autorise A changer de nan. eKTron^a-ei Karauouv, Pulyb, ii, 24.
iiiari comme on fait de cliemise : Mo- eKiroiui' xop'Ts""^"^') !''• ^'^'» *-'• f'*""''""
Hire, Coo. Imag. sc. r>.: jouir de ses eladai, v.hU ru infmhive, to make or cause
pleurs comme il fait de mes larmes : to: Aristojih. Ach. 255. (fiiroiucrOai, to
Til. Corneille, ATmne,iv. ^. be mentioned in poetry: Aristoph. Av.
" On TToieiJ' and some of its compounds 1301. ixfravonlw vS^ov, to alter, to per-
ihe following additions may be useful : rert : Demosth. in Aristocr. p. G-10. 1. 2.
â– iroif7y els riva, to make verses on : Ari- 13. ed. Reisk. irepi-Koiflcreai, to make
sloph. Kan. 1044. troLilu and iroiucrdai money, to save: Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 38.
used equivalently in the same sentence : -irpon-iroiilaSai, to make one's own, to cnn-
Hesiod, 0[). ii, 325. TroieTa-Oat 07)Ta, to ciliate: r'bv TiiipLov -Kpoa-nowv, Aristoph,
take or hire a servant : Id. ib. 220. ttoi- Eq. 215. to take to the use of, to put on,
iiffBai (p'lKov, to receive into one's friend- ii> wear ; TrSSa ^vMvov irpocmronjo-aTo,
ship: Id. ib. 332, iK-noiuv, iinpcrsoii- IMut. xMonil. p. 'J53. 1. 12, cd. Wyt-
100 riparreiy, dec. [ChAP. V.
XV. (XVII.) riprtTreiv is somelitnes to act ivith a view to some
certain end ; to use means, to take measures ; to endeavour to bring
about: e-rrpaaaev ora) rpojrw raj^iora toIs fiev ^vfjfli'iaeTai, tUv be
unaWii^erai : Tliuc iv. Kopn'O/wf Trputraoi'Ttoi' ottws TifJivpijuwi'Tui
Qvrovs, Id. i, 56. es re neXoTronj/aoj' kivpaaaev, orrr] oxpeAeia ns yevij-
aerai : Id. i, 65.
XVI. (KVIIl.) And as a verb transitive also it signifies, to endea-
vour clandestinely, to plot, to betray : TrpaTretv Ki'idubov rw KiKcpwri,
Pint, in Cic. npuTTeiv rijv tHjv &r)(3ai(i)v KaTcWvaiu, Ueniostli. Pliil. i.
So Andocid. p. Q2. tovtoi^ ewpaTTOv riif ttuXiv, Polvb. iv, 1?^ cf.
XVII. (XIX.) Uparreiy, to obtain by supplication; to sue for :
TrpaTTeiv napci twv QeG>v ayuQuv, Isocr. ad Nicocl. vpuTreiv tl npos
(or es) Tirct, is to treat or transact about something ivilh a person :
irpalavTes Trpos avruy rijv Xfitpiy rijs ttoXews, Thuc. iv, 11 4. and, instead
of the accnsative, nepl is sometimes nsed with a genitive.
Ta Koira TrpaTTeiv, is to be in office, to administer the government
of a state: Demosth. ep. iii. p. Il6\ 1. 5. and in the same sense
TvpuTreiv TCI Trpay/^iura, Lys. p. 483. Ylpdrreiy intransitively, is to
succeed: Horn. Od. y, 60. to which is opposed tnrpaKTe'iy. Ev
TTpuTTeiv is to prosper,-' and the contrary kokCus npuTTeiv.* Ilparretv
Tii'i, h(t{i Tiros, or vnep tivos, is to be of his parly or side, to favor
him : Demosth. Phil, iii, p. 126. Isae. Or. de sort. p. 9O". Dinarcii.
c. Demosth. Trpuaaety tivL ti, to get something for a person, by
using influence, power, &c. Soph. Aj. 445. irpaTTeiv, to sacrifice:
V. Cuper, Obs. iii, 13.
XVIII. (XX.) YlpuTTeaQai, to exact from, to take of, to demand of:
irpnTTeTai -ovs alrov tlnyovTai TpiaKooTiiv, he takes a duty of one
thirtieth from those who export corn: Demosth. in Lept. roi' Ei;-
pvfiebovTd y^priptaTa kirpaiavro, they levied a fine on Eiirymedon : Thuc.
iv, 65. knpaTT€T €Ti /udWov irapa tCjv 'S,tvtt)v, IiL\. V. H. MV,
35. and in the ssme manner the active Trpurreo^ is used : Demosth.
in Androt. p. 617. Lucian, Vit. Auct. [p. 373. c. ed. Salnuir.] Luke
xix, 23.
XIX. (XXI.) Atf<ffe;rpf/^0a( is tO be ruined: 11 bianeTrpuiCTni T(i
tG)v Kapyxiboviwv, otherwise it is all over with the qf)\iirs of the Car-
thaginians : Pint, in Fab.' ,
tenb. 8vo. lo accept condilions, Dc- F. 728. la the same sense irpacrffw ti
mosth. in Euerg. p. 11-12. 1. II. cJ. \vrrp6v ; ib. v. 1114. And (ca/cois Trpdcr-
Keisk. — J. S. awv occurs in v. 1113. and irpaacreiv
" See Poljfb. iv, IG — J. S. KaKus, v. 1220.— J. S.
'" So xP'ICToi' Tl -npaTTiiv, to meet icith ^ Add, ttoWo. irpdrTeiv, to l/c meildlhig:
some good fortune : Aristojih. Plut. 311. AiistO|ih. Kan. 7-10. Siairpdrreip, to de-
6a/)^ei' irafT' ayaBii irenpdyafxif, take flower: I'lut. ISIoral. t. ii. |). 0.5-1. 1. 0. to
heart: n-e have come off most JortunutcUj ; destroy : Soph. Tracli. 780. ^laTrpdmcr-
we are in high luck : Aristoph. Kan. 302. 6ai, to obtain : Xen. Anab. vi, 2, 1 1, (xw-
— J. S. SiairpaTTfiv, to co-operate in accomplish-
* The difference belwccn irpaTrei;/, in ing : Isocr. Pancg. p. 113. ed. Kattit!.
this use, and Sp^v, is plainly marked in iKirpdr-Tnv, lo destroy : Soph, tF.d. C.
tlio f(jllowiiip; piibtsage ; nponduKo. St, Sf^wf IGS'J. — J. S.
KMtws, KoKSf Tl TTpdlftp. l^uiip. llerc.
§ xi. KULE 1 — J.] YlpoanoielaOai — TiOeaOui. lOl
XX. (XXII.) lli)OTirottlaOat, to pi'ctend, is often used ellipticallv,
so that what is preteniled must be collected from the precediiM'
words : opa /»>) tovtidv /.ley e^^flpos j/s, ifioi be -irpofrnoirj (viz. tydpos
eh'cii) : it is to these present, I doubt, that you are really an enemy,
and that to me you only pretend to be so : Demosth. pro Cor. See
also the same oration, p. '270. 1. 4.. ed. lleisk.
SECTION XI. — Of the verbs (rvyk-poTely, (Tvpprjyrvrat, avfj<ppov€ir,
Tidefai, Ttdecrddi, Tvy^^/iyeiy.
Rule I. Ivyk-porelr, which sif^nifies properly to collide, to clap
together, (and perhaps to forge out, or ujiite metals : v. Schol.
Tlieocr. ad Id. xv, 49.) sif^nifies also to collect, to compact, to unite
into one body, and also to form or qualify by instruction or exercise ;
as, (TvyKporelv arpaTiav, a. nuroy : to raise and jorm an army; to
collect, and regulate the compoiation of, a convivial party. nvyKe-
KpoTT)fxeyoi rh tou ttoXe^ov, thoroughly disciplined in military affairs:
Demosth. Ol. ii. and o-uycecpor/j/^eja 7r\>;pw//firo, well-disciplined
crews: Polyb. i, \6. rrvyKpoTeiv -^opoy, to form a chorus ; to collect
dancers and sitigers into a company, and teach them to move and sing
in unison: Demosth. in Mid. p. 250. cvyKporely crvriapoaiav, to or-
ganise a conspiracy.
It signifies also to clap, in testimony of approbation ; b IvpciKoffios
avyekpo-elro, Xen. S\mp. viii, 1. ancl hence, to encourage, to sti-
mulate: (TVvek-poTovy aWos aWor fj)) aTroKu/jreir, Philo de vita Mos.
II. (III.) Ivfjfpovely is sometimes, to arrive at length, by reflection
and observation of circumstances, at a probable conclusion about the
meaning of an oracle: Pint, in Themist. IvfjftaXely also, and (TVf.i-
ftaWecrdni are nsed in a similar sense: Pans, in Mess.
III. (IV.) ^TideaOut, TTpoirrtOeadat, KctTaTiQenOai, avyKaTarideadai,
with a dative, signify to assent, to agree in opinion : ols eywye /<d-
Xtorn Tidefjctt, Chrysost. ad Tliessal. ii. cl b' iiWoi irpoaeTtdevTo,
Kcil KaT€KO(7fxoi)yTO (^conformed) Trayres els Tiju ticeiyov yruifiijy : Pint, in
Fab. p. 191.
IV. (V.) TldeaOat, with an accusative and an adverb of manner,
signifies to manage, to administer, to conduct ; as, uvTe^ovclws, or
avroKparopiKuis, Toy TraXefioy TiOeadai. O'ieaOai ^p*/ r/)r (l>p('>i ijaiv tu ttoj'-
Tu, OTTws av avrrj i]bv y, ovtu) rideadai, Xen. Mem. i. Also (if inter-
preted literally) to make for one's self; as, TtOetrOai fxr^ii^ijy Tiros, to
make ones self a remembrance of something ; i. e. to remember it.
defieros ayva^nTov voov, having assumed, or haviiig, an inflexible or
obstinate mind : ^Eschyl. Prom, 163.
V. (VI.) TiSei'ai and Tideadai signify with logicians, to assume, to
suppose, to hold or teach as a principle or doctrine, to assert as a
position ; as, ol to k^vov ehui TiOerres, or ol to Kevoy TiQefievoi, without
cti'at.
TiOeaOai tov uyCjya, to institute, appoint, arrange, or give to the
public, as a spectacle, the contest or competition : Greg, de Mart.
102 TideaOcu. [ChAP. v. § xi.
VI. (VII.) TideoOni is, to account, esleon, reckon; as, bevrepoy
XP>) TiOeaOni Tijs (jipovyrreojs r/)v vyieinv, ice ought to recko?i heallh but
second to wisdom: iiiistead of wliicli, rideffOai (or iroieladai) ev bevreot^t
Tftlet with a genitive, is said : v. Plut. in Domostli. p. 852. I. 14.
Meyct or G^ikpov ridrint or ridefxai. Flap' vvbey TiOeaQai, to reckon of
no importance, to disregard : (with an infinitive in Pint. Demosth. j).
332. I. 43.) Trnpa ttoXv, the contrary. So tj' olberos f^epet, or t*'
oi/5e>'t Xoyu), or VTTU Xoyu), riOeffOni : and rjys Tpay(i)bias Trotjjras ovbe t:v
Xoyw TtOrjcnv, docs not even reckon them as anything ; makes no ac-
count at all oflhcm: Aristi(i. Or. ad Ciipit. p. 550. ds evep-
yeuius TiOet'ai fjepos, to reckon as a henejit : Id. pro Quat. p.
326'. els \6yoi' TiOerni, ib. p. 345. And riOeyai in this sense is some-
times used eiliptically, as fjii) ris amou — Ttdeit] tuiv orpnrjjyaJj', lest
any one should reckon him among the generals : Ibid. p. 251. 'Ev
KnXo), h' iua-^p(^, TiOerrdai, to esteem honorable or disgraceful : tu
(Tnoubrj TiOerrOctt, to account deserving of serious attention or solici-
tude ; ev abiKiij.iaTi TideaOai, to regard or consider as a wrottg or
injury: Time, i, 35. e^ iaov ^tv eywy' ovbeiTOT ay Geiqv A.ia-)^^ivr]v
TlXarwi'i, I ti'ould never put jEschines on a level with Plato : i. e. /
would never reckon them equal: Aristid. }mo Quat. And in the
.s;imc sense Ik napaXXi'jXov TiOeyai, Alhen. Deipn. penidt. p. 647.
In tiie foilowinji; passages also TiOeiai may be translated to account,
to esteem : to be fxiiTe â– KciXni tovto irerrovdeyai, necprjyerat re riya ///jTi'
avjijj.n'^lay, — Tfji Trap eKeivMV (the gods) evvolas evepyerr^f^C ay eyojye
deiriv : Demosth. Ol. i. to iroXXit avroXwXe'cei'at — r»/i //^ertyjas u/ie-
Xelns {epynv, viz. or the like) av tis delt) biKalu)s : Ibid.
VII. (IX.) A circumlocution consisting of TiOerai, a preposition,
and its case, is often employed instead of some one verb; as,
ridevat els fivl]fxr]v for nejjivriaQai, to remember ; els opyijy, for vpyi-
$.e(jQai, to resent: aW ov riOerai ravrn Trap' vjjuy els nkpifli'}
fiyijfxriv, ovb\ i]y Tzpoa^iKey, vpyi'jy : Demosth. pro Cor. \\\\\\. TiOeaOat
e'is ri, of a person, is sometimes, to be destined or appointed to some-
thing: see KelaOai, Sect. viii. R. 2.] e^(o Xoyov ridefiat <I>wu'wi'o,
/except Phocion: Plut. in Demostli. p. 852. irpus koXov riQeadai,
to approve ; avru kuXov riOeadai, to disapprove. Trpus olwvov riOeaOai,
for ouui iiierTOni, Athen. Deipn. i. p. 13.
VIII. (XI.) TiOeaOai ra oVXa, is — 1. to stand armed: OerrOe tU
vrrXa ev rul^ei ws ru-^tara, Xen. Anab. vii, p. 3y5. t(ivs aXXovs eKe~
Xevrre Tfivra Trapeyyvcjy, Kat TiOerrOai ret oTrXa, alios (duces) jubcbat
eadem ad snos cohort atione uti, ac riilites ordinare :^ Xen. ib.
hve'iirey !> Ktipvl,, ei ris ftovXerni Ivi^tiin-^ely, riOeTOai wap' avruvs ra uirXa,
quits se rangeassent avec eux en amies: 'J'huc. ii, 2. avy abrols
UTrXtSeaOai, Schol.
IX. (XII.) — 2. to encamp, to fortify a camp: Oe/ievot be irXrjaioy
y In this place, I believe, as in Xen. abstain /mm mini^ them: ttj ^d\ayyi
An;il). i, 5, 14. it nif.ins, <» stdiirf in arjHS 5i6(T7rap,ueVj; Trepi Tyv Sloi^tv &Opovs (ire-
trilli the men under their cummdud. In \d(Tas, i)va.yKaaf ra SnXa BtcrGai, koL
the following p!i9sai;e, nnil also in Xen. \a&iivras'6piiovs ainw (Tvarpartvuv: Plut.
Anab. i, .'i, 1.'}. tu liirXa PiVOai i-^ /o in lliinicii. p. KXiU. I. 'i. cd. II. Si. —
stand peaceably tutder arms, to desist or J. S.
Rule 6 — 12.] Tvyxf'iyeiy. 103
uvru)i' Tu uTtKn, hav'nig measured or marked out a camp: Dioiiys.
IJal. V. p. 311. So Time, ii, 2.' oXiyov (TTlcpos, els opovs k(Ji>v<^)tii>
Ttra (tt'abpcifjvr, Kal Qefxeiof etTuvtia tu oVXa, (a7ld having fortijicd
a camp there,) Tt)y enuwcav rvKva bienere : Dioiivs. Hal. viii, 349.
V. 'J'hiic. iv. p. 2S2. viii. p. (v20.
X. (XIII.) — 3. to besiege, to sit down before a place : npus hIti)^
Ti)t> ituXit' Twi' Mt\T]aiu)]', tcparavt'Tes r'ibq, tu <'nrXa TiOei'TUi : Time.
VIII, 25. -Kepi fA€pos Tov Tel-)^oys to. uirXn kut aO taOai KcXevaas,
Heiiod. IE\h. vii, 1. v. licrodut. i. c. 62.
XI. (XIV.) KaTaTtdeadat kXcos, bu^ay, and tlie like, to acquire:
Tipi)i' or irjj^iluy, to pa}/ a fine ; y_aptTus or \apiy rol, to please, to
gratijy ei person ; els or npus Ttra T))y X'-'l'^^ '" '^'Z*' ^I'epyeaiav, to
conjer a favor or obligation on one; 6pyi)v es rtva, to vent one's
anger against a person: Xcii. anovbip' npus Tiva, to be zealous for
him, to interest and exert one's self in his behalf.
XII. (XV.) Tvyxaveir, to chance, to happen, is construed with
a partieiple; as, ecpij T-uj^etr rare eojv t'tf^a ^Tj/inpijTu), he said that
he happened at that time to be icith Demarctns: ILrodot. viii.
eruyi^/d OjUfj' TrepnruTuvt'res, ive happened to be walking: Cel». Tab.
Sometimes the eonstriRtion is reversed, the partieiple being that of
Tvyyjireiy ; ijtTrep rvyxaywy inreaxvjxify, i. e. i'lvirep uTToo-j^d^/ejos Tvy-
Xuru," Sopli. (Ed. C. 14yo. V. Eustath. ad II. b, )>. 505. and Keen,
iid Grej;. Cor. }>. 35. Sometimes, but rarely, ri/yj^/owj- is joined with
another partieiple ; as in Aristot. poet, i, J.
Willi various particles ; as, el ovrws ervxey, it maij be, may be, pcr-
- See Wessel. ad Diod. S. xii, Cfi.
sx, 31. Add, SeTvai Aelnu, to viaLe ov
reuitir smooth : Aristopli. Pac. 1080. ri-
6(vai vSSa, to journey, to travel: Aristopli.
Tliesm. 1 100. riflfVoi vuixov, to make a lnw
for others ; rideaOai vo/xov^ to mnlce a law
which hi)iiis one's silf: Xen. i\Ieiii. iv,
4, 19. ade-uv, witlia Anlive , to disl/cliece,
to diicrciiit : I'olyb. xii, 6. with an accusa-
tive, /() violate: Pi>l_)'b. xv, 17. irpoaava-
TiOivai, to ascribe, to attribute : ^iisop.
Fab. 82. Geiiev. IG'28. diadtadat \6yovs,
to pronmince, to deiicer, to utter : Diog.
L. in Socr. p. 57. I. 28. and in Zen. p.
240. 1. 1. ed. II. St. form. min. ^ktI-
BeaOai, to describe, to set forth: Diog.
L. PioQura. p. 3. f-KiTiOeaBaifto set !//>««,
to attack, v\itb eVl and an accusative :
Polj^b. ix, 7. & 6' virta'Xfo, ttoi icara-
B'ficrets; but what trill become of your
promises? Soph. CEd. (;. 227. kuto-
OeirBai Ov.ahv, to put off', lay aside, or
resign, indii^natioti : Aristopli. \'esp. .5(>7.
â– naparideaOai, to ijuote as authority: "Ep-
finnroy naparideixevos, Diog. L. in jMy-
son. p. 40. 1. 28. napaOeaOai -rovs
7ra75as owry Pov\<^/j.€vos koi tuv oIkov, to
commit them to his care: I'lut. in Cat.
Utic. ]). 1401. 1. I'.), ed. II. St. avTi-
irapaTidsyaif to set aifainsl in an account,
to reckon for a coiinfcrimise : iMenand.
Fiagm. irpoTideaOai, to set forth, to re-
present : Poljb. ii, 19. to arrive at a con-
elusion or conviction : Polyb. x, 34. to lay
out a corpse in a public part of a house,
ready for burial: Aristojili. Lys. Gil.
Demosili. adv. Macart. p. 1071. 1. I. ed.
Reisk. ffvvTidevat, to judge, to collect,
to infer : Polyb. E. L. 81. ffvuTiOfaOai,
to o-ii-g chiiriie of, to commit or intrust :
Polyb. V, 10. PI L. G7. fvauveerelv, to
observe compucls faithfully : Polyb. E. L.
35. virepOeadai, to surpass : Polyb. ii,G3.
XV, 4. See Pint. INIural. t. ii. p. 308. I.
15. ed. Wytlenl). Svo. Inau viroQy rts
virh rhy 0(p6aKp.hv, Svo (paiueTai, {si sub
oculo pres^eris rem objectam, geminari
videbis: Gaza.) if you press an object
under the eye, you trill see it doubled :
Aristot. Prolii. Sect. iii. qii. 20. viroQia--
Gai, to pledge: Pint, in Cat. Itic. p. 1398.
I. 23. ed. II. St. to suggest, to advise:
Aristoph. Av. 13G2. Eccl. 1154. vpo-
vrroTiOeaOai, to promise: Longin. sect, i,
—J. S.
" Porson differs from Hermann here,
taking Tvyxdvuiy to mean, if I obtained
trhal tasked. " Sensus at, qnam promisi,
si ipse a Theseo id quod pelerem conse-
querer :" says he. — J. S.
]0t Twyx"'f"'- [Chap, v.
haps: Aristot. Et!t. iii, c. 8. ft rvyot, if it should so happen, if it
had so happened. cJ ovrio tvxoi, suppose for example, say for
instance: .Eschin, c. Ctcs. p. 280. I. 14. [p. 432. I. 7- <?«'• Heisk.]
and so ei tv-)^ui without ovrw : Scliol. Arislopl). ad Av. lOGp. '^Av
Tv\^], perhaps : aipobpu ye i]iO)}ne rtiTs kXnimy, av tv-^ij ' Deiiioslli.
Ol. ii. p. 21, 3. Reisk. /j.)) oKiei auj-nrepiipefjeaQai avru, (>«»' ovru) riiyi]
(TVP€7ri(7T£ya^ai, and if need be: Epiclet. c. 22. >/)'<\a ?t»' ri/x'?> when
occasion requires: Demos,th. Ol. i. t/^w he vXtyov vcrTepov, kay Tvyw,
if chance permit, perchance : Plat. Tlieag. p. 129- '• 17'
XIII. (X\ I.) Willi o 71 illid ay : uray fjer Troiuimi' o Ti au ~^XV
ei;a/TTos, Tapax>l ris <paii'€Tai : wheJi they do not act in concert, but
each docs separately whatever chance may direct : Xeii. CEc. viii, 3.
Will) ciu, oTtdv, onr], and hv or tcai : ov^ ottuv ctj/ tv\oi, not every ivhere
indiscriminately . And witli okov alone : oirov erv^ey eKntjTov Kara-
ftejiXtj-ai, any ivhere, at random : Xen, GLc. iii, 3. So oV?j ical rv^y].
"Ottt] tv^oi-, tvherever he chanced to come: Arr. Exp. Al. vi, 4. and
ov '. (IV rvxni rTji TroXews a\vu)v, wandering about the city wherever
chance might lead him: Atlicn. Deipn. v. p. 1.03. ex Polyb. With
vnodey : owoOfy ay rvx]], oTTuQev eTvy^ev: Jrom all quarters loithout
distinction ; from tvhatever place it might chance: Scylax in Peripl.
And w$ : ws ervx^, at random, at hazard, just as it happened, neg-
ligently: JE\. V. IJ. xiii, 19. xii. extr.
XIV. (XVII.) Tvyx^'n ety is often used in speaking of what is
ordinary or trivial, what may be met with any where or at any time :
(j'l Tv^oyrfs (irOpiDTToi, low mean fuen : Deniosth. de Fals. Le<». p. 415.
vvu Tuiv TV)(6yTU}y aipeOeyres, elected by the common people: Xen.
Mem. iii, 9, 10. i,v\a to. Tv^ovra, such as may easily be met with any
where: lb. i, I, 14. ^ikpnl khI 01 rv^oyres (pojjui, trifling alarms
and of evcry-day occurrence: Lyciirg. p. 164. [ed. Heisk.] Hence
the signification of small : Kay to rv^oy fitjffpijrat, if ever so little be
carried in : Polyb. iv, 20. [if ever so little mud be carried by the
rivers into the Pontus and Pains M(eotis. — J. S.] cube ruy Tv^inra
â– ^povov, not even a short time: Pol\i). i, 70.
XV. (XVIII.) 'Tvyx'ii'eiv signifies to get, whether good or evil,
with a genitive; as, 7vyx*«''f'»' '"'»''' TrporDji-oyrwy, to get one's deserts :
Isocr. in Evag. p. 389- rvyxnyety rwy tiKaltxiy, to get one's rights ;
Tvyxuteiy rif.nopius, to meet with punishment : Plato in (jorg. Some-
times without any case ; as, ei be fn) Tvyx'c]], but if she obtain not
justice or redress : Dion. Hal. iii. p. 138. I. 21. Tvyyarety, signify-
ing to hit the mark, to hit, is joined with an accusative in Horn. II.
e, 582. And in Filurip. Here. F. 57. where it signifies to meet with,
to incur, a genitive is put after if, and afterwards an accusative
instead of another gen. in apposition with the first.*
Erfurdt on Soph. Aj. 9- b'ls shown, in opposition to Porson, who
follows Phrynichus, that Tvyxhreiy, without a participle of cirai added
to if, is put for elvai by good authors.
* The construction of rvyx'^vtiv with been in the tliouglits of the writer. —
fin accusiilive may l)e accoiinti.'d for by J. S.
supposing \ayx<!^viiVf or the like, to have
§ xii. Rule 1 — 3.] 'Y(ipiiu>, 'Y7r«f)xw. 105
XVI. (XIX.) 'VLinTvyyJniiv, without government, is to conjecture
successJ'uUtj : I'lul. in rtrid. 155. a.*
SECTION XII. — Op the verbs v(ipi^w, vTrapx(o, vTToareWo/xai.
Rui-E I. 'Yftpiieti' is — 1. to be too much elated by good fortune :
to be proud and insolent on account of prosperity : M.\. V. H. viii,
15. Aristoph. Pint. 564. — 2. to indulge in the vices commonly bred
or fostered by plenty and luxury ; -ds fierceness, petulance, violation
oj chastity, contumely, injuriousness, mockery, ridicule, &c. which
are all denoted by the word v/3p<s : see IE\. V. H. i. c. I9. — 3.
'Tf3pt$ea6ai in the passive has sometimes tlie preposition els after it
governing an accusative of that as to which the action of tlie verb
is suffered ; as, vlDpi$ofxevovs els -n-alhas kcu yvyalKos, being injured
as to the chastity of their children and ivives ; having their children
and ivives violated: Dem. de feed. Alex. p. 87. 1. 18. v. not. ad
Lucian. t. iii. p. 580. Kust. ad Aristoph. Pint. 900, Markl. ad
Lys. p. 17. and 149. ed. Reisk. — 4. A thing is sometimes said v^pi-
ieaOai, which is subjected to the wantonness of luxury ; in Xen.
Cyrop. ii. p. 56. a plain garment, not gaudy with purple, gold, and
the like, is said to be ovhey ri Iftpiajievri ; whence to. vfjpia/xeya is
interpreted to ayai/ TroXvTeXrt : JE\. V. H. i, 31.''
'Ynupxo is sometimes, to begin, to be the first, either in a good or
bad sense, and is put — 1. without any case; as, ~niwpe'iaQai tov
vnap^avra, Demoslh. in Neaer. p. 519. !• 30. 'A/uvveadai also is
opposed to it when thus used in a bad sense : Aristid. pro Quaf.
p. '259- Thuc. ii. and avrevTroie'ip and dtreuepyereTj', when it is used
in a good sense.
II. — 2. with els or npos governing an accusative of the person, and
with a genitive of the thing: uy es Kvpov vi:i)plav, Arr, Exp. Al.
iii, 27. XP^'"^ Tiros viruplni kq\ (piXardpwnlas Trpos avror, Plut. Pomp.
— 3. witli a genitive of the thing, and a dative of the person : ol
vnijp^av rijs eXevQepias cnraar} rrj 'E,\Xdbi, Andocid. p. J], Reisk.
— 4. with one accusative of the thing, and another of the person,
governed by els or tt/jos : bik tus evepyeaias, as virfip'^ai' els vftds, De-
niosth. de Fals. Leg.
III. — 5. with an accusative of the thing and a dative of the per-
son : ras evepyetjias as v/^iels vTrljp^aTe ^Afivvrr^, yEschin. de Fals. Leg.
— 6. witli a participle of benefiting or injuring: vfids olbey irwirore
'' To succeed, to ansver: u imrvyxd- fortunate or ivrelched in, Eurip. Bacch.
— , if the plan should answer, should 508. SieuTux*'"? '" ^<? perpetually fortu-
ouvveed : Lucian, de Merc, coiul. p. 405. nute, Menatider, Fragm. — J. S.
a. ed. Salniur. Add avriTvyxdvew, to " Add, vfipi^eaOui, med. without go-
get in return, with a gcniiivc, Theogn. .verniiient : to groie irai)tt>n and injurious :
642. avvTvyxO'Vtiv, with a genitive : Aristoph. Ecci. (JOO. also KaQv^pi^eiv
Sophocl, Phil. 320. xrKorvyxO'Viit', to without govcrniiK.'nt, Soph. (Ed. C 1535.
reply, to answer, Plut. in Ages. p. 1121. — J, S.
1. 8. ed. II. St. 4vSv(Trvxf^t', to be un-
vono
a
Viger. o
106
'YnooTeWofxai
[Chap. v.
vnrjplnfiEv kokuis Troiovrres, Xoii. Anab. v. [5, 7-] A.11 that has been
said of inrap-^uj applies tqually to 7rpoii7rn|Oj(w.
IV. 'TTrapxeti' with a dative, signifies, io favor, to be on the side
of: brjXus ka-iv — k'oO' Vfiibv vTtaplwp ei.e/j'w, Deiiiosth. de Fals. Leg.
viraplei vfjJy »'/ fytn) rroXn, Xen. Aiiab. V. It is also |)ut for eJvcii, and
that too wiU) a genitive case after it: ^vaews dyu0»7s vnapt,in, Xen.
Mem.
V. 'YTTfipj^en' sometimes signifies, to he permitted, to be possible, to
be in the poiver of, to be necessary : tov (rrpcirui' })iufu7rciv(Tai cv;^
vTriip^e, it ivas not permitted, or practicable : Pint, rovs veKpovs —
Siu Tuxovs edaiTTor, wmrep vrrfipy^e, as well as circumstances allourd,
as ivell as they could: 'iluic. And with a dative: vvupyjEi rij
4'vxji evbcdfioi'i eh at, it is in the poiver <f, &c. Pluto Plijcd. c. 29.
VTT\]pyiv nvTw */ (pevyeiy )*/ Tedictrai, he would have had no other alter-
native than exile or death: iEscln'n. c. Cles. p. 273. 1. 20".
VI. 'T7ro(7reX/\o/(fxt signifies usuall}' — 1. to fear or dread: Tijs
povXfjs — T>)v Arjfir'ibov huvafxiv VTroareiXcifiei'i^s, Dinarch. p. 93. 1- 53. —
2. to humble or submit one's self ; to crouch : ev\aftt)s Cjv un-effreX-
Aero, Philo.''
VII. — 3. io remit or relax someiohat of one's full force or poiver ;
to suppress or soften something of what one could say : olbey viroarei-
X((/j€ros /jcWio -KoieiaOuL rovi Xoyous, Isocr. de I'aee. ws Trpos Trenpa-
KOTcts eavToirs Ka\ avocnwrarovs ui'dpi)Trovs, /ui]b€f vTroireiXufiet'ov : De-
niostli. de Fals. Leg. fxrihkv virouTetXafxeru irpis vftpir, Denioslh. in
RJid. having proceeded to the extremity of outrage. inrorrTelXacrdaL
Trepl uii' vfxiv av/jfei)eiv yyov/jai, Demosth. 01. i. In this sense a
freaclierous advocate is said Ino/TTeXXeadni.
VIII. It is sometimes followed by a partitive genitive; as, vtto-
areXXeadat rris itappijnias, to remit in some degree one's freedom of
speech or boldness: Ttjs Tpo(piis vTroariXXeadai, to subtract from one's
food: Aristot. in Problem.
'YnoartXXeaOai sometimes signifies, to be inferior: ray Y'loy vno-
GTeXXeerOui rov Ylarpos, Grig. Naz. Sometimes, to be deprived of
part of : Io be shortened of: vTroffreXXeaOai Twy UyaOiLv, Aristot."^
"* Tliis sense, says Hermann, is derived
from tliat of the active {nro<TT(K\(iy,
wliicli is properljr a nauiical term, to lei
down or furl the sails of a vessel: see
Ilennaiin. ad Kurip. Ilec. p. IG5. vno-
(TTeWfiv in I'olvl)- and Plat, is, to go un-
der ; inrh rr)V Trapujpelav viroaniKavTiS,
Polyb. iv, 12. virffrrdXicetaav inrh rhy
\6<pnv, Pol^'b. X, 29. inr((Tret\€ ro7s
oxvpowaTois Tou Taipou, Pint. Demctr. p.
1071. I. 7. ed. II. St. Hence figura-
tively, 'lipwv vTrocrrfi\as e avrh y vnb
rijv 'Pci<fj.aictiy (tk(tt7jv— aSecos (Paa'iAtve,
Polyh. i, IG. and the sense of the mede
verb noticed by Viger in tlie text. See
Diog. L. in Xenocr. p. 141. 1. 18. ed. H.
St.— J. S.
' I'iie primary sense of the simple verb
ffTeWca, as Iloogeveen remaiks, is, to Jit
or adapt to antj purpose, to furnish oul, to
equip. The following senses of some of
its derivatives and compounds may t)e
remarked: ffvaroXiaat, Kurip. Or. 1J33.
Pors. ffv^^a^at, Scliol. auaaTeWecrdai,
to gird up, 7\ristopli. Eccl. 208. (o dis-
semble ; to conceal one's disposition,
Polyb. E. Peir. p. 27. ed. Krn. Sta-
arfWeiv Trphs, to differ with ; to be at
variance with ; not to concur icith : Po-
lyb. E. L. 9. SiaariWeiv, to /oi/.st'", Pint,
in Anton, p. 17J1. 1. 3. ed. II. St.
iKffTfWetu, to adorn, to decorate, Sopli.
(Ed. 11. 12C9. KaTaareWfiv, Io put in
place, to re-adJust, Kuriji. liacch. 931. to
inwrap, to cover, to shelter, to protect,
Eurip. Ijdi. A. 931. to accoutre, Ari-
§ xiii. UuLIi I — S.] ^►(u'j'oyndi, tte'pw. 10?
SECTION XIII. — On the verbs (paivo^ai and ^epw.
Rule I. ^alvofxai lias often a signification of certainty and reality
rather than of mere appearance : ebei TovTdJv Tiia KwXvriif <i>avfii'ui,
Denioslh. pro Cor. ovk uttkjtwv v/uly, i6s yi /.loi (pairerai. Id. ih.
\6yos (paa'd/ueyos, clear, evident: Polyb. xvij, 1. Frequently with a
participle; hs, 0n/icrfu inroOupwr, he died as we find : Plato Fh«(l.
[p. 2'2. 1. 19. e(l. Bas. 1.] adatuTuv ye // i/'i'X'/ <paiyeTai oixja. Id. lb.
c. 63. See also Deniohlh. de fals. Leg. p. 378. and in Epist. p.
14-7(). ed. Reisk. In this sense it resembles elerciceaOn*, to be mani-
festly found ; to be found by unquestionable evidence or proofs.
II. Tct lepa are said (paireaOai, when they afl'ord favourable pre-
sages : Pint, in Aristid. p. 329. ^^
III. (l>e^e(j' is sometimes, <o co?iferw, /o import, to he of consequence
or moment : /itya y/tp n (pepeiv oU'ifjeOa Kai bkov eh iroXiTeiay, for we
think it of great importance, or rather, all in all to the state:
Plato de Rep. v. Trcara tu irpus evbui/jLOiiuv fipoyra, Plato, con-
ducing to.
IV. XaXeTTws 0epejv is, to be troubled, vexed, grieved, chagrined:
eTTi TOVTOis — xaXeTTo/s ecpepov, Plut. Pomp. j^aXeTrws (pepo) rots napovat
irpi'iyjxutnv, Xen. Anab. i. j^oXcTrais 'ic^epov rw iroXe/j^, Xen. H.
Gr. V.
V. (VI.) The imperative (pipe is used in the singular as a particle,
whU all persons of both numbers, and wilh the subjunctive, impera-
tive, and in interrogations with the indicative, moods ; signifying, well,
come, now then, tvell then, pray, ttllme now, &c. as, (pip 'ibto tI Kal
Trpn^eis /je, Lucian, Vil. Auct. (pepe hi) Tre.pi rov \//;)<^/(Tjuuros eVTrw, De-
mosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 414. <j>epe, el aol botcel, — yei'iltfueda aa)ri}pes :
^1. V. H. i, 30. ^epe b)) yvy, el kOKoy eai.iev, ri yctfie'td' i//ias ; Ari-
stoph. Thesm. 79'5' [788.] (pipe yap, el(jiy ijiiiv (pvaeis iTnruiv dyaQwv ;
iEschin. Socr. i, 10.
VI. (VII.) ^epe, followed by an infinitive, is, suppose, put the
case; as, (pepe eK\e~i\pai tu ovo^a T/ to pij/ja, Apollon. Alex, i, 3.
(pepe trXeioyas tios aypuv exiKpare'iy, Id. i, 30. ^epe elize'iy is used for
oiov, for instance, for example, so to speak ; as, iihe >/ yrd/xr] nuyTujy
iipa tG)v ^iXoa6(p(>)v eerri, (pipe elnelu, tov nAar&oos ey K.p(t-vXa>. els
era ay/iynvai, (pipe eiTre'iv tov Met '. Porphyr. laud, a Steph. in Thes.
[t. iv. 82. e.] And with Cjy. Cjs (pipe elwely, Nazianz. ib. so to speak.
VII. (VIII.) The same words (pipe etn-eTi' are used in anticipating
an objection ; as, (pipe elnely, nXXa V7repii'j(p(tr6s elfii : but you will
perhaps say that / c/n haughty: Dionys. Hal. Arch, iv, 36.
VIII. (IX.) Even singly fipe sometimes iwcaws, for instance ; as,
icat vovs, o (ppoy{]ae(i)S o(\etoj, acppaiyei ttoXXukis kutu. ti CTi/yu/3e/3/jKos,
TrapaTpaneis ey vrrepfiaXXovaais, (pipe, (tw/uutos oppwcrr/ais : and even
slopb. Thesm. 2')(>. irepiffriWeiv, to lo cherish, Demosth. in Timocr. p. 744.
palliule, to exttnuale, Pol^b. E. L. 93. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. — J. S.
108
^ipu.
[Chap. v. § xiv.
the mind itself, ivhich is nalurally allied to sense, often grotcs foolish
from some accidental cause, being unhinged, for instance, by ex-
tremity of bodily distases: Euseb. Priep. vi. p. 247- b. Sometimes
oio»' is joiiieil with il : ttoWcis — eu/Wfiev vTruOijKus' oloi> (pipe, €V)(>/s —
Trepi : as for example : Clem. Alex. Fctd, iii. p. 26"0.
ovs.
^epeiv signities also to ravage, to spoil: efepoi' yap aWijX
Time, i, 7.
IX. (X.) The passive ^epecrOat with euor kmXws is to beprosperous
or successful ; with KctKwi tiie contrary ; as, ev (pepop.evos eu orparjj-
ylais, Thuc. KdKws ^epo^ieiw rw Ntic/^, to Nicias goifig on very
badly or unsuccessfully : Pint, in Alcib. yvoi/s — Ttao-a^epv/ji' aWtoj'
eJyai tov KaK^s (pepe.ffdniTu avTov, having discovered that Tissaphernes
was the cause of his affairs being in a bad state: Xen. H. Gr. iii.
p. 501.
OfpetrOcu often governs an accusative ; as, (pepeaOai bolav, rtnijy,
&c. to acquire. 'l^epeaOai tci Trpu>Ta, to be highest in rank or office:
Pans. Ach. p. 415.-^
SECTION XIV.— Of the verbs (pddreiv, ipveiv,yaipeiv, xP"<T0ai,
yujpEiv, tiyywp^'iv.
Rule I. $9aj'w has always a signification of anticipation, of doing
or suffering something beforehand, or of celerity or ease : v. Horn.
II. t, 503. It is commonly joined with a participle in ))lace of aa
/ Add, (pepiiv, to elect, to create: Uv
Xopyyyhv, ^ yv/xi^aaiapxoi', ^ kariaTopa, ^
&\\o Ti Twu aWcci/ (pfpaxTi: Demoslh. ia
Boeot, de Norn. p. 990. I. 24. ed. Reisk.
(pepeiv, neuter, Soph. (Ed. C. 1G9I.
eKaTTuv (pfpeadat, to have less credit, po-
pularity, esteem, &c. Plut. in Pomp. p.
1152. I. 13. ed. H. St. aua(p4puv, to
produce: Plut. in Gracch. p. 1523.1.4.
to end in, to tend to, Plut. Moral, sect.
808. b. ed. Wyttenb. aua<bepe(Tdai is said
of a writing which is in the hands of the
public: Plut. in Ages. p. 1102. 1. 4. but
if the true reading in that passage be aua-
<pep€Tai yovv i-KUSiiKiov avr^, (instead of
aiiTov, tlie present reading,) ava'pipirat
may be Iranslatetl, is ascribed or uttri-
buled. a.TTo<^piiv, a forensic term, to ex-
hibit, to put in : Dcmosth. adv. Callicl.
p. 1280. 1. 19. ed. Reisk. (On BM(pepeiv
see the note on C. v. ^ t. R. 9.) dia-
(popuv, to Itar in pieces: Aristopli. Va\.
294. crwhiatpfpiiv, to transact or conduct
in conjunction with others : Arisloph. I'tj.
.597. to hear or undergo with another :
Plut. Ap. ct Cleom. p. 1509. 1. 17. ed.
H. St. Id. in Brut. p. 1810. I. 10. to
keep (as a secret) in concert with one
another, Plut. in Brut. p. 1809. I. 17.
(Ia(p(p(a0ai, to draw into itse(/', into its
stream, (said of a river,) Horn. II. A, 495.
eK<pipeii', to produce, to bring forth : Eu-
rip. And rum. f)22. iK<pepiiv rhv ndXeixov,
to commence hostilities, to begin ojfcnsli'e
icarfare : Liban. argum. or. Demosth.
irepl (Tvnjxop. — iK<pfpeiy intra:isitiveiy, to
get the start, to be foremost : Horn. 11. \p,
759. cf. 376. fKcpopf'if rhv jxiaOhv ij/xuiu,
to carry off", to bear away : Aristoph.
Vesp. 1118. eK<pepofxvQi'i(TQai, to be di-
vulged : yEneas Poliorc. c. 22. iij.<p4-
peadai, to be in, to be inherent iti : Longin.
§ X. v. Toup. fTTKpipeiv, to repartee:
Aristoph. Eq. 837. KaTa<pfpeiv, to demo-
lish : Polyb. iv, 65. Karacpepeiv avrov
TToWa, to utter against : Plut. Moral, t. i.
p. 253. ed. Wytlenb. 8vo. KaracpepfaOai,
with a genitive, to rush upon, to attack:
Eustath. p. 91. 1. 19. p. 100. I. 10. Trapa-
<pope1v, to bring: Aristopli. Av. 839. ire-
pi(pipnv, to transfer: Plut. Rlor. t. ii. p.
303. 1. 13. ffuij,iTept(pepe(T9at, with a da-
tive, to be Will (icquaiutcd icilh: Polyb,
ix, 14. to treat of or handle rightly: Id.
iii, 10. (jvix(p(piiv, to agree tcith, to tally
with: Aristoph. Ecj. 1233. viropfptcrQai,
to decline, to wane : Longin. § ix. v. Touj).
vnofptpeaOat rourots, to be guided by these
persons: Plut. Mor. t. iii. p. 445. 1. 3. —
J. S.
Rule 1—4] ^Ocivw. 109
iotinitive ; as, /u»} 'ii^Oriaav nepibvcrayres avrut', they did not strip him
before thei/ Itjl him through jeur: Antiplio p. 6"3I. [I. 20. ed.
Reisk.] t<pduKeyai ubiKovi^res, to have been the aggressors, to have
committed an injur// the first: Demostli. pro Cor. p. 23y. (pdupwai
b' trr' ai/rc't /cara^euyoj'res rw Aoyw — o'l tu'h epyois TrXeiarov UTrevoj/res :
thcj/ readily fiy to them, [tU koivo. kuI <pi\ar6p(u7ra tUv ovoiiutwv^ or
take refuge in them: iEbcliin. in Ctes. p. 63^. [ed. Reisk.] The
coinpoimd virocpdayio is construed in the same maimer. — Tlie participle
(pdaaas is found joined with another pariicij)le : (^duaas uvtos r/)f
YlepKaXov apTTiKTas, Herodot. vi, b5J
II. (IV.) Sometimes (pQuvio and the participle joined with it are
preceded by ovk, and followed by kui ; as, ovk ecpdn/jev eh TpoiCrjt'a
eXOocres, kcu toiuvtcus voaois i:\)t(pQrfixf.v : no sooner had we arrived at
Troczen, than ive were seized with such disorders: Isucr. in iEjiin.
V. Isocr. Paneg. p. 113. b. Demosth. adv. Macart. p. 1073. [ed.
Reisk.] and Lucian in Dial. Menipp. et Tant. [p. 265.0. ed. Salm.]*
Sometimes instead of ovk some other particle precedes ; as, Kai
fiuXts (f>da)et, Qp6toi(7ii> efiTreaovaa, ;u?) ^af.ial Treaelr, Kai ris yepaih —
avujXoXv^e : Eurip. Med. Il6'9. v. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. p. 20/.
sq. Musgr. et Heath, ad Suppl. 1218.
Sometimes the participle joined with (pOaru) is followed by y signi-
fying before, with an infinitive ; as, (pQairjre yap hv ttoXXukis aibpaTro-
btadetres i] Tiva Trvdeadat iifiewy, for you would be made slaves over
and over again before any of us could hear of it: Ht-rodot. Er. c.
108. avyrldevTui (pQuaui ri bpaaavTes ») Trade'iv, they agreed to be
bejorehand in doing something ere they were overpowered : Ilero-
dian i, 17, i6J
II!. With an infinitive it usually signifies, to be able: oh yap
^dupei Trpotrayaftaifeiv 6 Xoyos, cannot ascend: Piiilo de Legat. ad
Cainm.
It governs an accusative of what is left behind, or not waited for :
(pQuuHs -6y Xoytrr/joy, Demosth. adv. Mid. p. 526'. [See another ex-
ample in note g.] (fiduyei be re kcu tuv uyovTa, gets before: Horn. II.
xxi, 26" 1.
IV. (V.) The optative of (pQuveiv with ovk and av appears to be
sometimes employed to signify the certainty of son)e future event;
as, OVK tiv (pduvot rf/s KUKuvpyias riaiv a-KOTivwv, he will not escape
punishment for his transgression. -^ The same form may frequently
s By a reverse of construction the par- vuv signifies to get to a place before
ticijile of (bdduw itself is often joined with anoihtv person, it is followed liy ^ without
some other verb, the sense remaining the an infinitive : i^pQiis in^hs iwv 1) eya aw
same; as, avtcc^ds, fie (pddaas: you opened vrjt fMeXaimj ; liare you got hither sooner
be/ore I could knock: Aristoph. I'lut. 1102. by land than 1 by seaJ — J. S.
— J. S. J He tclll quickly be punished, &c. I
'* oi) yap €cp0rj ju.oi (Tvp-^ciaa. r] arvx'^ct, believe that all the passages in which
Kai eiiOiis — rovTuu Ttvis — e7r€X«^P']<'^«'' Sia- (pOdueiv occurs, rnay be ex])lained by its
(popTJcai T&fdodev : Demosth. adv. Eubu- primary meaning of anticipation or ce-
lid. 1319, 9. Reisk. scarcely had the mis- lerity : thus, when in Eurip. (IIeracl.720.)
fortune happened to me, when, &:c. See tlie servant says to lolaus, '6ir\u>v /liv ijSrj
Aristoph. JN'ub. 1381. — J. S. t^ji^S' opas -navnvx^o-v. tpQdvois 6' h,v ova
' In Horn. Od. A, 58. where <pQd- tiy To'ijdi avyKpiirTwv Se'^iay, he means to
no
4>i.
X
ueiy, Aa^pctv.
[Chap, v, § xiv.
be renclered, forlhivtth, instantlij ; as, ovk ar (pOdvois X^ywy, tell me
immediatelij : Xpm. iMeni. ii, 3, 11. ovk liv (pOaroire aKoXovdovires,
follow me instantly : Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 1. where Ernesti observes
that this sense results from the priiuarv one of anticipation ; because
he wlio wishes to be before another must necessarily use speed. See
also Deniosth. adv. Timocr. p. 745. [I. 4. ed, Reisk.] etadv. Aristog.
p, 783. [p. 782. 1. l6'. ed. Ileisk.] Plato Syrap, c. 11. Phsed.
c. 49.
^veiv sometimes signifies to have naturally, to possess from nature ;
as Herodotus says of the crocodile, y\Coaaav be /jovroy dijpiiiJv ovk
eipvcre, ii, 68. So (pperas <pveir, Soph. El. 14()3. QL<\. C. 804.
The preterperf. vecjiVKeyai signifies elegantly, to be constituted, gifted,
qualijied, adapted, inclined, by nature; as, ovno ravra â– ne(i>vKe, De-
niosth. irkfvKe yap »'/ Avniov Ae^is e'x^'^ '"'' X"^"'^''» '' ^ 'laoicpaTovs
jSpvXeTfii: for the diction of Lysias is naturally graceful; that of
Isocrates affects to be so: Dionys. Hal. de Ant. Or. uWo Trpus
&\\o tretpvuey, Epict. Ench. c. 30. ire<pvt:e fxiaeiv, Plato Phoed. p.
80. 1. 5. Tre'^uKfi ijyef^toreveiy. Trt^uce yap Trpos rovro ndv $uior, ret
/3Aa/3epa tpevyeiy: Epict. Ench. c. 33.
Xaipw is elegantly joined with a participle ; as, ly ynri (^ovXet
(Totpi'a, — >/ Trayovpyi<}, ij iriovv yaip^is vrojiu^iiiv, or ivhutever you like
to call it: Plato Hipp. Min. p. ^66^. u rijy Tirajo/jn^i'av nou'iaas,
etr' Kv/j.TfX6s kariv o Koptydios, ») 'ApKrlyos, 1} orrrts bt'iTTore ■)(^alpei oyo-
l^iaiofieyos : or whatever the name may be which he prefers: Athen.
vii. p. 277- See Plat. Phaedr. p. 273. I. 29. ej^nipe icoXaKevofteyos,
he delighted in ^flattery: i5i,sch. adv. Ctes. p. 627. v. Hor.
Epod. 2. [v. 19] Eixppaiyeadai has the same construction as
yaipeiy.^
When -^^alpety sigiiities to escape with impunity, its participle is
generally used, but not always : aXX' ov ti \aipu/y bis ye Trrj/dnyas
epels, Soph. CEd. R. 363. ov Tiy^nip^](Tioy y erjei, Aristoph. Vesp. 186.
See Soph. Antig. 758. Phil. 12.09. Herodot. ix, 10(). The same is
expressed by yeyridws. Soph. Qid. R. 368. and for oh yaipujy, kXuiu/v
inform liim that he cannot arna himself
more (juickly than the exigence requires ;
that all his dcspatcli cannot outstrip ihe
necessity of the occasion. So (purevoiy
TToiSas OVK 6t' tty (pOdfois, Eurip. Altest.
G05. you cannot too soon beget other
children to cheribli your old age and
bury you ; for as to me, I renounce you.
So in tiie passage from Xen. ovk ttu
<pda.voti Kiyoiv, you cannot forerun my
desire of hearing, however quickly you
may tell me. And by its significaiion of
celerity may be explained this same plirasc
when used interrogatively, as in Aristoph.
Plut. b74. And wlun the formula had once
become usual iu the second and thivtl \tCT-
sons to enjoin or express celerity, it was
natural enou>,'li that it should be cniplovcd
iu the Jirst jitrson also, to cxj)ress nu in-
tention of doing anything quickly : thus,
oAAa fxtfToi, (pavai, rd ye aXrjdr) irapirifxi,
Ka\ Ke\evai Xtyeiv. Ouk tt.!/ (pQdvoifxi, il-mlv
rbv 'A\Ki$idh]y : Plato Synip. xxsi, 7.
I think it therefore unnt cessary to adopt
the novel supposition of Hermann, that
(pddvu is properly ces.10, desirio. — J. S.
* AVlien xo'V^"' '''"'•'^ ''^ ^^^^ sense, lec-
tori, says Hermann, the construction may
be reversed, and a ])ariicij)le of x^-'^P^'y
used ; a", for XO'V*''^ KXvovora, Euripides
might have said x'^'pova^' aKovus, (iMed.
1130.) and as lloin. says 6 5' 4Sf^aro
Xalpcov : but when it has its second tense,
fCaudeie, lulientiiis fncerc, amare, solere,
its jiarticiple cannot be used : x'"'/""''''^ ^
ovo/xd^ovffL mirst not be said, but xi'^ipovtriy
ovoiJ.d^QV7es may. — J. 8.
Rule 4.] XpdaOai. ill
is often used, ;is in Soph. (Ed. R. 41. [-101.] — Tlie verb x'^lpeu', and
not its participle, is used in Aristoph. Pint. v. 0'4. ovroi, uh Tt)v
A)l/ji}rpa, yutpiiaeis Uri : and in Aiistopli. Eq. 235. On ob â– ^^m'pujp,
see Toup. ad 'J'lieocr. viii, 40. and ad Longin. xvi. § 3.
Xoipeiv signifies alsu to be content : Soph. Aj. 1 13. It is used in
hiildins adieu: a\X' iQi yuipu)v, go, and farewell: v. Eurip. Phoen.
9'2S. Aic. S\6. Hence figuratively, noWa e/Voira -xaipeiv rf uXtj-
6e'i, bidding a long farewell to truth: Plato Phajdr. p. 272. i. e.
utterly neglecting it: -du Am — x«'P"»' ^«^"s, Aristopii, Plut. IISG,
ce fjoi'oi' (:Tri\P)](pi$(,ji>, Tuvs aWovs euj yjnipeiv '. taking yoiir suffrage
alone, I shall pay no regard to others : Plato Goig. p. 4j6. And in
bidding adieu to \vhat is hated, it rather assumes the nature of an
imprecation : t))^ c)]y be Kv^rpiv ttoW eyw j^^ciipeiv Xeyw, Eurip. Hip-
poi. 113. x"^P^~'^ ^'^^^^> Eiu'iP' Phoen. 920". x^'P^"' ''â– ^'^^^'^*' ToXXa
Toiis Wy/^ctprens, Aristoph. Ac!i. 200.
Xaipeiv is a form used in the beginning of letters, like the Englisli
greeting: v. Lucian, jjro laps. int. saiut. p. 197. Schol. ad Ari-
stoph. Nub. 609- Pint. 322. Diog. L. iii. p. 22J. and Interpp. ad
Thom. M.
Xpuodai, which is properly to employ as a means or instrument,
is construed 1. with a dative of what is employed, and an accusa-
tive of IJie use, purpose, or end ; as, ttuWo. ual iravTo'ia t^^^pijaaro
airols, he employed them for many and various piirposes : Aristid.
pro Quaf. p. 404. eyw be vvk e^w ti •^pijaop.aL to'is tovtov f^up-
Tvffii', but J know not what to do ivith his witnesses: Demostii. c.
Pliorm. p. 590. 1. 44. v. Aristoph. Pac. 229. <'»d 1239- ovk ay exois
u Ti )^pj/<7a(o (javro), Plato Gorg. p. 485. I. 10. on ovk ay e^pis e^eXUutv
o 71 i|((L/w rreuvroi, that if you had gone out of the city, you would not
have known ivhat to do with yourself, whither to betake yourself :
Plato Crito c. 4. — 2. witli an adverb and a dative: toIs tciybwevovacv
aet i:e\pr,fievos €~ieiKu)s Ka'i (pi\av8p<ljTTU)s, behaving with indulgence and
humanity to those ivho from time to time were put upon their trial :
Plut. in Cic. p. 865. I. 33. xpr/c79a( ei/yrw/joiws eavry, to behave
reascnably and fairly : Xen. Aues. ii, 25. (U'ey^X/yrws Trpos u-m-
Tas xprinOe rw (7v/d<p€por-i, follow your interest without accusation by
any one: Deinosth. de Feed. Al. p. 87. I. 7. [212, 9. ed. Reisk.]
ws ctrdX/uws xpwfievov nns Kutpols, as not having spirit to makt use of
opportunities : Polyb. iii. rtji \pevbeadai Knl jur/^ec vyies Xeyeir erolfiws
ypurai, he employs falsehood and misrepresentation without scruple:
Dinarch. c. Demoslh. p. 98. — 3. (4.) with o ti in the fcdlovving
phrases, in which the dative governetl by )(p>/'''0n' 's not expressed :
Trape^wper i/pns avrovs )^p>7<7f^ra Kvpoj o ti av be)], let US offer ourselves
to Cyrus to be employed in whatever may be required: Xen.
Cyrop. viii. c. 1. e7rtrpe7ro»'-e$ 'AXe^c'ufpw ^pjJo'Qfu 6 ti ftovXui-a,
giving fvll power to Alexander to do what he pleased with them :
i. e. surrenderiug at discretion: Arrian iii, 23. )(p»/(T9ai Tovd" o ti av
iivTvs povXrjTai, to do whatever he will ivith them ; to use his own
pleasui'e ivith respect to them: Isocr. Panath. c. o9- p- ~j^' fd.
Coraii. — 4. (5.) with a dative only ; as, xP^'jaOai tu> 0ew is, to consult
the orach of a deity : Arrian iii. c. 4. Apollo is said by Luciau
112 Xupelv. [Chap. V. ^ xiv.
e^aTTor^v rovs ypw^ivovs avT<3, Dial. Jun. et Lat. — 5. with liie same
coiistruclioii as in luiinber 1. but signifyiiiir io answer: ttuvv tOavfiaaa
e'i ri e'|et t'is xP'/o-n'^^"* r<^ Xoyip avrov, EMato Phied. p. 65. 1. 10.
Tols b" €v Tw irapoiTi Xeyofievois ov)( c'^eis o ri Xf'/'^f/' Plato Eulhyd.
p. 287. '• 15. It may be obscrvefl lliat tliis is only a virtual or a
consequential meaning; the literal signification beini^ the same as that
of the passages in number 1. — 6. with a dative of a person repre-
sented as speaking, or quoted or cited ; as, *y avTvs Xeywj' ?) aXXw
Xeyom xpw/i/eros, either speaking in his own pe7-son, or using that
of another: Proc. in Plat. Polit. p. 389. IltrroKw els fjtKpa koI
ovK u£,tn Xuyov ■)^pr]aa}ievos, citing Pittacus as authority in trijling
and unimportant matters: Plut. de Herod, nialed. p. 858.-7.
with a dative of a defect, or vice, or other evil ; as, ufAuOlif xP'7<^9f»
you show ignorance, or act with ignorance : Thuc. i, 68. rrjv
fjedrji' buKpdeipeiv rri re CTw/iara cot rhs xpvxhs tuv -^^pwfjevioi', (avTrj,
viz.) that drunkenness destroys both the bodies and the souls of those
who are addicted to it : Prod, in Plat, Remp, p. 369- 1. 50. x^'H^'^''
Xpr/o•f(/ie^o^', having met with, or contended with a storm: Demosth.
de Cor. p. 3il. 1. 12. tm yfi^iwvi, J e-j(j>{](7avT0 'A-)(aw'i: Thuc. iv,
120. — 8. (9.) with a dative, and signifying to utter: k-pnuyj} re Kn\
oXoXvyy xftidnhf], Thuc. ii, 3. — 9. (10.) with a dative alone, and
signifyiu"; simply to have : TroXews ovre 'leno's ovre KaTcitTKevfus TToXvre-
Xeui xprjdaynej'/js, a city u'hich had neither temples nor costly build-
ings : Thuc. i, 10. Trpoyovois ftaaiXevuiv e-^p>'j(TaTO, he had kings
for his ancestors ; his ancestors tvere kings : Aplithon. in Progymn.
V. Cic. Catil. ii. c. 8. [§ 18.] Corn. Nep. in Attic, [c. i. 1. 3.] —
10. (11.) with a dative, and signifying to observe: r^J naTplio ro/uw
â– yjiMf^iEvni hr]i.io(T'iq. ra(]>hs enun'iaayro, TliUC. II, 34.
V. (VIII.) XwpeT*' is joined with bia and a genitive ; as, bia llipovs
K(u <p6vnv ywpeiv, to attempt to make a way by sword and slaughter ;
to resort to the suord and slaughter : [Herodiaii.] cV vTro\piu>v vex'^-
pr)KM<; avriKkaTuv, having incurred the most violent suspicions: Philo
de Lesat. ad Caium. With cttI and an accusative : enl to GeXriov
XwpeT TCI TrpuypuTa, affairs are improving : eirl -irXuarov Tijs iraioeias
XwpeTj', to advance very far in learning: or with Knrn Xoyoy, as,
affairs are said k. X. â– ^(wptlv, to be going on as people wished:
Pulyb. ii.
VI. (IX.) With a preposilion and an accusative, or with o/node
and a dative, or a dative alone, in a military sense, to advance
against , to meet , to face : eftovXero /ler els tU oVXa x»^P«<'' '''"''^ (pciiyrw-
aiv iravTiios '. he wished indeed to advance against' the enemy in the
opposite direction to his own soldiers ivho were running away: Plut.
in Romul. [p. 52. 1. 12. ed. II. St.] iyioae yuype'iv tm kitbviw, tO
face the danger; xwpe'iv toIs 'li[ipatuis els pux^'', to ndvance agaijist
the Hebrews to battle: Joseph, p. 74.
VII. (X.) With an accusative, signifyitig to hold or contain, and
figuratively, to admit or be capable of: \pvt.Tiip TrXfwi' f/ oktoj korvXas
' Viger translates eU ri, SirXa x^peTi', armed men, as, to '6irXa for birXirai in
armaiui occurrcre : but rb. '6-rr\a. signifies Xen. Anab. iii, 3, G. iii, 4, IG. — J. S.
Rule 5— 8.] THE PARTICIPLC. j 13
XwpJJv, Plat. Symp. p. 21-1.'" f-tTjbe rf/s liXiiclas xwpovarfs tyicX>;/ia roi-
ouTov : or with iiu infinitive, when it siijnifies to be able : o'vk iKai'uis tU
6e~ia rorirjcii •^uipovf.ie.v. Xwfie'ii' is sometimes fo spread : boEa t' t^wpei
— iiv ¥A\iitwi' Irparov : Eurip. Ilec. 114. — To Jlow ; e^^wpei i^nov
TO. hukpva.
It is soinetimes used impersonally; as, ov X'^P^~^ yevea-Oat rovro, it
is not possible, <K:c. when it has often a dative; ou x^p^'i f^iot ncpuru-
TovvTi, there is not room for me to walk.
VIII. (XI.) Tiie compound eyj^wpcTr is mncli oftener used imper-
sonally ; as, tcudorroy ay ty)(wpJ7, as far as may be alloired or prac-
ticable ; en yap ey^wpe't, for there is still time enough: Plato Phiod.
c. 65. (in wliicli sense Xen. says, u j^pojos eyj^wpeT, de lie Eq. xii,
13.) Sometimes willi an infinitive preceded either by an accusative:
ov yap av (ii;ra tt'e^wpei k:aKa eJyai, Plato (le Rep. iii. p. 408. or by a
dative: ^ ovk ey^^wpel tt reas ey iroyripa'is \pv\a~is redpacpdai, Id. ib. or
by both at once: ?J ovic ey^wpel KUK>)y yevo(xeyr}V — tv ti Oepaireveiy :
Id.ib.
CHAPTER VI.
THE PARTICIPLE.
SECTION I. — On participles in general.
Rule I. Participles are often joined eHiptically with the particle
fats, in the accusative ; as, eh -a opr) tcartipvyoy, (hs -apos ravTa ye ohx
ijE'iyra 'AXet.nt'bpoy: they Jied to the mountains, in expectation that
Alexander would not come thither: Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 24. v.
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 220. 'Ai^j^e b' opOus Xaus ds epiv Xoyuy,
'H/jels ftey. ws riKwvTa beerno-rjy t'/uor, 0« b' ws cKelroy : Eurip. PhcEn.
146.9. we maintaining that our master ivas the conqueror, they that
Polyniccs was ; amos enopevdr] -irpos — 'loiiyiovf ws eKeho) Trpocf/Koy,
(JyTi a-paTtjyuJ, coXt'iffai rot's eaXwKoros : considering that it belonged to
him as j)r{Etor to, <4:c. Plut. in Ca?s. 2. Or in tlie nominative,
agreeing with the subject of tiie leading verb ; (see Ch. v. § iii.
R. 2.) as, ey oXiyoipltf eiroiovyTO, w s, orar iEeXOwaiy, Tj ovx vrroneyovyras
c(\tas, V pifbiws Xi]\p6fieyni ftl^: they made light of it, as expecting
either that the enemy ivhen out in the field would not withstand
them, or that they themselves would be able to overpower him by
assault: Thuc. iv, .'5. Trapatjicevuiov avTodey ws KarayeXaaOr]-
crofieyos, cos KaTaf^i(i)i^r]fT(i[iei wy aov noXXCjy, ws epovyTuiv ort, Szc.
wake up your mind at the outset to be laughed at. Sec. Epict. c. 29.
where the genitives absolute of the participles after ws are to be ob-
served. Tlie case of the participle is somctinies determined by that
of some preceding word, although not in the nominative; as, Ka\
epios kveiveae to'h ixaaiv ofioius eKJiXeiiaai, rols fity yap irpeffftv-epois,
'" In tlie mede, €| x^us x'^pV«'''oi, /le tiim : Aristopli. Nub. 1238. — J. S,
(Pasias) will lalce six cltoa of sail to sail
Viger. P
114 THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. ^ i.
MS ») KfiTarrTpe^JOf^th'nis t0' a eVXeor, 7/ ovhty av ff^aXeTfTaf fteyaXtjy
bi'iya/jLtu: as thinking either that thef/ should subdue, &c. Tliuc.
Vi, 24.
II. Participles neuter are put witliout <Ls either in tlie accusative
with an ellipsis of Kara ; as, to ye boKovi' cfioi, at least as I think:
or in that or other cases absolute ; as, liTeifii ttoXo', EKelvo) hoKovv: it
so seeming good to him, since it seems good to him : Epict. ap.
Arrian. iii. v. 26. bo'iai' be mpiTiv urereyKeli' is tu ^prjaTi'ipiov to ev
Af\*poIs, bibwiTi MeSoirt iiYlvdia ftdoiXeiav T^jv'AOrjVdiiov : they having
determined, tvhen they had determined: Paus. in Ach. p. 398.
So <io(.jy(7fii', Elirip. Suppl. i29' behuynerov, Thuc. i, 125. o'lrires
oiirw TTfpt j.iiKpuiv Kit'bupevofjtev, e^or abeuis roXXa KeKTijaOai : when it is
in our power, &c. Isocr. Panejr. p. 132. So Dcinosth. adv. Phorm.
p. 5S8. Eurip. Iph. T. 688. Heracl. 7- Mel. 1174. Here. F. f)40.
Pluf. Sjuip. xiii, 7' ''■«' Ttapuv eipljVTju I'lyeiv, oiibafxov tov TroXefiov
7rpo))pf~iro : and ivhen it was in his power to remain at peace, cl'c.
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 248. So apld^xevov, Wessel. ad Herodot.
p. 244. beov, Drmosth. de Cor. p. 353. 1. 40. c. Phorni. p. 585. 1.
45. befjcray, Ariitid. pro Quat. p. 342. and Ep. de Sn))'rn.
p. 2P5. bia^epov, from btacpipeiv, to concern or he of importance ;
EyyjMpnvv, from ey^wpe'ir, to be practicable or possible ; e'l primer or,
Aristoph. Lys. 13. irbey^onerov, it being possible ; kviv, iT.lian xiii,
38. iiicor, Eurip. Ale. 292. f-teruv. Puns, in Ach. p. 398. ira-
pa(7)(oy, — ev ■Kapna-)(i)v, when a good opportunity is afforded: Thuc.
i. c. 120. V. Lennep. ad Phal. Ep. p. 30. sq. TtapaTv^^pv, ivhcn
an occasion presents itself ; when it is practicable : Thuc. i. p. 51.
vpotjt]Kov, it being a duty, or incumbent, &c. Aristid. de Quat.
p. 463. irpoura^^Bev, it having been ordered: Lysias in Nicom.
[p. 837. I- 5. ed. Iveisk.] avy^^wp-q^ev, it being permitted, if it trere
permitted: Arr. de Exp. Al. i, 18. yj)r\rj(ikv, Tliuc. iii, 96. The
participle ov is understood, with hwarov. Flat, de Rep. vii. p. 519.
with nvyyovov, ;I'schyl, A}!. 893. v. Keen, ad Grep. Cor. p. 15.
69.317. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 125. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Pint.
277. Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 389. seq.
III. (VI.) A Greek participle may sometimes be rendered in
English by a preposition and substantive ; as, viKt^v rovs (plXovs ev
TroiiivvTu, to get the better of, or surpass, friends in beneficence:
Xeil. Mem. ii, 6, .35. Kap\r]bovlovs eriKwv vuv^fi-^ovvres, they
conquered the Carthaginians in a sea-fight : Thuc. i, 13. or by
the conjunction because, and a past tense of a verb; as, to be avfxfxa-
Xlds ovo^a vwepe(3r)tT(xv, ovk eTiXeX?jT/if 101, aXXh kui ttiv (\piivr)v avay-
Kdiorepay */ K(tXX/'w vTroXn/jftavoi'Tes ehai, they made no mention of
alliance; 7iot through forgetfulness, but because they considered even
the peace itself as more necessary than honorable : JEscb. c. Ctes.
p. 284. [p. 460. I. 1. eri. Reisk.]
IV. (VII.) Participles in conjunction with certain pronouns and
particles ; as, tIs, (hos, (Wolos, urros, ttws, noOev, &c. form jdirases
which cannot well be literally translated; as, cnruXe'ts (tv ; ris wi';"
" And wiihniit interrogatLon : 5*7 fie i4px*' ''â– <''' "â– ^k^'S Af'7*"' 'â– Deniostli. pro
^e S(7^ui, Ti's iiy Kal tiVoic, (xxSioi; outwv Cor. p. '2(i9. 1. 11. id. Hrisk. — J, S.
Rule -2— 5.] TIIK PARTICIPLE. 115
you ivill do for me? and ivho are you, to threaten me with that?
Aribtopli. Nub. 8yO. [883. Bekk.] rivos ei^eKu Tavr eTTfiaTrev 6
'iHXnnros Ka\ ti /jtu/Aofiems : and With what desire or purpose? De-
iiioslli. de Cor. p. 33S. 1. 10. ri Trotourrwi' v/tiijy ('nrns o â– )(p6ycjs
bieXijXvdei' outos ; what have you been doing tchile all this time has
passed away? Dt'iuoslli. 01. ii. ovb' virq) via iteTtoiriKOTwv iiv-
QpiuiTuiv Kifbvievaere biaXoyitjofievui, nor taking into your consideration
what had been the former conduct towards you of the men for whom
you were about to engage in war: Deriiosth. pro Cor. [p. 259. '• -•
ed. Rtisk.] eyw aui ^eviiiy 'AXe^cii fpoi/ ; irodey Xa^uyri, )*/ ttwj a^ito-
6i%Ti ; / object to you the friendship of Alexander ! by what means
could you obtain the friendship of Alexander ; or how could such a
person as you be thought worthy of it? Demoslli. pro Cor. [p. 242.
I. CO. ed. Ueisk.] So, anl be 7»}s a/^erz/s, w Kadcip/^n, ij toIs crols, tis
/jerovaia ; [() KaXu)v'\ ?) fii) toiovtwp tis biuyt wais ', nudei' \a(^6)Tt, f/ ttujs
aiiwdeyri; Id. ib. [p. 269. I- 27- et'. Reisk.] ri av/jflovXevwy eiroiei
fieXriuus \\Oij) aiovs, j) nuis uyiop Kai rpecpwi' it: viuif evdvs ; or by tvhut
mode of nurture and education from their youth? Arisli<i. pro Qiiat,
p. 268. Polernarcli. Kiibvrevofiei' ovk v^OiLs toi> ipiXov tau e-)(fipfjv
6ea0(n. Socr. ttws Qe^iivoi, w FloXeyunpj^e ; in defining them
how? Plato de Rtp. i. p. 334. fj3Xa\pe /je 6 belva to kuI to noiijaas,
such an one injured me by doing so and so: Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 267 ' tovto Xiywv boKei kfio\ kuXuis Xeyeif, in saying this he seems
to me to say well: Plat, de Rep. i. p. 3J1. In some such phrases
as the preceding, participles liave erroneously been thought to stand
for verbs ; as, e. g. oi' for iarh', in Plato Euthjphr. c. 12. Xa/3o»'re$
for eXafto/Aey, in Plat. Phaed. c. 19. Xafjoiiaai for eXnjiov in Plat.
Pha?d. c. 21. vo/jiioyres for rof^Hovai, in Xen. S_>nip. iv, 33.
Wliereas in such passages cither a verb actually expressed is to be
connected vvilli the participle, as ^jXelrat (and also nafj-)^€t) with oy
in the first passage, or one understood" from what lias gone before;
as, fc7rt(7rc(jLi£fla witJi Xapuvres in tlie second passage, ulaf^^^^v^aKov-(^l
with Xafiovaai in the third, and kKifiovXevovai with ro/jHoj'T€s in the
fourth. When a verb on which the participle may depend, is neither
connected with it in the conslrnction of the sentence, nor to be
assumed from tlie preceding words, the verbeJjrtt must be understood ;
as, Ti b' vv aTevnvT€s {^t)fiev,) ov Xci-^omes (^e'iijfjey) I'lfjiaros fiipos ; in what
part of the day, wherever tee might be, did ive not groa?i ? .'Eschvl.
in Ag. 5(i4. vid. et 1520.
V. (XI.) A participle in tiie plural is sometimes placed in concord
with a noun of multitude in the singular; as, »/ ttoXis uTracfct Kexijiores
akovovai, the whole city liste7is with gaping attention : Lucian,
i]XQov be els to lephv duamres ttclv to nXijdus, all the multitude having
sacrificed came to the temple: Xen. Ephes. i, 4. v. Acts v,
J6.
» So in the passage, in wliich IIoo- ex^is : Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. 1. 36. 5ei|os,
geveen says a ])articiple is put for an instead of being put for 5e7|ov, depends
imperative, (kucttov tcpe^ris 5i€i/ii, ap|(£- on tlie second person of S'ntixi uuder-
^|.tvos axh Tov TTpuTov, Socr. Aefjoj ye »tOod. — J. S.
â– npwTov, Si </)i\oT7js, Ti fipa % iv rrj apicnep^
116
THE PARTICIPLE.
[Chap. vi. § i.
VI. (XII.) The case of a pnrticiple is not always that which t!ie
case of some precediiijj word expressed or uiulerslood woidd
seem to require ; but an arbitrary transition is made from one case to
anotijcr; as, ovbk toIs avrhiapevovaiv ev tuIs arvyjais a'^iovTi Triarevetp,
ujs elrnTUTuivTos : nor even in those icho adhere to them in adversity
do they think Jit to conjide, judging them to act dectitjidly : Aristot.
(jv 7rpo(T€Kr€Ov vfTiv Tois TOVTwv \6yois, clhoTus, &c. you must not attend
to these mens discourses, since you knotv, &c. Domosth. 01.
heoi' til' e'it] Oeiiani.ierovs, we must go and see: Xen. Mem. iii, 11,
\.P V. Brunck. a(j ^scl). Prom. 217' ad Apoll. Rhod. i, 356. atl
Aristopli. Lys. 179- KaMi. ad Cirej,'. Cor. p. 33. Sometimes a par-
ticiple in the genitive precedes a nomirialive ca<e with wiiich it should
regularly have agreed : ravra eiTvovTOs avrov, ebo^i ti Xeyety rw 'Aa-
Tvayei : Xen. Cyrop. i, 4, 20.
VII. (Xlll. XVI.) A participle is sometimes equivalent to an
infinitive niood ; as, aKoirovnevos evpiaKov ovba/juis ay a\\u)s tovto
btmrpa^ufievcs, I found. On consideration, that I could have effected
this by no other means : Isocr. iVa oaa vrrea-^our])' ap'^n^ievas rov
Xi'iyov, beilu) Trenoitjtcios, that I may show that I have done ivhat I
promised at the commencement of my speech : Demosth. de Pals, Leg.
XvTTrjpus 'irrd' wv, let me tell yon you are troublesome : Aristoph. Ach.
455. vid, 459- iind Soph. El. 294. The partici[)les in these pas-
sages are put in the nominative because they are to be understood
of the subjects of the verbs. [See on the Inlinilive Mood.] See Her-
mann, lib. ii. de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. p. 1 4(). The following are
some of the verbs \vhich thus take after them a participle in the
nominative, referring to their subject : ayyeXXeti', Theodorid. Epigr.
18. uyvoeiv, Phalar. p. 308. nlbeiGQat, Soph. Aj. 507. ula-j^yveat^ai.
Id. Ant. 540. uve^^iaQai, Eurip. Med. 38. apveirrdai, Id. Ale. llO'l.
uvye'iv, Id. ib. 6'78. beiKvvrui, Or. 800. Med. 518. biiXoDy, So|)h.
Aj. 472. biabel^aaOai, Herodot. viii, 118. eKparOareii', Eurip. Baccli.
39' hbel^atrOaifJi]. ih. 17. en oelaQat, Eurip. Ilippol. 435. t^nrex^'^-
6at, Id. Med. 74. t-eiyeadui, Herodot. viii, 2. (whicii presently after-
wards in c. 3. is joined with an infinitive.) tTriXapOdreiOai, Eurip.
Baccli. ISt. KnTexeii', to remember: v. Casaub. ad Allien, i, 5. p.
19. luarOcn'fiv, Luciaii, Dial. dror. xvi, 2. t. i. p. 244. Herodot.
iii, 1. bp-oXnyElv, m •■'. strange construction, in sentent. gnomic, v,
438. eavTou vvbels ofioXoytJ KUKovpyos &v. WnveaQai has almost
always a participle ; seldom an infinitive : see Sclicvf. ad Schol.
Apoll. Rh. p. 223. iretpaaOni, Herodot. i, 77- noieluOai /.leya,
Heroilot. i\, 111. noie'cadai Xoyov kXaaatt), Id. vii, 156. ttoicTctOcu
P The nccusatlvcis common witli verb.'4!n
in e'of : Thv ^ou\6 /xevov, iis (otKfv, fu-
oalfxuva eifai awppuffvuriv filv 5 iukt (oi/
Ka\ aa KTJT eof, UKoXaaiav Se (PfvKTtov:
riatu Ciorg. p. 32(). 1. 6. ed. Bas. I. ^7)
yap TOVTO ixiv, ih ^rjv &w6<tov 5»; xP^^ov,
r6v yi wi a\ri6us 6.1/ 5 pa (vKTeov fcrTiv:
111. ib. |). 328. 1.5. fjLeyd\r]v SdKTeov
rr,i> ^(TalioAijV, ela <pi povT a^, i^i/iv-
Tay, aitauia irutovfT as it oi /xu s : Do-
iTioslli. 01. ii. p. 21. 1. 21. ed. Reisk.
ouSojUOJJ OLTncTTTjTtoj' — OfupuvvTUs vnh TT/C
oi/'ii', &c. I'olyli. iv, 41 . ^wilS^u (pccpatr-ps,
airaAfiTTTfuf, iiriKtyovTa i(p' iicd<TT(f) ovtws:
M. Antonia. ad Seips. xi, 19. 'J'lie cir-
cumstance, that a verbal in toy is equiva-
!( nt to Sei witli an infinitive, exjjlains
(his construction : e. p. piiya.\r\v dttKvufai
7j/U«s SeT Tijy ixiTaBoKiif, do'tiipofTos, i^c.
—J. .S.
Rule 6-9.] THE PARTICIPLE. I17
Trrpi irXetrtTOv, Diod. S. i, 51. v-n-ofilyei.y, HiTodot. vii, 101. <f)ait€tr
aij/ieht, Soph. El. 24. Slid) verbs, however, have soiueliines aii
accusative of J he participle with a reciprocal pronoun : avrels ef
iifiikro) (\('>fi€i'oy euvToy, Luciai), D. (leor. xvii, 1. t. i. p. 446. and
also without a pronoun, when llic verb is in the infinitive, depeiuliiiij
on another impersonal verb, so that it cannot have a nominalive of
its subject; he'i yap ttgXiv ri'irb' t/CjU a0e ( »', areXecrroy ovaav twu
iyiGiv i^nKyevfsuTwv. Enrip. Hacch. 39- If ^e^ 'lad not been used,
the conslruction would have been it6\i% eKjjLnOi'irTerui cireXeaj-os ovaa.
V. Valck. ad Enrip. Phoeii. p, ()'3, ad Hi}>pol, p. 211. ad Herodot.
p. 1<)4. Brnnck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 184. Alyo in the dative, when
the verb impersonal governs a dative, ami the partioijde is to be
understood of the same person as that dative; as, av^ifiefli^Ke ru'is
IT po € anjKu (T I TipujTOVs eavTovs ii eirpuKoaiv tjiydrjaOai, Deniosth.
pro Cor. [The construction might have been, Kara Tv-)(r]v ma ol
TrpoearrjKOTes irpwTovs eavrovs ireTrpaKores rjadoiro.] And in the dative
sometimes after verbs of consciousness, because they govern a
dative denoting their subject ; as, avt'oihey eavr<p oiibev air biaTreTipai:-
rai hvvufieyip (j)pa(rat, /lisch. c. Ctes. p. 306.
In the following the participle for the infinitive is in the accusative,
because it is not to be understood of tiie same person as KarafiuOioi' :
KUTaf^aOioy vvbajniZs avTiii' ay aWws ras irpvs toy ej(6p()y biaWayas
TToirjaa/ixeyoy : having uiidcrstood {when I had understood) that he
could bij no other means have bten reconciled to his enemi/.
Sometimes with the })arlici[)le for an iniinitive the neuter article
IS joined : cy einoai arubiwy /uaXicf-a jJ-e'piJ Tijs daXarrTjs biFipyerai to
pi) i'lireipos ovaa, it (Sicily) is excluded from being part of the con-
tinent by, &c. Time. vi. init.
VTII. (XIV,) A participle is sometimes equivalent {o?i finite verb;
as, ws (pafxevr], kui Kepbo(7vrr] iiyiiaar' WBipri : Hom. II. â– )(, 247- v.
Tlu'ocrit. iv, 60. avaaravTes Karaxprifiaaade, stand up and condemn
me: Uemosth. pro Cor. biarovr obvyrjde'is, cir' 'iaojs Ke'trai TTvperruiy,
for (bbvn'jQr) : Arisloph. Vesp. 583.
IX. (XVill.) On participles in general the following remarks may
be added : — 1. A participle witii el/u is sometimes used instead of the
verb of the participle alone ; as, on aTvuibus re XeXvKores eley, (c«l
ubiKoley '. Thuc. i, 6j. oiibkv yap bia<p€pei to ctpOpionos vyiaitojv
€(TTty »*/ TO atBpwnos vyiaiyei, Aristot. Metapli. iv, 7« P- 80. 5. v.
Dorv. ad Char. p. 624. Vecliner, Hellenol. ii, 9. Hermann, ad
Eurip. Hec. 1153. Pors. addend, ad Hec. II69. With the
article before it, a participle following tip] is more emphatical tlian
a single verb : cn-i rh /.pareo X6(povs eTribteaOni Kripes elm 01 KUTabel-
Inyres, the Cariatis are they ivho shoiced how to fasten crests on
helmets: Herodot. Clio, c. 17 !• '6-)^ava amcicri ovroi eiai ol iroitjaa-
peyni TrpuiToi, these are they who first made handles for shields : Id.
ib. T)]y Tvparviba i Travdas el^) tyw, / atn he tvho put an end to the
tyranny : Lucian. — 2. A participle of a verb of naming, instead of
being placed between an appellative and a proper name, (or a noun
serving for one,) comprehended in the signification of that appella-
tive, is often put with the article in concord v^ith the proper name
lis THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. § i.
(or its oquiviilent), the appellative being wholly oiiiiltcd ; as, hpuy,
TO eoTi t)' Ttj (depuTTi)] KuXovfj-itr], a temple tvhicli is in the town called
Tlierapnec : llerodot. Er. c. 61. CjaaiX^vav twv t^aXovfievwy Ae-
Xeywf, over the people called Leleges : Pans, in Acli. p. 402.
kv rajs €7riypn<pniitei'ais Xpeiais, in the piece entitled Chrice : Allien.
Deipn. xiii. p. 577'
3. A future participle after a verb of motion is rendered in Latin
by a future participle in some pussa<;es, in some by a supine in
um, and in others by tit and a subjunctive mood ; in English by
an infinitive mood : ws Kp\uf.iai (ppaawv, as I am about to say :
IJerodot. ii. top cp\onni Xi^wv, which J am going to speak of: Id.
ib. ep)(oyuat cKpTjyrjfjofieros, I am going to relate: Pausan. orav
apid/jy'jcruii' 'ir) 6 apLtijiriTttios, addresses himself to reckon : Plato Tlica?t.
p. lyS. 1. 42. rows cihitcovyTcis (ayojuer) — irapci tovs biicaaTas — bcKrji'
twaoi'Tus, to be punished: Plat. Gori;. p. 478. es daXtpovs j^ptjtTo-
/jeyos TO) yj)r)(TTr]piio TTopevirat, to consult the Oracle: Herodot. Er.
c. 70. V. Vakk.' ad Phoen. p. 2S9. ad Herodot. p. 642. 1. 28.
Mark), ad Suppl. Eurip. 542. 772. Abresch. ad /Ebch. t. ii. p. 32.
— 4-. Of a verb which takes idiomatically a nominative case instead
of being used impersonally, the participle also is used personally,
agreeing with the noun which migl.t have been the subject of its
verb; an, ftatnXfjus — inrubeiKivfxeyovs ws elat "E^XXtjies, kings shown
to be Greeks: Herodot. Er. c. 53. — 5. Verbs and participles often
mutually change places, the construction being reversed ; as, for i^ev-
hovTai Xeyovres, â– i^evbo/Aevoi Xiyovniv '. yl^evhofxevoi he ae <pa(7i Aios yorci'
Aiyi6)^oio Elpai, Honi. II. e, 635. v. Cor. de dial. p. 35. et Keen. —
6". A neuter participle with the article is used for a substantive ; as,
TO bebivs, fear, Thuc. i, 36. ro biacpipov, the price or iuilue, Epict.
Ench. c. 32. TO ^iaAXri(7(To»', difference, disagreement, Thuc. iii, 10.
TO dapuovy, confidence, Thuc. i, 36. to caXws Kiafxevoy, a slaughter
well performed : (cited by Hermann, without the author's name:)
TO Keyrirus, the opening, the aperlure, the open mouth : Lncian,
Timon. t. i. p. 12<). [71. A. ed. Salmur.] to nepLe\oy, the air, Heliod.
iElh. iii, 13. Sometimes, but rarely, a participle so used is not in
the neuter: 6 KeKT^Ji-ieyos,^ a master ; jy KeKTtjfiiyrj, a mistress, Lncian,
Dial. Mer. ?/ e'lfj-up^tyt], and Trenpw^iyr], jate, Epict. Isocr. ad
Dem. — 7- Participles are often used instead of adverbs; as, XaQiov,
uTroKpvTTTivv, eyKuXvirTtif.ieyof, secretly, privily, underhand; upxo-
/.leios, at first ; TcXevru/y, at last ; tv^^ov, perhaps: and with govern-
ment: biuXtit ijv -xpovov, inecrKorrei tuvs Trobas : after a time he
examined his feet : Plato Pi)C3ed. — 8. A participle sometimes retains
its nominative case instead of assuming that of some word with which
it ought regularly to agree ; as, tt,(iynaras ti)ot,e fiot, when I had
1 Andromaclie, in Euripides's play so it even conveys an imputation on lier own
enlitletl, V. ?.'>, sa^'s to hercliild, 5 tc'k^'oi', chastity. KiKTrifxivos oujjlit to be sub-
KTtvovai at Aiaaol \o.fi6vTr /ones' b 5e stiliittd. 6 K€«T7jjuei'os ttotJjp, tliy fatliiT,
K(K\r]p.tvos rioT/jp tV iv A(K<l>oi(Ti T1/7- niy liivd, my nuisler. She was ihe shive
yjivei fxfvciiu. As Neo])toIe;i'.i - was really of Neopioltinus, and had spoken of her-
tlie falliiT of her child, there is no reason self as such in v. G-t. — J. S.
why she sliould use the word KCKATj^tcVos :
iluLE.O.] 'IHE PARTICIPLE. II9
arisen, I t/iought, &c. Lucian, Drm. Enc. [p. 915. B. ed. Siilimir.]
uTri]VTr]iye yap avT<p tov vcpdaXfiov kKKoTrrji'dt — A/Ww (y\r]Oeis : he hap-
pened to have his eye struck out bij a blow of a stone: /El. V. H.
xiii, 23. V. Bruiick. ad Soph. Ei. 480. — 9. It retains it too,
altiioiigl] it cannot be in concord with the subject of the following
verb : 'Ajut£wf>/7$ ovKen j'/i-ea^ero ft\(7reiv avrvs t'Trt TV<p\o) T(7) Aai'tiu-
ftihi, dX'\o TVij)\wacis ku\ avrus envTov, a/jipOTejJOi ^c'tOr|^>rat : but having
put out his own eyes too, both sit: Luciaii, i'ox. p. 642. [88. c.
ed. Salmur.] — 10. Sometimes a participle, instead of taking the case
of a precedinjj subsitantive to whiih it refers, is put in (he genitive
absolute : ovk yy ar ((/(^t'Xfcros ai'dpMTrois epts, Tvarpiha jiKv hihor-
Tiov avrto 'Iwi'tkijv KrAodwj'o, ?) Ky/xjjv, ikc. Lucian, Deniosth. Enc.
p. 889. — 11. (12.) A participle with its substantive is put in the
genilive absolute, instead of on, the same substantive in the nomina-
live, and a verb agreeing with it : ovbeva b' o'iotTai aluOiiaeadai,
rvpavvibwv avrl bi^pok'paTtCJv KadiTTn/jevwv, Kal tuh' TroXireiwv KaraXeXv-
fjevajv : that despotisms are established in place of democracies, and
the governments subverted: Demosth. de Feed. Al. p. 88. for on
Tvpavvibes a. h. KnOiaratTat, Kcd al TroXiTelai KarnXvoi'Tai. — 12. (13.) In
the genitive absolute also with another word instead of that word ia
the nominative agreeing with the verb of the participle: TroXefiovvTai
yap, a.mi(pu)s biroTepwv aplavrwi' : for they are engaged in war, while it
remains uncertain which begati it: Thuc. iv, 20. — 13. (14.) After
a parenthesis, a participle, which had been put before it in the
genitive absolute, assumes sometimes by anacohithon a different
case, required by a following verb or participle; as, biaftavTiov
be â– KOraf.ioi' KnXovfievov AipKijv, ( ) b lal^jucr i v cvv t}}v \ipKr]v,
oiKias epeiirta rijs Yltvbupov — {fiiiverai,) &c. Faus. in Bceot. p. 578.
J. 19. And the participle so assuming a different case is sometimes
not the same, but one of kindred signification; e^''*'"'^'' ^^ aaderiLs
ijbri Tu)V '^iKvwiiMV, ( ) biaKeifxei'Ois ovv abvrarios kwiye-
vofiei'os aeiafjtds vXiyov ri)v naXiv t7rou/<Te»' ai bpwp eprjfjoy, Paus.
Corinth, j). 97. So fujrvdevros, Polyaen. ii, 14, 1. v. Dorv. ad
Char. p. 30S. 354.— 14. (15.) A participle is put in the nojuinative
case absolute instead of the genitive: dewu be (poftos, i) uydpuiTrwu
vofJLOS ovbeis anelpye, to jjev, Kpivovres ev b}xo'iw Kai aepeiv kuI fji), —
Tu>v be apnprrji^turivy ovbeis eXrriiiiJv — or r»)»' Ttfiu)piar avrtbovrai :
and neither fear of the gods, nor any law of men, restrained them ;
with respect to the first, men judging that it signified nothing
u'hether they behaved piously or not, and as to their crimes, none
expecting to live to be punished for them: Thuc. ii, 53. These
nominatives appear to have been used from the author's having pro-
ceeded as if he had written, deoiv be fojiu »*; avdpwndji' v6p<f ovbevl
e'lpyoiro. — 15. (16.) Participles are sometimes used to express a
condition or terms; as, rrol 6' 'Ayn/ieyurwi' "A^(a bwpa bibuxri ^ueraW//-
InvTi xf^A."'", if yo^ shall have ceased from your wrath ; on condition
that, &c. Horn, II. 1, 26 1, v. Abresch. ad yEsch. vol. ii. p. 47.
Dorv. ad Char. p. 227- 257- — 16. (17.) Several participles are in
some passages assembled without the intervention of conjunctions;
120 THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap, vi. § ii.
as, ill Isocr. Pimath. p. 497. Mark xii, 28. v. Rtiz. ad Lucian.
Tox. c. 2. Forst. in iiid. li. parlic. Plaloiiis.
A participle wilii a genitive is eniplojed as a substantive l)v tlie
most ancient poets, and the later sophists, but very seUiuni by Attic
writers ; as, rolwy eu eibois, 0o\drr»js yeyvfiiaa^iios.
A participle must sometimes be taken as equivalent to a finite
verb, in onJer to give the sentence in wliich it is found any gram-
matical connexion : rp/ct /utj' cvra \6yov li^ia rois "E\Xrj(7t vnv-
Titc'a, — * TovTdJi' b' el 7rep«o»^eCT0e tu bvo e'ls to uvto IXOely, &c. (he Greeks
have, in all, three navies that are worth mentioning : if you suffer
In'o of these to be combined, &c, for rpln fiey Ian : Tliuc. i. p. 27.
[" Videor mihi posse contendere, particijiium, nisiubi aut casu abso-
lu'.o ponatur, aut verbum ei^), (idque plerumque, nisi semper, in pra?-
senti tempore) intelligi possit, rariisime poni pro verbo tinito."
Hermann. "I think that I may maintain that a participle, unless
cither where it is put in an absolute case, or where the verb €i/.ii
(and that generally, if uot always, in the present tense) may be
understood, n most rarely put for a finite verb."]
SECTION II. — Of some participlrs which appear
TO BE REDUNDANT.
Rule I. Certain participles often appear to be redundant, as
ui'v/Tcts, UTTiwr, e^w»', \u(5cji', (peptoi'. 'ft'j^ero aniioy : Aristid. pro
Quaf. ]i. 248. ws IcKparrjae (I^/AtTTTros, <j'>X^-'' ^^Ovs u.tiiwi''. Denu)sth.
pro Cor. p. 2-l6. 'An-iwr adds a signification of celerity: v. Valck.
ad ('allim. p. 26'l. Husch.ke Anal. p. 77. seqq.
II. With the same signification of speed or despatch, ai vcras is
added to verbs: Xty' drvcras, u n <p)js tto-c : Aristoph. Plut. 349.
tk- AaKebalfjorns fjerei, urvaas ri ; Aribtoph. Pac. [275.] idi, Trepaive
cv, Aia-^dy, atverns : despatch, JEschijhis, guichlj/ : Aristoph. Kan.
[1171.] and with tiCirrov added, Aristoph. Nub. 1255.'' Tliis signi-
fication of despatch is very apparent \^iu>n by a reverse of conslruc-
lion arverni is the verb, and the participle that of some other verb;
as, in Aristoph. Av. 242. Vesp. l\63/
III. The participle e^wi' is often joined with verbs of delaying,
shufHing or paltering, trilling, folding, sporting, mocking or deriding,
talking or acting absurdly, t^c. as, tI bi'jTa biarpifjeis e.-^^wv ; why then
do yon delay? Aristoph. Eccl. 1143. [11.51.] rl bfira e-^MV aTpii^-iiy,
ichy then do you keep dodging to balk my ivishes ? nsing subterfuges
and evasions, and not telling me what I wish to hear : Pl.ito Pliiedr.
p. 23(). [p. 19.9. 1. 9- cd. Has. 1.] X>jpe7s e\b}v,you talk nonsense:
Ariatoj)h. Av. 341. Ran. 312. Lys. 9-1-5. it'o'ia vKobi'ii-tara (pXvaptU
•■See also Arislopli. Plut. 229. G48. 1150.— J. S.
971. Nub. 181. 50G. 1253. Kcjuit. 71. ' See Aristoph. Plut. 113. Av. 211.
II'J, Ath. 570. Vesp. 202. 'MS. 817. — J. S.
Rule l— 5.] REDUNDANT PARTICIPLES. 121
t^wf ; what nonsense do you keep talking about shoes f Plato Gorg.
naideis tvw)', 1/ou are joking : Luciiiii. [Valcken. and Hermann
think with Greg. Cor. (p. 63.) that X7/pe7s e^wv is said for ex^is X»?pwi'.
Tlie diftercncc in meaning, says Ilernianii, between \r)pe'is and Xrjpels
e'xw*', is that X»;pe7s is, nugaris nunc, you trifle or talk nonsense
at this time, XrjpeTs t'xwv, nugator es, you are a trijler.'] *
IV. In a similar manner Xaftwy is added to verbs: kui ^oi Xe'ye
T))v ypn(}>})i' Xa/5wr, prenez-moi cette acctisation, et la lisez: Demosth.
j)ro Cor. V. Atlicn. Deipn. i. p. 13. Herodian viii, 4, 26. Xn/3wj/
kavTov Mx^To, Pluf. in Cic. [p. l627. I. 18. ed. H. St.] v. Plat.
Pliiedr. p. 260. I. 25. Horn. II. xii, 451. So tXwv is used : v. Hom.
II. a, 356.
V. ^^cpiov is in the same manner joined with verbs which signify
some sort of n)otion in whatever manner ; and it conveys a sense
of voluntariness, vehemence, precipitancy, fatal impulse : v. Hcnist.
ad Lucian. p. 349. seq. It has an accusative after it either
expressed, as in most places, or understood, as in the first of the fol-
lowing: hiwKOfievr] yap vno t7]s 'ArTiKfjS, fepovara (iavryiv or Tr)v eavrf/s
ravy) eyeftaXe rrj'i ftXirj : she violently attacked a friendly vessel:
Ilerodot. viii, 87. fts tovto (pep'jjy Trepiiarrjcre to. Trpctyjuara, tO this
stale, by kis rash and wilful conduct, he reduced our affairs : ^sch.
c. Ctes. p. 474. ed. Reisk. tovtm (to a slave unfit fur any ordinary
employment) (jtepoi'Tes viTo(3ctXXovcn rovs vlovs, [wilfully, recklessly,]
Plut. Tvep. TTuib. ay. Ty)y yyenoyiau Kara yfjv iipbrjv (peptajv ayeOr]i:£
Gr]l3aiois, {precipitately and hotly,'] iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 535. [ed.
Reisk.] ubiKyaas be '^iXimrov, KUKeWev cnrobpas, virefSaXey kavTov
(pepcoy 0»;/3o/ois, [suddenly, all at oyice,] yEsch. c. Ctes. p. 482.
[ed. Reisk.] fjdXXoy 0o/3»j0e<s crvyyerTj cal irpoatpaTOV <pB6yov, vpyijs
TraXaias Kal ftaaiXtKijs, raury (^idpiov hweOijKev havTov : voluntarily , by
choice, advisedly: Plut. in Themist, <^ep6ix€vos also occurs with
a signification of impetuous motion : oV-ws c>e nyes tovs 'AOijvalovs bia-
<pvy()iev, <l)€pofxeyoL ealntiTTOV es tovs Alyiry'j-as : Herodot. viii, 91- 3»d
so in ix, 102. As to fepwy, and ayejy also, which is sometimes used in
a manner somewhat similar, see Hom. Od. p, [345.] II. \p, [799-]
Od, V, g6. 0(1. a, 127. Hom. in Boeot. v. 65. [II. (3, 558.] II. x.
350. ll. ;//, [596.]
<&ei/ywv also is added in a similar manner : ot'xoi'ro f/ieuyoiTes,
Herodot. w-^^to 0euywi' avv rrj aTpanq. naatj, Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 7-
o'i)(OVTO (j)€vyoyres a-n-uXiTroyTes Ti]v iroXiv, Herodot. Er. C. 33. for
efuyoy, e(pvyey : the verb o'ixeadat adding a signification of speed,
says Hoogeveen. So airobpas o>X'^'^°> Aristoph. Eccl, 196. and
rpex^v '. vpiy rijy tfiijy KaXelaO', array^aliJijy Tpex't^y' Aristoph. Nub.
778. where Tpex(oy conveys a notion of celerity : abi cito, ct sus-
pende te : Ter. Andr. i, 5, 21.
* " Milii haec stat sententia, parti- e|iv, sive Xrjpus, txi^v ovrus, sc. Xrjpciv :
cipium ex"^" sic verbo finito subjectura, dcliras, et tjuidetn non uno dido insano,
hal)ere vim giaviorem qiiain in priori sed habitu et vilio mentis. Nam exf"'
gent-re [\T]pwv ex^'S '^. g.] tcmpus liujus de nuturaii corporis hahilu proprie usur-
verbi finitum ; et v, g. furmultc \y]pus patur, unde et e'ld dicta est." Weiske,
ex*""* proprie sensum esse \ripus Kmb. Pleon, Gr. — J. S.
Viger. Q
12-2 'ATToXeXei/ii/unos, &C. [ChAP. VI. fiii.
SECTION III. — On the participles (nroXeXeif^ifiePos, npxo-
fAei'os, ftovXoi^ieros, yiyyufxevos, e^^u/jieyus, ticJex'^M^''"**
Rule I. From cnroXeiTreadai, which signifies properly to be left
behind, iind tljcnce, not to understand or comprehend, (nXelaroy b'
inroXeiTTOi-at tuv Karavoelv avrcis, Flat, ad Periiicc. v. and Di'inostll.
adv. Leocli. p. 1083. [Reisk.] where it is opposed to TrapuKoXovOe'n',)
the participle uTroXeXeif^t/^eyos signifies ignorant: rf/s Trm^e/fts TuvTt]s
ci/k." ay tyw (paveirjy anoXeXeiufxhos, ignorant of this branch of learn-
ing : Isocr. nepl aynbufr,
'An')(_6fXf.yos is elegantly put for ey apxV » '^^' "PX^V^^'O* eiTror, as I
said in the beginning of my discourse: Isocr. ad Nicocl. [p. 6\.
1. 10. ed. liattie.] and I'huc. iv, 64. 6 Auc/os apxojLteros tov 'Epw-
TiKov, Lysias, in the beginning of his amatory discourse: Plat.
Phaidr. p. 263. 1. 39. apxf^^e'os ''*»' ^'" reXnvs, in the beginning,
and to the end: Plat. Soph. p. 237- i^t'iv rh Trpay/iiara ap^'i/^tya,
in their commencement : Demosth. de Cor. p. 347.
'O (iuvXojieyos, any one; any one who chooses: e^e'iyai no fluv-
Xojjeyo) Twy 'VAXyywy, iEscli. C Ctes. p. 284. ypcKJteaQo) 'Adt]yai(x)y o
i3ovXtJi.teyos, Denioslli. in Neter. p. 51 9- !• 44.
Fiyro/ueios lias various significations. — 1. The first and most simple
is (III. VIII.) of what is done, i. e. what really is: v. Heind. ad
Plat. TheiCt. p. 346. yiyyofieyi) upeTi), real virtue ; to. ytyrojuerci Xe'yeiy,
you say the truth : Plat. Thea^t. p. 173. I. 18. tuvtu yeyufjieya e'Aeye,
Herodot. ii, 28. e/JTrXews ov yiyyo/ueyuy eXirlhwy, full of vain hopes. —
2. (IX.) Oi ivhat is gotten or acquired by or for any one: Qr^ftalovs
^ye'iTO (Philip) uy~i roJr abrols yiyrofieywy, tu Xonra eaaety uirtos puvXe-
T(u irpuTT€iy avToy : Demosth. Piiil. ii. p. 26. 1. 12. — 3. (IV. V.) Of
ichat arises or is made up upon some certain account or reclioning :
inrobuiieiy to yiyyofieroy apyvpioy, Demosth. c. Lacrit. p. 592. tv
yiyyofieroy {the ivages) eic rovrov ctTro^epwr, erpecpe -or Aeivutv : Lncian,
Tox. [p. 63. A. ed. Salniur.] tr 7a7s yiyyoj.ieyais {jfiepats ct^iM'eTrojt
TTpos TUfieOopia ruiv 'Actctv/j/wi' kui M>'/t5w)' : in the requisite number of
days; in the usual number of days required for that march: Xeri.
Cyrop. V. p. 141. [4, 51.] — 4. (I. III. VI. VU.) Oi proportion, rate,
share, due or proper quantity : yiyyo^ieyr] n/io), a proper or just
price: yiyyofxeyat ri/uat, honors due, Demosth. deCor. Trier, p. 1230.
[ed. Reisk.] So yiyyofxeyrj X"r*"> ^"'' yiyyo^ieyov Tifii}na, a penalty
due, Demosth. adv. Timocr. p. 726. [ed. Reisk.] Ik be tov ffiov
vvp.ov TO yiyy(')pif.yov Kara rip' ovaiay tVctcrj-ov rtOt«ut, the due proportion
or rate, according to the amount of his properly : Demosth. pro Cor.
p. C6l. 1. 1. ed. Reisk. Trdi'rej o'l KXijpnyvfioi to yiyyofjeyoy ti:o[.UTavTO,
received thiir share : tovs bpofitas to ytyyofieyvy TrenXripuKcyai, the due
or It'ritimatc course: Aristid. Panatli. Hence oi what is suitable or
befitting : ov biKainy ovbe yiyyo/2eyt}v x/ipiv u^tioaovai KopliXeffOai,
Demosth. adv. Nausim. p. 633. [p. 992, 3. ed. Reisk. Hermann
reads ovbe Tt)y yiyy. x-] TrpoKeirai yap (Athens) cot' iiXXov (fivXuKTijpiov
I iv. Rule 1 — 3.] "Oyof.uicuy, &c. 123
Tfji 'EWubos T7]y yiyvoixivT]v Ta^iv e^pvaa, Aristitl. Paiiatli. lu dvaiai
at ytyvoiAeyai, Diiiarcli. adv. Aristoj,'. p. 81. ed. Reiik. sacrijicis
hijitting Aristogilon : unless the meaning be siniply sacrifices per-
furnied.
II. (X. XII.) 'Ei'Sexf'iuefOJ is sometimes practlcahle or possible:
ra'ts eybexofxeyais cKoXaaay ri^wpims, Antipiio. In this sense it is
joined with superlatives, like ws and on : ?y ttoXis Koiyioyia ris eari tuv
o^oiioy, eycKey tt iioijn tTjs evbexofxeyTjs uplaTrjs : for tilt sake oj the
happiest life possible : Aristot. Folit. vii.
III. (XI.) It has a signification oi plausibility or probability:
iibs^ofiei'T] 7rpo0a(7(s, a plausible pretext : tvheyCueyoy eyKXrjfjiu,
a probable charge or accusation. ,
IV. (XIII.) To eybexv/jeyoy, is power, ability, possibility ; as, Kara
TO cybexofi^yov, to the extent of one's ability, or as far as may be pos-
sible: wliich is expressed also by tic tCjv lybe)(piiivuiv, Thuc. and by
the adverb evSexo/uevws, Polyb. v.
V. (XIV.) In the writings of philosophers it signifies coiitingent,
(see Aristot. Eth, vii, 1.) what may or may not happen of itself ; and
is opposed to what is necessary, what is in our own power, what is
our choice.'
'E^o/ieros." After an unfinished enumeration, koX -aWa to. -ovtwv
e)(ji')iieva, is et catera, and so on. See Antonin. th eavr. i, 3. ex-
pressed also by kui to. uKoXovda tovtois, or (cat rii e^f/s tov 'iirovs.
SECTION IV. — On the participles of the verbs oiojuacw,
nupe^io, Ttepie-^u), ttoiw, reXevTciu), Tvyyfivw, vTrap-^tj, eijjtt.
Rule I. 'O^o/ia^wv, preceded by an adverb : oh yap to. pij/ua-a ras
oiKsioTTjTas etpr] iSeftatovy, yuuXa fTefirws dvvnui,(i)v : as he very pompously
expressed it : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 237. 1. 11. ed. Reisk.]
IF. 'O :rapo(Txw»', and to Tzcipaayov, opportunity , occasion : kviray-X
rw -napaayoi'Ti, on every occasion : Arislid. Panath. Kaipds is ex-
pressed with o Trapaa-x^cjy in the following passage: its apiara -w Kuipto
Tore 7rapa(j-)(6vTi p.1) â– )(^prjauixeyos, offering, â– presenting itself : Plut. in
Cifis. p. 71 1.=^
III. 'O irepiexniov, literally, that which surrotinds, clips, embraces,
is put for the air or atmosphere ; as, hvGKpamiai. tov Trepiiy^ovTos, bad
temperature of the air : Plut. Alex. So Kpdaeus tov TvepiiyovTos,
Id. ib.="
' 'EySfxt^Mfoj aw^uaafj-hs, usual, com- ing been unwilling to take or subdue A'a-
mon, ordinary, Aristot. Hist. An. v, 2. — bis, when he had an opportunity, had the
J. S. power, of doing so : Plut. Flaiiiin. p. CSS.
" AeV rh ix^P-eyov, recite what is 1. 21. ed. II. St. — J. S.
next, what follows : Demostb. adv. Pan- '" It is here satisfactory to observe tlie
tjcn. p. *J7J. 1. 27. ed. Reisk. equivalent knowledge of Greek shown by most of
to Ki'i/e TO fipi^ris in 1. 14. and to Ae'7e our newspaper writers, who constantly
ro.K6\ovQov, p. 'J73. 1. 2G. — J. S. call the air the surrounding element :
••' 'EAei;' irapaayhv, ovk idiATiaas^ hav- though some may be inclined to consider
124 UoiuVf&c. [Chap. VI. § iv.
IV. V. VI. A participle of ttoiCj with KaXuis forms a phrase ex-
pressive of the approbation or satisfaction of the person using it,
[see the note on the verb ttoiw, Ch. v. § x. R. 2,] and is to be va-
riously rendered according to the occasions on which it is employed :
vTrep TToWUJi', it)v, KaXixis Troiouyres, c^ovm, iJ.ii;pu avnXijKovres '/ [the
property ivhich I am heartily glad they possess ;] Denioslh. Or. i.
[Ol. i. p. 17- 1. 9- ed. Reisk.] ol Qtui, ku\G>$ iroiovvTes, awaavres t))v
TToXiv, aiTohebwkaaiv vfxiy '. Deinoslh. ep. i. p. lOS. 1.49. [Here the
expression is significative of the good will of Demosthenes towards
the Athenians, shown by thankfulness to the Gods for benefits con-
ferred on then), p. 1465. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.] v. Hor. Serm. i, 4, 17-
Ka\{I)S TToiovi'res naai rols Iv Tois airiais ^(;;\Xaj(6r/re, very properly or
prudently : Demosth. Ep. ii. p. 111. 1. 34. [In the two following
passages the phrase expresses satisfaction or gladness :] KaXws Toirw
TTOiCJv unuXXvTni, Aristoph. Plut, 8()4. av fikv kuXws nouwaa Tedi'rjKcts,
you have done well in dying; it is a very good thing that you
are dead: Heliod. ^Eth. ii, 11. The phrase is sometimes preceded
by Kal, and sometimes negatived by oh. Sometimes tu biKaia or
Tu biKaioy, ra KciOlji^ovTa or to wtS/Jicov, is added ; as, KaXws ye Kal
TCI biKuia TTOiCJy. In a similar manner eu voiiuv is used : ev ye av
TToiuij', in answer to â– ^api$.oyLui aoi, Plato de Rep. i. p. 351. See
also Plut. Conj. price, p. 142. 1. 13. and cp6wi Troiwr, Julian,
Misopog. p. 353. and ev (ppovcjy, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 431. and
Kuicios TToiu)v is opposed to KaXQs or ev ttoiCjv • v. Heliod. -^th.
vii, 27.^
TeXeurwj', literally ending, takes an adverbial sense ; as, TeXevTCJV'
res oiovTai aotp^TciTvi yeyovkvai, at last they imagine they have become
extremely wise: Plato Phaid. p. 90. 1. 21. TeXevrwy napaXaftwv -6
(jiftXlor, &c. at last having taken the book: Plato Phiedr. p. 228.
1. 12. V. and Plat. Phicd. p. 89. I. 40. Phaidr. p. 234. 1. 11. In
the same sense, but witli a different consduction, ctTraXXurro^at is
used : elnijv aTroXXayTjGt, say at last: Plato Gorg. p. 49 1. 1. 25.
VII. Tvxtoy, the paitic. 2 aorist of ri/yx"»'w, often signifies, com-
tnon, ordinary, trivial, trifling; as, Tvyoyres ixvBpwnoi, men of the
common herd, everyday persons: (so 6 exiwy, any one, Soph, CEd.
R. 393.) >/ rvxauoa S.r]fxla, any, or a common, penalty: tu tv^ov
irTu'iafiu, ever so trijling a miscarriage: Demosth. epist. ad Phil.
tlie expression not as a giiccisni, but as condition than they : Dem. adv. Lept,
the offspring of that lautUible abhorrence ]>. 490. 1. 16. — J. S.
of vulgar hinguage, to whicli we owe, de- v To these participles may be added
rourin'^ element, ior fire ; water ij element, avviX'^f 'â– """^ ffvptxoy, u-liiit is of chief ot
for water ; interesting female, for shop- paramount importance ; ruv T6-iroi> rovrov
lifter; being launched into elernity, fot Sous, eKvae iJ.fy rh yeyovhs iyicA-nixa irphi
being hanged ; having the vital spark ex- t)]V ohdav, iKavyv 5e tt'kttii/ iraptirx^TO r^s
lingiiishcd, (or dying, 6cc.&ic. — J. S. irphs to. ixiWovTa Koivuvlas' rh 5e avv-
^ So, T^x 5e (piAofOpwTrt'as ('I»»\t7r7rou) 4x°v, C"'' above all) bpn7\Ti]piov irapicr-
— vpLils, KaXws TroiovvT(s, rovs Kupnovs Kevacrev ^AvTiy6i'cp irphs rou Kara AatcfSat-
KftidfiiaOe: Uemostli. pro Cor. p. 304. 1. ixovia>v v6\ffxov : Polyb. ii. 52. quod
2C). eJ. Ueisk. vfisls, kuXws iroiovvrts, maximum est : Em. ra auvixovTo. tlov
Hixetfov tKi'ii/uDv 7rpaTT«Te, you {ut which I iyypditruf i)v ravra, the principal (ir-
sincerehj rt-joice) are in a mort- prosperous ticUs: Tolyb. iii, 27. — J. S.
Rule 4— 12.] Tux^jy, &c. 125
[p. 1,54. I. 12. C(l. Rcisk. See the note on the verb rv7X"»'w-l
bvycificis ov Tus rv^nvaas, no common miracles, i. e. vert/ txtraordinary
miracles: Acts Ap. xix, 11. ov ti)v Tv-^pvaav (jiiXavdpojwiav, no
ordinary kindness, (or no little kindness, as our translation has it :)
Acts Ap. xxviii, 2.
VIII. Ill the neuter, ro tv-^ov is hy chance or hick; and rvyov, per-
haps: (and rux'V t<Tws together ill Attic writers:) tv^ov h' av kciI to.
Trptoreia crvy^wprjOeitj/^ey, and perhaps even the first rank might he
conceded to us: Synes. Ep. ad fratr. ri/^'J*' /tte;' alhol Tijs TroXews,
tv\6p be (TTTovbtj, whether — or: Arr. Exp. Alex, i, 10. tv)(^ov fxep,
on ov intTTov kboKei, — rvxpv be, on — ac^aXepos i'lbr] ijv rXap/uertwi' :
whether because it appeared not credible, or because Parmenio was
now not to be relied on: Id. ib. iii, 26.*
IX. Of the participle of vitapyy it is to be observed that ra hirap-
XovTa signifies, means in one's power, or present circumstances :
opdre c'liro twv virupxovnav oTt^ Tpoirm KiiWiffTa afivve'iaQe avrovs, Thu-
cyd. vi. opioy be 6 Nt/c/as ro arpdrevfia advfxovv, Cjs tK twv vTrapx^v-
tQv, edupcTvye re Kai irapefivde'iTO : as well as the state of their affairs,
as circumstances, would allow : Thuc. vii. o^ws be, w$ eK twv vnap-
\6vTU)v,tbuKei xpii^ai /u?) evbibuvai : as far as their means, or condition,
would allow: Thuc. viii. ;)^e«'pous elyai twv vnapxovnuv, not to
make the most of one's means, or favorable circumstances: Dem.
Ol. ii. p. 18. 1. 12. ed. Reisk. and in tlie singular: to bk vvv virupxpy
Tzepl ae roiovroy eanv, the circumstances or state in which you are
placed: Plato Ep. iv. p. 320. 1. 28. Kara, avrov tu vvapxov, Ari-
stot. Efh. i, 10. In the same manner, ra vrapeaTwra, iEschyl. in
Prom, 21 6. in Ag. 1062.
X. (XI.) 'YTTupxovaa Tijii], a fair or just estimation or price:"
vTTctpxojy Kaipos, the time in general of any event or incident : iVa
TTpos Toy inrapxovTu Kaipiiy eKuara dewprjre, that you may consider each
transaction ivilh reference to the time at which it took place: De-
niosth. pro Cor.
XI. (XII.) *flv, the participle of el^l, signifies living, alive: eanv
avTarexpids row rvy ovtos 'AXKifiu'ibov, Plat. Euthyd. p. 275. 1. 11.
and o /in) ujy, he who is dead : Tuy yap ovk ov-a anas enodev ewaive'iy,
all are accustomed to praise the dead: Thuc. ii. and ol eaofieroi,
those about to live hereafter ; posterity : Horn. II. /3, 11^. The verb
ehai itself is sometimes to be living: Heliod. .(Etli. iv, 12. Matth.
ii, 18. and to elyai, life, Heliod. yElh. i, 29. ix, 6, 27. v. Tibull.
iii, 5, 32. Virg. jEn. vi, 870.
XII. (XIIl.) The same participle signifies also an unimpaired or
undecayed state : Upx^ ovira, a magistracy still in vigor and power ;
- The following is a better authority t^ avyKei/xeyqi XP^''V> ^a inroKfiixeva rots
for Tvxiiy, perhaps : nola yap irpdcpaais, rls dafe'Kracnv i^eirro} xnrodelvai, koX at:od6a(iai
aydponzivT) Koi fierpia (TKr}\pis (pavilrai rcoy ttjs vnapxoiffrjs rifiTJi : Demosth. adv.
iTfirpay /xti'icf avri^ ; opyr] v^j Ala. Kal yap Lacrit. p. 926. 1.24. ed. Reisk. pretio
TovTo,ruxov, \i^ii : anser forsooth ; for, quocunque, quicquid id est prelii, saji
perhaps, ha will say that: Demosth. iu lleibtie : for any ptice they can get.
Mid. J). 527. 1. 15. ed. Reisk. — J. S. Perhaps, /or the then price, the current or
" "E.av Sk uri awoSuJiv (t6 apyvpiov) iu market price. — J. S.
126 THE ADVERB. [Chap. vii. § i.
and with a negative, extinct, abolished, or pretended or false : vires
vufxoi, laivs in force ; ovk oVres, abrogated, repealed; olaa hiKt}, a
cause in ivhich the matter itself in dispute is tried, or a cause not
yet decided ; and fii] ouua ^Ikt], or tj ut) ovaa, without hiKt], a cause
decided or done with, or in which a decision of no validity has been
given. Hence, one against whom a sentence had been given on
I'aihire of appearance, was said -j/k /u?) ovaay uyriXay-^aveiy rtvl, when,
within two months, iie inslitntcd proceedings against his adversary
to liave that sentence or verdict set aside.*
XHI. (XV. XVI.) "flv is sometimes real, true: ovhev uWo yiioi
hoKOvaiv 01 Tu ToiavTa Xeyovres, y ti)i' vtrudeciv, Trepl j)s foovXevecQe,
ovyl TTjv oixrav Trapia-avTes vf^li', iifxapruvetv : to err, in making the
subject of deliberation appear to you different from what it really is :
DeniOslh. 01. iii. [p. 28. 1. Q. ed. Keisk.] Hence to ov and to.
ovrn, truth: KuracfKe-iLofievovs, el ra ovra e^oyytXXerat : to see whe-
ther the truth icere reported: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 7- a"d o u)v
Xoyos : — oh Tov ovra eKeyev 'A-^^riinis \6yov, the truth: Pans, in
Acii. p. 419. TiL iji'Ta Xeyeiv is also, to say rightly: Plat. Tlieaet.
p. 179' I1 the dative singular rJ civti is the same as oyrws, «re)(i'ws,
in reality, in truth. Ta ovra is sometimes, goods, possessions,
property : tovs (pvyubas be avrwv Karieiai cttI toIs Sipiaem rCJy uyTotv,
ore eipvyoy : to return on the terms of having half the properly they
possessed when they were exiled: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii. c. 1.
CHAPTER VII.
THE ADVERB.
SECTION I.— On the terminations of certain adverbs.
Preliminary observation. — Adverbs of place take after them a
genitive, either of more general signification, or more particular; as,
TTov 7»7s ; in what part of the earth ? TtuvTayov y^s, in every part of
the earth : eyravOa t)~is ijne'ipov, at this part of the continent : Tliucvd.
i, 46. TToD tov TTpojdjTroy ; in what part of the face? vQev uTreaxiaas
fxe TOV Xoyov, Aristopli. Nub. 1410.'" Adverbs of time also take a
genitive: 6\lik tijs j/^epas, late in the day: in Thorn. M. u\pe tov
fi€T07r<l)pov, late in the autumn: Lucian, Tox. p. 49. see also
Dionys, Hal. Arch. viii. 7EI. V. II. ii, 23. Matth. xxviii, 1. TrrjylKa
rjjs >//(e'pa$ ; what time of day ? Aristoph. Av. 1498. eyTovOa tov
Kcttpov, then.
Rule I. Adverbs signifying in any particular language generally
end in orl ; as,'E/3paV(ir«, in Hebrew : EXXriyidTi, in Greek ; 'Vwfxdiari,
in Latin ; and this form is preferable to 'EftpdkQs, &c.
'' *A\\ck tV fjL^ oZaav afTtXaxc'f ^|^»' ejusmodi, qua; iriita sit, et pro nulla Labori
ain<f 5r]irov, Deiiiosih. in Mid. p. 543. debeat, ideo, quod sit illegitima : saya
14. ed. lleisk. IMidias had failed of ap- lleiskc. — J. S.
pcarance (ovk o.TT7]vra) in a cause before '^ IjuI ii0c-i' is not to be joined with
the arbitrator, and thertfore tp-nnov &(p\( \uyov: itiuffe 8", 'oOtv oTreVxiffrfs ^e, toC
Z'tKi]v. Kxtcpiionc agcrc BcnleutiiTc dicl;u \vyov /ttTfi/m : v. 1390. cd. Bckk. — J. S.
Rule 1—5.] THE ADVERB. i'27
IT. Ailverbs in iov have a peculiar elegance; as, i'tye\t}Kt', in
troops; ftorpvboy, in hunches; cn-nva/jXrj^oi', over the rest of one's
clothes ; [fTri TovTOvai be etpirea eV^/ara XevKii enaraJDXrfboi' (popeovai,
Ilerodot. ii. superinjectim. H. St. in Ind. Tlies. L. Gr. — J. S.]
ij/jodvi.iabdy, unanimouslt/, Acts Ap. ii, 1. aToi\ribdi>, in rou's ; trvara-
boi', in close Jight, hand to hand; (riopriboy, in heaps; j'60e/\?;?or,
after the manner of clonds ; ipopn^buv, in the form in which a kind
of mat was platted: Tliuc. ii, 75. [E,v\a — (pop^rjboy curt roi'^wy
Tideires, uirws fi)) bia'^^eoiro inl ttoXv to %Ojna : p. 3-7. 1. 5. ed. Ijekk.
<popiiij]bui') ;^'ta9;jSoi'. (popfjos yap \pia6os, uff-is epaWa^ e^wv ro wXeyfia
eoTt : Scliol.] Trapctarabui', standing by: Hoin. II. o, 22. Theogn.
470. Trepia-abuv, standing round, all around : Q. Calab. x, 402.
Psendorpli. Arg. 3l6. KUTiofiabui', across the shoulders, over the
shoulders : Honi. [II. \^, 500.] yr(a]ir]boy cnvvdat'Oiro, suffrage by
stiffrnge, vote by vote: Dionys. Hal. Arch, viii, 43.
III. And so those in -l or c/ : ctKoi'ir!, without labor or difficulty :
(literally ivithout dust, used by athlefae :) Herodian ii, 14. uribpw7\,
easily, {icithout sweat :) Horn. II. 0, 228. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 9- ct/rojrjri,
without labor: [/8»7»'at b' unovrjTi, Plut. Alcib. p. 357- 1. 20. ed.
H. St. — J. S.] (i/neTaaTpeTTTl, without turning round, ici'hout looking
behind: Xen. Synip. iv, 50. Phil. J. de Confus. ling. p. 255.
axpocpt}-], silently, withotit any noise, in Antcnin. els eavr. ii, 0.
tiguratively, without boasting; uyeXacrTi, ivithoxit laughing: Plat.
Euthyd. p. 27s. 1. 41. ubaKpvTi, without iveeping or tears: Hero-
dian i, 4. ctffrej'akr!, without groaning : iEsch. Socr. dial, de Mort.
c. 2. ui'a«/iW7-(, without blood: (and araifiuyTe),) Horn. [II. p, 4.97.
Od. ff, 148.] afiaxTfTi, ivithout a battle or fighting : Dion. Hal.
Arch, viii, 43. aicpoTTubt]T), on tiptoe : Lucian, D. Mort. acKup-
bajdVKTi, (or citTKapbapvKrei,) without winking: Xen. Cyrop. i, c. 27.
6vofxa(TT\, by name: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 15. 7ra>'ffrpart, or TravarpaTi^,
(irapcTTparnj, Herodot. i, 62.) with the whole army.
IV. Of" those in et are the following: ckXauo-T-el, (or utcXuvau,)
without iveeping; a^ro/aoel, at the first shout or onset; avTO\pe\, at
first sight ; irayavbel, (or iraaavbei, Thuc. Xen. Cyrop. i, 22. or
Traaavbi, Xen. Ages, ii, I9.) with utmost force or exertion ; Tvavbrjiiei,
publicly ; and, without exception of any of the people : Thuc. i, 73.
one and all ; uKt^pvKTel, without proclamation by a herald: [icithout
intervention of a herald or messenger ivith the caduceus or symbol of
peace: Thuc. ii. p. 219. 1. 3. ed. Bekk.] a/mxet, ivithout battle
or fighting: Thucyd. i, 143. aroKel, ivithout interest: Dio Ivii.
TTciyoiKei, with the whole family : ^schin. Socr. Dial, ircpl ttXovt.
p. 26".
V. Of the termination bijy, and having an acute on the pcnultima,
are, urebtjy, which signifies first, laxly, loosely: and thence, at full
speed, without check: yEschyl. Choepii. 8O6". and remissly, negli-
gently : Soph. Phil. 1153. and at full liberty, without restraint;
eneibUy ftouXwyrai uyebrjy rols Trap'' avrols ^vyyereadctL ao^iorals. Plat.
Protag. 342. 1. 24. and with impunity ; arebriy e^earai buipa Xo^u-
ftareiy KaO' i/^Qy, Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 98. 1. 12. and largely,
fully, at large ; uribr]y tKiai^expai kotci iraaHiy TCJy ewiffrri/iMy, Plato
128 THE ADVEPvR. [Chap. vii. ^ i.
Hipp. niin. p. 36S. I. 10. afiftoXnbip', vioknthi, ivith great force :
Herodot. iv, ISl. [with force directed vpivards ; so as to throw
Jipwards: Horn. 11. tp, 364. also ivith procrasiination, tvith delay.
— J. S.] apbr)v, on high, aloft ; also utterly, as aolriv i^oXoBpevaai.
VI. 'ApicTivbrji', with selection of the best: Poljb. vi, 8. Like
this is TT\ovTivhr]v, by choice of the richest ; oh yap (xovov upiaTivbrjv,
ciXXa Ka\ TrXoVTivbjji' liioiTai belv aipe'iffOai roi/s up^ovras : not only
on account of pre-eminence in tvorth, but on account of pre-eminence
in wealth also : ^ Aristot. de Rep. ii, n. and Xoydhriv, with selection
or choice ; \oyahr\v <p^popres Xidovs, Thuc. iv, 4.
Vil. Bubijy, step by step, slowly ; Polyb, iii, 65. opposed to hp6iJo>,
Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 62. The compound avafiahriv, icith the feet
stretched upwards, the head hanging down:^ Aristopli. Acli., where
however by ava(oahriv we may understand a higher place, and by
Kar«/3o§jj»', a lower.
VIII. Aiapfh'ibrjv is expressly: biapui'jbrjv anayopevwv, tovs vnevOu-
vovs fj)) aT€(pai'ovy, Mscb. c. Ctes. p. 2/5. 'E7riypuflhr}i', of the same
signification as Xlybrjv, erriXiybip', iTri\pavb)]i', atcpodiyiLs, is SU])er-
ficially: v. Horn. il. 0, i66. and Eust. p. 1229.
II. e, 80. Y>.aTcCKoyabriv is in prose: Arr. Exp. Al. i, 12. Plat.
Synip, p. 277. 1. 14,
X.^ KpvlDbrjv is secretly y and is sometimes used like an adjective ;
as i;pv(ibt]v earlv y 4'^~](j)os, secret : Demostli.
XI. YlpoTpovabrjv, precipitately ; TrpoTponabrjv <popAeadai,fuir dvau
de route: Horn. â– Kporpoirabrii' (pevyeiv, Xen. Mem. i, 3, 13. Plat.
Symp. p. 221. 1. 21. Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 28.
^ XII. iTTopdbrfy is scatteringly : as anopubjjv eneirro : (rnopdbijp
oh-ovcrir, Isocr, Paiieg'. p. 94.
IvXXfipjbrjy^ is, in sum; also, without any exception, one and all:
TOVS iepe'is icai tcis lepelas vTrevQvyovs eirai KcXevsi o rofios kcii (jvXX^](jbriv
uTTOj -as : iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 276. 'Yiro^Xiibi^v, by interruption, while
another is speaking: Horn. II. a, 292.
Xlil. ih>pcibr]v, by being carried: et — /3\e7ro<ti' <re (jiopiibrju rov no-
Xe^iov eKKOfxiQOfx^yvy, Lucian, Dial. Alex, et Phil."
XIV. (Kpbpy, promiscuously : x^^^lf and K-cxw/'ei/ajs, at random.
As adjectives are sometimes used adverbially, so adverbs have
often the sense of adjectives : as, i) TrnpavriKa iibom), present pleasure •
V ws dXt)0{os y>7, the true earth: Plato Pliecd. c. 58. ol yvrjaitj's
(piXoaoipvi, the genuine philosophers : Plato Phaed. c. 11. aa<paXu,s
"Jn Aristopl.. Ath. 410. ava^dSv yvul Si ■kuvSov, amPdS-nu i.i'anavoaai.—
•>roi€is, E^hu KaraPdoT]v ovK^rhsx^-^-S.
\ols TToieTs. ivrtff. is OH u hfUj scut or ' ^opdSvv {nrh rirriowv ,<a<ou.L<yfjLlvov :
throne .-in pomp unci state. But in Ari- Lucian in Gall. p. 2.12. c. od. Salmur—
stoph. IJut. 1123. avafidSriv is, witii tlie ira noi (pOoyya TreVeraj (bopdSiiv ; Soph.
eg8 stretched out, nnd one crossed over CFA. R. 1310. in auras sublata, Bruuck.
tlie other, in tlio posture of an idle lazy —J. S.
person, or of ono who has notliiuij to do :
§ ii. Rule 1 — 3.] 'A/rpi/Sws, Ac. iQg
elyfu, to be safe, Demostli. Kp. iii. p. 11 8.). I. 4. [ed. Reisk.] y^f,\f-
TTtais bt nv'oli >/ ui'iiaTafTis tyiyyero,-^ but the removal (quittiiig their
dwellings in tlic country aiul jjoing into llie town) rvas grievous to
them: Tliuc. ii, 14. ^i) pabiws — (waijs tTjs airo-^^wpiiTews, not being
easy: Tliuf. iv, 10. v, Cic. pro Rose. Aintr. v. [§ 11.] and Vctlin.
IJellen. I, 12.
Tlie idioms of some adverbs, botli separately and conjointly, will
now be considered in alphabetical order.
SECTION II. — On the adverbs d(.-p</3w5, aWws re kqJ, a/ua.
Rule I. 'Ak7Jt/5j;j, besides its ordinary meaning, accurately, tvith
nicety, signifies — 1. rigorously, severely.
II. — 2. exactly enough ; just as much as may be necessary, and
no more : to be. icpavos nrpos rijv TrXtjyijv uKptfiws kuI fioXis uvTeayer,
ware tCjv irpurwi' \paiiiTni Tpiy(_u)v d/i' Ttrepvya xfjs kottwos, the helmet
just, and but just, sustained the blow : Plut. in Alex.
III. — 3. parsimoniously, sparingly : as aKpijjeia is used (or par-
simony ox frugality by Plut. in Pericl.
"AXAws re kuI. The primary and proper signification of aXXws is
— 1. otherwise, in another ivay or man?ier, by other means : some-
times, for other reasons, on other accounts, as jV be n berj Orjolnv
t'fe^a eiriKnrafie'irai, y aWws ftovXrjdaxri biarpi'^pai Trepl rrjV Oi'ipav : Xeu.
Cyrop. i, 2, 11. — 2. It signifies, rashly, unadvisedly, at random;
i)S ervj^^e, as Hesych. interprets it : ra — opdiLs fSuvXevOeyra — -w rows
eiridTuPTas aXXus j^pi'/rrnaftai bieXvfiuvdT] : Demosth. Ep. i. p. 1466.
[ed, Reisk.]? — 3. Hence, iji vain, to no purpose, fruitlessly : as
aXXws Xeyeiy, Plato Piiocd. c. 64.''— 4. in other respects, at other
times, independently of something superadded: o 5' ayi'inop ecru /.at
I'lXXws' viiy au fitv noXv jjuXXov ayrjvoplrjcyir tyijKas : Honi. II. i, b[)5.
— 5. merely, absolutely, nothing else but; ol b' avTiXiynv-es, vyXos
aXXus KoX (oaaKavia KarecjiaifeTo: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 348. [ed.
Reisk.] yjycviTO eJvat riji' (Tvyypa(p))i> «\\ws vBXo)' cai <pXvapiai', De-
mosth. p. 9^1' [adv. Lacrit. ed. Reisk.]' — 6. besides, moreover,
uXXiJs Kai axpXi'i Ian, Theocr. xxi, 34. iiXXuis re, and besides. Soph.
/ It is strange that Zeunius should have S' ovv eVe/co ravra ^pui^s ; Venus : &\Kus
translated tliese words, difficHis ipsis erat i]p6/.i7}v, it was a random question; Tasked
restitutio. Tliucydides gives a reason for no particular rcaaon : Dear. Jud. p.
why tlie removal was grievous to the 1G2. E. cd. Saltuur. See also Phit. Moral.
Atlienians: Sta rh ael eladsvai rovs iro\- t. ii. p. 111. 1. 14. ed, Wyttenb. 8vo.—
\ovs eV ro7s aypo'is SiaiTaaOai. p. 242. ed. J. S.
liekker. — J. S. A Ti KiwpSfied' fiAAcos ; Aiistoph. Eq.
g Sicius,prarf, perperam,s?iys'Reiske. 11. AWccs, 5 'rav, i/cereveis ; Aribtoph.
"AWw^ere appears to have reference to Pac. 1113. — J. S.
opdws, otherwise than righllij. In the ' OO'toj yap hv ^jueTs SiKaiws KarayeXd-
following passage, it is, at random ; vvk- fxiOa, ws &\\a>s evxais 'dfioia Xiyovres :
rbs SaAojs TTXavdipLivoi Tires ^iriTii7X''*''"'' Plato de Rep. vi. p. 430. 1.41. td. Bas. 1.
(Tiv avrfi, Plut. Sertor. p. 105G. 1. 19. ed. See Toup on Lonjjin. ^ vii. — J. S.
H. St. and in Luciai) : RIcrcur. rivos
Vigcr. R
130 "Aj.ia. [Chap. vii.
(Ed. R. 1 110. Hence— 7. aXXws re kal, especially ; literally, both in
other respects, or on other accounts, and — . liWtos re itavTws kqi
Kacnyti'jTais narpus, 7/ou ought to gratify them, both fur other rea-
sons, and because they are your father s sisters: yEscli. Prom. 6^7.
ToX^tjTeoy TO aXtjdes elne'iv, uWais re kcu Trepi uXrjdeias Xeyoyra:
Plato PhvKtlr. p. 247- aWws re Kal el, Plato Kp. ix. ttuptiop utto-
(TTepe'ijdai XvTrrjpuv eari Koi yaXeirov, tiWws re kuv vtt t'x^Opov toj tovto
(TVfij3aiyj] : Demosfli. pro Cor. [p. 227. '• S. ed. Reisk.] aXXujs re kuI
eireibi) es ovbei'a olbey evewrepi^o', Tliuc. ii, 3. ovk arjbks, aXXojs re
k-nt n'lvbe ti)v wpav. Plato Plianlr. p. 229. When ka« is tlius added
to aXXiJs re, the first member of the phrase, uWws 7e, has respect to
what we pass by without consideration or specification, and the
second, Kal, to what we urge or dwell on as most important; but in
the form aWws -e, without ku\, the principal consideration is signified
by u\Xws, the first member, relating to what is passed by or not dwelt
on for the present being omitted and understood. So that aXXws re,
(literally, and besides, and moreover,) carries in eti'ect the same signi-
fication as uXXws re cai, although by a dift'erent form of expression ;
and where tcai follows so separated as in aXXus re el Ka\, and the like
forms, it is not to be considered as a part of the phrase transposed,
but as having no reference to aXXws re : aXXa yap ay <l>airi emuTtiy
Tuiy \pv)(^uiy TTvXXu aiOfiaTa KaTa-pilieiv, t'tXXws re el kuX ttoXXci errj fiiuir) I
Plato Phaed. p. 87. d. (138. Heind.) especially (literally, and more-
over, and over and above) if it should live, too, many years ; rovs /u?)
(iorjde'iv iKayovs, dXXws T eav npos rovru) koI dpaaels uxri, irayra rpuKOv
KiiiXveadai : Xen. Mem. i, 2, 59. aXXws re eTreibi) Trepl TuJy yvfiyatriivv
Tutv tFis i'ux''* aixfLo-l^rjroiKny, especially since, &c. Isocr. ad Nicocl.
[p. 59- !• 13. ed. Battle.] aXXws re olibe Koafiiav ovaav, Julian, Ca;s.
p. 7- tiXXws 7e ovbe oijuriv eyw, &c. Id. ib. p. 30.
IV. "Ay^ta is elegantly joined with a dative case; as, lifja tu Kaipu,
as soon as an opportunity offered, or, seaso7iably r aiia rw Ttpw\, ivith
the dawn ; ctjua ry etrnepi}, on the arrival of the evening ; rijua ttj
a/japTia, in the very commission of the crime : Anfipho Or. p. 664.
[ed. Reisk.] a/jia rw yeXun, Pint, in Cacs. p. 712.-'
V. Also will) a verb in the infinitive mood instead of a substantive :
01 yeijjpyoi ttoXXogtij I^Tjyt twv aTrepfxuTiov T))y tTruojOTr/av KOfii^oyrai,
KoX ovx ufxcL Tu KarajSaXe'ty : and not as soon as they have sown them:
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 270. o lefji'ipos ujjia tu ftatriXevs ayabeix-
Qijyai, — bui (ppovTibos ea-)^e '. as soon as he was made emperor : Hero-
dian iii, 2, 9. and with an indicative mood followed by Kal and ano-
ther verb expressive of something following immediately on what
is signified by the first; as, ayua biaXXaTToyTai, Ka\ ttjs t)(^Bpas TTJs TTpo-
yeyeyr^fievrjs eTriXnyOuyoyTnt : as soon as they are reconciled, they for-
get their previous enmity : Isocr. Paneg. v. Lysias p. 820. [1. 9.] ed.
Keibk, V. Virg. Mn. xi, S6l. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of the
verb, as el o'ierai, iifily itap'a tHiv Oeuty, a ev-^ofxeOa, yeyeadat tty Kal
t
J "Aiiayhp T(fi Ar]no(Tdfy(i KoiS xopvy^^ tlt^ chnregus wait outraged: Dem. m
iPp't^(To,Jfor at the same time with De- Mid. 525, S. — J. S. ,
nwslhenea^m the person of Demosthoncs)
§ iii. Rule l.] 'A/ut\e«. 131
iifia, the moment ice pray, together ivith our prayers : [kcii <{j.ia to~>
eu^fffOcu iifjds : ] ;Escliin. Socr. Dial. Trfpt vXovt. p. 50. and sonic-
tinies re is added to u-jjia, as tma re hiaWuTTOvrai, KaX, &c.
VI. With a participle, koX following with another participle; as,
fi;ua yeXuiv re /cat epvdpiujt', ^scliin. Dial, ii, 11. or with fxev before
one participle, and be before another following: &fia fiev tw Kvn'mwri
■)(^ctpt^(')fi€t'os, ii^a be tov NafaicXea tu>p /.lerh ravra et'CKev vnoTrotovfxevos,
at the same time, and — : Heliod. iElh. v, 16'. Or with one parti-
ciple, a verb following without Kai : as fi/^a yap TOiavra cnreiXwi' ttXtj-
yi^v kvereivaTo â– niKpav, with these threats he at the same time struck,
&C, ajxa yap rw tov awj-iaTos ayOei \i)yovTi, — oiyerai c'nronT('i[xevos :
for as soon as the bloom of personal beauty begins to fade, he flies
away at once : Plato Symp. p. 183. 1. 42. So &fja rw tr/rw aicfid-
Sot'Ti, Tliiic. iv, iiiit. "Afia is elegantly used for re before Kai : crocpov
ufxa K'al 'E\\i]i'ii,uv epyov, XA. V. H. i, 21. for aocl>6y re KUi, &C. "Afxa
fxev precedes and is correlative to Trpos be in Herodot. viii, 51.
VII. "Ajia repeated designates celerity : a}xa erros, tt/ua epyov,
dictum, faction; no sooner said than done: v. Virg. yEn. i, 62i5. xii,
26'S.
"Ajua is sometimes redundant, as una with cum in Latin : fivBo\oyia
yup, ava8.!}Ti]ais re tCjv TraXaiwy, fiCTCt ff>^oX>7s «/u' iiri tus 7roAe<£
epxeaQov. Plato Critia p. 10.
SECTION III. — On the ADVEUES afjeXei, avrtKpii, ayriKpvs.
Rule I. 'AfieXei is properly the imperative of a/neXelv, and there-
fore signifies primarily, be not anxious; set yourself at rest ; make
yourself easy ; take heart: see Aristoph. Nub. 488. Ach. 36'7. Lys.
172. Nub. 875. 488. 1208. Thence, as other imperatives, e. g. aye,
^epe, it lakes the nature of a particle of exhortation or encourage-
ment ; and is also affirmative. It may be rendered, according to
circumstances, doubtless, certainly, truly, to ivit, in reality. Sec.
Kai eap vvv eipwfxev, afx^Xei ovk o^^Xrjpos ecxofxai aoi— : and ij we find
it now, then, you know, I shall no longer give you trouble by inter-
rogations: Plato Hipp. maj. p. 295. I. 18. afieXei Kai ravra eoiKe
firiy^avi'ifiarri rtros 8wa elvai (SovXevaafxefov : iji truth these things also
resemble the contrivances, &c. [in answer to an enumeration of
several instances of Providence in the constitution of animals ; so that
(t;ueXet expresses a confession.] Xen. Mem. i, 4, 7. i)^lov yap rov
nXovrov Karafpovelv bibaaKOvra, irpdrov eavroy Trapeyetv v^^T]X6^epol'
XrjfjtfiurtJV ufxeXei Kai npuTriov ravra biereXei: and in reality, in fact,
he constantly acted on this principle: Lucian, Nigr. t. i. p. 63.
[p. 39. A. ed. Salm.] at^eXei Trepiepyla bo^eiev elvai Tcpo<nToii](Jis Xdywv
Kai Trpu^ewv fxer fvpoias, in reality : Theophr. Ch.*
* T\v06(iivos h'k aiiQis oo'Sej'ws ?X*"' *"' ^"^ Kadiaas Trap' avrcfi, T^xparo ttjs x^^P^^'
rhv, ffiaSi'^ti/ oij/iJjM.ej'os : Kai twv KaAwv iKeivov Si dirdvTos, 'on vvv 6 â– Kvpirhs ano-
Jivi Trepi 0upas ii.iT-i]vr-f\aiV uaiKduiv 5e, Ke^'^pTjKCi', 'AME'AEI, iraiSioc, i<pyi, Kai
]32 'AvTiKpi/. [Chap. vii.
Sometimes it has iiii ironical sense, /o7-sooM. If is used to intro-
fluce an instance of any [h\n^ ; for exatiiple : oloy a/ueXei kciI -u tov
Il'AwSa/iai'ros Trore faai (TVfifiijvai, such, for example, as, &c. Aristiil.
(!e Qu;\t. p. 4!2-2.
II. (VI.) 'Atrik-pv, oner against, vis a vis, and iiyriKpvs, openly, are
sometimes, by orators and poets, used one tor tlie other. \_KaTayTiKfiv
tT/s 'Iflnpias, Uiod. S. V, 17. Herni.] '
III. (V'l!.) Both, but. oftener uvTiKpvs, are used by Homer for
qvHc through, through and through; as, airii;pvs be bi" avxeios I'lXdev
fiKutKi'i : (wliich is expressed by bminrepes and bianpo also.) So in
Thuc. (Hvixevoi TuXas (jov re/^ovs or rijs woXews) ras Oupns tov oto'/juu-
Tos elvai, Kul cn'TtKpvs blabay es tu e^w : and that there ivas a thorough-
fare, a win) quite through, to the. outside of the tozvn: ii, 4.
IV. (VIII.) "AvTik-pvs, as a military term, si^nilies in front, in the
van, and is opposed to KaTomv, in the rear : 01 fiey arriKpvs tn-tovres,
01 he KUT(')~iv : Dion. Hal. iii.
V. (IX.) It may sometimes be rendered undisguisedly ; as in ov
Kpvcpa Kdi bi €v\af5eias t))v eavrov yvionrjv (f!ro(j)aiy6fieyoy, «/\\' uyriKpvs
Kui dpacreios : Dion. Ilal. viii.'" Sometimes by the adjective ;^«//;«/.>/e,
or glaring ; as in uyrii;pvs biafioXi) ravra, (undcrst. ecrriv :) c'est line
pure calomiiie que cela.''
VI. (X.) In later writers it has a signification of proportion, rela-
tion, or conformity : ras /utr aXXas y^i'ipiTas ov rwv TrpaypuTioy uyriKpvs
. clvai aviil3ef)T)K€v, equal to, on a par ivith, in proportion to : Aristid.
in Exord. Panath. ra rvy ye, liyTiKpvs tj/s lioKimTovs /deyaXoxPu^ias,
ohx iip-rraae Tuy (ccKfUH' (jovXi/jiwv : but now, matching (or rivalling) the
magnanimity of Socrates, he did not seize the opportunity, although
suffering extremity of hunger : Themist. Or. ix.
VII. (XI.) It is sometimes, in truth, in reality, properly , truly:
{^evidently : manifestly :^ nnpadefieyov be rov deov jxuyov I'lVTiKpvs vyra,
liuseb. Prte}). 11. uvTiKpvs Xpiff-tariKws, aXX' cuj^t 'lovba'ikios ci^v
aymre<ltrivty : Id. Demonstr. i.
Sometimes directly, straightforward : Tiix't^ra nvXXaftm'-es, ayov-
aiv (iyriKpvs ws u7roKre;'oi;»'res : L\S. adv. Agorat. p. 4-97 • [^d. Reirik.]
KuXXioy ijv tiiTtcpi's Trapa rw KaXXiTnru) karaXiTTe'iy tu upyvpinr, De-
mosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1242. [1. 22. ed. lleisk.]
VIII. (XII.) It signifies aho expressly : â– il/)]^t(jf.ia ixv-iKpvs Trep\ -ov-
Tov TOV oyo/aaTos yeypinrTai, Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 38 1. ed. lleisk.
ijxul -iTfiil ei'pa^ aTTihv vvu airrivTriKf : Pint, lie insinuated that he well knew tlie ria-
in Duiiietr. p. 1044. 1. 3. ed. H. St. ture of his son's confinement, hinges ou
Autifj^onus, haviiif^ heard anoliier time tiic word afxe\ii. — J. .S.
that he (liia son Denietiins) was ill, u-ent ' Twy Tlpvravfoov KaroJ/TOf/Ju, Aristoph.
to see luin, and on his arrival met a beau- Eccl. 87. — J. S.
tiful t/outii at the door: as soon os he had '" ^.txavTal ye ttAovtuv &VTiKpvs, Aii-
entered, he sat dotcn by him and felt his stopli. I'lut. 134. — J. S.
pulse. The fever has now left me, said ^^ "hvriKpvs, evidenllij, manifestly: So-
JJemetrius. WIIV Tni'LY, (or IMAli- Kf7i' — &vTiKpvs ixrjSiv Xiyav ■. Aristo|.l).
RY,) answered Antigonus, a bcaudful Thesni. 442. absolutely : P^tnay yap &y-
hoy going away did meet tiic at the door us riKpvs 56^(ii fx "Apijy : Aristoph. I'lut.
/ was t'oming in. Mere all llic plea- 328. hov Oiuiaom' &yTiKpvs riiiv 'Hpa-
santry of Antigoiius's answer, by which itXuZwy, Id. ib. 3H4. — J. S.
§ iv. Rule l.] 'Apap6rbjs,&c. 133
y()i\\pai, waTTfp tvy Xeyoo, To'a piifinaiv ovtws uvTiKpus : DciHobtli. ibid.
p. 220. iiyriKpvi vrreTj^oj'ro, Dioi). llalic. v. vpiaas, i'tiTiKpvs T))y
iiiTiay Tfjs tiKrji, Id. iv."
SECTION IV.— Of the adverbs apapcj-tos, llpn, anapr), ews
iipTi, upTi'ws, ctrexrws, urpefua, c'lrpe^as, av, av6is, aire, avriKa.
Rule I. 'Apaporws, derived from upapwi, llie pret. middle of dpw,
to Jit, to adapt, sij^nifies lirst, aptly, jithj, congruously : Mcxre ndf
llboiiis apapoTuJi uvrol vTnipe.reiy, IMato I'licsdr. p. 240. 1. 32. next
jirmly : iirrwrus ev npoftoKy, kui fAeyovras apctporujs, bej^ecOrii rovs iro-
\€f.uovs : Pint, ill Pomp. p. 656. ;iud in Cvts. p. 729- and Diod. S.
says that a certain very ferocious beast of tlie ox kind moves its horns
iind ears at other times, Ka-a be tus /i/ij^as laTrjariv apaporws, b. iii.
"Aprt signifies — 1. time but just past ; a little while ago: urrtper
cipn Xaip€(j)U)yTa 'EuJKparrjs, Aristopll. Nub. 154. ws airo yviivaaioio
KaXuv TTovQv apri Xnrovai, Tlieocr. ii, 80. and in this sense it is joined
with any tense except a present future. Most of its compounds
retain the same signification; as, apriy\v(l>ris, recently sculptured:
T heocr. Epigr. iv, 2. upTiyeveOXcs, recently horn, neiv-born : Orph.
Arg. 384. — 2. 710W, at this time, with a present tense oidy : apn
evpasvTZ£povb6vuiJ€iftea6anrobi,TUeocr.n, 104. v. xxiii, 26". xxv,
163. lipTi yeyeu'ifjbwv Trepi to cto/uu rws Kpor(i(j)U)s re, Tlieocr. xi,
9. So Xen. Anab. vii, 4, 7- eybov yap ayijp cipn ruyx«>'e«, Soph.
Aj. 9. V. Eurip. Ale. IO69. aprt be i'JKeis 11 iraXat ; Plato in Crilia.
V.' Aristot. Piiys. iv, 13. — 3. "A,07i repeated serves to connect mem-
bers of sentences : eiratvuv cipn [Jiev es to kuXXos, iipTi be €s Tcts
TTpc'tleis Kai Tov irXovTov, now, — noiv : Lucian, Dial. Diog. et Alex.
"ApTi is joined with numerals, i\s jam is in Latin: "Opyides Tpirov
iiprc Toy eayaroy upBpoy ueiboy, Thcocrit. xxiv, 63.
The comptnind uttuptI \s,/rom this time, henceforth: tovs yjpr]aTovs
fjovovs — uTxapTL TrXoi/rJ/crai TTon)(Tti> : Aristopll. Plut. 388. So in the
New Testament, Rlatth. xxiii, 39- xxvi, 29. because the Hebrew
nni^Q is so used : but ews llpTi, till now, up to this time, appears
to be used in the New Testament only to express the Hebrew
^i^i^*â– Ti^ which is rendered by the Septuagiut, ews tov vvv.
'Apriuis is, a little while since, just now : e(pdapi.tivas yap apTiu)s
tvpiuKOfxev Xeias ananas, Soph. Aj. 25. Socr. airoXel kukkttu. Streps.
aXX' w 'y«0', uTToXwX' apTiws: Aristoph. Nub. 724. [7 It). Bekk.]
Tex»»? signifies two things, art or skill, and craft, artijice, or fraud:
hence two adjectives, ur€)(yos, unskilful, and arex»»)s, candid, open,
" *Eo-Ti BaKiSos XW'^M^S &vTiKpvs Xe'7<^i/ lias cited under Rule 11. Tn all the uses
eis Tas JiiipeAoKOKKvyias, Arisioph. Av. of &vTiKpv and &i'TiKpvs it is very easy to
9G2. expressly. So tlie word signifies also trace a relation to the primary lutaninp,
in that passajje of lsa;us, (de llagui;c ortr «g«/«s< or o/j/josj^f, derived from the
liered. p. 282. lleisk.) wliich Zcunius preposiliun Kfrf. — J. tj-
134 'Arpc/itts, Sec. [Chap. vii. § iv.
i^uilekss. From (ircx''os conies llie adveil) ar^yrws, inartijici(illj/,un-
skiljully, clumsilfi ; ;»ntl from are^»'>)$ llie udverh arf)(^)a)$, which
signifies — 1. guihksaly, openh/, candidly, sinccrdij : tovto be anXuis,
Kai ciTe^yws, Kai 'icruis ein'iOuis, e^io zap' e/uanrw : Plat. Flia^d. c. 49- —
i2. really, truly : aofjiov ye rovrt, koI yepovri irpoaipopov e^e.vpes are^vius
ipapjiaKOv arpayyovpicti : Aristo])li. Vesp. 806. dW drej^i'ois, wanep
V TlpojTevs, iraiToSaTTos ylyrrj : Plato, Ion. p. 541. — 3. absolutely:
<p€vl u)S ovbev uT€-)(^i'ws uyies €(rTii> ovbevusl Aristoph. Plut. 3(>2. ovb'
av bieXe^Belrjv ure^vuis ro'is iiWois, Aristoph. Nub. 424. bpujt'Twy
urex»'a>s o ri xpyj^ovat, Aristoph. Nub. 452. v. Nub. 437- Also
precisely, Just : »■>) AT eyivy ovv urext'ws eiradov tovtI irure, Aristoph.
Nub. 407. 'iho plainly, evidently : Kunbely c^eujs, drej^rws, mi pabiui :
Plato Euthjplir. 5.
II. 'Arpf/xos and urpefxa have nearly the same signification ; the
latter is used by writers after Homer, as Eustathius observes, but by
Homer only when the metre requires it, as in II. o, 318. They signify
not otdy without motion, steadily : and gradually or gently ; but
also accurately , regularly, in due order and place, methodically ; as,
Tols xpoviKo'is boKei /udWov QovKvbibT)s avfifepecrdai, KaiTrep ovbe avrols
itTpefia avrraTTOfuerois : although the chronology itself is not accu-
rately adjusted:'' Plutarch, in ThemistocI, p. 125.
III. "E^e avpef^as is a phrase used by Monier and Aristoph. keep
still: Nub. 260. — stop: ej^' arpif^as' alrov ariid'' tiricr\es tov bponov :
Aristoph. Av. 1200. Hold, (to ti person speaking:) uKovaov i'lbr)' nave
Twv wa0\ae7/idrwi'' e'x' arpe^a : Aristoph. Av. 1244. <? Slay, make
yourselj easy : e^' arpe/jas' (c«j 7ovto yap luaoinai cot : Lucian, Charon,
p. 141. "E\eiv is joined with arpcfjiia also : urpeixiav Kyfiv, to remain
still, Xen. Cyrop. vi. p. l65.
Av, (which Hoogeveen conjectures to be properly the neuter of
the adjective avs, i. e. aires in tiie dialect of the Lacediemonians
and Cretans,) signifies — 1. els TovTriau), hacktvards, back ; as, av epv-
aav, Horn. II. a, 459. th<'y bctit back the neck of the victim : and
av epvoPTn, draiving back the string of tlie bow : Ilom. II. 0, 325. —
2. once more, to give another example, on the other hand, on the
contrary : ravra (.tey 6 Trap' Ifiov Xe^ef ro'ts be irap' v^wj' vfiels av trr<(T-
reXXere o ri vixlv boKei av^^jepoy ehai : but you on the other hand, or
also, instruct your amlassadors, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 30. ovbafiuis
ye Ti'iTTio efiavTov eis ri/y tHiv t'ipj^en' ftuvXofieyioy ra^iy. — ovbe els rrjv
bovXelay av (on the other hand) t/uovrtu- rnrrw : Xen. Mem. ii, 1,
7 and 11. v. § 13. ovb' early ovberi rCJy iifierkpiov e-)(Opwv rpoirawv
vvbty a(f i/fiwy yjfxiy b' av {on the contrary) utto ttoXXw)' : Demosth.
adv. Lept. p. 480. [I. 20. ed. lleisk.] Sec Plat. Phivdr. p. 251. de
Hep. iv. p. 420. Aristoph. Vesp. 57."^ — 3. It is put for ttuXiv, again :
V Perhaps drpe'/ua lias here its ordinary to interrupt another.— J. S.
sense: tlio clironology was not st'<</f(i on •■In Aristophanes, a 13a;otif<n being
sucli a firm basis iis to remain j/n(/is<ur/;c(f asked whctlier lie will take back from
anil uncontroverted. — J. S. Attica earthenware, or apua\ (a kind of
'I \n this sense Plato often uses llie biualKish,) in exeliange for liis own goods,
phrase, wlien in liis dialdgues sonietliing nnswers, aipvus i) Kipa^ov ; a\\' tVT iKU-
occuta to one speaker which inducts him «A\' '6 n Trap' afilv nrf'an, raoc 5' av ttuKv
Rule 2—6.]
AuOi, AvtUu.
135
see II. o, 540. (p, 394.* for be : Horn. II. X, 367. and v, lOS. where it
answers to fjey. It appears to be put for bi), then, therefore: Horn.
11. 13, 493, 6.18.'
AvOi is, in that place, there: e. p. Hoin. II. e, 296. But avdis {uv-
Tis in the Ionic dialect, or in the language of Homer,) is — 1. back,
back again, II. k, ivZ. e, 257. — 2. (3.) on the contrary, contradic-
torily : enrtlv — ws /3\a/3>j re eori rw tptofjeiu) KaJ IpCovTi, Ka\ uvdis, ws
fieyicTTov TU)v ayadiLt' rvy^avei ; Plato Fliaeclr. p. 263. — 3. (4.) again,
a second time: a\X ai/Ois av rvTrrt'iao/uai, Aristopli. Nub. 1382. Md\'
auOis (and ^jctX' av) is a plirase used when what ijiimediately precedes
it is to be considered or understood as said twice, by which means it
becomes more emphatical ; as, oVyuot yut'tV fu'/Ois, v. /Esch. Choepli.
876. tbov ju«/V avdis TovO' erepov there again I another blunder!
Aristoph. Nub. 67O. as if one should say, there, there !— 4^. {5.)
hereafter, at a future time: kui' fi)) TrapnvriK, avdis elai xP''l'^'t^°<-'
Eurip. Or. 907. ovb' auOis aZ ae a^wi^frat \iuvau)v : Aristoph.
Ach. 854. Hence taavdis or is avdis, to a future time: rets Ibias
biacpopas Is avdis ayaf^ntXwfieQa, Thuc. iv, 63.
Upwra fiev — avris be, Herodot. viii, 60, 2. not of time, but par-
litively. Avdis, as wtU as aZ, answers to yuev preceding : Soph. Ant.
165.
Of aSre the same may be said as of av. It signifies rtirsus, again,
even in Attic writers, as in Aristoph. Lys. 66. Like av and avdis,
it answers to (xev preceding. See Horn. II. o, 237- Od. Xi 6. and so
in Attic writers. ^ ^-
IV. AvTiKa in its most common acceptation xs, forthwith, presently ;
in which sense it is opposed to vvv by Plato; viiv fxer — t))v evbaifxoia
TToXiv TrXuTTOfiev — ' avri^a be ti]v evarriav (TK€\p6fieda : de Rep. iv. p.
420. and when the interval between the present time and that signi-
fied by avTiKa is to be represented as exceedingly small, /^a\o, or
bi] fiaXa, is often added to avTiKa: dp' olad' on avToiis )//id$ avriKa /^laXa
beuaet ^ux^adai ; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 8. [v. Deraosth. in Aristog. p.
778. 1. 25. ed. Reisk.] "
V. VI. But it signifies also present, at the present time ; as, 6
avTii^a (pujjos, a'l avTiKa iibovai. And so the conipciund TrapavTiKa : tiiv
TrapavTiKa ii(7V)(iav, Demosth. de Foed. Alex. p. 215. [ed, Reisk.] rT]s
TrapuvTiKa 7)So>'*7s, Id. Ol. iii. p. 34. [ed. Reisk.] 'Ev tw izapavTiKa,
at the present time, for the present. In this sense it is oj)posed to
what signifies any thing future; ovVws ?/ Trapavrlx »;§«»'') kuI pg-artoyr]
fieliov tffj^vet Tuv ttoQ' varepov avvoiaeiv fxeXXorros I Demosth. Phil. ii.
Acb. 903. TiBv TToAXous ixOpovs ix^iv ;
oirS' aZ a.(T<pa\4s: Demosth. de Fals. Leg.
p. 181. ed. Herwag. ii. p. 409. 1. 25. ed.
Rei^k. who adds ou between exf* """^
oii5'. — J. S.
* Olov ad SidpaKev (pyov, oTov av, (plXai,
T(55e ; Aristopli. Tliesm. 703. i. e. in
addition to his former exploits. 6 SpctKcoi/
yap ioTi fiaKphv, d t' aWas al ixaKp6v :
and a suMsag-e again (or (00) is long:
Aristoph. Eq. 207.— J. S.
' Av is also an interjection ; alas! av
TdXas avi}p, 3aTis KaKhu toiovtov ayKuAl^S'
rai : Simonides. — J. S.
" AvTiKa, nt some future time ; ano-
ther time: a\\' d jJ-if nvos &\\ov Se7
TTphs rovTOis, o7s \tyei. 'Efi'o(pctiv, Kal av-
tIko, eleo-Ti irotfiv t Se vvu itp-qKe, SoksI
HOI (lis Tax^crra \^ri<plcraa9at &piaTov e.'rai :
Xen. Anab. iii, 2, 22.— J. S.
136 AvToOer. [Chap. VII. § V.
p. 72. [I. !()• f<l. I'eisk.] to h^v avriua, hvfTfjn')^ov' to be /jtXXor,
evKaruyiliyiaTov at' yeroiro : Tiiuc. To rvv benov, c. g., is simply
the evil present when spoken of: to irapov beivoi', the evil present
:if any time, whatever tluit time may be, without any signification of
either the transitoriness or durability of the evil. To avriica, or to
TcapavT iKa, heivov, the evil present at any point of time, but of no
duration, and about to pass away very speedily, o 5' nvrt^' ?/tSi)j,
Ka< hihovs TToWt/v j^c'tpty, elauvTis ei3\a\lie *. Eurip. Suppl. 414. Avritca
is used, like lifia, with re and Kui, for, as soon as: ahrtKa re Toy
lydpbv eiopaKe, cat Trpos binWayas wpjjrjirey, no soo?ier did he see /lis
enemy, than, &c.
VII. AvTiKa introduces an example or instance of any thing that
has been said ; for instance ; as for example : " ebibaaKe bk Ka\ ^e^pt
VTov beoi eaireipny e'tycti ei^ciaTOv TipayfmTus tuv opOws ireTraibevfieyor.
rtvrif:a yeiMi/xe-piay jtje)(fu /jey tovtov eiprj be'ty finyOaveiy, €u)S, &C. Xen.
Mem. iv, 7, 2. v. Ein. and Iliiidcni). also Xen. CEc. xix, 18. Cyrop.
iii, 1, 29. Callini. in Jov. 76. Particles are sometimes addetl :
avTiKa yap, el /.ley eipi'ivr] boKu, &c. Xen. Hier. 7- and iEscIiin. Dial,
ii, 24. avTii:a ye o [xey "IWios ovtoct), ovb' oaov KV))auaQui to ovs {(paat)
rrynXtiv uyair : Lucian, Bis accus. in init. Also avTuu ye toi. — e'i tis
uvTiicn b)) iic'iXa einoi, its, &c. Deniostli. ad V. Aristog. p.77<S. [1.25.
ed. Reisk.] â– " Also avrUa bi) ttov. v. Markland. ad Lys. p. 647. 'H'd
855. ed. Reisk. ct ad Max. Tyr. Diss, xxiv, 5. Casaub. ad Allien.
p. 604.
SECTION V. — Of the adverbs av-6dey, elra, erteira, ^fiirtjs.
Rule I. AvroOev signifies — l. t^ ahrov tuttov, thence: o nariip o
•70S w'x^o avTotiey : (ec tov becT/jwrripiov) Demostli. adv. Androt. p.
614. [ed. Reisk.] ttoQcv, E,vOr]pe, (jialyr] ; answ. vtto fxey tijv Kara-
Xvatv TOV TToXt/ioi/, eK rijs inrobrjpiai' rvrl fievTot avToOev. from home
here in the town: Xen. Rlem. ii, 8, 1. — 2. t^ nmov tov y^povov,
at once, suddenly, off hand: T/ros avToQev el ebpas kui dvfiiKws <pr]a\,
&C. Polyb. E. L. 6. avToOev ayitpplypas Toy tjr) fxeyitTTioy Kiybvyoy :
Plut. in Publ. p. 111. 1. 11. [direeth/ ; not itulirectly and by stra-
tagem, as Solon acted] — 3. e^ uvtoD tov TrpayfjaTos, without prcpa-
rulioil or study ; extempore : ky biKnyiKi] Ibeq. \6yov, nay effKevcia/jeyos
r/'(."?js, TTpoairoiov avruOev Xeyeiv : Ilcrmog. o fiey ovy ^rj/Jt'irpios avToOev
t-K TOV 7rpo(iefti]K('iTo% e<pi) : Polyb. vii, 3. Hence — 4. it is used in
speaking of what is obvious; at hand, in readiness, 0/ what is easily
" Exempli gratia, ac primo quidcm, Div. vii, 19. — J. S.
[statim : nos gieich. Hermann,] atciue tit '" Perhaps outi'ko S>) ;ua\a here is, sitd-
indc orJiar : Bninck, See Aristopli. dcnly , this very instant; ns in Dfinosth.
'I'liesm. 151. Av. 100. 378. 574. 10i)0. in Tiniocmt. nal ix7]v, il avrlna Sv; fxaKa
IMut. ISO. " Cogitarc debebis, nullam Kpavyi]v aKovrraiTe nphs T(p Sucaarripiq},
;irt('iii Uteris, sine interprctc et sine alicpia fir' ttvoi rts, uis avicfKTai rh Sed^aiTi'/jdof,
oxerciliilionc, percipi posse: non lunge 01 5t dfafiurai (pevyovaiv i5vc. p. 701.
ahieris : (i. c. clvtmo) num jus civile vcs- 1, 20. ed. Reisk. — J. S.
(rum ex libris cognosci potest?" Cic. ad
Rule i, .2.] Eha. 137
done or obtained: eicrly alrlai hiTrn'r piia fikv ahroQev kuI Tvaaiv
■jTpo<pat'{is : Polyb. iv, 39. avrodey be out' tovto, t:a\ ovk €k fiaicpov
bteXey^o/jiev : Kuseb. Pra^p. i. kui to avroOey be npos ev^uitav Traaiv
ai'dpuiTTois Trpojhl3\i}/.tei'ov : Id. ib.
It sijjiiifies also, /rom the very circumstances of a case, or from the
very thing itself : rore hk. aWoQev khe'iKvvTO, on bai/xovutv epya i)** ra
reXov/jieya : Clirjsost. torn, v.*
II. (IV. ") Elra, which properly signifies succession, then, next,
afterwards, is often used, and commonly with some anger, in intro-
ducing a question, observation, or the like, arguing absurdity, incon-
sistency, improbability, heinousness, &:c. and founded on something
preceding, from which elra implies an inference: elr, (w t'i ay eiTrtbu
ae rts opdiUs Trpoaeinnt ;) eanv oirov av 7rapw>', TTjXiKavTrjv 7rpd^ii> Kal
avuiiayj-ar, — opwf cKpaipov/uevor fie Trjs iroXeais, //yavoKr/jfras ; seeing
nie then, as you say, depriving the state of such an advantage and
alliance, did you on any occasion {for you ivere present) express any
indignation? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 3l6. [p. 232. I. 20. ed. Reisk.]
TtoTepov ae tis, A^iff^ivij, tTis noXews kydpbv, j) Ifxov elvat (pij ; e/aoi' br/Xo-
von. elra, oh fxev i]v Trap' ifxov 5<\jjj' — Xa/ielr, — e^eXiTres" ou 6' eyii ^ti'
ciduos, — Trj TToXet S' — avayKi] twv ye brj/Aonia TreTrpayfih'iDy fxere'ivat riis
t6^i]s, efTavda a.iri]VTt)Kas ', opa firj tovtiov fiev e)(Opds ys, eyuos be Trpoir-
TToi^ : Demosth. ib. [p. 268. 1. 29- ed. Reisk.] enJjpuPTr^Te, elra vvv
Xeyets ; to a supposed physician, who, after the deatl) of a patient,
should say what ought to have been done: wrongheaded fool ! and is
it now that y oil tell us of it? Demosth. ib. p. 308. [I. 5.] ed. Reisk.
ctW ubtKUJS r'ipS,(t ', eiTa irapiov ore fie eitTfjyor n'l XoyiaTal ov Karijyopeis ;
[Demoath. de Cor. p. 266. 1. 8. ed. Reisk,] See also Demosth. ib.
[p. 259- '• 23. ed. Reisk.] ravra bi) roXf^i^s Xeyeiy tyn^aiaJs i'lbrj
Trpos ijfids ; eJr eyw (tov <peicrofj.(ii; and shall I then spare you? Ari-
stopli. Ach. 3!1. iEacus to the shade of Xerxes, elm ae, th kuO-
apfja, 1/ 'EWcis ecppiTTe — ; and was it you then, o miscreant, such a
contemptible shadow as you, that Greece dreaded? Lncian, Dial.
INlort. t. l.p. 413.^ V. ^1. V. H. i, 34. and (V.) without interro-
gation : elra tovto fikv ovyl \eyec to \!/r](pia fia' el be, &c. et cependant ,
and yet : Demosth. pro Cor.'
YJ-a expressing a consequence : i;Xt]t{}p elfxi prjtnojTii^os, Kal avKO-
<pdvTT]s, Kai irpayfiaTohi<pT]i' elra beofjiai wTepa Xaftujv kvkX^ irepiaofielv
Tas TToXeis — : therefore, in consequence, on that account : Aristoph.
Av. 1424."
' It seems sometimes to mean sponta- v Praxag. Xeyois Si/. Mul. eTro irpiv
neously, of one's self: otre avrddfv duvo- jrifTi/ \4yw ; Aristoph, Eccl. M2. what f
elro â– napaXap.^a.viiv Trap' inuv rrji/ vavf, speak before I have drunk ? S> TpicTKctKO-
oih\ €Tr€i5r/ — ■r)ua.yKaaOri eVl tV vaZv airte- Saijuwv, elra AeuKbr d/iTre'xst ; and do you
vai, (\6ccy Ti6(\r](Ti fj.oi 5ia5e|acr0ox ahrriv : put on white ? and yet do you put on
Demosth. adv. Polycl. p. 121.5. 1. 28. ed. white? Aristopli. Acli. 1024.— J. S.
Reisk. avrSBeu ts t^ ^acriXtl SiaKet/J-epui ^ Elra rwi/ irpSTepov yiyeprififvuv av-
TTphs avrhv oLKflws ivirvx^, Kal Oepaireyo- Zpwv kyaQuiv fiiixvrjcai : and yet, notwith-
fi.4v(f) yparpais Ka\ irii'a^i.v cnrh rrjs 'EWd- standing: Demosth. de Cor. p. 329. I.
Sos : kindly disposed towards him of him- 2G. II. — J. S.
self without additional extrinsic tnotices : " A participle and flra, instead of a
Plut. Arat. p. 1887. 1. 20. cd. H.St.— J. S. rerb and koI, serve to unite two members
Viger. s
1-38
"ETTeira, &c.
[Chap. vii.
III. (VII.) "En-e«ra is properly 7iixt, afterwards : Iience it signifies
a consequence, eillier with or without interrogvition : el ftev bi) tVopoi'
ye KeXfvere f.i avTuy eXtaOai, Yluis ar emir Obvafjos tyw deioio \aOoc-
fxrjr ; Honi. II. k, 242. aiul in Od. a, 05. ejrena refers to what
Minerva had |)reviously said, el b' heov b)) tovtov {/.ivdov viz.) utto
<nrovb)'is ayopeveis, It, (ipci b)) rot eVeira [then, an inference ;] deal
(ppeyns i'lXecray uvroi: Horn. II. i], 36'. When it is thus nsed inter-
rog^atively in the beginning of a sentence, it has a greater em{)hasis,
and expresses wonder, indignation, or other emotions of mind, like
eirrt : eireiT airu Ta()l>ov rovs Beovs vwepfpore'n, ; and do you then ? &c.
Aristoph. Nub. 226. eneiT, w t^aTc'ipare, — av /jiei' — TraXnia epya
eXeyes, — t^/it- bf:, w -pirayMi'iara, — ru riios (ppmn^fia Xaftorrn ara/SatVetv
en'i ru fiufxa ebei ; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 297- '• 21- fd. Reisk.] eTreira
bF}Tn fx I'^eriSere ; and yet, notwiihstunding that the mistress of the
house was lying dead in it, you received me and entertained me with-
out mentioning it? Eurip. Ale. 822. see Eurip. Hippol. 330. 440.
eVetra Tra'ibas j^pi) (pvreveiv /cat rpe(peii> ; and yet, after all this, are
people to beget and rear up children ? Aristoph. Vesp. 1 128.*
It sometimes signifies so, therefore, {things being so,) connecting
the different parts of nairation: ei-d' A'ins fiev cTretra kut aa-Kiba
â– n-avToa fiar]v rvle : Uoin. 11. o, 49. \p, 818. See 11. a, 505. v, 586.
0(
] o6.
It is placed between a participle and verb in the same manner as
eira : (see the notes on eha :) fii) fxoi (pOorijTrjT, — el tt-wj^os wv, eneiT
ev 'A9r)vaiois Xeyety /.teWoi : if I being a poor man, yet, nevertheless,
am about, Sec. Aristoph. Ach. 497."^
"Efi-rrqs (which is tiie Ionic form, the Attic being eyuTras and e/i7ra) **
signifies, however, yet, notwithstanding, although, nevertheless ; and
has always reference to something previous : alel ^lei' oiew., ovbe ae
Xtjdtjj' Trpiilni b' if^nrrjs ovn bvviiaeai'. Hom. II. a, 563. eTrmKreiptit
be yir, bvarr^vov e/jiTrus, Kainep ovTa bvfr/jevfj : Soph. Aj. 122. See
II. e, 191« ovK Tiv eywye ae — KeXoifirji' 'ApyeioKTiv n/jvie^ievat, \u-
T^ovai -nep efiTTtjs : Horn. II. i, 514. cf. Od. o, 360. efiirr]s fxoi
Tol-^ot fjieyupwv naXai re jueaob/jai (paivovr^ c0t)aAjLto7s wcrel nvpos
aWufJtei'oto. 7] finXa Tis Beds efbov — : Horn. Od. r, 37. YET it is
so; the walls, £)-c. do appear to me of flame, ALTHOUGH, (or
of a sentence into one : '(v 6 avvSovKos
aK(!)i\ias ahrov ihs TT\r)ya.s elr' avipono :
Aiistopli. Pac. 745. — .). S.
* See Aristoph. Plut. 11-18. Nub.
1219. Thesm. G:{7.— J. S.
' Yet, neteilheless, nolirith^tandht^ :
ovic %aff '6iT0}s oil vavTias €t', ci {eVe, ucTTts
7* aKoixras '6ti rfdvTjKe TlpaiTfas, firftr
ipMTas, ivSov tar â– f) '^ci-rrius : Aristoph,
'I'liebiii. 881. TovTu Siyr' ovk a*yx'^''''7>
Kinar' iyw 5^t' tV0o5J (TTpay'}evu(j.ai ;
Aristopli. y\cli. 120. See also A v. 120.
.Sonietintes when used iriteiTOgaliv(>h-, it
n\-dy be reiidereil by and: Car. 5ys av
/uoi Tt> Tpifiwviov, 'Iv' afKpUacii rhv avKO<pdv-
T-qv TovTovi. Just, jxi) 5^0'' Uphv yap
iari Tov TlXovrov traXai, Car. tTrsiro
TToC KaWiov avareOi'jfffTat, tj nepl novripht'
duSpa Ka\ TOiX'^P^'X'^" ! "'"' 'I'lure I prny
am it be Itetter suspended as (tn offering,
than, &c.? Aristoph. I'liit. 938. — J. S.
'' 'AAA.' f/j.Kas iipfpi KaKhv ahis, &TeKVos
div ; J'luri]). Ale. 009. nf6voi/xef t/UTray
5' oti Tij hu i^iavafU p.ov : Kurip. Cvcl.
SS.'}. (pvKaKa Tf vKpov a/i(pl ffo] ^eixpw, rpo-
(prjs iioKvov fpLva, ku ravvv TjjAoiwos
01XVU-- Soph. Aj. 665. ex cm. Erf.— .I.S.
§ vi. Rule i.] 'Enel. 139
NOTWITHSTANDING THAT) I did not think so, or doubted
about it atjirst." See Od. o, 214. II. i?, 196.
SECTION VI. — Of the adverbs eTre), €Treib>], krriiv, eTretbuv,
eTrietKiis,
Rule I. 'Ettci signifies — l. after that, when; (also, fi-om the
time when, siJtce : v. Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 138.) j(3j/ 6' ap' ijveipos,
CTree Tov fivdov uKovae : Horn. II. ft, l6. v. II. t, 92. and when used
in this sense in oblique phraseology or narration, an infinitive some-
times follows it: ^KvOns yap rovs NojUciSos, eTrct re (T<jji Anptlov ejfta-
Xelv €s T))i' yjijprjv, fiera ravra fxejxoievai niv Tiaaadai : flerodot. Er. c,
84. and in tlie same circumstances eneibr) also is roliowetl by an infini-
tive ;/ eTreibi] be yevecrdai eiri rfj 0(\<'g ry 'AyaOujyos, but that when he
arrived at Agathon's : Plat, Symp. c. 2. [p. 177- '• 2. ed. Bas. 1.]
In conjunction with rn^ifrrn, evBeuis, and the like adverbs, it may be
rendered, as soon as ever. — 2. because, seeing that, since, for : /uj'/ fie
KTelv, knel ov-^ v/uoyaarpios "Ek'ropos elj-U : Hoin. II. ^, 9^. Oappei,
firjrep, evrel vols Xeovaiv aiiTols I'jbr] i,vvijQi]s etfii : Lucian, Dial. Ven.
et Cup, In this sense it is often used very elliptically : in the
Ranae of Aristopb, Bacchus and his slave Xanthias having e-xchanged
clothes, they are both scourged by jEacus to discover by the eft'ect
of the lashes which is the real god ; Bacchus, on receiving a stroke,
exclaims, "AttoWov, vs itov Ar]\av j) FIvOwv' exc«$ ! Xanth. ijXyijaev
ovK ijKOVGns ; Bacch. ovk eywy', eTret 'iapftov 'iTTTrwvaKros ave/uturTjiT-
KOfi^v. Here eTret refers not to the words immediately preceding it,
OVK eywye (jjAyrjo-a,) but to some understood, / exclaimed "AttoWov,
&c. because I recollected an iambic of Hipponax. Socr. aW, J
TTOi'Tjpe, Tnvra. y ear' oiiK tippeva. Streps, oi<K cippef' v/jlIv Icttiv; Socr.
ovbnfiuis y'. eTret ttuis ay KuXeaeias erTv^u>v 'A-fivvlg. ; Aristoph. Nub.
689. After cTret, et ravr earn' uppeva is to be understood. So el
cibiKos eif] [j]] is to be understood after tTret in Rom. iii, 6'. and et
bvvaiTO reXeiibaai, in Hebr. x, 2,
It is thus used elliptically before the imperative mood also ; espe-
cially when what is spoken of appears so certain that the pers(ni
addressed may be defied to dispute it : to yap " ovk exw o n â– )(^pil>iJ.ui,"
ri TTore Xeyeis, w ^lovvcxobwpe ; )'/ bifXoron, ms ovi: e^o) t£eAey^ai oi't-oi' ;
cTret (for, if that be not the meaning of the words) etTr^, tI act aWo
* I have followed Hermann in this in- had said these (kings, — &K\o p-iv oi'Se*'
terpretation. There is the authority of aiToKpidrjvai rhy â– trpo<pi)Tr)v, &c. Plat. Al-
Hesychius however for the significatioa cib, ii. p. aSl. 1. 5!. ed. Bas, 1. Aiyerai
TtduTccs, prorsus, omnino, assigned to (p.- — diuacrTals avrhv dire'iv, 'on vv/jlus earii'
TTTjs by Zeunius : and in tlic passage here — • eirepwrrjcras Be, ei' SiKUius aiiTo'is Kal
referred to, Hcsych, explains (fjL-irrjs iiael Ka\ws exon' o p6po9 (paiverai, iireiSi]
by ndvTus I'lfioioos. — J, S, (prjffai irdvTas rovs StKan-ras, (liri7v Sti,
/ — SoKe7y Kpariarov elvai, Trti.iipauTa^ Ike. Deniosth. in Tiiiiocr- 706. 1. ed,
vphs''AiJ,iiwi'a, iKilvov iiTipuiTav. — iirtihri Rcisk. — J. S,
fiprjKfv ai ravTa, (ind that ichcn they
140 'Eneibi}. [ChAP, VII. § vl.
evvoeJ TOVTO tu pfj/nn, to " ovk ^)(w 6 ri '^^riffofiai toIs Xoyois," Plat, in
£iitli}cl. p. 287> 1- 21. And presently afterwards, enel airuKpivai,for
(if it be not so) answer me, &c. So cTrei biba^ov, Soph. El. 353.
cf. Aristopli. Vesp. 517'
'Eirel is frequently joined with various particles; as, evrel iipaf
othertvise, as a consequence your children are unclean : 1 Cor. vii, 14.
'Eirei ye. Since truly : larrjp.*, CTret ye nivb' e(puTrTOf.tai TVirov : Eurip.
Hel. 563. eneinep, seeing it is so, that — .• Eurip. Hel. 1253. l675.
Plato de Rep. v. p. 452. ewei-jrep ye, since truly it is so, that — :
Plat. Plized. p. 114. ene) ovv, seeing then, since therefore: Hebr.
iv, 6. enei rot, for really, for in truth: Eurip. Heracl. 508. 744.
and interrogatively : enei rot o'iei fie avrov ovtws liv ttotz Kopvftayndaai,
ws — ; Lucian, Epist. Sat. t. iii. p. 408. I. 86. As to cTrel toi ye,
Zeunius says that tTrei reasons, toI confirms, and ye urges ; anil he
cites Den)osth. Phil. i. [p. 40. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] but the reading in
that passage is, it seems, rather doubtful ; [see Reiske's note ;] and
Porson affirms that the Attics could not employ toI ye without the
intervention of some other word : for which reason, in Eurip. Suppl.
879- instead of enei toi y ovbev alria (a^ia) iroXis, he reads tirei toi
Kovbev a£,ia noXis, on the authority of Mss. See Pors. ad Eurip. Med.
675.
It is observable that, after particles of time, and especially after
Ittc}, the Greeks frequently iusert in the apodosis or reddition (in the
chief correlative proposition of a sentence) the particle be in such a
manner as to produce an anacoluthon, to render the parts of the sen-
tence not grammatically consecutive ; as, vp^, bp^ raur' act ^povos,
e-Trel fxev erepa, tu be Trap" I'lfiap aiidis av^wy ajtu: Time sees, sees
always, these things; after adverse events have occurred, changing
for the better those which immediately succeed: Soph. Q'-d. C.
1453. So cTret (5»' — , bieleXdot'Tus be — : Hcrodot. ii, 32. enei be
— eboKOVfiev ovk av aXoyus rif 'PwfivXb) ■n-pofJuvaj^rjvai' — aKOirout'Ti be
fioi — efaifeTO, &C. Plut. Thes. 1. errei be npos Kirrav — , eic be
TovTov, &c. Plut. in Pomp. p. 1134. [I. ult.] ed. H. St. See Htr-
mann. ad Horn. h. Ven. 22.9. p. IO7. ad h. Cer. 409-
'E7ret^() signifies — 1. after, after that, when; with an indicative
mood ; as, eneib)) yjn^fxet'Ois ufjeiyor to anobvendai tov avyKaXvitreiv
â– jTuiTU to. TOiavTa efjjaPT), Kat to ev to's ocpdtiXfAols bt) yeXo'iui' t^eppvjj :
Plato de Rep. v. j). 452. v. Eurip. El. 20. Thuc. i. c. 11. and c.
13. With an optative mood eneibi), like all other similar words,
is construed, first, if the words contain the thought either of a person
different from the speaker, or of the speaker himself, but of which he
speaks as of tliat of another: ?'/OeAe»' elaieycti, enetb)} (u'ot)(^t)eiT) : he
wished to enter tvhen the doors should beoi ened. S>oi'i6eXoy, /wished,
may be said. Secondly, if what is signiiied is not a certain lime in
which something was tlone once for all, but a repetition of sometlting
wont to be done ; the reason of which is, that the optative requires
some one of many things, or repetitions of things, to be contemplated ;
not one certain and determined, but any one whatever: Treptefierofiev
ovv eKuaroTe t'ws aicn-^delT] to beafiuirijpwf — . ujewycro yhp ov Trpwi.
krttihii be u.voi'^Qeiri, yri^xev nupU tov iwKpar»j : but when it was
Rule '2— 6'.] ^Eiray, &c. Ml
opened, we used to go in to Socrates: Plat. Plijed. c. 3. [p. 23. 1. 6'
ed. Bas. 1.] With siicli words as evdews, ra^iartt, it signifies, as soon
as ever: eTreibt) evdews tjadorro, immediately on their perceiving : Xen.
Hell. iii. eneib)) roi^tora tyivpurz/s kyivero tov upyvpidv, the moment
he got possession of the money: Dernostli. tneihi) TrpQra tojjdiv kv
opecrai XeXoi-rrey, from the time when first — : Horn. II. o, 234. — 2.
Seeing that, since ; always with an indicative mood : tTteibt] \6yov
buyafiis rvyj^ai'ct xpvy^ayujyia ovaa, Plato I'liicdr. p. 271. ineibt)
T€TV)(^i)kaTe biacpepofxeru), JEicluii. Diid. ii, 13. v. ii, 26. iii, 6. 'ETret-
cijTrep, since truly : tTrett)i7rep o'l y cfiirpoaQev \6yot. ov Trepl tovtov
toKovrji aoi eipfiaOai, yEscliii). Dial, ii, 12.
'ILnav is compounded of tTret and a>', (see Iliad 5, 412.) and there-
fore in the Ionic dialect, which puts >)>' for av or ehi', it becomes
etn'iy. It signifies time only, after, after that, (postqtiam) when,
and, like en-ei^/), is joined with an optative mood, — 1, when mention
is made of another's thoughts or sentiments, as in Horn. II. w, 226. —
2. when those of the speaker himself are mentioned, as in Iliad r,
208. In direct speech, when one certain act or thing is indicated, it
must be joined with a subjunctive; as in Iliad w, 716, where dya-
yinfii is to be substituted for the common but false reading, aydyoifit.
See Hermann, de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. ii, 32. p. 263. Iwav be appuxr-
T7]fxa Ti (Tviu(3p,iravTa Kiyelrai : Demosth. 01. ii. [p. 24. I. 5. ed. Reisk.]
Zo\ TO yepas iroXv fielSov, cyw b' oXiyov re (plXov re "Epj^o/u' e^wv CTrt
vrjas, eTrt)i' t^eKc'ifiu) TroXefxi^ujv : Horn. II. a, 168. v. Matth. xi, 8.
Luke xi, 22.
'Eireibav, compounded of eireibt) and ay, signifies time only, when,
postquam, after that. It is conjoined with an optative mood in the
same circumslances as kneibi] and kiruv : oVws ovv fjtj nTroXrj fAaanyov-
pevos, eneibhv o'ikoi e'irjs : Xen. Cyrnp. i, 3, 18. This is said, as it
were, according to the thoughts of him to whom the words are ad-
dressed.
II. (V.) 'EnieiKuis, besides its ordinary sense, fairly, moderately ,
signifies — 1. xoell, thoroughll/ : tcvt\ fikv eirietKws <tu y' eleiriffraaai,
Aristoph. Vesp. 1241. [124*).] [tolerably well, competently, passu-
bly-]
III. (VI.) — 2. very: koI yap »)»' crrevuy eirieiKuiS Tavrr], hat bvcrj3aTOV
â– )^tDpiov : Xen. Hell. V. [pretty , rather, somewhat.^
IV. (VII.) — 3. conveniently, luckily, or tvholly, altogether : ov piju
aXX' lineiKuis toTiQ\ virep bva/j-aj^^ioTaTov iari twv ^iXiirwov irpayfiariDV,
cat fjeXriaTov yn'iy : Demosth. 01. i. cela va le miexix du monde.
[nearly, pretty nearly , fere. "]
Sometimes tolerably well: ene\ areXajiev eavrov, koi eineiKiJs eaye
TO (Twpa : Demosth. speaking of Philip recovering, [tis yap — 6 ^l^pua-
Twp — uveXafiev avroy, Kai eayev e-meiKuis tu aaipa : Pseudo-Demosth.
in Neser. p. 1364. 1. 27. ed. Reisk.]
V. (VHI.) — 4. satis, in a considerable degree: to fiey awfin ovk
evQvs ovbei' â– nenovBev, uW cTrieicws av)(\'ov eiripeyet â– )^p6roy : but lasts a
considerable time, for a pi'etty long time: Plato Pliacd.
VI. (IX.) — 5. circiter, about, pretty nearly: Xa/jfjdyovirty tiov
pkv inniwy, eis tovs iniXeKTovs, eitieiKuis to Tpirov pipos : Polyb. vi.
142 'Eninpoadey, &C. [ChAP. Vll. § vii.
This sense Plutarch in Lycurg. expresses by irov fiaXitrra : ^reci ttov
fjaXiara \' Kat p .
VII. (X.) — 6. candidly, sincerely, without disguise or deceit :
ovKovv ToaovTov fjey ///«<»' t$ to izpuadey irenepavTai' o yap eff/iey, ewtet-
k-ws wfioXoyrirat : Pialo Alcib. i. [for ive hnve pretty nearly agreed
as to what we are ; for we have come to a tolerably satisfactory con-
clusion as to what we are.]
SECTION VII.— On the adverbs t-TrlTrpoaeey, eZye, 7}, fj, (WITH
THE PARTICLES ANNEXED TO THEM,) AND ijbri.
Rule I. 'KTrlnpoadey elyai, with a dative, is the same as eTrnrprxr-
de'iy,^ I. e. to obstruct the light, or the view of an object ; and pene-
rally, to obstrtict, to stand in the way of : eoiKe Tzavir) -^(iKeTtuy elvai,
Ka\ bvddlipaTOy laropiq. raXrjdks, orav 01 fjtky vcrrepov yeyoj'ores Tuy ypuvoy
eTrivrpoadev vyra rfj yywfxei rwy npctyfjurwy ej^wcri : Plut. in Pcricl.
'ETTiTrpocrOey is used also in signifying preference : Ttjy Ibiay ex^dpav
eirinpoadey ttoiuv tov twv aWuy evd^tijxoyos, to pay more regard to his
own private enmity than to the glory of others: Polyb. E. L. 74*
70 rwj' fjcifftXeioy XvaireXts eniTrpoaOey yiyeadai tov lhi(f avji^kpovros,
that the king's interest was preferred by him before his own: Id.
ib. 41.
E^ye, composed of eu and ye, is a word of approbation or com-
mendation : €vy knoir](jas avajiriiaas fie, you did well to remind me:
Plat. Phaed. c. 4. evye, on yue vTrefxyTjiras : it is lucky that you put me
in mind: Theophr. Ch. Trepl XaXids. in Aristoph. Strepsiades,
on iiearing that he ought to call a hen aXeKrpvauay, exciaiujs,
aXek-Tpmnyay ; evye, vi) tuv 'Aepa ! excellent, by the Air! Nub. 667.
It is sometimes used ironically; as by Socrates to Callicles, who
praised a life overflowing with every kind of pleasure : euye, w /SeXrttrre*
tiareXei yap wanep yp^io, &c. well done ! bravo ! in Plato Gorg.
p. 494. I. 24.
EiTre (>}i5re Ionic) signifies — 1. as; just as: KctpnaXifiivs ayehv
TToXiijs uXos ii'vT oiji'xXr], Hcni. 11. a, 3()0. v. II. y, 10. f, 237- — 2.
when,'' after : KqrrHXvlcnv e)^a«pes, evre ae Kn\ rnvjioy fiolp' enefiaXXey
exety: Tlieogn. 356". v. Mes. Op. 430. 448. 56'4. Theogn. 810.
II. (II. III.) "H is — 1. a disjunctive particle: uXX' T/ Trn/aa^povelt
treoi', y KopvftuyTt(is : either— or : Aristoph. Vesp. 8.' Tracra /jiey av-
dpwirov i^ux'' 'p^'^^'- TeOeaTai tIi ojra, 1] ovk av I'jXdey fls robe to C(7ioy :
otherwise it would not have come, Sec. Plat. Plucdr. p. 249- v beiyi'iy
ye av t'lri, otherwise it would be a very hard or grievous thing:
Demosth. adv. Boeot. — 2. expressive of deliberation or doubt: pep-
t Sec Toiip on Longinus, ^ :52. — J.S. in giorno, come la neve ul sole, si consii-
'' E5t€ X''^^' ^s """'S KaTerafceTo, Tlieocr. mava. Decani. Gi'un. 10. J^fov. 7. — J. S.
Id. vii, 70. a simile borrowed from IIo- ' 'H koI huto. yfjc, t) koI koto 6d\aiT(Tay
met; iis 5e x"«"' KOTaTTjKeT* eV unponu- eircrajQfjj'oi, 1) ;col kut' d/n'/)(iTeptt : lliTudot.
Aiuffii' uptantv, — us ttjj ti7K6to naAa na- vii, — J. S.
pi^ta j Otl. T, 20j. So Boccac ; " di gioruo
Rule i— 3.] ''H|^ &c. 143
f^i'ipile h' ^ireiTa Kara (pph'a Kai Kara Qvfxvv, y jrpOT^pu) Atos v'loi' epiy-
iovnoio biwKoi, *i oye twv ttX^uvuv \vKiutv utto dvf.iov eXoiro : whether —
or: Horn. II. e, 6'i\. (Tliis form ?) — f) is almost peculiar to epic
poets; Attic writers make >) correlative with norepov or ei })rcce(iing.)
Tijs notas /jepihos yeie'/Sat ryi^ noXiv e/JouXer' civ ; Trorepov Tijs avvai-
Tias Tutv crvfjtfjefyrjKOTiov toIs "EXXjjtrt KaKijv, ?) tTjs trepiiopaKvias ravra
yiyiufieya ; ivhetlur — or: Demostli. pro Cor. So Xen. Cyrop. iii,
I, 12. iKjtpu baiufiev el ctcov K/tX^as yuarreyerot 7)e Kai ovki, Horn. II.
/8, 301. Sometimes it lias no preceding correlative : e^s nXovrelv, rj
Trh'rjra notels ; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 12. t) o'lei ra /.leyuKa ahiKijfxara,
&c. Plato tie Rep. vi. p. 49 1. — 3. Comparative : uXXov tov, rj
TovTov ye evcKa, e/pi'yjjjs vvv ewiOvfxe'iTe ; other — than: Xen. Cyrop.
iii, 2, 17- (TTpnTr]yoi ttXc/oj'cs t) fteXTioies, more numerous than good :
Aristopli. Acli. 1077- H is often thus used witliout any other word
denoting comparison ; as, rt beiaas (underst. ciXXo) >*/ fir) iradu) rovro ;
Plato Apol. Q7> biaXeyojjLEvos rivas \6yovs (and. ttXXous) r) ova-Kep
et'ddbe: Plato Crit. c. 13. v. Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 0. So fiaXXov is to
be understood after j3uvXeo in Theogn. 145. after ireitrj y'up in
Aristopli. Vesp. 1262. after Qek^jv in Mace, ii, 14, 42. after bebiKuuu-
fxevos in Luke xviii, 14.-' and fxe'i^ov in Ecclesiastic, xxxix, 11. xli, 12.
Luke XV, 7. — 4. That is to say, namely, that is: ris av oiorj^/wi' e'irj
Tavrr]s bu^a, ij boKely •^pi'ip.aTa nepi irXeiovos iroie'iadai i) fiXovs ; Plato
Crit. c. 3.* — 5. ''H is sometimes redundant after comparatives. See
Steph. de dial. p. 28. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 36. Fiscli. ad Well,
iii. p. 351. Toup. ad Longin. § 18. Markl. ad Lys. p. 370. ed. Reisk.
Erf. ad Soph. Ant, IO77. ed. min.
'^H followed by cv (IV.) is interrogative : 7) ov)( opas, orroy epyov Trpoa~
Tu-Tiii ; Plato.' In composition, ?//je» — ijhk or Ibk signify tvhether —
or — ; or — or: sec Horn. II. t, 105. — o^f>' ev yivwo-crjs jy/jev deuv, ybk
koi arbpa : that you may clearly discern every one, god or man : Horn.
II. e, 128. 'Wbk, preceded by jjev or re, (or by fiev re together,
Orj)h. h. xiii, 8.) or ku\, signifies and: see Hom. II. rj, o"/^. t, 99- 100.
/i, 61. e, 822. "Uirov is either perhaps ; or perhaps: viiv jdev ovtus
oiiK ej^w elTrelt', ^JyXoi' ^e on TirCJt' uKijKua, i'lirov Yuncpovs rys KaXijs, 7}
'AraKpeoiros tov ao<pov, 7) Kni (Tvyypu<peu)v Tivdv '. either, it may be, of
Sappho, <?i:c. Plat. Phzedr. p. 235. 'Ilroi is sometimes either truly ;
or truly : it is very commonly followed by 7), as in Eurip. Or. 1 197-
On tliis form, and on »jrot — 7)701, and 7) — i']Toi, which are very rare, see
ScliEef. ad Schol. Apoll. Rh. p. 321. Sometimes nimirum, nempe :
Hom. II. e, 724. 842. (p, 90. Od. b, 77."'
III. (V.) ~H, contracted from the Ionic ea or 7)0, i.e. 7ji', is used —
J See Hermann's treatise on Ellipsis, yap oijlvvt ; ^ (riSapioiffiv, &ffv(p iv Bu-
p. 707.— J. S. ^amiif ; Aristopli. Nub. 249. ed. Bekk.—
* riiis has some resemblance to a French J. S.
idium in which que is eiiiplo^-ed: voili "* In the last cited passage it is cer-
une belle inerveille que de faire bonne tninhj, truhj : in the others the affirma-
clieie avec bien de I'argent 1 Molierc, tion expressed by it is extremely .'•light,
L'Avare iii, 5. — J. S. and intended, perhaps, merely to obviate
' It may be here added that fj by itself abruptnesj of language. — J. S.
is sometimes used in interrogation : t<^
144 ^Httou. [Chap. vh.
1. affirmatively, or for the purpose of asseveration. — 2. interroga-
tively. — 1. y'l \pr](TTos hvrjp noXirrjs y' early airacni', trull/, realli/ :
Aristoph. Pac. 909." with other particles: 7} yap, for truly. 'H
yap av (VI.) is a conditional formula, in which 7] attirms, yap gives a
reason, and av relates to a follovving verb : ovTihavo'iaiv avuaaeis' 7)
yap av, 'Arpeibr], vvv varara XtvjSrjaaio : Horn. II. a, 232. J/ yap,
for assuredly (understand, if it tvere not so, tcere it otherwise,)
Xu)(oT](Taio av vvv i'laraTa : you would now have committed an outrage
for the last time. So, ruvra /jev ov ^aicpws irpoaedrjKe to. piifiara' 7)
yap av, vTroTrrevrravTes avTov elvai k^Qpbv, ecpvyov : for (underst. if he
had,) they ivould assuredly have suspected him for an enemy, and
have Jled: Clirysost. de Provid. ii. ^H fi))v is a form of solemn
asseveration : * iofioaev, >'/ fx)]v npa^etv aboXws tyiv elprjvrjv : Xen. H.
Gr. iii, 4, 6. v. Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 47.
^Hwou expresses a great assurance of certainty ; as, (VII. VIII.)
y'lTTOV xf'^^''''*'* "*' rovs aXXovs avOpwirovs •neiaaiiji, on ye fXTjbe v/jds
hvvajjai ireideiv : undoubtedly I should have great difficulty in per-
suading others, &c. j'jttou av,cj 'AyXa It aba, e'i ye KXaieiv eTreipuifieda
ae iToie'iv, a(p6bpa av iifxiv e^e/.i(p()v : doubtless, Aglaitadas, &€.
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 13. and in the middle of a sentence: ei irepl
rutv avbpo<p6v(ov twv }]br} Kenpifievwv Toaavrr] (ntovbt) yiverat, 7)irov nepi
ye Tov fjTjTe eaXwkdros, fiyre KareyvioeTfjievov, ndvbetj'ov ypatpeiv : as-
suredly : Demosth. in Aristocr. In arguing from what is less cogent
to what is more so, >) ttov, if what precedes is affirmative, signifies
much more: (IX. X.) as, el rHiv dii/wj^wj' ovbev eirfl' 6(nov t^v uKpiroV
t'jTTov TOV avOpuTTOv ye cvra avvcriov Kai betvov avev Xoyov cai ;p//^oj/
iroielv cKborov : Demosth. in Aristocr. firrov yap oiKiaai iroXeis o'loi re
yeyovaaiv, r/TTOW (3nvXr}devTes rjpe'is iroXXovs av tottovs toiovtovs bvi'Tjdelr)-
fiev Karaa^^elv : Isocr. de Pace. But if what precedes is negative,
ijvov may be rendered much less: oiibe tovtwv etri^eXrireov earl irapep-
yws' y'ltrov tuiv vepl tov filnv ufieXrjTeov : Plut. in Pol. praec. where it
is equivalent to (T)^o\^ ye, which is sometimes added to jJttov in this
sense.
2. Tlie second use of 7} is interrogative : 7i ovv olus re earai —
rfiv o^ioiorrjTa — hiaytyvujiTKeiv ; Plato Pliaedr. p. 262. With ynp :
(V.) 7] yap, u) 'Itttt/o, ov rowra I'lv a eXeyes ; is it not so, o Hippias ?
Plato Hipp. min. ?) yan kanv iis aXrjduis Tifvb^ a(j>iyfiivos ^Oova ;
what do you tell me'f is he really arrived in this country? and
is he really come? Eurip. Or. 736. [729- Pors.] Sometimes uncon-
" On ^ firiXov see Toup on Longin. to you by our mutual love, that I would
sect. iii. — J. S. rather, so help mc God, descend into one
" Not unlike xo help me God. "O/j-ws common grave with you, when you liad
8', ovTtDS fxo"""- â– "â– p'^s ae waTrtp ah olada, done your duly as a brave man, than live
ivoixvvoi aoi T^v ^fir^v Kol ar]v (ptKlaf, ^ to witness and to share in your disgrace
fji^v iyui j8ouAeiT0ai h.v fitTo, aov, avSphs and infamy : so ardently do I aspire after
&.ya6ov 'Yfvojj.fvov, kolvtj yr)v iirttiraaOai all tliat is great and honorable, as the
fiuWov ^ ^fiv juer' alaxwoixfvov alaxvvo- desert both of you and of m>'self :" — the
fievT)' ovTois ^70) Kol ae tuiv KaWiaruiv Ka\ words of Fantliea to her husband Abra-
ilxavTT)v ij^iaiKa : "nevertheless, great an dates in Xen. Cyroj), vl. — J. S.
you know niy alfeclion for you is, I swear
§ viii. Rule 1—3.] "H5;7, &c. U5
necledly at tlie end of a sentence: ri hii ovy ovtos ufinpTuyet, khI
arexfov TTotel, \€K-eof V y»p ; must nut I? Plato Phaedr. p. 263.
beivoi, w$ eoiKey, e«Vt Kara Tuy aov \6yov, Kn\ TroXvrpoiroi' »'/ yap; are
they not? Plato Hipp. min. It is to be observed tliat 7^ yap is used
in many senleiices which take an interrogative form merely for the
sake of empiiasis, as they in reality involve an assertion : Callicl. ovk
ULiJYvrrj cis TOiuvra (iyojy roi/s Xuyovs, w ^wKpciTes ', Socr. 7) yap eyw
tlyio eiravBa, m yzyvale ; v fKeh'os, os ay (])f] avihrfv o'vtw, rovs '^(ciipov-
ras, oTTios av \atpu)(Tiv, evbuifiuros eirai ; and is it I, pray, wlio bring
them to this subject? &c. Plato Gorg. p. 494.
"Hhr] is joined — 1. with a present tense, to signify time fuliy ar-
rived : ov LLovor i'jbr] nupecfrii', iiWa Kal 7ra\(u TrapeXi'iXvQe : Dcmostll.
Phil. iv. V, Malth. iii, 10.'' — 2. with a past tense, to signify some-
thing |)ast at an indefinite time: j; uipa ?/?7} irapTiKQev, Mutth. xiv, 15.
V. Horn. II. a, 251. — 3. Sometimes it signifies the term of commence-
ment : KavTevQev i']bj) TrctTayos i)y rioy a(Jicihwi\ Aristoph. Ach. 538.
V. Matth. V, 28. — 4. It designates a remote indefinite past lime: 7/5?j
yap iTOT lyio Kal apeioaiv, yeTtep vfiiv, avhpuaiv wfiiX-qtra: before noW :
Hom. II. a, 261. — 5. Willi a future tense it signifies something about
to be almost instantly : avrap eyojy e-jri vTja dor)y KareXevao/Liai 7';S7j :
Hom. 0(l. n, 303. cf. 11. \, jGO. RoTe is often joined with it
in denoting a more reniote lime, and vvv in denoting a less distant
time.?
KoXws with a genitive, o/?/)Cr/?/?je/^ ; Tijs re yap 'I-aX/as kalliKeXlns
KaXujs TrapanXov Ke'irai : for it (Corcyra) is situated commodiously for
the passage to Italy and Sicily : TIjuc. i, 36. In the same sen^e it
has a dative with a preposition after it; tjJs ^e 'IraXj'as cat liKeXias
KoXCos €(paiveTO avro'is 7/ v>/(tos tv TrapctTrXw Ke'iadai : lb. c. 44.
SECTION VIII. — On the adverbs /idXXo>' and /iaXtara.
Rule I. MaXXov be is a correctional form; or rather: as, 7V
na~is, fAoXXoy be fxeipadaKos. In this sense, to make tlie expression
more emphatical, Ka\ is often added : anavTwr -6 a£/w^ja, r»)i' iiyefio-
riav, Tt)y eXevdepiav, wtpte/Xero, fxaXXov be Kal ras noXireias, lanov
y'lbvyaro: Deniosth. de Cor. p. 321."^
II. With de« it signifies more and more ; as irpovxiopei Kad' fjfiepay
«ei ludXXoy. v. Tibull. i, 8. in fin. Hor. Carni. Sec. 67.
III, It is sometimes superfluously added to a comparative: ttoXv
P Plut. in jEmil. Paul. p. 471. 1.20. turbulent audacity in Metilius.— J. S.
ed. H. St. — J. S. *■Lucian uses fidXiara for naWov :
'I MerfXios b i^ifxapxas eirl tov ^^fxaros oVei fj-ev yap iv iraiSeia koI aurbs dual tjs
Karaaras i5riH7)y6pet, fieyaKvucov rbv Mt- Zd^av, (nrouSp crvpoivovfjievos ra KaWiara
vovKiOV, rov Se 'ba^iov KaTiiyopuiv uv yuo- tojj' ^ifiKiuv. — fi6.\L(TTa Se ouSc to Ka\-
KaKiav, 01)5' dj'wSpiac, aW' i)5ri irpoSo- Xiara wvij, aWa iriaTeufiT to?s ws irvx^v
alav: I'lut. in Fab. JMax. p. 32.5. 1.28. f-naivovat : Adv. Indoct. p. 536. A. ed.
td. H. St. Here it is not so much the Salmur.— J. S.
maturity of time that is signified, as of
Viger. T
146 MaXXov, MfWidTO. [Cmai>. vh.
fiuWov erotfiorepor, Isaeus. Kpe'iTrov elfai TeOrarni ficiWnr, Tsocr. Hel.
Laud. p. 417. So in Latin, yolius malo, Cic, and Corn. Nop. v. In-
terpr. ad Justin, iii, 2, 7.
IV. Ilcit'Tvs ^uWoy is a very stron-v affirmation ; unquestionahly,
bfl/ond all doubl :^ ecrri yap, efr], ws ef.10'1 boKc'i, iravTOS /ufi/Woj' ovrto :
Plato PiiaMl. C. 17' iTcit'Tus fJiCiWov upa iI'i'X'/ uOavaroi' Ka\ ai wXedpor :
lb. c. 06. j) nayTos fjid\Xf)y ootu)s ex^'' "•'"''^fp ~o~e ///^Tf eAeyero ; Plato
Crit. c. 10. and in answer, Trorrds ye ftCiWov : Id. Piiaed. c. 11.'
V. MuA\o»' is often defective after ^-ertain verbs, wben j) alone
follows them :" as, llovXojjiai rre innerni, Tj iiapoi'rn p^Ov/jeli'. And so
after OeXcj. Tedtdyai rofiiiovaa XurjiTeXe'if rj 8)]^ : Andocid. Or. de
Myster. p. 62. ed. Reibk. It is elegantly construed with tiie genitive
of the participle beoy : fxaXXuv too beovros, more than is Jil : Plato
Gorg. p. 48/.
It takes Ti after it : e(j>v\a.rTOfjiey ay utfrvep ro apyvpiov, Ka\ ^aXXo'v
Ti : and somewhat (i. c. in some degree) tnore : " Jischin. Dial.de
Virtiit.
VI. Oi f.iaXi(TTa it is to be remarked — 1. that tci fiaXiara signifies,
especially, principally, chiejly.'"
VII. — 2. M,iAtT-a, especially with numerals, signifies nearly, pretty
nearly, almost exactly ; as, ey TeaaapuKovTu jjuXiaTn iifieoais, Tliuc.
ii.' In this sense llie enclitics trt], ttow, 701, ttimjs, are frequently joined
with it. See Wessel. ad Herodot. viii, 65. p. GiJ.
VIII. — 3. MaXitTTa fiey and el bt fiij are often used correlatively ;
when /jaXiiTTa nev relates to what is sought or required in the first
place, and preferably, ei be jj)) to what is considered only as next
best to that : uttuis fidXiaTa fxkv vTrepfouXelaOe (>a) »/^as cat roiis irpoaQev
evKXeia.' el be fii), 'iare, (is vfitv, av fiev riKufxev vfids ciperrj, >/ vIkti
ala^vyrjy <pepei, ?; be ijrra, eav ijTTUJfxeda, evbaiixoyiay : Plato Menex.
p. 247."
IX. — 4. MdXiffTa, sans faute, without fail ; eirl beliryoy, olfiai,
K\r]deis es r//»' varepaiay, /jaXicrra iji<i), ecpr] '. Luciau, in Charon.
* This appears to be the meaning in cTa<pct>s. ov ix^-ju aW', el tovto Toiovr6v
the anonymous example of Viger, iravrhs fin ra /j-dAtcrTa, however, even if it is
(jmWov irapa tovto t) vikt) /xed' t])x5iv ye- ever so certainly so as he sdi/s, 6 i'Sfxos Se
VOLT Uv, wliich tie translates, hoc modo Keyu TavavTia, inc. Deniostli. in Androt.
facilius qtiiim alio quolibet. &c. I iliinic p. 59 ). 1. 9. ed. Reisli. — J. S.
he sliould have translated it thus : hoc ^ MdKia-Ta crvfiTrai'Ta Tavra eh ePSo/x'f}-
modo, certo certius victoriam consequi kovtu /xvus vapuSeSwKaai : Deniostli. in
potcrimus. — J. S. Apliob. i. p. 81.). 1. 4. ed. Rtii-k. tovtoiv
' To? uvTi yap itavThs fiaWov to. ye ^tj- ttiv Tip.))V aTTuiTepu fie, fidXiffTa Td\av-
/uoTtt ovic e^ffiaOof t))v p.evToi oidvoiav tov : Demosth. in Aphob. ii. 839, lU. —
axi^^v awavToiy — Sieii-u : Plato Flia-dr. J. S.
p. IDG. 1. 6. ed. Bas. 1. really ; I assure y After et' Se /«^, one would have ex-
ynu. — J. S. pected sonietliing of the following pur-
" See Hermann's treatise on Ellipsis, port, " that vou may at least oqual us and
p. 707. — J. S. them." An example more obviously ap-
** lloojjvveen translates it a J/jMC wag'W ; propriate is in Deniostli. de Cor. napa-
tliat, according to Hermann, is not the uaKeaovGiv avrhv, f.id\icTTa ixiv ri]v Trpbi
signification ; hut lie does not say what riaas b/xdvoiav SiaTripuv Kot ras avpdvKas,
is. I have given what appears to me to el Se yu^, irphs Tb ^ovKeixraaOat Sovvat
be the meaning. — J. S. ypdvov t-^ -ndKei : p. 282. 1. 18. ed. Keisk.
'^ In anoih'-r sense : iyla he olofxai /u-h' also in Deniosili. in Mid, p. .504. 1. 3. ed.
o&xi Xeyeiy avThv raXriBrj, /xiiWov Se olSa. llcisk. — J. S.
§ ix. Rule i.] Memiu. nj
X. — .5. ll is often joiiietl willi the dalive plural of (he article, ami
|)rece(|fd or followed by cfjolus, to sif^iiify equality as to sometliiuij;
biipeilative : tuvovv e/je evpii7€Te tm TrXijdei tdIs fiCiXirrd' o/io/ws, 1/OU
tvill Jind me as hearty a friend to the people as those ivho are most
so: Demostli. de reditu suo, p. 1473. 1. 11. [ed. Rcissk. Epist. ii.|
So on tile contrary toIs i'lKinTu oyuo/ws, or ufxoiuis ro'n iiKiara, equallij
with those who are least so, may be said. Nearly tiie same is ex-
pressed by ws Qvhkv xpii/jia : see C. III. § xiii. R. 4. A phrase of a
similar import is ev rols fJuXiarn, as, ev rols /duXiara irotpos karii', he is
anion": the wisest. l\\aXicrTa however is not construed with iy rols :
the phrase is to be understood thus, ev toTs roiovrois ovci nnXiara
roiovTos : for where a declinable superlative is used, we find it in the
case and gender of the noun to uliitli it relates,^ as ej/ rols TrpQrui
be 'AOrjtaloi tov aiht^pov KaTe.deyro, Tliuc. i. 6. And to7s, it seems,
is to be considered as neuter, since it occurs with feminine nouns
also: rifv htaXeKToi' <iKpifiov(jn (// Xf'E,i^ 'Irrocparoi/s) e i' rols irarv (a
superlative is not indispensable in tlie phrase) Ti]v Kunn)v kuI cTVfrjdfa-
TuTr]r, Dionys, Hal. de Isocr. 2. The sense of the phrase therefore
is, among the things which are such, eminently or chiejly such.
Tile following are examples : to lepuv tovtu ev to'is /duXtorn ap-^ulny^
Pans, in Ach. p. 403. v6{xos oWos Tleprrtkos tv toTs /nuXicTTa i/tt' uvtwv
^vXaTTOfjeros, JEl. V. H. i, 31. ical ovj^ j/ctora 'Adrjiuiwy ae, ciAA' iv
Tols fiaXi(TTa : Plat. Crit. c. 14. ey to'is fuaXtaTa 'Adrjyaiojy eyw w/^io-
\oy7]K^s 7U7)(C(r&>, lb. ^wkpciTovs tparrrj/s wy ey Tols f^aXl<7Ta ruir Ture,
Plato Symp. c. 1."
SECTION IX. — On the adverbs f/em^i), ^texpt, jiiir, jxin'oy oh,
fiioy, i/af, vi), yijy, m, oifioi, olye, ofjiuv, li/jws.
Rule I. Mero^i) is elegantly joined with participles in any case,
with ihe signification of inter and gerunds in dum in Latin, and of
while, during, in the middle of, &c. in English : fiera^v Ttua^j^y ev,
iroXejieiv Trpos nvToy PTrexe/pj/o-e : ivhile receiving kindnesses : Isocr. in
Evag. p. 396. evQvi ciiavaoraires fiera^t/ beiiryovvrei : in the middle
of supper : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 284. ed. Reisk. tIs hv e'ir) towvtos
luTpos, ufTTis T(p vorjoviTi fiETulv uirQerovyTi jitibey avfijSovXevoi ; during
his illness: i'Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 30t». 1. 2S. KXelros — uv nv rw
bopuTio) bieXnaas fieTulu benryoiiyTa e(l)6yevaas, Lucian, Dial. Alex, et
Philipp.
Mera^v Xoym' (in its common signification inter dicendum, during
talk, while tulki7ig,) is soujetimes a propos, by the by: aXXd
' Tlie scholiast however explains eV 145.) wepl rivwv xph lJ-a.\iffTa Tncrreveiy
rois by €V TovTOis, p. 11 . 1. 4. ed. Bekk. t) Trepl wv t€ Qfhs avaipel, ical iro\\o7s tuiv
— J.S. ''i.W-i\vix:v aw'^oKil— ; Isocr. I'aiieg. p. 110.
" Aril! that /^oAicTTa appears to be used 1. 1, eii. Battle. — J. S.
sumctimes fur /jluWov : (see note r, p.
] IS MexfJt- [Chap. VII. § ix,
/uera^v Xuytvy, rites elaly u't noXefiovyres eKe'iyoi ; Lucian, ill Charon.
So in Mort, Dial. t. i. p. Q/l. in fin. arup, d erulpe, /jera^v \oyu>»',
dp' ov Tvbe }'/!' Tu bey^pov, ti/)' ciVcp i)yei yjfids ', Plato Fiiajdr. p. 230.
II. Merulv, with ; fjierulv tuv bvyuTOu to avyeriv e)^ovTes, Pint, in
Thes. p. 1. [p. 4. I. 5. ed. H. Steph.]
To fifTuii) (Ta/3/3aroi', the following or next sabbath: Acts Ap.
xiii, 4C.*
III. (III. IV. V. VI. VII.) Mexpi and uxpi, (whicii latter, according
to Eustatii. p. 1062. I. 52. is derived from yae^P',) before a consonant,
fie^pts and a^P's bi'fore a vowel, (Moeris says /uej^pt and clj^pi wiihout
<T are Atlic,) are used in signifying tlie extreme or furthest bound or
limit of things ; as, /tifxP* roi) irapoyTos, until the present time ; /^ej^pi
Tiyos ', till when ? ^\l/i](l>i(Taa6c, tvvs /utxpt irey-e kcu rerTapciKoyra trwc
avTovs e/.il3aiy€ty : that such as Were unihr forty-five years should go
on board in •person, and not serve by sicbstituies : Demosth. Ol.
iii. <ix^^ '"'"'* y"'\a<7CT»js, as far as to the sea ; to. irepl -6 (rw/ja /it^P'
XPeias Tfjs i/zyxT/s -nupaXdiifjuyeiy, so far as they may be requisite for
the benefit of the mind, and no farther: Epict. c. 46. ^t^XP' '"^
hiKaiov, as far as the rules of justice allow: I'liuc. iii, 82. yu^XP'
TUV /3w/uoi} (piXos, to the iitmost length allowed by religion ; ex^pqae
j.ieXP'- i~ir]Tp<vuv (porov, he went the length of murdering his mother:
Hercxiian i, 3. /ieXP* "''^ ko'/ujjs rj}v envTov 'liXXTjyiKu tp^y, to observe
Greek customs even to the cutting off his own hair; iElian vii, 8.
/uexpis ii/^uir, to our time : /uexP* '"'/* 5w*7s, to the end of life ; nexp*-
Tov Xoyov, or Tov Xeyeiy, as far as words go; jue'xp's ov, until:
V. Xen. Men), i, 2, 35. iii, 5, 27. Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 118. ed.
Reisk. eyei'fro be 1] biwlis f-iexpi irpos tu vpr], quite to the mountains :
Arr. de Exp. Al. c. Q, kut eh luil^a fie y uxpi- Trpos ravs (jjioXious. Luciati
V. H. i. juexP'* '^^^ eyeyero, until it was 7norning : Phito Symp.
J). 220. /i^XP' "'''" *•"' fTTtSaKpuCTOj, even to tears ; ft^xp^ bevpo, quite
hither, as for as this ; /jexpn eyravda, hitherto, to this place ; /L/t'xpis
cxyex, until yesterday ; juexp's 'iia xpavffeie, until: Callim. in Dian.
28. /ie'xot Toppu), a long way, to a great distance, in for a long
while: f^^xpt irfuoqy, until the day before yesterday : Synes. ftexpt
alj/depoy, until to-day.
iMtX*^", while, as long as: /uexP' Z"^'' oXiya j/5«*coi/ytn;r vrro Tovrov'i, —
nv papeMS e<pepoy : Liician, Jud. Voc. /"exP* h^*' ^^r/iti^os ?)v bfjfjos
eva x^tp'^^oy^'iaety, Phil. l*iibl. It signifies duration also in /uex^'
fiey ovy Ttyus CTreTxP Toy veariaKoy y too rra-pos fiyt'ip.!], during some
time, for a while : Herodian i, 8.
MexP', except: tuiv aXXuiy yb)] fxexP'- VpHiv bovXevoyTdty, Thuc.
p. 18. I. 3. ed. Camer. ; but the signification of the word in this
passage is easily reducible to the first head.
(VIM.) Iklween /uexP'* '"^'' '^ genitive, ov is sometimes added
redundantly : /uexP'^ '^^ Tponetoy tu/v Gcpti'twr, until the summer sols-
* Oil this passage of the Acts Cappellus same sense. Add, that nera^b appe;irs to
cites Joseph us dc Bell. Jud, vi, 0. and moan afterwards in Phitarcli, IMoial. vol.
Do Dieu cites Clemens Rom. in his Ep. i, p. 9(iO. 1. l."!. and p. 961. I. "2. of \\ yl.
to tlic Corinthians, as using /uera^u in the tcub.'s ed, in 8vo. — J. S,
•I
Rule 2,3.] M//'', M6Xis, &c. 149
tice : Herodot. ii, 19- *"« ^wl rourw t^ Tri/pyw aXXos irvpyos lirifteprjKe,
Kal €Ttpos fjaXa ini tovtq), /lu'xP's ov uktlj Tcvpywv : as far as eight
towers, to the amount of eight towers: Herodot. i, 181. In such
passages tlie writer appears to have clianged, in going along, the
uiode of construclion with winch he set out: intending e. g. to say
/L/txpis ov uKTU) Ttvpyoi eiVi, for the last three words he afterwards, with
greater brevity, substitutes oktu) irvpyuv.
It is to be remarked that i^expn does not occur in the tragedians :
see Hermann's preface to the Hec. of Eurip. p. liv.''
M;)»' is — 1. confirmative; ao)(})pu)v fiiir o ye -otovros, (the true
philosoplier, who bestows all iiis care on his mind,) Ka\ oiibafiij (piXo-
yj)i]fMaTos, Plato de Rep. vi. p. 485. Orest. kui fn)v rob'' ep^as, bis
Oave'iy ov ^"^o^a'- Pvlad. nW ovb' eyw firiv: Eurip. Or. 1 ll6.
— '2. adversative : boicel deus fikv upijp o'vbnuuis elvai, delos firiv : Plato
Sophist, c. 1. and it is opposed to /lei' in the same chap. [p. 96'. 1. 13.
cd. Bas. 1.]
MoXis usually signifies, scarcely, ivith difficulty: whence it is
joined with other adverbs of kindred meaning ; as, dyaTrrjrJJs teat
fioXis, uKptfiQs Kcil juoXis, on which see Bast, and Schaef. ad Greg. Cor.
p. 169. s. Next, it may be rendered at length: fiiaaOels ttoXXu kuv-
Ti(ius, fjuXts edvaev uvrtiv : Soph. El. 575. Then, for a little
while; itXX', w yepaie ttovs, eTrimrevtjoy fioXis : Eurip. Troad. 1275.
[perhaps, although with difficulty.] taws yap aj' fiuXis -rrpopaivova
^ Tvxn, <yrali] KdXuis: Eurip. El. 402. Ou ^oXis is, non parum ;
not a little, very, quite: deXovaai' ov fioXis KaXels, Eurip. Hel. 341.
V. iEschU. Ag. 1091. Eum. SOj.
Movnv ov, or ixovovov, and fxuvov ovy\, or fiovovov\i, signify very
nearly, all but: ovs av fiovovov TzpoaKwels, Aristoph. Vesp. 514. 6
— Kaipos fxovoiovy^i Xkyei (j)U)V})y acpiels, Deniosth. Ol. I.
Mwr, compounded of /uj) interrogative, and ovy, (or the Ionic w«',)
is an Attic particle of interrogation, in Latin an forte? It is occasion-
ally joined will) each of its component parts, with fii) pleonastically ;
and commonly, though not always, the questions asked with it, as
well as with fn), involve a negation : rt be ; ol tiiv ribov))y ayadov
6pix6fi€J'Oi, fibiv ft)) Ti iXurroros TrXavrjs e^TrAeoi ruiv erepw*', ij ov Kai
vvroi avayicuiuvTUL v/joXuyely ayaOa eliai kqI tcftKct Tuvra; again: are
they, who define good as being pleasure, involved in at all less error
and inconsistency than the others ? or are not they also obliged to
confess the very same things to be both good and evil? Plato de Rep.
vi. p. 505. c. [p. 432. I. 49. ed. Bas. 1.''] eav be. tv evl tyyev/jrat abiKiu,
fjuiv fii] cnroXel T))y avrTis biiyapnv, f/ ovbev i)ttov e^et ; Mtjocj' i]TTov
ex^Tuj, efij: will it lose its force ? Plato de Rep. i. p. 351. and with
« Aid &xpii> Quite, entirely : ancporepw 'Evfx^ali'ei Srj avrols, olnat, S,uoXoye7y oyo-
5e revovre Koi otrrea Aoas avatSiis ^XP'^ da fhai koI kuko, Tavrd. Tliis 1 mention
aiT7i\oiri(rey, Horn. II. 5, 522. Kad6\ov, because Hermaun professes to give the
Scliol. — J. S. passage entire, remarking that Zcunius
<* Where the latter part of tlie passage Iiad taken it from Hoogeveeu in a niu-
slands thus, fi oh koI ouroi avayKa^oirrai tilated state. — J. S.
bp.o\oyuv Tjiovas iivai kukiUs ; ^tp65pa ye.
150
Nc
[Chap, vii, § ix.
ov : rt -^oiiy TTOielv tjuej /iwJ' ov)(^ owep k^o'tovv ; Pliilo Ep. iii, p. 31().
Iti tlie foMowiug verse it is joined with ils sccoiifl t'oiJ)j)onrnt pari,
«nd llie questioii, like the f'oiegoiiig examples, is timiralively nega-
tive: fxHiy ovv hoK€~is aov ippovriaai tLv' ayyeXuv ', Eiirip. Androm. 81.
In the Eq. of Aristoph. /iwr without any other particle is used in a
<luestion which indicates an inl'erence which nii<.'lii he drawn Ironj
bomething preceding, hut which is not so drawn because the premises
are not believed, and the question therefore implies a negation, and
is in fact answered in the negative : Demosth. o'i/joi, ti ttot eo-O', on
aavTOV ov (prjS u^tov', £,vr€tbei'at ti yuot boKels criivrto kaXur. jxQtv tk"
KnXwv el KnyadiJoi' : I->iciar. fjct tovs Oeoiis, e'tfi €k ■KOvr}()wv y\ vers.
185. Ill Aristoph. Phil. 372. an aihrmation is inijilied in the ques-
tion ; (.liLv ov /.e (.A 00 as, iiXX' i'lpTraKas ; and in Eiirip. Hec. 754. the
thing is affirmed about which a question is asked with /uJ)i', as in
JEsch. Siij)pl. 309. with ;n).
Nalj^fs, is — 1. an aflirmative answer to a question. And wlipn
the question is merely tigurative, rat assents to the affirmation or to
the negation implied in it, as the case may be, aiid echoes the senti-
ments of the interrorator : ovKovy opduts, efrjv, w WbiJfinvTe ; Nai, rib'
os: yes, rightli/ : Plat, de Kep. v. p. 44.9. ^^^X^l^ ^' (ivTi/y ai bpei-
orarrjy Kai (pportfuoraTriv iJKKjT av ti e^wOev tt/iSos rapaleie re i>"at aXAo(-
waeie; Na/ : 1/es ; it is so; the soul cannot he disorihred and
changed by external agency: Plat, de llep. ii. p. 381. — '2. an ex-
})ression of assent to what has beeji said without interrogation : er€t-
thv Toii'vr t^niraTuitTes v/ias Xeywrriy, ws -Trpoayeypmrrcii tv tm I'i'fiu)
llfliai aTF<*icnovr, lav \Lr]'l)ifTr,Tcu b biijitos, ciTrojtirjj/iovei'eTe aiiro'is vitoIju-
Xelw roi : /Eschin. adv. Ctes. p. 281.^ And of atfirmaiion or en-
forcement of one's own words: nu, roi, Tev)(^eo bwi-ia, kvov — : Cal-
lim. ill (^er. 64. — 3. of obtestation, supplicating, enjoininff, conju-
ring: mi epx"^} Kvpte 'Irjcrov, eve7i so, come, hard Je^xis : Kev. xxii,
20/ vai, abe\(pe, eyw crov 61 alfirjf ty Kup/w : yen, brother, Sec.
Pliilem. V. 20. — 4. of affirmation in an oath: as, rat /la Ai'a, Plato
Eiitiiyphr. c. 5. v. Horn. 11. a, 235. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 27. When
any tliiui; is denied with an oath, ov is substituted for vu\, as, ov
pa yap 'ATroXXwra, Horn. II. a, 86. So that rai is no essential
part oftlie oath, nor is it in itself juratory .« — 5. of concession, fol-
lowed up by an objection introduced by aXXa : roi, (prjoiv' ctXXct to
Tov K€<pnXov KoXoi', TO ^r]bffjiinv ypu<p)iv ^euyeir : Demostli. pro Cor.
p. 310. ** — 6". The assent or aHirmation is sometimes strengthened by
' The assent in this passage is fullowed
by aqualificiitioii : inro^aXitv, Nal, tiyi (t4
rts &Wr] nSAis aTecpavo'i' u Se d Srjuos &
'A6y)vaiwv, airoSeSeiKral ffoi, &c. p. 437.
J. ll.ed. Reibk. See, 5. and tlie nolo.
— J. S.
/ The foUowiiiij is an cxanii)le from an
Attic writer : yaiKl, vol, KaTTjffo, (caTrjfro,
yaiKt, ual, rvyirpiov : Aiistopli. lliesni.
1184.— J. S.
f In voX Tw 0-10), (Arislopl). Pac. 214.)
monlioned l)j lloogcveen and Zcuniiis,
vat is Doric for v^, as in Arislopli. Lys.
81. 8'.)3. as it is also in vol Aia, and
vol Thv AioiiXiu, tlie words of a ]Met;arcn-
sian in Aristopii. Acli. 707. 774. — J. S.
'' So, Kai fiot ^.eyera 'pri(pl(riJ,aTa. " T77-
(pifffiara." Nai" dA.A' avTiZiair\eKei Trphs
rovTO fuOtuis, ii-C. /Eschin. in Ctes. ji.
42"_'. 1. (i. ed. Iliisk. and, «r€xi'P"ff' "^"-^
ouaias b vofiuOtrris ras roJv irmvdvvwv, fuis
Uv K6yov ttTroSwci tJ) iroAei. val' dA\* etrri
Tis &vlfpu)iros, hs oijTi f1\i]<piv oi/Siv twi-
Sriixofftwv, &:e. Id. ib. p. tl4. I. G. — .T. S.
Rule 3.]
N;/, Nw, Nw»'.
lol
liie addition of other particles; as, ral by), Iloni. II. a, 2S(j. ra\ i.n)r,
Oppiaii, Hal. iii, 4S'J. i. e. ovtws bt), Hesycli.
N/), tlioiigli apparently formed froiri vu\, differs from it in never
occurring either uiliioiil a case,' or in conjunction \vil|j f^cl, and it
always aliirnis, concedes, or asserts : »?) t6v A/n, Aristoph. Acli.
751. >')) iSictJ Kai roi' 'AttoXXw, Demosth. Phil. iii. n) -/))' "Aprefiiy,
(the words of a woma?!,)'' Aristienel. Ep. xi. ; // tovs 6eovs, uXrjdij —
eput: Demoslh. Piiil. ii.
It appears to be sometimes used ironically:' TrXfiv el /jt) tovto
'Kkyovrrt, I »/ A/a : Demosth. de Chers. [p, 91. I. 0.6. ed. Keisk.]
No'" and vvv are used in poetry only, and appear to signify — 1. an
indivisible point of time, as in Horn. II. •>//, 485. and e, 311. at once,
instantly. — 2. illation : i'ike b' en 'Apyeiuiat kukov /StAos" ul be vv Xnol
OtfjaKov eiTuafjuTepoi: icherejore the people, &c. Horn. II. a, 383.
ouxTov vvy uvruy, (the gold) fuijb' epci tQv TrXrjaloi' : preserve it then — :
Eurip. Hec. 9g6. [982. Pors.]
Nijv signifies time either actually present, or bordering on the
present. Its use with a present tense is so common that there is no
need of any example: wilh a past tense its meaning is lately, just
now; oiiKOv)' virep vvp irpiwdefudu a-Kexpuadai — crKe-Teoi' : Plat. Phied.
p. 259. and in this sense h) is often joined with it ; wy yuy bi) eXeyoy :
Id. Pined, c. 16. V. and c. I9. 22. ^c. Eurip. Heracl. 235. With a
future, pi-esently, forthwith, immediately: vamTov bt) tre Trpotrepovai
vvy 01 eirtT)'ibetui, Plat. Phaid. c. 4. cf. Iliad €, Q79- J<^'hn xii, 31.
Nio't ditt'crs from ivy in no other respect but in being construed with
a present tense oidy : Eustath. ad Ilom. p. 1840.
Nvy, wht-n employed in inciting or urging, is joined with the im-
perative mood: Xeye vvy, Aristoph. Vesp, 30. tiye »(}»', twjue*' : Id.
Pae. 851. TTtdov rvy, Eurip. Or. 1101.
It is often placed in contraposition to certain preceding words ; as,
to TTply, TUTS, or other particles signifying past time : Eurip. Or.
» It is without a case ia Lucian : x°-~p^'
2> ircxTep 'EpfiTJ. Rlercur. vtj nai av ye.
Dial. Pan. et Merc. X"-^?^' ^ Ev(pop^e,
^ "AituWov, ^ Ti av fdeKr/s. Pyiliag.
VTJ Kai avye : Dial. Rleiiipp. et yEac.
— J. S.
> N^ Aia is usually a very slight affir-
mation, like trull/. See Xen. Mem. iii, 11,
14. iii, 3, 2. iii, 0, 2 and 7. iii, 8, 7.
iii, 11,3. Longin. ^ 33. — J. S.
* In Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 3. vrj Ala is
said by a woman, but it signifies no more
than truly. — J. S.
' It is ironical in Lucian, where Menip-
pus, in reply to Charon's demand of bis
fare, says, 6 'Epixvjs vwip iixov croi dTroSJrco,
Ss /lie Trap(Oci)jt£ aoi : and Mercury an-
swers, v)} Aia, ovaiu.r}v d fitXAu) ye Kal
{rrrepeiiTiveiy tUv veicpwy : truly I sliuuld be
in a thriving way indeed, if I am to pay
their fares tun for the dead, in addilion tu
conducting them: Dial. Char, et Menipp.
—.1. S.
"" Ni< is fi.und in many passages which
admit neither of these signifijatious. Eus-
tatliius regards it as a mere fxpletive: but
DenHtriu> Phalereus remarks that sucli
particles are not to be employed like ihe
cliippiugs and rubbish of m.asons, barely
to fill up spaces; and cites an observation
of Praxipliaues, (§ 57.) that some of tl.e
litile words in question used to be em-
ployed wilh such effect as to produce an
expression of moaning and lamentation,
as in Ka\ vv k uovpouevoicriv «5u (pdos
7}e\iolo, ei p.7i, ice. [lloni. 11. ^, l-il.J
'lids perhrips is a Utile fanciful ; see Horn.
0(1. I, 79. However this may be, it is
cflen much more easy to perceive that
tiie construction would suffer by the ab-
sence of a particle, than to define exactly
the effect of its presence. — J. S.
152 or, Olye, &C. [ChaP. VH.
1096. to a future tense: ravra fiev not elaavdis — S t Tjy »y o-/;* yvv\ be
— Treiput (Ta^eorepov elire'if : Plat. Eulliyphr. c. 7» to el fiev, Eurip.
Or. 1134. or to et alone, Aristoph. Vesp. 7 10. cf. Xen. Cyrop. iii,
3. el yuf) — rvy b' — : Tliuc. iv, 104. John xv, 24. viii, 40. ix, 41.
xviii, 36'. 1 Cor. xii, IS. xv, 19."
Of, a particle of lamentfition, is usually joined with a nominative;
as, ol eyu), Eurip. Or. 1018 and 13+7- seldom witii an accusative;
as, o'lifxe beLXi'jy ! Epigr. cited by Sleph. [Tlies. hid. 1524. d.]
Of ot and the dative /not is compounded o't/Lxoi,* woe is me, alas. It
occurs — 1. without any case following it; as, oif.ioi\ ri b' oifioi;
tit'rira roi TieTruvUufiev, o'lfxoi ! Eurip. in Beller. ap. Suid. v. Ari-
stopl). Vesp. 845. — 2. followed by a nominative : Aristopli. Vesp,
1145. Plut. 851. 881. 931. — 3. by a genitive : Aristoph. Plut. 389.
Lucian in Pise. t. i. p. 573. in Catapl. p. 642. — 4. Sometimes
w'jtioj, or rather w /io«, occurs for o'luoi ; as (with a genitive) in Eurip.
Phcen. 1545. Apoll. lliiod. i, 29O. — 5. Mot is repeated: u p,oi p.oi\
11). 1465. — 6. It expresses joy in Aristoph. Nub. 771. but in the
n)ou!h of a rustic."
IV. (IX.) Olye with pXeirii), or a word of similar signification, is
literally, which way, or towards which, I look. In Arislides, olye
fiXewov, u'ith an eye to which, with a view to which, &c. Panath.
p. 92. t. i. ed. Jebb/
V. (X.) 'Ofiov, together, is sometimes nearly, about: o^iov trevTa-
coaia errj, Dionys. Hal. Ant. R. iii. p. l63. i. 39. trjjj' oyuoC rt
irevTaKoaiiov, Id. ib. viii. p. 530. 1. 18. v. Deniostb. adv. Aristog.
p. 785. 1. 23. ed. Reisk.?
"Oyuws is thought by Hoogeveen to be properly the same as ofiolus:"
see I Cor. xiv, 7. Next it signifies, although, nevertheless, yet,
notwithstanding: (see Eurip. Or. 679-) ^"^1 commonly answers to
Kniroi, KaiTtep, el Kai, ws, &c. in a preceding member of the sentence.
Those particles, however, are often absent; as, — 1. in a sentence con-
sisting of one member only; eU t'u ^r]bev ool y^pijtTi^a, o/iws ei: TroWijs
rtfs Trepwvalas avaXlrjKeLs : Lucian, adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 1 15. — 2. when
a participle goes before : Ariyuaj^os fxey rnvra elirwv, ojjlojs irpuoede-o
cat avrhs ttj 'AXicifiiabov yvwyn] '. Thuc. vi, 50. — 3. when a\,V o^ws
follows : cat yap ot arparriyui, ut (j>i\e' aXX' ofiujs to K€(pu\aiof avruir
p^bitos ay e'iirvts, cv'c. Plat. Euthyphr. c. 16. in which passage the
" Add vvuixfvl, now truly ; for the pre- 1 'O^oD, a<, near, close to ; iyi} fter ^Stj
sent: tovs dirXlras i/vv/xevl aveAoixtvovs Kol TtdKai Vfws d/xov (TTeixcor hu ?iv aoi
6S>Tr\' oTTieVai TraKtv, o'^KaSf, aKoTTflv 5' o t^x ^fJ^rjs, €i /u)), &:c. Sopliocl. Pliil.
T« tiv ■irpoyi)i(poijj.iv iv rots irivaKiots : Ari- 1218. 'O/xov is to be joined with veiis, not
stoph. Av. 448. — J. S. with cot, for (he person indicated by uot
* According to Weiske, ot/ioi is not a was not to go to the ship with the
compound word, fxoi being not a dative, speaker. — J. S.
but a mere elongation. Pleon. Gr. — '' 'Ofxuis, in like mannrr, e'luallij, to-
J.S. gether, has a circumflex on the last sylla-
" Otfj-oi expresses anger also : oifi , ws ble. See the treatise of Cyrillus or I'hi-
TfBi/Ti^ft, Aristopli. Ach. C'l') — J. S. loponus. is ixiv ISvTas craivft ufxws oup-^
>' Whatever obscurity there is in the re koI oUacrtvafxcpoTfpotffiv, \\c3\oi.\,'l'h(-o^.
passage arises from oiyf (which is a rela- 771. e5 8e f/cao-ra aOavaTois SisTaJei'
live word) referring to something /()//om;- d/ivs, koI iir((ppa.^( rifxas : Id. ib. 74.
jng- instead ai preceding it. — J. S. — J. S.
§ X. Rule i— 3.] "Ottj/, "Oirov. I53
ellipsis, according to Hoopeveen, is as follows: oW, ei Kal noWa
icnl i;a\a o't arpariiyot cnrepyucoyTai, Cfiws, &c. sre Plat. Phicdr. p. 240.
rJe Rep. ii. p. 365. — 4. wlieii o'^ws be follows : Ctb. Tab. p. Sip.
[p. 44. 1. 5. ed. Simps. Oxoii. 17^8.] — 5. wlieii ofiius S' ovv follows:
o/jMS b' OW iravTa raxna ■)(^<up£ir cuaai i)\Qov, Plato Ep. iii, — 0. So
before u^ws /niyToi, however, which very often begins a sentence;
e. g. Dcmostli. adv. Nausiin. p. 991. [I. 21. eil. Reisk,]
SECTION X. — On otjj, 6Vow, on-wj, oTorav, orar, ore, ot/rw,
p(}hi(i)s, iifpn, TTuXiy, rrtp, vp\y, pn.
Rule F. (I. II.) "Ottj; nmy be considered as a dative agreeing
with uhu understood. It often answers to ravTr] {ob(v, viz.) precedinj;
or following; as, to. Trefil Aiojia vTuplet Tnvrr] ytyto/iei'a, oTrtjTrep ay
avros tQeXrjs : Plat. Epist. vii. p. 35.Q. v. Plat. Ep. ad Dioiiys. p. 315.
Plicedr. p. 246. 6V?; av 6 Xuyos, unnrep nievfin, (peprj, tuvtt) Ireof :
Plat, de Hep. ii. It may be rendered — 1. in the part ivhere, ivliere-
soever, in the xvny in ivhich, rehire : okti boKol, elaeliaXor els to arpd-
revfia — : I hue. II, 100, ov xni 01 pvuKes anocfTuiTfjaTa dvacpvawcrt,
fjTTi] av rvxwm Tijs yFjs : Plat. Phted. c. 6I. which way : Hoiii. 11. ^,
507. — 2. whither, whithersoever : irefi-^ei. 6' oVn-jj ae Kpahli) dv/uos re
KeXevei, Hom. Od. £, 517- ■nepidyoyras onrj av avrai beiKvvojaiv, Ceb.
Tab. C. 6'. Tovr' I'lbr), oiri] ciToiSiicrernt, nbrjXov : Plato Pheedr. p. 3.
what it will come to, in u'hat it will end. Ylin and oiroi denote mo-
tion towards a place, as -nol /loXu; whither can I go? but -rr^ and
0-7] signify both that motion towards a place, and also at the same
time remaiience in the place towards which the motion tends, as irrj
oTw; whither can J go and stay? Hence Euripides uses both words
together : nol, -ko. tpepofuai ; i. e. properly, towards what place, to u'hat
place, am I borne? See Schol. Eurip. ad Hec. 1075. and Hermann,
ad Eurip. Here. F. 123(}. — 3. Hoiv ; in what way; in what
respect ; by whatever means ; as, fiadf'iv , oiry e^fi : Plat. Plr«d. c. 35.
Xey, vnri bi) ov^ 'iKatws, sc. (prilveTat elprjTdni : Plat. Plised. C. 26. eve/-
yov Tov KaXov e'lre Trapovaiu, e'lre Kuirwvia, e'lre uttt] b)) Kal otzios irpoaye-
voiiivt] : Plat. Phaed. c. 49. "Ott?; denotes the means, onws the manner.
See Plut. de Aiiim. Procr. p. 1023. vvv ue, oV?; re (.ni t/Vws e'x'^,
Ttfiw : yEl. V. H. i, 38. orrr} hv irapeiki], cixLoiiai rov irpnyfjaTOS : by
whatever means it may be practicable or possible.
II. (III.) "Oirr] ovv or ony av, or in one word birr}br]ovy, OTrribt'iTrore,
or 6nr]br]worovy, is, by any means possible ; by any means ivhat-
ever ; by some means or other, ivhatever they may be ; as, -neipitaoput
(jTrrj ovv TO u^dos airoaelaaiidaL.
III. (lV.)''07rou — 1. signities tt'Aere: yjv 6' epojT^, uirov €\fi\, Xeye
rdXrjOi/, oTi tTTi To'ii opiois : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 31. v. Plut, in Public.
p. 100. in fine. Matlh. vi, 21. — 2. whither, the place to which:
John viii, 21. xiv, 4. and it may be noted here that the Greeks
are accustomed to put, by attraction, adverbs of motion for those
ol rest: â– )^^ii)nelv j^ewv onoi ^dorui KpvxpavTe XijffOfjev btpas, Eurip.
Viger. V
154 "On-wf. [Chap. vir. ^ x.
I|)li. T. 118. i. e. as Porson lias remarked, eice'iae ottov. See Pors.
ad Hec. IO7O, and in another manner in Iph. T. 113. opa be y
e'lais) TfiiyXixptjjy, owot Kevov befias KaBe'ii'cii, wliicli Seidler rightly ex-
plains, OTTOV K€v6v kariv, WTT€ kvTavQo'i he/jas Kude'iyai: V. Seidl. ad Ipll.
T. 348. — 3. Ill argumentation it is, seeing that, since : ^j-n-ov uvtos ye
TToWa exei, oirov ye kcu lnjnof t/cci/rrw Tonaura hebutKei' '. Xen. Cyrop.
VJii, 4, 31. Kat Ti rroi TOi' 'Op(pea ») tov ^eavdov Keyto, oirov Koi Kad'
7//uts avTovs tyereTo ns, &c. Lucian, adv. Iiuloct. t. iii. p. 111. v. et
p. 116. and Lucian, in Tinion. p. 103. — 4. "Ottou ^ei — ottov be, is,
there — here; in some places — in other places; partly — partly: av
oiif (LTTO Trjs fiovabos ap^a^tei'ot, rovs bnrXafriovs Kai TpnrKaaiovs ev /jiepei
TiQUifiei', yei'tinot'Tai icutu to e^iji, ottov fj e y {there, i. e. ottov fxe.v
biTTXaaiuvs rlOefiei') to tev-epov, Kn\ to Teraprov, koi oyiooV ottov
he {here) Tpimv, Ka\ evvaTov, cal etKonroeftbojiov: Plut. de Anim.
Procr. p. 10'27- Xt/niuiy ts yap yeyovam Ka\ TTOTajiCjv — ottov /uev
€ K\ei\peis, — oiTOv be o'lov UTTobpaaeis iceil KaTdbuaeis : Plut. de Def.
Or. Tr]i' ui'dpbjTTCfTjy aTtieretai — eKfepoiiei'Tjv ottov fjef eh betcrtbat-
/ioviav Kai Tvcpov, OTTOV be els oXiywpiav twv deiojv Kal Ttepi<pp6vTi'nv:
Plut. in Camill. c. 6. extr. Sometimes ottov pev is not foiiowt'd by
OTTOV be, as ottov fief — TTep\ be ras eo^ciTihs, Sec. Diod. S. iii, 34.^
'Ottovovv is, any where: befffxos $w^ otwovv, w/rre fievetv ottovovv,
TTorepos to-j^i/pci-epos errrir, avciyKi] f; eTTiOvfitn ', Plat, in Crat>l. p. 403.
IV. (V.) "Orrivs, derived from irws, signifies — 1. os, in the same
manner as, accordingly as; how, in what manner: prireov ao\ —
ovTws, OTTivs olds 76 ell Plato Pliaedr. p. 236'. v. et p. 228. ev elbo-
ras, on, onios av Vfie7s vvri TTepi aiiT^u yvuire, oiirw i:al tov a\\o»'
\pr'irov J/ 7ro\($ avTo'is y^pricrerai : Lysias adv. Alcib. i. p. 520. [1. 5. ed.
Reisk.] OTTdts ej^w TTpos be'iTrya, 6 TrapeXrjXvOws fiov Bios uttos fiaprvptov
av yevot-o: Lucian, in Lapitli. t. iii. p. 434. v. Iliad ft, 252. Ari-
stoph. ill Pac. 131. — 2. in order that, that: eTrifieXe'iirdui bel, ottuis
(Tojai 76 eaovTat ui ines, &c. Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 1. o/rws fiev Tavra
6^676, e/uu /.leXt'inrei: Id. Cvrop. ii, 1, 15.
In both these significations Sttojs, when a thing present is spoken
of, takes a subjunctive mood after it:' avros croi lvfXTTpodvj.ujnof.iaL
Sel^ai OTT(t)s av fie bibatrfs {now) Ttepi tov oaiov, Plat. Euthyphr. c. 13.
ovtc t')(w eywye ottios etrrw, Id. ib. c. 12. See the example from Lysias.
ravTo. aoi otto ttoXXQv oXiya Tcapedefirfv, ottws findr]%, {now) oiov avbpa
TrapitXiTTojv, Ai'^iXof earths : Lucian, in Lapith. p. 437- ottuis, a fiev
ayaOa errrt, Troiw/iev : Xen. CEc. vi, 11.
When a thing is spoken of as the thought of any one, oVws pro-
perly takes an optative ; and that usually after past tenses, because
then the optative can signify what is past, inasmuch as it indicates
the thought to have been present at that preceding time denoted by
the past tense ; ov^ ottws w^eXiyo-at t^/v ttoXiv S«e»o»'/0»j, oW 6tt(i>s ti
Kepbalvot: Lys. adv. Phil. p. 881. [I. 15. ed. Reisk.] ei ttuvv iroXvv,
' "Ottov, in tchich : JjSov 5' iWb <pt\op- — J. S.
viBias -ndvTfs ii(\ri, Uttov xf^'Sij/ ^y ' See Aiistoph. Lj9. 384. Ve«p. 1525.
Tij ifitrfiTuiniXfvq, f) ITTJl'fAoif, f) XV" ■'"'*• — ■'• S.
1j TT*(n<nt()a., iSe. A^i^t'>|lll. A v. ISOl.
Rule 4.] "Onus. 155
ovK ap, &c. Deniosth. (le Tals. Leg. p. 343. eil. Ileisk. tovt' enparTov,
— OTTws Tc't^tara Kai icuKiar anoXoifieOa : Aristopll. Acll. JoG. cf. Iliad
<p, 548. Flat, (le Aiiiin. Muiid. p. 99. j^scliiii. Dial, iii, 1. [p. 647.
1. 37. in ihe ) Basil, t'dition of Plato.] In the passage tiled above
from Lucian, ([.apilli. p. 437-) if i^aOois were substituted for fjuOrjs,
tlie sense would be, t/iat you might learn ; i. e. with the dvsign at
that time that you might learn.
The indicative of the future (as the optative) is construed witli
OTTws, when something is to be signihed, which is conten)plated as
future at the time denoted by the principal verb. Wherefore that
tense occurs in construction with a present, and a future, and a past,
tense: eroifioi elaiy, eaoyrai, yrjaf, Trparreiy vttujs eaerai." —
â– vprjidCiTtov fiev oiiK al (7')(^v %'7] enifjieXofjieyos, ottws aoi earai ws irXelcr-
Ta : Plat. Apol. c. 17' fiovXevao/jeda Trept tuiv riicvwi', ottws oti
fleXrtara vaibevao fiev atWa : Xen. Q^c. vii, 12. ixef^ovXeve ade
OTTios fiijT ayaduu firjbef \pi](pt a e aOe, TroXXiof re ivhee'is eaeaQe:
Lysias adv. Erat. p. 413. [I. 7- ed. Reisk.] cf. Xen. QLi:. iv,
9. Men), iii, 2, 1. Cyrop. ii, 1, 15. Lys. adv. Erat. p. 416".
[I. 9. ed. Reisk.] adv. Ergoci. p. 821. [I. 3. ed. Reisk.] Plat, de Rep.
iv. p. 4'21. Eurip. Med. 322. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2. ab inilio. Thuc.
iii, 4. extr.
The indicative of a past tense must of necessity be used with ottws,
when a purpose or design is spoken of, which was entertained but not
carried into effect: ovkovv fxp»7>' '^s V\i]yaaov 5ev^ai itrepov, unws
etpaii'ov tu~is deo'n rpnytKuiTspos : Aristopll. Pac. 135. 1/0U should have
vwunted Pegasus, that you might have appeared more grand and
pompous: i. e. by ivhich being done, you would have appeared, &c.
but he did not mount Pegasus; wherefore he did not appear more
pompous.^ These rules apply to oirws wiieii /u)/ is joined to it : £v) e-
(iriaav TTputra fiev ra jjciicpu Tei-^rj eXe'iy 'AOijvalovs, ottws /ji) eTrt[3oT]6ij<T(i>aiy
Cf: Nt<Ta/«s ol YleXoTTOvyijCFioi : lest, &C. Tliuc. iv, 66. aXX' onws fxq
ov^ olus 7 €(joy.ai, viz. (jXeTireuy, but I doubt I shall not be able: Plat.
de Rep. vi. p. 506.'"
When OTTWS means as, (sicut,) it properly takes an indicative, but
in oblique phraseology a subjuiiclive and optative.
In the second sense above mentioned, ottws is construed, but very
rarely, with an intinitive : be! lifids TveipdaBdi, urrun ws /3e\rtaru rri
vpnai]KOVTa biairpamadai : Xen. CEc. vii, '2^. cf. Xen. Hist. Gt. vi,
2, 20. Diod. Sic. t. ii. p. A67. and 408. and Wessel. on the latter
passage. — 3. (VT.) Before ottws in bulb senses, opa, or (ppuynce, or
" After an imperative, Aristopll.
Tbcsm. 285. after a future indicative,
Aristopll. Ran. 1120. — J. S.
" Tryga:us, to whom the words are
addressed in Aristoph. was so far from
having had any design of im unting Pe-
gasus, tliat in answer to them he gives a
reason why it would not have done. Nor
^oes it appear that he had any design of
appeitring- more pompous. Although con-
silium cepil would have been a more
proper ex])r(ssion than consilium habiiit,
(the words used by llernianii,) yet there
can be no doubt about his meaning.
—J. S.
'" M?) Bfoov Kivd (ppfuas, — oTrojj ;urj (Tov
ytvos — irai/ ayaffTp(<lift A/kjj : Aristopll.
At. ia39.— J. S.
166 'OTTorar. [ChaP. VII. § x.
&ye, is understood, and it takes an indicative of the future after it : '
Kul 0Trii)s fwi /at) ipe'is, and take care you do not tell me : Plat, de Rep.
i. r« oKoKC ciTTws bei,€i KaXuis, Arist()ph. Vcsp. 1217' See Plul. 3'26.
Pac. 10J7, 76. Nub. 481). Lysias Apol. p. 24. [1. 5. ed. Reisk.] — 4.
"Ottwj; is used in answers to questions asked with ttws, relatively to
that word, and instead of a repetition of it : Streps, ttuh /jie xP7
KnXeh'i Socr. oTTws ; Tt)v KnpboTnji' : how ought J to call it ? how?
ivhy, T\\v Kupboirrjy : Aristoph. Nub. 677' v. Aristopli. Vesp. 48.
Thesin. 210.-5. for ws or on: uW 07r(i)i /uey kyw aydafxai Tfi^tov
v/ids, fjT)b' vTrovoe'ire : Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 20. — 6. with a sufierlalive :
avTol b' aro)Ki(jni'(f oiruis civiotcitm, Aristopli. Pac. 20G. i. e. avwKiaavro
ovTios, oTTio'i 01 ui'iornru}. liioiKii^ovrai, as in Latin, ut qui maxime, &c,
— 7. (8.) It is put for lireibi), after, after that:^ i)^ris b' omos i'jKov-
aar, ovbeis upyos Ijv : Eurip. Pliceu. 1153. cf. 1464. and Horn. Od.
b, lOy. — 8. (10.) (V.) Oi^x t'^ws, ou^ OTL, ovy^ (nov, may each be ren-
dt-red, sometimes not only, som< times not only not, and sometimes
much less ; althougli properly ov)( OTrim is ovk epui oitws, — ov^ '"rt, ovk
ipu) on, — dnd ou^ oloi' is ov rolov o'loy. See Tyrwiiilt. ao Aristot.
Poet. p. 128. ami Lenncp. arl Plial. p. 235. oh yap ottujs fii) to
awf-iu vppii^eaOai npos — dieffOe -^privai, t'tWci Kai, &c. for you not only,
&c. Demostli. in Mid.' p. 386". [p. 518.1. 11. ed. l\e'\sk.] (Tvi.nru(Tr]s
Tf]s TTciXews Kotvovs bel yoieas rovs irei'ijTus yye'iaBut. tcni 7rpo(7)]Kei tovtovs
ov-)(^ oTTtJi, (Jv ri TToXis b'lbwmv, {KpeXecrdcn ri : [not only not to deprive
them of any part of what the state gives them, — but, &c. two accu-
satives after a<j>e\e(rd(tt. Zeunius has mistaken the sense :] uXX' el
KOI firjbey i)i> rovnvi', aXXoOei' (TKone'iP onws ^t>;5fj'ci« ni'Tes erbeels nepi-
oipBi)fTorT(u : Demostli. Phil. iv. p. 142. [I. 6. ed. Reisk.] aW oi/x
oTTws vjilf TMi' avTov Ti €Tr(:bioK€t' , (he not only has not, cVc.) aXXa kuI
tCjv vf^i€T€pti)i' TToXXa v(l>^pr]rai : Lysias adv. Nicom, p. S6"2. [p. 803.
1. 13. ed. Reisk.] So ov^ ottms j^^upiy abrols ex^'*» Q'^^" fiiffduxras
aeavrof KctTn Tovnoyt TroXirevi] : not only not: Dcmoslh. pro Cor.
p. 331. in fin. ovbe f^ivr]^inrevaeiy w/i;ji' roi' A/a, ov-^ ottws (much
less) Kai Tr}XiKavTa ay arnKTijrreiv '. Lucian, Prom. Clytacmn. ovkovv
'OpefTTrjs k'fii au vavcreTOf rabe. Electr. Trf.navfieO' fjfxels, "UX ottws
ae Travuofiei' : nedum ; so far are we from being able to, Sic. instead
of being able to, tic. Suphocl. El. 7y6'. — 9. "Ottws with a f;enilive
and cX'" • OTTios >) 'Adq^aioi bvyafietos, j) AnKebaii^oyioi ey^oiev
Tv)(^T]s: pro7tt ; according to the degrte of power of the Athenians,
or of good fortune (f the Lacedctinonians : Aristid. Or. in Rom.
p. 352.'
'OircWay, whensoever, when, compounded of on-ore and ay, is never
joined with an indicative mood, exce|)t in the future. It is construed
' "K^irws ttot' i^anTTpevaotxev rovr &vf\) J. S.
K(j.vQT\\iov, Aristopli. Ly.s. 28y. Kai rovS" - AiM Ztras, in whuterer manner, in
Hirais fJ-T) xf/evfffrar ij.t]S' — avaSuafTai : Of- u-lint manner soever : iyii 'i:apf\i)\v6a,
ino.scli. Epist. i. p. 14(i(>. I. 17. eil. lieisk. TtKntvuv ovic atnhs a^lws rwy v/xtf nfirpay-
— J. S. fjifywv iiiruu SuvfiatcrOai, aWd. to irpay-
y Meri raW, Hirais (when) y<fv kyevtff /xara, virus 6.v ti$ e^irj?, SiKuia (paff'tadat :
vlhs ovro(T\, — irtpl rovvS/xaros—iKoiSopov- Dcniosth. Piooeiu. p. 1451. 1. 'J. ed.
Hfda,: Aristoph. Nub. G3. ed. Bekk,. — Reisk. — J. S.
Rule 4.] "Oruy, "Ore. 157
— I. with an optative, ulieii a tliini; is spoken of as the thought of
some person, and so orap is coiisliued in i^Lschyl. Pers. 448. Also
with a past tense of tiie optative, when a things is spoken of as havint;
often occurred: o;rorav youf ay nyKacdsit] fj.et', ciTroXeiipOetTes
vov, — ufftrelc, ovhev I'lany in aWoi irpus ro i^aprepely : Plato S)mp.
f. 35. — 2. with a subjunctive:" f^icrdov (TTpnrevopTui, i-mWap th uvruiy
berjrai: Xen. Cjrop. iii, '2, J. ('nroTai' rl run' €K€'l ojjohu/jn 'ibwan-,
tKirXiiTTOvTai : Plato PIrtudr. p. 259. — 3. with an indicative future,
Iliad 0, 341. [Hermann ohserves that in tiiis example fdeyio^iui
may have been put for (jtBeylut/jtu, the vowel having been sborlened
in Homer's usual manner; as in Ifieifjerm for t^te/p/jrut, Od. a, 41.
and in arpecperai for <T-pe(pr]Tnt, II. /n, 41.]
"Orav is compounded of tire and au, wherefore the poets for urnv
commonly say lire ney' v. Iliad i, 498. It is usually construed with
a subjunctive n)ood, but with an optative also in the same circum-
stances as oTTUTav. It signifies — I. ichensoever, as often as: dXX*
oray ris Xeyr], on, &c. Plato Symp. c. 21. v. c. 11. and 13. — 2. as
Jong as, John ix, 5. — 3. since, because: judXttr-a uray to ^ley Tay^iarov
y tG)v ovruiv, Arisfot. de Mund. c. 4. This is a very rare signitication.
— 4. It si!»nifies generally and indefinitely, and is answered by rrlre :
OTav nepl to <pcii>Tacrfj.a ovroy inrayTq.y (pu)/j.€y, — rore Tcurepuv xpevbT/ bo^a-
Seiv rrjv 4^vyj]y Sijuwy 'pljaoney, &c. Plat, in Sophist, p. 240.
"Ore designates a certain and definite time ; and — 1. it is usually
construed with a preterperfect or aorist indicative; as, ad' i'lKofiev
Ei'/SojcDo-t /3e/^o?j9/;icorfs, Demosth. Ol. i. p. 11. [1. 10. ed. Reisk.]
ore 'ihev avrov, Atheii. Deipn. xi. p. 505. ore he ijyyiaey o Koipos,
&c. iNlatth. xxi, 34. — 2. Sometimes with a present : T/ yijy, ore ovrujs
o^ews aoi vwaKovw : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 6. — 3. Willi an optative or sub-
junctive it signifies, whensoever, as often as, if ever ov at any time :
etfiXet ^e cai eri/ja, ore ruas 'iboi toiovto ti non^uuvras, o Trairas e(3ov-
XeTo TToiely : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 30. v. Horn. II. f, 323. — 4. It often
signifies, since, seeing that: ore bt) tovto o'lLpws ecjuv ae\, Plato
Symp. p. 206. ore Toivvy tovO' ovrtos e'x^*' 7i'P""'/'>ft TrpoQv^ws eBeXeiy
ciKoveiy : Demoslh. Ol. i. [p. Q. 1. 3. ed. lleisk.J — 5. 'Ore //tr, ore be,
are put for nore f^ey, ttote be, at one time, at another time : ov yhu
OTe fiey aXXois, ore be ixXXuis, /.lefiiKToi Tois \j^u^(us o napa tou deov
■)(pv(Tus, a.W ae« to'is avro'is : Arisfot. Polit. ii, 5. v. Apoll. Rhod.
i, 127U.* And in the same sense, ore fiev, ixXXore be, Iliad A, 64.
cf. II. (7, 599. and totc /.lei — ctAXore be, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 20. and eaO'
ot€, — ore, Soph. Aj. 56'. and 7ore — uXXore, Soph. lil. 729- Some-
limes ore fiev is omitted before otf. be, as in Iliad p, 178. and also ore,
or rore, or c'iXXore, before aXXore, Soph. EI. 752. Trach. 11. Enrip.
Hec. 28. — 6. "Ore /j>) is put for el fxr], unless, except : Horn. U. v,
319. T, 227. Od. ,r, 197.
'0;rore signifies — I. forasmuch as, seeing that, since, with an indi-
* See Aristoph. Plut. 667. Lys. 770. xpv/J-O'i'' iirpdrTetrdf rorl 5' ws irapaSSuTos
• — J. S. SuiKfTf : Demosth. in Nausiiu. p. 'JS'J. 1.
* So TOTS fxlv, totJ 5e: rore fifv yhp, 6. ed Reisk. — J. S.
i)S ouK owro5j5<$vT», SUas tXayx'li-i'fTf, xal
158
Ovru, 'V^hitii,
[Chap. yii. § x.
cative mood : oTrure trpos ^ijxas l^XQes irpeirfievwy, Xen. Anab. vii, J, 6.
OTTore ye Troires napaKaXovai yue, &c. Id. Symp. iv, IS.*^ — 2. whenever,
as often os, with an optative, especially of I lie present tense ;'' onoTs
be xpeyoi'Tujv y kiriiuo'uvTtiyv riras dcovoi, ov^ i}TTOv uiero unra/japdafeiv
Tovs Twy XeyoiTijjy rponuvi 7) Trefu wv XkyoieV. Xen. Ages, xi, 4. — 3.
AvrtKa — oTTore ay, as soon as ever: avriKa fiuXa Trapeaoyrai, bizore av
KpuTwrji : Xen. Cyr. iv, 2, 37.
V. (VII.) O'vTU), or ourws, even before a consonant, then at last,
then and Jiot btjore ; ^ Trpoaev^u/deyoi Oeo'is, — ovtcj bitftaiyoy tU opia :
Xen. Cyrop. ii. iiiit.
VI. (VIII.) The meaning of nvrw is oflen rendered less determinate
by the addition of ttws or nov ; as ou-w ttois, in some such manner as
this ; nearly in this manner.
\'II. (IX.) T/ieTs bk ovTti} ir(t)s a»eu Trpny/jorwv Xajj^avere eh tus
eoprai, so ohne Umstdnde : \^bnt you receive the public money simply,
unconditionally , u'ithout rendering any service in return :] Demoslh.
i. Piiiiip. [p. 14. 1. 28. ed. Reisk.] (See note g in the following
page.)
VIII. (X.) Ovrws in some phrases, as in ovrws ovaio, e. g., is used
in a sense similar to that of the Latin made animo, iiaving reference
however to what precedes ; as, ovtojs uymo aiye -Fiabe riis (piXonoylas,
courage ! go on and still further increase this diligence and in-
dustry l-f
IX. (XI.) It sometimes answers to ottws or ws ])receding : <^r\\A
hfiv v^xa.% roTs 'OAvi 6(0ts j3otjf)e~iy, Kai oirus Tis Xcyei KaXXiara cai
ra^iffra, ovtcjs apeanei /jof. Demosth. Ol. ii.
X. (XII.) With p^biws : — ciiTj' ovy pc^blws ovr<o Trn/H/ao/iei', tovs eiri-
rv)^6)Tai l-ivOovs uKtveiv tovs TJ-u'ibas ; thus recklessly : Plato ii. Rep.
■^ TldfTa fj.€V &v6puTrov ovra irpoaZoKav
Set, &ir6Te Ka\ iyai fjXv i^)' vixSiv alrlau
ex^ — : Xeu. Anab. vii, 6, I).
'^ Sitice, seeing that, with an optative :
7) Se SioiKrjo-iS (Jnmilij i.r pendtture, huu.-<e-
holil (xpeiises,) ffvxt'Vy ottSt f Seoi tov-
t6v t€ Kixi avrrjy rpecpeiv, Kal iraiSdpia
rpla, — Kal depairalua^ Svo, Koi olK(Tr)u Sia-
Rovov, ike. Pseuiio-Dcmosth. in NeiLT. p.
1359. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With a past tensp
of tlie optative : iiriire tl (TKevdpiov rov
S(cnr6T0u iKfeAoi', iyw af XavQavnu enoiovv
ael: Aristoj)h. Plut. 1139. With tlie .-Eol.
aor. Ari.stoph. Plut. 1019. 1 aor. |)ass.
Plut. 1145. 2 aor. act. Av. 512. 1 aor.
mid. K(i. 1343.— J. S.
' TlapafTx^yT' a(T<pd\ftay ainKdelv, ovtw
irpoaTarTfiv (pevyetv, opBws fX*"' effTf :
Diinostli. in Aristucr. p. G14. 1. 8. ed.
Reisk.— J. S.
/ OvTois uyaio is sometimes a form of
entreaty, being properly a conditional
good wish: @e(jfi6no\i, (prjrrtv, outcbs
oyaio, X'^P"' "" tiiKpav alrovar) Sbs, ixi}Siv
aPTftiriiu : Liician, de IMerc. (Jond. p. 492.
A. ed. Salmur. ovtws iyaio, TtapaKa-
Povaa ijKe fxoi : Id. .Dial. Mer. p. 709.
D. and in the plural : 'iKeTiuu, avTiffoKo)
Trphs TraiSccv, trphs yvvaiKwv, irpbs tcSj'
ofTODV vfxiv ayadoov outuis ofaiade tov-
Tdiv, fiy] mpuh7)Ti jxi— : Demostli. in A-
pliob. ii. p. 812. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With tlie
first person of tlie same verb ovrois is used
in a form of protestation, the phra'^e being
iiill properly a conditional wisli : Sxrirep
avafivriaBels Trphs ttjv o\ptu ruv vUuiv, ovtus
bvaifjLrjv, ((pr], tovtwv, fTn^a\wv avraiv Trjy
Xfipa, iis dA.>j0i) irphs at ipa> : Lucian,
l^liilops. p. 489. A. Thus sic is used ia
Latin : Sic tua Cyrnx-as fugiant exaniina
taxos, \ irg. Eel. ix, 30. and so in Enjilisii :
So may kind rains their xital moisture
yield: Pope. In a siniilnr sense the Ita-
lians u^e .sc ; l)eh, se rij)iisi inai vostra se-
menza, Prega' io, lui, solveteiui (piel nodo.
Dante, Inf. c. 10. Cotal m' apparve, a'
io ancor lo veggia, Un Inme, &c. Id. Purg.
c. 2. El, se per pioggia mai non si distem-
pre II tuo bel corso, aita in qualcha parte
II rozzo stii. Sannazzaro, Egl. — J. S.
I
Rule 5— U.]
"Ofpa.
159
Ov)( odrwi — lis : (T'lrAvioy, f'l noTe, irpo hva^iwv fiXlnv KnraK\ii>6/itevos,
oiiy^ ovTu) biu affj^oX/ar, ws hia to (Tiiij.i(i '. not SO much tliTough Occu-
pation, as. Sec. Pint, ill Cic. p. 864.?
XI. (XIII.) 'Py6('ws witliout (jvT(o occurs in this sense : oruy vfie'is
o Ti av riixi] fi<fb{tx)S \l/)](p!^r]rTd€, DemostI). I'iiil. i.
XII. (XIV.) 'Aypvy TftXaiTov p^blms (i^ioy, an estate worth full a
talent, or well worth a talent : Lvsias.
XIII. (XV.) 'V<fbtu)s t^ety, to be well ; pq.ov e^et*', to he better.
XIV. (XV'I.) 'Vifhioi', followed hy >), for p^ov : p^hiov olufxevos
avTov k:fiTn\vffeiv Ttju boiafxiy TroXeftoiiyTos, jj tu aw/ia Xi'ixpeadai ipev-
ynyros : Pluf. ill Pomp.
"Ofoa, a poetide particle, is — 1. tvhilst, as lo?ig as: uXX' tiyer', o0p*
fi' J'/jt dotj ftpwats re -rruais re, fiyrjrjafieOa /3pw/j»js : Hom. 0(l. (.-, I76.
If duration not yet finished, and of which the end is uncertain, he
spoken of, oippa is joined with a snhjnnctive ; as, ixppu tis iw)], &c.
Tlieogn. 1139. cf. 971- Kpast duration, with an indicative; as, o^pa
fiev es TToXefioy TrwXeiTKcro bios 'A^tXXevs, ovbe-rroTe, &c. Hom. II. e, 788.
and Tu<ppa, so long, is penerally to he understood as answering to it.
See Iliad i, 5+6. — 2. until; in which sense also r6<ppa, expressed
or understood, corresponds to it: v. Horn. II. a, 509- »', 141.^,
558. e, 557. 0pp. Hal. i, 166. iii, 551. and 573. Sometimes v(ppa
answers to brjdh, a long time, preceding, as in Hom. II. e, 588. — 3.
that, in order that. In this sense, like other particles of the same
signification, it is usually construed with the suhjunclive mood, if any
thing present is to he indicated : dWct aoi, w juey' avaibes, ufi lairo-
fjed\ v<ppa ci/ â– ^(^ctipys : Hom. II. a, 158. But with the optative, if a
thing be spoken of as the thought of a person, and if a past tense
goes before: eyehriTO — ohpavuy uaTepoeid' — o<pp' e'tr/ fiacapeacn deals
ebos acrrpaXes aiei : Hesiod, Theog. 128. However, a subjunctive mood
also is construed with it after a past tense, either with or without ay
or Key : [i. e. if what is spoken of in the subjunctive still continues :]
with Key, as in Apoll. Rh. i, 852. without it, as in Pind. diipevce
— u<j)pa eparai, Pvth. iv, 16O. and in Apoll. Rh. errve — o^p' — yuarov
«■In addition to what has been said of
oStws, it ma^J be observed that it has some-
times a signification of simply, hurcly,
merely ; when words are to be taken in
their most common or limited meaning ;
when things are spoken of in the strictest
sense, excluding every thing unessential,
or unusual, ornot necessarily or ordinarily
concomitant : aviypa^au arifious dvai.
Tovro 5' ((TtIv ovx %y o.v ovrwcri ris (pi)-
ffeify aTifiiav, — i. e. not aTiixia in its ordi-
nary acceptnlinn : Demostli. Phil. iii. ]).
122. 1. 11. ed. Reisk. ecrrj 5e toDto, ov-
raxrl fxev a,Kov<rai, on the mere hearing:,
without scrutiny, \6you riva ixo"' fl Se
Tiy avjh aHpt^ws i^erdcreK, xpevSos hv hy
(pavflr) : Id. adv. Lept. p. 402. I. 11. So,
Tj Koi TroioCcra (xi <pri(Ti Sia<pd(ipfiy tovs
veovs; Socr. UTOtra, S> Oavfidcrie, ws ovTce
y! aKO V a ai : Plato Euthyphr. p. 1. 1.28.
ed. Has. 1. ovrot fiiv airfdavov 6 /xiy
crpe^XwBds, afvoipwv, 6 be, 'lirwlas, ovrw.
in the ordinary manner, without the addi-
tion of torture: Lysias in Agorat. p. 478.
ed. Reisk. TrpeaffetJT^y iK ^ov\tjs rivk
\api.^6.voixiv , yvdipijJLOv ovr w(t\, with
whom ice had a mere common acquaint-
ance, OTt 5' ^V TOiOVTOS OVK (lS6TfS, De-
mostli. adv. Zenoth. p. 885. 1. 5. TavrT]v
rh niv irpwTOV ovTwffl izivnv, (in an
ordinary manner, without the accom-
paniment of the indignities afterwards
mentioned,) rivdyica^ov, — is 5e Trpoj/et to
irpayixa, KoiX SitBepnaivovTo, Sic. Demosth.
do Fals. Leg. p. 402. 1. 20.— J. S.
l6o IlaXiv, &c. [Chap. vii. ^ X.
6\i(T(TTj, i, 15. [It is construed with a future indicative after either
a present or a past tense.]
YlnXiv, (in later writers irdXi,) is — 1. back, backwards: Horn. Od.
t}, 143. V. Galat. iv, p. boperai irdXiy, to give back, to restore :
Horn. II. a, ll6. Icfcu TraXty, Od. (, 225. and ijkftv naXtv, Aristopli.
Acli. 820. to return. — 2. again, anew: Honi. Od. r, 533. — 3. con-
trariwise, oppositely : ohb' oy aXi^hea elire, iraKir b' oye XaSero
fiiidof : Odj'SS. V, 254. cf. Iliad b, 357« opyitrni re av noXXovs afxa
beit'os uviip yey ore, Ka) iruXiv wpyovfxivovs eirifbwv KijXeTi' : Plato in
Pha-d. p. 267. V. Ceb. Tab. p. 176. [p. I6. I. S. ed. Simps. Oxon.
Hep appears to be «kin to the proposition -n-fp), and to sijjnify
nearly, about, [rendering the sense of words to which it is joined less
determinate, and resembling sometimes the addition cunque in Latin.]
Examples may be seen in Iliad <p, 410. 441. Od. p, 13. a, 353.
Plato PhaMl. p. 235. Iliad 1, 301. Aristopli. Ach. \OXQ. 559.
11. b, 259- Theogii. 270. Tliis meaning, or eftect, continues in
its compounded state ; as in wanep, ijufp, oirep, bionep, &c. [Tlie
following German interpretations are given by Hermann, immer,
immerhin. Xiyet, anep Xeyet, biKcna Trarra : was immer er sagt, ist
gereclit : [Aristopli. Ach. 559-] ij't^p el\e,wie er auch war: [Xen.
Cyrop. iii, 1, 4.] wairep, u'ie auch, wie dock, wie etwa ; ei-rrep, ivenn
(inders ; hQa •n-ep, wo immir ; a\pe nep, t'/iTrjjs i'lXvBei' : immerhin,
(i. e. zwar,) spiit, doch ham er : [A|)oll. llh. i, 251] av S' iiXXovs
Trep Tlayaxmovs IXeaipe, erbarme dich immer (dock) der andern, [yet,
at least: II. *, 301.] It may sometimes betaken as an adversative
particle, and be rendered although: see II. a, 275. <p, 63.
Ylpiv. — 1. The primary meaning of tt/jIj', which is very common iti
poetry, seems to have been, heretofore, formerly, before: Tptv /jev —
viy be, Iliad 0, 112. and b)) is opposed to -npty in II. e, 472. ttos
voirjTijs yiyyerai, Kay I'tfjovaos rj to irpiv, ov av eptos a\pqTut : Plat.
Symp. p. 196. It is joined with a genitive: irply wpm, before the
proper time: Pind. Pyfli. iv, JG. oh n-porepoy afelffay Trpir ov v/jels
€\pr)(plaaaOe, Demosth. Feed. Alex. 217. [I. 17- ed. Iliisli.] 2. It sig-
nifies fcf/ore <Aa/, or ere; and in this sense is followed by T/ with
either an iiiHiiitive mood, yj^jSe ypa<j.€iv rojiovs ■K()\y *i nnpctXai^f'ty
KaOapav, Plat. Rep. '.i. p. 501. v. Mattli. i, 18. or an indicative,
vp>7i' Toivvy AeTrrtrijr fxr] Trporepoy riOeyat top envTOV yofjioy irpiy y tov
TtaXnwy tovtov eXvae, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 4S(). [I. 13. ed.
lleisk.] or with an optative, if a thing is spoken of as the thought of
any one, /i>) Trporepoy ([tuyai clqTovyTi /iirjyvaeiy Trpiy >) 01 Ka) ey 'Ai;po~
Koph'Bf yhoiTo vbujp, Pausan. cf. Acts xxv, 16. or with a sub-
junctive; s»e St. Luke ii, 26. But j) is often omitted, either
before the infinitive; as, eKitobiDv i'nr€if.u rrply nXriya'i XafteTv,
Aristopli. Vesp. 1316. rtxoOo'/fficet vpiy roy iiyyeXoy — a<l>iKeadai,
Plato Ruthyphr. c. 4. cf. Eurip. Phoen. 82. iMatth. xxvi, 34. 75.
John iv, 49. viii, 58. xiv, 29- or before the indicative, t))v b' eyw ov
XvCTW, npiv fiiv Ka\ y^pris eireiaiv : Horn. II. n, 29- [In this passage,
as in Iliad a, 283. vplv fiiy Kvres upyot eborrai, vpiy, as Hermann
§ xi. Rule 1—3.]
n
a;;.
I6l
observi-s, is pritis, i. e. facUius, (we sliouUl say, soomr,) eher soil
das gesche/ie/i.] or before tlie oplative, when a thing is spoken of
as llie tiiouglit of any person. Key or uy following npiv ; or before
the snl)jnnclive, ny following; as, irp'ty av ti bpaays ; Sopli. Aj. 107.
V. Antig. ISl. In })oetry nplv is repeated, the last, aecording to
Eustath., being always joined with an infinitive ; see II. ft, 348.
a, Q7. There is one passage (Aristoph. Pac. 11 12.) in which the
last TTfuy is joined with a snbjunclive.
'Pa is af)a shortened of its first letter, and has the same signification.
SECTION XI. — On the adverbs ttws, ttoD, rd^a, c3, AND ON
THOSE WHICH EXPRESS APPROBATION OR DISAPPROBA-
TION.
KuLES I. II. riws,* how, is an adverb of manner. It is used — 1.
in interrogiition ; as, e'iirep ftuWei rova eiriopKovs, ttCos bT]T ouj^i Z/jUwv'
eyeirptjaei' ;' Aristoph. Nub. 498. ttws oh kui but rovro, Kai bia Toy r?7s
icaKwaews vofiov, ciiiostort Qaidrw S.f)mb>Bi)vai ; hoiv can he but be? &c.
Lysias adv. Agorat. c. 24. [p. 510. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] v. Plat. Plieedr.
p. 243. Demosth. Ep. 3. p. 118. init. [p. 1485. 1. \6. ed, Reisk.]-'
Yluisyap; and TTws yap civ ; are used elliptically after negative sen-
tences ; as, tQv apiarevoyTwy ovk ay av Trore yevoio' irws yap ; (or ttws
â– yoio ay ;) c! ye irpos bvTivaovv Ka-aTreTrrri-^ius Kii'bvroy, i. e. ttcDs yap ay
yeroio I And ttws yap ov ; after atfirmative sentences ; as, eaelya fiev
i'liia •^apiTos teal enaiyov Kp'ivu)' ttuh yap ov ; for how can I judge,
otherwise? of course I judge them so: [from Demosth. de Cor.
p. 325. I. 20. ed. Reisk.]* '
III. rials, even not interrogatively used, retains its accent, when it
signifies in some certain manner, emphatically ; as, ov xpiyerai 6
* Pisth. irus yap h,v tovtovs 5ok6?s e/c-
ipvyuy ; Euelp. ovk oIS' ottus &v : Aris-
topli. Av. 355.— J. S.
' riair oil Kol '2o<poK\4r)S auTeXd^ero tov
OpSvov ; hoic Clime it to puss that — ivhrj ?
Aristoph. Ran, 787, Clirein. koI ttws
(pfvyovai cr' oTrofTes ; Paup. '6ti /SeATiovs
avrovs TTOiui : Aristoph. Plut, 575. — J. S.
â– > n&Js oil TervipaiTai ; Demosth. Ep. ii.
p. 1483. 1. 2. ed. lleisk. tHos olv ovk
&roiroi> — ; Id. ib. p. 147U. I. 17. — J. S.
* 'Zvvayuii'i^ecTdai '^i\'nnr(fi, Beiuhv fjikv,
til 77) Ka\ 6eoi- TToos yap at ; Kara rrjs ira-
rpiSos : Demosth, de Cor. p. 273. 1. 28.
—J. S.
' The following senses of tfcSs used in-
terrogatively may he added : irws 5oKe7s,
a figured question, expressive of admira-
tion ; KttK Twu aibioiv fiarpaxovs i-rrolei,
TTuis 5o(cf?s: most cleverly: Aristoph. Nub.
bSI. Ka.Kx'^^) '"â– '"'^ SoKiis xa'ipmv, i(p7i,
Viger.
i.e. Kiav, exceedini::ly : Eurip. Iph. A,
1590. V. Aristoph. Plut. 742. It is used
in a figurative questinn instead of an
assertion in Aristoph. Nub. KavravQa
Trois oleaOe /uoutV KapSlau opexQi^" ', upon
this my heart was ready to burst with
anger; Zfioos 5e rhv Qvfxbv SaKcdy, ((prjv,
&c. vers. 13.10. ed. Bekk. and also in-
stead of a direct expression of a wish ; â– jrus
hv oZv irphs Tu'is ayado'is tovtoktiv e|eu-
potu, '6iTais iTt TrpocrfxaSo} p.)) X'^^^^ elvai
roil (TKiKii; Arisloph. Tlicsm. 22. iris
hv (TV jxoi. Ae'leias apX XPV X^yn-v ; Eurip.
ilippol. 346. IlaJs, at tchut price? vus
oiiv b Tvphs 4v BoLaiTo7s iofios ; Arisloph.
Equit. 480. How a yoke of bullocks at
Stamford fair? How a score of ewes now?
IShaksp. P, n, Henr. IV. iii, 2. HaJswiih
an optative and &j' : Ka\ rrws td' 017*'^ hrjr'
&»/ eKdoi/jL is it6\iy; Arisloph. Lys. 912.
— J. S.
X
162 riov, Toxa. [Chap, vii, § xi.
«7r\wj vpyi$.')iuvos, a\X 6 ttws : Arisfot. Sel yap irws fiey ihni Koivcts
KTi'irreis, n\u)s b' Ibias: Aristot, lie Rep. ii, 5. And when in tliis sense
TTWS fjet — TTuis be are opposed ; in one manner, in another manner ;
or j'n some respects, in other respects, Tliemist., custom retains the
circunitiex, allliou<;h 'analogy requires ttws fxey, ttws be, ;ind vy f^ev,
TTi] be, partly, partly ; ore ^lev, b-e be, iroTe yuei', nore be,"' (Prod, in
Plat. Tlieolog. 1. i, e. 4.) and the circumflex is retained also when nQs
signifies how, in what manner, williont a question; as, tiljrovy — to
TTiDs itreXwiTLv avrov, Luke xxii, 2. cf. vers. 4. and 1 Tliess. iv, 1.
Acts iv, 21. But when it signifies indeterminately, in some manner
or other; some how; in a manner; it hecomes an enclitic, and
loses its accent ; as eyw be rovrov tov rponov ttws eifx at\, Aristoph.
Plut. 240." neptepy^eTcii yup itujs ael iipuv o uv vnoOwfieQu, Plat. Eu-
thyplir. p. 11. "AWws ye nioi, iEschin. de Morte c. It), p. 370.
ctfiioaye ttws, 171 one, or some, way at least: Plat. Phsedr. p. 228.
Tlou signifies — 1. tvhere ? as ttoD y)/s c^rr/i' ; — 2. ivhiiher ; ttov aov
TO deov eKelyo imiropoy aTreXyjXvde ; Luciaii, Dial. IMort. 3. So in the
New Testament, ttov is often used for ttoI," as John iii, 8. vii, 35.
xvi, 5. viii, 14. — 3. (IV.) for ttws : ttou be Traibelas aoi Oe/JLS ftvrjoOri-
vai ; Deniosth. pro Cor.'' Iloii retains its circumfit-x accent even
when used materially, as, to yap nod uvro re eari rt, Kut ert liWo ti bel
elvai irapu rovro : Aristot. Physic, iv, although analogy would require
it to be written ttov,
l\uv as an enclitic — 1. signifies anywhere, or somewhere: ttoWi)
cXttis, — eKel, e'iirep ttov aWodi, KTijaitrrdai tovto : Plato Phaid. p. bj-
See Iliad e, iy3. p, 44(). ovbe K(t\vy erTuvOa ttov Kelcrdcu, Lucian,
Dial. Nept. et Nereid. cKe'i be iruv 6 "Apyos ftovKoXe'i, Id. Dial. Jov.
et Merc. — 2. It is used in speaking of things with some degree of
uncertainty and czuUou, probably, perhaps, as [guess, if I mistake
not, (Src. >o(Tw»' ye kcii irt'jvoiv — ec hhvi^mtiov ttoi/ deiuv ev riai yeropi-
vix)v, Plato Phtedr. p. 244. See Ihad <p, 83. e, 473. [II. (i, 1 H).]
The primary signification of rax« is quickly, speedily, soon.'' See
Horn. Od. a, 2.51. Polyb. Exc. Leg. t). This is its only sense in
IIon)er. Next it signifies perhaps, and is used as syiionynious with
V(Twt by Plato in Phiedr. p. 205. de Rep. v. p. 451. Aristoph. Vesp.
280. .Ailschin. Socr. Dial, i, 2. To augment its signification, it is
"' Reiziiis says that irore ^ec, irore 5f it signifies, ivhij, ivlierefore ; iroi \evKhv
ought to be substituted for rore /xiy, tots 'iirirov ; Aristopli. Lys. li>3. irn'i yap Kai
Si, in Xen. Synjj). viii, 5. but 1 have xP')" "''"M^''''" > H). .'i'ifJ. also hoiv, i.e.
already, in note b p. 157. given an ex- how do you mvanl fiuiv Ofpixbv -fiv ; — -rcot
auiplc of TOTc- jxiv, TOTt Si, SO used, from 6ipfj.6y ; lb. 383. As an encliiie it is put
iJcnioslli. in Nausiniacli. p. 989. 1. G. ed. for r-cus : aX\' kripa troi aKfiTTfov, Ari-
Rei!<k. — J. S. stoph. Eq. 35. — J. S.
" I have given this exam])le of Troiy as p Kal fi^v elf tis 4kuvo irrro\aix0dy(L'
an enclitic on tlie auth(jrily of ]«runck'.s ttov Si yfyoiTo hy ravra ; tI KwKvei Kaixh
edition. In \'iger tlie verse is cited as a \4yeiy rls 5' &i/ airoKTeiyai XapiS-qnoy;
proof of a siunification of ttu>s, whicli it Demosth. in Aristucr. p. 038. 1. 17. ed.
has not, at least iti lliat verse. — J. S. lleisk. — J. S.
" As iro? is only tlius incidentally men- v Tdxa S' ilaojxai 'yu: Arislo]ili. Lys.
tioncd, I shall take the occasion to ob- 1114. avrhs yap ^^naty rdxa: Id.
serve that, besides its common meaning, Thesni. CO. — J. S.
Rlle 4, 5.]
Tews, 'CI.
163
joined with otlier cquivali-nt words; as, u fiey yhf> â– rrepi ttuitq ubiKos,
ra)^' at', el rvy^oi, Kal tovtov iibiKei : Deriioslli, pro I'iiorm. p. Q6i.
[I. 15. ctl. Reisk.] ''"X" ^' ^^ '"''^s ovk tOeXoi, Aristopli, Ve*ip.
1-4-47. '""x' "•' "''"' **' i"e0«*j — \a/jo»'re ro$ xpv^as a!pf)ovpovs — :
Pluto Phanlr. p. 256. v. Aristivii. Ep. x. — On tux "" s>ce Sclivcf.
ad Greg. Cor. p. 44.''
Tews signifies — 1. so long, as long as: beStrrdui -e'wj, cms av hrhr}:
Deinostli. c. Timocr. p. 7*21. ed. Reisk. rews /jev av pppw^ejos y ris,
ovbey eiraiadareTai rwi aadpwy: Id. 01. ii. p. 24. [i. 3. ed. Reisk.]
— 2. before, at first ;' ol be arpa-iwrai recjs fikv e'Aeyov ws Bevo([>wy
o"iy(oiro, — tTrel be avrhv i'jKovTa elboy, &c. Xen. Anab. vii, 55.'
IV. (V.)'fl is nsed in calling, or accosting. It is sonu-times Joined
Milh the pronoun ovms in the noniinative, w ovros, hark ye; and
.sometimes omitttd before it, as (kovaov avrrj, Aristopli. Av. liyy.
1243. [ed. Bekk.] and the pronoun witliout w is sometimes joined
with tlie proper name" of the person called to, as, 6 ^aXripeiis ol-os
WiroWobiopos , ov Trepi/jetels ', you Apullodorus of Phalerum, will
yon not stay for me? Plato Symp. [p. 176. 1. 3. ed. Bas. 1.]^ It
is joined also with hav, making by apha^resis wrav, or wrav, or w
V«j', u) \av, friend, my good fellow. When w is construed with a
substantive and adjective together, whiciiever of these two is most
emphatical, is placed next to J. See Hermann, ad Horn. h. Apoll.
14. Schaef. Melet. Cr. p. 114. Erf. ad Soph. Ant. 738. ed. min.
V. (VI.) Those adverbs, and other words, which express assent or
dissent, may be noticed here. Of the first class are, aXijdii, true ;
u\r)d€(TTaTa, most true; aiayKT}, of necessity ; avayKr) yap ovv, cer-
tainly, for it cannot be otherwise: Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39. [and j) yhp
uraytct], Xen. Anab. i, 6, S.] araya] fxev nlv, it cannot be otherwise ;
uiayKaiuTUTov fxer ovv, it must be so nndeniubly ; yap ovv with some
word preceding, ^scliyl. Eumen. 374. Soph. Piiil. 766. Eurip.
Bacch. 920. El. 290. S/jXfif j) and bri\ov6-i, evidently, of course ;
eywye, I do think SO ; cIkus ye, etKos rot, eoiKe, Kii'bvvevet, faiverat,
ifiipaivei ourws e^eiv, it seems probable indeed, it appears so; t^iotye
^ Tox«ws for rdxa '■vBpoiffBrjffav -rrpecr-
^ilciv TrArjSos a-nh rrjs 'EAAaOos, oaov ov
Taxiti's 'rrpdrepou: Polyb. Exc. Leg. 4G.
Ernest, as hardly ever before : temere, i. e.
fere. Tlie compaialive Ocittov sometimes
means, formerly, before : <piXo(TO<piai/ oe
TTpuTos iivS/jLaffe TlvOayopa^, — Outtov Se
iKa\uTO ao<pla : Diog. L. Proocra. p. 5.
1. 9. ed. II. St. form, niinim. also in
Diog. L. in Biant. p. 31. 1. 21. In the
superlative us Tax'trra, as quickly as
possible: AristO|jli. Lys. 2GC. 747. 1009.
1188. Thesm. GG2.— J. S.
* Before : t4ws [xiv ovv, aW ^/ii-
KdKOds, 4^oaK6fj.7]v I'vv S' — , Aristoi)b.
Thesm. 4-19. So Ran. 989. Plut. 834.
at first ; rictis p.iv ovv iKpivupaO'' fharif
XPi'iftfi Koivrj |we/3r)/utJ' ; .Aristopli. Nub.
GG.— J. S.
' Te'tos is also, in the mean time, tnean-
U'liile : PovXeffOe Sfjr' £70; reus omu to,
Kp4a TOUT") fxevuv, vfius 5' ire ; Aristopli.
Av. 1GS9. (1G87. ed. Bekk.) and so in
Pac. 846. Eustathius on Iliad a, 193.
explains Teens, wpos rh traphv, and in the
following passage that seems to be its
meaning; airopuv o S?ifj.os eimpdirov, Koi
yvfivhs &v, TovTOV reus rhv avSpa -nepu^u-
ffaro, for tlie present : Aristoph. I'ac.
CS7.— J. S.
" And sometimes with another pro-
noun ; avTTi (TV, Tzol arpe(pei ; Aristoiih.
Thesm. 610.— J. S.
^' Another form is, ovtos, 5 creroi, Ari-
stopli. Av. 274. the ellipsis of which may
be supplied from v, 406. lu eiro^, ae to:
KaXu. — J. S.
l64 O'vKovy, &c. [Chap. VII,
boKe'i, it seems so to me, that at least is my opinion ; 'iari ravra, it is
so ; OnvfxarjTuis, surprisingli/ so; ku'i yap tern tovtu ye, yes, or / do,
for it certainly is so ; kq< juctXa bi), without any doubt ; k(u opdojs ye,
and rightly too ; Ka\ ohh^v ye KioXvet, and nothing hinders, and
there is no reason ivhy it should not be so : teal Trctiu ye, entirely so ;
(co/i(§>7 fity oZy, yes quite so ; fiu\a ye, certainly ; ^aKiara. ye, most
certainly ; ra), a\r]6ri ye, yes, it is true ; ri) A/', t'ywye,/ do truly ;
vpdwi, rightly ; ov-ws, just so, thus; TruPTinrncnv fiey ovr, and most
unquestionably too ; ttuw /nty ovy, certainly ; TravreXuJs fxey ovy, and
completely so too ; iruvTwv /iciXtora, beyond all doubt ; irws yhp ov ;
1111(1 TTws b" ov ; to be s?/)T ; [see ttws, and the notes.] tj'jiobpa ye, most
entirely ; ti fxijy ; aWh ti fjii]v ; to be siire, ichy to be sure ; vrrfpfvws
bt), V7rep<pvuis fiev ovv, exceedingly, wonderfully ; (prjfil eyw, I affirm it.
Sometimes assent is expressed by a repetition of a preceding won! ;
as, to avyvGiv K(t\ ctXXwj' Trpoabe^aerai. — • it is answered avyjiLv fiiv
Toi : Plato Rep. ii, 371. and to TvpwTuv ?)»' — • 7iy yup : I'l. Tliea^t. or
by a word not before expressed, but agreeing with a preceding one ;
as, ap vvic uvayKJi — ; is answered by iruWi] ye, (dniyk/j viz.) Plat.
Parmen. "
VI. (VII.) Of the second class are, abuyaTor, impossible ; i^Kiara
ye, not at all ; kui ttCjs, how can it ? to be sure not ; jua A/a, followed
by a,\Xa, (when the formula is both negative and corrective,) or
by some particle of denial : Pisthet. fiCJv evdv FleW/yr/js neTeaOai
biaroe'i ; Sycoph. /ua At", aWa cX/yrrjp et/ji — : no indeed, I am a sum-
nwner : Arislopli. Av. 1422. see also 1-1.27- /ua At" oinc eywye, noi
/, 'faith; ^U At" oi)/c e/joiye boi^el, no indeed, J think not;'' ov yap,
and ov yap olv, no, I grant, or agree;" ovbafiws, by no means;
ovbafiuis oirwaoiiy, by no means ivhatever ; ov bnra, no indeed: Eurip.
Ileracl. 508. Hel. 1244.. oi)5" owwaTiovy, not in any degree, not by
any means ; ov< eotKe, and ov (pairerat, it seems not ; "^ovicovy eytoye,
no indeed, I do not ; (but ovkovv, therefore, is affirmative.*) ob ftk
Toy At'a, no, by Jove ; ov fioi boKe'i, I think not ; ob irayv, not at all ;
TTws yap, how can it? See -^riLs, and the notes. '^Obnovv is the same
as ovK owi'.^ — 1. JNlen. oaris be rifiq. fxri^ep ; Orest. €bbai/.iu)v efv.
INIen. ovKovy av y. you therefore are not so. Orest. ov yup fi
avbaynvaty ui kf/icat : Eurip. Or. l6'06. [lfi23. Pors.] — 2. kh^ioI yap
7iv TTod' OVTOS e-)(di(7-os, — a\/V abrciv efxirns oyr" eyw roiuybe fsoi ovkovv
ani^uaaifi av : I loould not indeed, or / would not on that account :
Soph. Aj. 1336. — 3. ovkovv oieibt] rube kXvidv pvaei TeKva ; ivill you
not then, &c. Eurip. Or. 1238. [1236". Pors.] — 4. ovkovv yeXws i'lbia-os
«> Witli respect to jua being not negative Greek particles when thus cited apart
ill itself, Zeunius n-fers to Em. on Xen. from the sentences to wl.icli they belong
IMem. iii, 13, 3. add Brunck on Aristoph, or refer: in these answers, yap and yap
Lys. ICj. as to its not beini^ aflirmative. olv refer to the interrogator's anticipation
In the following passage 1 suppose v)\ that the answers would be wiiat they are.
should be substituted, avayKr)v olcav av- These particles arc never used in thi^ raan-
To?5 Kal vavfi.axf'iv koI Trefoyuaxsii', Koi /xa ner in answer to questions really put tor
At'a T€ixo/:tax«^i' : Plut. Alcib, p. 370. 1. the sake of information. — .T. S.
19. H. St.— J. S. " See Aristoph. Plut. 342. SSD. also
•* It is a hopeless task to translate 71. Thesm. 220. — J. S.
^ xii. Rule l, 2.] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. l65
els f\Op(ivs veX^i' ; and is it not, &c. Soph. Aj. 79' sec v. 1051.
Euri|). Orest. l622.
O'vKouy' signifies therefore, witiiout interrogation ; although this
signification arises from the negation contained in it.
In order to understand riglitly the passages in which o'vkovv occurs,
it will he necessary to remember that the Greeks iiave a peculiar
mode of begiiuiing sentences with interrogation, and ending tliem
witiiout ; as, o'loff o bpdaov, i. e. hparrov — olafy o ; oiad' (os yevecjdu),
i. e. yeveerdu), oiad' ws; VVlien, therefore, one says, ovKovr, orav bi) /u>)
adeyw, irenaiKTO/jnt, (Soph. Anlig. yi.) this is virtually, TreTraiKTOjuai*
ovKoiJy I shall I not ? So ovKOvy to fxev rej^i'jjs re cat uTe^^vias Xoywv
Trepi hnruis ey^eru), (Plato Plia^dr. p. 274'.) is, licapws ej^erw" ovkovv ;
and ovKoii V aWa to bu'ibr]fia enmjv fie e-^eiy, (Lucian, dial, niort. X. t. i.
p. 366.) is, u\A« TO biabrjfia eairoj' fie e)(^eii'' ovkovv; will you not?
Now he who puts a question for the purpose of urging a concession,
as nonne? forms a conclusion on what goes before; and in many
passages it would lie a matter of indifference whether such a question
or the word therefore were employed; hence it comes to pass that
OVKOVV may often be so trauslated.
SECTION XII. — Of adverbs which have a peculiar
ENERGY AND AGREEABLENESS IN NEGATION; AND EX-
PRESSLY OF THOSE OF WHICH /i)) IS THE FIRST IN CON-
STRUCTION.
Rule I. A negative adverb is sometimes put after a verb, with
which it is construed, instead of before it; and in this case it is
sometimes the last word of the sentence, and used elliptically : v.
Pind. 01. vii, 86. efxe be "Avvtos KulMeXiTos airoKrelvai fikv bvvavToi,
f^Xu-ipai b' ov' {bvvavTai, viz.) E()ictet. Ench.
II. Two ur more negatives are used in Greek to deny more empha-
tically ; as Cicero's words, (de Fin. iii. c. 15.) quamquam negent
nee virtutes nee vitia erescere, although they deny that either virtues
or vices increase, may be rendered in Greek by a like plurality of
negatives : Kal -01 ou <paaiv ovre ras aperas ovre tus icaictas av^nrerrdaL."
rctWa riHv fjir) ovtuv ovbevX ovbctfxTi ovbafiiijs ovbejjLiav Koivtoviav ej^et :
Plat, Parmen. [p. 151. 1. ?• ed. Bas. 1.] jujjSe dp^arw upxi]v fi-qbefxiav
fir]beTTOTe, /i//re etbrjfiov, fiyre vizepopiov, &c. ^schin. in Tim. p. 1S3.
1.37- 01/ yap eariv oaTis avQpwiros a(ijd{i<reTai, ovtc (either) vj.u.Vy
ovre tiXXw ovbevl (or any other) nXijdei yvrjaiias evav-iov^ievos :
Plat. Apol. c. 19. So o'vK ovK, to deny more empiiatically : see Erf.
"m addend, ad Soph. Ant. 5. and, fxt), jxvqaTevrjavTes, f.nib' «XXo0'
bfiCKiiaavTes, varara kul irvfxaTa vvv evdiibe benrvi'jffeiav : may they sup
^ See Arisloph. Plut. 425. ovkovv S-h- quam(]uatn in the passage of Cic. s$ 48.
won, hut, you know : Aristoph. IMut. 54U. sed, quamquam negent, — atlamen putant,
— J. S. &c. It should be aW' o/xus, et koI, &c.
" Kai 701 does not express the sense of — J. S,
166 NEGATIVE ADVERBS. [Chap. vii. § xii.
fit'7'e now for the. last time ; never, since they have once become
suitors, assembling in any other place : Hoiii. Od. b, 684. and in the
same manner of one wlio lias wrought a iiiasterpiece, and can acid
nothing to his fame, /i)/, re-^^vrjan^evos, firjb' itWo n Te-)(i-i]aaiTn :
Od. X, 612. So fv) is repeated to increase the nrgency of deprecation :
/J?) i-u) KitXeaijs, Aristoph, V^esp. 1409. /"'/ /"') ravra Xtytofies, Calliiii. h.
in Cer, 18. ' v. Virg. JEn. xii, 189-
Sometimes, however, aUiiounh seldom, a pUirahty of negatives
affirms ; as, yu?) ovi' biU raid', wr iinds ovrws ll,r)TTUTr]T€, jiij Sorw tiKTjy :
let him not, therefore, because of that, go unpunished for the de-
ception tvhich he has practised against us : Demoslh. And ow;^ j/Ktaro
is very much, or very greatly.
III. A negative is used interrogatively for affirming more emphati-
cally ; as, TO be ye fxiiv irQs oh aa<pu)S irpos to yevvaluv eyvw ', who can
doubt that this resolution ivas magnanimously formed? or that this
sentiment was a magnanimous one: Xen, in Ages, uvk tyw at
elbov et> ~j> kj'itt^ fier avrov ; John xviii, 26. And with a future tense
interrogatively for commanding : ou iravari ftapftapiKo. rifiiv ^butv ;
Lutian, Lapith. t. iii. p. 44.5. i. e. cease to sing, &c. vvk aira^eis
evBvs eK rnv tTu/jnrociov Tt/f yvia'tKa; Plut. Apophth. p. 180.
IV, *M?) ov, fii) oiiK, and /ui) ov)(\, with a participle or a noun,
signify unless : ovk ay ovt> a^ioTriaTOs e'irjv Xeyior, fii] ouj^i irpo-epov avrds
fafeh, vlus elfit : Lucian, Catapl. t. i. p. 645. See Soph. (Ed.
R. 12, 220. at 77u\eis iroWai cat )(aXP7rai Xajoely ul TtLv $a;».ew»/, yn>)
vv Xpi')V(j) Kai TtoXiopKiq.: Demosth. de fals. leg. p. 379- '• 6. By using
the two negatives /ui/ and ov, the writer has made the passage signify
lliat fliobt towns might be taken ; but that there would be need of
lime and siege : had he used ^x^ alone, he would a))pcar to have
reckoned it certain that neither time could be spent, nor a siege
, decreed, and therefore to say that the towns, since tliey could not be
besieged, could not be taken. Examples with /z/y alone may be seen
in Soph. Trach. 592. Eurip. Heracl. 283. Troad. 402." ^schyl.
Prom, 503. Xen. Anab. vi, 4, 19.
V^. Sometimes Koi is added ; as, ov yap av "Ekrwp afTjpedr), fxi) ov)(l
Kal Tpoias avTu avfineffovarjs.
VI. These particles are sometimes construed with an infinitive :
IttI yap TTJ 'Eperpi'^f to ^wp/ov or, ubui'ara yy, 'Adijyaiioy cj^ojtwj', /u>)
ov fieydXa ftXairTeip /.«« 'Eperpiav kuI Tt)y aXXrjv E,i'i(5otav : Thuc. viii,
60. ware ttckjiv aia-^vyriv elvui, fjit) ou avcnrovbaietv : Xen. Anab.
ii, 3, 11. ovT€ fil] /jefjyrjffdai bvyufxai avrov, ovre fxefivrj^eyos fi}) ovk
irraivelv : Xen. Apol. Socr. in fin. ou^; ayaridefxai /j>) ov KaXws Xeyea-
tiaif Plat. Meno p. 89. *'• rofiovs 'Abpaareias alhefferai, fi)) ov)(t
jiiKpov Ti fifpos amibutTaaOai tm â– ^apina^evt^ ro TvoXXmrXaaiov : he tvill
reverence the laws of Adrastea, and tvill not omit to impart, &c.
Synesius ad Euoptium. ovbk deXu) TrpoXnrely roye, /u>) ov tov ifxov
* Cum conjunctivo ct optativo et indi- licipio et imporativo, ad rem corto ne-
caiivo, ad rem cum diibitationc afliniian- gaiidam, /u^j ; ad certo affirmandnm, fj.'q
dam, ni] ; ad negandain cum dubitntione, oD usurpatur. Ihrmann, de Ell. et I'ieou.
p.ijot (licitur : cum infiuitivo autem et pur- $ 213. — J. S.
Rule 3—9] N EG ATI VR ADVERBS. 167
trrnvaxe'iv Trartf)' lidXiov : and not, without, clc. Soph. El. 13(j.
o'lovrai. vfids ireiaeiv, tjs u Avmdeibrjs — imea^^eT tiv fji) ovk evdus rnv
nurpos t^nTcxbiatTi'icai : that Lysithides ivoiihl have refruined from
immediately deciding; a[:ainst my father: Deniostli. adv. Callipp,
p. r2 40. I. 17. [ed. keisk.] In geiier;il it may be siiul that fiy oh has
more of douhtfuhicss, mihliicss, (Iclicaey, less of decision, of positive
asseveration, than ^d) alone: see .'Eschyl. Prom. 1()6'. \i\\. Hist.
Gr. V, 4, 32. Cyneg. v, 31. de Rep. Lac. vi, 2. Denmsth. Ep. v.
p. 1490. 1. 15. Xen. Mem. iv, 8, 9. Soph. Aj. 727- i^^schyl.
Ag. 1178. Soph. Trach. 621. 225. CEd. R. 23G. Xen. Anab. iii,
1, 13. Cyrop. ii, 2, 20. Soph. CEd. R. 1232. Plato de Rep. i.
in fin. p. 354. B. Soph. Ant. 96. Of this passage in Plutarch, (in
which fxi) alone is joined with an infinitive,) kvhtlv il tijs iKehov
Trapovfflas TCi npc'iyfJinTct, fji) ri^v upiaTr]V ej^ed' huiQemv, the meaning is,
that nothing but his presence 7vas required to put affairs in the
best possible stale : Vit. Cic. p. 882.
As to other moods, /i>) alone, with the snbjnnctive, optative, and
indicative, expresses apprehension of an affirmative, fit] ov, of a nega-
tive : beboiKa /u?) darij, I fear he will die; tbeboii^eii' jjii] durot, I
feared he would die; bihoiKa firj TeQvr}k€, I cm afraid he is dead :
[v. Aristoph. Nub. 493.] beboiica //»/ ov darrj, I fear he ivill not die;
ibeboiKeiy fi)) ov Oat'oi, I was afraid he would not die; biboiKa /.u) ov
T€dvt]K€, lam afraid he is not dead. With an ellipsis of a verb of
fearing or doubting : fti) ovx (ivrrj ?} >'/ 6p6i) irpos upeTi)v, lest this be not
the right road to virtue: Flat. Phicd. c. 13. So, aXAa /xi) ov tovt y
^uXenoi', daruroy eKipvye'if, d\Xa iroXv â– ^aXeirwrspov itovripiav : Id.
Apol. c. 29.
VII. iNh) and ou are placed before some verbs, which in interpre-
tation they must follow. Those verbs are chiefly Xe-yw, <pj]'fU, (pa/jKU),
irpotrTroiov/jai, aliw, biKolut t as, ol fxkv (paaiv rovs Oeovs abiKe'iy rtXX»;-
Xovs, ol be ov (paaiv : but others say they do not : Plato in Euihyplir.
c. 9. OVK e<pT} avTus, a\X eKelvov arparriyely : he said that not he
himself, but, &c. Thnc. iv, 28. See Horn. II. t;, 391. ear be fty
irpodTToui-ai v/jas uKoveiy, but if he pretend not to hear you — : j^sch.
in Ctes. [p. 590. I. 4. ed. Rei>k. u/itDr.] So, bel be, el iibiKt]ijav, ^n)
'TTpocTTroieladat : to put Up with it, to appear not to be sensible of it :
VIII. So before a^tw : v/xas, d crrpariwrai, ffvreKaXeaa, ovk ali'uv
TO. fx}) beiva ev oppwbitf e'xeiv for a^iwj' ovk, &c. Demosth. [not IVoni
Demosth., but from Thuc. ii, 89. p. 352. 1. I7. ed. Bekk. ti/;wv
vixds, U) ixybpes arpartwrat, â– ne<pojir]fxevovs to irXijOos Twy evnvT'nov, l^vxe-
Kc'iXeaa, ovk n£,twy to. fir) b. &c.] And before ariltyw, I order, fre-
quently in poetry.
In antitheses some preceding word is omitted before^*); fis, etprj
birt(pepeiv to. tov epQvTos y rix rod fjj), {^tptJji'TOS, viz.) Plat. Phitdr.
228. I. 34. ris ovv o rpoirus tov kciXws re KCtl ftt) ypacpeiy, for kui f.11)
KaXuis yp. Id. ib. p. 258. I. 35.
IX. Rl/) yap ye, and /u/) yap b)), are deprecatory formula ; as, tovs
evaTaOels irpoaipelaOaL tu joeXTiara o baijuwy oui; iKpaipijcreTni' fi)) yap b))
Kui ->is yrwfxT]s I'lfjiwy Kurtaxi'ffe'ej' : for God forbid, or far be it from
168 NEGATIVE ADVERBS. [Chav. vii. § xli.
us, that she \For\{ine] should prevail over our determinations; tIs
ov-^i KareTTTvaev liv aov ; yio) -yap rfis TroXetbi ye, fxr]b^ kfiov : Deinosth.
pro Cor. [p. 295. 1. 9- ed. Reisk.] See Musgr. ad Eurip. Tro. 212.
[210.]
X. So also /Lit) hi]Ta'.^ fjLi) bi}ra, w â– traiTU)i> tfiol Trpoff^iXeorare :
Syiiesius. Sometimes at the end of a sentence : oi/c llv nore irarpo-
hoiieiaav Karaia-^vraini ri)v evbu^iav' fit) bfjTa. And with a pronoun
after it there : [Ji]be y tXarrows i^CJ\ie.v uvtovs tiSu uprnruXwy yeveadai'
fui) biira »';jue7s ye : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 432.
XI. * MijTi, fX)')Ti.ye, fJ-i]Ti br), fiiiTiye bfj, ovtol ye, ovTOiye bi), fx)) art,
lxr](')Ti, fiij UTL ye, fAi) uri bi), [xyroiye, fit'jToiye bi], signify much less,
much more, not only not, &c. tyw be i:a) ev toIs OeuTpois ipui tovs
dy(M)viaTas inro Tijjv irnibiov TTapol,vvofxevovs, /nj'/rt bt] vtto ye tUv (piXwv :
much mof-e by friends : Plato ad Dion. INh'/rt ye b'n, Demosth. Ol. ii.
tyw be ovb' uXXov rivu y^iovv ay tuvtu vveibiSeiv, ^o'jroiye b)) YlXarotya:
much less Plato: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 36'8. /ui'/rt yovy, (f. fii'iToi
y ovv, PJerm.) ^Elian, H. A. iii, 23. V. H. xii, 9. xiii, 1. fieyaXas
01 Trpea(5vTaL ras 8r]/Aias knayovai, kTiv Itt' d\/ya>v fiapTvpwv roiiro wa0;;
Tis, ovTi ye (^ovroi ye, Hcrm.) ev TrjXiKovTOis OeurpoLs : Lucian, Anach.
ii, t. ii. p. 890. ovbe buoaoi rives avro'is elaiv 01 ftaatXels, e/xeXXov
evp/iaetv, /jr) otl t))}' crpanav, much less the army: Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 429- a Ka\ Xoyui earh' uKoveiv ovk eTzirepTres, /ji) on o>) epyu) : much
more: Phito Phaedr. p. 240. With d\X« following: ov*; av >//ue7s
cifffaXuis fpyaSoifieda /j>) on rijv tovtojv, aW ovb^ av tijv ii^ierepav '. we
could cultivate safely, not only not the land of these, but not even
our own, or tve could not cultivate safely even our otvn land, much
less,&c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 21. ovbevl av fx)) on Trpo'iica bolrjs, dX\'
ovb' eXaTTov rys d^ms Xaftiov : Id. Mem. \,6, 11. And interrogatively :
(TV yap av npocreXdois fi)) on Trpos ttoXiv, dXXd irpus oiKiav, ottov liivbvros
Trpoaeirnv : j^ischin. c. Ctes. p. 298.
The difference between /i>) and ov is that ov denies a thing itself,
firi a thought of a thing. Hence ov is used absolutely, and indepen-
dently of any foregoing verb either expressed or understood ; 'â– ' ou/c
ea-t -avra : whereas with /n?) there must be either expressed or under-
stood some verb signiticanl of thought, suspicion, will : /lu) Tuvra
yevr]7ai, viz. (popov/jai. fii) tovto bpaaijs, viz. opa. Sometimes it is
rather the thought or will itself tiiat is understood, than any par-
ticular verb expressive of it; fii} Kev6e. From this primary and
constant difference between /i)) and ov is derived the distinction made
by grammarians, that ov denies, and yu»/ forbids. Ov ToXni'itreis, \s, you
ivill not dare, to one who we know has not audacity enough to do
so and so ; /u/) ToX/LiZ/cetj, is, dare not, to one who in our opinion is
audacious enou"h to do what we know the former will not do.
Hence it appears too why /u?}, not ov, is joined with conditional par-
* The following is an example from a * On fxi]'re followed by /uj;, and oihi
much better author : /utj S^t', Si irduTts by oh, see Scha^fer on Bos, uole 7, under
Oiol, fxyfiiis ravO' ufiHif inivivafKv : l)e- the word K6\itos. — J. S.
inosih. pro Cor. p. 332. 1. IH. cd. Reisk. ' v. Aristoph. Eccl. 1000. and Brunck.
— .J.S. — J. S.
Rule 10, 11.] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. l()'9
tides; el fjn), iaf fjii), orav /<»), on (.ui : for by their very nature these
particles iiiilicalc that sometliiug is proposed as a supposition or
thought of some one. And in the same manner the relative os is
used willi /u»), wlien we intend it to have a iiypolhetical signification ;
Tis ht bovvai hvyaraL trepw, a jUi) ej^et civtvs', Epict. Ench. 31. i. e.
who can give things to another, if he has them not himself? Had he
said, a ovK ej^ei avrvs ; tl)e sense would iiave been, the things which
a person has not himself, how can he give to another?
When fAi) is joined with participles, as is very frequently the case,
the sense is properly, if there be such: v. Soph. (Ed. C. 1154. 6
â– ivtaTev<i)u eh avrvv ov KpiveTui' o be fii) -maTevtuv i\hi] neicpiTai, on /jn)
TreiuarevKev els to utofia tov fiornyevovs v'luv tou deav: John iii,
18. 'O fxt) Trttrrevwv, is, if any one believe not ; for /i)) indicates an
imagination or supposition about some person or other not believing;
but ov TntTTeinDv would be meant of some certain individual who
would not believe: v. Eurip. Bacch. 251. Polerao pro Callim. 47.
p. 16', 13. (1'22. ed. Orell.) and on ov ireiridrevKe would have been
intended of some one person in particular; whereas vri /lo) TrenlcfTevKe
is said as the thought or imagination of some one, whether it be said
about a person who really did not believe, or about a person supposed
to have not believed. Ribes, w TaXiivrj, xdes, ola €-noir)aev {{"Epis irapa
TO belirvov ev ©erraX/^, bioTi fii) Kai avri) eKXi'idrj es to avfxirvdioy ;
Lucian, Dial. Panop. el Gal. Here /uj) is used to signify the reason
as existing in the thoughts of Eris, instead of stating it barely as a
matter of fact ; which would have been done if ow had been used, and
not fii). But as a thing may often be expressed in either manner, it
is not strange that in places exactly alike sometimes ov is found,
sometimes fji'i. In these cases much depends on the custom of any
author. Lucian e, g. is fond of putting on /^t) even where he might
properly have put 6ti ov. In Aristoph. Thesm. Ip. ju?/ is not put
for ou : it refers to the preceding: order of Euripides ; and the nega-
tion is not simple and direct, but regards thought ; for ukovw and
bpG) are subjunctives. But even in direct phraseology, the Greeks,
when they do not simply deny a thing, but indicate tliat it appears
deniable, employ /^j/. See Lucill. epigr. 102, in Bruuck, Anal. t.
ii. p. 338. Pausan. ix, 1, 3. Hence yu?y comes very frequently after
verbs indicating the thought of any one: see Pausan. ix, 8, 2. After
some verbs, which in their nature signify nothing but what depends
on thought or will, ju?) is almost always put, ov scarcely ever; as,
after of^wfxi, even as to something past: Xen. Anab. vii, 6, 18.
V. Hom. II. r, 258. seqq. II. o, 34. seqq. M?) is put with an indi-
cative of the future, II. k-, 329. seqq. And what is strange, ov
is construed, although very seldom, with this verb ofjwfji, even
with respect to something future: Theocrit. xxi, 59. v. Eurip. Hel.
841.
As to the use of /jj; and ov in opposition of negations and affirma-
tions, it may be easily understood by recollecting that oh simply
denies a thing itself, /x/) denies it as thought. The Greeks say ^>)s ij
ov ; not </))'/$ )) fxi'i ; for this reason, that they do not say ^rjjul fj)) tiyai
Toiiro, but ou (jjqfxi diai, <jn)s j) ou ; therefore is, ^>)s y ov fits ;
Vigcr. Y
170 NEGATIVE ADVERBS, [Chap. \ii
Ml), as a prohibitory particle, is constnied with an impenitive of
ihc present tense, and a subjunctive of the aorists : "^ /jt) o'luv btlv iifitia
ovTui KaXovs vfdaXfiovs ypu(pe.tv. Plat, cle Ilep. iv, p. 240. See Brunck.
ad Aristoph. Lys. 1036'. Soph. CEd. C. 731. EI. 71, 1275. Aj.
191. Hermann, dissertat. de prajcept. quibusd. Atticist. p. 4 — i>.
An<l /u?) with the irn|)erative of the present is properly used in com-
maiuiing to desist from what one is alnady doin<» : v. Od. tt, 168.
but often however in comiDanding not to begin, which is the peculiar
province of the imperative of the aorist, which yet the Greeks very
seldom employ, the Attics almost never, but instead of it ttiey use
the subjunctive of the aorist, which always sigDifies that something
is not to be begun, Od. o, 263. For examples of the aorist impera-
tive, see Keen, and Sch;ef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 15. seqtj. Moreover the
present is used of something contimied, as iii) ftaWere : the aorist of
sometiiiug quickly over, as /i>) j3uX]js, when the throwing of one
weapon is spoken of. So in the imperative of the third pers. ^Eschyl.
S. c. Th. 1044. Ml) is prohibitive with a future indicative also,
especially with interrogation ; /.u) o~iy uve^ei, /jjj^t betXlav ape'ts ;
Soph. Aj. 75. v. Soph. Tr. 1183. and Eurip. Heracl. 27-- which
verse ought perhaps to be taken interrogatively. Also elliptically with
an infinitive: /.o) aizoppe^ifieadai, dW kn\ naoiis vp/jijs to bii^aioy ano-
tibuiai: Antonin. els euvr. iv, 14. In expressing a wish /k;) is joined
with an optative : fii) yap u'lbe buif.ioyes tie'ieu /i' a^wvov rijiybe ri/s apas
en, Soph. CE<I. C. S6'4. Further, by accurate writers, and espe-
cially by the Attic poets, it is joined with the subjunctive mood after
a present tense; as, oktw /i?) i^iuratos ti/ulv >/ arpuTeia yevi]Tni,
Demosth. Ol. i. p. 14. heboiK eyio /xt) fioi 0efir)Ky, Soph. Phil. 4.93.
ex cod. ap. Brunck. for bebaiKci lias the signilication of a present
tense. Vvith the optative after a past tense; "Hpr; be fiey livae,
Tvepibbfiaaa 'A^tXi/'j /^"'/ /^"^ airuepaeie f.teyas Trorufios (^aOvbiyrjs '.
Horn. II. (p, 329. With the indicative of any tense, when something
is signified, which really has been, is, or is about to be : beibio /.n) bi)
â– Kai'Tu Oea vrjfieprea elney, I (luxihl the goddess told all things true :
Horn. Od. e, 200. vvv be. <});>flovp,eOa fxi) afKpoTeptoy iijjapri'jKafiey,
Thucyd. iii, 53. See Demosth, de Fals. Leg. p. 342."
Sometinies, when the mind of the speaker is agitated, no verb is
expressed with fn) : /'//* d\Xd /joi bos ev f.i6roy KvXiaKioy,' do not send
me away ; do not refuse me; or the like: Aristoph. Acii. 45/.
M// is often subjoined to the particles hn, ottgis, t(p' wre, &^c.
V. Aristoph. Vesp, 70, 141. Ach. 722. Time, iv, 8. iv, 4. It
is sometimes an interrdgative particle : /m) -rtr] boKovfiiv am cvk avay-
Kula 'iK(i(TT(i bieXijXvOeiui ; Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 486". And in indirect
interrogation, or inijuiry, and when it signiiies whether or not, it is
joined with a subjunctive when something present is spoken of, with
an oj)tative when something past ; but with an indicative also when
^ V. Aristoph. Lys. 733. Thesm. 870. with p)) : viz. ^pvciroi^Kri. — J. S.
and Hrutick. -J. S. f KoTvXlaKiov iu jAtistopli., Brunck's
' In this ])tissage (I. 11. ed. Rcisk.) h ed. — J. IS,
snhjuiictne, not an iniliculive, is joined
§ xiii. Rule l.] Oi/, Oi'k. 1*1
tiio speaker wishes to iiilimate his belii-f of the affirmative; see Soph.
Phil. 30. Euiip. Ale. 1130. Plato Gorg. p. 67. b. Soph. Ant. 1253.
Liicill. Epigr. 1 15.
M/) is -added supertliiously after certain verbs ; esppcially after
verbs of (lenvin"^, prohibitir.ir, preventing, avoidin;;, refraitiin;,', cVc.
as, TOV iratbiov upi'ovfievov /.d) aTTvfyeftXrjKerai, the boy denying that he
had dropped them : Lurian, Lap. t. iii.* cnruycfxiju} /u>) rroielf IkkXi]-
aiav, Aristopii. Atli. l6"S. tlpye fiy) ftXarrravai, Flat. Piitcdr. p. 251.
i}v\al3e'iT0 fill auj^etv (piXovs, Eurip. Or. 105}). Sometimes woTe is
added before /ji), when the latter is no longer redundant : inrey^^cfieroi,
uiare [.u) efiftaXXeiv tiv), Tluic. i, 49- Some of the verbs alter
which jj.)) is snpcrfliionsly added may be seen in the following pas-
sages ; the references to which are arranged according to the alpha-
betical order of those verbs: Paus;in. n, 14. Soph, Aj. ()6. Ant.
443. Aj. 741. Demoslh. pro Cor. p. 278. [1. 24. ed. Reisk.] Enrip.
Hel. 1575. fragm. Sisyph. i, 10. Eurip. Here. E. 1298. Time.
V, 25. Thnc. i, 10. ii, 101. Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. p. 193.
[I. 5. ed. Reisli.] Eurip, Cycl. 265. Soph. Phil. 1303. Enrip.
Tro, 1146. Herodot. viii, 144, Enrip. Herad. 96'3. and El. 1255.
V. Bast, ad Plat. Synip. p. 114. Eurip. Andr. 645. So))h. Phil. 349.
Herodot. ix, 12. Soph. Ant. 442. Herodot. vii, 12. Eurip. Heiaci.
507. Herodot. ix, 78. See Bergl, ad Alciphr. p. 215. and Hermann,
Obss. Crit. p. 5. sq, M?) however is not always thus added : see
Soph, Aj, 70. Phil. 118,
M»;7rore, conipoundcil of fj)) and Trore, sometimes signifies j'jaVtfl/Ji',
or, if at any time: see 2 Tim. ii, 25.
SECTION XHL — On ov and ovk, and the particles joined
WITH THEM.
Rule L Ob, or ovk, is sometimes put before substantives in
Greek ; [as we put 7wn before some English words ; non-pirfonn-
ance : e. g.] ov Trpouebelavro bta rijs \eijKubos ti)v ov 7rep«re/j^i(Ti»', i. e.
the xvant of a wall or fortijication round it : Thnc. iii, 95. rov <p6-
pov »y ovk: inrvbucris, the no7i-payment of the tribute: Lucian, Ver. H.
i. v. Duk. ad Thuc. i, 37.
It is placed emphatically at the end of sentences: ejjie be "Apvtos
Ka\ MeXiTos arroKrelvni fxkv buvarrai, jSXci^^at b' ov : [Plat. Socr. Ap.
Epict. Ench. c. 7^.'] ov fxoi boKe'i, w 'WTria' ovk' Plat. Hipp. maj. p.
292. I. 14.
* So in Italian : e molto Piu die non
credi son le tombe carche. Dante, Inf.
c. 9. Per sospetto die il Pontelice nox
insidiasse alia sua vita. G'Jicciard. 1.
]. So Bletastas. Artasers. iii, 1. — and in
French : tiaris les premiers lenips de sa
i'onuation le fretus vegctc plutot rju'il ne
vit. BvFFON, t. i, p. 13. cd. Paris.
17(39. — Noiis suivGBs a-peu-pres les regies
d' architecture de Vitruve ; cependani les
niaisons — en Italie — et en i'rance — ne
rcssemblent pas i)Ius ii celles de Pliiie
ct de Cictron que nos habillements yjL
ressemblent aux leurs. Voltaire, sur la
Poes. Ep. — J. S.
172 Ov, OuK. [Chap. vii. § xiii.
II. Ov yap serves for interrogation ; yap in reulity assigning a rea-
son for sonielliing preceding, eillier expressed or understood : see
Arisfoph. I'lut. 836. ov yap Tavra fxeyiaTU kariv ; Plat, de Rep. vi.
and with some expression of anger; ov yap eypiiv yipovTa uvtpa
uTreXdeh' -ov fnov, Trnpn-^u)p)i(ravTa to'is reois ; Lucian.
III. It is sometimes used without interrogation to confirm a prece-
ding negation ; as, uvk lauTifiot, w yeyyaioTUTe, ov yap : Lucian, Dial,
Mort.
IV. Ov yap aWa in Attic writers \s for : the expression is in
reality elliptical, ov denying', yiip assigning a reason, and uXXU affirm-
ing something different :« fit) trKunrre /x, w 'beXip'. ov yup7u\X' e;(w
KOKuis : Aristoph. Ran. 58. also v. 4.98. 1180. and ov ru)(^ uXXU, v.
527' Pliccdr. ov bi) to y ekos. Socr. ov yap, aXXa rovs /zei' lu ypafx-
fjiaai Ki'iTTovs Traibtds xapiv (nrepil re fcaJ ypnxpei: Plato in Pliajdr. p. 276»
See Acts Ap. xvi, 3?.
V. Ov yap TOL aXXa has nearly the same sense, ye being added
after some other word ; and in this phrase roi confirms the negation :
vi) yap Tot aXXk tovtov ye Toy XfJyoj^ TroXXQy bt) kki TroXXaKis a.vT/cows
del davfiaiu), Plato in Euthyd.
VI. Ov yap, followed by oi', otherwise ; iftrov <piX6(70(f>6s kartv' ov
yap ay ovtws airtfie'is tovs Xoyovs bie^i^ei ku6' yjfxun' : Lucian, in Tim.
So avbei' yap followed by (iy : ovbey yap i]y av evbaifioieaTspoy irpobo-
Tov, Demoslh. pro Cor. [p. 241. 1. 16. ed. Reisk.]
VII. Sometimes ttotc is added ; ov yap ay ttotc troXyuwv T))y Tpo^iov
T€ KfH fxT}Tepa Keipeir, Plat, de Rep. V.
VIII. O'u yap i'lf TTov : oniosay (paiyrirai KaXXiaTOS toIs fxi} yiyvuxTKOv
aiv ov yap av tcov toIs ye eibomy : for he could not appear so, I trow,
to those who do kno7v him: Plato in Symp. [Ov denies, yap refers to
fji) yiyrwoKovaiv, I say " to those ivho do not know him," for, <fec.
IIov in some degree (pialifies the denial. *Av has a signification of
possibility or feasibility, which is here denied by ov.]
IX. Oufierovy, in one word, signifies — 1. atqui nan, hut not, and
yet not : ov/uerovy j)i' elire'iy eripu), but no one else was allowed to
speak: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 333. 1. 25.* — 2. truly not; not in-
deed: 6 Opduvi^XTis o <piX6fJO(pos ovTos eariy ; ovjxeyovv aXXos ', truly
no other, it is he himself: Lucian. [in Timon. p. f)J. A. ed. Salmur.
where ov fiey ovy.] nayrn yap tov aybpos Oav^iaCio' {o'v/jerovv oiroaov
eiTrely bvyaTov') more indeed than it is possible to express: Greg.
Naz.
X. — 3. for ovfieyToi ye or ov nt)y, not however: ovfieyovv iray-a
ye (KpayiaOfivai, that every thing however was not consumed:
Pausan.'
f oi) and yip relate to somettiing pre- fjvlKa ipyaaaaQal ri Se'oi Kaichu v/xiis ; oC-
ccding, aWh. to what fiillow.s. See Ari- ^(vow -tjv iliruv irepy : u'hy no; but oii
stojili. Lys. .05. where jua Ai' intervening,' the contrary lie spoke so viucit that no one
belwicii oi) yap and aWa, the sense of else coitlil say a word: p. 27-1. I. I(j. ed.
those words is not/«r, but, no, for (that lleisk. in tlic edition of Foulkes and
is not enougii) hut (rather) &c. — J. S. Freind, p. 87, the meaning of llie whole
* 'Hie oiv in tiiis word has reference, passage is utterlj? mistaken. — J. S.
ns it always has, to someliiint; preceding : ' Add ovfjuyovy n'ied interrogatively :
dp' oiv ovi' iKtyiv. wcrirfp oW typwptv, ovpLivovv fxi wpoatSSKas, (Jtit; HoQdpvovs
Rule 2— 15.] Oi, OIk. 173
XI. Oil fi^v, but not : not however ; oh fir)y ovbe, but not even, or
but not either ; uv fii)v aX\' ohb^, however not even, hoivever neither ;
ov fil'ii' a\X«, but hoivever ; oh /jerrot aWa Kni, ;ni(l oh fiijv uWa kcu,
but however, yet notwithstanding . These forms serve for correction
or rectification of sometliin<; going before ; partly denying vvliat has
been said in too unqualified a manner, and partly introducing wliat
is to modify it : ovtoi /.lev rifv A'lyvnToy o Ka'icrap iyftpwaaro. oh
/jtii'Toi K'aJ uXXct {uv [xerroi aXXrt xat, Hermann.) rrj KXeonarpif, ijcnrep
eycKa «cai eTreTroXeyui'/Kct, eyapitraTo: Dion, xlii. p. 205. oh fi)]v dXXa
Kalirep tovtwv ovtws ej^oirwr, eariy >/ TrapttKirbvrevaeiey ay 6 ttoXitikus
ui'))p lixpacrdai tFjs koXovjucj'jjs TrepiavToXoyins : Phit. de sui laud. So
oh fiijy ohbe : oh fxitv ov6' el avyayopevovai to7s vir' k^ov \eyofieyois,
ovt' ws vpOuis Trepi tTjs CKeirov bvim/uews yirojoKOvaiv : Isocr. Parjeg.
p. 134.
XII. Ovx J/Vtora is an extenuating expression {or fu^Xicrra, chiejlj/,
principally , most of all : kyw fxeiroi ov)^ iJKiaraTOVTOveyeKa ras yvval-
Kas I'nrene/j^'ft, Plato Pha?d. c. 66. /ueyos deos eTuy 6 "Epws — 7roXXax^7
fxey Kal dWrj, oh')^^ i']KiGTa be kutu ti)v yevefjiv : Id. Symp. c. 6. rai!-
TOJs b^ (pa/jiey kui ae, u> ^uiKpares, raJs aiTiais eyei,ea6ai — " Kal oujf
i'lKiara 'AOTjyaiwy ae, aXX' ey to'is fiuXicrra : Id. ill Crit. C. 14. V. et
Plut. in Cic. p. 856. 1. 40.
XIII. Ou^ (in, ov^ OTTWS, or fii] on, fjrj owu)s, fiovovov, novovovyji,
often signify not only, or not only not.'* [See Ch. vii. § x. R, 5. and
§ xii. R. 11.] Tavri] be abvyara f^KTOvadai ov^ on ra ey rfj EupwTr?;,
(not only the nations in Europe,) aXX' ohb' ey nj 'Aaiq edvos ey, &e.
Thuc. ii, Q7- l^y) ottws (not only not) cpyelaQai ey pvdfitp, dXX' ohb'
opdovaOat ebvyaade : Xen. Cyrop. i, 13. See Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 230. In the same manner ouj^ ws, yu?) ths, ohy oloy, Yjttov ye
Kai. V. Arrian iii. p. 142. Athen. xi. p. 505. Philipp. ii, 12.
where fiuyov is added, and /u>) fioyov /tiy is in Aristoxen. (ap. Stob.)
faiffre fJi] fxovoy pi] $r]T€~iy, dXX', el bvynroy, firjbe elbeyai Tijy TOiavTTjy
avyovaiay : Serm. xcix. p. 542. vid. Jacobs, animadv. p. 295.
XIV. Oi/x opq%; (literally, do you not see?) is commonly used by
the orators in a parenthesis and ironically, for oT/ia«, videlicet, for-
sooth : ayadfj be (oix (>pq.s ',) TV-)(^r] <Tu;u/3e/3iw(.-wj, Tf]s efirjs ws (pnvXrjs
Karrjyopels : Demosth. pro Cor. ttuw yap -Trapa tovto {ohx op^s ;)
yeyove to. tCov 'EXXZ/vwj' Trpuyjuara, el tovt\ to piijia, dXXd fxi] tovti bte-
XeyQriv eyu> : Id. ib.-'
XV. Ovbe by itself may often be rendered not even ; oItoi be, ohbe
elxej, avayvZyai a en; so t/o« thotight, 152. 4. Non cue mille, ma piu di
did you, that because you had on buskins cento milia, la basciava. Boccaccio,
I should no longer know you? Aristopli. Decam. Giorn. 8. Nov. 7. Non sono tra
Ran. S.'iC. Here oZv has reference to the noi in numero cl'uoiiiini, non che di cit-
supposed thought of the person addressed, tadini. Guicciardini, 1.7. — J. S,
— .J, S. •' Add ov repeated, not that not ; oh
* Non che in Italian corresponds with /xay ovk ede\ei, not that he is not tvillmg,
ovx '6ti exactly : Nulla speranza gli con- icdpa Se fxiv ovk airoAvfi' 13ion, Id. i, 96.
forta raai Non cue di posa, ma di minor On ov ixa, see Em. on Xen. INIem. iii, 13,
pena. Dante, Inf. c. 5. Fece tremar la 3. Brunck on Aristoph. Lys. 465. On
terra il compagnone, Non cue la sala, oii yu?j, Brunck on Ari-sloph. Lys. 701. —
taulo ando giu grave. Pl'lci, Morg.M. s.. J. S.
174 Ohbe. [Chap. VII. § xiii.
ypa\pavTOi efiov, Tovra noie'ii' j'/QeXr/^av : Dcninstli. pro Cor. See also
Demostli. 01. i. [p. 1'2. 1. 14.. ed. Reisk.] Mr}be iilso has the same
sense; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 228. 1. \6. 17- ed. Reisk.]
Ovbk is sometimes repeated for the sake of emphasis: ovbk yap
ovbe Tov aov eralpov bel TrapeXde'tp, Plato in Phajclr. [p. 214. 1. 36. ed.
Bas. 1.]*
XVI. Mrj5e and oibe are sometimes followed by av e'i n, or vnovy,
yevoiTo, or yeprirai, or Trotri, or the like, to signify exclusion of all
possibility ; as, ol be apjiciTewi Tpoyj:)\ -kov^ Kajjcfidevres, ovb' af, e'l ti
yevoiro, rijv e^ "PX''* bvvaivTO av \a(ieiv evdviopiav : 7iot even if all
imaginable devices were to he tried: Pint, vepl iraib. hywy. ws
ovb' av UTLOVV yevrjrai, Trepiawaovros €k tTjs avrov bwaerreias -noXiv, not
even, let what may happen, not even in any case: Nazianz. ii,
in Jul.
XVII. Ovbe els, fir]be eli, and fii]Te eh, are used instead of /xjjSels
and ovbeh, as beino; mure eniphatical : vf.iu)v roivw ovb' av els ovbev wv
ibir^i Tiv\ bo'iT], TctvT afeXoiTO naXiv : Demosth. c. Lept. So fir/be erepos
for fxijbtTepos, Pint. Symp. I. ix. p. 742. Sometimes ovbe is put
twice in the phrase, but with some word between ; as /u>) yap ort
noXis, akX" ovb' av IbiujTTjs ovbe eh ovtws aycrifys yeiotro : iEscliin. C
Cte--. p. 280. And sometimes els, or ev, being one of the component
parts of ovbcis, or ovbev, is repeated with its compound : eV re
ovbev Ka-ea-t] "lu^a, Thuc. Ji, 51. So Heliod. /Etli. ii, 27- extrem.
XVII I. Ovb" eyyvs, and fiT]b' eyyvs, (which latter is much more
rare,) sif.Miif'y far from it, nor any thin^ like it: exet be oh^ ovria
ravTo, ovb' eyyvs: Demosth. in Mid. p. 389. 1. 30. and ttoXXov ye beJ,
or iroXXov ye rat ^el, has a similar sense; il s'enfaut bien. Interro-
gatively in Plato, Leg. vii. fiovXeade iriiiiav -o~is fiii noioiiat ypa<f)iofiev,
y TToXXcv ye be7 ;
XIX. And also ovbe ttoXXov bel, in which the negative applies to
what precedes rather than to irvXXov bel : ov yo/i raDra arr' eKeiiDv
yeyovev, ovbe ttoXXov be'i, nor any thing near il ; nor any thing like
it : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. (pavi'iaeTui 70,0 ovbe iroXXov be~i Tyjs yert}-
ao/ievrjs ii^iov al(7)(^uvr}s, Demosth. adv. Lept.
XX. And in a similar signification ovb' oXlyov bel is said : but in
this phrase the negative is not referrible to any thing extraneous :
o'vbe ye 'iauv kcAv ubuny.a, ovb' iJXiyov bel : Demosth. de I'als. Leg.
* Sec H. St. Tlies. ii, 1537. D— J. S.
END OF PART I.
PART II.
CHAPTER YIH.
THE CONJUNCTION.
Of conjunctions in peneral, it may be remarked tliat, altliough they
properly connect similar parts of speech, they are sometimes (oiintl
connecting ditlerent ones ; as a participle i.nd a verb : lUptras be olba
— ayuXfxara fiey, Kn\ vrfuvs, fcai fiw/joi/s, ovk kv vofiw tto lev /.tevov s
Ibpvefrdat, aWa kol To'iai noievcri fiuipirjf kn Kpepova i \ (for eiTKpepov-
Tas,) Herodot. Clio c. 31. An adverb with a substantive: dvalas
htinoaia-e Ka\ IbiuTcn duoviriv, (lor ibi{i,) Paus. in Arc. p. 522. 1. 6".
A genitive case absolute with a complete sentence or proposition,
j'OCTCeJ re yap tTTieforro Kur' afKJx'/repa- tTjs re wpas tov Iviavrov tuvtt}s
ovarii e»' jj aaOei>ov(TLV didpojTTOL /LidXiff-a, Kai to ■yjiypiov a/ia, kv o)
eaTparoirebevovTo, eXutbes kuI j^uXcttoj/ j/v, (for tov ^wptow ikunbovs kui
XaXcTTOv oyros,) Thuc. ii, 47- v. Ter. Phorm. v, 6, 46'.'
SECTION I.— On the conjunction dXXa.
Rule I. 'AXXa is sometimes put after fxey, instead of be : to. fikv
TToXXa eaata' a XX' tTrl tov AeiceXctkou iroXe/nov, &c. Demosth. adv.
Androt. p. 597- [1. 2.5. ed. Reisk.] v. Hom. 11. tt, 240.
It is used both in proposing objections, whether interrogatively or
otherwise, and in answering them : ri yap povXo/ieiot fiereTrkjxvecfff
av avTovs ; eirt tiiv etpt'ivrjy ; a\X' vnTjp^^ev aixaaiv. aXX em tov noXe-
poy ; aXA' avrol wepi eqnivr]s elSovXeveoOe : for with what design could
' Different vioods and lenses are often omneni reice et segnitiem amove, ntqne ad
connected by conjunctions both in Greek ingenium vetus versutum te recijiis tuum :
and Latin : TeOvalris 2i npoiT", ^ koir- Tlaut. Asin. ii, 1, 7. but such a construc-
ravi Be\K(po(p6vTTjv : Iliad J", 161. nunc tion is often required by the sense, as in
cujus jussu veniu, et c|uani()bri'ni rcntrim, Cic. Pliilipp. ii. c. ix. ^ 21. and in the
dicam : Plaut. Anipli. Pro). 17. See passage from Homer. — J. S.
also ill, 2, 24. cjuiii tu abs te sucordiam
176 - 'AX\a. [Chap. VIII. § i.
you have sent for them? for peace ? hut that was in the possession of
alt before. For the war then f but you yourselves were deliberating
about peace: Demostli. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. \7 - See Cic. pro Arch.
p. c. 4. [§ 9.] pro Plancio [c. 4. § 11.]
II. In answers it often signifies concession or assent ; as, aW ev re
Xeyerc, Kol noiljcrw ravra, why you say well, &c. Xen. Anab. vii.
III. Sometimes oWa is, at least : el fiii iraai hvvaTiv aWa KaTO.
<})v\as, Aristot. el firj oiuv re Trept i]^epav tiiv irpwrrjv, aWu rrj bevrepq.
ye -iretpareoy e^evpelv t))v Ibiav tov Trvperov : Galen, ad Glauc."' eni-
uTafxai yap Trptbrov fxev 'Adqvaiovs, el Kui fjt)) wcivra fie'S vfiGiv elmv, aW
ovv vnip ye r>/s eaurwv cTwTT]pius navra Trou'iaovTas : Isocr. in Archi-
dani. p. 144. 'AX\' ovy in Eurip. also, Cyci. 643. [648.] and aWct
yovp in Eurip. Ipli. A. 9O8." Sometimes el fii), or other words to
which dXXa in tliis sense has reference, are omitted, and their signifi-
cation is involved in tiiat of aXXa :" npoaTroXoisXeyii) wdelyrrvXas Tiiab',
ws af dXXa Tra'ib' €fit)v 'Pvawfted' : Eurip. Or. 156l. w Oeoi ira-
Tp^oi, avyyiveade y dXXd fvvl now if ever: Soph. El. 411. But
dXXd ye, thus elliptically used, sometimes signifies even: al Aa^e-
haifioviwv ^r/repes — dXX' avrai ye cKpiKOfxevat to. rpavfiara avruiv (of
their sons vviio had fallen in battle,) eTreerKOTrow : JE\. V. H. xii,
21. as if he had said, they were not accustomed to send others,
aXX' avrai ye, &c.
IV. 'AXXu fit), or dXX' ov^'j is put for ov be, which would be a
barbarism : el tovtoI to pTjfia, dXXd /u?) robi bieXe^fdrfv eyw : if J wade
use of such and such an expression, andnot such and such : Demosth.
pro Cor.
V. (VI.) 'AXXd ydp is sometimes interrogative, but much oftener
affirmative ; dXXd still retaining its adversative nature, and yap inti-
mating a reason for the objection or opposition signified by dXXd : ei
eyw '^a'lhpov ayrodi, Kai efiavroy emXeXijcr^af uXXd ydp ovberepa ean
Tovrtav : Plato Pha^dr. p. 228. dXX' ov yap eireide' (i. 6. Xerxes could
not prevail on Artayntas to receive any thing else instead,) bibu'i to
(papos : Herodot. ix, 109. The nature of these phrases is made appa-
rent by a small alteration of the punctuation : dXX', nv yap eneide,
bibol TO (papas. See Schajf. Melet. Cr. p. 75. sqq. ^rjcert 'A\e^avbpov
edeXeiy "jvpoievai rov irpoau), dXX' okvcIv yap TrvvQavt'ifievov on avTos
vpoaayoi : Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 6. i. e. dXX' oicre'iy, Trvvdayofjerou
yap, q. d. eirvydayeTO yap, i. e. ciVi eirvyduyero, on, &c. v. Aristoph.
Nub. 798. (795.) So sed enim in Latin : v. Virg. JEn. i, 23. Ovid,
•" Ei (u^ is put q/K^r iWa in Eurip. Ipli. Tiaaaff aWa t^ Xp^^V '•'O'''* ^.v/iiraVTas
A. 1y' iwi, rovTO Kardavovcr' tx" avrovs : Id. Phil. 1041. crv 8' dA.A.cb
a^Oev ixvt)ft.ilov , €j fi% toIs ifnols TTtiadfiS rouSe XPV^^' 1^^ M ^^ apartvajv, aW' iv
\6yots : vers. 1239. — J. S. ywaiKwu x^P'^'" tKirvtvaai fiiov : Kurip.
" 'AydOoov, iwfiS^ ffavrhu imSovvai <pdu- Ileracl. 505. iav ovv aWa vvv y* ctj —
veis, oAA' ifj.6.Tiov yovv xpV<^ov r]jMV rourot iOeK'fjffTjTe aTpareveffBai re ical irpaTrtiv
Koi (TTpucptov : Aristoph. I'hesni. 250. — li.^'i.ciis vfxwv aiiroiv, — tcrcus h.v, Xaois, &c.
J. S. DemosUi. Ol. iii. p. 37. I. IH. cd. Reisk.
" Tl 5f(T* &i/ dWck vvv a' iTrai(p€\o7fji' See also Aristoph, 'i'hesm. 124. Nub.
iyd ; Sopli. Ant. 552. J) yfuxrtTai yovy I3r>4.13fi9. and Ltician, Dial. C'liaront.
i.K\a rtivMavd', on ttJj/os Trepio-ffJy ^(tti el Merc. p. 238. U. cd. Salmur. — J. S.
TOf "AiSuf ai^fiv : Id. ib. 779. TiVoo-fle,
Rule'?— 10.] 'AXXo. 177
Met. ix, C4S. Sometimes aXXa yap is followetl by tk in another
member of the *senleiice : see Orph. Arg. 771. Soph. Aj. 167.
'AWa bfj is also used affirmatively: aWh bt) deuvs ovre Xayduieiy, ovre
(iiuaa'jQaL hvvarov : Plato de Rep. ii. p. 365. 1. 37. [Here ^»/ expresses
an assurance that the position will not be disputed.] And the Greeks
have no mode of expressing non autem, but not, and not, except
tiXXci ^v, or (more rarely) aXX' ov.
VI. (VU.) 'A\Xa »')) JAui, but forsooth, \s used ironically in offering
objections, or stating them by anticipation : aXXa, 1?) A/a, ttcelfo ay
(f'ffws e'iiToi irpos tuvtu : Demosth. adv. Lept. [p. 457- '• 22. ed.
Reisk.] and on the other baud, vr) At' aXXa is used in answering such
objections.
VII. (VIII.) 'AXXu b)] Koi is, even, nay even : abeiny €<t)(ov airiirai
OTTOv av (iuvXtjjyTai, ctXXa b)) Kal Trpos iroXefiiovs : Liban.
VIII. (IX.) ^^>/^' dXXa, and vXrjy koi, however, yet : irXijy aXXa Ti
av iradoifxt. ; Luciau, in Prometh. in fin. but ttX?)*' dXX' ?/, irXijy et, and
7rA»)v kity, are except : ov yap avQpuirov vyid^ei 6 larpevwy, 7rX?)v dXX' Jj
KftTa av/jftel^r^Kos : Aristot. Metaph. i, 1.
IX. (X.) 'AXXd Tot, but, but however, but truly: Eurip. He).
750. and so dXXd fji'jy. This latter too is but in the sense in which but
is used in assumption, as in the minor propositions of syllogisms : et
yap eltri (iiofxcA, elffi Kal deoi' dXXd /i)/»' ei(Ti fiivfinl' et'iriv cipa Kal deoi :
Lucian, in Jov. Tr. [p. 229- c. ed. Salmur.] 'AXXd /uj/v ica\ is,
moreover, or but moreover : dXXd ^fjv koi twv /3ap/3dpwv caoi nporepov
u(pr]viaiov (cat etrraa/a^oj', — kKovres avrS irpoaex'^povy : Herodiaii,
ii, 4.
X. (XI.) 'AXX' »*; signifies, except, unless, and therefore usually fol-
lows a negative, or an interrogation implying negation. Ova. — dXX' j)
is to be explained by supposing a member of the sentence to be
omitted on account of the doubt or ignorance of the speaker or
writer; which omitted member is to be joined by means of f/ to a
preceding one : cvbey 'Apyeloi TrdXai dXX' ?) tcareye'Xwj' Tu/y raXanrwpov-
fievujy, Aristoph. in Pac. 475. i. e. dXX' y KareyeXwy, j) ovt: olb' 6 tl
iiroiovv. the Argives did nothing, but either laughed or I knoiv not
what they did: which amounts to the same as, the Argives did
nothing but laugh ;P ohbey dXX' 7) irpoaKvyeiy VTreXufjjSuyoy, Lucian,
Dem. Euc. p. 924. rivos fiev ovv eveK ay th, <Ls etTrctv, 8(^r], dXX' */
T(Ly ToiovTu)y iiboriLy tyeKa ; Plato Phzedr. p. 258. 1. 42. v. Den)Osth.
Phil. i. p. 45. 1. 13. [ed. Reisk.] adv. Phorm. p. 585. 1. 47. [p. 909-
1. 3. ed. Reisk.] iEschin. in Tim. p. 191- 1. 42. [p. 156. 1. 9- «^d.
Reisk.] Herodian iii. c. 10. i, 13. Aristoph. Ran. 1105. 229- V\M.
Apol. e. 5. Sophist, p. 225. Luke xii, 51. Isaeus de Aristarch.
Ilered. p. 26l. [I. 8. ed. Reisk.] Plat. Phxd. p. 97. Apol. p. 34.
Heliod. V, 2.
Sometimes when these particles are thus joined, the meaning of
each is apparently and obviously the usual and ordinary one ; as, e/uot
ovbey tTnatjfiaiyerai, dXX' J) {but either) tw awfiUTio) fuov, i) {or) r^ kti]'
P 'Xlj ovK ayadSu iffn rh l)o<be~iv. iyii tiv irori y', a\\' i) rrji (paxris imrXria fii-
yap direSa/fpuira vvv. yvwixriv f/J-^y, oW vos : Aristoph. \'esp. 984. — J. S,
Viger. z
1/8
"Ay.
[Chap. viii. § ii.
(Ttbio) finv, j) r^ iiolnpicj), &c. Epict. Eiich. c. 24. So Tlieogn. 485.^
But ('(W i] (V.) is truly, of a certainly, in truth : aW ?), to Xeyofie-
vov, u) upbp(:s, t7w Kcu irop' v(i~iv koX Trap' er^pois TrXeiocri, â– KeivovBa to
Tfjs yXuvicos, IxTOTTov Kn\ Trapuhoiov ttoOos : Dio Clirys. The phrase is
sonjftitiies used in (jucstions, i) heiiig (hen interrogative, and aWa
still juivcrsative ; as, to PhaMlrus saying xepc rets hiKas Xeyeraj Kal
ypr't(perni, ()'/ pr}TnpiK>) Te-^vrj viz.) Xeyerai he Koi irept Tcis brj/Jiiyopiai'
€7rl TT/Xtoj' be ovK uKt'iKon : Socrates answers, aXX' j/ tIis Neirroprls re Kal
^ObvfTfTeios rej^i'as fivvov ivepX Xoywv UKi'iKoas, — tuiv be YlnXafiijbovs uvi]-
Koos yeyoycii ; have you then heard only of, &c. PhUo in Phicdr.
p. 261.
So ctXXa on, and (tXXt't 7) on, except, except that: u be irapa Ttobas
eTToieHTO KU'bvyci', ovy^ erepov I'ly, aXX' bri irdaiv lariois !/ vavs e^epcTO :
Synes. Ep.
XI. (XII.) Before verbs in tlie imperative mood aXXu is liortatory ;
as, aX.V ftj'oiye T))u6upavl Aristoph. Nub. 183. ol fiev avTiupvs ewi-
ovres, 01 bk kututtiv, dXX' ire avv iroXXr] KtiTu^ppovijaei eii avrovs : Dion.
Hal. iii.*" And it is sometimes elegantly thus used, when a transition
is suddenly made from previous discourse to cohortation, its signifi-
cation appearing to be, (mt enous:h has been said, or but arguments
ejiough have been adduced : see Honi. U. /3, 139. a, 274. 393.210.
337. Eurip. Iph. A. yo3. Hel. I672.
It sometimes follows comparative adverbs instead of »'/ : tov Tu<pov
eTTiiTrjiiioTaTOr (eXa/jfiavov), oiin ev w KelvTUi fiaXXov, aXV kv li )/ bo^a
uvTwv aetfii'ijaTos vfiroXe/Verat : Time, ii, 43. v. Wyttenb. ad cclog.
hist. p. 423. So biKciiuTepuv — uXXa — , Thuc. ib. [p. 82. 1. 2. ed.
Bekk.]^
SECTION II. — On the conjunction a*' (for which the
POETS USE Ke AND Key,) WITH REGARD TO ITS FIRST AND
SECOND USE.
Rule I. ^A** sometimes signifies if: it is then to be considered as a
word distinct from that which will be principally treated of in this
section and the following ; for in that sense it is contracted from eay,
and therefore has tlie a long. It is to be observed that the Attic
j)oets never use ay for lay, if, l)ut always j/f, and that ay, if, is always
'I 'AAA' ^, prnfecln, truly, realUj : oAA'
^ TptX^Ppcores Tous X6(povs fj-ov KaTttpayuv
dW' % Trpu Sfl-n-fov rriv /.dfiapKvy kut^^o-
fiai: Aii-t"])!]. Acli. II II, 1112. Seo
BruncU, who rcferH to Valck. on Hi|)pol.
932. dAA' ^ x"^^'^'^"" *X*"' â– 'â– ' <paii'fi
KotKov, Aiistopli. L^s. 741). and in tliu
same j'Cnst', v. 928. — i. S.
•■Ileirrjo-eiy, oiAA' iiravlaru: Arisitopli.
Plut. 5:J!). vfitTtpnv ivrevQfv epyov S>
y^pes' dA\a rals Sjuais elcTiofrfs ws ra-
X'lTTa T'ivs \Wovs u.(l>i\K(Tf : Aristojjli.
I'ac. 42G. see v. ;^iO.— .1. S.
* Add aWdi, iitiij more; yes: ip' ap-
fx6au fiot ; Eurip. vtJ Af dAA' &ptffT'
exei, Ari>topli. Thesm. 200. Well: dAAck
â– n-pdTT\ el ffoi ooKe7 : Id. ib. 21(5. There-
fore, then ; noting an inference or conse-
quenee : tovtI iTovr)p6v dAA' virairoKivij-
Ttov : Aristopli. Tliusui. 924. v. 598.
oAAd Koi, — : AgJith. 1^51 filv ovv Ke(pa\i)
irep'.Otros, %v iyw vvKToop (popw Knri]).
v^ rhv AC dAAd icair irriSe la iravv, iind
II rcrij proper one it is too: Id. ib. 259.
dAA' (iij.u)s. yt-t iiercrlhekss: lint yet )iol-
irilhstuiiilDifr: Id. Acli. 402. Nul). I3G3.
«AA' oi/Sf, not even : Id. ib. 1390. — J. S.
Rule i— 3.] "A*-. 17,0
jt>iiK'(l with a subjunctive mood. See Ilcrmaiin. diss, de pitccopi.
quibusd. Attici>f. p. 17.
The conjunction ay, llierefore, as distinct from tlie word which
signifies //, may i)e considered — 1. in its chief and predominant
power, that of rendering the meaning of other words less delinile and
tleferminate ; and this power is observable through all its other uses.
— 2. in its signification of potentiality ; or of titness or obligation. —
3. as it is redundant. — 4. as it is deficient.
II. — 1. As to the first use ofar, (termed aopierroXoyikos,) os av and
the like, when something uncertain is spoken of, so that if any may
be said, are joined with a subjunctive mood ; and in the same case
with an optative when what is spoken of is indicated as being
thought of, or having been thought of, by some one : oo^ot ^ev ai/rot
\k.yf.iv yeyoraaiy, dAXous -e notovair, ol av b(i>po^ope7v avrois — t6e\(o(n',
Plato Plicvdr. p. 266. i. e. if any one he ivilling to bring them gifts.
Had he said, 0? av aiirols bwpnipopely edeXoiev, the sense would be, //'
they think any one will bring them gifts ; a£iw larpus elrai, Ktti
(iWov TTOieli', (^ av Tijv tovtojv ^iriarijfiyjy Trupabto : Plato Pliasdr. ]). CGS.
"Os at', &c. may be joined with an indicative mood, when a certain
thing is spoken of, but of which some part, or of which the nature
or manner, admits a doubt: Dicoe. ri cjiepen ; Boeot. on ear av'
ayada Bo(o<ro7s ajrXws, vpiyavov, yXa^iv, xpiudu)!, dpvnWibas, &c.
Arisloph. Ach. 873. why I bring truly all that the JBteotians have
of any value, if indeed all those things are reckoned valuable. The
meaning of v. 241. U. p, will appear, on accurate examination,
to be, certainly the Trojans will get the body of Palroclus, ivhelher
they be about to offer any other outrage to it, or to throw it to the
dogs and birds. In this first use uv often resembles the Latin addi-
tion cunque : liaoi uv, as many soever as; o av, whatsoever ;
ov av and oTTov av, wheresoever, in whatsoever place ; ore av, when-
soever ; vTTtos av, in whatsoever manner, &c.
III.— 2. (III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. X.) As to the potential use of
av, (which is termed hvvi]TiKus,) it is to be remarked that it properly
signifies possibility without actuality. With the indicative mood of
difterent tenses:" Tavrah", et fxev Trupijv, Xeywv av v/uds ibibaaKov : I
tvould have taught you : Demosth. Ep. iii. p, 11 7. ovbev av, wv rvvi
TrenoirjKev, ejrpa^ev : he would have done — ; Id. Pliil. i. o*' o Mapuvas,
el TO. biKuia al Movaai biKaaai i'jOeXov, d^irebetpev av : WOuld have
flayed: Lucian, Dial. Jun. et Lat. See Theogn. 435. kuI vv k
in. TrXeovas \vKi(i)v KTave b'los 'Obvacreiis, el /ur) up" 6E,v vorjae jxeyas Kopv-
6a<'oXos "EfcTwp : would or might hare slain — : Horn. II. e, 679- See
II. ({>, 544. rj/s elpi]vi]s av birjixupr))Kei, Demosth. pro Cor. With the
optative : bo^as fiev t'ywy' uv nov avy^wpoiijv, ra 5' erepa ravT ovk av :
Plato Phileb. p. 36\ 1. 31. " tI ovv," av tis e'inoi : Demosth. 01. i.
' In Brunck's edition I find '6a' icrrlv nepawhs trSdev hv (pfperai; hut irhence can
ayada, but Brunck acknowledges the the thunderbolt come'} Aristoph. Nub.
comiiioii reading tar hv, which is lliat of 31)5. dA\' oI>k av iari <xvKo(pavrov Zvy-
two of liis I\ISS. also, to btj as good as ixaros, hut there am he no rtn'j^ or amuUt
that of his fdiiion. — J. S. for the hitc of un informer : Aristouh. Plut.
" With the inditalivG present : aW' 6 885.— J. S.
/
ISO "Ay. [Chap. viii.
[p. 13. I. 6. ed. R.] CI utriaToiriv, ovi: av drmrns e'«j;v : Pinto Phaedr,
p. 229- ovK av i/jos e'ir], he cannot be my son : Hcrodot. Er. c. 63. vfilv
yap, eiwef} icai /uerp/ws KctreaKevaarai ra twv vofjtuv, els twv KaWiaTtov af
e'it] vofitov : — must he, is, Sec. Plato de Lt'g. i. tovtu apyvpiov /uer trpoci-
firjv ai', (jiiXinv b' oiiK (iv : Lucian, Demostli. Enc. p. 906. and interro-
gatively : (TV yap ai' icwiJ.tji' (nro/JDjaais ', av yap cif TrpoaeXdoti — uwov
Kipbvvos ~ap€irri ', ^schin. in Ctes. ypujrrjue ti eirj t'l^tos naOelv, is,
he asked, what piinishment he deserved; iipuyrr^ae ti av e'lt] u^ios
TTctdeli', he ashed, what punishment he might by possibility deserve,
or 7night be about to deserve, though deserving none at the time."
With the infinitive mood ; d))dr}^ev yap kv ry Toiavrij noXei fiaXtara
ay ei'pely biKaioavvriv, KartborTes be apliai ay, o TraXat ^qrovftey : Plato
de Rep. iv, p. 421. ri ay oiei uKovaavras einely ; Id. in PJieedr.
p. 26s. See Denioslh. Ol. i. [p. 9. 1. 1. ed. Reisk.] With a participle ;
(jv ra TO) ovTi biKain ^aydaveiv, aXXa. to. bo^avra ay trXiidei : Plato in
Phaidr. p. 26O. ravra kv krepois fiey 'iaus ay u)i;yovv elireiy, — ilis ovic
av TTiaTevdeii eK Twy Xeyofieywy : Isocr. in Nicocl. p. 70.
*Ay with the indicative mood of any tense often signifies the doing
or occurrence of sometliin'; not at any particular time, but, usually,
frequently , every now and then, or as it may happen, on occasion :
ov TToXXa ebelTO, Kai yap eKvofxiios jjl rjrr-^^vyeTO' aXX' apyvpiov Spoj^/^cis
av iJTTja e'lKOfft els IfiaTiov y' oktu) b' av els inrobij/^aTa' kqi rals abeX-
<pa7s ayopnaat j^iTisjyiov CKeXevaey av — ' irvpiiiy t ay ebei;dr] iiebifiviDV
TeTTupiiiv : Aristoph. Plut. 983. irpos be tovS", o fioi jjuXoi yevpouirab))s
cirpaKTOs, avTos av raXas elXvofirjv bvcrTTfyos eleXKwv nuba irpos rovr
av: Soph. Phil. 290.""
The English would often expresses this sense, when the tense
joined with av is a past one. See also Aristoph. Lys. 310. 318. Pac.
640. 647. and Horn. II. a, 139. where kcv is joined with a future
tense.
An optative with av may sometimes be rendered by an imperative;'
as, Xeyois av, say on, if you please : Plato in Plia^dr. npoayots av.
Id. ib. kXvois uv, u> Vo^ : Lycophr. vs. 9* x'^P'^'^ *"' ^'^'^ ^^^ '■"X^'»
Soph. El. 149s. lint sometimes av is joine(i with the imperative
mood itself; as, tpiXiiaaTuv fxe av, Aristoph. Ach. 1200. ["Ak softens
tlie command, and gives it more of the civility of a request.]
It signifies choice or volition : noaov av -npia'io, ware r^v yvya'iKo.
" Tlie position of Brunck (in his note yvwuriv ^xoif, evrvxh^ ^"^W ^f^ '• Eurip.
on Aristoph. Eq. 400.) that tlie optative Plio:n. 1207.— J. S.
mood ill its potential sense is always ac- •" Nihil nolius usu particula; tiv con-
coiupanied by &«/, may be refuted by many jecturali cum indicative in narrationibus
passages ; e. g. ou pXv yap ti KaKuntpov qua significatur non tani res facta, qiiain
liWo Trddoiixt, ovS' d icev toD irarpb? qua? fieri potuit, aut fieri solet : ideu ex-
avotpdt/.iii'oto nudoifir]v, Horn. 11. t, 321. primitur per/Vi'f ./(W^ussCfOi.autperverbuni
Sue Od. V, 248. otkis — avi]p — irti- soleo. Tj-yoi/a/fTouv fev, indignari solclxnn,
(reie yvvaiKa, Od. {, 123. ivvia yap l^ysias p. 272. [ed. Reisk.] TrpioTos TjfJ^uiv
fUKTos T€ Kal IJ^ttTo x^i^feos &Kfxcov oupa- yyelr tLv.pnvirc solebat : [Aristoph. V esp.
v6dey Kariwv SfKiirri ii yalav Ikoito 2(j9.] Brunck. ad I.e. — J. S.
Hesiod, 'llicog. 723. hW' ovk h.v /xaxf- ^ Dein. &iTiroi'. CI. iSov. Dem. OtW
(raiTo- xf'coiTo yap, (l fiaxi<Tairo : Ari- H-v. Hun.' away! Aristoph. Eq. 1101. —
stoph. Eq. 1057. tt 5' ifidvov' ul 6(ol J. S.
§ iii. Rule i.] "Aj-. 181
airoXaflely, Xeii. Cjrop. iii, 1, 36. o 5' tKelro X^ywv HWo uv ri f;
iroXty Xeyoi, must intend or wish to say : Plato de Rep. iv, p. 420.
Also titness, obligation, duty : ov yap cyw aeo (prj/^i- \epei6Tepov
fiporov iiWoy cfjfievai — * rw ouc av, (SaatXfjas am otojj.' tyuyv, ayo-
pevoii : Horn. II, a, 250.
IV. (XL) III its potential use av has sometimes a signification of
the future, with different moods and tenses ; with the future of the
indicative ; ^ as, ovk eariv ottios ovk ay a-)^thvv anavra kuko. Tretcrujdeda,
Isocrat. in Areop.
V. (XII.) With a future infinitive ; eyofiitre tovs p.kv rovrwv oXiyCj-
povyrai Tvy^ov ay Kal tQv fieiiuyvjy KaTacppovijaety, Isocr. in Busir. p.
448.
VI. (XIII.) With a future participle ; airjJ hi], ws fiaXa (piXo^poyr]-
TiKws ay be^i(i)<Ti')^evos dni]VTrf(T€V.
\\\. (XIV.) With the infinitive of the present; hoKei (iol adXa
vpondels, jxuXiara av iroielv (for iroti'iffeiv) ei'accelffQat evaara, ware,
utTore beoiTO, e^eiy ay (for eleiv) Trapetjuevatrnevois )(p>/(Ta<r0at : Xen.
Cyrop. i. iiyovfxai elKOTiits ay ffvyyvwurjs rvyx^ureiv, (for rev^eadai,)
Demosth. Phil. i.
VIII. (XV,) With the aorists of the infinitive: rofxlaas ovk av en
avfifjil^ai (for aufifxi^eir) avrw tovs fxiado^opuvs, Xen. 'E/Wjjr. vi. kv rui
afT<paXel. i'lhr) ecrofiai, ws fiTjbey av en KUKuy iradeiy '. (for Treiaeadat) Xen.
Cyrop. viii.
IX. (XVI.) Willi a participle present: cTret eyyoi ovk av bvvafxevos
tTis iriiXeios Kpare'iv, (for bvvrjcrofiei'os.)
X. (XVII. XVIII.) As to the participles of the aorists with av,
they cannot have any signification of the future, but must necessarily
si^nify past time. If ever they seem to be used of the future, they
are rather employed to indicate the shortness of the time in which
any thing is completed ; for the participles of the present have a
signification of some continuance or length of time.
In the phrase ovk olb' av el ireianifti, Kurij). Med. 940. Ale. 48.
av is out of its place, as it belongs to the optative: I know not if
I can (or shall) persuade.
SECTION III. — On the third and fourth uses of av.
Rule I. — 3. The third use of av, called TrapmrXTjpiofiaTtKus, or
expletory, is when it is redundant. This it properly is, only after a
considerable number of parenthetical words ; in which case its repe-
tition is of some advantage to the sense : see Soph. Ant. 4(iG. In
other cases of the repetition of this conjunction, the second av is so
far from being a mere expletive, that it has a peculiar energy and
grace. Excepting the case of parenlhesis, av can be repeated in the
same member of a sentence, only if the first aV belongs to the prin-
y'*hpi 7e tout' tiv iyii itot' uipofiai ; <jj\avpov Ipydataff tri, Aristoph. Nub.
Aristoph. Nub. 465. ohh\v ykp Hv fxi 1157. — J. Ij.
182 "\pa/Apa. [ClIAP. VIII. § iv.
cipal verb, and llie second to some other word, adjectinji; srparalely
some part or circumstance to vliat is priuciiially spoken of. Siicli
words are not only those particles which admit of some limitaliun
of their siiinification, but also any predicates. Of the former sort
are Kni in »>a»', ov, irws : of the latter rls, Tvuios, and any substantive or
adjective whatever. In j^schyl. Ag. 351. ovk ri*' y' eXovrei avdis
dvOuXoiey ay, the first av does not belonjj to e\6t'Tes, for the victory
is not a matter of doubt; but to cvk avOis, qualifying the negation,
not easily, &.c. "Oans yap i]v eKcivoy 6 KTavtjy, Tc'iy^ ay kc'I//' aV Toiavrrf
X^tpi Ti/dujpely OeXoi: Soph. Qid. R. 139. Here the first ctr regards
6e\oi, the second m/je, perhaps even me. In vs. 445. avQe.\s av is,
ij you shall happen to go aivuy, if perchance you shall depart. In
vs. 601. the first ay l)elongs to fitr ciWov bpwrros. In vs. 772. the
first ay regards rjJ (for rut) fxdiovi, to whom who may perhaps be
preferable to you? In 857. 'he first ay is referrible to r^Sc in 862.
to ovbey in 1052. to ijb'. — See Aristoph. Vesp. 506. Plato Leg. iv.
p. 705. 1. 13. Domosth. Phil. i. [p. 40. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.] Aristoph.
Ach. 210. Plato de Rep. iv. p. 420. 1. 25. Aristoph. Vesp. 506'.
Eurip. Or. 710. Plat, in Phsedr. p. 257- 1. 28."
II. — 4. The fourth and hist use of av is that which is termed eWenr-
TiKus, in which either something is understood with av and implied
by that particle, or ay itself is defective or understood : roiod-os
iariv, o)S el kuI /u)) TteTroiijKev, dX\' eTroirjaev av : yet he ivould have
done it, (had occasion ofl'ered, or the like :) Syues. ad Fratr. tovs
be Kui fji) TrXua-avras (speaking of informers, underst. vlfini belv tt/ro-
TpoTTtucef^Oai) on (TvveirXaaav av, because they ivould have fabricated
charo^es (if they had had an opportunity, or the like.) Syues.
111. (IV. V.) Of the omission of av itself: p(j.ovi khI ttoXv Taveivo-
Tep(j> I'vv ey^pu/ueda tjJ 'l^iXirrrro), for e)(pw^f0a av '. Demostll. Ol. i.
'J'he Attics seldom omit av, if that can properly be said to be omitted
or defective, which is not necessary or indispensable: for it is not
true that av is a necessary particle. It only renders language which
is uncertain in itself, still more doubtful. Of this its service the
Attics are very fond of availing themselves; so that tliey even rej)eat
it several tinjes together for the purpose of modifying or limiting
expressions in various ways. The i)oets however often omit it : see
Horn. II. ft, 340. Piiul. Ol. iii. extr. xi, 21. Pylh. x, y5. .'Eschyl.
Choeph. 592. Soph. El. 800. Ant. 604. Aj. 921. Eurip. Iph. A.
1210. [See note v, p. ISO.] *Ai' is seldom used with a verb fol-
lowing et with an imperfect or aorist.
SECTION IV. — On the conjunctions apa, apa, AND ye.
"Apa and apa differ in this, that by prose writers and epic poets
apa is used in interrogation ; by the other poets, and especially by
the dramatic poets, upu if the first syllable be short, and apa if long,
- See Aristoph. Thceni. 19G. llan. 572. 5SI. Nub. 130G. Ach. 218.— J. S.
Rule l— k] "Apa,'A()a. 183
wliellicr in in(errogalion or in tlie signification of therefore ; but in
liie signification oi perchance, perhaps, dpa with the first sjliiible h)nn;
will scarcely be found, because, as this nieaninij is less einphatical,
h'ss stress is required on tiie accentuated syihible in pronunciation.
It is to be observed besides, that i'lpa used for continuation or con-
nexion of narration, especially after /uei/ and ^e, is most frequent in the
epic i)oets, but not so in Attic writers. " Apa, signifying therefore,
and without interrogation, is never placed in the beginning of a sen-
tence : but interrogatively, and with the signification of ergone, it is
so placed : v. Anacr. li, 1. 2. 5. has then? so then? See Hermann,
ad Aristopli. Nub. 142.
Rule I. " Ap olv is never put without interrogation at tiie begin-
ning of a sentence: ap' ovv only is so placed, and that interrogatively.
See Hermann, ad Soph. Ant. 628. ed. Erf. min.
H. It is very frequently subjoined to some other word, and has
then nearly the same signification as ttov, or 'iaws : et //») upa ev ti^
'WXvaii^ Trebii^ to 'Lvfiiroaioy avfeKpore'iTo, unless perchance, &c. Ari-
slid.
III. It signifies therefore : ybo^rjaev apa el fxi) tu ojioia yevvaims
IveyKoi, Appian. So epyorjtroy upa : vovv apa Trpouej^c.
IV. It is sometimes used ironically; e. g. e^et up* aydpionos aei
^afxai peirujy ryy ttoXiv eXely avTof3oe], SO then.
But one of its chief uses is in the conclusion of syllogisms : el ynp
elffi /3a;/no<, elal /cat deoi' aWa /ji'jy elai f^wftoi' elaiy apa kai deoi :
therefore there are gods too : Lucian, in Jov. Tr. 6 irotijr^s /i</.t»jr>ys'
o fii/iTjrijS TptTos airu rf/i aXTjdeUis' 6 TroiTjTy)s cipa rpiros urro Ti}s aXtj-
deias: Frocl. in Plat, de Rep. p. 405. 1. 30."
^Apa is used in interrogation, and usually when an answer in the
negative is expected, num? but sometimes when an affirmative
answer must follow ; ne? see Eurip. Ale. 341. 771. — 1. By itself:
ap ovrii) (iovXei vjuily upiaQai vvy vrepi rov balov nal tov avoaiov ; Plato
Euthyphr. c. 11.* — 2. followed by >'/ : apa to uaiov, on oaiov eari,
<pi\elTut vTto TiLy deiLy' i), oti ^iXelrat, oaiov ecjTiy ; Id. ib. c. 12. — 3.
With ov and fx}). The difference between cV ov and apa fit) is that
dp' o'v, nonne, requires an affirmative answer, upa /.if], num, a negative,
as apa does alone ; but fx)) imparts some degree of dubiousness to the
question, and that for the purpose sometimes of irony; as, tav be aov
7rpoaKarr)yop7]ffii), oti bia to dyaadai avTOV Kal evyoiKws ej^ejs irpos avrov,
apa fit) biaftaXXeTdai bo^eis vjt' efjiov ; Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 34. see Soph.
Ant. 632.' ap' ohx ovrus ; is it not sol Plato Euthyphr. c. 8. See
Xen. Mem. i, 5, 4. — 4. Sometimes ovy is added : (see Hermann, ad
Soph. Ant. 628. in ed. min. Erf) ap' ovy // paffiXiKt) aotpoiis Troiel.
Toi/s aydpujnovs — ; Plat. Eulhyd. p. 292. ap' ovy ovk api6fxr]TiK)) /uev.
" "Apa, therefore, then ; Sia tovt Sp' * "^Ap' a.pix6a(i ixoi ; Answ. v)] A? a\\'
avTov Koi kolK' -fiv TO, Spo^ara, Aristopli. &pi.(TT e'x^' • Aristopb. Tbtsiii. 260. So
Tbesiii. IfUi. apa., truly; ris riv Karh. 203. — J. S.
irpuKThu deii'6s iari ttjc Te'x"'?!' J &p oT5' ' ''Apa fii] 5oKe7y (do you think) \vr7ipi'
'kuvuoov aW' 'icus apvqaerai. Id. Eccl. avrtj TavTa rov <S)6vov (pipHV ; ovk tffriv '.
305.— J. S. Soii'li. El. 4-10.— J. S.
184 Fe. [Chap. viii. § iv.
Kol Tiv€s erepat T^)(vof, xpiXnl tmv Trpaleuv ctfft — ; Id, in Politic, p.
258. — 5.^Af)a is sometimes added to other interrogative words;
as, Tis &(/ u ^evytov ovtos ; Aristopli. Vesp. 888. [^Apa is not of
course interrogative in such passages. See tlie commencemeut of
this section.'']
V. Although yk, as well as fxiv, may commonly be translated qui-
dem, and although both those particles are of a restrictive nature, yet
there is this dillerence between them ; /(er regards whole propositions,
ye only parts of propositions. Mkv excludes other things, ye distin-
guishes something as most remarkable among other things, but so as
not to exclude the latter; wherefore i-ikv has the particle 5e as an
opposite; ye has no opposite particle. Hence the distinction effected
by ye may be so effected in a twofold manner, by mention either of
what is least, or of what is greatest or most. Of the first and by far
the most common of these manners, in which ye may be rendered at
least, indeed, cerlainly, hotvever, &c. the following are examples:
(V. VI. VIII.) €1 fi,) (iXor, jxepos ye: Demostli. pro Cor. p. 317-
ala^vvr], ovbe/jias eXurTiov ^r]fiias Tols ye aw(ppoai: Id. Ol. i. [p. 17.
1. 7. ed. Reisk.] eywyc, I indeed, I at least. See Soph. OEd. C. 42.
1409. Emip- Ale. 497. Horn. II. e, 321. Xcn. CEc. iv, 2. Eurip.
Heracl. 273. Here. F. 517. hri ye, Eurip. Heracl. 632. Suppl.
162. Iph. T. 493. Aristoph. Nub. 6'77- 783. ei yap y, Eurip.
Ion, 847. Ti ye, ib. 999. av ye, TEschyl. Ag. 348. a ''»' enn^s ye,
i. e. if you shall have said anything : Soph. Phil. 1275. In this first
signification ye is common in answers approving or assenting to
something already said, but with some accession or modification :
Min. are/^cfl', etpo/uai b' eyw. Cr, alia y rjfuuy obovpos, ica\ ^iXoiicrd
ye TTToXiv : Eurip. Ion, 1616. It is also used in answers which deny
something figuratively by another question : ovk RvpnribT]v enaivels
CTO^wraroi' ; Answ. aoipwrnrov y tKeTrov ; Aristoph. Nub. 1381. In
the following passages Hermann exi)lains its signification, which has
an afbnity to that in the foregoing ones, by the German noch or doch :
viz. Soph. Phil. 593. Oi^d. C. 79- el^i ye, I call the Sun to wit-
ness, that what I do, I do against my inclination : but as there is no
avoiding it, / go, since so it must be: Eurip. Here. F. 86">. Iph.
A. 664. and with an imperative : ftrre ye, Sn|)pl. 842. and arpuTeve
ye, in contempt, Iph. A. 394. £uX\a/3ere y' uvrov : a command given
with some degree of haughtiness and indifference: [seize him then.]
Soph. Phil. 1003.
The second manner of distinction is that by mention of what is
most or greatest ; and the first sense of ye under this head Hermann
expresses by eben or gerade. See Eurip. Suppl. 158. Hec. 842.
(848.) Soph. Phil. 1035. Eurip. Ion, 3()1. El. 97().
In its second use under this head it is rendered vel, etiam, even,
very, self: elpofirjv tovtov ct Tovi aybpeiovs Xeyoi OappaXeovs. o be kuI
'' "^Apd y«. — Zpd ye noXXwy iyaOwv — then, therefore: ovk Z.p a^^/fas, 5 'yd6' ;
iiro^aifu a' airiov oZaav ; Arist()[)li. IM. is av'Spuos il: Aristojil). Av. Dl. and
546. r'ii 1] liu-t] TTor i(nlv ; ApA y' ayyf- without interrogatiou in ^'eap. b3'J. — J.S.
AfiX/'IfTt'J'Ti ; Id. ib.G41. ''Apa,igilur,
Rule 5 — 7.] Fi. 185
'Itos ye eipij, ay, and even rash too: Plat. Protag. See Aristopli.
Nub. 399. Eiirip. Med. 136l. Sopli. (Ed. C. 1278. Ant, 736".
See Iliad e, 303. "W oi ye Trarepes, even their fathers themselves :
Xen. Mem. i, 2, 27. avroi re ye avrwv ovv^^as re Kai Tpl^as Kal
TvXovs n<patpov(Tiv, Id. ib. § 54.
Fe often follows uXXa fn)i', Kal fir^v, ovhk fi^v, oh /u?)v, but with
some oilier word between ^y/j/ and ye : Pors. ad Eurip. Plioen. l638.
Te is repeated in llie same member of a sentence, and not inele-
gantly : see Soph. CEd. C. 977. Plato Pha^dr. p. 241. I. 36'. Mef
ye are very seldom joined by the tragic poets. Fe in this union refers
to and confirms what precedes, fiey relates to the very thing spoken
of with it: see Aribtoph. Nub, 1380. II71.
VI. (IX, X,) The dift'erence between ye bi] and yi roi is, that bt)
simply confirms what is modified or limited by ye, whereas rol indi-
cates that what is so modified or limited is opposed in some manner
to what precedes it: kXetttov to •^iiyta Tuvbpos' ov Kal aol bonel, w
'XeKTpvdji' ; ry) Toy At", cwtfivei ye toi : Aristoph. Vesp. 9^8, he nods
however certainly ; i, e, although he does not answer that it appears
so to him too, yet however he nods at least : (p-f\ai ye bi] might have
been said, but not ^r/crt ye toi, because there is nothing to which (p-qal
could be opposed : e^ofxev n Trapafxvdeladai aiiTuv, Kal TzeiBeiv ijpefxa
eiriKpytTTOfievoi, ort ovj^ vyiaiyet ; Ans, be'i ye toi bi'i : Plato de Rep.
V. p, 476, d. f^acraviaTeov, &c. Ans, Trpknei ye toi bi). Id, ib. vi,
p, 504. a. Both the respondents answer in this manner because they
wish to indicate that if they do not, or cannot do, what is spoken of,
yet at all events it ought to be done. Neither could have properly
said eiofiev ye -01 bt), jjaaaviaTeor ye toi bt), but if they repeated those
preceding words, they must have said t^ofxev ye bi), jjatjaviareoy ye
bri: V. Pors. praef. ad Eurip. Hec. p. 49. (p. 55. ed. Lips.) Soph.
Phil. 821. Tr. II07. 1212. Aj. 534. Coll. Pors. ad Eur. Med.
863. Eurip. Pliosn. 737- Iph. A, 675. fxerpiov Traperryev eavTOV,
t6v ye bi] ^leyjii Tijs Kpiaews j^porov : certainly at least till the time of
the trial: Demosth. in Mid,
Fe, ye vvy, and yovr, may often be rendered /or: ra b' u.\\a,Ta fxey
u(Ta(pfi, TTUTpis Kal yevos, Kal â– ^povoi' el youj' Tt aa^es avrwv n'jy,
ovK I'jy av aii(j)i\eKTos uyOpujirois epis '. Lucian, Dem, Enc, speaking of
Homer.
VII. (XI. XII.) Fe fii]v always signifies, yet notwithstanding,
nevertheless: fxuKpav yap epnei yijpvs, eficpayi'is ye fiijy : Eurip. El.
754. eiKos ye toi ttov tovs uvbpas opdws Xeyeiv. kirofieioi ye fiijy
avTo'is, oKeypoj/ieOu tovs eKe'tOev, t'i iroTe Kal Tvyyitrovcji biaroovfieyoi :
Plato Leg. X. and opposed to fxey; vpoaoiKos yap OaXaTTa â– )(wp(f. to
fieu "Tap eKU(TTr}v iijxepav i]bv, iiaka ye fxifv oyTOJS uXfivpiiv Kal TriKpor
yeiTovrjjjia: Plato de Legg. iv. p. 705. 01 /xey bij Hepaai ovtojs
ej^ovres ofioae eipepovTo' oi' ye fiijv iroXefjuoi ox/Ken tbvyayro fxeyeiy — :
Xen. Cyrop. iii. sub fin.
Viger. 2 A
186 r«p, At). [Chap. viii. § v.
SECTION V. — On thi; conjunctions yap and 5//.
Rule I. Tap is often joined with br): ri Trore Xeyet 6 Bens; kui ti
TTore aivirreTai ; eyw 700 bt) {for I certainly or undoubtedly) ovre
fidya ovre rrfiiKpuv ^vi^oiba e^murw cro^os wv : Plato Apol. p. 21. So ov
yap bi) \l/evberai ye. Id. ib. Xeyuveri yap bt) — , Pans, in Arc. p. 4o7»
and with rot : 6 yap toi Xoyos ?'/i', irepl ov bieTpl(3nfi€v, ovk oib' ofrii'a
Tpnnov €p(oriK6s : Plato Pha^dr, for truly: see Soph. Tr. 1228.
Enrip. Hi'racl. 436\ 534. 7i6. 906. Hel. 92. Here. F. 101. Aristoph.
Lys. 4-6.
II. It is used ironically •/ as, av yap inro rovriov opfiijaas, I'nratrav
^eXXeis karaXaftelv Ti)v x'^puv : you, forsooth, setting out ivith these
means, ike.
III. Tap is used in interrogation,* and may have place in any
question, because, / know not, or tell me, or the like, is always
understood. Whence the Latins say quisnam, and nam quis, and
the Germans denn : see Hermann, ad Aristopli. Nub. 192. 6 6'
lepeiis avros eoTT/cev rj/iayfieros, kqI auarefivtoy, kqI to. ^yKara k^aiptov,
Kai KapbtovXKwv, cni to ulfin tw (3oj/-ioj Trepi-^eiov, Kai ri yap ovk €i/(Te/3es
eTTtreXwf ; Lucian, de sacrif. 13. t. i. p. 13(). rl yap ireTrXoiaiv liOXtoy
KpvTTTCi cap ft ; Eurip. Here. F. 1198/ o'iei yap, w Kvpe, havov eivat
KuXXos uvOpujTrov arayKaCety tov f.n) (3ov\6fi€i'OV Trparreiv Trapa ro
fleXnarov ; Xen. Cyrop. v. Orest. tov yap ^ujvros ovk eortr ratpos.
Eiectr. ?'/ Cij yap a'pi'ip; Or. e'iirep epy^v)(6s y tyw. El. ?) yap av
Keh'os; Soph. El. 1221. v. Horn. Od. k, 301. Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 16\
And with an expression of indignation : 70 yap ainXeyeiy roX/jg.v
Vfias, ths ov TTuvT ear uyaO' vf.uv biU ti]v it€viav ', Aristoph. Plut.^
IV. Ou yap is sometimes expressive of great vehemence in interro-
gation : ov yap eKKonijiai ti]v yXwrraj' eKeliiiv ebet ; ov yap upeadrivai
T})v Kapbiav r?)r ravra TeKovaav ; Chrysost. in c. 15. E]). i. ad Cor.'
It often occurs in answers; when it must be referred lo something
not expressed, j- as to va\ or ov, e. g. which are usually omitted : olii:
' Legat. KoX Siir' frpvx^fJ-fOa — e<^' apfMa- dkere — / J. S.
/ua|(Sj/ fia\6aKws KaTaKiiixfvoi, airoWv- '' Ou yap, 1)3' itself, parenthetically, is
l4.(voi. Dicxo\). (T(p65pa yap iacu^6tJ.r]u iyi), very fre(jiieiit in Deiiiostlienes ; e. g.
Trapa Trjv iirak^LV eV <j)opvTw KaTaKfififvos ; S/xoidv ye (oil yap ;) rovro toTj irpOTepots,
Aristoph. Ach. 71. Valet isiud yop njwt- &c. in Androt. p. 610. 1. 10. ed. lleisk.
rum, et ironicuni est: Brunck. — J. S. KaXd ye (ov yap ;) t^ yeypanfj-fva — , in
* So: — "To whom Cyinocles said; Aristocr. 073, 19. etvovs ye (oii yap;)
for what ait thou, Tliat raali'st thyself aTrAis vfuv — : lb. 07-1, 14. Sfxotuv ye {oh
Itis days-man, to jirohing The vengeance ycfp ;) o[% efxov Karriyope^ ; de Cor. 272,
prest?" Sppitscr, V. Q.n, 8, 2S. 14. All tlicse passages are ironical. —
/ T7;c eVTjy T6 Ka\ veav. Phid. evri yap J. S.
iari Koi via tis riiJ-epa; Aristoph. Mub. t An ad suam revertetur antiqunm
1101. ed. Bekk. igiiur: et sic semper vitam alicubi honeste tractatam ? At hie
in iiiterrogatione, says Brunck. — J. S. quideni ante oculos vestros quomodo
? 'i'here is no note of interro'^ation in vixcrit, scitis omnes. Auct. ad Ilerenn.
the edition of lirunck, (vs. 5'.):5.) and it iv, 4. where there is anotlier reading,
is Iranslated vosne tnihi ausos conirw Nam for At : on which Ernesti say?.
Rule 1—6.] Fup, At). 187
iyOerbe — Xeyerai 6 Bopeas Tijv 'iipeidviav apnuaat ; Socr. Xeyerat yap :
Plato Pliajdr. p. 229- "Ean yap ovtcj is a very frequent answer in
Plato: and yap is sometimes equivalent to on, because: i'lpero avrbv
(Zoiliis) Tis Tu>v iT€iraihe.vnevo}v biu ri KaKujs \eyei Trcu'raj" 6 be, iroifjdai
yap KaKiiis (SovXa/jeros ov biiyafxai : IE.\. V. li. xi, 10. ov yap ct;^oX>),
J Iwvpares : Plato Hipp. Maj. [p. 345. I. 31. ed. Bas. 1.] So Plut.
de audiend. poet. p. 15.' In the foliowinj; the answer is interroga-
tive: (fjofielTai Tis fierafioXi'jv ; tL yap bvyarai ywpi-s /jeTaftoXijs yevitr-
dai ; INIarc. Anton, vii, 14. Fap refers to then he is unreasonable,
or the like, not expressed ; and when it occurs in an answer, it is
often to be referred to something not expressed : 'AvTifapj]s 6
K(Ojuu)bonoids ws aveyiviaaKe riva Tf (iatnXel 'A.Xe^uvbpai rujv eavTOv
Kwfiwbiijjy, (o be bi'fXos I'lv ov ttcuv ti cnrobe-x^ofievos) be7 yap, eiprjaev, at
fjuniXev, Toy ravra dTToSej^dytteiov cnro trvufioXiiJy iroXXaKis bebenrvr]Kevai '.
Allien, xiii. where yap is to be referred to it is no wonder you do
not much approve of what I am reading, or the like; and Herodotus
begins the speech of Dionysius thus : enl ^vpod yap tFjs uKfxijs, &c.
Er. c. 1 1 .•'â–
V. A() in prose never begins a sentence or member of a sentence ;
in verse it sometimes does, but not in Attic writers ; it signifies,
certainly, surely, without doubt, of a certainly, truly, &.c. v. Plat.
Eutliyphr. [p. 1. I. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] de Rep. v. p. 455. Aristot. de
Rep. i. p. 185. It also signifies, now: Aristoph. Nub. 700. Vesp.
1059. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. Hesiod, Op. 414. Iliad 0, 148. 450.
And in this sense it is joined with i]hr} sometimes in the same member
of a sentence : Eurip. Suppl. 780. Troad. 235. Niij' bi) with a past
tense i%,just now, a little while since: Plato Gorg. p. 455.
VI. Besides its very common use in continuation of recital, in
which it is usually rendered igitur, then, (a use common to it and
bijTa, and re bt),) when joined with kuI it signifies i'lbij, now, by this
time, already ;* as, rate b)) â– naibujy Ka\ bi) ^dtfxeyujy dard (peperat,
Eurip. Suppl. 1114. v. .Eschyl. S. c. Th. 478. Aristoph. Pac. 942.*
V. Heind. ad Plat. Cratyl. p. 109. and with a future lense, forth-
with : enl TOVTOvs y/xels Kal bi] arparevaofxeda, Xen. Cyrop. iv,
4, 11. Ka< b)) is used also in asseveration, indeed: and some other
words are often elegantly inserted between these particles ; as, tov-o
Eiegans; intellectapraecedente negatione. F. 1245. — This verse is quoted by Lon-
— J. S. g'fus, ^ 40. where Toup observes tbat
' "liKOvffas avrrjs rh Bpaaos ; Arisw. it is quoted by Plutarch also, De Stoic.
iKivOepa yap fl/xi, Aristoph. Lys. 379. repugn, p. 1048. and De Commuu.
See also Acii. 593.— J. S. notion, p. 10G3. but he appears not to
J rdp TOi : — Ti 5' tiu yiivaiKcs tppovipiov know whence tiie verse is tiiken. — J. S.
ipyacraiaTO, — KpOKwra (popovcxat, koI Ke- * 'Ev ip Se Tavra i^ovXivovro, Ka\ Sri
KaWcoiriffixevai — ; Lys. ravr' avra yap- fiacriAevs — KaTecTricrev ivavriav riju (pa-
rol Kaad' fi (Twauv TrpocrdoKu, to. KpoKoo- Xayya : Xen. Anab. i, 10, 7. rSiv
Ti'Sia Ka\ to; fivpa, &i.c. why these are the altrx^o^Taiv iarl, iravras avBpiiirovs iSeTv
very things, ice. Aristopii, Lys. 4G. — Kal aKovcrai ras pXv ffv,a(popas, ali 5i vfias
J. S. exP'jffa«'TO 01 &vdpes ouroi, -KavTa rhv XP^'
* And sometimes jt'ifAow'Kalit signifies vov Kvplas ahrols yi-yivijixivas, -ras Se 5co-
(tlriaihj. TiiES. ''liTxe ardf^^' uis fiT], fxtya pea's, $.s avrl roinulf t\a^ov irap' v,uwi',
\iywv, fiu'^ov Trddiis. lli.nc. Tfixw kukwv Kal Sij XiKvp-ivas 'â– Demostli, adv. Lept.
5ri, Kovicir' iaO' bV/j rtPr?. Euiip. Here. 47G, 27. — J. S.
188 rhp, A//. [Chap. vm.
(ipa T(j tXevQ^pw Trpeirei, Kal ru biKaio) bi) : and a just man too : and In
llie phrases, kqi to h)) fueyitTToy, and what too is most, or above all,
Kai TO bi) irpovpyialraroy, and what is of most importance, and llie
like. A/), on account of its augmentative power, and its use in
amplifying by some accession what has preceded, often follows
superlatives; zs, Kivqais yap avTr) fieyicTTT) bi) Tols''Ej\\r](7iv iyivero,
Tliucyd. i, 1. and also words having the nature of superlatives; and
when tiiere is a progressive heightening in representation : kcu b
QejjLtcrTOKXris cKeXOujy To'is A-aKebaifjioviois evTavda bt] (^arepws ctTrcv,
&c. Tiiuc. i, 91. So vvy ye bfj iravTuts, Aristid. Serm. sacr. i. p. 506.
TOTt hi], and r(5re 6/) rorc, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 320. Cyrill. c. Jul. ii.
p. 341. in Latin turn vero : v. Curt, iii, 11. Ov. Trist. i, 3. [77.79-]
And so ovTUi bfi, then at length. This amplifying or augmentative
force is apparent also in the form koi bii koi, and moreover ; as, cat
bi] Ka\ avomov rovTO ye J
VII. (IX.) A>/ is used in exhortation : npoaye brj koi (ricoirei, Plato
Phaidr. p. 229. see p. 26O. and Judith xiii, 11. Also in inter-
rogation, p7j7/(ee, now : TTiJJs bi] ovv TovTo \eyeis ; Plato Phaedr. p. 265.
TTov b)] fxoi u Trals ; Id. ib. p. 243. ra irola bi) tuvtu ; Id. de Rep. iv.
p. 421. Xtyets be bi] ri ; Id. Phaedr. p. 242. V. p. 259-
VII!. (XIII.) It is used by itself ironically; see Markl. ad Eurip.
Suppl. 521.
IX. (XIV.) It occurs in the phrase avr/ca bi] fxaXa, immediately ,
at once, presently*
A>/7rou and b)]i:ovQev s\gmfy doiibt less, of course; and also ironi-
cally, to be sure, forsooth : nenvrjade yap bijizov '. v. Hebr. ii, 16.
(TV bijTTOv TT]\iKOs oiv, Kol TuJv (ivbpeioTaTwv av irepiyeroio. / eK€iy6 ye
bi]Trovdei' airavTes eirlaTaffOe : Demosth. de Class, p. 76. 1. 50. p. 187.
[1. 27. ed. Reisk.] v. Aristoph. Plut. 140. Vesp. 295.
Arjder, — 1. signifies cnro tuv hi] (i. e. d. r. vuv) forthwith, instantly:
Eurip. Or. 1 1 19. — 2. It has an atfirmative force, but rather in deceit
and simulation, than in declaration of truth; v. Eurip. Or. 1320.
Heliod. iv, 4. Hence it signifies ostensibly in Heliod. and is op-
posed to TO aXrjdes : dpi]vo)v ova enaveTO, bijdev fxev ruiv eni act, to b'
aXrides tuv e^' kavTr] : i, 14. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 521. It
may often be rendered, /crsooM, as if
Af/ra — 1. appears to be put for h), now ; as, Kal ^i/ra biaXilofuai
irpos ae, Synes. — 2. It is used in exhorting, beseeching,'" obtesting ;
Xafiov, Aa/ioD brjTa, (in answer,) T/t-s, do, pray, hold me: Eurip. Or.
220. Ikov bijra, come, I beseech you: \d. ib. 1231. See vs. 92. also.
' 'AniKv4ourai is 'S.dpSis — &\\oi re oi once, as an instance immediatehj obvious.
irdvTes iKrr)s 'EWdSos (ro(pi(Tra\, — KalSij — Aij, Sitroir, To wit. That is to say;
Kal l,6\o>i' : ilerodot. i. is AlyvirTov depairfvuiv rrjv SvffTvxiav, ^v\lvovs irSSas
dTTtKtTO iropa'AfioffiJ' Kal 3tj Kal is '2,dp- TrfirolrjTO. — iKelvo Se ytXolov iiroui' Kprj-
Sis irapa Kpolffov, Id. ib. Sf(fj.aT6s (Ifxi irtSos yap KaWinras iwve'iro, — ws koA-
virATT\(ws, &\\a T€ voWa iin\ey6fi(i'os, \iaTois viroSlifiaai KeKofffXTJUtva fit] avT(f
Kol 5t) Kal &pt(jjv Tot hvo TO fityitTTa ra ^u\a, at ir6Ses Sii. Lucian, Adv.
irdmuv i6v7a iro\tpnt!naTa: Id. 1. vii. — Indoct. p. .542. B. ed. Salniur. — J. S.
.f . S. '" Mij 0^0', iKiTiiiu a : Ariblopii.'J'hcsni.
• Sometimes, To give an example at 751.~J. !?.
§ vi. Rule 1—4.] El/Ui'. 189
— 3. in questions, tandem, prithee : Arlstopli. Vcsp. II71, And in
aftirniatiun or asseveration: ^wKparei, KuOevbeis \ ov bFiTo, 7i 6' cis :
Plato Synjp. p. 218. Indeed, truly : v. Aristofjli. Vesp. 13.
SECTION VI. — On the conjunctions el, i>, dv, lay, AND
THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES.
Rule I. Et and jV. in their most common sense, of if, are, like
av and ear, used convertibly. But the use and significations of et
are much more extensive than those of the others, as it will appear
hereafter.
II. Et is used for e'ide, I wish ; either by itself, as in Soph. Q^d.
R. 863. or, as is most usual, followed by yap, as et yap yeroiTO, — o,
Ti kyit aoi kv Kaipo) df yeroifirjv av yj>)]m^os : WOuld that ! d'C. Xen.
Cyrop. vi, 1, 38.' See Horn. II. fl, 373. Od. y, 205. r, 309- v,
239- Lucian, Dial, Mer. iv. t. iii. p. 287. in Prometh. [p. 118.
c. ed. Salmur.] Et yap in this sense is very often joined with &(piKoVf
€({>i1, ivould that — .' said he. With respect to the elliptical nature
of the phrase, see Hoogeveen, and Markl. post Eurip. Suppl. p. 286.
III. Et is sometimes used for un, commonly after verbs signifying
some affection or emotion of mind ; as, 0av/iacw, I tvojider ; x"''p<^»
/ rejoice; ixydojiai, I grieve or am vexed ; [or the consequence of
such affection or emotion, as,] baKpv(o,K\ai<o, I lament, F weep : edav-
fjiaSe be, el /jrj <pai'€p6y avro'ts larlv — : he wondered that, &c. Xen.
Mem. i, 1, 13. See also § 18. and Euseb. Praep. vi. p. 264. icat tovs
'ApKaSas vjiiv cnrtjyyeiXev, ws e^^atpov, et Trpoffe^^t rots Trpdy^iaffiv r'jojj /;
rw»' 'Adt]vaio)v irvXis: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 241. eK\aioy, ovk el
TeOyrjloifirjp, Synes. It is put in this sense after eKpivas, and ebiuKcs,
{you brought to trial, — you prosecuted — because, &c.) in Demosth.
de Fals. Leg. p. 239. [p. 435. I. 6, 9. ed. Reisk.] For other examples
of the phrase see Horn. II. 0, 216'. Apoll. Rliod. i, 291, 1285. iii,
815. (where el may be rendered quoties) Rom. viii, 17. 31. Acts
Ap. iv, 9. xxvi, 23. cf. Markl. ad Lys. p. 67O. ed. Reisk.
IV. Et fiey is often used elliptically, {eZ e^^t, or the like, being
understood after the member of the sentence in which it occurs,)
and opposed to et be fii) : et fxev ovv eyio vfids iKaiois bibaaKb), (underst.
well;) el be fifi, Kai irapa Twy Trpoyeyevr)jj.evwy fiavQavere '. Xen. Cyrop.
viii. p. 237.
El is used also in interrogation. — 1. in direct interrogation: le'we
<pi\'y el Kai fioi ve^eai]aeai o, m Key e'liroj ; Horn. Od. a, 158. el o
u}i(poiv fxeralv Ke'irai ; Plato de Rep. v. p. 478. v. Acts Ap. i, 6. vii,
1. xix, 2. xxi, 37. Luke xiii, 23. xiv, 3. Tob. v, 5. 3 Rfg. xx, 20.
— 2. in indirect, an, whether, if;" el KaXois Keifieyoi vo/aai ri/yx"-
vovaiy, i'lpwTTiae : Plut. in Lycurg. i]pu)Triaev, el tovs yofiovs eiraivo'iey :
" Addison, in some part of his writings, nient to Johnson's Dictionary, published
(I think in one of his papers in the Whig in 1819, I have given three examples
Examiner,) censures an author for having from Addison himself, and one from
used if in this sense : yet there is good Shakspearc. — Ji S.
authority for such use. In the Supple-
ipo Et. [Chap. viii. § vi.
Pint, in Cnes. p. 713. v. Acts Ap. xvii, IJ, And it lias this
same signification, when a thing is spoken of in any way as (loubtlul,
althoiigli without interrogation : aacpa b' ovic vih\ ei Oeos eortr,
Horn. II. e, 183. uOpei, et to. irpoaifKuvTa ei^uarois cnrobibovTes,
TO iiXou Ka\()y Trotovfiev : Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. See Soph. QLi\.
R. 384. In this sense it is sometimes followed by y, as, ovbe
olba, ei CKJiiKUfievos es 'Pujutjv ih(j)e\r] crev av ti ^A.\u.iovs, j) KUKuiy
cfpiTiv eyevero fietioytav ap-^^ij '. whtther — or : Pans, in Ach. p. 420.
V. Et in its conditional sense is joined with the optative mood,
when it is indicated that what there is a doubt about may possibly
be, or be about to be : et ^e ns rovs Kparovvras rod nXt'idovs kir aperijy
TrpoTpexpeiev, (ifK^orepovs uv li^jeAjjo-ete : Isocr. ad Nic. p. 32. et — fiiK-
Xoiev fiov kaTuye\(iv, ovbey ai' e'ir] arjbes : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 3. Also,
for greater modesty, when, if propriety of lans,uage alone were con-
sidered, ?V with the subjunctive would be the right phrase; as in
/Eschyl. S. ad Th. init. and Dionys. Hal. de constr. verb, in fin.
li!)r. V. Hermann, diss, de prascept. Alticist. p. 11. for yy with the
subjunctive expresses expectation that something will be or will not
be, but et with the optative only doubt and ignorance as to its pro-
bability.
It is joined with an indicative, when that, about which there is
doubt, is left in absolute tincertainty, as to its being or not being ;
except that the indicative of the preterimperfect, preterplunerfect,
and aorisis, oflen signifies that a thing is not or was not. With the
future, el b' 6 juky, ws alei n fxe'tSoy twv vKnp-)(6vTti)y bel TrpctrretJ',
kyvtM)Kios ecrrai. v/neTs b' ws, &c. Demosth. Ol. i. p. 13. [1. 12.
ed. R.] et TOVTo yeyytrerai, ib. [I. 18.] et bt darepov tovtwv oXtyto-
pyi(T€Te, oKyiZ, &c. ib. p. 14. [I. 9-] With the present : et yap elcri
fiu^iol, elai koX 6eoi : Lucian. With aorists, preterperfect, and preter-
imperfect : et fxey Trepl Kftiyov Tiros irpayfjiaros TrpuvTidero Xeyeiv,
Demosth. Phil. i. [40, 1. ed. R.] See also Demosib. Ol. i. p. 2.
1.18. [11, 13. ed. R^Jand 01. ii. p. 6. 1.44. [19, 22. ed.R.jei fiev yap
v<f iinwy TTeidQevres aveiXovTO tov voXefJoy, Id. 01. p. 2. 1. 11. [ll, 2.
ed. R.] et TrpoOv/jios t/3ojj0//(Tayue»' airoi, I<l. ib. p. 2. 1. 2(5. [ll, 19-
ed. R.] Sometimes the verb is understood : as, ebeorTo re, ei fjtrjbev
iiXXo, aXXa ToaovToy ye â– yoovov Karu/ieJyat avroy : Xen. H. Gr. iv. p.
332. where Trotetj', or tTrirperretv, ejSouXero, may be understood ; if he
would do nothing else ; or biunpaTTeaQni kbviavTo, if they could obtain
nothing else from him; or the like. For other examples of the indi-
cative see Horn. II. a, 40. 393. 0, 344. Hebr. iv, 8.
Et is joined with a subjunctive mood by Homer, as in II. a, 340.
€, 258. I, 318. 0, 16". Od. c, 221. ij, 204. jt, 138." by the Ionic writers,
and by the lyric poets, as Pindar, Pytb. iv, 473. 488. Nem. vii, \6.
21. ix, 110. Isthm. v, IJ . and by writers of the later ages and of
" Ei 8e' MV ipy6.^r), rdya (re ^T}\<iaei roi Kal XPVI-''' e^X'^P""' ^^^o yfvrjrai, Id.
afpy/is : Hesiod, Op. i, 310. d yap th Op. i, 341. and willi &i' : ti 5' hv iixol
KoX irtvOos tx'uv viOKifiii 0vfx(fi &^rjTai, Id. rifxriv Tlpia/xus npict/toiJ re iraTSes Tiviiv oi/K
'I'lic'og. 99. <i fxri~no(Teiddui'—i) Zeus — (04\u(rtv, Hum. 11. y, '28B. — J. S.
id(\ri(Tw oKiaaat, Id. Op. ii, '2ti^). d yap
Rule 5—?.] Ei. 191
inferior cliaractor, (sec Sclitieider's index to ^Esop ;) but tlie Altic
writers do not construe et with the subjunctive : v. liruuck. ad Ari-
stoph. Plut. 216/
It is construed with an infinitive mood in oblique pliraseology,
when the purport of words is recited, rather than the words them-
selves : eJyai bk (Xeyerai) Ta')(^vrrjTci ovbevi CTipu) vfioiav, ourw ware
ei fj)) irpoXafjjSayeiv r>/s vbov tovs 'Irboiis, iv &J tovs fivpurfKas avWe-
yecrdai, ovbeva iiu (T<pe(jjp aTTorroj^eaOai : Herodot. iii, 1U5. and so et /uj)
yiveadat, &c. c. 108. It is also construed with participles; v. Seidl.
ad Eurip. El. 533. Add Xen. Mem. ii. 6, 25. i'lat. in Phaed. p. 87-
b. (136". ed. Heind.) Beitriige zur Philologie aus der Schweiz, i. p.
272. ss.
Et is sometimes put for et koI, although, even though ; Aristoph.
Vesp. 297. and so si in Latin. See Ter. Eun. ab init. Hor. iv. Od.
15. Virg. Eel. x, 65.
It is sometimes suppressed : yeyove n Kara ere, e/cretvas t/)v xeipu,
KOiTfiluiS fieraXafle' napep)(_eTai, /x?) karej^e* ovko) ijicei, /u>) iiriXape Trvppm
Tt)y upe^iv, &c. Epict. c. 21.? V. Ter. Eun. ii, 2, 21. and Linacer de
Emend. Struct, p. 409.
Eustatliius takes el to be put for etTrws, equivalent to ottws, in Horn.
Od. a, 144/
VI. Kai et expresses something hypethetical, even if; et Kal some-
thing actual, although, notwithstanding that ; /cat et adavaros r)y,
even if I were immortal; et fcai Qvr]T6s elj^i, although I am mortal:'
V. ^scli. Choeph. 2.96. rod b' eyw avrtos eifii, Kal el Trvpi j^etpas
eoiKev; Horn. v. Soph. CEd. R. 302. but in GEd. R. 305. el kuI
/i») tcXveis Tvjvh^ ayye\u)v, is, // perhaps you have not heard it from
these messengers.
El ixpu, ei ye, e'lirep, el bi), e'lnov, or eav and i)y with the same par-
ticles, if indeed, if truly, if only, if perchance.
VII. Et ^e and eav be signify but if ; and there is sometimes an
ellipsis after them; as dappei, (piirjeie rts up' oh yap er ovbev vfipiaQljmy
eav be, (underst. / should he again outraged) tote opyie'iaQe, viiv
afeyres ; Demostli. in Mid. p. 415. I. 50. After et fxev also, followed
by el be, there is often an ellipsis of the apodosis which should answer
to the protasis to which et fxey belongs; as, a\X' et fxev buaouat
P Also, ad Vesp. 190. Ran. 594. For '' Add, that et is put for iirii, since, for,
examples of various constructions of etsee in Arist(jpli. cnrevSe -rrpSffOev es â– k6\iv, kuI
Aribtopli. Han. 1374. Eccl. 407. Plut. ySoTij^et rp Qey. e l nSr avrr}^ fj.uWov tj vvv,
.583. Lys. 149. Av. 1223. Eccl. 191. S> Adxrjs, apv^ofifv ; Lys.^iOi.—J.S.
Lys. 111. llan. 533. 585. Plut. 1037. * 'Ev Se tw Mei'e|eV&) rod UXdrcovos, e t
Eccl. 791. 794. Nub, 870. Av. 103. Ka\ /jLera Traiouis ra â– Kpoiyra yeypunTaL,
197. Vesp. 1405. Ach. 1196. Eccl. 1G2, roaovriv y' taropias ivtanu, &c. Plut.
—J. S. in Pericl. p. 300. 1. 27. H. St. 6 'Ayna-'i-
1 Even witli tlie punctuation here given \a.os, ei Kal p.}] (pOovephs -ffv, fjnqSi fJxBeTo
by Zeunius, et can hardly be said to be ru7s Tiij.ajfi.4t'0ts,aWa (piXSrifios Siu (T(p6Spa,
omitted, for, if added, it would render the &c. Id. in Agesil. p. 1095. 1.16. H.St,
enunciation much less eraphatical : but in &Treifxi i^Sr], el ical fiicrai vvKXes ilfflf: Lu-
Simpson's edit. (Oxon. 1739.) there is a cian, Dial. Mcretr. iMeliss. et 13acch.
note of interrogation after ae, Tropt'px*''''*'} — J. S.
and 7)Kei. — J. S.
192 El. [Chap. viii. § vi.
yepas fieyudvfjoi 'A\^nto\, aptravTei Kara Qvjihv, vttios ayra^iov earai'
el be Ke fii) bwwan', eyw be Key avrus eXwfiai : Hoiii. II. a, 139- After
earai, understand (caXws e\ei, or travffofjiai, or KnXuv av e'ir], or ijavyuaii),
or the like. So, el fikv blj riva nvpoy e^^eij* el be ^i), ve»'Ojj«c' eyui :
Menand. See Aristoph. Plut. v. 467. And for el be ^j), Soph, puts
el b' ovy, Antig. 71 9. (See R. 9-) After el be also, ftovXei or ftovXeade
is frequently understood, as in Horn. II. i, 262. especially when aye
follows el be. See II. a, 303. i, 170. r, lOS. \(^, 5s6. 5S2. Od.
a, 271. After el be /cat avrol, Iliad », 40. underst. fiovXovrai air-
leyat.
VIII. El firj commonly signifies unless ; in which sense it frequently
has cKTos before it ; as, c/cros el fxi), n) A/a, npos tuv virep 'AXoyjjauv
Xoyov 6 ' AvTi(j>arT}s Kal tovto TreTrot^ev ; unless indeed, &c. Plut. in
Deniosth. p. SoO. 1. 21. But sometimes it is simply if not ; as, tjvy-
yyujfiT), el fii] fiera. KOKias, bv^rjs be fidXXoy a/iapr/9, — roX^iwjuev : Thuc.
i, 32. And, as el by itself is sometimes that, (see Rule 3.) so el
fii] is that not: ayavuKTuiy ovv h OuaXtptos, el fjn) maTeverai {that he
is not believed) iravTa itpaTTeiv eveKa rijs Trarpibos : Plut. in Popl.
IX. Et ^e fji)) is Otherivise : Kal yv /ue»' ^vfjfi^ y ire'ipu' (underst.
KoXws av eit] : see R. J.) el be /u;), MtruXijj'at'ojs eliTe'iv ravs re Trapn-
boijyai, Kal Teiy^iq KadeXely : TiiUC. iii, 3. o virep vjiiLv ypai^ns fii)
ayeiy kv ri3 TroXe^w npus tuv 'I^tX^TrTroi' oTrXa" el be fx)), (underst. us rJ
rofjo) neiQap-^i](jr]) Qav6.T(^ ^-qfiiovaQai, anuXuiXe Ka\ vj^piarai : Demosth.
de Fals. Leg. v. Matlh. ix, 17. But el be ov is not equivalent to el
be fii). In all the passages in which the former words occur, ov is to
be referred to some following verb, with which it is intimately con-
nected in sense and construction : as, el be oh pioi)(ev(jeis, <l>ovevaeis
fe : now if thou commit no adultery, yet if thou kill, &c. James
ii, 11. et be rot ov bwcrei cor ayyeXoi' : but if he will not give, i. e.
if he refuse — &c. Horn. II. w, 296. v. Apoll. Rhod. i, 904. Thuc.
i, 121. Eurip. Med. 87. (where Elmsley errs:) Antiphaues ap. Athen.
p. 99. a. Herodot. vii, 9.
E( [Jti] bia, an elliptical phrase, is, ivere it not for, but for, had it
not been for: MiXndbrjy be, tov ey MapnSuii'i, els to jjupadpoy kfifta-
\e'iv e\pr}(j/i(TavTO' koI el fii) bia. tov Vlpvrarty, everreaey av '. Plato
Gorg. p. 516. I. 41. So Thuc. ii, 18. [p. 249. 1- H- ed. Bekk.]
Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 370. [1. 3. ed. R.] lb. j). 395. [I. 6". ed.
R.] Aristid. Sacr. Serm. i. p. 509. Phil. Jud. Leg. ad Caj, p. 774.
X. Et b" aye is an expression common in epic poetry, if you do not
believe, or the like, being understood after et bi. [See the latter part
of Rule 7.] See Hom. II. a, 524. But sometimes there is no ellipsis,
and et be is closely connected with aye, forming with it a hortatory
phrase, explained d'ye h) by Hesych. : et b' aye, QearvXi, fiol j^aXejras
v6(Ttjj evpe Ti fia)(os : Theocr. Id. ii, 9^'
XI. Et be fiovXei, or et ftovXet be, literally, but if you please,
signifies — 1. besides, moreover: i'lye av Trrjyif ■yapiearnTr) vtto rijs
irXaruyov pet, — et o av (iovXei, to evTryovv tov tottov w$ uyairrjTov kqI
afobpa iibv: Plato Phaedr. j). 230. — 2. nay even; nay, what is more:
Tovs fiev ey Xoyy beivovs, ti] irpa^ei, tovs wpaKriKoifs be toJ Xdyw ytKijaas'
Rule 8—14.] E«. 193
ct (iovXei be, Xf^yw fi^y rovs fvboKtuovi ev \6y(f, Trpa^ei be tovs Trpai.raw-
ruTovi vneplSaXuiv: Gregor. de Atlianasio.
XII. EiVep differs from e'lye in tliis, that e'ltrep is used wlien sonie-
lliiiig is supposed, but whether the supposition be right or wrons; is
left in uncertainty ; e'iye, when something is believed to be rightly
assumed or supposed. E'iirep bouel aoi may be said to one of whose
sentiments we are, or pretend to be, ignorant ; etye hoKei croi, to one
wiiose sentiments we know : fieyiarov ayaQov, koivus p.ev rus yvralicas
eJyai, koivovs bk Toiis Tralbas, c'lTrep oluv re : if indeed it be possible :
Phito de Rep. v. p. 467. So Demosth. 01. i. [p. 9. I. 13. ed. Reisk.]
cf. Rom. viii, 9. Demosth. in Timocr. p. 46'8. Thuc. iv, 55. Xen.
Cyrop. iii, 3, 19. Aristoph. Nub. 226. Ran. 76. e'lirep tov bovXou
orros (epyov euTii') to 5'}*' /jy ws /SouXerai, Aristot. Polit. vi. e$ «f'X''*
yap avayKT) rrciv tu yiyrofxsrov yiyveadai — ■* apyiis — a.no\ojx€vi]s, ovre
avTi] iroTC ec tov, ovre uXXo e^ eiceu'Tjs yevi'juerat, e'inep e^ "PX''* ^^*
ra Trdi'ra yiyvetrdai : Plato Plijedr. p. 245. since.'
XIII. "ilmrep yap err' aairibos kvkXojv eis aXXijXovs e/jfleftrjKOTbJj',
ire/jinTos els oficpaXou irXijpot bia 7ruvTiM>v u tcciXXicrros' e'tTrep »/ fxev 'EWas
€y fieao) iraaijs Tijs yijs, ?/ be 'Arrto) ttjs 'EjXXubos, ttjs 6' av irdAews
o/iojpvfxos (>; ofitijfvfxos, the Acropolis, Vig.) : Aristid. in Panath.
p. 171. Here Viger interprets eirrep, sic ; Hoogeveen supposes an el-
lipsis of the apodosis answering to the protasis beginning with wanep,
&C. as (jov avTov TpoTTOv but iracTuiv KaXXioTrj eariv) e'iitep, since,
&c.
FAirep followed by aXXct, Iliad (p, 577-
XIV. E'tTTcp apa occurs eiliptically in the midflle of sentences, or
members of sentences ; as, ra Travra, kuI to -nav, koi to TeXeioy, oii
Kara rijv Ibeav biai^epovaiv' uXX\ e'iirep apa, (if indeed they do differ,)
ev TTJ vXr] : Aristot. de Coelo x. o be Zevs — rt ij/ias TivvvTai, aXX owe
(c'lTrep apa) {if somebody must be punished) kavTov; Q^nom. ap. Euseb.
Priep. vi. And ei apa is used in the same manner by Diogenianus,
ib. p. 265. and el Kal apa by Sext. Emp. and so eay apa.
El b' apa is used eiliptically by Attic writers in the beginning of a
member of a sentence, in the sense ei otherwise : Tzepiaipedels euros
r« '('ivTa, 'iffios fieu ovk au vppi^of el b' apa : {otherwise ; i. e. but ij he
should continue to outrage people) eXaiTovos u^ios earai tov ixiKporaTuv
â– nap vfxlv : Demosth. in Rlid.
E't're repeated is either — or; whether — or: el be ns — k-rnQv^iol
uKoveiv, e'ire vewTepos, e'tre 7rpe(T/3i/repos, ovbevlirojiroTe e<pB6vT)(ja : younger
or older : Plat. Apol. c. 21. biacpepeiy etre arocpti^, e'ire avbpei^, e'ire
iiXXi] liriviovv upeTfj : lb. c. 23. cf. 1 Cor. iii, 22. yeXolov, on o'ict
biafepeiv, eire aXXoTpios, etre oUeJos, 6 reQvetws : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 4.
(XKexpai Toivvv rov — Xoyoi^, e'lTe ovtws, e'ire liXXivs ^\€i '. Id. in Phajdr.
p. 26'4. V. p, 237. and p. 275. Xen. Cyrop. ii, I. 7- Demosth. de
Rhod. Libert, [p. 193. 1. 16. ed. Reisk.] and with oZv : e'ir ovv, —
e'ire : Plat. Apol. c. 15. e'ir ovv aXrjdes, e'ir ovv i//eii5os : lb. c. 23.
' In both these passages the assump- cording to Hermann's doctrine, elyesliould
tions introduced by iiTttp appear to be liavc been used — J. S.
taken as indubitable, and therefore, ac-
Viger. 2 u
194 Et, 'Lay. [Chap. viii.
€trc Avalas, ij ra aWos : Plat. Pliaedr. p. 277- I" the same sense
i'wre is repeated : avre tis eh Ko\vfj[3))0pav fUKpav cjuttccttj, avre els to
IxiyiaTov TreXayos fxetrov, ofios ye veJ ovhey tittov I Flat, lie Rep. V. p.
453. Soraeliines the fir&t e'i-e is omitted : Xoyoiaiv e'tr' epyoicriy. Soph.
(Ed. R. 517. V. iEschyl. Choeph. 991. A{r. 1416. Find. Fyth. iv,
138. Sometimes el is put instead of the first e'ire : ;Esch^l. Eum.
459. 599. el — e'tre, whether — or: Herodot. iii, 35. eay re — m!,
for eay re — eai' re : Soph. Ant. 327.
The difference between el and eiiy (compounded of el and a>') is
that the use of ei is merely logical, and regards thought only : that of
eay contemplates the issue of things, and regards the event, which
may prove whether a supposition be right or wrong, a hope or ex-
pectation well founded or otherwise. Hence eay, and jV and ay
contracted from it, are said of something future only, i. e. of some-
thing about which the event is to decide, or to instruct us. Et in the
sense of tvhether is used in speaking of something about which we
simply doubt; whereas jV ^nd the particles of the same signification
(among which are the poetic n'lKe, aiKey) indicate some solicitude,
and hope or fear about the event or issue of something. V. Eurip.
Andr. 42. So aiKe TrldrjTai, a'iic eXey/fftj, in Homer, aike iroQi Zeus
e^oTTiau) Trep iravtrr] oi8uos, Od. S, 34. 'Ear, ay, 7)1', are properly
joined with the subjunctive mood: eay is joined with the optative,
only when something is mentioned as the thought of some person.
This is the case in the passage of Lucian cited by Tliom. M. in el:
for in that passage (Ver. H. ii, 29-) eay KaTa\deiT}i^ey (which Her-
mann thinks the true reading) expresses the supposition- of a person
different from the narrator; namely of Rhadamanthus. In the pas-
sage of Thucydides cited by Thorn. M. (iii, 44.) [p. 445. 1. 1. ed.
Bekk.] where y appears to be joined with eley, a different punctu-
ation and interpretation are proposed by Hermann. But a'i Key is
sometimes construed with an optative mood in Homer, as in Od. t;,
315. Very late writers join eor with the indicative mood also, as the
scholiast of Hom. ap. Pors. ad Od. X, 497- and in the same manner,
and very frequently, Kuy : v. Schjef. ad Append, ad Bastii ep.
crit. p. 26. and in ed. Aristoph. Pint. p. 38. s. Hermann, ad Aris-
toph. Nub. 1156. and in lib. i. de nietris, p. 86\ Brunck. ad Aristoph.
Pint. 216'.
* It is to be observed also that the Attic poets always say Tjv for ear,
and never ay. see Monthly Rev. Aug. 1799- p. 430.
'Eft*' is often found erroneously substituted for ay, as in Xen.
Mem. iii, 10, 12. iv, 2, 29. Id. Hier. i, 14. Demosth. de Pals. Leg.
p. 436', 8. ed. R. adv. Timocr. p. 733, 4. adv. Euerg. p. 1152, 14.
Lys. p. 753. [I. 7. ed. Reisk.] Allien. Deipn. ix. p. 399. in fin.'
'Ectf fiey, — fup be, elliptically : Plato Protag. p. 328. just as et fjie'y,
— el be, in Rule 4.
' Add, Sffoi iav 464Ku(nv — Kaprepuy : Demosth. adv. Ciillipp. }>. 1237. 1. 3. ed.
Plato in Lachet. p. 257. 1. 40. ed. Bas. 1. lleisk. 01 vepioSoi, oirov 4av vvrfs Tiixoiiri
iwou iay 3), Xen. Aiiab. i, 3, (j. Hal Kara TrfpioS/ow t^j wJAfwS : ^ucns Coinin.
iav fuv yivuKTKuai tV o^iv rod iLvOpcinou, I'oliorc. c. 22. — J. S.
i fie 5(V/ airoSovvat, roaovrov fi6vov itoiuv :
§ vii. Rule i.] -1>, Kat. iy5
'Eav T€ — tar re, tvhethcr — or, (sec R. 14, on eVre,) Plat. Eiitliyphr.
c. 0. and in Crit. c. 12. eav re — eav re, — i'jv re — {jv re in the same
sentence: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 17. In the same manner ac re — uv
re are used ; and cnv re Kay re, Etyni. M. p. 202, 19.
SECTION VII. — On the conjunctions re and kqi, and
THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES.
Rule I. Te — Kal, is both — and : av7)p S^vs re rijv hiavoiav, Ka\ to
aSiiia epptvjjiirus eyojv. Sometimes the part of a sentence, in which
re and Kai occur, is connected with a foregoing part by anotlier Knl
preceding; Z%, a'tpovai riji' Qvpeav, Kal r/jv re iruXiv KareKavcrat', Kal
TO. eyovTU e^eiropOrjaav : Thuc. iv, 57. V, 56. See Virg. ^n. v,
619. Ov. Met. iii, "265. When re and Kal are joined in the same
member of a sentence, re is copulative, and Kal augmentative, even ;
as, (pQavei be re Kal tov uyovra, Hom. II. 0, 262."
Te renders expressions more uncertain ; it answers to que in Latin :
whereas Kal answers to et : hence oore, cios re, ware, evda re may be
explained : see Hom. II. e, 467. Hermann, in Erf. ed. niin. Soj)li.
CEd. R. ad v. 688. Theogn. 336. II. e, 305. oans re, Od. X, 25.
ore re, II. e, 500. wcrei re, II. i, 447. [H- ft, 780.] eirei re, Herodot.
Er. c. 84. es re, Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 11. See also II. a, 218. And
when re connects, it does so otherwise than Kai: for when whole
members are connected by re, they are so connected, that what is,
as it were, not necessary, is thus added to what goes before ; which
is very frequent in the historians, and in disjunctive forms of
speech ; re — kuI (as que — et) is said, not Kal — re, — 7rar>)p aybpCjy re
Kal deuiv.
The form he re makes expressions a little more uncertain or doubt-
ful : see Hesiod, Op. 419. Horn. II. ^, 151. Od. \, 306. [See
note u in this page.] Sometimes be re answers to fxey re pre-
ceding : e. g. Hom. II. e, 139. ^' 260. When be re occurs in the
tragedians, it is to be corrected : be y may be substituted in iEschyl.
Choeph. 488. and Eurip. Hel. 517. Schajfer reads ^e x>/ in Eurip.
Ion, 1378. and, as Hermann thinks, rightly.
Kai re, Hom. 11. a, 521. Theogn. 662.
Te is sometimes used in the same manner as elm and k^tu after a
participle, then: see iEschyl. Ag. 97. Choeph. 554. and Hermann,
ad Aristoph. Nub. 180.
Te often precedes apa in interrogations, as in Hom. II. a, 8. But
the contraction of toI upn should be written Tcipa : Soph. CEd. C.
1442. El. 404. Aristoph. Nub. 1157.
" The connecting particle here is 5e, which may, and perhaps often does, happen.
not Te. T€ gives a siiglit shade of uncer- So in those beautiful verses cited bj De-
tainly : for the words do not contain a metrius of Piialerum, § lOG.
positive, peremptory, asserlion of one O'lav Tav vaKtvOov fv oCpefft Trotixfves &vSpes
particular actual fact, but a general repre Uocrcrl KaTaaTel^ovai, x^M"' ^E' TE irop-
sentation, by way of simile, of sometliing (pvpoi' Ixi'So?. — J. S.
1.96 Te, Ka.', [Chap. VIII. § vii.
It is sometimes followed by be instead of re or Kai : Soph. Q^d.
C. 367.
II. Kni, even unaccompanied by uWU, sometimes signifies also,
even : efiol r»/v evyoiup Kal vvyi itaftday^^aQe, Demosth. pro Cor. v.
Dem. in Aristocr. [701, 7. R-]
III. It commences a parenthesis, for the purpose of connexion:
a'lTtov be tovtuv, — (^Kai fioi, irphs dewy, tiray eveKa tov (oeXriaTov Xeyw,
ecrrw irappqaia,) (ic : Demosth. de Cliers.
It signitics hut, (as the Hebr. 1,) 1 Thess. ii, 18. Acts x, 28. Ec-
clesiastic, xli, 13. Tob. iii, 10. Rev. ii, 2, 9-
It is, like he, opposed to fiev : Find. Pyth. ii, 106. And so re in
Piiid. Fyth. ii, 60. is opposed to yuev in v. 56. v. Pyth. iv, 443. 445.
Nem. viii, 51. 53.
IV. It is used in interrogation or doubt in the beginning of a sen-
tence, or member : r/ epovfxev, ecw tis iifids avaKpiy?]' kuI tis uydpwnuy
TO fit) Zv hu^ufrei ; Plato Tliea^t. p. 188. 1. 37- ^ai bvyriaofjLeda, w
'E'p/xij, hii' I'lyres — ; Lucian, in Charon.
V. When ov ^wvov is followed by dXXo without k(u, there is a
gradation : in which case the Latin writers also use sed without etiam:
ifxcLTiov iifi(pieani oh fxovov (paiiXov, u/Wa to avTO depovs Te Kal -^^eifiCiiVos ',
Xen. Mem. i, 6, 2. v. ii, 7, 6. Oppian, Cyn. i, 159-
VI. (VI. VII.) Kal often indicates a degree of doubt, and espe-
cially after tI Trore, or tI alone : tI 7ro-e koi KaXeaai xP'l > Xen.
H. Gr. ii. p. 468. ti yhp Kal j3ov\6nevoi fieTeTrenTrecrO' ay avrovs — ;
Den»osth. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. 17." The question ti xpq Xeyeti' ;
merely asks what must be said, without expressing any doubt whether
any thing ought to be said : but ti ^P') xal Xeyeiv ; is the question
of one doubting not only as to what must be said, but also whether
any thing ought to be said : what must be said, if indeed any thing
at all is to he said ? e'i ti izpatjoeiv QiXeis is, if you are tvilling to
do any thing ; e'i ti Kat irpaaaeiy deXeis is, you will scarcely do any
thing, but, however, if you are willing to do something.
VII. (VIII.) Kat is sometimes rendered atque, as: v. Duker. ad
Thuc. vii, 71. p. 494, 71. Valck. iid Herodot. vii, 50, 2. p. 534.
Kara tuvtci ovtos re vx^ae Kal Kidupa Kpovadelrra, in the same ma?i?ter
as: Pans. \n Att. wciff/js rvj(w>' '^ap' uhrov be^iwaeus iaa Kal Traibioy
6 Tifnu)TaTos, as much as, equally with — - ; (ireg. Naz. ov^ ofxoiws
bi^KeiyTai t})v t'^ir Kal ore vyiaivoy, as when they were well. Similem
sihi videri vitam hominum et mercutum eum, &c. Cic. Tusc. v.
[c. iii. § 9-]
VIII. (IX.) Kat, ac, atque, than : ecrn yap trtpa ?/ ^prjfxaTiaTiicrj Kal
6 irXovTos 6 Kara (jwaiy, Aristot. i. Polit.
IX. (X.) In Kal yhp Ka), Kal tis ual, the last Kal is cvcn or too: ov
irapiei aeiojyo Oeos, Kai Tiyes Kal antjXoyTO rwy OTpaTiwrCjy KepavrwOevres :
Paus. in Lac. p. IbS. Kal yap Kal avrds raXavTevofxat tijv yvMf.it]y,
for I myself also, or for even I myself — : Grcgor. So kdyw, or Kal
eyu), I too, or even I.
*' Qavfiu^u) 0^ avTuv rl von icai loKixi)- liinocr. p. 7'2I. I. 27. cd. Iliisk. .tjec
an XiyQiv irepl joijuiv : DcmusUi. iu Xen. Au<ib. iv, S, 10. v, 1,11. — .(. S.
Rule 2—10.] Te, Ka/. j()7
Kul, when : f}5>j bk Tjy oxf/k, >.nl ol Kopivdioi i^aTrlyrjs itpvfivav eKpou-
ovTo: Time, i, 50. So Xeii. Cyrop. i, 26. This sense is very
cotmiion ill l!ie N. T. See Acts A|>. v, 7. Mark .\v, 25. Luke ii,
21. Htbr. viii, S. For similar expressions in Latin see Virg. i?lii. iii,
9. iv, 6'6'3. xi, 8()4. i, 86". ii, 6'92. iii, 356". v, 858. xi, 296. 621.
G. ii, 80. iii, 493. Gell. x, 29. and, as in 1 Mace, vii, 23.
Kai, conformably to the use of the Hebrew particle % is placed at the
beginning of both a precediiig and following member of a sentence :
Kai (when) elbev 'lovbas, — kciI e^FjXOep, &c.
Kru is expressive of urgency and earnestness, both in commands
and questions : cat fjiot avayrwdi to ^{i(pi(T/xu, Lys. adv. Agorat.
p. 466. ed. Reisk. kuI fioi icdXei tov Tu^iup^or, lb. p. 499- v. p.
474. [I. 4.] 493. [1. 3.] Demosth. pro Cor. p. 243. [I. 7. R.] ib. p.
253. [I. 9- R'] *>â– "' ""Jis Trarpy'nr ya'tav oh auxrai OeXo) ; Eurip. Phoen.
907. V. 1357. Or. 1110. Tab. Ceb. p. 203. Lucian, in Soloec. t. iii.
p. 575. Virg. Eel. i, 37.
Ka< sometimes intends, or has an augmentative power : ns vvv ye
Kai av Alt TTor^t ^ayono, Horn. II. e, 362. even with Jove himself:
o'ljTTw ijaduv Kai era uibpa, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1,18. See Theogn.
342. Iliad ^, 26'8.
It imparts something of indefiniteness to the signitication of words,
as cunque in Latin, and soever in English : fiaXa I'lbr] â– KapecpvKarTov u,
Ti Kai fxeibiuaeie : Lucian, Lap. t. iii. p. 428. ebpaaev u ri bi)
Kai tbpacrer, Heliod. v. init, [See Rule 6. and also Chap. II.
Rule 2.]
Kot has sometimes the same meaning as KuiTvep or kuv : TroXXd //e
KOI avyierra "KcipipyeTai, although: Theogn. 419- v. 1114. Horn.
11. a, G63. I, 651. n, 171. Aristoph. Plut. 915. Luke xviii, 7. cf.
Valck. ad Plicen. Eurip. p. 98, 99.
It is sometimes explanatory ; [being nearly equivalent to the French
savoir, and to the English, that is, namely, that is to say ;] avrap
o fifi TTpcs bu>fxa Aios Kai fxaKpuv "OXvjuttuv, Hom. 1!. v, 398. see Horn.
IL Apoll. 17. and it very frequently connects an adjective with ttoXvs
])receding : see iEschyl. Ag. 63. Soph. Trach. 1277« Hermann, ad
Eurip. Hec. p. l62." "
X. (XI. XII. XHI.) Kaj/ (Hermann, de emend, rat. Gr. gr. i,
8. p. 36. is KOI ay, and perhaps, although or even perhaps: or Kai
lay, even if ; or Kai €V, and in. nav iravTanaaiv airaibevTos wr, to'is
KOfiibrj ireTraibevnivois eavTuy avTnrapu(3u\\ei : even though, rovro be
Kay Trals yvoit], even a child might know : Plat. Euthyd.p. 279- '• 38.
V. Mark vi, 56. el Trepl irus rej^rj; KaXais I'lTiiaravro Xiyeiv, Kciy Trepl
Twy aXXbjy airavTwv : also, or even : Plat. Ion, p. 524. tov-ii>v fiey
Kay u\paio, Kar 'ibois, Kay ra'ts aXXats aladi'iaerjiv a'ladoio : you can both
touch, &c. Plato Pha3d. c. 25. p. 97' a. Kav /uer, evXafioijfxeyos tovto,
"* Add, Kol, and yet, ichtj : Auus : fiSiv Koifj-l^^Tai ; &c. Plat, de Rep. ix. p. 4G2.
((xk frjTeTs: Adol. iroQiv ; Anus : Ka\ tV '• 30. ed. Bas. 1. In fact, in reality: f>
eipu!' y' ^paTTfs : Aristoph. Ecd. 977. Kai avPifiij, Plut. in Tlieniist. p. :i21.
In jiluc'j of aWd: ovx^ ^ hi" ^avBdvu-v I. 7. 11. St. and iu C Mar. p. 772. 1. 11.
tri Troi'j/pdTcpos ylyi^irar ruv 5t ju?; \avOa,- — J, S.
roj'Toy, Kai KO\a^oix(Uov, 70 ixlv dr^pii'Sis
198 Kai. [Chap, viii. § vii.
fjy) Xeyto ra Trenpayfjiiva efiavTM, &c. and if , guarding against this,
&c. Demosth. pro Cor. See Plato Eutliyplir. c. 10. Epict. c. IS.
Luke xiii, 9* vvliere the apodosis naXuis e-^et, or the like, is omitted ;
[see § vi. beginning of R. 4. 9-] ovtos t/ioi vroXe/iet, Kciy fiijrroj
iSdWrj Kai To^evi] : even if, i. e. even although: Demosth. Pliil. iii.
p. 115. Ki]v /ue (payr]% tJrt piS.av, Ofiojs en Kapno(popt)a(M) : Epigt.
TtavTa Kiveirai, kciv pfjyfxa, Kay arpefifia, Ka*' rtWo ti twv vnap')^6vT(>)v
aadpoy ^ : whether — or — or : Demosth. Ol. ii. p. 24. [1. 6. ed. Reisk.]
Krif €t, even ij perhaps : kuv el ravra nayra inrijp^^^ey, Demosth. de
Fals. Leg. Kay aaefieicty et Karaytywai:!) ris twv Treirpeai^evfievwv avTtii,
lb. Kai biaKpiyeadai cat avyKpiveadai, cat \pv\eadai cat BepnaiyeaBai,
/cat TrajTO ovrw, kuv el /i?) ^pwjueSa rots oyufiaaiv eviayov, uW epyo)
yovv T^avrayov ovnos e)^(iy uyayKcuoy : even although perhaps we may
in some instances have no names for the things : Plato Phaed. c. 15.
p. 71, 6".
Kay ill the designation of number or quantity, about, even to the
amount of — ; TreXraurat be Kai ro|orat yeyoivr' av (os cTrt rf]! ///ierepas
bvyanews Kay e^'iKiafivptoi, even as many as about sixty thousand:
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, (). Kuv, even, only, no more than: ijy yovv
eiriTpexpu) aiiru Kav aira^ ^iXijaai ae, ovKeri pefi\pr} fxot: Lucian, Dial.
Deor. V, 3.
Kay, at least : o/jms epatrrrjv Kav ravrov e-x^to, Lucian, Dial. Mar. i, 3.
V, D. Deor. v, 2. [128. d. Salmur.] et in Solaec. t. iii. p. 574.
Soph. El. 81.
With respect to the construction of Kav with the indicative mood,
see Bruiick. ad Aristoph. Plut. 2l6. Hermann, ad Aristoph. Nub.
1156. and De Metris i, p. 86".
XL (XIV.) Kai t)/),' or cot br) Kai, Of icat br}Ta, or cat bfjra Kai, is
generally, and indeed, and truly, nay even: cai bt) Kai aov {fbews av
TTvdolfiTjy.
Kai by), with some other word intervening, is often and more, and
moreover, and — too, and what is more. Xenophon, afler saying that
Astyages had made up a great hunting party to gratify Cyrus, pro-
ceeds, Kai (iamXiKijis bt) napioy avros, u7rT]y6peve /jiTjbiva (juXXeiv, nptv
Kvpos efxnXrjfTOeh} Oripioy : Cjrop. i, 4, 14.
Kai bt) is emplo\ed in stating something supposed for the sake of
argument : cai bi) TeOtaac ris fie bei;eTai iroXis ; well, I will suppose
they are dead: Eurip. Med. 388. cat bij bebeyfiac ris be fxoi Tifiij
peiei ; jEschyl. Eum. 883. and with a participle : cat bt) rpe.nofxevvi,
ituiovs 7/ iirireas >/ ro^oras f/ TreXraorcts >/ aKovTiaras, liyev tTnrwy ovres,
bvyaifieOa av (pevyovras ii Xafte'iv t) caracotretj' ; Xen. Cyrop. iv, 3, 5.
Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 184. p. 591. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip.
p. 129. b.
XIL (XV.) Knt bt) sometimes signifies at once, forthwith : [sec
Rule 6'. Sect. v. of this chap, and the note on the first part of it.]
to/$, eay vporepos ris eirroi tu Tvpoaord^ eavr^ Trepl aXXow, cat bt) ravO'
ovTws ey^ttvTa '. Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 318. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] rvaoxiTuv
' On KOI 5)/ »ca>. see the last part of note there. — J. S.
Rule 6. § V. of lliis chapter, and the
Rdle 11 — 16.]
Kat.
i99
VTrenrdv, err' ai/rov kcu bt) rp^ypofiai : Gregor. So atque, V'irg. Georg.
i. [v. i!03.]
XIII. (XVI.) Kai ironical, followed by ye 617 : Krn bfiXoy ye b^ on
— fiahofjdi, Plato Svnip. sub iiiit.
XIV. (XVII. XVill. XIX.) Kai /i^v are joined in Mom. II. t. vr)\T,s'
Kdi fi€v ris re Katnyvy^TOio <p6voio iroityjv, 7/ ov Traibvs ebe^tiro redyeiwros :
and yet: v. 628. But some other word commouly intervenes between
them [and then each retains its own usual sifjiiification]. Koi /u))i'
signifies and truly, and moreover : koi fii}v Tuinakov elcre'ibov, &c.
Horn. Od. X, 582. v. 593. also, but, but indeed, but yet, and yet,
alqui. See Eurip. Suppl. 1010. and Markl. Iph. A, I619, Aristoph.
Lys. 559. 131. Eurip. Iph. A. 20. icat fjiji', e'i ri twv uWmv, uv vv\\
^lii^r.Wc i-fit bieEnei. V i^al c'cW unovy ubiKoiiyra pe vuH-S eojpn — : De-
ctifiaXXe k
iKOvyrci [je v/jus eujpn-
inosth. pro Cor. [229, 25. ed. R.] See Deniosth. ib. p. 3l6'. [232,
25. ed. R.] ib. [249, 4.] ib. [247, 15.] ib. [257, 17.] cot fiw
KoX Kar avTO tovto ci^ios eifii enahov Tv-^eTy,^ Plato Symp. See also
Demosth. pro Cor. p. 348. 1. 15. [309, 12. ed. R.] rai /ur/r evayxos
ae tci'rovy, atqui, ivliy, I was lately looking for you : Plato Symp.
[p. 176". 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.]
XV. (XX — XXV.) Kat TOi is quamqiiam ; and yet; hojvever ;
although indeed; Kalroi ri (pri[.u; iEschyl. Prom. 101. See Eurip.
Or. 75. Iph. T. 720. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 341. I. 49. [294, 13.
ed. R.] ib. [230, II. ed. R.] ib. [QGO, 21. ed. R.] ratroi Kai Xoyov
Tiva Kuricnretpay els roy bfj/Aoy, Plut. in Caes. v. Demosth. de Cor.
[248, 7. ed. R.] kuItoi av ye, ovtio (to^os wr, ovbev rwy Trap' e/dov bei'jar]
X6y(,)y: Lucian.' The expression is made more forcible by the ad-
dition of ye : Ko/rot ye w/jtrjv ye fueaovy nvToy, Plato Pliaedr. p. 241.
1. 29. KutToi ye oil rwy ev TTe(j)VK6r<x}y irepl ravra els u>y, Greg. Naz. v.
Aristoph. Ach. 617.
XVI. (XXVI.) Kai yap roi and kqI yap ovyzre,for truly:" Kai yap
TOi iram ro'is "FjXXj^eny ebei^oTe €K TovTwy — ' Kai yap ovy vnoypa^eas
â– !rupea7T)(7afir]y : Lucian, Dem. Eac. p. 920.
y Hoogeveen says he doubts whether
these are Plato's words ; an<l he has good
reason for doubting. The passage is in
Demosth. de Cor. p. 262. 1. 26. ed. Reisk.
See also the same Oration, p. 250. 1. 22.
2.12, 16. 254, 5. 267, 9. 304, 2. and
Aristoph. Thesm. 1126. Plut. 93. Kai
fjL7]v always begins a sentence, sometinics
even a book or treatise, as Lucian's piece
Adv. indoctum, is:c. — .T. S.
* More examples of the use of Kat roi
may be seen in the following pp. and
lines of Reiske's ed. of Demosth. de Cor.
258, 14. 259, 14. 262, 21. 263, 13. 268,
18. 272, 28. 274, 10. 285, 12. 298, 19.
300,2. 301,10. 302, 24.311,3. 314,
27. 319, 20. 323, 4, 24. 328, 15.—
J. S.
" Kai yap roi often signifies, ther^ore,
and therefore : u\\' ol5( tovto kuXus eksj-
vos, '6ri ruvra fxiv ecrriv airavra ra X'^pl'^,
di.6\a rod iro\4/ji.ov Kiifxiva iv jueVoi* — Kai
ydp TOI, ravrri xp-qa a-ixevus t^ yvw/xr], irdv-
ra KaTecrrpaiTTai Koi ex^' • Demosth. in
Phil, i, 41, 27. R. tyvw t?V Ti/xyy oiixl
TCf Kvpici) Tuiv Trpayfidruiv 5e5a)»ccis. /col yap
TOI TrpuTOP fiev ' hfj-cpliroKiv SovAriy KaTfrrrri-
aev, — Ht oiiZivL ttwitot eSoiKe xRVI^o-Tc^
rov\onrov. Id. de Fals. Leg. 383, 23.
See 384, 25. Trepl t^s rtyefj-ovlas (-rroiriare
TTJ â– jr6\fi rhv K6yov irphs AaKeSatfioviovs
elvat. Ka\ yap roi ix6i'<f> tHov iravTuv avTcp
tout' ev TT) (TTT]\ri yiypairrai' &:c. Id. adv.
Lept. 477, 25. See Deniostli. in Mid.
663, 8. in Aristocr. 655, 7. 689, 9. &v
TiS Pov\r)Tat v6pov Kaifuv rifleVai, iu ^p6x'p
rov rpaxv^o" ^X'^" vofModiTii' — Kol yap rot
Katvovs pXv 00 ToXixaicTt TiOecrdai vSfiovs :
Demosth. in Tiinocrat. 744, 9. — J. S.
200 Mer, Ac. [Chap. VIII. § viii.
XVII. (XXVII.) Kot cv and khI /.h), not, and not : 0a(Vo/ua« rnlvw
eyw j^iipiTOS T£TV)^r\KMi rore, Kai ov ^eiixpews, ovbe rifj-wplas : Deiiiosth.
pro Cor. Kal f.u) TavTu fxoya dv eanv el/iapf^ieir) ; Diogeiiian. ap.
Euseb. Praip. vi.
SECTION VIII.— On the conjunctions /^ev and Be, and
THE PARTICLES JOINED WITH THEM.
Rule I. Meu is not put after the relative os, as qnulem is put aflcr
qui : the Greeks rather say ufrns, ocrirep, as bi), os ye, and the poets
oare.
It is sometimes used without be, in the same manner as quldem in
Latin.*
II. (y. III. IV.) Mh* and 5e are almost always put correlatively in
parts of sentences having some reference or opposition to one
another; as, uvros fi^v j/^as (pei'aKt^ei, yj-ie'cs be vtt' evrjdeias avruv
virepcrnovba^eiv tffxiof otOjueQci. rourov be aWo fxev ovbey, Trepl be 7j7
\etpi ^pvauuv buKTvXiov (pepeiv : Plat, (le Rep. ii. p. 339' fjye'iadui
riif vTiaov TavTTjv — uWo jxev ovbev eJyai jSatnXei ■^pr]ni[xr)t>, — rys o avTf]s
ap)(j/s eTtre/xfff/un : Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 49. v. Aristid. de Sn)yrn.
)). 292. Ej)ict. Ench. c. 62. Oe-raXol be i/tt' avayKtjs fiev, u^ios be
tfiiibi^ov: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 298. ijbe yap yvvr) buvXr] fiev,
e'ipqKev b' eXevdepov XoyoV. although a slave, yet has, &c. Soph.
Tracli. 62. Sometimes these particles indicate celerity : to fikv
erreaev, // be e^ei ba'ira: IE\. V. H. i, 2. speaking of the spider
seizing quickly the prey which falls into its web.
It is to be remarked that fxev and be are not always to be trans-
lated ; and also that they frequently connect different parts of speech ;
as may be seen in some of the foregoing examples. The following
may be added: Kcpbovs (ley eVe/ca, tu fteXriara S' ti'/iws Xeyeiv'.
Thuc. iii, 43. iEsch. S. 0. Th. 760. Soph. ffid. C. 1454. When
things are really oj)posed, so that ^xev is although, a participle may
be joined with fiev, and a verb with be. Sophocles has so joined an
adjective with /uev : ubela fiiy, avria 5' o'iaw : Tracli. 122. 'Abela
is lubens, willing: uKoyrts fiev, efepoy be: v. Irmisch. Add. ad lle-
rodiau. iii. p. 60 i.
III. (V.) Me»' and bk are sometimes, cum, — turn, as — so: iroXXu
fikv ouv eyuye eXarroTjfiai kotu. tovtovl Toy uyuira Aitry^tyov, bvo b\
uybpes 'AOqra'ioi, Kui jjieyaXa : Demostll. pro Cor. [226, 13. ed. R.]
See the beginning of Isocrates's Paraen. ad Demonic.
IV. (VI.) In enumerations, recitals, &c. these particles are often
simply connective : Trujra /utf noyoy, Trcicra be kiybvyoy vnoiieyeiy '.
'' In a question without Se followinn; ; affirmntion : S'alza, c gridando va, cli' e
vytalras ^tV ; Aristopli. Av. 121. 1, why, suo pensiero Di pianger Si, ma noii nioiir
are yon in your si-nncs? — J. S. da vcro. Baldovim, Lanicutodi Cecco,
• Mec, when oppoaed to 5e, is ex- &C. — J. S.
pressed in Italian by S), liut willi nioio of
RULK 1— S.] Mt»', Ae. 201
Xeil. idepuneve fiev tU (nojjnra, eOepcnreve be rns xpv^ns : Grcjgor.
b)S UTravTa fxev j^aXfror, diravra be <j>oiviKa (^uiveadai : Xen. Ages,
ii, 7. cf. Xcii. Mem. iv, 2, 25. iii, 8, 10. Anab. 460, 6. 46"o, 3. 475,
9. 479. 480. Cyiop. 270, 3. 276, 21. 286, 22. 29O, ult.
V. (VII.) Sometimes the opposition ex|)resscd by ^ev and ^e is
carried on with a climax througli several negative nienibers, the
word joined with cV in the first member being repeated with fiev in
tiie second, and that with he in tiie second, with fJLev in the third :
ovKeliTov fikv Tavra, ovk eypov^a be' ovbe eypa^pa fiey, ovk enpecftevaa hi.'
ovV eirpfufievaa fxey, u'vk eTreiaa he Qrjjyaiovs : I did not advise these
things unthout writing <i psephisin about them ; nor write the pse-
phism about them without going on the embassy ; nor go on the
embassy without persuading the Thebans : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 339.
I. 10. [288, 8. ed. R.]
VI. (VIII.) The omission of sometliing is frecjuently opposed to
the doing of something else : ov to fiev irpos a\\i]\ovs aytoriiecrdai
vapaXeiTreiv, erepo) b' oto) kukov r« btoaofiev $.riTe~iv : Demosth. pro Cor.
and in that case the first nien)ber is to be translated into Latin by a
substantive in the ablative absolute with a participle passive.
VII. (IX.) V^ery often, especially in enumerations or details, be is
many times repeated after one ^ev ; as, vpq.s irnvToyov /.ikv li(pt],
'jravra-^ov be duipaKos, navra'^ov be hopara, Truvra he tTTTTWj', -Ttavra bk
ottXuv, TTcii'Ta he witXiafxeviov avhpwv fxeara : Dio Chrys. Or. xii.
See Athen. Deipn. vii. p. 280. But in divisions, wlien one of the
opposed particulars requires subdivision, both ^ev and he are re-
peated : see Ceb. Tab. [pp. 36, 37- ed. Simps. Oxon, 1738.]
Sometimes fiev is placed at the end of one head of a discourse, or
chapter of a book, and the corresponding be in the beginning of the
next; as in Isocr. Paneg. [p. 103. 1. 1 — 3. ed. Battie, Cantab. 1729.]
and in Tluic. ii. c. 54. 55. cf. Pint, in Demosth. p. 851. Demosth.
Ep. iii. p. 117.
VIII. (X.) In oppositions he following ^xev is often to be rendered
sed, but ; as, aicoveis jiev, ov (TVfieis* he : in which case f.iey is some-
times omitted; as, el be ov fiof)(^ev(Teis, (poveiiaeis be — : James ii, 11.
and in others also. See Hom. II. a, 3. 4. 5. 43. 358. e, 38. Od. ^,
319. Eurip. Or. 455. Sometimes after juev some other particle
is put in place of be: as a\X«, see Hom. II. 7, 214. Eurip.
Or. 562. cf. 138. 1023. Aristoph. Vesp. 480. Thuc. iv, 57-
Rom. xiv, 20. avrup: II. a, 50. i, 400. 701. (p, 514. arap : II.
<j), 40. avdis: Soph. Ant. 170. fievroi: Aristot. de Rep. i, 6.
Plato de Rep. vi. p. 511. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 26. iii]v: Plato
Phaedr. p. 268. -kXyiv aXXa : Heliodor. vi, 7. Kai : II. a, 267.
Theoplir. nepi aypoiK. Lucian, Dial. Nept. et Delph. re: Eurp.
#r. 1317' eweira, or rather be is understood with cTreera, irpCi ra
fiev, or Trpiorov fxei', having preceded : Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 5 6.
Aristoph. Vesp. 550. Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. Xen. Mem. iii, 11,
14. i, 4, 11. i, 7, 2. iii, 8, 5. iv, 2, 31. So after eha, Aristoph.
Vesp. 1101. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 1. iii, 6, 9. av : Hom. II. X, 108.
Viger
* See the Abridgment of Maittaire, p. 199. note a, — J. S.
2
202 Me*-, M. [Chap. viii. § viii,
and there are examples in Attic and prose writers also : avre, Horn.
Od, Xi 5. and so tlie Altic writers. But sometimes /uej/ is followed
neither by be nor by any other particle instead of it; and in that
case, either be is to be understood, or that member or part in whi^ch
be should be, is omilted : eyw /uey ovk olba nvlovs rivas ^pt) fidWov
evlatrdat, i) toio'vtovs (TTpaTiwras e^e"', !• e. / indeed know not ; btit
others perhaps knoiv : Xen. Cyrop, ii, 2, 10. see also iv, 2, 4.5.
5, 17. 5, 50. Xen. CEc. xv, 6. vii, 8. Tiie division, in which
be should be, sometimes precedes ; as, ovtoi bi) h^'hctch, in Plat. Crit.
p. 43. d. On the repetition of /uef in the same member see Dorv.
ad Char. p. 560. When /Jtev — kqI, or fiev — re, are joined, there is
properly an anacointhon, by which a transition is made from the
disjunction indicated by fief to the conjunction signified by Kat or
re : V. Pind. Pyth. iv, 443. On the contrary, in repetitions of the
same thin^; as, a^nifjwi' fikv ras bia â– )^y\wv, it^HipHav bkras bi cuppo-
bicrifov, acpaiftujy be ras bi ItKponfxaTMV, &c. (Epicur. ap. Athen. Deipn.
vii. p. 280.) Katand re are never joined : the reading in Aristoph. Pac.
162. seems to be faulty.
IX. (XI.) Mev bi) marks the conclusion of a subject or topic : koX
ravra fiev bi) ravra, so much for this: Plato. reXos fiev b>) tciovtov
KareXajiev tov 'AKe^avbpov, such then was the end, &c. Herodian
vi. sub fin. But it generally indicates a transition, be corresponding
to it in the apodosis or succeeding member; as, ol fjev bi) liWoi
eyeKwv ewl rij bvpv(popi(f rrjs eiriaTuXi'/s' 6 be Kvpos eiTrer, &c. Xeu.
Cyrop. ii, 2, 10. See also § 13. And in the same manner fxei' — be,
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 10. The same particles indicate the commence-
ment of a topic or subject; but always with reference to something
premised or prefatory : itaTpos fiev bi) Xeyerai 6 Kvpos yeveadtn Kn/j-
/3w(T0j/, welt then, &c. Xen. Trept fxev b)) tQv Ibiuv oaa Xoibopov-
fieroi jSeftXaffcpiifiijKe Trept efiov, Qeajiande, &c. Demostli. pro Cor.
[p. 228. I. 13. ed. R. referring to those preceding words, avayKoiov
elvai vofxiiw — flpayea nepl tovtojv irpiuTOV c*7re7r.] So ergo, Hor.
[Epod. ii, 9.] They also serve to connect different parts of narration :
eneru^av rrj 0^^/; tus 'iXas tQv 'imrwf. ■^(^poroy ftev b)) — Ijav^iuv y'lyor :
Arr. Exp. Al. i. p. 31.
X. (XII.) Mev Toi is significant of assent, affirmation, asseveration :
>'/ Kal e^t ovf, e(pr) »/ yvv)), beyrret ravra iroie'iv ; beifuei [lev toi, ^<{»]f
eyw, et'bot' ^leveiv : Xen. v. Plat. Phjed. p. t)3. a. c. p. 94. a.
de Rep. p. 374. de Legg. p. 665. b. 66Q. a.'' biKuiov p,evToi av, e'i tI
fioi TowvTov iifj.apTrjTat, riji «PX''* ^^ dfia Kctl rijs \pv^i'is aTroareprfdrivui :
Dion. Hal. iv. p. 239. •• 17-
XI. (XIII.) Sometimes j^ev rot is adversative: Servius, after asking
' 'E-yci; ; (TV fifuroi: Aristopli. Eq. IGS. proof of a different sense : ovros, (re Af-yai
ay, you, I suij. — ijixels vfias <Tuicrofii.fv. — /xeuroifae jhu T(6i'riK6Ta : Ran. 171. yes,
vfius ; i]fieh ixivioi, mj , tre : Arislopli. you I say : for, as Hermann riKliily ob-
Lvs. 40H. &>ppoves Si Ka\ (ppAutfioi So- serves, /xti/roi is .'^nid on acCDunt of some
Kovffiv livOpwTroi flvai rives ffoi ; Alcib. maiiifestaiion of sur|)rise on (be part
thai fj-tv TOI, Plat. Ale. ii, p. 228. 1. 2. of the dead man. See also Aristoph. Av.
And this aflirmalive sense it bas in tlie 1351. — J. S.
verse of Aristoph. cited by Zeunius in
Rule 9 13.] Mh; M. '203
M'littlit'i- lie liail toti(liicte«l liinistilf tyrannically, says, rls fiii' toi tGiv
TtfH) tfiiiv fniaiXeuit' ovtu} fjerptos iy e^ovffU^ bteriXeae ; wluf, which of the
/ii»<i;s before me, &c. Dion. Hal. iv. p. 239. '• '2-' tovto nevrui e'tbios,
ovbey pdWnv tnitjTofiai oirws bel yewpyeJy : i/et nevertheless, but not-
withstanding : Xeii. (TV bk wfwXoyFis twv ye vvv ohbkvn, twp
fiivToi e/LtTTpucrdey: but: Plat, ill Ciorg.'' See II. 0, 371. In Eurip.
Plioen. 1)10. /ie»Tot applies to both members ot" tiie sentence ; how-
ever, what you ?iow wish, you ivill presently unwish. In tins sense it
is used in injunctions : /.lefxrtiao /uti'Toi, wsovk ubta^xipov yyf] riv iroruv '.
remember, however, &c. Lucian, Lapitli. t. iii. p. 450. and is some-
times correlative with ^tev : ireidov yutv kul to'is vvp.<)is, ro'ts inro t(ov
lafJiXfwv Kei/jieyois layvpiiTurov jueyTOi. vu^ov ijyov tov t'ten'W)' Tpoirov ;
Isocr. ad Demon, p. ly. ovh' nvros rrayv toi yiyvwaKb) ruv i'lrhpa' —
ovofjiii^ovai i-ievTOt avrov, ws eycofuai, MeXiTov : I'lat. Eutliyphr. Here
l^ev is not expressed. It is joined witli Sfnos, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3,
22. Ov perroi is used in questions which appear to deny soinelhuig,
for the purj)ose of having it more distinctly or positively atfirnied in
the answers : eu bii^aaTTjptois 01 airibiKOt rl bpHiaiv ', ovk aiTiXeyovui
fjevrot', i) -I <p{]rTo/.tey ; Answ. Tvvr avro : Plat. Ph<edr. p. 201. c.
OVK iivQii'be. fxeyroi Trode.y — Xeyerai b Bopens tj/c '[Ipeidvtny apxaaai;
Answ. Xeyerai yap. lb. p. 229. t>. In Aristoph. fievroi in a question
indicates the impatience and anger of the speaker at having forgotten
something : riiep' ibu)' ri fxevTOL irpuiTor yy ; ti Trpwrny ijv ; t'ls I'lv, ly
tj fiar-aiJeda fxeyroi TuXcpira ; Nub. 787-
It is used ironically; scilicet, forsooth : Aristoph. Nub, 133S. /
hare got you taught in truth with a vengeance.
XII. (XIV.) Merroiye is tamen certe, however indeed: e'lq b' ay
Kai aXXos tis "Apj^ar^pos* ov /jet-oi ye AlyvTrrioy to ovi'Ofia : Herodot.
li, 68. (pr)Tt be 6 fivOos Kai ai'dpioTruy riva ^Iv'iny ro apya'iov yereadai
irayv KaXyy, XaXou fteyroi ye nai aruifiuXyy : Eucian, Knc. Muse. 10.
t. iii. p. 97.* See Diod. S. v, J3. But when anotlier word intervenes
between fieyroi and ye, the latter apjiertains to the word immediately
preceding it ; as, ariip ^Traprmr/js, ov nevToi yeveus ye tov (jaaiK-q'iov
ku)v : Herodot. viii, 42.
Fe nevToi has a signification similar to that of yuei' rot ye, certainly
however, Eurip. Ale. 724. (727.) Rhes. 589. Heracl. 593. 6'37.
10l6. Kreli'', ei boKel aoi' bv(7KXews yap ou KTeveli' fxaXXoy ye fxevrnt
To'is efxo'is Treidov Xoyois : hoivever you will certainly do better to be
persuaded by my ivords: Eurip. Hel. d^^.
Meyray has the same significations as fieyrot alone ; for ay belongs
to some verb : biKniujs fieyray inredavov, Demosth. pro Cor. v. Soph.
Aj. 85". and Hoogev. de Partic. p. &97- seq.
XIII. (XV. XVI. XVII, ) Mec ovy is used in transitions, to preserve
<* In this sense it is sometimes correc- Bas. 1. But in the following passage
live also, and qualifies : v\iv Se t^ jxiyiaTa ueVroi ye has a different sense : ri t^v uvv
tHiu ayaOSiv rijjuv yiyverai 5ia /xan'as- dila e'liroi Trphs raxnd tis, ot€ roiaDra iroiSiv 65'
/ueWot Sdtrei SiSo/xeVTjs : Plato in Phsdr. avatcrxwril ; Mnesil. Koiinu fxiv toi 7c
p. 201. 1. 51. ed. I5as. 1. — .T. S. TreTrau/xat : and what is more too, 1 hare
' Kol \4yovffi fifv Tt, ov ixeuroi ye '6<jov not yet done : Aristojili. Tiicsm. 70U.—
otovrai : IMat. de Ro[). i. p. 372. 1. 3. ed. J. S.
204 Ae. [Chap. viii. § viii.
continuity; often in tiie beginning of recitals, and, as fiey hi], with
reference to some preceding words, and with some signification of
conchision from them : ttoWu fiev ovv eywye kXarTOVfiai Kara tovtoi'I
Tov uyibva AlayJivoVf hvo b\ iiibpes 'AOijvaloL Kai fxeyi'iXa : Demosth.
pro Cor. [226, 13. ed. R.] ireipuaojjiai f^ev ovv Cji fAerpioJTara tovto
TTOielv : Id. ib. el /ntv ovv irepl wv ebiioKe fiuvov, Karrjyoptjaev Ala-^^ivTjs,
&c. Id. ib. V. Demostli. Ol. i. [15. 26. ed. Reisk.] After many
prefatory remarks Lucian begins his enumeration of long-lived per-
sons : ^ApyaiOujvtus fuev ovv, lHaiiTrjcTiiov (iaaiXevs, TrevTr'jKovTa Kai kKarov
err] fliuivai Xeyerai: Macrob. [635. b. ed. Salm.] For explication of
something preceding: a-^^^prjuTOV /xev ovv Xeyta, a<f r]s fxijbev arvtTeXelrai
ewi Tijv (j>va-tv, Aristot. or for confirmation, or support of a suppo-
sition or presumption : f.ivr]fjte'iov i.itv uvv cv Mayvrjal^ etjri ttj 'Aaiavrj,
Thuc. i, 138. speaking of 11 person supposed to have died ni
Asia/
XIV. (XVIII. — XXI.) Mei^ oyj'and fxev ovv ye are sometimes, nai/,
yea rather: ol irapct aoi rourwi' ovhev erricrravrai Troie'tv ; Answ. ttcivtu
fj.ev ovv : Xen. See Aristoph. Eccl. 1102. ? elirev avr^, fiaKapia i} koi-
Xia 7/ ^aaraaaca ae, Koi ^xclotoi, ovs eQi{Xo.au%. Avtos be etTre, fierovvye
fiaKupioi ol (iKovovTes tov Xoyov tov deov, &c. Luke xi, 28. and in the
beginning of an interrogative sentence ; 7102/ but: fierovvye, cj uvdpwne,
ai) Tis el, o avruTroKpivufjievos Tip Oep ; Rom. ix, 20. It may be re-
marked, by the by, that in the Ionic dialect fiev u>v and fiev wv are
used for fiiv ovv : tovto fiiv wv to upoi TowvTuv eariv, and rrecpvKe fxev
tov // x'^PI <^^TV oiiTU) : Herodot. ii.'' This u)v often separates prepo-
sitions from the verbs with which they are compounded : ctTr' wv
ebovTO, — t:ar dv €KaXv\pe, — ev wv liraKTwaav : Herodot. ii. V. Sclia;f.
ad Long. p. 417- s.
XV. (XXII.) Ae is enclitic not only when it is employed demon-
stratively, as in obe, ijbe, Tobe, but when it coalesces into one word
with roTos, with Toaos, with ttiXIkos, making Toioabe, T0(j6abe,Ti]\iK()(Tbe,
and also when it performs the office of the preposition eh, or the like,
as in o'lKube, in ayopt/vbe : Ilom. II. a, 54. in ovbe bo/dovbe, Hom. Od.
a. Hes. Scut. Here. 38. and in such words signifying moral tendency,
or the final cause ; as, fit'in <p(i(5ovb' ayopev', Hom. II. e, 252.
XVI. (XXIII.) It is sometimes an adversative particle, but: y
fiev bovXos, oiiK ean (^tX/ct irphs uvtoV t] h' i'lvOpwrros : AristOt. Etll. viii.
>/ juei' 6\ponoir)TiKii ov fUoi boKel re^i'jj elvai, ?/ be larpiio), (underst. boKel
Tey^vr) e'lvai,) Plat. Gorg. And in this use it elegantly concludes a
sentence : eyw col epw uniarov fier, » >/ tovs deovs, aX/jGts be : Plat.
Tlieag. p. 130. tov aocfyov fi)) ehui /dtv anaQi), [leTpioiradii be : Diog.
/ Thucydides is speaking of Tliemisto- Cleon. ano/xv^d^fvos , Si Afj^u*, ^nov irphs
cles ; nothing is said about the place of his t^ Kf<pu\riV aTroif/o). I sic. e/xoD fiiv ohv,
death. The words immediately preceding iyLOv \j.\v olv. Aristoph. Kq. 911. — J. S.
are, Xiyovai Se rifes ko.\ tKuvmov (papfxaKCfi '' Add ye /xiv, however, however in-
d.iroBavt7v avrhv, aouuarou vofxiaapra tlfai deed : aCrai 5' TlKiavov Kai TtjBvos i^tye-
iiriT(\((Tut 0a(Ti\(:'i, & viTi(TXfTo. — J. S. vovTo irpfir^vTaTai Kovpar truWal yt jxev
« J^uelp. M rl yap fi iKuBfv ijyey ; elal ical uWat : Hesiod, Tiieog. 3G3. See
Pistil. (V a(co\oi'floi'rjs f/xoi. Euelp. 'Iva niv Ilcsiod, Scut. Here. 260. 171.— 'J. S.
ovv K/\ooi/u( jxiyaKa. Aristoph, Av. 311.
Rule U— 19.] Ae. 20.)
L. V. and is put after ov finyop, witli oWa Kai following it, when
il re(|uires some preceding words to be understood : as, ruKWTTjv e^et
<f>vaiv 7/ Ti'X'?' tticrre 5 hchuKCV iKpeXeadai, kcu rrtj^ews jraXi*' bovfui ttoX-
XairXi'iata' audts ^e acpeXecrOai fi bebuKev ov juovov be, aXXa i:at tu npoij-
7T(tp-)^ovTa : find not only iv/iat she has given, but also what one
possessed btf ore : Ceb. Tab. [p. 41. I. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.]
See Rom. v, 3.
XVII, (XXIV.) Ae is sometimes equivalent to yap. Not that be
is properly put for yap, any more than autem is for enim in Latin:
but when any thing, in rendering a reason, is so advanced, as to
constitute a part of the subject spoken of, just as in any recital upon
the accession of an additional predicate, be and autem may have
place, because on this very account, tiiat something new is added,
they indicate a sort of opposition : tov 5' ov nep e^et Bpaaos, lis kev
'ibrjrai, eyyvs eu)V j^aXenos be Aios neyaXoio Kepnvfus :' Horn. II, £,
4l6\ speaking of a tree struck by a thunderbolt : rovr' olv beT npoa-
e'lfOL' TCI b' iiXXa i-TTop^et : Demostli, 01. iii. p. 12. 1. 20. [32,20.
ed. R.]
XVIII, (XXV. XXVI.) When a protasis is unusually long, be is
sometimes added emphatically in the apodosis, to render it more
distinct from the protasis : o'l b' av bo^wrrip ai'iarajs e^en', — rov-ovs be
f] 7rpoa)'iKov(7a fiolpa p/jrret els rov li^upTapov '. Plat. Phsedr. p. 113. 1. 44.
[45.40, ed. Bas. 1.] and hi the following sentence there is another
example. V. Plat, de Leg. p. 898. Ae is repeated after a long
parenthesis, Soph. El. 783. where Brunck ought not to have ex-
punged it. On be supposed to be put for S*), v. interpp. ad Greg.
Cor. de Dial. Att. s, 34. p, 78. ed, Schasf.
XIX, (XXVII,) The epic writers join rat ^e without the interposi-
tion of any other word, (see Hermann, diss, de aetate Orph. Arg.
p, 768.) but other writers insert some word between : el purwp early,
o'l'ovs ertovs eyw kuI vfiels be vpdre : and you indeed: Demosth.
biKuiop yap uvto'is, icai trpeirov be a/j.a, ti)v tiju))}' raiirrjv bibocrdai :
Thuc.-' See iEschin, Epist. v. [p. 67 1. 1. ult. ed. Reisk.] Arr.
de Exp. Al. iii. 2. JE\. V. H, ix, g. in fin. John xv, 27. Acts
Ap. iii, 24. V, 32. The assertion of Porson, Orest. 6l4. that cat
and be never occur in the same member of a sentence in the trage-
dians, is controverted on good grounds by Schaef. ad Long. p. 350.
See iEschyl. Prom. 972. Eum. 65.
At often occasions an anacoluthon by being added in an apodosis :
el ovv eyu) fi)) yiyvwaKio, — vfiels be bibci^are /te : Xen. H. Gr, iv, 4, 1,
and especially after particles of time, as ore, eTret, ews [see Chap, vii.
§ vi. R. 4.] after Cj(nrep, Soph, El. 27. A more unusual anacoluthon
is in iEschyl. S. c. Th. 731,
* 'O y' 'ATr6\\(A>u, tarpSi y' iiv, Ida-doa- (he whole army, araKTots (r(pifftv emire-
/xiadofpopu 5 4 : for he receives pay : Aris- a^laOai, Id, ih. i, 8, 2, irapexn- Se— koI
to])h. Av. 684. — J. S. Toiiv Qvofxivdiv airb t^s Upiis vofxris \dxos,
J Kol arpaTnyhv 8e avrhv aTre'Seife, k a\ ruv Q-qpivop-iVuv 5e: Id. ib. v, 3, 10.
&c, Xen, Anab. i, 1, 1. iSoKow ol — J. S.
"EWrivis, Hal -nivnz 5«, and indeed all,
20G "On. [Chap. viii. § is.
It is employed as a connective particle even when disconrse has
been interrupted by the words of a second person ; as in iEschyl.
Pers. 480. Eurip. Or. 383. ed. Porson. It is used eniphalicidly
in answers, and with something of an adversative signification: eyw
be ye ^e'xoyuat, Xen. Hist. Gr. iv, 1, IS. See E,rf. in ed. min.
Soph. CEd. 11. 480. And also in questions ; as, cfn-e fiot, w Kp/rwv,
Kvyas be rpefeis, Ira, &c. Xen. Memor. ii, 9, 2. Iliad n, 540.
^,481. and even when a word has preceded which might seem to
preclude any necessity for usinp; ^e : urap ffjuaov not tovt avaoTpei^as
TvaXiv, TToaov be TrXfidos yv yeuiv 'E\\T]vibioy; iEschyl. Pers. 353. v.
Soph. CEd. C. 1132.
It is employed. also in expressing indignation: rui' be (yaaKaror I
TOP be oXeSfiopl tvvtov be vftpiceiv ', aiaTrveli' be ; Demosth. in Mid.
p. 582. [I. 1. cd. R.] So vero. See Liv. xxvi, c. 18. 21. Ter. Eun.
V, 3. V. II. u, 540. <i>, 481.
Sometimes, where be might perhaps be expected, yap is rightly
used ; that is, when some thing, instead of being opposed to another,
(in which case be would be used,) is only added to confirm that other-
See iEschyl. Ag. 767.
The interrogative particle Sat (which Hoogeveen supposes to be
compounded of be and av) — 1. is used in expressions of surprise or
wonder: ti bai ; crv riXeyeis ; Aristoph. Ran. 1454. cf. Nub. 1273.
Av. 225. Ran. 558. — 2. tI bai; is what else then? Chrcm. alrovaiv
ovK upyvpioy 01 \pr}aToi. Car. tI bai ', Chrem. ^ey 'itrwoy uyaQov, o be
Kvvas tirjpevTiKus : Aristoph. Pint. 156'. See Aristoph. Pint. t)05. Av.
1451.1640. Nub. 491. Vesp. 1212. Ach. 764. The tragedians
also use bai in the same manner, although according to Porson,
Med. 1008. they refrain from using it at all. It appears to be the
right reading in Eurip. Iph. A. 1444. Cycl. 449. Ilel. 1262; El. 244.
978. But b)) is to be substituted in Iph. A. 1448. El. 1 1 10. iEschyl.
Choeph. 900. Xen. Q£c. vii, 17- — ^- '"' bai; is quid porro? [It
must be rendered variously in English, according to circumstances,
and, but, well, &c.] In Aristoph. Av. the Epops, after inquiring about
the wishes of one person, proceeds to ask a second, r< ba\ av ; and
what do you wish for? 136. So ri bai ah ^jj$ ; and you, what do
you say? 1615. I676. \nrupuv to -^^prina tijs iroXeoJs, ris bui Oeds
7ro\(oi))(os earai; but what god? &c. ib. 826. In this sense ti bat
bi) ; wdl, what next, what further? Plat. Crit. p. 49. c. Gorg.
p. 474. c. Sophist, p. 234, c. 240. c. Cratyl. p. 406. c.
SECTION IX. — On the conjunctions ort and roivvv.
Rule I. "Oti, that, (formed from o and t\,) is used with a finite
verb and its nominative case, where the Latin writers commonly
employ an accusative and an infinitive mood :* elTrei', 6Vt (jovXeTui :
* Iti barbarous Lrttin <yiu'rt is used in the vulg. lianslation of St. Matth. ilico vobis,
same inauucr as (JTi iu Greek. Tlius iu the ^fud omnis, qui jra»citur fratri euo, reus
Rule 1—3.] "On. 207
Xen. II. Gr. vi. airnyyelXare T(p 'lybojy fiaaiXe'i Tahe, 5ri (puj-tey
/;/i€7s, &c. Xeii. Cyrop. ii. biayyeXeltTTjs ovy, on voael, (pt'ifjiris :
Pliilo Leg. ad Cai. p. 770. See Mattli. xvi, 21. But in oblique re-
cital, when sometliing past is spoken of, the optative mood is used by
pood writers: ol 5' 'IvSot elaeXOuyres t'Ae^av, uti neijypete a(pds 6 'IvbCJv
fictatXevs, Kat KeXevaeiey Iptarq-v, &C. Xen, Cyrop. ii, 4, 7- Ii"t
sometimes after uti an infinitive mood follows ; st-e Acts Ap. xxvii,
10. Stepli. Byz.de Urb. in Tpejiidovs : Plat. Pliajd. c. 8. There
is sometimes an ellipsis before on in this sense ; o he TruvTwy yeXatr-
TOTUTov, (underst. rovr eort,) on — ret -^eipiaTa rvyxavofiev hin(pvXiiT~
Tovres '. Isocr. Paneg. 151. on b" uXrjOfj Xeyw, XajSe fioi ra ;//»;^/(T^mra,
&c. (underst. t'j'a brjXov »), or the like,) yEschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 233.
[I. 7« ed. Ileisk.] and sometimes after it : Socr. ovKovy «.acaJ virep-
j3uXXov TO abiicely Kanioy ay eir] tov abiKe'icrdai. Pol. bFjXov bi) on.
(underst. to abixely Kakioy av e'iri tov abiKeladai,) Plat. Gorg. p. 475.
1. 38. So de Rep. ii. p. 381. And the import of brjXovon is no other
than briXoy, vtl Tavra ovrws exet. 'ils on are often joined by Xen.
V. H. Gr. vi, p. 604. 60l. Anab. vi. p. 382. Cyrop. v, 3, 30.
II. (IV.) "Oti in this sense is sometimes redundant : o be yiyercu
^ayepvy on bienw^eTO, for o be yiyeTOi (pavepoy, e(Tw5ero : Pseudotle-
mosth. p. 1396, 4. And especially when the words of any one are
recited in direct phraseology, and not in oblique : ovbk yap eJ^e KaXQs
eiirely, on, aX\' e'^^ovcriy 6 belva (cat 6 belya : Demosth. in Leptin. otl
Xeyeis, on irXovaios el/jLi : Rev. iii, 17. [Here, if the second on were
translated, the person said to be rich would be Christ himself, the
speaker of the words oti Xeyeis : whereas the person really intended
is the subject of the verb Xeyeis, i. e. the angel of the church of the
Laodiceans. See Chap. v. § i. R. 16.]
III. (V.) Sometimes the compound biori is used instead of on,
that: bion be ra^eoos v(f avToiis Tron](JoyTai Trjv YiKeXiav, irpotjiayes i/r :
Polyb. i, p. 9- See also p. 4. TroWa Trapabelyfxara Xeynvmr — c'tWa re
Kdl bwn (piXoleyos : Aristot. Pol. viii, 7, l6\ In philosophical writings
on and bion, with the neuter article before each, are sometimes con-
tradistinguished ; 7-0 OTI signifying the being or existence of any
thing, and tu biuTi the cause: ap-^)i yap to utc kuI el tovto (paiyoiro
apKovvTws, ovbey Trpoabei'jaei tov bioTi : Aristot. Eth. i, 4.
"On signifies because: apa to oaiov, oti oaioy ean, (piXe'ircti vtto Tojy
dewy, 7) OTI (piXe'iTui, ocrioy ecTTiv ; Plat. Eutliyphr. c. 12. v. Plat.
Euthyphr. c. 2. Phajdr. p. 237. Apol. c. ?• on — biu tovto, because — ,
therefore : John xv, 19. lu this sense also bioTi is often put for
on : TO (pepofxeyov, biun (peperai, (pepufjieyov eanv, tj bi uXXo rt ; Plat.
eritjudicio, v, 22. audistis quia dictum (Freeb, 14.) calls the celebrated rant of
est, OLulum pro oculo, it dentein pro an ancient father, may after all mean no
dente, v, 38. non legistis quia qui fecit more than, / believe that it is impossihle:
homitieiii, ab initio mnsculiim et fceminam yet there is something very like ibis rant
fecit eos ? xix, 4. This use of quia led in Montaigne: C'est aux Clirestiens une
me to observe in the Supplement to John- occasion de croire, que do rencontrer
son's Dictionary publislied in 1819, that, une chose iucroyable. Ess. 1. 2. C. 12. —
credo quia impossibile est, which Addison J. S.
208 "On. [Chap. VIII.
Eutliyphr. c. 12. "On is sometimes ichi/, as in Horn. II. a, 64. (is k
e'iiroi oTi tocgov e'^ioaarn ^o7ftos 'AttoWwj'.
IV. (III.) "On is used in iiiterrogalion : tj (undcrst. tmiv) on ijfie'ts
ovK t)bvvr)Or]fiet> eKfiaXelv avro ; Mark ix, 28. Sometimes ti follows
on, as on Tt bt) ; Aristopli. on bl] n ; Plato de Rep, i. p. 343. on
Tt ; Luciaii, in Charon, p. 141. "Ort rl is iiolliinj; biitr/ oV«:' it is
always used witliout a verb, as the verb must be supplied from what
<;oes before ; wherefore it never occurs except in replies : Socr.
vd\€ls, iiire^jV, ovk av btba^uifirii' a en. Streps, oni) ti ; \. e. Tt, otd)
OVK av fie btbniaio en; Aristoph. Nub. 780.
V. (VI. II.) "Ort /Ji) is, except : ev eTriaroXa'ts rais 'E\\T}viKa~is ovbev
7]^ on fx>] 'Adrjyai, Aristid. Panath. i, e. properly, ovbev o ti /x*),
nothing which was not. cf. M\. V. H. ii, 10. When from this
original, namely ohbei^ o ti ftij, on fit) came to be commonlv used for
except, then the construction began to be changed : ov yap 7iv i:pvvrj,
oTi fi)) fiia ey avry ttj iikpoTToXet : for there was no fountain except
one, &c. Thuc. iv, 2(). This would properly be, ovbev 7]v o ti /jh)
Kpi]V7] fiia, there was nothing ivhich was not one fountain, there was
nothing, except that there luas one fountain. k(u ovt eirl Qe(i)piav
TTWTTore eK r?/s ttoXcws eU]\Qes, oti ja)) ciTra^ els 'lad/Aov, ovtc liWoae
ovbo,fx6<T€, el fii) noi (TTpaTevnofieios : Plat. Crit. c 14. And in the
same way on with superlatives, &c. may be explained : evbalfxbjy ws
on /uaXtcTTa e. g. was originally and properly said : i. e. &s o ti fjaXiura
evbal/jov eaTi. Afterwards, through negligence, and inattention to the
nature and proper meaning of the particle, oti apicTos, i. e. hyaBos
w$ 6 Tt aptfTToy, came to be said ; on (^eXntrTa, in the best manner
possible; oti rdj^ierra, as speedily as possible; 6no)s — oVt fieyicTTj}
Trpocpams et/j tvv TroXefie'iv : Thuc. i, 12(). orrws eaovToi oti iipitTTOi,
Plat. Euthy|)hr. init. See Plat, de Rep. iv, 420. ypd^wv oti tu^os,
as quickly as possible: Hippocr. Epist. ad Hystan.
"On fxrj Kai is, except that, or nay, nay even: tovs eXey)(ovs be ov
biefvyev, on fir) KUi fidXXou tovtois eavTov inrodels vyvorjaev, nay, he
even, &:c. Greg. Naz. i. contra Jul. p. 479. Also, although, how-
ever : oaov bk els baifiovas (pepoi, bieirTvaafieyy oti pi) kuk tovtujv els
OeofTefteint- wcpeXtjfieda : Gregor. Or. xx.
n\»/i' y' oti Kal is a corrective formula ; except that, only, onii/
that ; WTT efioiye boKe'i tTjs TepTrarbpov fxdXXoy ay fiovaiKfjs eiKaaat,
TrXijp y on Kai napeXyiXvOev : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 305.
Ovbey uXXo on fj)) is, almost, all but : ovbey aXXo oti firj iroXiupKov-
fxevot ev toIs yavaiv, Arr. de Exp. Al. p. 52. 1. 23.
In Greek not classically pure on is put for woTe, see 1 Jo. iv, 17.
John vii, 35. Matth. xiii, 13. And for me, when: John xvi,
25.
VI. (VII.) Toiivy, which is put in the beginning of sentences, but
not without some word preceding, signifies, — 1. thei-e/ore, then: to
' Perhaps in this phrase on is the com- the speaker, being a( a loss how to pro-
mencemcntofan anticipation of the reason cced, breaks off abniptl^, and asks ri ;
expected from the person addressed : but — J. S.
§ X. Rule l.] 'llv. 209
yuev Toirvv iv rrj npealieU^i irpCJTOv — , Dcmostli. pro Cor. — '2. jam,
now : TovTwv TOirvr, o ftti' kart Trpvs ybon)y, tovto) beborai, o be naaiy,
ws fTTos eiV f7i', iyoyXel, Xoittov e/joi : I<l. ib.
V'll. (VIII.) — 3. Fov fi^y our, atque ; and, now: Traira fxev -oiivv
Tft KnTtjyoprj/ueya vj-ioius Ik tovtmv av tis "iboi ovre biicaiws, ovt' t?r'
€t\i](h[as ovbcfxids eiprjfxeya' ftovXofxui be koi koO' ey avTuiv eKaaroy e^e-
rnaai : Dom. ib. p. 815. 1. 8. [230, 18. ed. R.]
VIII. (IX. X.) — 4. It is used in oratorical transitions : twv toiwv
ras iravTiyvpFis /caraorjjffavrwj', biicniujs enatyovfjierioy, &c. Isocr. Paneg.
eireicf) roirvy tiroujaaTO t))v elp}]yqy // ttoX/s, ey-avi)n TraXtr aKexparjde,
&:c. Demostli. pro Cor. See Deni. pro Cor. p. 347. [308, 5. ed. R.]
ib. [243, 2.] ib. [26o, 6.] ib. [262, II.]
iX. (XI.) — 5. JBut, or now: oh loiivy lirairifras ovbafjiov tovto,
Dein. ib. p. 3l6. tpaivofiai Toirvr eyij ■^^dpiros rerv^»;tvujs rore, Id. ib.
X. (XII.) It ushers in a recital or topic of some considerable
length : eyw fiky Tolvvy eypa^u, (jovXevwv airoTrXely tijv Tu\iaTr)y tovs
TTpeafieis : Deraosth. ib.
SECTION X. — On the conjunction ws, and the particles
CONNECTED WITH IT.
Rule I. "lya, ws, l'>Ttw%, ofpa, afin que, in order that, to the end
that, govern a subjunctive mooil in construction with a present
tense: Xeyw, 'iv elbrjs : v. Eurip. Or. 446. Pha?n. 1095. An optative
in construction wilh past tenses: iXe^a, ly' elbeirjs : v. Palaepli. c. 7«
Eurip. Plioen. 1105. Ipli. A. 234. But the subjunctive may be put
even after a past tense, if what is signified by the subjunctive still
continues, as in Horn. Od. y, 76. See Hermann, De Emend. Rat.
Gr. Gramm. ii, 21. p. 212. seq. More negligent writers, ali^o, and his-
torians, who often speak of the past as present, and writers of later
periods, do not always join the optative with past tenses, and the
subjunctive with present. Even ancient and accurate authors join
the optative mood with a present tense, when they indicate the end
to be not that something may bo done or brought about, but tliat it
may be possible to be done or brought about: v. Seidler. ad Eurip.
EI. 59- Further, the indicative of past tenses is joined with these
particles, when it is indicated tliat something would have been, which
is not now, or which is not about to be; and the indicative of the
imperfect is used, v.hen it is signified that the thing would have lasted
or continued : 'ly 7iy TvcpXos re kuI kXviov furjbey, Soph. (Ed. R. 1389.
VTTO T^ pi)'i jxuXiaTa eypTp' avrovs <TT€<peadni, — ir' ws irXe'iaroy ctyeanwy
rijs t'lboyjii : Lncian, Nigr. v. Plat. Symp. c. 10. Demosth. Phil.
i. p. 47. [I. 18. ed. R.] pro Phorm.' p. 958. [1. 29. ed. R.] adv.
Callicl. p. 1273. [I. 9. 15. ed. Rei.,k.] it. p! 1434. 1441. 1444. Lys,
p. 43. [1. 11. ed. R.] and Markl. Id. p. 169. apud Isa;nm p. 274.
317- Rut an aorist, either first or second, is used, when a thing is
signified as not lasting, but done and over: ti [.t ov Xajjijy e^Teiyas
evOi/i, ojs ebei^a fjywore e^uvTuy arOpwnoiaiy eydey I'lV yeyuts : Soph.
Vigor. 2 D
CIO '[Is. [Chap. VIII. § X.
rt-d. R. 1392. V. Lilmn. t. i. p. S4-2, 41. Lys. adv. Simon. )>. 1.1.7.
[1. 13. eti. R.] The case is llie same with regard to the preterpluperlect
as to the imperfect : bvo'iv yUft dr'irepov e)(^pi}y avroi/s, — Iva — a7r/;\Xoy-
/jeOn rovTov tov brifiayu>yov : Dinarch. adv. Demosth. p. 9. [1. 4. ed.
R.] The indicative of the preterperfect cannot be joined witli these
particles, any more llian the indicative of the present, of whicli the
signification is comprehended in the preterperfect. With the future
indicative these particles are joined, in construction both with past
tenses and with tlie present: see Horn. II. f, 314. r], 353. F*lat.
de Rep. iv. p. 420. Revelations xxii, 14. 1 Cor. ix, 18. In this sense
hd is sometimes elegantly supi)ressed : c'tWa ri ^t) Troiiofiev ; ?*/ Trepi
nvTuiv Tovru)i' fiouXei btai.ivOo\(>yu>iJ€y ; Plat. Phied. c. 14. v. Anacr.
Od. xii, 1. xxxii, 24. "Ira and (j(j)(in are by the more recent poets
very frequently put after verbs of commanding : v. Hermann, diss,
de a}t. Orph. Argon, p. 814. It may here be observed that <V«,
besides the signification of" that, in older that, wiiich it bears in the
passages above cited and referred to, has also that of trhere, an<J
whither : ouk iipa updiiis e'xPt Xeyfty, it'it yap bf.os, trda Kai ittbojn' uW
JVa /ii€v albois, eifla Knl beos, &.C. Plato Euthyphr. c. 13. el i/v erepos
Tis TOTTOS ut'OfTiwTepns, iva i^ijv inrayeii' tovs Ik beafJioTrfptov KXtTTTovras
els tKelvov av tovto to Brjpun' nwa-^^dfiiai : Dinarch. adv. Aristogif,
p. 81. See Lysias adv. Panclcon. p. 731. [1. 2. ed. ReisU.] Ijiarl v,
47s. e, 360. K, 127. Arr. Exp. Al. v, 2. Luciiui, adv. Indoct. t. iii.
p. 101. Thuc. iv, 48. and of ore, when: Aristoj)!). Nub. 1235.
John xvi, 2. xii, 23. xiii, 1.
"lya Ti ; why, u'herejore ? is an elliptical expression for 'iva ri
yei'Tirni in construction with a present tense, and h'a ri yevotro with
a past. Sometimes it is used witli a verb following : net ri be rovro
bpuTor ', Aristoph. Pac. 40.9- v. Aristoph. Nub. II94. Malth.
xwii, 46". 1 Cor. X, 29- 'wart -nvra Xeyfta ; Plato Apol. p. 20".
V. Id. in Sym|). p. 205. Sometimes the verb is to be assumed from
what preced»'s : rhs irvpvds Ka-airnixrai /SouXo^int una^aTrc'iuai. Bl.
ii'ttTi; Aristoph. Eccl. 718. In the same sense ws ri is used:
w$ ri fx icTTOpels robe ; Eurip. Phoen. 624. ws ri b)) rvbe ; Id. Or.
il. 'fls and wrrre often require an infinitive mood : {j/uiTs en viot
bJfTTe TOfTovroi' TTpdyjia bieXeirOut, U'C are as yet too yoting to, S^v. Plat,
ill Prot. r/s v'vrws avepatfTOs »/r, ws uiroKreiveiv to KaXdy itcelro /ki-
pui^iov;'" so — as to : Lucian, Dial. Merc, et Aj)oll. See JFA. V. M.
xii, 1. Ijpnbvs el/jLi Kal ^w\6s Ufj^urepots, ws yuoAis rpXeti' €n\ to repfjia :
40 that J, itc. Lucian, 'I'im. c. 20. See JE\. V. H. xii, 35. /ioo-n-
yovfrni inrifWa^fv av twv toiovtidv, w$ fj)) f^iiUvni fii'ire tov 'Ohf.i€tuP,
/ly'ire Ttp' TOV "irnov icpi'jvr])' : that they might not; so as to prevent
their, Ac. Lucian, adv. Indoct. c. 3. [538. d. Salmur.]"
"ftTre, when a negative has preceded, is sometimes so employed as
tn have reference to a verb only which is joined witli the negative,
and not to the negative also : ^iXwv be xpvauy iroXXuKii, bwpovfiexoi',
»" See .\en. Anali. iii, :$, 5. — J. S. hv in Kauhv TTa9i7t> : Xeii. C^Toji. viii. —
" 'E*/ rcj) aa<paK('i jjS-q fffouai, ws /xri^if J. S.
Rule 2, 3.]
Hi.
'211
ohk- elrrehf^aT oiicoi', wfjre rovs Tpovovs bouXous Trnpaorj^fir, â– ^pyj/jurujv
^fK^OeJs vvo : Eurip. Siippl. 875. [obsequiousness <iii(l servility arc
tlie consequence (itidicated by diirre) of accepting money, not of"
rejecting il, uliicli latter is signilied by ovk and eiaebelaro when taken
together.] See also Ipli. T. 1325. And so after a verb including
a negation, as anoTvy^tiveiv : v. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 3f)4. e.
"HfTTE is sometimes joined with verbs to wliicli one would think it
was quite incongruous : and in that case, says Ilerniann, its meaning
may be expressed by adeo or vtl ; as in Soph. Phil. 656. v.
'i'huc. i, 28. viii, 86. and in Eurip. Iph. T. 1379. Hermann
Indds the true and authorised reading to be, (pu(ios t)' jji' ware ^o)
Teylai iroba, and there was fear of even running the sheet under
water.
'fls and ware with an infinitive are joined with a nominative case
when the verb on whicli the particle depends is understood of the
same thing or person as that nominative case : eVi be irpos to fxerpitDv
celrydat Treitaibevfievos ovtws, &me i^avv /jtiicpa KCKTrj/jeros irc'ipv pabius
ey^eiy apKcvt'Tu : Xen. Mem. i, 2, I. If he liad said kiraibevae -is,
KeKTT)iievov must have followed.
In the Attic dialect ws and wore, so that, are joined with an in-
dicative mood : ware K<n Ba^jjci/ias avvuTTijyQr] rrj uvruiv vnvicpiaei,
Gal. ii, 13.
"Hare is sometimes followed by an imperative mood ; when it
signifies therefore : wore Knl av, e'i ri iJbe eWeiTrei, eira fivie : Plat, de
Rep. ii. }). 362. See Epict. Ench. c. 69- Soph. El. 1175. And it
iias the same signification, when followed by an interrogative word :
wffre TTws eKeivovs /.ti) -npus to fteXrioroy Xeyeif uiTtdrai ; Aristid. pro
Qiiat. p. 452. And there is another example in the beginning of the
same pnne."
III. 'ils is elegantly construed with participles in the genitive ; as,
nepl (da'ibos ^?;it(I' o KXeirap^^os ws ahias â– yei'Of.ieviii tov e^~pTjadi}i'cii tu
€v V\ep(je~(',Xei pnniXeia, speaks of Thais as having been the cause, &c.
for, sat/s that Thais was the cause. So, ^//yu?) ris e^fyXflev o»s ijiauiv
avTiKU bi) fxi'iXa uKoXovdiiffopruiv tu tuip viretayTiiijy aTpario, that we
were about to, &c. v. Plat. Crit. c. 14. Pliaid. c. 2. c. 4. c. 24.
Xen, Men), ii, 2, 13. So Cja-ei), Ceb. Tab. c. 12. It is construed
in this manner also in another significatiod, iWdX oi quomodo, how :
en be Trporepnv {uvaftvt]aOr]Te viz.) a»s e')^6vTwv ruiy Trpuypartjy avToy
KUTebd^affde, Isocr. de Bigis p. 68^ >'
It is joined in a similar manner with accusatives also, voiai^wv or
liie like being understood : kul evy^^ero be npoi tovs Oeovs an-\a>s rayadu
" Add, that SxTTe appears to have the
sense of ulpnle in Pulvbius : yfvofifvrjs
Se p.iya.\-r]S f^ovffiat -Kfpl rovro rh p.fpos,
ware Kara r)iv 7]\iKiav a.Kp.aiu)s ex<"''''°^
avrov, Ka\ Kara (pvaiv oiKfiws StaKCi/xfvov,
KaOdivep evytvovs (TKuXaKos (niixovov avrov
(Tuvi^rj yiviadai rrjv nepl ras Kwrjyeaias
uppi]v : as bein^ in the vigur of his age :
K. Peiresc. p. 123. ed. Erii — J. S.
r 'Cs is used for Swais, hoiv, in otlier
construciions : fan yh.p, iar\ ©TjjSai'ous
raiTiivovi iroielv — Ka\ Trdvv ye paov w? 5',
iyw Treipdaopai irphs vpas elire'iv : Deniosth.
pro Megalop. p. 20ti. 1. 9. ed. R. en
roivvv, S> ^LvSpes 'Adrji'a'ioi, ryjv SiolKrjaiu
afaipe?, ri\v d' tepav Kal r^v daiav. u)S Se,
eyw (ppdati) : Deinostli. in 'iiniocral. 730,
2.-).-J.S.
212 'ils. [Chap. viii. § x.
bih('>>'(n, ws Tovs deovs Ki'tWifTTa eJSoros : Xen. Meni. i, 3, Q. v. i, 2,
20. I'Liirip. Phoeii. 14-70. bocr. Nicocl. p. 71- Fiscli. ad Well. p. 387.
seqq. In Soph. CE<\. R. 536". ro/xiiwv or llie like is latent in Ibijy,
and on it ws with the optative depends.
IV. 'Us, u)s ye, ws bi), ihs ovu, ws yovv, sometimes signify for, i. e.
considered as ; or considered with reference or regard to : ?';v be
obbe ubuvaros, ws AuKebat/jiuiius, elirelv : nor was he ineloquent for
(i. e. considered as) a Lacedcemcnian : Thuc. iv. avi]n, ws S») Tore,
for those times, {considered ivith reference to the age he lived in,)
K0fx\^6s TTou Kfu cKTTelos. AikI Tovpyop e£,i]Kpift(i)fj€i> ws ye, or ws bij, kctr'
ni'dpioTToy : he finished the ivork ivith great exactness for a man, the
limited capacity at)d faculties of hiinian beings being considered.
'Hi signifies when, whilst: ws eyewpyoufiev cf rrj No£w> edijrevev
cKe'i irnp yyjuic : Plat. Euthyplir. c. 4. v. Luke xii, 58. John ii,
23. When, as soon as : ws b" ovk- f;6leXo»', — )(«paK^w/uf«ra fiaXofievos
irpbs rij vuXet, kuI fj)iyjiivi)j.iaT eTTiariinai, erroKiopKei : Deniostll. pro
Cor. [254, 25. ed. R.] mois comme ils ne le voulurent pas, &c. In
this sense it is elegantly re[)eated, lo express I he celtrily of an occur-
rence : ws elb', ws fiiv fiaWov ehv j^oXos : OS soon as he saw them,
immediately, dfec. Horn. II. t, 16. ws eib\ ws uveiraXro : II. v, 424.
^ws 'ibot', ws e^hir]v, <?>$ fjioi Trepl Ov/jlus ui(p6r] : Tlieocr. ii, 82. ws 'ibef,
ws e/.tu}'}] : Id. iii, 42. So Virgil, ut vidi, ut perii, ut me mains
abstidit error: [Eel. viii, 41.]
'£ls is often expressive of a wish ; in verse, by itself; as, w Zeu, ws
XaXvfiwy ndu airoXoiro yefos : Callim. Jupiter, lit Clialyhon omne
genvspcreat: Catidl. v. Soph. El. 126.'' But in prose etOe ye. is
often joined with it, or ye alone, some other word intervening: ws
etSe ye Kai e^efieffai bviaroi' r)v, Liician. ws et/j ye tovtov yfi'n' eivni,
<fec. Syncsius. So the French que: que plut a Dieu ! que fusses-tu
bien loin d'ici !
It is often used also in exclamations, and has an augmentative
force : ws avrUu fxnXa ras yvaOovs uXyyaere ! Aristoph. Fac. 236.
Tfivff ws eyavwdnyl Id. Ach. 7. ws ae /inKctpi^o^evl Id. Vesp. 126'6'.
(jiev, (pev, (iporols epwres ws kukov (ueya ! Eurip. Med. 330.
V. (V. VI.) 'D,fTei, wawepel, w7oie«, wanepatel, (but oftencr ws au el
and wTirep ar el,) signify as if: ws, wmrep, ws av, watzep ar, ws i'tpa,
wairep apa, ws uyutAe/, uxrireft a/jeXet, ws av briXab)), ws av bt'i-uv, (of
bi'iTTOvOei') ws ye, ws bt), ws ovv, watrep ovv, ws ovv bt), and wairep ovv bt),
signify as if forsooth, ironically.
VI. (,V1I.) 'lis has sometimes the signification of or<, //ifl/ : irpwrov
fikv oil', ws ovK eyofii^ey, ovs t] ndXis vofiiiei Oeovs, tto/w ttut' t^pljaavTO
TeK^iriftlu) ; Xen. Mem. i.
VII. (VIII.) Like on, it is also put before superlative adverbs
and nouns in a similar sense : aW e^iff ws Ta-^iaTa, as quickly as
possible: Eurip. Med. 322. i. e. '^id)i o'l'irws ws buvarov raj^cirra elievai.
V. 'riuic, vii, 60. Fuller in Xen. : i/ice irpus Toy Kvpuy ws ebvviiTO
'I 'I'heocr. iii. uif. is referred to by Ilcr- inffwv, ical rol \vkoi w5f /i eSovrr ws H(\i
inann, a verse commonly interpretejd as roi yAuKi/ rovro Kara fip6x&oio ytvono.
not expressing any wisli ; KticreDjuai Se — J. S.
Rule 4— lu.] 'fly. -213
Tuyiffra, Cvrop. ill. :iu(l, I'us v'luv re /ti'iXitTTa caXor re Kui uyaOoi', lb.
w$, or oaov, r«x"s> »f*''* all possible speed. But ou rax«<Tra is some-
limes, as soon as ever; ut primiim : ws hk v^qir) rdxiTTa c-yeyorce,
Herodot. i, 11. pr. So i, 6"5. SO. Ml. 213. And in llie same sense
Pol^-bius says ws Ouiraor : Kap-^ttbuvioi yixp ihs Outtov KareaTi'iuayTO to.
Kitra T>)y Ailiur}t', evdeojs 'AiuIXkup tlmreareiXav : ii, sul) init.
Sometimes ws and mi are conjoined before superlatives, when oi/rws
may be understood : Ovjuoeibii juev bt) ^pi) Trrhra avbpa eirai, irpijov bt
fais on f^aXttrra, ut quam maxime, {in the same degree as what is most
so,] Plato. euTii' ovTos (o(/ru;s,*Reiz.) a(^f\))s fiev ws on finXicrra, Her-
niogen. speakiuf; of Xenophon. ws on KuXXiant l^eiKCKravTes, JÂ¥A.
V. H. ii, 13. V. li.liodor. x, 28.
VIII. (IX.) 'Hi is put before some adverbs in the positive degree ;
yi (nnibeias) rwv /nev ihs aXrjHuiS rerv^rjicoTWi' ouS' av els eivoi Trepl
avTOV [auroi/, 270, 1. ed. H.] toiovtov ovbev, Demostil. pro Cor.
<Sv KaTotiBovfihwv fieyitJTOis ujayu^iCTjSfjr/yrws uttj/px^*' e(»cit, ws ereptjs
bi: avfifiuiTwy, ro yovi' evboKifie'iy Trepiearti' : Id. ib. bt' a bt) ku\ fioy^
rf] noXei ws icvpitos av ns (pair) (ru/jjirivai, Aristid. in Panalb. ws
t:aXu)S iifiuit' ItJTparrjyuKaTe Knl Trporepor, ua kui vvy Xaftovres eXiribas
ui;oXovdu)ix€v vfjly: ironical!)'; Dionys. Hal. xi, p. 723. 'fls (lX7j0e-T-
Tepujs also is found.
IX. (X.) It is elegantly put after adverbs in the positive degree
expressive of what surpasses, of what excels or exceeds in any way,
a.s, V7rep(pvios iJ-ev ovy, eft], cjs (oovXai-iai: Plat. Plia^dr. dav ixcktiius
u)S adXios y^yoi'ev, enei ret fieyiara ijbkrjae : Id. in Gorg. So, a/xr)-
Xai'iDs ws crfobpa ewiOvfiw. 'P.i (or oaof) may be put in the same
manner after the adjectives dav/jaaioy, davf^cKTroy, ufii]-)(,aroy. 'ils
follows even substantives in the same nianner, eari being expressed
or understood before it : yeXo)s ead' djs y^pwueda to'ih -payfxaaiv,
Demosth. Phil, i, p. 17. 1. 32. for yeXo'wy ws, or yeXoiias ws yj). &c.
Thus when ws foUows a substantive or adjective, Ian is to be under-
stood : duvpd, or Oavfxaarot', (tcrro) ws '^pdrai ro'is iTrirois: when an
adverb, e^et : Oav/xnalws (e'xet) ws XP"'"'"' ^^' ^"^ when, as in R. 8.
ws precedes the adverb, the ellipsis is to be supplied in some other
manner: ei/pZ/o-et tous ws d\>jflws bucatTTas, Plat. Apol. p. 41. i. e. ovrws
biKnarcis oyras, ws dXrjOws ovofAa^oi civ ns, or the like.
X. (XL XII. XIII.) 'Us, in the same manner as on, is sometimes
prefixed to the words of a i)erson recited in direct phraseology, just
as they were spoken, and not in oblique: rives olv ^laav ol rrapd. rovrov
Xoyot Tore prjdeiTes ; why, w$ ou be'i dopv(3elfjdai rw TrapeXriXvdevnt
'PtXtTTTrov e'iau) YlvXiLy earai yap iiTrard' ciVa (iovXead' v/jels : Demosth.
pro Cor. where ov be't d. &c. are tiie very words of iEschines : other-
wise the construction might iiave been ws ovk av beat, or a»s ovk ebei.
In Demosth. 01. iii. [38, 19. ed. R.] where w$ is thus used, there
is a transposition, the order, as to signification, being ovk eany ottov
eyio ftTTCi', ws be7 vefieiy to'is fir]bey iroiovai to. tCov iroirjaovTujv.
The following transpositions in sentences where ws signifies quem-
admodum, as, may iiere be noticed : e^f/ye be noXXdicis tows llvpntcou-
(jIovs <1)s eiri (irpaTeicii' kat cpvTeiuv, for t^t/ye r. 2. eni (pvreiav, los km
214 Us. [Chap. viii. § x.
arpareinj' : Pint., in Apoplitli. So wtnrfp : ayovai yap nywyn Trerrn-
errfpiKiiv wmrep icnt rnls Wouirnis, Kctl rw'Iipwrt, for 7W ' Epwri wmrep Kut
Tals Mourrats : Id. 'Epwrti:. iliit. u/i larpu, TrapnbebiJKeydt aeavTuv rJ
liTKjTHTi] : to the trainer, as to a pli)/sician : Epict. Eiicli. c. 35. So
olorei, IÂ¥A. V. H. i, 1. Ami ws in tliis sense goes before ovtws, (see
Chap. II. R. 13.) V. 1 Tiiess. v, 2.
XI. (XIV.) 'fls in the st^nse of guod, that, after words sijsnifyirii;
j)roof ot evidence, as TeKfjt'iptoy, arme'iov, cnrobetlis, is joined with an
indicative mood : as, anobei^iv be TrapearTjfTa/.irjr, ws 6 be'iva — ft/co-
XntTTos u)u bieriXei : and I adduced as a proof of it, that such an
one, &c.
XII. (XV.) In the sense of quemadmodum or quantum, as, or as
far as, it is oftener joined Avith an iiitinitive ; as, ws (or San, or i'xrov)
eiKanui, reKfiaipeaQdi, vTroXnjlelv : as far as any one may conjecture,
&c. ws e/iocye boKfAv, as 1 think: u)s etTreTi', SO to speak : '^ ws e/ue
ev fiejuinjadai ra 6 ep/jrjievs /.iol €(j>r], as far as I ivell remember, &c.
Herodot. Eut. c. 87. See Chap. v. § iii. 11. 6". Leopard, viii, 21.
Plat. Socr. A p. pr.
XIII. (XVI.) 'fts is very often put for els or irpoi before accusa-
tives of persons or animate things, hut very seldom before accusatives
of inanimate things. (See Tiiom. M. p. 933. and interpp. Brunck in
ind. Aristoph. v, ws.) tov ofioiov ciyei Beds ws tov vi-ivlny, Hom. Od. p,
218. ?/ yvyy) airrjei Kadevbi'itrovTa ws to Traibioy, Lys. adv. Eratostli.
J). 13. ed. Reisk. iXOuvTes o'lKabe ws e/xe, ib. p. 27- I^ee Polyb. iv, .51.
Exc. Peir. p. IQg. Ileliodor. ix, 5. 11. 24. Ilerodian i, 11. 8.
Lysias adv. Simon, p. 143. [I. 3. ed. R.] Dcmosth. adv. Aph. i.
p. 822. [1. 5. ed. R.] Xen. Mem. ii, 7, 2. rlX0' ws AtoTocpaytov arbpiov
TTieipav upovpnv, Hom. Od. i//, 311. [v. II. X, 720.] KXifiaKa<; ws to
(ppovpioy fiyoyres, Xen. Cyrop. v, 3, 13. oiktr' — eXOely w$ ovbef tG)V
iepwy: Demosth. in Neaer. 1374, 1. [ed. R.] v. Heliodor. ix, 13. Xen.
Mem. ii, J, 2. [v. Ernest, ad 1.]
In this sense it is joined with prepositions: uTreTrXeor — ws es ros
'A0//ras, Tliucyd. iv. p. l60. avaKevu^eadm ws els (rrpaTeiay, Xen.
Ages, i, 14. uvi'iyovTO ws eirX vuvixu^iq., Tliiic. i. p. 12. ed. Camer.
ilTotfuu$ero ws ewi rus licpas. Id. iv. p. 100. v. v, c. 3. vi, p. 1()1.
Trpoijye TraXti' ws eiri Kupiydoy, Polyb. iv, 24. TvpnnTfyev ws eir\ Aa-
pe~iov, Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, c. (). v. i. p. 15. 1. 13. Zosim. i, G, 7-
Xen. OEc. i, 6. Acts Ap. xvii, 14. utto hk rrjs Tnpe^/3o\»7s ws irpds
ras â– )^^e.X('oyas ros ^wrrrp/^as ireTrotqvTo trvptyyes Karaareyoi, Polyb. ix,
34. e<pvyoy ws Trpos Tyy noXty, Id. iii, ip. And also with other
words: bioirep ouc a>s ews tov [jeaov vofiHovTas biareiyeiy ras «p^o$,
Polyb. V, 32.
'Hi sometimes signifies tTret, xm yap, for: Socr. jjovXei oZy, ev rw
Avaiov Xoyw Ibely ri (oy 0o^ci' a-e^voy re kfi! eVre^j^roJ' elyaf, Pha;dr.
VdPTtjv ye TTOv fiuXiarn' th s ruy ye \pi\ois ttws Xeyofiey, ovic e'^^nyres
iKuyu irapabeiyfxaTa : Plat. Phecdr. p. 262. v. Eurip. Plioen. 1267-
*â– Mere another phrase may be noticed ; Tava ; Her. icaKwu yvvaiKMV efo-oSoj /a'
Or, Triir ovv tAS", iis diroi Tts,i^r]n6.p- OLirwKfrjav : Eurip. Androin.930. — .t.S.
Rule ii — is.] 'fts. 215
Or. 1103. Sopli. El. 370. Usually in llie beginning of sentences or
nien)bers: ws vvv ye vvbev aov yevoiT ay evreXearepov, $. (2\n\s. in
c. vi. ep. ad Rom.
XIV. (XVII.) 'ils is put before eKaaros : 01 h' uZv ws eKaaroi
"MiWrives, Kara TrdAetv re oaoi uXX>'/\wv l^vvieaav, Kai ^u/urra^res uorepoy
kXriOiyres, [ovbev npo Tb)V Ipoikuif ci aadeietav Kai u/jillnv uWyXtvy
u6p6oi eirpa^av.] Tliuc. i. p. 3. [c 3. p. 7- e«l. Bekk.] i. e. pj'o se
guisque, ws iKaaroi Tvyyjtvcvai or erv^ov. Kiu ol juvy tTrXatniOrjaay ils
tkarjToi, Tliuc. V, 4. V. Schtef. ad Lamb. B. Ellips. p. 6o2.*
XV. (XVIII.) 'D.S /lei', — ws be are put in different members of
sentences: eXa^ci rQy Ao^wi' TruQev vnepcpdyevres cidpuoi, o)s fxey evfxeye-
Oeis, ws be Trioyes, ws be npodv/jioi tt/jos a<j)(tyrfv : Greg. Naz. Or. de S.
Basil, [as — so — so; or how in each |>lace.]
XVI. (XIX.) 'fls Trpos, ofToy or oaa irpus, with an accusative of a
person or thing, signify zvith rtgard to: ws Trpos e^e, abiufupoy tovto
ye: with rtgard to mi/self ; as far as / am concerned, ri yap kciI
abtkoi'ifjeOa ojs Trpos iifjcis avrovs, dayc'iru) anoXvofjevvi irpos Toy Kuptoj' ;
Clem. Alex. Str. iv.
'fts Trpos sometimes denotes comparison : rvfXus 6 Ayy/cews tKelvos
b)s TTpos €fxe, in coDiparison with me, compared loith me : Lucian. v.
Xen. Cyrop. i, 5, 1 1. With eni'. ra fiey bi) khtu Tijy ^\vKaXr]uai)y, -nuQei
\pr](Tafueyioy, {^IvKaXrjaoiiny viz.) ovbeyos, ws €tt\ fxeyeOei,' (for the size
of the town,) twv kara roy iroXejxoy, i)aaoy dXo<pvpaadat a^/w, tuuwtu
ivyejir}'. Thuc. vii, 30. and without any preposition; fitk-pos ye ws
Tocfovrioy erwy, but little for its age: Atlion. Deipn. xiii, p. 584. So
ut : V, Corn. Nep. in Epam. c. 5. Curt, ix, 1, 24.
XVII. (XX.) 'Us is put before Ik -iLy bvyaru/y, and phrases of the
like import: cTrel bt w$ ev ruiy bvya-Qy eroij-ia j'/r, to the best of their
power, as far as circumstances ivould admit : Thuc. ii. p. 100,
XVIII. (XXI. XXII.) "fls is put for ovtids, so: ebikei yap 6 Trpos
lleXoir(jyyj](Ttuvs noXefius ^:a] ws e/teryQui avrois, even so: Thuc. i. a\Aa
Kai ios ayefii/jiye, but even so, even in those circumstances : Honi. II.
TT, 363. V. II. a, ll6. ws XuKoi apya (pCXova, Cos Tra'iba (juXovaiy
epaarai : SO, in the same manner : Plat. Pha;dr. p. 241. ujs be {and
in the same manner, and thus) kcu 'lovbaiois, bioi-)^dei(Tr]s rrjs rruXatds
ypa<pi]s, 70 veov i:ai evyeyks eycerrp/cerai r»/s e\a/as (^VTuy : Clem. Al.
* The following examples may furtlier ^avro : Id. viii, 104. koI irpSs re raKKu
illustrate this jjlirase. lu the first passage etjipTvaavro ws 'iKacrra, koI irphs tovto :
of Thuc. Weiske * renders ois fKaaroi, ut Id. vii, 05. air4n\ivaav e^ 'EAArja'TrdfTou
sejuncti ab aliis, or, ut non mixti et ws eKaa to i Kara irSXeLS, Id. i, 89. S.y
conjuncti cum aliis. Pleon. Gr. &\\oi aKpoaaQai oi s eKaaros &pyriro, Id. ii,
Te irapiivres iyK\i}fxaTa firuiovvTo uis 21. farpdrevffau kamoiiv fiiv xiAiois
eKaaroi, Kol Meyaprjs : Time, i, ti7. 6ir\lTais, rwi' Si f^vufiaxwu ws e/cdcTTois:
o'i 5e |y/u/xaxo' i,vv(\iyovTO, BotoiToi ^\v Id. i, 11.3. irroAefj-ovu jj-iv koI dWoi,
TTeyTaKiaxi^'Oi SwAlTai Kal TOffovroi \pi\ul 'flS 'EKA2TOI2 HTNEBAINEN, ev Tif
Kal 'nnrfis iriVTa.K6(noi Kol animroi taoi, l.iKiXia, Kol avTol ol 2(«eAtaJTOi, ice.
Kopivdioi Se Siffxi^ioi dirfuTai, oi S' &Woi Id. iii, 90. So ws eKarepot, Time, iii,
iis eKaoTUL, *A(ttffioi 5e navaTpUTia : 74. — J . S.
id. V, o7. rh ixiv apiaTfpuv ( «ix*) ©pa- ' '^^ ^Tri jueye'flet] ^Tot irjAews, t\ wi
iTuWos, d 6e QpaaifiovXos tJj Se^toV- ol trri jueye'flei Trafloux. Scliol, — J. S.
Si &AAo( <rTpaT?j7oi ws tKaoTcii Siexa-
216 THE PREPOSITION. [Chap. ix.
Sir. vi. OwS' ws is not even so: 'AXe^ar^pos t^e ovb' w$ rf/ noXei Tvpucr-
efjnXey, Arr. Exp. Al. i, 7."
"[Is, with eejTi before it, is sometimes of the same import as ttws, in
a certahi manner, in certain respects: etrn fjev ws tov ohovofiov koI
Tov uftyoi'Tos., (Cat irepl vyielns Ibeii'' etrrt b' Sis oh, dXXct tov hiTpov :
Aristot. Polit. i.
Also when ws follows the word to which it relates, it is accented,
as Oeup ws, Hom. Od. r, [bpvoj^^ovs Hjs, Od. r, 57-i.]
"rimrep ri', is a demand of an example: us what for instance i^
a^eXorres tov eptjros ri elbos, ovo/jt'iio/jtey to tov oXov cirtTidevTes opofia,
epuiTa' TCI be I'iXXa ciXXois KaTn-^^pw/jeda oyufiamv. (JJffTrep ri ; ^vb' tyoj.
"ilTTrep roc^e. Olad' on, &c. Plat. Symp. p. "203."
CHAPTER IX.
THE PREPOSITION.
Of prepositions in general, it may be remarked that by poets an<l
Ionic writers they are often separated widely from the cases governed
by them ; as, avrup vtto ^Swv cr^fpSaXeov Koyuj3tie TrobCby uvtcov -e
(cat Ittttw*' : Mom. 11. (j, 405. eaOXuiv /jti' yap i'nr' ladXii fiaOi'irreat,
Theogn. 34. ev yap ere Tr\ vvkt\ Tuvrr} araipeoi^iai, Herodot. Er. c. 69-
See Ter. Andr. iii, 3, 6. Ovid, de Pont, iii, 3, 40'. Heroid. ep. ix, 69.
In Attic writers also yuev, yap, bi), ovv, &:c. are inserted between
prepositions and their cases, as kv ^kv etpjjrrj, &c. Prepositions have
often been erroneously added by transcribers, see Brunck. ad Eiirip.
Plicen. 828. and often interchanged, as Trapa and Ttpu, v. Bergl. ad
Alciphr. 395. A preposition is sometimes repeated, but not by
chance or negligence, nor tautologically, the first being in place of
an adverb, v, Herodot. ii, I76. and Hermann, De Emend. Rat,
Gr. Gr. 'Wv in 11. xp, JO^. for afu, i. e. avw. ec b' vnepas re, kuXovs
Te, TTobas T Ivebrjaev iv ovrrj : Honi. Od. e, 200. *Ev be is in place uf
an adverb ; to exj)lain which the poet adds, according to his custom,
ei' our/]. In some phrases and passages, hov\ever, one or other of the
prepositions is red 11 .id ant, as, airo ftoijs ei€i;er, tivos ^upir ei€(c«, af.i^i
a ovveKa. v. Diss, de ellips. et pleonasm, in Museo Antiq. Stud, i, I.
p. 202. So a preposition is sometimes redundant, when a substantive
performs the office of another proposition: 'Ereo(cXeoi;s Oaj^ovros a/u^'
eiTTaaTOftovs ttvXus abfXcpov xetp\ YloXweiKovs vtto, Eurip. Sup|>l. 401.
On the other hand one preposition sometimes serves for two nouns,
" Kvpos d(, dpu)i'Tovs"E\\r]fas viKoivras dol. mat. 1011, 22. ed. R. — J. S.
rb Kaff avTuiis, — oi/5' ws (^VX^V SitliKftv: " Add tlic i'(dlowiiig plirnse : OaTTOV, ^
Xen, Aiiid), i, 8, I.'). V. iii, 2, 14. oii His t»s &c <£trn, more quickly than one
fi^f oA\' ft (cal ;u7)5e»' tovtoiv uwTJpx*'' could have tlton^Ut it pnssihle, /xeTtupuvs
7IIMU, ouS" 01s x"^*"'"'' ^f^Ti 71'aJJ'ai irfpl f^iK6i.u(Xau ras and^as, \rn. i\ua\>. i,5, 8.
avTwv — : Dcmostli. adv. S|)ud. 1032, I'J. o'i t( aKovTiaral ^paxvTfpaiiKdfri^ovt] ws
ed. R. els rijv oIkIuv oiiS' iis eiVStfatrflut i^tKvfiaOai rwv atpfvdoyijrwv, Id. \\). iii, 3,
Tuvrous ii^luaiv, Deiuobtb. adv. 15a-ot. de (>. — J. S.
§ i. Rule I, 2.] 'A/if. 217
being joined with llic last onlj-, aUIioii(rh equally applicable to the
first : v'l be reot fAoXnt'ii' re Kat Is â– )(0p6v ei-rvveaOe, Callini. h. A poll. 8.
V. Rulitik. in epist. crit. p. 130. Valck. ad Mosch. ii, 138. ad Calliin.
p. 17s. seq. Hor. Carm. iii, 25. 2. Lastly, one individual preposi-
tion iiomotinies appertains to two different cases: npos ^w re Kal rov
Tafuibos, Horodot. iv, 122. See Wessel.
SECTION I. — On the prepositions a/uf , am, (ivev, avri, ano.
Rule I. — 'Aji(p\, (in epic poetry afufis) in the poets and Ionic
writers signifies, with a {,'euitive, about, by, and on account of;
with a dative, about, oji account of, and around:'" but a/<^ls with a
genitive is oftener tvithout. apart from, beyond, out of. [See II.
In other prose writers it is usually joined with an accusative ;
eyeiv cifjKpi Tt, or Tifa, 10 be engaged about, or employed in, a thing ;
to be engaged for, or with a person : oaoi u/xipl (j)bi)v e^ow^t, Arr.
de Exp. Al. c. II. V [xev Kva^apris apfl be'nrroy cl^er, ivas at supper:
Xen. Cyrop. V. Elvai ufxfpi n has the same meaning: ufKpl TaiiTct
^arar, Dionys. Hal. ix. p. 642. 1. 14. Kara vofiovs — , tovs ufi(pi Qvaiav
if" 'EWf/vajt- (caraoraQevras, about, or concerning, sacrifice: Id, vii.
p. 479- init.
II. Willi the same case it signifies about, i. e. nearly : aTre\ij)v ti'is
'Pwfjijs ufjipt TOVS rpiaKotTa ffrabiovs, Dion. Hal. i, p. 73. 1. 5. dn-e-
Guroy ufitpl TOVS fxvpiovs t^ai Tpity^iKiovs, Id. v. p. 310. 1. 18. and with
/L»a\«(Tra : twv be Tro\tTii>v af.t(pl tovs ij^iaeis /laXiaTct bieipOuprjaap, Id.
X, p. 677- !• 4. eh'ai u/jcpl bha err}, to b£ about ten years old.
Before enumerating the significations of d/j^l in composition, it
may be remarked generally, — 1. that words do not always receive
any additional or difierent sense by being compounded with prepo-
sitions : hence the con)pounded and the simple have been frecjucntly
interchanged by ignorant copyists. See Brunck, ind. ad Aristopli. in
V, prcepositiones. Bos, ad Thorn. M. p. 683. Brunck, ad Aristoph.
Lys. 408. 1010. 1220. — 2. that the same preposition in tlie same
compound word may have a different import in different passages :
avuyeiv e. g. may signify sometimes to lead back, sometimes to lead
upwards ; ave-^eiv sonietimes to hold back or restrain, sometimes to
raise. Sec. 'A/i^J then in composition signifies — 1. encompassing,
environing, surrounding, enclosing, circuition ; as in unftfiuWeiy,
u^ijiiTiQevai, afi<}>nrepiarpe(p€adai. — 2. on both sides or parts ; as in
aiu(popevs, a vessel with two handles; afKplfiws, i\j.L(ptbeEins, d/i^uiSorra
<£wa. — 3. the same figcn'atively, as in apfiXoyos, ufj(piftoXos, afi^iipia-
Tos. — 4. It intends, amplifies, or augments the signification of words
with which it is compounded ; as in ufKpiTrrevfia, an extreme difficulty
" See Aristopli. JVub. 595. ed. Br. 5SC. respect lo, Ilesiod. Theog. 47G.
ed, I3ekk. ajii</)l, concerning, as to, with
Figer. 2 e
218 'Ava. [Chap. IX. §i.
of breathing ; aiitpiPpmi) aan\s, a shield which covers the tvhole
ptrson; aftfafrtrrOnt, to feel or handle very exactly and minutely.
Ilk "Aia (ai' ill poetry before consonants) witli a dative is 07i or
with: XP^^^V "'« adiTTTpij, Horn. li. a, 15. Both in poetry and
prose it much oftener governs an accusative, with whicli case it has
all the following uses : (Via Ttaanv Tjfjeprjr, every day, Herodot. ii, 130.
aia nuira erea, in all years, every year: Id. viii, 65. Trdo-av av'
opfpav, through the whole night : Eurip. lUics. 42. ava t))i' "FAXaba,
through Greece ; eXuaas tov 'lirirov ar'u KpuTos, having put his horse
to the utmost speed in his power, having rode with all his might :
Dionys. Hal. ill, p. l67. I. 11. p. 190. 1. 24-. and xi. p. 707. I. 33.
uta KpuTos voXefjeh', iroXtopKeli', tvith the utmost force and might:
Id. xi. p. 703. 1. 38. «)a KpaTVs -))y noXir eXe'iy, by assault, by force,
by storm, sword in hand.
IV. In the sense of ep : ra /jev Xoyin tov Oeov ava arofia ej^ouirt,'
in their mouths, they speak or talk of, &v. Clenu Al. Str. vii. 'Ava
fifpas for Iv fiipei, which see in Chap. ill. § vii, R. 2.
'Ava, info, through: v. Eurip. Ion, 1476. (1455 ) 1515. (1494.)
PliMiiiie epi<rr. 4. Daniaget. epigr. 9.
V. It signifies among: a-jvofionas ui'a Trpwrows, Xiphilin. in Domit.*
Up, against the course of: uno daXdr-ijs ava tov iroTOfjiuv bieKofXiaar,
Dionys. Hal. v.
'Ava xpot'ov is, 171 process of time : ava xpo^'oy vivo Tvpptfvwv a<l>y-
peOiitrriv, Id. i. KaTe(TK7]\l/ev ava j(pfJ>'oj' eh iroXefjiovs, Id. ii. V. He-
rodot. i, 173. V, 27. Eurip. Ion, 848.
VI. 'Ava TOV avrvv Xoyov IS, in the same manner: Clem. Al. Str.
ii. p. 318. 1. 15. 'Ara Xir/ov for Kara Xvyov, (»r bia \6yov, by dis-
course or by argument: ava tov r>/s aXtjdelas Xoyov, Id, in Protrcpt.
p. 9. 1. 31.
VII. It signifies equal division or distribution : Kivrafxwftov koI
lapbov ava oxiyi^iav fiiav, of each one ouncc ; uJaTC *>o« bivpeav ro'ts
r(>)fjni(ns ara nevre aai e'lKom bpn^pas reXevruiv KnrnXivelv, twenty-
five drachmcE to each: Xiphilin. in Angusto. 'tXnfiov ava brivaptov,
they received each a denarius: Matlh. xx, 9- v. Rev. iv, 8. And
with an accusative of a person : tovs fTTpariuirns i'^itvai KeXevei ava
â– nevre, by fives, five and five. It is sometimes added redundantly to
CKanTos in another cvise, and not the accusative : Rev. xxi, 21.''
In composition aia signifies — 1. elevation or raising; as in ara-
KVTrreiv, avujiniveiv, av€\eiv tuh \f7pfi«. — 2. repetition ; as in di'arpe-
3(Cii', avnypudteiv, avariOetrdai, avdbexfadiii, avunXelv. — 3. putting
off, tendency backwards, delaying; as in avnfyc'iXXeiv, armriTr-eiv,
aiievai. — 4. separation; as in avu-)(U'p€~iy, to depart. — 5. It intends
* Sec Honi. II. j3, 250. — J. S. served that in the passage lirrc referred
_!'*Hi' 8t a^iaxx-tis roiv ffiuv <p'thwv tls to, ava Us iKatnos ruv irvXwvwv â– ^c i^
flvai, ((T-p dco vpuirovs Pisistratiis to evoj jiia/)7apiTou, tliere is an elliiisis of tlie
Sol. in in Diog. I.acrt. Sd. p. 19. 1, 31. of case of ava, — eh «. t. tt. ava fva, ^V. ^^c.
I!. Stcplieiis' la^t ediiiun.— J. S. and that Vigiiiis did uot, in npijeaiance,
* The Mess, de Port Royal linve oh- uiidcrsland liie passiigc, — .1. S.
Rules- \2.] "A»fv, 'AirJ, 'Atto. 219
or augmtnts ; as in ufaTreideiy, uyuXiffKeiyf afajSixfy : v. Abrescli. ad
Catti^r. p. 6.5. Valck. ad Hippol, p. 303. b.
VUl. "Ayev (by some reckoned an adverb,) governs a genitive
only, and toually sij^nifies without; but it sij^nities aiso besides, over
and above ; as, (ip€v tov t))s TrftovTraplafrrfs aTToneaelt' evboKi/ji'iaews, Kni
fivpints invToy eyifviXe ro'is Kiiburois : v. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 24/.
Also out of, except in : i\l/i]'piaayTo /it^biya 'l*u)/jiai(i)y iiifev Trapara^fws
uratfiely, t'liit. in Pomp.
IX. 'AvTi also governs a genitive otdy, and is most conimonlv, in
place of ; i. e. equal to, as good as: atri rv ttoWwv Xawy kariv a.yi)p,
vyre Zei)» Ki]pi (piXtitrrj, Honi. II. t, ll(). and lliis sense it retains in
composition: iroWiby a^ra^tos a\\u>y, II. A, 5 1 4. ov lyu) (ftij^i d«'rt
travTwy rwy evOube aywr<i}y firm, to be uorlh (hem all: Plat, instead
of: air ayuTrijs ^~iau<i tvparrOnt: v. Sc'liti;f. in Liban. epist. ISpS.
And in the sense of comparison, equality, permutation, preference,
it is frequently joined with the verbs uya7r(iv, a'ipe'irrOai, ^e;(Cff0a«,
aWdrreiy, rideaQai : aiT< tttotos ItynQov riOe/derwy, tKe'iyuy Toy dybpa
tvTTopely, preferring before, &c. Dionys. Hal. x.
X. Sometimes arri signifies, on account of, in return for : elra pL
ipwT^s, nyrl noias aperys a^iJi Ti/daadai : Demosth. pro Cor. nyO" tSf
TJjy €irup-^iav eiiaKuiae, rtfiiopias inrofieyeiy rets effj^ciras biKatos I'jy ', on
account of , for the sake of : Soph. El. 537-
In conjuring and obtestations airi signifies hy : n" a djTJ Tcaibujv
Tuiybe K(u \l>v^ris, irarep, iKerevofxty : Soph. Q^d. C. 1326."
In composition ayrl signifies — 1. equality, balancing, or equalisa-
tion : ayralios, ciyTcOeos, uyTippoiros, tu'Tiypn^or, ayTiTrerpos : Soph.
OEd. C. \92. — 2. opposition, resistance, counteraction ; as in uynXe-
yeiy, ayTiTraparciTTeiy , arTorapelayeiy, avTKe'iaOai, fiiTt(j}eo€iy,ayTibiKos,
ayTij^piaTOS. — 3. oppositeness ; as in ayridvpoy, ayTi(j\eTreiy, iivTiKy})-
fjtoy. — 4. reciprocation or requital; as in airw^eXtTi', ay-evepycTely,
ayriKaXe'iy, ayridepaveveu'. — 5, rivalry antJ imitation ; as in avTi-
T€\yoi, — 6. .exchange or substitution ; as in dirwrelo-Sai, drrtTrapexeti'.
XI. 'Airo with its case (whicli is always a genitive) lias sometimes
an adverbial significati(jn; as.uTro -vv aboi:}]rov, unexpectedly : Thucyd.
VI, 47. "TO yXwrrijs, orally, viva voce ; Trperrfieis eiriCTToXiiy re Kopi-
ioyres, trot avroi airo yXwacTTjs beriaojjevoi, &c. Arr. de Exp. Al. ii,
13. aiTo pri]fir]s and anb aroparos, elnt'iy : memoi'iter, from memory,
by heart : Plat. Theaet. Hence uKorrTo/tnTideiv, to recite or dictate
jrom memory : Plato Eutbyd. p, 276. anu ribv ovoparuiy, nominately,
by name : Aristid. ad Capit. p. 545. otto tov vtipn-^fn'ipu, at once,
suddenly ; anb tov npo(payovs, and airo tov (j/ayepov, openly: Tliuc.
i. airo tnrovbris, seriously, earnestly, zealously ; a-n-n Tavroparov, and
unb Tv-)(^r]s, fortuitously ; anb Tiiii (ppoyipov, discreetly, prudently.
XII. 'Atto TOV fteXTlty-ov, and cnrb tov KpnTiiTDV, signify, with the
best intentions, honestly, sincerely, with good faith : Dionys. Hal.
<• Add, that ovtI sometimes signifies griefs; griefs for griefs, instead of the
miccession : ndvairiv 5' ei /«•/; ri ko-koiv &fx- usual alternation of joys and griefs. —
â– navft.a fJ.tpifj.ywv tvpoifi.r\v, ioiyjs 5' avr^ J. S.
anuy aylas : Theogn. 344. gyie/s after
220 'AttcJ. [Chap. IX. §i.
i. p. 62. vii. p. 470. Sometimes Travros is added to fieX-itTrov : otto
Trai'Tos Tov (5e\Ti(TTov, Id. iii. p. 140, iv. p. 221. On these phrases
and ciTTo Tov'biaicei^ieyov, see Leopard. Emend, i, 21.
XIII. Preceded by the article it signifies conjunction, connexion,
relation: ol utto ^tXoao^/as, t/te philosophers ; erefxtjs fxey yap 'Ewi-
Kovpu) boKel Ta iTpayfiara €)(€ii', erepws be to'is utto ttjs ^rods, [to the
Stoics; literally, to those from the portico or porch,) erepios be rols
OTTO -fjs 'AKnbtjiitias, {to the Academics,) ere/ows ^e rols utto tov Ilepi-
TTCLTov, to the Peripatetics : Lucian, de Parasit. ol utto W\a.TU)vos,
the Platonists, the Platonic philosophers : Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 384.
1. 29. I'l &f' alfiaros Tnu'res, KnO' evdrepoj/ yevos, to re TraTpiSov, Ka\ fjt]-
Tpt^oy, kindred, kinsfolk: Pliilo de Legal, ad Caiiim. And when the
article is in the neuter, kot'ci is nnderstood before it : to. he ano rj/s
f^T)Tpos {but on his mothers side) IkvOtjs, iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 299.
1. 10. ftaaiXevs /Jt'ycts U-oXef-ialos — Tct juev utto naTpos, 'HpaKXeovs tvv
Aios* ret ^e UTTO [.irjTpds, Atorvaov tov Atris : Monuni. Ptolem. Euerg.
01 UTTO Ti'is fiovXfis, the senators: Herodian vii, 1. ol airo tov ttXiiBovs,
the plebeians ; ol airo twv alpeatwv, the heretics: Clem. Al. Str. ii.
p. 383. 1. 30. 01 ano tG)v 'Adrjvaiwy "Iwres, the lonians descended from
the Athenians; ol cnro naibelas, the learned: Epitora. Athen. i. cf".
Casaub. ad Athen. i. c. 11. ol utto twv fieyaXuv Ttjxijfjiarwv, [^the men
of great fortunes :] Aristid. ap. Thorn. M. p. 854.
XIV. It is used in speaking of persons who have ceased to be in
any office or employment: TrepiTv^ovTes rwv otto wTraretas — tiv), con-
sular men, men who had been consuls: Herodian vii, 1. ol cnro r^s
arpnT-qyias, those who have been generals, [or who have been prcetors ;]
6 ano rj/s Trnea^eias, who has been ambassador.
XV. Allied to this sense is that of after : citto beiirvov, immediately
after supper ; n-irb Traibwv, after boyhood, from a boy; airo itupay-
yeXfiaTos, upon the word of command ; cnro oaXinyyos, at the sound
of the trumpet ; euro tov TroXe/jov, after the war, at the end of the
war.
XVI. As TTopa is very seldom used in speaking of inanimate things,
except in poetry, (Trapa vrjun', from the ships: Horn.) so awo is very
seldom said, especially in prose, of animate things ; as, tovs evXeXey-
fiiioiis airo tov Qeov, by God: Clem. Al. Sir. ii. p. 389. I. 7- v.
Malth. xi, 19. Mark viii, 31. 1 Macchab. viii, 6. 12. ix, 15. and
Jens, in Fere. Liter, p. 16. seqq.
The following senses may also be noticed ; moral source : <nr' opdfjs
no) biKaias kcjI ubiafdupov rf/s ipu^(/s Trarra f.toi TTfTTpaKTCii, Demosth.
pro Cor, p. 353. 1. 12. See Eurip. Ion, 1313. fi utt' nXXj'/Xwv wi^eXeia,
Plat. Ej). xiii, p. 360. I. 13. through, on account of, because of:
evbo^oi UTTO Xoyov Kal aocpias, Plut. in Cic. p. 872. cnro r>7»" ayaf
aKparjtas iibovcts eiri fxeyiOTois fiiaQo'is eQripuTo, Herodian l, 3. in-o tTjs
^apfts, through joy: Acts xii, 14. v. Luke xix, 2. xxii, 45.
JMatlh. xxsiii, 4. Jolm xxi, 6. otto tovtov, on this account: Herodot.
ii, 64. V. c. 175. lOnvfiaSov TOV 'Epyuoyer^'' """o ^V^ cpiXoaoipias,
Liban. Epist. 20, v. Tluic. iv, 130.* jform or manner of pro-
^ lidi\vT7op.ai rhv /itirptov airh MeAoi'- Av. 151. — J. S.
O'ioVf on account of Melanthius : Aristopli.
RuLB 13—17.] 'Attc;. 2-21
Ceeding : uv eJo-ayyeX/as KpireaOai, jEschh^. c. Ctt'S. p. 441. [4-10,
13. ed, R.] means: anu iroiwi' \^i](f)ian<iTitiv ovtos f/ -noiwv vufiwv ovic
fWrjfey apyvpioy ; Diiiarcli. p. 33. uiro /jo'^Oiipwi' kqi ala-)(^pwy irpay-
fxuTiDV upyvpioi' avT^ vopioaoQai, ^liscliili. Dial, ii, 36. The instni-
raent, with: itiro Kvaf.n>)v KaOia-aadnt up-)(_opras, Xeii. Mem. i, 2, 9.
V. Demostli. Pliil. i. p. 40. [I. 22. ed. R.] value or cost: y^pvaui
trre^c'nw airo ToKavriDy e^ijKoi'Tct, Demostli. de Cor. p. 256. [I. 24.
ed. II.] See R.'s index. "^ from, denoting |)lace : Karuiiniieiv and -ov
opovs, Mark ix, 9- '"â– apwy airo Za-eXt'as, i5ilschin. Dial, ii, 1. utto tCuv
iinrwv ijKoyTiCey, Id, i, 4. terjworrjs etrTiy CLiravTWV aydptoniov uf' yX'iov
ctyivyTos yue^^pi bvo/je.tov, i^ischin. c. Ctes. p. 52'2. [I. 11. ed. R.]
It is soinetirnes used periplirasticaily, and needs not be translated ;
as, TO arr' iii^ieu/y, our: Herodot. ix, 1. v. VVessel. p. 693. tu cnro
aev, thy : Id. vii, 101.
XVII. "Atto, with an acute accent on the penultinia, signifies sepa-
ration, absence, distance, incongruity, unsuilableness, disagreement,
estrangement, &c. Cos uito ttjs yrjs eyevor-o, when they ivere at a
distance from land: Xiphilin. in Pomp. Hence the superlative airto-
TiiTU), Plut. de anim. procr. v. Bast, ad Greg. Cor. p. 210. s, otto
Tponov, absurd, preposterous ; wpos -poirov, the contrary ; ovk ano
rpoTTov, ?iot without reason: Plut. iu Cses. p. 734. earat be tcivtu owk
iiTTo Tov Trpay/uaros, not foreign to the purpose : Demostli. adv.
Timocr. p. 701. [I. 23. ed. R.] utto gkottov, far from the mark ;,
airo TOV el KOTOS, at variance with probability; utto Kuipov, unseason-
ably ; UTTO dv^ov, unacceptable, disagreeable ; cnro dv/j.ov /jdXXoy 1^01
eaeai, Horn. II. a, 56'2. cnrebetEey annai (3a(rt\evs, uti â– KavTcnracriv
avTt^ airo Qvfiov Kai aWorpia rj /ueXatva \pri<pos : Tlieniist. Or. de
Theodos. clem. v. Diog. L. i, 100. In the same sense aTzo yyw/xijs :
Kac Tu) A(t Tovro ovk utto yyw/.iT}s ijy : Julian. August, in Cses.
'Atto in composition signifies — 1. separation ; as in u.Tro(oaiveiv,
cnropaWeiv, aTTOrldeadai, anohibpaaKetv, aireXavyetv, aTrobrjfxe'iy, airei-
Tve'iv o/jiXlay, cnruyiveaOai ditu tivos, aTrofiiados, dn('ippr}Toy, dTToarpd-
T-qyos. — 2. restoration, restitution, recovery; as in anobiburai, d-ao-
Kadiardyai : Deniosth. p. 256". [1. 4. ed. R.] diroXa^ftdyeiv, Lys. p.
590. [1. 4. ed. R.] p. 6"09. — 3. accomplishment, consummation, and
consequently desistance ; as in tiTrorereXeo-^^ej os, Xen. CEc. xiii,
3. direpyaieadai, rnrofuiT^v, Lys. Fragm. p. 38. ed. Rei-^k. cnro-
fiuX^addi, Id. p. 148. V. Valck. ad Herodot. p. 122. 706. ad
Tlieot-r. Adon. p. 203. ad Mcerin p. 401. Koeii. ad Greg. Cor.
p. 246. Wyttenb. ad Eel. hist. p. 339. Huschk. in Anal. p. 56.
et in indie, in v. cnroKXaieiv. — 4. place, office, situation ; as in utto-
yeios, opposed to irXeoyri Kara tov KXvbujius, Lucian, Lexipli. t. ii. p.
338. cf. Dorv. ad Char. p. IO6. (nmTeXewt, magistrates : Polyb.
X, 21. xvi, 20. u-oiJu-xeaUai ei; Tuiy nXoluy, to fight from the sliips :
Polyb. viii, 6. diroOewpely, to watch Jrom a place of observation:
Polyb. E. L. 65. — 5. imparture, communication, participatinyi ;
as in dTTOjiepiB.eiv. — 6. instrumentality ; as iu aTroKXiipovy, to elect by
•^ *Os a.Trh a(jLiKpu,s SaTrdcTjj i//x«s apiari- Aristoph, Eq. 538. — J. S.
fwf aTTfirfnireVf at a small cost or expense:
222 Ata. [Chap. ix. § it.
lot: PoKb. ii, 58. — 7- materiah, that from which any thing is
made ; as in (ixopeKi, Dioscor. inmijefiii/jTjijeios, Atheii. — 8. It in-
tends or augments the force of words; as in airo-^^pTjaQai, uiroirely,
airoKciXeli', anuToXfj^i', airoOavfiaSeii', aTro/nrrj^ovevetP, &C, — .9. It has
the force of a privative; as in uTroTiftos for nrifjos : v. Toiip. ad
Longin. p. 367. Ka-n. ad Greg. Cor. p. 260. I'nroaiTos : v. Valck.
ad Calhiii. p. 7.
On (inn in composition, see Caltier. in Gazoph. Ahresch. p.
62. seq. 67. 74. Valck. ad Theocr. p. 238. et ad Caliim. p.
159. seq.
SECTION II. — On the prepositions Sm and eh.
Rule I. Aiu, willi a genitive, signifies parts of time recurring at
intervals: r-qr iief-oi fxiav, (tile one <lav) rz/c eK riov Ternprrjiunpiuv
(TVjUTrXijpoviitetTjv, but irit'TC Kni nvrbs irwv eiai'iyayev : every Jijth year :
Xiphilin. in Julio. apbevnti/Ti be to. yi)bia av-uir, ey d^pei fjier bia rpirrji
ilfjeficts, every third day, ty ^eiyuwrt ^e bia emrtjs, every sixth: Fhotius
in Olynipiod. exc. but rplrov ereos, in the beginning of every third
year: Ilemdot. ii, 4. v. Wessel. p. 105.
il. Aia xftpos, or )(eipwj', eyeiv, is not only to hold in the hands,
or handle, but also to be carefully employed upon ; to manage with
care and attention ; <pu(oovfievoi yap bia \eipu)y eypvai naXXov Ttjy
TToXireirtr, Aristot. Politic, v. rd re rwy i^vfifiiiywy but ^(^eipds €^€iv,
Time, ii, 13.
III. YlpocTOfjiXfiffai â– KavTi Tf bia -^npiruv y/Triffraro, affably, cour^
teously, complaisantly, engagingly : Xiphilin. in Julio, of Cleopatra.
hi hit()pp-i]Th)v e'nrely, secretly, under injunction of secrecy:
Dionys. Hal. viii. p. 4S2. 1. 31. Kai fivpiovs uXXovs bia Kerys are-
TrXfiTTOfiev iffxiv aureus fuflovs, causelessly, vainly : Dionys. Hal. vi.
p. 346. !. 20.
IV. 'Ev TToir* bi' dOvfiias iytreaOe, you were dispirited, you
desponded: Dion. Halic. vi. p. 3,99. '• 49. bibd^to nibs ?/ x^P"- ^''
uatpaXeias yevoiro, in security : Id. xi. p. 700. I. 41. bi ij^Xov yiy-
vecrddi -in, to be troublesome to him: Plat. Alcib. i. to yap bta
fierrov x}opi(iyov noXv, between: Dionvs. Hal. p. 688. 1. 18. wore —
fjtjbey a»' yeyefrdni to bia fienov, u\X' i'jTui to brjfxoTiKov dnoXwXeyai
TrXriOo<i, )*/, c*tc. SO that there would have been no medium, no middle
condition ; but the one or the other extreme oj the alternative would
have been unavoidable : Id. vii. p. 431. I. 4.
V. Aia, with a genitive, and the verbs e'^w, Xa/i/3f<»'w, TiOefini, and
the like, forms many circumlocutory phrases; as, bi' aia-x^vyrjs t^eir,
to be ashamed to; fiaQovna be // lyuvXi) tovto, bt' alavvyris to
ttpayfja iXafie : thought the affair disgraceful to themselves ; were
ashamed of it: Dionys. Hal. vi. bi eXnldus f'x*<»', to expect or
hope: V. Herodian ii, 1. r»/s troXtws tTvapyjiiyTa ToaovTwy er<7n' bici
rifiiis re Kni OitvfiuTos Hiryere, you both honored and admired, OT
wondered at : Hcrodian ii, 2. (pepovai bia i.iviif.ir)s, they remember :
Rule 1—6.] A«a. 223
III. ii, Q. Ku^ol bk hi' evxfjs etrrt, J wish or pray for it : Id. ii, 10.
'AraKfiiovTu — bia anovhi]i l}ye, valued or made nmck of him: /El.
V. H. ix, 4. Ka\ )] aWt} he iruira orparta b i' o'iktov to TVfiayfxa
e-\a/3c»', was moved' with pity at the affair: Dioiiys. Hal. x. p. 6"70.
I. 39. Tiiv finyeipiKi/y fjuj^dtpav bia \eipus e)(wi', holding, grasping :
Id. xi. p. J'20. 1. \6. bia rrrofxnros e^eii', to talk much of: bi alrins
e;^p*)', to accuse, blame, find fault with: Id. iii. p. 148. I. 36'. bi
airlas eJpcit, to be blamed or accused: Id. i. p. 56. I. 33. bi' uxpe-
Xeius TiOeadat, to convert to one's own profit or use : Id. vii. p. 446.
1. 12.
VI. Am with 'A genitive signifies space, duration, interval: bia
^ioVffor life, through life: Uioiiys. Hal. iii. p. I87. 1. 3?. v. Fiscli.
«(i I'lat. Flictd. c. 20. ap')(^(')fji€v6s re Ka\ bia reXovs roii-o erreftap-
Tvparo,from first to last ; always, to the end : Plat. Sopliisf. p. 23'.
bt {jfiepas. through the whole of the day: v. Valck. ad Hcrodot.
p. 4+3. Wessel. p. 604. bi' eroi/s, during a ivhole year : bdi btvrepov
ernvs, tilery other year [through a second year] : bia Tpirov erovs,
every third year [through a third year] : but fiuKpov, at a great
distance : oh bia fiuKpov r>)»' 'Fw/trjr VKn-^eipwv e;^6(>' eXnianvTes, soon,
at no distant time: Uioii. Hal. iii. p. 254. I. 35.'' eVetra bia arabiwv
pi'i\t(7ru KTj Trej're uraipnivofieinf:, a liver disappearing under ground,
and reappearing at a distance of five stadia: Herodot. vii, 30. dro
be TOVTOV bta e'lKoai kov nrabiiov tiWos TvoTafxhs, at the distance of
twenty stadia: Id. vii, I98. bia jSpa-^^eufv elne'iy, in few words ; bia
TrXetoriov (tireJv, in many words ; bi" vXiyov, at a short distance :
'J'huc. vii. ]). 515. bia beKn be tTrnX^ewv Trupyoi i)anv fieyiiXoi, at
every tenth bnslion or bulwark: Time, iii, 21. ciD/^iat bia iroXXov,
at a great distance apart ; OuvfiaSeiy r'a bia irXeiarov, things very far
distant: and ol bia nXeiarov, Thuc. iii, 115. fiaXa TrpealJurrjS fjoi
ebo^ev eli'Oi* bui y^pi'ivuv yap Kut ewpaneiv avTov, for it was a long time
since I had seen him : Plat, de Rep. [p. 371. 1. 23. ed. Bas. 1.] Some-
times bia is omitted before 'yjun'ov : ttoWou ^poj'ov, Xen. Agesil.
ii, 23.* bih ToaovTov, at so great (or at so little) an interval.
It is often used adverbially uitli a genitive; as, bia rayeiav^
quickly: Tliuc. i, 8. bdi /3puj^ew>', briefly: Plat. Tim. [p. 473.
I. 8. ed. Bas. i.] and bi'a ftpn^vTaroir, ib. p. 89- bia rn^ovi, speedily :
Thuc. ii, 18. be dnexOeias, inimically : Plato Tiieag. p. 130.
1. 12.
It is employed periplirasticaily with a genitive signifying //te jws^/'w-
inent : al iiboiat ul bia -ov au>/j.aTOs, Plat. Pined. C 9- «' ^'" '"'*'*'
oXiyoiu voXireiai, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 489- [!• 27- ^^- R-] »'/
bia Twv opKbiv TcinTis, iEscliin. c. Ctes. p. 600. [I. 1. ed. W.y
'' Ti')p.0ov Se PovXaifxriv t(.u aliovjj.ii'ov them: Aristoph. Plot. 98. — J. S.
rhv (fj.lti' &paa6af dia fxaKpov yap 7} x^P'S. ^ Add tliat 5ia denotes succession : 6
permanent, last in i; : Eurip. lleciib. 320. fxkv xP^vos 5-)) 5ia xp6vov Trpou^aiu ifiol,
od. I'ors. Aia is sometimes, thvnug:U the Soph. Phil. 285. 15ut Biunck explains
whole extent of a place : KaTfarparoTre- 5ia xp^'"'"i aliqtiantisper, for a little
Zevire 5ia t^s tuv ' hp^irijivuv â– n6\ews, uhile. Ajo, icilh : Ppour^i 5' i^i>a.yr\ S C
Folyh. iii, 77.— J. S. dcTTpairJjj, Aiirftopli. Nub. 583. Br. 574.
' VloWov yap aiirovs ovx iiipaKa xp^' Bekk, — J. S.
vov,for it is a long time since I have seen
224 Els. [Chap. ix. § ii.
VII. iltfi with an accusative often signifies instrumentality: <l>w-
KiKOv (TvaTiiVTOi Tiiv TToXe/jiov, ov bi' e/ue, ov yop inoXir€v6fiT]i' ttw -ore:
Deniostlj. pro Cor. p. 315. I. 17. "»)« i^adutov hi it^elfor rv^ior, Dion.
Halic. p. 305. I. 21. ohhe yap vTrobijfiara e^ei bia rov yaKKia, ouS'
oTrXa hi'a rov fTKvrea : Epist, Encli. c. 31. v. Hoin. II. 0, 510. Aris-
lopl). Villi. 93. And see Cliap, viii.§ vi. U. 9-^
Ata is often elegantly construed with the neuter article and an
infinitive: bict to /ji) ao(pu\ eJiai, through not being wise: Plat. Gorg.
p. 487. '• 5. "^ocpol is in the nominative, because it is understood of
llie same persons as the preceding verb. Ov^ oioi re elai (oatjaricety,
bia TO /xi), &c.
It is often understood before tovto, rai/ro, and ri : as Ka\ tovto,
and OH this account: iEscliin. Dial, iii, y. v. Fisch. ad 1. ct Flat.
Apol. c. 17. Raphel. ad 2 Petr. i, 5.
In composition bta signifies — 1. passage through, or transmission ;
as in biopvTTEiv, biayeiv, bieXavt eir, bta(j)ulv€iv, hiairLTtreiv, biairveiv,
biaawceiv trpas, Scv. — 2. completion, accomplishment ; as in bianep^iy
Tov /3/ov, Xen. Qic. xi, 7- biairpar-eii', biepyaieadat : Pol) b. iv,
22. bimclir-en' npos rira, Polyb. iv, 86. viii, 21. binicpiveiy, De-
niostli. 163, 15. bin\oyi$€t70ai,ld. 1236, 17. — 3. duration or tract
of time; as in biaTeXelv, biafieveiv : ovhev i'lbiKov b inyeyevrjfxai
TToiuiy: Xen. Apol. — 4. dispersion, division, distribution; as in bi-
uyyeWeir, Demoslh.p. l63, 8. biavefiei.v,biabib6\ai, but7Ta(Tdai,bia(Tiu}-
TTi/crat : to be silent one and all : v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 381. biaaitu'
aaadai, ib. p. 312. biaruTTeiv, biairbiXiiauL et biairmpaaKeiv : ib. p. 9~.
btayLyvwoKeiv, biaboKtfxacetv : Xen. CEc. xix, 16'. — 5. separation:
as in biat^adiieiy, Xen. CEc. vi, 6. bia-^wplieiy, ib. viii, 11. bia-
clevyvvvai, Demosth. p. 1395), 11. biareixiceiy, Polyb. viii, 27. — 6.
stcrecy, privacy; as in biabuvai, Demosth. p. 1045, 25. biaK\air7i-
vai, Polyb. ii, 62. — 7- It intends or augments ; as in biayion^y, Po-
lyb. iv, 10. bia/ioprvpeadai, Id. i, 37. bu'/dwadai., Demosth. p.
320, 7. biuTTvydnyeadai, V. Dorv. ad Char. p. 67O. biiaxvpiiea-
dat, biaKVK^v, biadepiJaUecrQai, bielteiat, bini:u)\veir. — 8. It signifies
tminence or excellence ; as in bi€\^eiv, biacpepeiy : v. Reisk. Animadv.
vol. i. ad Dion. Clirys. p. 153. — 9. diversity or contrariety ; as
in biayopevety, opposed to (Tvyayopeveiy in Isa^us. v. Maipocr. — 9*
contention for superiority ; as in buirriyeiy : v. Hemst. ad Lucian,
I. i. p. 444. a. Valck. ad Tlieocr. x. p. ^)5. ad lierodot. p. 379-
Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 379- Tyrwh. ad Aristot. Poet. p. 215.
Cattier. Gazoph. p. 70.
VIII. E(s f^overns an accusative only. When it is joined with a
penitive, an accusative is understood ; as, eh ^h<w, underst. bofwy, to
the infernal regions. tTreibay ovv eidtXOiu o'lKube e'ls tfiavrov, into my
own house: IMat. Hipp. Maj. els Aioyvaiov tov ypa/jfiariKov clafjXBoy,
I entered the school of, &c. Plat. Amat. iiiit. els 'A^jftapaov, into
the cave of Amphiaraus. It sometinies siynifies^oj-, in, in the per-
formance or solemnization of ; irpo re yajxiKiLv, *:at ts tiWa rwy leputy
* El Ti 7' {(TTi XayLirpbv Kol naXhv, i) topli. Plut. 145. — J. S.
Rule 7—11.1 Eh. 225
rofti$€Tai Tip vbari ypTiaOai: Thuc, ii, p. 111. It is often omitted,
wlicii it signifies motion to a place; and so in Latin, see Virj:. ^n. i,
6. iv, Ib-l-, 105. and usually after verbs signifying division; as,
\eyovTf.s, ws irKelara fJtepti // ovaia vevefir]fikvr) e'irj : Plato Parnien. c.
14. rpels fjLoipas 6 Eeplrjs haaafievos â– 7rd^^a rbv ireiov arpuTov, Hero-
dot. vii, 121. hieXw^ev roivvv avnfv bvo fiepr], Plat. Politic, c. 24.
IX. It signifies, on account of, on the score of: fiovXo^eyos alrui'
Tol$ YleXowoivTialois es Tt)v avTov Ka\ 'A6T}vaiii>y <l>iXiav ojs judXterra cia-
(jc'iWeiv : Tliuc. viii, 88.
X. It is used for tcara, against : ra lyKXri/iaTa ret es tovs 'A0rjvn/ous,
Time. i. cnrepeibofiet'os els YlepiKXea, bi 'Ava^nyopov, tviv vTTOvoiav :
fixing Pericles with the suspicion through Anaxagoras ; directing
it against, or contriving that it should attach to, Pericles : Pint, in
Pericl. So alvirreffdai e'is rtva, to insinuate something agansi a
person ; to throw out innuendos against him. *
Also for Kara, according to: els iifxerepay bvvafiiv, according to
our ability ; to the best of onr power: Plato in Phasdr. p. 257. ovk
airefivos rfjv oypiv es to ftap(3npiKdi>, Lucian, Dial. Mort. els to eraipi-
Kuf, according to the manner or fashion of courtezans: Id. Bis
Accus. V. Hor. Serm. i, 6, 95.
XI. It is put for ey, as es to <pavepov, for ev T(p (pavep^, openly : o'l
KuraXeifdefTes vtro tov Tvpavvov els OTparoirebov, in the camp: Dion.
Halic. p. 276. 1. 41.''
It signifies, quite to, as far as: beiKyvrai icai es i/je to ^ivTiyia, even
to my time: Paus. in Acli. p. 3f)9' " tovto im'iy Trepiecm [Trept-
€OTjj,] Tu TTpdy/iara, to this condition ; es o bt), until, until at length,
and es o, until: Herodot. Er. e$ tI; how long? Horn. II. e, 465.
€la\ be es Toaovrou XoyiffTiKai, SO far : /El. V. H. i, 6. and witii a
genitive after tooovtos ; es fiev bi) Toaovro tov Xoyov ol iravres "EWjjves
Xeyovm, as far as this part of the account : Herodot. Er. e<$ ro-
aovrov /iera/3e/3A?5/ca<T«»', to such a degree are they changed: Isocr.
Paneg. KUKOiQevTes is tu eayaTov, to the last degree: Paus. in
Acli.
Also, with respect to, with regard to:* evTeTvyriKOTa ay6p<l)ntj
ToiovT<^ o('y eyu) oiii: civ oifJLrjv iroTe evTv^^eiv els (jtpoi'Tiaiu kui eh topre-
piav : Plato Symp. c. 35. to y els eavrov, as far as regards him-
self: Soph. CEd. R. 706. nvbev els aacprjpelay, ovbe kuXXos, >/ <ppa(jis
/jXaTrrernt : Pint. Quajst. Plat, eh wfiOTTiTa Kai al(T)(j>UTT}ra vnepjia-
XtffSat Trdrras ipiXoyeiK^iaas,'^ Pliotius in Herodiani exc. So, 'Iwvm,
vapel Twy re lepujy, cat tTjs tov aepos Kpc'tcrews, Trapej^crat Kcii aXXo es
avyypa<p{]y : Paus. in Ach. underst. <j>epoyT(t, pertaining to:'' as
also in Xeyeiy eh to fteXTicrroy, and eiTte'iy els ayadoy : Hom. II. t,
* TV 8e T^f — ouTws iK\nrav6rivat, — ■' This sense of ds may be expressed
SxTTe KapTcwv vrnp^aKKov fi's S)pas irKridos hy for : For tusks with Indian elephaiits
i^fViy K(7y, in due season : Tlut. in Mario he strove : Dryden, vol. iii. p. 426. War-
p. 763. 1. 22. ed. TL St.— J. S. ion's edition, ISll .—J. S.
• li(vov9fTriKev aurhy is ra irpayixaTa, * I should construe es avyypacf>rju with
he has re/urined or corrected himself in vapfx^rai, affords for, as subjects for, de-
these mutters: Aristoph. Vesp. 743. — scription. — J.S.
J.S.
Viger. 2 F
226 FJj. [Chap. IX. § ii.
102.' 7iyovj.int Tolvvv Trttirw*' f.tu\tnr' els to irpCiyfin elrai, rovrtof
/uapTvpas irapkx^nOai, to be pertinent to, or promotive'^ of, the matter
ill hand: Demoslli. pro lMi(»rm.
XII. Wupievni, and TrapeXde'iv, ets tIv hTifiov, els ti)v /3ouX>/i', ets tovs
biKafTTus, to address the people, the senate, to come into court, to
trial.
Ets is put for tififfi, about : -pirjKuyTopoi fiey els bioKoaias KarecjKevua-
Orjeruv, Zosim. Hist. ii.
For Trepl, about, at, near: ruls els tvv "Iirpov <j)vXuTT0V(7t arpaTiui-
rais. 111. iv.
It is put for TTpos, to, before accusatives signifving persons ; as in
Hon). II. a, 100. 431. 389. o, 402. p, 70<). OH. x, 479- Josepli.
Arch, xii, 2, 5. eXQcou els t)]v ep.}]v firj-cpn, Is;eus <le ApoUod.
Ilered. p. I69. K. ucpiKioufiui els t(j» kcu tov, Lysias de Eratostli.
Casd. p. 27. [I. 8. ed. Ueisk. In belli these last passa<jes Reiske has
substituted ws.] But to this head those passages are not to be
referred, in wiiich, by a person or auinuUe tiling, the place in which
eillier the former or latter is, is signified ; as, kiievai els uidpwTrovs,
into public : Xen. Mem. i, 1,4. i-El. V. H. xii, 1. Find. 01. vii, 50".
Charif. iv, 4. Lys. p. 500. [1. 6. cd. R.]
XIII. A genitive governed by the case of els is sometimes put
before ets, instead of after its case ; usually when that case signifies
a place which is a part only of the place or country denoted by the
genitive; as, eafiuXujy tTjs 'Arrtci/s es 'E\e«/or7j'ci, Thuc. ii. p. 114.
aX^ayres ri/s 'IlXtt'as es ^tetai', ebijovv rriv yijv ; lb, p. 1 16.
XIV. Ets is joined wiih arlverbs and nouns signifying time: els
UTTctl, es rpls, as far as once, as thrice ; 7iot less than such a number
of times ; uiya re rot htitau) btbv{j,aTUKov es rpls a/je\^at, Theocr. i, 25.
[v. Xen. Anab. vi, 4, 11.] v. Soph. Fragm. inc. 23. ap. Stob.
lit. Ixiii. p. 239. et IluschU. in analect. p. 155. and yEl. V. H.
xiii, 34. Tu TOiavra els jieu airaS, »>at (ipayvv •^porov uvreyei, Demosth.
01. ii. els ae\ or e (met, for ever: rw ei^e'iyut es ael -^^peuiyTai, He-
rodot. Euf. Keiaerai am evepyeaia ev rw j/juerepw o'Um es uel avh-
yptnrros, Thuc. i. els eireira, or etVcTretro, or es tci eneiTn, for the
future, henceforth ; els uopior, to-morroiv ; els ri/y varepctlay, the next
day, the day after ; els rpiTTjy ijptepnv, the next day but one, the third
day, the day after to-morrow : Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 268. -pn-^OIiaea-
Out be ovK els f.taKpur, uW els t))v t'^T>Jl' tTrt bean tou Wi Oerrrtjpiuiyos
pijyos : not at a distant time, very soon ; on the sixteenth of the
month Anthcstcrion: ..^schin. c. Ctcs. i'liceiv — els Ti)y aeXi'iyrjy, to
come at ncio moon: lb. els ti)v fiearinftpiay, at noon; els hrtore ; at
ivliat time!' els rpinKorrTuy eros, in the thirtieth year from such a
time ; or, ivithin thirty years." But ets" buo, els Tpe'is, &c. is two
' Elnelu els KaXhu, in say irvll : a\\' Se'/ca /ujjj'as, within ten moiilhs: Polyb.
«is Ka\hy (TV r flnas, ol 54 y' apTiws Kpe- Kxc. t'cirt-sc. \). 1 1!>. ed. Em. — J. S.
ovra TrpocraTeixoyTa arrifialvoval /jlui : Soph. " Eis Ovo, a military term, two ill rank :
CEd. 11. 7K. — J. S. (5 5« K\(apxos Tjyelro fitf eh Svo, itropeviTo
'" See Supplement to Johnson's Die- 5e &.\\ot( kqu &\KoTe i<picnafifvos ; Xen.
lionary, pwblihiied in IHIt). — J. S. Auub. ii, 1, 11. — J. S.
" TlpoloQivTutv tUv trpuiTwy inin\uy e is
KuLi-: r:j — 15.] E/j. '217
and two, thrtc and three, iSrc. TzpCJrov /Jtr r'lyovTO rw Ati ravpoi iruyKa-
\ot eli TetTffctpns, Xeii. Cvrop. viii, 3, 6.
'Es witll re, tare, sigl)ifies as long as: core /ut>' (pnos 7/1', aih tcparns
IbtwKey : Arrian xi, 11. but eare enl is as far as, guile to : eaTe. IittI
TO arpuTt'iTrtbov yKpoftoXiCojTO es Tcis TrpofpvXaKcis, Arrian i. cnrpmrev-
€tv A.vKuti, Koi Tijs kyoiievrjs Avkias \('opas eare tni -or Tavpoy to opos :
Itl. iii. arxl used of liuie also, t(jT€ signifies quite to, vntil : utto tTis
ianipas core fjeaas ras ivKras, Id. iii, 4. and so elaoKe, which is els u
k-e, tin til: Ho Ml. II. 77, 30. 7, 40.9.
[^erc tsKiy be niciilioned that use also of €is by which one thing is
spoken of as imniedintcly consequent upon another: ne-eii')T]nav els
TO Kiipvypn 'Iwra, at the prcachitig of Jonas : Luke xi, 31. [32.]
XV. Els is elef^antly joined with tlie article in the neuter and an
adverb or adjective in the superlative des^ree ; as, ts Tfi fuaXtura leros
wv, contiectid hij the closest possible ties of frietidship and hospi-
tality : Thuc. viii, 6. Teij(r] eJs to aa^nXearaTov oj^upwQei'ra, yi>j'/(/iV</
to the utmost degree of security : Pans, in Ach. yepwv e$ ro
iayjirov, aged in the extreme, in extreme old age: Lucian, Here.
Gall. Also with nouns, and with adjectives not in the superlative
degree : els v-rrep^oXi^v, extremely, excessively ; fls Kaipov, seasonably,
opportunely : and in the same sense Kaipov alone: Soph. Aj. 34.
1334. els KiiXui' ijKeis, opportunely : Plato Hipp. Maj. ds KaXuy
elirett', to say rightly or ivell : [see note /, p. 221.] els bear, commo-
diously, conveniently, opportunely ; eU fiaKpai',far off, a long while,
at a distant time ; ovk els finKpuv, presently : Deniosth. de Cor. p. 31S.
els TeXos, absolutely, utterly ;P also completely , to the efid, until
death, for ever: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 460. els tci ttoXXu, gene-
rally, for the most part ; els otov, as much as, or as long as : arn-
(Tj^oi-res els oaov evebeyero avbpeiMS, TeXevra'iov iravTes bie<pf)('inT](T(tt' :
Herod ian vi. els onov pei' yap viro brifioKpaTias to. 'Ptofinlioy btuicelTo,
Id. ii. els atrnv, altogether, absolutely, always, invariably : Epict.'
es uXlyni', sUghtly, cursorily : aireireiprtQri es oXiyov rijs TrfiofTl^joMis,
Arr. Exp. Al. ii. but with eX6e~ip or a verb of similar signification,
and an infinitive after it, it signifies, to be 7vithin a little of; to
have a narroiv escape from : es dXiyor (Kpltce-o Ttar to BTpurevfAn twv
'Adip'ciiojy viK-qdriycii, Tliuc. iv, 129. els TrXeor , more at large,
more fully : -ai'rn pev hi] Ka\ Is nXeoy tiretfiif^iv aiidls fioi to. es ^Apicr't-
bas, Pans, in Ach. tXv^rrjaav be Kai els irXeov tuvs 'Aj^amvs, still
more: lb. p. 413. Ets Tobe is, hither ; [and to this point, to this
pass.] Note also that a person condemned to pay a fine is said,
els apyvpior i:ciTa\pt](lil$efTBai, /Tlschin. in Tiniarch. and that eh is some-
times, after, i. e. in imitation of: KnTemcevaafieyns els Toy up-^nloy
pvijf.iuy, Diod. S. V, 5S. v. Musgr. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 1483. to (nopa.
irpos Toy ijXiov els to AldioTreiov eTrt^pavayTes, Lucian, Bis. Acc. 6.
P Tciy ?€ vavirriyHv fls TeXos aTcelpwv inrapxfiv: Poljh. xi, 13. — J. S.
ovToiv TTJs TTipi rb.s TrevT^peis vavTrrty'ias , 'i "OpKov -rrapaiTricraL' el fiiy olvu re, els
&c. Pojyl). i, 20. and in the saniu sense a-Kav, ei 5e'/i^, fK twv iv6vT(i>y : Epict.
Kara, rh Ti\os : 5io rh (xriff v'Socp Kara. Eucli. C. 44. — J. S.
TO T f\os if oiiTj;, fu;Te tt/i' aypiay v\r]v
228 'Eic. [Chap. ix. § iii.
hioKoafiOvfievos tU 'H/jaic\^n, and iindre aaKu'iro els ^loaKovpovs ; Philo
JikI. p. 1093. b. V. Eurip. Hec. iKiO/
III composition ets signifies — 1. motion into; as in eladvai, elau-
yeiv, elanefiTreiy, eltrtpopa. — 2. motion, tendency, or direction towards
or to ; as in elcribelv, Theocr. Epigr. xix, 1. el(xa<piKayeiy, Horn. II.
i, 230. V, 336. x» 17. Theocr. U\. xxii, 29. Denioslh. p. 907, 5.
[elaacpiKvovfjei'oi, 1. 4. ed. Reisk.] — 3. publication ; exhibition or pro-
pounding, &C. in public; as in elacpipeiy Kaiya bat/juyia, Xen.
Mem. ab init. et Apol, § 12. ela&yeiv uvix, Polyb. E. L. 93.
elacpkpeiv yvoj/xr)y, 1(1. ii, 6. ciaepyeaQai, Id. iii, 44. tlariyeindaL t«.
Id. vi, 1. — 4. acquisition, as in elffTroicIv: v. Cattier. Gazopliyl.
p. 73.
SECTION III. — On the prepositions e*. or e^, and tV.
Rule I. 'Ec before a consonant, e£ before a vowel, is used with
its case (which is always a genitive) adverbially ; as, Ik tov (pavepov or
Ttpoipayovi, or kfifavovs, is openly : Ik tov p^arav, most easily ; ck tov
biKuiov, Justly ; €K TOV ubiKOv, unjustly ; e/c noWiis eTri^eXeias or «cpi-
jSems, vpr^/ carefully ov exactly ; t^ tcrou, equally ; ck rov o/joiov, alike,
in like manner ;' tK Tipoaaywyiis, gradually, more and more ; t£ kroi-
fjLov, readily, promptly ; t^ ifohov, by sudden onset, assault, irrup-
tion ; eK TTcipaWtiXov, i. e. TrupaWyXws, comparatively , by comparison ;
[also, similarly ; by parity of circumstances or reason ;J tK Trpouipe-
aeus, on purpose ; ck Xadpuias (.TtiQeaems, by secret attack ; ec tov
eninXeiaTov, for the most part ; t^ e7r«/3ovX»7$ or eribpas, insidiously,
treacherously ; tK tov evdeos, rashly, precipitately ; ck tov â– trapa-^i'i^a,
€K TOV napavTlKa, e^ vKoyvlov, €k tov airoffj^eS/ou, at once, extempore,
inconsiderately ; €k tov acrtpaXovs, cautiously, securely ; e< TrapaaKevfis,
designedly ; [premeditatety ;^ e/c tov nyeXniamv, and airpoaboK-ijTov,
unexpectedly ; Ik tov fttaiov, forcibly, violently ; eK tov avayKuiov,
necessarily; Ik TavrofiuTov, fortuitously ; €k irpovoias, designedly,
wilfully; eK tov TeOappriKOTOs, confidently, boldly; €K tov airovbaiov,
seriously ; ck tov irapaftoXov, venturously , desperately ; Ik ttoXXT/h
v7repo}pi(is, very contemptuously or superciliously ; e^ vnoyoias, upon
suspicion; rriy (pi'iijr))' €k ttoXXov nap€iXii<fMi/j€i>, long dgo, from
remote time: Isocr. Paneg. p. 9'- So ^k nuXaiov, Paws, in Ach.
p. 411. (^ envTov, spontaneously, of himself; i.K fiepovs, partly, in
part.'
II. 'Ek signifies after ; €k tovtov, after this: yeXaacu Ik twv -npoadey
•■Add, eis ToDra, moreover, besides: iti.on un ciiunlily.on a par : el yap Svvarol
Demetrius I'epagoiiienus in Proffimio de ^ixiv tic toi" "laov Ka\ avrtTri^ovXtvcrai ita\
Podagra. V. 'loiip. ad Ia>i\\^'u). ^ xliii. avTevtuiWritrai, ri f 5ft rjfxas iK tov dixoiov
Eis sometimes eignifics the dual cause : iir' iKiivois thai ; what necessity would
wpoufianrd/ras (puvasitvTtDv ehairScpfv^iv, there have been fur us, having thus equal
fur the purpose of escapiiif^, in order that powers or means, to be in subjection to
they may escape: Aiisiojili. Vesj). 5()2. //icw ? c. 12. p. 390. cd. liekk. — J. S.
— j. "n. ' Add «« iravThs, indispensably, by all
' liut in Thucyd. b. iii. «« rod &fj.olov means. See note w, y. 50. — J. S.
KuLE 1 — I.] 'Ek. 229
^(iKpvfiii', Xen. Cyrop, i, Q6. evdvs t^ up\iis wpfirjKore TrpoeiTTavai
Ti'/s vu\eu)s, Xfii. Meiiior. i, 2, 39- ttpots iroXvs el vnynv, immtdiatcly ,
after sleep: llippocr. Apli. vi, 41. ck irepwhov, tK Tr€pi6bu}y, ec
ireptTponfji, by turns or rotation.
With : Ka\ Kpan'irrat avTwr iic ttoWcD tov TrepiovTos, With great ad-
vantage or superiority : Eutrop, Metaphr. ii. and in ihe same sense,
CIS "j^e'ipas eXiJojr, eic tov Kpeirrovos ate^doprjae : Id. iii. FIcrodian vi,
6", II. ras tfcaTpareias tK fxeylartov eirou'iaaTO avfxcpopQp, (for /uera,)
Mt'laplir. Eutrop. vii.
III. 'Ec nepiovffias has a similar sense : erov e(C nepiovirlas Kparely,
ivhen he might have conquered with ease, and without risk : Greg.
Naz.
'Ek ireptovaias ri irou'iv is often, to do a thing with abundance of
ease and security, or out of mere wantonness : vvros b' ck nepmvains
fj€f Karriyopel, Demoslll. pro Cor. [/tow Karrjyopei, p. 226. I. ip.
ed. R.]"
O'l b' et: ireptovaias Troyi)po\ ovhepiav irpotpatriv ej^oter ay elirely, al-
though they enjoy abundance, and are not urged by necessity : De-
n)ostli.
IV. 'Ek is sometimes, on account of; in consequence of ; because
of: ec TOVTUJV enapaTOs fiev i)y ev Traffj/ rrj ftaaiKevofjiivri yy, Eutrop.
Metaphr. vii. ck be rod tovtiov oXtywpws viias e-)^eiy, Deniosth. Phil.
iv. p. 60. 1. 48. (K TOV itavTas vp^v kv "lato cnroWi/fiirovs, Thuc. il,
53. irapeKuXei dappely fiev ck tHjv f/Sij o-^fcrtv KaXuJy KeKtrbvyevfieywv,
Knl vTi Trpos veyiKTjfxeyovs 6 aywy yeytKTjKotnv avrols earai' Arr. Exp.
Al. ii, 7. where on has the same signiHcation [i. e. the construction
mifrht have been kuI ck tov — -6y aywya, &c. with an infinitive] : e/c
Toil ; on what account? wherefore? Eurip. He!. 92.
Sometimes, according to, in proportion to: ck TQy evovrwy, eic rwv
bvyarwy, tc TiLy eybe^^o/xerujy : to the best of one's potver : see Epict.
Encli. c. 44. Aristid. t. iii. p. 270. in which sense eic tCjv ovt(jjv,
Zosin). i, 2. hut eK Tu>y eyiUruy yj)i]aoixai Ty X6y<f, as the nature oj
the affair requires : Demosth."
For bid : e< ToaavTYis eTn/ueXeias, by SO much care and attention ;
€K TovTov TOV Xoyov, by this method, or by this way of reasoning ; Ik
6aXa(T(rijs, by sea ; ei: narTOi or Ttayrvs Tpvnov, by every method ; [and
totally, or all together;] to which is opposed e/c fiepovs or ^eyuwv : el
b' ovK eK Toil iravTos, aXX' eK fxepovs eiraireaofieda : Lucian, Dem.
Enc. p. 899. [by the great ; in the gross ;] eK toiovtov tov Tpoizov, in
such a manner as this ; eK ftias, by force : Soph. Phil. 563.
" The following is the inter[)retation of liappen to lose, they suffer no iuconve-
this phrase offered by ine in my Commen- nience. — J. S.
tary on Demosthenes published in ihe " I suppose the passage alluded to is
Classical Journal : Videtur fignra ub Us the following : dA\' v-nh t^s tovtovX tov
desumta, qui aupervacanea tanlum ex fur- x°-^^'''°^ fiKa(T(pT)nias Kal auKo(pavTias th
lunis suis in discrimen commitlunt ; qui- toiovtovs \6yovs ifj-iriirreiv avayKa^ofxai,
bus vel amissisjjacturam nan ita magnam ols i k tuv iv6vr(ev ws Jkv Succd^oi /u€-
faciunt. 1 suppose it is a figure taken rpiwrara xpho^ofiai : de (^or. p. 312. I. 20.
from persons venturing tlie superfluous ed. Reisk. us far us the occasion or cir-
part unly of their fortune ; which if they cunislances will jurmit. — J. S.
230 'E»:. [Chap. IX. § iii.
V. 'EKTroSwv'" or eK TTubwy, (literally />'0»» before one's feet,) be-
sides the sense nientionecl in Ch. v. § v. R. 8. sigiiities with eirat, yi-
veadai, Uraadai, or TrotcTffflai, to he killed or destroyed, [as we say, to
he put out of the ivay :] ov iroWaTs varepov imepuis eKTrobiov o koko-
baifiajv yirerat, Pliilo de Legal, ad Caium. TO fiecpuKioy tK Trobuif
yeyei'ijTai, Id. ib.
'Ek is put for ev, in: Ik TrapaTo^ews Kpare'tf, in pitched hattle: Po-
lyb. ii, 19. In Thuc. vi, 32. o uWos o/jiXos 6 ec yf/s is opposed to
6 ravTti:us ofiiXos : v. Dorv. ad Char. p. IO6'. Cic. Ep. iii, 9. Czes.
B. G. i, 43. but in Horn. II. t, 375. (paiveaQai. e»c irov-oto is, to ap-
pear to persons vieiving it from the sea. 'E«.-, per, hj/, through, from:
'iadi yap e^ tyuto r« TreTroievfjteva vtto M}'ib(ov, Herodot. viii, SO.''
'E£ is redundant with nouns liaving dev added to them, as e^ ovpu-
vuOey \n epic poetry.
In composition ck signifies — 1. departure or removal from a place ;
as in et^flaWeir, eKTrtnTeiv, tKpeea', eKi^ofjiHeir, kt,ep-^e<jQai, eKTOTri^eiv
eavToy. Polyb. i, 74. v. Valck. diatrib. p. igj. — 2. transfer, traiis-
ference ; as in eKbiboi-ai uSeX^i/r, to give a sister in marriage: De-
rao&th. p. 763. [I. S. ed. R.] (h'bpiavra, aTe<parov, to set a statue,
a crown, to he made hy contract: Id. p. 268. 521. to let for hire:
TEschin. Or. p. 2, 41. eKbtbuvai x^pas, to transfer or give over to
others: Deinosth. p. 423. [1. 15.] — 3. secret removal ; as in t(Ck\t-7r-
T€iv, Polyb. i, 23. Xen. Apol. 23. ennrjb^i', Polyb. i, 43. ticwlTrTeiy
Id. iv, 86\ — 4. removal from the rest, selection; as in ileracni' Troie'icr-
6ai, Xen. CEc. iv, 6'. eKXiyew, Deniostli. p. 7GO. tlaipeiv, Id. p. 658.
— 5. removal from, or privation of, what is signified hy the uncom-
pounded word, or the contrary of the uncompoundedivord: v. Valclu
ad Herodot. p. 173. as in kKKaXvnretv rijy ypit<p})y, IE\. V. H. ii, 44.
-6 7idos, ib. iii, 7. eic/rTovbos, Polyb. iv, 33. e^vof^icos, Aristoph.
Plut. 982. f^ojLtvuerflcii, Demosth. p. 396. 1119- &c. cEopKCvy, to
absolve from the obligation of an oath: Id. p. o^a. [1. 23. ed. R.] —
6. completion, accomplishment, consummation, end ; as in *,laiTe~tadni
eralpovs, ^Escliin. Or. p. 24. 35. h-(pv(T^v, Polyb. i, 48. e^abvrareh'.
Id. i, 58. eKTToXiopKe'iv, Id. i, 39. ki,iiKeiv, Demosth. in Indie. [Reiske's
index.] tKOepiSeiv, Id. p. 1253. kKTvoveiv, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 4. and
CEc. xi, 12. HepyatTia, Polyb. x, 42. — 7. removal from obscurity,
or concealment, into publicity; as in eKipepeir, ilLliau ii, 4. x, 13.
hXaXeh', Demosth. p. 354. c^ayyeXXeiv, Id. p. 45. ^KKelaOai, Id.
p. 458. inTidepnt, Polyb. xv, 9. — 8. It intends or augments; (v.
Valck. diatr. p. 10'7. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 259.) as in h(pnv-
X!$en', Ili\. V. H. iii, 33. ix, 41. htcayxd^eiv, Xen. Syrnp. i, I6. €K-
Xoyiofius, Polyb. x, 6. i^uKpiftovi', Id. ii, 06. elnvKpiyeTr, Id. E. L.
141. tKOepaneveiy, ;Eschiu. Or. p. 24, 15. — 9- continuation or per-
" Xldpf)^ iKiro^oiv, i^ive me your place ; Soph. Q'A. R. 997. 'Ek vvKrhs, in the
stand out 0/ I he u-mj ; make nmn: Aris- vi^ht, hy niixht : Ka\ yap 4k vvKrhs, rf
ti)j)li. \'esi). 919. — .J. S. Tiros SiOiTO 'Affrvdyr]!, irpivTos ifadai'tTO
â– ' 'Ek, upon : Ka6-fifj.e0^ &Kpoiv eK irdyuv, Kvpos, koI Trdvruv aoKudraTa dvcir'qSa ;
Sopli. Antif;. 111. hy : wv owtx V Kd- Xcu. Cyrop. i. — J. S.
pLvBiis (| e'juoO TrdXai jxaKpav aituiKiiT,
Rule 5—9-] 'Er. 231
sisttnce ; as in e^rpecpeiv, eKreiveiv ras yelpas. — 10. It is redundant ;
as ill €in^lap^uy€lv : V. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Ipli. A. 333. Fiscli.
prxf. ad Well. p. 13.
VI. The preposition ir is construed uitli no other case than a
dative ; which, when not expressed, is to be understood ; as, ey
^lovvGOv Tpayi^hovs edeacrafyde, Demostll. de Pac. [p. 58. 1. 24. ed. R.]
underst. eoprciai^ois ^ifiepais.^
It is used for eirl wilh a genitive, before ; as, ev tooovtois fxaprvm:
ei' rc'is biKuoTuls, or biniTiircus. binbiKa^eadai eV Tiai tG)V IciTpHiv, Plat.
Leg. 1 1 . irporedelaris Se f3uv\fjs Iv Tiiis tS>v vewv yiyefioai Trept rj/s vav-
fiayjas. Died. S. xi, 12.
'Ej', during the office or magistracy oj: kv he tovtois toIs vofjoOerais
fj)) Qeade vofiov fiTjbevct, Deniosth. Ol. iii. So, ev toutuis vwutois.
VII. 'El' witli ils case is used adverbially: ev tovtw, meamvhile ;
and in this sense er ^ is correlative with it : ev Tovrt^, then, preceded
by eireibav and otcw, Xen. de Re Eq. vii, ]J. x, 13. ev -ovrf, there-
fore, (a Hebraism,) Acts xxiv, l6. dvacTTa ev ra-j^ei, quickly, Acts
xii, 7. V. Rom. xvi, 20. Rev. i, 1. icarro0aj'a> 76 vl] ^ia, L)S ev
bik'ii (J eTVTTTov, justly : Aristoph. Nub. 1335. [1332. Br. 1314.
Bekk.] cf. Plat, in Plizedr. p. 278. I. 40. ev beuvn, ev Kuip^, ev
Ka\(^, seasonably, conveniently : Demosth. Phil. i. p. 19. I* 21. [51,
23. ed. R.] e^ Kii\^ opfielv, commodiously : Xen. H. Gr. ii. v. Thuc.
V, 60. ^1. V. H. x, 11. ev 'iaa>, equally, followed by koJ, Thuc. ii,
62. p. 137. [c. 61. p. 306. 1. 2.ed. Bekk.] lu the same sense 6i^ bfioif,
Thuc. ii, 53. ev 7w napoy-i, note, at present : jEschin. Dial, de Virt.
init. ev jSpa^e'i, shortly, soon: Plat. Symp. p. 217. Sometimes,
sumniarily, generally : Harpocrat. ev fipa-^^yrepois, more briefly : Plat.
Gorg. p. 449. In one word efi(jpa\v. Plat. Hipp. min. p. 365. I. 34.
ev uXiyu, almost, to which ev ttoXX^ is opposed, Acts xxvi, 28. 'iQ.
VIII. To these adverbial expressions a genitive is sometimes joined :
TTjv be KepKvpav Keladai ev KaXai fxev tov l^opivdiaKOv koXttov, (with
regard to it,) kuI twv iroXewv, a7 e-rt rcvrov KadiiKovaiv, ev KaXw be tov
T))v AaKwri^cr/v -^wpav (DXawreiv {for injuring it) ev KaWtaru) be Ttjs
avrnrepav iixet'pov, Xen. Hist. Gr. vi. ev tovtu tT]S wapanKevfis i)a<iv,
in this state of preparatiofi, or were thus preparing : Thuc. ii. [c.
17-] And sometimes a dative besides of the person or thing advan-
taged, &c. TTpo TOV deurpov, kciI uv watriv ev /caXw tVjs Qeas earai : a7ld
tchere all will have a good view : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 267.
IX. 'FjV signifies, at, near: 'Enafiettwvbas ore erpwdi] ev Marrevc/^r,
JEl. V. H. xii, 3. ijTTTjfievos ev MavTivela 'nnrona\i(}, Xen. II. Gr. vii.
p. 645. V. Perizon. ad MX. V. H. ii, 25. Bach, ad Xen. Ages, ii,
23. ev apifJTepc/. fiev e^^fiov to. ^oybiavSjv opt], ev be^iq. be avruv tov
Tiy/)»/ra : Arr. Exp. Al. iii, 7. on the left, on the right : ippifxevos
ev TTocTt, at, JEl. V. H. i, 16". V. Dorv. ad Char. p. 20o. 418. ed.
Lips.
For eh, to: aTrooreXouires on-XtVas ev 2iKcX/^,Thuc. vii, I7. p. 449-''
y Wolf understands var^ or kopT^. As stood. — J. S.
tlieatrcs vvero dedicated or consecrated to ^ ''CIixovto 5e iv roii oxvpois' Xen.
Bacclius, perliap-i didrpcji may be under- Anab. iv, 7, 12. where see IJutchinson,
232 'El*. [Chap. ix. § iii.
X. 'Errt^f jprjT^ov vfjuif t^eXitrOai ti)v bin(3()\t)v, {jy €i> ttdW^ ^pdvy
exere, (of," ox from, a long time,) rav-tji' If ohruxrl. uKlyip y^pui'<i>,{in so
short a time :) Plato Apol. It signifies also ivitliin, wlien tlius jio-
verning nouns of time : kv irivre yi/jepnis iftoqdr'icrnTe nvrols, iEsciiin.
c. Ctes. p. i'86. I. 35. v. JE\. V. H. i, 6. And also 'process of time :
kv S' aire yjiori^, then after a time: Pind. P}tli. iii.
XI. 'Ev ^ is sometimes when: to ykros to tu>v Qp^KiLv, ev ^ ay
dapffijtrri, (poviKioraTov eariv : Time. vii. p. 509- c. 2^. 'E*- y is often
followed by tv tovtm as correspondent to it ; and then it may be ren-
dered while : kv ^ wv Koptidiojv khkovTO j^pijaOal a<pi veas, ev rovrif
hi€(pdapri TO. TTpriyfiaTa : Herodot. Er. c. 89. So Xer>. Cyrop. ii, 6.
'Ev o(Tu), also is while : kv oat^ he Karnf^alveis, kyu) kntftjofiat fieXos,
Aristopli. Eccl. 1 144. It may be noticed in general that ei/ is em-
ployee! in signifying time: kv hei-jnu), during supper; kv airovbals,
during a truce ov peace ; kv /uryvt rplrf, in the third month.
'Ev ^ signifies also, by which, through which, which being done or
effected: iljpuri^kvwv yap rSiV kv 2a/iw 'A.dr}vai(i>v ttXcIj' Itti a((>dsavT0vs
{kv 1^ <ra<pka-ara 'Iwviav Kai 'EX\i)inrovrov evdvs elj^ov ol TroXkfitot,)
Tlinc. viii. c. 86. p. 6 12. rw toiovtci) irpuakKeirro, kv ^irep (cai /ifi-
\i<TTa 6\lyapâ– )^^la ek brj/ioKparias yevofxevr) aTroWurat, Id. viii. C. 88.
p. 6l5.
XII. 'Ev and its case are joined with eJvat, and verbs of similar
signification, in various forms; as, kv <p6flio elvai, to be in fear : v.
Cic. Catil. i. c. 7. [§ 18.] Hor. Epod. i, 17.' Hence €iJ<pofios [Luke
xxiv, 5.] and kiJi<po(3ovfjiat. "EvTpofios, of kindred sifjinification, is in
Acts Ap. vii, 32. ev (TTOfiaTi, and more elegantly ev Xoyois, kv (p^/Jt],
eJvai, to be talked of , to be celebrated : yeveaXoyoCvres avTov airo Tijs
kv (pi'iijrj AaiboSffrom the famous Lais: Synes. Ep. iii. HoXvKparrjs 6
2!d/itos ev Movaais fjv, was addicted or devoted to poetry : JEl. V. H.
ix, 4. ol kv Todjcrei yevujjievoi, poets: Herodot. ii, 82. ev cot yc'tp
kfffiev, upon you is our sole dependence: Soph. CEd. R. 322.
[314.] ev opy^ clvai Tivt, to have a person angry with one ; kv {jhovij
elvai Ttvi, to be the delight of a person, to be agreeable to him ;
€v alriais or ev kyKXr]/jaTi, elvai, to be accused: 01 kv Ta'is ahiats
(ovTCi viz.) Demosth. Ep. ii. p. iii. I. 34. But ev ahiais e^etv riva, is,
to accuse one; kv opyrji e^etv Tiia, to be incensed against one ; kv
alaj^yvri Tidetrdai, to esteem disgraceful or shameful : v. Sail. B. C. c.
31. Cic. ad Earn, x, 28.
XIII. 'Ev is sometimes omitted : (tkoti^ for ev oKOTf, Soph.
Trach. 5.96'. v. Hermann, ad Eurip. Hec. 59 1. 'AraXavrjj, for
kv *ATaX(tvTTi, Thnc. ii. to'is elpi'ivrj irpayfjiuai, for r. kv dprivr] it.
Zosim. Hist. ii. rp <pvyri, for ev t.' (p.. Id. iii. p. 328. Sometimes
redundant : ol YlapQoi kv t^ o-^erepw Tpoiro) ijplavro ftaaiXev€ad(it,
Xiphil. in Trajan, v. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. R. 1112. Tyrwh.
ad Aristot. Poet. p. 120. But it sometimes appears to be redundant,
wlio gives several examples of tliia Hcnse. tionary, published iu 1819. This sense
— •'•^' of of is omiited even in Mr. Todd's
" See Supplement to Johnson's Die- edition of Johnson.— J. S.
Rule lo— i6.] 'Ei'. 233
wIm'd it loally is not ; e. g. in opos fiiya uieffTpa/iiuit'ov iv Tjj ^ijTiinei,
Hcrodot. lir. c, 48. 'liv ry ^rjriiaei is for tc rjJ it]Te'if, in making
the searcli.
XIV. '£»' is joined with y^nw in various phrases ; as, KelpecrOai Iv
XPip, to be shaven close to the skin : Tlieophr. irepl fxiKpoX. [p. .59.
I. 2. ed. Simps, Oxoii. 1738.] /EI. V. H. ix, 10. Hence t) Iv yj>^
KDvim, close shaving, called also v/ziXr) Kovp'a, and in poetry KovpU
IvpijKtjs : and 6 h- \p(^ Kovpius, one so shaved; and in one word lupins.
Figuratively ^vpel kv yjttZ is said of what is very dangerous; chiefly
ill poetry.
XV. Ou TTph' */ ev ^pw Tov Kivhvvov aTrifTTT) rev hiaravfiayyirat ivpos
rhi (TTTiXabas, not be/ore he had been in the greatest danger: Synes.
Ep. iv. In this sense a thing is said cttJ Ivpov uk/jtis IfjTaudai or
F'^^eerOat, for, to be in a very critical situation: Horn. II. c, 173.
Tlieogn. 557. HtTodot, Er. c. 11. kv xPf /jox^""^"' *''' /""X''*' '"^^'
a\pat, hand to hand: Plut. in Thes.
XVI. Hence ei> \p^, near, or close: Iv yjiu aei 7r^pa7rXeo^'res,
Thucyd. ii, c. 84. p. 15.5. This is expressed by stringere and
radere : Virg. Mn. v. [l63. 1 70.] iv ^PV ^V f^^'P*^ TrpofnaTo/jevoi,
pressing close to her through fear: Lucian, in Zenx. [6'32. D. ed.
Salm.] i] ev xP« Trpos to. ftifiXia avvovrria, a close acquaintance with
books: Id. adv. Indoct. t. i. p. 102. 1. 57. ed. Amst. ul ev \pf
(jiiXvi, intimate friends : Suid. kv rr) dyopg (oTma ^vXii'ov kv \pQ tov
\tdivov KareffKevacTTai, Xiphilin. in Sever, in summa superficie. [I
suppose it means close to; but it has not been in my power to
examine the passage.]
'Ev is put for avv : — kv TreXrais tcaX clkovtIois, — kv to^ois, Xen. Mem.
iii, y, 2. V. ;Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 532. [1. I7. ed. Reisk.] Id. p. 254.
[I. 14. ed. R.]* v, Eurip. Ale. 771.
'E*-, in the power of; kv vfiiv kau, Lys. de Eratoslh. ca^d. p. 40.
[ed. R.] OTTws kv kKehu) e'lrj, ovriva jSovXoiTO 'A.dr]vaio)v favni rwv
ai'bpuiv TovTiov elvai, Andocid. de Myst. p. 20. [I. 1. ed. Reisk.] v.
Valck. ad Hippol. 324. ad Herodot. p. 241. Brunck. ad Soph.
CEd. C. 247. ad Eurip. Med. 231. Aristoph. Lys. 30, 31.
For bia, through, by means of: &aT kv avrf, t^ kyio kukws 'iirpaTTOv,
kv TovTf vfxas tTbjieadai: Andocid. p. 79* [h 13. ed. R.]
On account of: 01 (pevyovres kv rots f.ivaTrjpiois , Andocid. p. 142.
ov Toivvv ovbe ttjv y)TTav nvrijv kv ovbevl tHov irop' k/iiov yeyovviav
tlptjacre rfj noXei, Demosth. de Cor. p. 308. [i. 7- ed. R.]
•
* 'Ei* may be translated wilk also wlien See Classical Journal, Loci quidam Luci-
its case signifies the instrument : SisAau- ani emendati atqite explanuti a J. Seager,
verai Siafiirepts 6fJ.ov robs firipovs (KaTepovs A.B. Bicknor Waliicae in Corn. Monum.
€1' ;u€(Ta>Ki;A.a), Plut. in Philopcem. p. 657. rectore. iv fiaxct'^pa airoXovurai, M<itth.
1. 15. opvidaiv airfpfio\6yoov (niv^pop.))v 4v xxvi, 52. irard^ofni/ iv fj.axo-ip'} > Luke
XiOci) /col \^6<t>tv (TvvStaTapd^etv, Id. in IJe- xxii, 49. In the following |iassage it is
metr. p. 1052. 1. C. rbc 'Epfj.?iv KeXevaov, used as in that of Xen. ah fxtv eirepx]]
— KaBiKdfievov iv rrj ^d^ocfi, Vfai-iav evdvs fiol i v fiop.(pala Kal iv S6puTi, Kal iv Bilipa-
Ka\hv aTTfpydcraadai avrov : Lucian, Dial, ki : Josephus Antiq. vi. c. 9. p. 250. ed.
I'lut. et Protesil. p. 428. ed. Amst. 1743. Huds.— J. S.
Vigcr. 2 G
234 'Eir/. [Chap. IX. § iv.
For, as: Xrifta'tv kv <pepy]] Kol\t}i' Ivnlay, Pol)'b. E. L. 82. bt-
j^efff^at t r 7rnpakara6);i>j; v TctXnvra, 1(1. Exc. Peir. p. 131.
Out of: eirirov kv Kepariiois iruTi^plois, Xeii. Aiiab. vi. p. 370.
€v apyvpo) 7/ xpvau iriv&.v, Lucian, de Merc, coiid. [-185. e. ed. Salni.]
V. Clip. Obs. ii, 8. et Btirm. ad Pliiedr. Fal). 23. From: rovO'
vfius biix fjpaj^iioi' (iovXofiai hiba^nt, ov-)^ ws oil fie^adqicoras teal ev
Tois €v apxy cipr]i.ieruis, dX\' tVa,&c. DeuiOsUi. adv. Leocliar. p. 10f)8.
[1. 18. ed.R.]
'Ey yevei is, related, of kin : Eurip. Ale. 903. Sopli. OEd. R. 10l6.
o'l €v yevei, kinsmen, relations.
'Er oivm, over wine, over the bottle: v. Valck. ad Callim. Fragm.
p. 15. 26' '2.
'Er hivTM (or perhaps more properly kv eavrov) elrat, to be in one^s
senses: v. Abrescli. ad iEscli. p. 173. seq. Dorv. ad Char. p. 409-
(508. ed. Batav.) lirunck. ad Soph. Phil. Q50. »>a(Tr«v otn: ey avrov,
Aristo})h, Vcsp. 6"42. With the genitive o'tVw is understood. See Cli.
V, § V. R. 9. ii»d note c p. 80.
In composition t*' signifies, permanence or commorancjj ; as in
ffi/uereiy rals OTrovbals, Xon. Ayes, i, 11, reus biKais, Fiat. Crit.
c. 12. To'is opKois, Lys. p. 870. Tols Tonois, Deniostii. p. l65. [1. 1.
ed. R.] et'OtKely ey X'^P^* Xcn. (F.C. iv, 13. eyyeios. — 2. into;
as in efifjiiiyeiy els Tijv OaXaaaay, Lys. p. I16. kvTpifieiy, Xen.
GLc. X, 2. t-yx^etv, efifiuW^iv, e/jiriiTTeiy : tirera/ieros els tu epyoy,
Xen. (EiC. xxi, 9- epftilouSeiy els Tr/v biKaioaivr]v Tiva, Id. ih. xiv,
4. — 3. suitableness, conformity ; correspondence or coincidence; as
in erbiKos, eyrofxos, e^fie-pos, efi/A.iiyta. — 4. obligation ; as in etopicos,
Pt)lyl>. vi, 47- — 5. participation or possessio7i ; as in kfjicppuv, e/uf^ia-
6()s, ey-exyos, eyoiicos, efxireipos. — 6. It has the same signilication as
with its case uncompoundcd : e. g. evrifios, eyvnvwy, ewoe'iy, ev-
bo^os, eyaywrios, eybT)i.i€ly, crubios. — 7- !• has a signification of abate-
ment or diminution ; as in eybLboyai, v. Foes. (T.con. Hipp, evw^uy.
cf. Casaub. a<l Athen. Deipn. p. 60. eyKippos, efxizoptpupos, ey/cXwpos,
e/jiniupos. — 8. It signifies similitude ; as in (ivU/jpos. On this signi-
lication and that in No. 5, see Interpp. ad Eurij). Troad. 524.
Abresch. ad jEsch. p. 314. et in corrigend. p. 659- — 9- If often
indicates that something is done in a certain place: xupioy eniTrjbes
eyffTpu-oTrebeveaOut: v. Wessel. ad Herodot, p. 538. Abresch. Diluc.
Thnc. p. 256".
It is to be remarked besides, that verbs compounded with ey are
sometimes joined with a genitive case; «s, e/iftareveiv nnrpibos, Sopli.
O'kl. II. 825. v. i^runck. The reason of this is that tV has the force
of eyboy. On ey ill composition see Cattier. Gazophyl. p. 76".
SECTION IV.— On the preposition ewi.
Rui.K I. (I. II.) 'Etti is put before genitives signifying power,
digniti/, charge, office, cmploijment ; as, 01 c'tt' u£(waews and ei,<>vai<ts,
persons in magistracies, or high stations ; eirl riby u-iroppt'iTuy, a pri-
vate secretary ; 01 tnl rwr elaaywyifMuyy Koi t^uywyifiwy, superin-
Rri.K 1—5.] 'Erri. 2.j5
tcndtnls of imports and exports, or of customs ; f .ri rwr tTTioToXtTjr,
a secretary/ ; ol en\ tG)v lue-rjijlujv or iKeriKQt', les IMailres des Re-
qut'tes ; and tlie like. Sometimes wi',or rerny^eros, is added; and
in Ads Ap. viii, 27- »]>' precedes the pri'positioii.
II. (III.) It is used ii) speaking of e(jual di'stribution of numbers;
as, t-t Tpiaiv, or T€(jaapojt', ruTrefjdai, three and three, or four and four ;
€(f ifos, one by one ; [cttj Teffmipwy rn^Afievoi rhi ravs,] Tiiuc. ii, i)0.
In the same sense Kara f^iiar. [See § v. K. 8.]
III. (IV.) In a taetical use, errl (j;a\ayyos iiyeiv, irpoajoaXXeiy, &C.
is (paXayyrjbur, or enl Kepus, or Kara K€i)as, to advance or attack with
both tviiigs extended or opened ; Iboi'res KnrU fjidv ct:! urepwi TrapaTrXe-
oiTQs, u'ith the iving extended or opened: 'riiuc. ii, <)().'' Wdhs,
the depth, i. e. tlie miiidle body as it were of the phalanx,'' is said eTrt
reTTaputv or eTTt oKrio or kirl TrXeiovbiv, &c. irnpaTu-Teudui or noieladat,
to be formed with fovr, eig;ht, or more, together in each rank [file].
Hence vnep^nXayyav is to surround the enemy by opening both
wings ; lirepKepf'n-, to surrpund only one wing of the enemy •/ but ivl
fitTwirov, or KUTu fxiruTTor or Trpuawnur, is with the front of the army
opened or extended : v. Bud. p. 373. 631.
IV. (V.) With a genitive of a reciprocal pronoun, ea-l is put for
bia: t<pi' kavTov, of himself , or spontaneously ; avro'is e^' eavrwv /3oj/-
Xevofievois, at their own discretion, without the interference or par-
ticipation of any one else: Dion. Hal. v. p. 324. 1. 33/ ohhkv efxe
tel tTr' e/utavrov Xeyeiv, through myself: Id. in Exc. ujtrre avras
€^' iavrcuv avrofi/iTtus irpoinrXeovcrds QpCicrOai, of themselves : Xipliil.
in Sever. Bui at other times ecp' iavrov is apart, separately, by him-
self, to himself, at home, or icithin his own bounds. Sen. <I>opw»'ei)j
Tovs avdpwirovs avvi'iyaye irpwroi' Is Kotruv, aTTopubas rtws kcu k(f hivriLv
€Ka.aTOTe olicnvvTas'. Pans. Cor. p. 112. kcu Hoj^pariji /dkv Kctl Ylu-
Oayopas olb' av-ovs tovs Xuyovs, kv o'ts Hmv, rrvi'eypnxpai', aXX' e^'
avriLv kcpiXoaoipovv '. to themselves, for themselves : Aristid. pro Quat.
p. 495. €1 fxkv ovv t(f avTuiy biereXeerar oires, in their otvn territories,
within their own bounds: Zosini. i. speaking of the Athenians and
Lacedicmonians ; vvktos yevonevqs, e<p'' eavrwv eyevero ra err pa- oTreba,
retired to their own respective quarters or camps: Id. iy. A city
which is independent is said eliai or KelaQai ktf eavriji. 'E^' eavrcv
is said also of what one has peculiar or apart : €J-)(^ov yap mi ovrnt
e(J>' eavTwv pamv '\int6fjia-^ov, Herodot. Calliop. c. 37- v. Valck. ad
Herodot. p. 634.
V. (VI.) It is used with its case adverbially : kn aheias, securely,
' 'Cls av el fXeye, filav KaraKoXovQovaav ' In Poljbius the simple verb KepS.v is,
TTJ iTepa,' TOvTO yap rh eirl Kepccs KaAu : to open or extend the line of buttle beyond
Scliol. J). 3.')7. ed. Bekk. — J. S. tlie icing of the enemy : xvii, 20. — J. S.
'' 'I'lie depth of a battalion is its extent / 'O Xapi'STj.uoy, 5ia/3as els TTjf XeppSfrr-
from front to rear : it isdetermine'l, tbere- crov e(p' avrov, of hiuiself, \yil\iuut the as-
fore, by the number of ranks, or by the sistance of the Athenians, wiiicii he had
number of men in each file : as tlie tcidth reciuested : Demoslh. in Aristocr. jj, G7:i.
is by the number of tiles, or by the num- 1. 15. ed. Reisk. — J. S.
ber of men in each rank. — J. S.
236 'EttL [Chap. ix. § iv.
with impunity ; in aXtjOeias, truly, sincerely, in truth: Demostli.
pro Cor. p. 315. Acts Ap. iv, 27. Luke iv, 25. xxii, 5Q. Mark
xii, 32. t^' €KatTTT)s, {iij-iepas viz.) daily, every day ; to. Kvpiwrara
lirl Ke(j>aXaiLJv kpib, generally , summarily : Dion, Hal. ii. p. 124.
1. 6. tTr' oro/ioros, nominately , hy name : Julian, Misopog. non longe
ab init. ttoWcikis irpds eyue bie^yei ctt* <t)(oX>7S) at leisure: iEscli.
c. Ctes. p. 301.
For among, or beyond, {pree,) v. Aristid. Panath. t. i. p. l68. [This
sense is very questionable.]
VI. (VII.) 'Ett' arafji(pitT(3rin]Tov airobelleuys t?)i' bta(io\i)y aTro(f>vye~iy
is, upon incontestable proof or evidence ; Triareis boiis ini deCjy is, by
calling upon the gods to witness: Dion. Halic. v. p. 299. !• 30. ei
fi€v ovv vTn(Tj(fovyTai vftlv ol ■KarpiKioi, Kal iriaTeis (iovXovrai bovvai rai
tTTi flewv, on, &c. Id. x. p. 641. I. 20.
VII. (VIII.) But in CTTi rwy lepiijv o/ioaai, erri is snr, upon : rh tjrl
Toil' leptjjv GvvojioKoyr^QevTa rols TrarpiKtois npos tous brjuoriKOvs, Dion.
Hal. xi. p. 728. 1. 35. lepa ditravres, wfxoaav eirX twv ifxirvpuv : Id. iii.
p. 154. 1. 27-^ opKia Te/juvTes, avroi re Trputroi orcivres tTrt ru>v rofiiwy,
toiioaav^ &c. Dion. Hal. v. init. having immolated victims for the
purpose, they solemnly swore, standing over them (or over the
entrails): v. Stanl. ad ^scb. Eum. 4S6.
VIII. (IX.) 'EttI often governs a genitive even when it signifies
motion ; as, iirl ttjs xojpTjs ftabl^eiy, frequently in Herodot. towards
or through the country ; cttj tov (rrparonebov icarafiavn, into the
camp: Dion. Hal. i. p. 45. eirl Tijs yi'/s, to the ground: Zosim. iv.
tTTt Qpt^KTjs exwpet, to Thrace: Id. ib. cf. Joljn vi, 21. But in this
sense poets usually employ a dative ; as, evrt vavulf eXav^eiv.
With a genitive of nouns either proper or appellative, it signifies
time: (v. Valck. ad Theocr. x. id. p. 115.) eirl Aape/ow tov 'Ya-
Tuaireos, i^al Bep^eio tov Aapeiov, Kal 'ApTa^eplfw tov Bep^eu), in the
reign of Darius, &c. Herodot. Er. c. 98. ert apxovTos 'AQrjvalois
Nt(.o(7rpurou, in the archonship of Nicostratus : Arr. Exp, Al. ii, 11.
o Neffrwp iirniKwraTos -^y, w$ Xeyerat, Tuir f^' avTov i of the men of
his time: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 402. ewi tov aov (olov, in your time
or life: Plat, in Pljaedr. p. 242. I. 10. tn-l rwr beinvwv, in the time
of supper : Diod. S, iv, 3. iwl //las iifiepas, in one day: Lucian,
Dial. Crat. et Diog. ctt' eipijytjs, in time of peace : Horn. Boeot. 304.
[i. e. 11. /3, 797.]
With a genitive it signifies also, before, coram ; as, cttJ ttoWCov '.
V. Valck. ad Eurip. Ilippol. 213. Hence of a judge or umpire before
whom a matter is tried or discussed : knl tov koivov avvehpiov twv
'llWrivioy, Diod. S. xi, 55.
It is put for eV : viprjXwy b' tnl vawy TedeiKe, Eurip. El. 6, With
a genitive of regions or countries it signifies, upon the bounds of:
s I'otli Vigcr and Iloogeveeu translate im/S" victims or sacrifices. This sense it
M TWV ifjmvpwv, super /tifj's : l)iit Siiidas evidently lias in Sophocles, thOlis 5e Sst-
interprets ra tfjurvpa, to Kaid/juva lep(7a, aas, ffiirvpaiy e'y(v6fj.r]v Bwp.o7ai nafi<p\iK-
and Hesythius ra Kai6fjL(i/a Upa^tkc burn- Tuiaiv, Antig. 1005. — J. S.
Rule 6—10.] 'Eitl. 237
Aenpeoi' — Ktl^ievov eirt rijs AaKotyiKTJs «raJ rf/$ 'IlXems, Time, v, 34.
Til €7ii Opr^KTjs, the towns on llie confines of Tlirace, upon the shores
of tlie i^gean sea : v. Gail, Obss. Granim. p. 31. seq. y
IX. ^.) With a flative case, e-n\ signifies, in the power of: tuiv
ovrtiiv nr fJiey ecrriy i(j/ yfi'ty, to. b' ovk t^' i]fi2y : Epict. c. 1. CTrt roTs
papf^c'ipois yeyecrOai riiv iroKiy/' Zosim. v. ^>/ trri ^avreaiv e'irjs,
Xen. Cyr<Jp. i. p. 25. I. 32. elfti be eni r^ povXofxeyf, at the
mercy oj every one: Plat. Gorg. p. 50S. 1. 29. In tliis sense it is
elegantly joined with ivoieiv '. ihv 6' knl tm bt'i/jo) Tron'jawni t))v npoai-
peaiy, but if they put the choice in the power of the people : Dion.
Hal. iv. p. 2l6. I. 22. Trav-a to. KOiya eV i/jiol â– jreirou'iKum fn'ivi^, Itl.
viii, p. 506. I. 22. ov fxtjv oye bijijos e^' eavTu) Tijy a'lpeaiv eTruirjerey,
assumed to themselves : Id. ii. p. lip. But otrov y en-i KXeo/cparei,
is, as far as concerns Cleocrates: ^Eschin. Ep. v. to en'i tovtois
€~ivai, as far as they are concerned : see Maikland. ad Lys. p. 482.
ed. Reisk. And it also denotes supernitendence ; over: TrapaboQivTes
7w tTTt Tu opvyfiuTi, Diuarch. adv. Deniosth. p. 100. 1. 19-
X. (XI.) It is used in expressing terms or conditions: mrorbas
iiyofiev ctti prjro'is, upon certain and definite conditions: Andocid.
26, l6. cTTt prjTols TitTi Kal biioptcrfxeyois eni to Kiybvyevfxa -^^wpe'iy, Dion.
Hal. X. p. 641. 1. 18. V. Theocr. xxii, 74. Ind. Demosth. Reisk.
et H. Vales. Emend, iv. c. 3. The following are examples of IttI
thus used in various constructions : o'l be etpanav cnrobwaeit', k<p w
ju?) Kaietv rits Kut/^as : on condition that he would not burn the vil-
lages : Xen. Anab. iv. KOTanpoboyTos tus re yefvpns, koI tuWci twv
AlyvwTibjy Trpayfjarn, iff d yeyecOai i/Trapj^os AiyvnTOV, on condition
of being appointed, &c. Photius Exc. Ctes. v. Aristoph. Pint.
1142.(1141.) and with re: avTw — airoaTokijaeadai — i^vas e'lKoai — ,
l<f (^ re (Sorjdrjaeiy to'is 'AfK^iaaevaiv, iEsch. c. Ctes. 505. ypivra eni
Tiaiy ay i^vjjf.ta'yos ytvoiTo ; 6 ^e atreKplvuTO, kff w re tovs TroXiras cAew-
depovs Kui avToyo/jovs e^v : Xen. Hist. Gr. iii. ewt tovtois f.<p-q
'^apu'iadai tus ayanavXas Tuiy TroXt/uwt*, c^' jJ re fXTjbev en irapaKivelv
uvTovs, Ka\ evrl r^, &c. Dion. Hal. x. p. 645. I. 15. aicovaaTe vvy, €<f
on ay TTore biKuiots K'araXvtrw/iat tov iroXefioy, on ivhat terms — , Id. iii.
p. 195. 1. 16. Tijy eipi'iyrjy OTeplpvaiy, e(f o'ls ay ttote biKaiois avTTJs
TvxiiXTi: on whatsoever terms, &c. lb. v. Andoc. 25. 1. ttoXXcikis 6
Aapelos e'nrey, ovk ay edeXfiaai Xa(3elv cKaToy HaftvXu/yas C7rt rw yu?)
ZwTrvpoy €)(eiy oXfJ/cXijpov : on the terms OX condition of not having,
&C. Plut. Apoplith. Aioykvr]y Treidei — atpieyai to. -^upia eiti TaXavTots
TreyTi'iKorra Kai eKaToy, for a hundred and fifty talents: Pans, in
Cor. p. 100. TTayTodev tovs cttJ Xoyois Sofc/yuwrarous cttI avyTU^etny
oiiK evKaraippoyiiTois KoXwy, at no contemptible appointments or sala-
ries : Herodian i, 2. <caivas fjboyhs eirl fieyiarois fiiaQo'is edi]pdro,
with offers of very great rewards: Id. i, 3. tovs (j)vydbas bk avrwv
KUTieyai e;rJ toIs iifxiaeGi TtLy TTOTe oyTwy, otc e^vyoy, on the terms of
having half what they possessed when they were banished: Arr, Exp.
Al. ii, 1.
* See Thuc. iii. c. 12. p. 390. ed. Bekk. and nole s p. 228. — J. S.
238 'Eff«, [Chap, ix. § iv.
XI. (XII.) It is nsod in plirases importing good or bad fortune,
advantage or disadvantage, and the like ; as, tir aynOy, or alala,
Tvxii, with good fortune ; may fortiint prosper it ! (but in this phrase
the preposition is sometimes omitted : aya6tj ri/x|; ?//iie7$ de imrels
yeroliieOn, Xen. C}rop. iv. p. 110. '"I'XJ? uyadij caropi^erw^at^pos,
Plat, in Symp.) en-' ayado'n, or alaiois, oiwroTs : with favorable
omens ; t-i rw a^erepb) (JVfKjyepovTi rh bUaia Trpa^oviri, t^, or with,
their own advantage : Dion. Halic. vii. p. 435. to. e^Kpatij tov arbpus
€pyu tTr' ovbevi ^prjaru} yefopeva bielijeaay, for no good: Id. viii.
J). 544. I. 34. But ctt' ayndols, witliout a substantive, is, with com-
mendation, for praise : eni tihs jSeXTtaTOis nvrQv tfivTjfiot'fvaev e^eni-
Tijbes, with the highest eulogies : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 443.
XII. (XIII.) 'EttJ signifies after: eni tovtois, after these things,
afterwards ; iJKei ris liWos ct' aXXw, one after aiiothcr ; Trals ctt'
arbpl, Kal ayi)p o:ttI Tratbi : Syiies. ep. iv. 7>)v b' eni Tcaaais T€Taynei'T]V
(iTviJifiopiay viz.) us X6')(^os, v tujv aTropmv {cTrel^€v),the one ranked after
all : Dion. Hal. iv. p. 223. 1. 6. eTri -naai be KXavS/w Map/cfiAXw,
last of all : Pint. Ronud. p. 27. 1.33. ol eirl Trdai, the rearward:
Xen. II. Gr. i. p. 432. 'Ajuicwc/js oi/cen yreffx^Ero fiXeTreiv nvris
eni TvtpXw 7-w Aaybcijiibi, after that Dandamis had become blind:
Lucian, Tox. [p. 88. c. ed. Salmur. There is an obscure signification
of terms or conditions ; and I think the passage referable to R. 10.
(11.)] rjj knX TcivTTjcri, the following day: Herodot. Er. 12. See
Hebr. ix, 17. Mark vi, 52.' Also, besides, over and above, in
addition : virorj-^ofieyos abeX(bi)y Itivrov bilxrety, Km â– ^py'j/jara kir avT^'.
Time, ii, 101. TrapelJaXev a^(ipoaiav re, Kal ctt' avTrj reKTup
en-urifre, Plato in Pliaedr. p. 247. '•at npos, tnl tovtois, Aristoph.
Pint. 1002.
XIII. (XIV.) Also, on account of, because of : lirl rois yeyev-qfihon
yttXeiTuis <pepeiv. €£,e[3tiXes av ^A.p-^ivov ec 7>}s ttoXcws ctti irpoboatc},
Dinarch. in Demosth.-' vfiCjv /.arey/rwaKov tTri rw fieXXeiv TreiOerrHai,
I thought you guilty of being about to, &:c. Demostli. de Cor.
enl TO)be, therefore: Arr. Exp. Al. i, 12. ii,*8. eirl rw yeXas,
wherefore, on account of what? Aristoph. Av. 804. v. Plat. So{)h.
p. 105.
Signifying the end or purpose: fii) Urai enl -^wpav r>)»' (^amXews
eirJ Ka/.w /jtiberl, Tli''.c. viii, 58. errl toIs rotoiirois aTv^iijuaffi Knl
KOKo'ts I'nraaciv eTreXrjXvOws ti)v otKnvfxeyrjy, Dinarch. C Deinoslh.
[p. 10. I. 9- cd. Reisk.]* ol <peuy€t to kukws ciKoixrat Kal eiTvely enl tm
fteXTibjy yeveadai. Pint, de Profect. Virt.
It has a peculiar signification of state, adjuncts, or circumstances,
* Iloogeveen gives M this same sense J. S.
in in avToh eipTj/fdros, Lys. Or. Funi-br. J A6^av /juv tx""'''''^ *""' o.vdpla, Dc-
(j). 51. 1. 2. eii. Keisk.) so as to make mostli. adv. Phil. Epist. 155, 4. ed. R. —
the words mean, ulio have spoken in J. S.
theiv praise after their death: butlleiske, * In tliis passage of Dinarclnis I take
very propurlv 1 think, interi)r(Hs eVhimply eVl to n\cn\), ivilh, accompanied by. Sec
de. Sec ]J. Sttjili. Thos. i. 1212. f. and the context, and II. Stepli. Thes. i. 1212.
Thuc. ii, ;n. p. 207. I. 1. ed. lUkk.— f. g.— J. S.
Rule 11—17.] 'I^t/. 239
in « liicli it may be rendered by the participle having, or havins; :
Siji' cTri iraicru', to live having children ; cpeuyeiv inl reKi'ots, to go
into exile, leaving children behind; eirl Traitji vearUus hiabv-^^^ois
uyeiruvrrqTo, he died leaving sons, &c. Herod ian iii. extrein. /3a«7t-
Xtwi' Tous tnl biabi'j-^ois ttciigI reXevr/'/ffarras, those of their emperors
ivho may have died leaving children to succeed them: Id. iv. init.
V. Horn. 11. e, 154. Bergi. ad Alciphr. ji. 18. seq. Henist, ad Lucian.
t. i. p. 355. seq. Leniiep. ad Flial. p. 304.
XIV. (XV.) 'Ett* governs a dative of a person after wiiom another
person/ or thing, is named ; or a dative of oio/m followed by a
genitive of the person from whom the name is taken : 'Welaibpeiav
— r?/f ETr' WXelaibpco KTiaDelaav ttoXiv, Ilerodian iv. c. S. en dvofiarL
Tou aytov A.aCapov xciuv tbelfiaro trepou, Zonaras. ecaXowv ahroi' t'Trt
rJ oi'Ofxari Tuv irarpos avruu Zn-)^npiav, Luke i, '3^, v. Esdr. iv, 63.
Eccles. xlvii, 13. 1 Maccab. xiv, 43. Hence in the N. T. eirl rJ
ovo^ari fiov, in mif name: v. Mark ix, 39. Luke ix, 48. 49. xxiv, 47.
Acts Ap. V, 40.
'ETTt sometimes sii^nifies the time at or in which any thing takes
place or is done ; as, en-l rovrw, sur cela, sur or en ces entrefaites :
V. John iv, 27. but eirt rovrto is sometimes, after this: uXXa to
eTTi Tovru) UTTOKpivai, Plato Apol. 11. vvv heil^aru) ki:\ tu) efu(p vbari,
in the time allowed me for speaking: (determined by the water in the
clepsydra,) Denioslh. de Cor. p. 333. I. l*^. lireibij be eiri tu'is ypofx-
fiaaiy ^jv, but ivhen he came to speak about letters: Plato Phiedr.
p. 274. 1. 44. Sometimes evrt signifies, in the case or circumstances :
TwvTo eTTolrjae to cfri eirl ttj tivyaTpi, he did the same as in the case of
his daughter : Herodot. iii, 14.
XV. (XVI.) 'Ett* notes particular condition or circumstances, in
such phrases as, tn-' a^j/Xw, at an uncertainty ; [see Rule 11. (12.)]
vvv 6' eTr' abl]Kois oiiat ro7s arro toxituv tfxavr^ yeyrjaofiivois, ofiajs eni
T(^ avvoiaeiy vfxlv, eav vpa^r)Te rnSro, ireTre'irjdai, Xeyeiv aipovp.ai :
Demostii. Phil. i. [55, 3. ed. R. kir abiiXois ovai Toli — yevriao^evois is
equivalent to kcutoi ubijXmv (jvtu)V tojv — yer-qtropeviov, — •.]
XVI. (XVII.) In the mention of time, ctt* notes the totality of the
portion of time signified by its case : Itp" yifxepa, for a whole day ;
iwi fxt]yi,for a ivhole month; ctt' eviuvT(o,for a whole year.
It sigiiities (especially in Thuc.) near or at : YlfpiiroXiov alpovaiy,
V ijy iiTL rJ "AXrjct voTa^S : Tliuc. iii, QCf, p. 240. y tjrl AocpoTs
Tols '07rovrr/o(s yijnos. Id. ii, 32.
XVII. (XVIII.) 'Etti sometimes signifies fljSrainif : "' ayiipTraaro ay,
' 'AuTiyufq) Tolvvv Zvo'v vlolv iK ^Tpa- Anab. vii, 7,23. compared wltli vii, fi, 13.
tovIktis rfjs Ko^paiov yeuujxevuy, rhv fity, xp-!]fji.aTa, ouroi n\v exoutrj;' € <J)' vjxlv, De-
iirX r a.^(\(\)^ {uftcr\\\s h:Qi\\ex) i^i)fji-)]r pi- mostli. de Fals. Leg. p. 405. 1. 10. erf.
01', to;/ 5', eiTt T^ iraTpl, («//(■»• his father) Reisk. tiVos 'iveKa airXCos kcu. koj-uStj
^iKiinruy wuSftacrev: Plut. in Deinetr. Terv<pti)p.ivciis outoos, & PovAerai Siairpd-
p. 1G30. I. (i. 7. ed. II. St. — J. S. ^arrdai, avWd^ocp-ev avrcp, Kol ravTa i(pi'
"' Uphs Tavra K\(uy Kal TraKap.a.aQui, i]ffiv uura ; and Ihut too when Ids enier-
Koi -nav f-n e/xol TinTaivtaQai : against prises are against ourselves, tend to our
me: Aristoph. Ach. CGO. iyco ex*" â– fapct own detrimeiit : Dcuiosth. c. Aristocr.
GOV €7ri ToTs- (TTpaTidTais ov^iv, Xeu, j). 005. 1. 15. ed. lleisk. See also p. 723.
240 'Eiri. [Chap. ix. § iv.
iir' uvTw Tiftepiov ipnvuii'Tos : Tiberius thirsting for his blood : from
^or^v, to he eager for slaughter : Philo de Lej^at. ad Caium p. 774.
1. 32. €Keli'Ov be airayopfvopros, icaJ roXairrt et^ciTov eiriKrjpu^avTOs
avTidi and having proclaimed a reward of a hundred talents to any
one who should hill him : Pint, in Poinj), p. 636."
XVIII. (XIX.) With an accusative case evrt is used whenever
motion to is sigiiifieil ; and in the sense of as far as, or quite to ;
and also against ; as, eTreipdro revs 'Adrivalovs tT/s kn avrhv dpyfjs
napaXveiv, Thuc, ii, 65.
More seldom in the signification of rest ; as, i:u6i$eadai eirl riiv ka-
riav, Thuc. i."
XIX. (XX.) Witli a reciprocal pronoun and 7rote7(70ai it signifies
to get i?lto one's power ; as, 7>)i' troXiv l(f eavroy Trno'iaaadai. Some-
times the verb governs the reciprocal pronoun, and errl the accusative
of what is gotten or attained ; as, noirjcrctfjieyos re avroy eir' e^ovcriar,
Herodian i. c. 9
XX. (XXI.) KXit'eiv, (TTpe(petv, eTri(TTpe<p€iv, TTepia-rr^v, ctti hopv, is to
turn to the right, because the spear was held in the right hand :
e<^' iivlav ?.nd ctt' atrnlba, to the left, the left hand holding the reins
and the shield : tTricTTpexpas eni hopv, koi tu Kiy-pa Trpoa/BaXwr rols
iinrois, els irXaylovs efjpdWet: Dion. Halic. iii. p. 190. 1. 13. V/aai'
^e Kiyr}(T€is, — /cafl' tTrjroj' fier, icXiaeis i(f ^liay, Kai ttciXiv ent bopv :
Polvb.
XXI. (XXII.) 'Etti TToba uva^a^eoQai, and aya-^iopelv, is, tO give
ground, to retreat : tiW eirl Troba a.ye-^^a.d.oyTn, Traioyres cai iraivfle-
voi: Xen. Cyrop. vii. p. I78. cTri tto^u aye')(^bjpr](Tay jiaWvfieyoi, Id.
Anab. v. p. 349. /ua\a irieiofieyoi, ujej^w/^/jfrai' cTrt Truba'. Id. H.
Gr. ii. p. 477.
'Ert moreover signifies end or purpose : t/'/cw It aura raura, Plato
Theag. p. 1 22.?*
To eni is, as to what regards, as far as concerns: rovw e/u' evrv-
X''tre, Eurip. Iph. A. 1557. v. Hec. 514. Ale. 666. (669.) Valck. ad
Herodot. p. 342.
'E^' eya Terayfjevoi, ranked side by side, without any others
behind : Hesych. in oyjios.
I. 4. €V iiJ.o\ is the trae reading in amount of cost or expense: rriv irpulKa
Aristoph. Av. 543. See Classical Journal, d<pelKiLV in iy^ta ufioXo'is, at the rale of
vol. ii. No. 4. p. 710. and the note on nhie oboli a month for each mina : De-
Aristoph. Av. 543. in p. IGfi. of Bekker's niosth. in Aphob. i. p. 818. I. 29. ed.
edit, printed for Mr. Priestley, 182C. — Reisk. v. p. 820. 1. 21. Hence figu-
J. S. rativtly, %v (elpi)vriv viz.) — 5e'5oiKa /n^
" Add, tliat iirl with a dative signifies XeX-qdafiey, Sxrvep of Savet^S/xevot, M
in, 'ir nt : ijKriKSri'yap, ds 'A9r)va7oi iroTe irdWii) (undersl. t(Jk^) dyuvra, Domosth.
SiKcicTotev iirl Ta7s oikiokti tos 5i'kos : Aris- de Fals. Leg. 372, 1. at n great sacrifice,
toph. Vesp. 801. also to: 4irl rovrcp to our great loss and iletriment : see 303,
ovTw Trapeo-KfvacTfxeyos rjfi, Siinf, &c. Xe- 1. 13, 20. 22. ed. Reisk. — J. S.
nopli. Mem. i,3, 5. v! Ernest, ad Xen. « KoSiJ" M Kdn-qv, lo or at the oar:
JMem. iii, 2, 3. Also the instrument ; or Aristoph. Ran. 1<)7. 'i^u i-rrl Kann]v, upon
the means ; or the manner ; with: omia tiie oar (by a wilful mistake of the order :)
AeuKo /Sobs hoKiri i-n\ rtx^V f"0(Tl(jas ib. I'JO. — J . S.
KaT(dr]Ke, llesiod, Theog. .540. It is used ?' 'EttI ri trdpeare Sivpo ; Aristoph. Lys.
ia specifying the rate of interest, or 1101. — J. S.
Rule 18—21.] 'Ett/. 241
It is used in denoting duration of time : ibi^ovr Tt)y yrjv eiri bvo
ri^tepas, for two days:'' Tliuc. ii, c. 35, f36eioy yuXa Trivirtj tTri
rearjaptiKot'Ta ^^^ipus, Hippocr. de Nat. Mul. p. 368. cf. Acts Ap.
xiii, 31. xvii, 2. xviii, 20. xix, 10. Luke iv, 25. e^' rifiepav yap Ik
Tijs cirw TToXeujs i'^oQvTo (criVw viz.) for each day as it came, for the
present day only, and no more : Tliuc. iv, by. tn-t -x^poiov, for some
time, for a while: Honi. II. ft, 299- Luke xviii, 4. et/»' ouov, so long
as. [In the passage of Thuc. i, 4. ktf oaov iihvvaro seems to mean,
as far as he was able ; p. (), 1. 2. ed. Bekk.] and with -^pupov, ecp'
i'mov ^purnv, Galat. iv, 1. Rom. vii, 1. 1 Cor. vii, 39- knl i: i>Kv , for
a long time ; kir oXiyov uyncr-^oyTes, for a little while : Herodian iii,
7. But cttJ ttoXv siLrnifies very much in Epict. and sometimes also
veheme?itty, sharply ; and generally, summarily; as, ws he anXiLs
e'nreh', Kut fu)) cud' eKairroy aX\' (Ls e^rt iroXv : Isocr. Paneg. p. 421.
Like eni iroXv is ewi fjeya, vehemently : Kareaeiadri to reTxos int /ieya,
Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 33. [pel-bap's, to a considerable extent.] See also
c. 33. cTTt wXeo J', further : enl trXcov be ovk ukiikou, Plato Phaedr.
p. 261. {eni irXeov, ob ampliorcm fructum : Aristot. Poiit. viii, 5, 20.
e7r! fjiKpov, ib. 31. Reizius.) Ttepl }iev ouv Tfjs AaKehaifjoviuiy iroXiTeias
€7ri ToaovToy eipijoBu), SO far : Aristot. de Rep. ii, ()•'
In composition eiri signifies — 1. hostility, against ; as in eTriTpe-^^eip
yoipav, Polyb. iii, 69- lirnpipeiy rirX â– troXpj.iot', Id. xiii, 18. eirireix^-
£fii', Demosth. see Pteiske's ind. eKoiicobofieli', Pol\b. ii, 46. eirtp-
pT)Toi, of bad name or character ; q. d. spoken against. — 2. succession,
subsequence; as in eniyovoi, Polyb. v, 65. iTriyiyyofieyot, descend-
ants, posterity : Demoslh. p. 689. [1. 16. ed. Reisk.] Plat. Phjedr.
p. 245. I. 5. 01 iniyiyvofxeyoi tuvtu> cro^torat, tcho succeeded him:
Herodot. Eut. c. 49. rod kiriyiyvofxivov Qepovs, the following summer :
Thuc. iv. iiiit. r/] kiriyiyvofiirri tif-iept^, the following day: Id. iii,
75. l-n-ntXe'iiv, Polyb, i, 50. ^aXay^ eKuXXr]Xos, Id, ii, 69- cf. ctti-
yeyrrifjnTiKoy in Ciav. Cicer. Ern. — 3. approach, accession, to; as iti
iTri(Trpe<peadai els x^pas, Xen. (Ec. iv, 13, eizepyeaBai Hi t))v ftuvXijv,
Polyb. Exc. Leg. 65. emcpoiT^y rivi, iEI. V, H. iii, 18. — 4, addition
or adjection, over and above ; as in eiribtbuyai, Horn. II. t, 148. ext-
fxerpely, Pol>b. iii, II9. €iTi(T-)(yeLy, Xen. QEc. xi, 13. eiriK-riTni
<pi\oi. Id. Aijes. i, 36. eTre^afxdpTctveiy, Deniosth. p. 1215, 25. [not
there, in Reiske's edition, but (:7rei,afiapTT]reoy is in Demosth. in
Androt. p. 595, 10. ed. Reisk.] eTrwi'Vfiia, e7rtA.ptr/';s, PoKb. iv, 3.
5. motion to a place, to, into ; as in eiriareXXeiy Trpos riya, iElian
xiv, 1. ein(7Kr]yovy errl rt)y lUKuxy, Polyb. iv, 18. en-nyeiv, eTriTre/u-
Tretv, €7nbr]fj€lr. — 6. elevation or ascent, up, upon ; as in Lni(iaiyeiv
eiri -iy Unov, ;Eschiii. Dial, i, 4. v. Dorv. ad Cliar. p. 172. 443.
1 But in the following passage iirl 5uo •■Acid tVi T6Kov,at interest: Zavwri-
Tjnepai is, al two dai/s' notice ; appnintirig fxevos iyii apyyptoy -rrapa. XatpeSripov rov
the lime to be after two days: iiceXivev ava(p\v(rriov -TrevTeKaiSeKa pvas imrSKoy,
elffayyiWeiv pe, nal rovs irpi/TCiveis Trpo- is ervx^v tov iv 'S.riarcp, iirdySoov : De-
ypd(petu o.\)Tcf) tV Kplaiv iitl 5uo rjpfpus, inostli. adr. Polycl. 1212, 1. ed. Reisk.
(is aSiKovvTi, &c. Demoslh. adv. Luerg. ul eight obolt vf mo7iilUy interest for encli
at Mnebib. p. 1151. 1, 2U. ed. Ki-isk. — miiia: i. e. according to our way of reck-
J. S. oning, at sixteen per cent. — J. S.
Vigcr. 2 H
242 Kara. [ChAP. IX. § 5.
IniwoXaieiv, Xen. (Ec. xvi, 14. — 7. abode or commorancy; as in
eTziyeios, iitiyu)piu%. — 8. the efficient cause ; as in cTrtSdiaros, ktnSihmos,
Xen. Mem. i, 2, 57- eiriy^npi. Id. Hier. ix, 4.-9. //ai^f, subject,
exposed; as in kiriipQovos, Xen. Symp. iii, 9- ^nainos, kitihiKos,
Demosth. p. 1074, 1. [ed. Reisk.] iwiKiviwos, Polyb. x, 13. — 10.
aptitude, fitness, suitableness; as in enlyafins, Dtmostli. 1009> 4.
[1009, 14. ed. R.] inUatpos, Id. 234, 14. [ed. R.] — 11. coercion,
restraint; as in en-excfv. — 12. continuance or duration of time ; as
in e<pr]fiepios, continuing for one day only; €(pr)fiepa, ephemeral ani-
mals ; eTrereins, Polyb. vi, 43. Demosth. p. 649, I6. — 13. vicinity,
juxtaposition ; as in €7ri6aXa(T<Tia ywpia, Time, iii, 7« eipebpos. — 14.
distribution ; as in embeKaros, Demosth. p. 1074, 24. iiroyboos, Id.
1212, 2. (see p. 30. n". 10.) — 15. superintendence, charge, admi-
nistration; as in kiriuKOTTOi 1(). It intends or augments, as in en-jSt-
horai, eniopKelv, eiraKoveiv, eirnrodelf : Rom. i, 1 1. On ckI in compo-
sition see Cattier. Gazopii. p. 77.
SECTION V. — On the prepositions kotq, fJiera, and avy.
Rule I. Kara, whicli is constrned only with a genitive and ac-
cusative, has, witli a genitive, the following senses : at, in the signi-
fication of direction or collineation ; as, rwv ro^evrwv e$ awfiara
€Trifxi)Kr) Ka\ iroppinOey, <jjs Kara cncoirov {as at a mark) rolevoyrujv '.
Ilerodian vi. c. 7. § I9. at, in signification of position or situation;
as, 'iva Kara vuurcv yet ofieroi rutv Tro\efjlu)P, eniitxnv avTois, at their
hacks, behind them: Dion. Hal. iii. p. l65. I. 14. on, m specification
of a particular part ; as, Kara Kuppijs iraieir, — Kara rwrov ^aireiv
711 a.
It notes the subject of appellation or denomination : Kad' iSv
Ktlrai TCI orofiara, ra Trep'i T))y avti'ideiap ov -eTpijj.fxha, Clem. Al.
Paedag. ii, 6.
It signifies against, in the signification of harm, or hostility ; as,
Kara rttos etne'ti' TuXrjdes, Dinarch. Or. p. 6. boy^a et(T(}>€peiP Kara
TTJs vfierepas ttoXcws, ^sch. c. Ctts. p. 507. [L 8. ed. R.] V. De-
mosth. adv. Aristocr. p. 646". [I. 4. ed. R.] Lycnrg. adv. Leocr. p.
233. [I. 14. ed. R.] Dinarch. p. 71. [I. 5. ed. R.] of, concerning ;
noting the subject : iroXiis enauos yi- Kara t>)s iifierepas iroXewi, iEscli.
c. Ctes. p. 515. [1. 16. ed. R.] o i>ai /leyitrToy eerri Kad' vfiwv
eyKwf^uor, Demosth. Phil. ii. p. CS. [t. 2. ed. R.] — 3. down, from :
fti} be Kar' OvXiifii^oto Kapijioir, 11. /5, 167- by, along, through: Kara
riji KXtfiaKos Karafiaiveiv, L)S. de Eratostli. cit'd. p. 13. [I. 3. ed. R.]
Ka& <iXr)i 7y]s'hivbaius, Acts Ap. ix, 31.' during, for, through : ovbk
kn oXlyov y^poi'ov, aXXa — Kara nai'TO!, rov atu/yos aeifiyrjafroy KaTaXei\p€i
Tols iniyiyyofierois Ti)y Kpiaiy, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 140. [I. 8. ed.
R.] by, in swearing: emndeyai Triariy Kara r<iv lepiov, lsa?us de
Apollod. Her. p. l6\9, I70. [ed. R.] Kara rw*' Upwy reXeluiy !>f^i6aai,
Andocid. p. 48. [I. 8. cd. R.] utOpivnoi Kara rov jjei^oyos ojiyvovai,
* UXuwv t\ Karii xOofhs &pp.(vos tin, Ilesiod, Op, et D. ii, 236. — .'. S.
Rule 1—4.] Kara. 243
Hebr. vi, 6. See Reiske's iiitl. fo Domostli. [in caro, p. 433. I. 5.]'
S()bicra1«'S ap. Scliol. Aristopli, ad Av, 5'21." An expression belong-
ing to lllis class is, ev'^eirdat deals Kcid' eKaru fifths," to VOW a hecatomb
to the gods: v. Huscliii. in Anal. p. 133. under, beneath : bvtai
Kara Tijs yT/y, Plato Pliicd. c. 60, 61."
II. As to Kara with an accusative, it is to be ob.served, first, that it
is very often understood ; as in to y tXcix'^roj', at the least ; airiov
rponov, like food : Plat. Pbaedr. p. 241. I. 30. evhaifiwy, w Swi-parer,
atQpwTTos fl, TO. ye Toiavra, as to such mutters: I.ucian, Dial. Mort.
t. iv. p. 44. TO p-euov Tf/s //juepoj, in the middle of the day : Theoplir.
V. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 58.
III. In pliilosopliical writings clii< fly, things which exist only in
appearance, as the rainbow, are called to. kot 'ef.i(pnaiv : those which
have a real and substantial exi>tt nee, ra koO' vTroaTaiTiy.
Kara is, as, according to, after: lerai koto, tovs aWovs, in the
same ivay : Herodot. ix, 53. according to, in respect of, on account
of, in signification of the cause : rofiiiovTes rijv 'ilpioiziav 'Adtp'aiwy,
/Cora TO VTTtjKoov, e'tt'ai : TIlUC. iv, pj)* '^'*'"' avro tovto ovk i'lya/uai
TluiXor, in, in regari to: Plat. Gorg. p. 48'2. v. Matth. xix, 3. and
Kypk. Obs. sac. ad 1. c.-' on account of, in signification of the end,
purpose, or object : cKpi^oirai be kutu Oeay eirl toutovs ttoWoI rujf
^efwy, Dion. Hal. viii. p. 482. 1. 27. d ^e ^eyoi kuI 6 aWos cI^^Xos
KOTO, deay >/i>e»', Thuc. vi, 31. rioy e/jTrapwv icnO' laroniav )) j^petav
etTa^(cioU(Ue»'u)i' : Aristid. Panath. i)\des he Kara ti ; Aristoph.
Nub. '238. [Answ. /3ovXc!;ufj^o$ gadfly Xeyeiy.] Kara ipnrns (as arct
KpriTos) [see § i. R. 3.] is, bi/ force, violently, imperiously , ivith a high
hand: Ka\ oaoi SiKf-Xwv Kara Kpuros ap-<^6i.tei'0i vtto ^vpuKovaiwy, Thuc.
iii. See Plut. Apophtli. p. I/O'. In the same sense Kara to k^purepoy,
powerfully , mightily : Acts xix, 20.
IV. It signifies, towards, over against, facing ; as, Ke'iaOai kut
ayaroXas.
Also, by, or every : Kara TroXeis caJ Kara Kwfias, Kar avbpa. caret
KfcpnXi'iy. eicdarovs Kara aiofia, individually : JEscU. c. Ctes. p. 405.
urara fifira, every month : kut' ?]fxnp. Soph. Phil. 798. Kurip. Bacch.
898. Tro. 392. KoB' huepay. Soph. Kl. ^99- v, VaUk. a<l Herodot.
p. .589. Kara I'ofxovs, in every district or prefecture: Valck. ad
Herodot. p. 311. ue\ cara iroXefioy eya/uei, in every war: Athen.
xiii. p. 557. V. Mattli. xxvii, 15. Mark xv, 6".
KaO' eavTov (as e^' kavTov and trpos eavrov) is, separately, apart,
' See note J, p. 93. and Toup. ad Long. euxV iroiri(ra(r9ai X'M'^P««"'> Ariitopli.
$ xvi.— J. S. Eq. 6G0.— J. S.
" Viz. opKOus TToie'icrOai Kara rwu BfZv, "" Add Kara, in respect of : KaOi^a 5e
p. 80. Bekkei's edition, printed for iMr. rbc arpaThv — it/ rSncj) Kara roi^ oScoy
Priestley, in 1826. In the Schol. 2u)- SpKrTaTre^uKjrt— : riut.inLucull. p.908.
KpaTT]^ yap iv toJ i3 tSiv KprjTiKwu, 1. 29. ed. H.St. — J. S.
wrongly. We know from Atlienrcus, b. vi. * 'HA0ev (eis deovs 6 Kavdapos) Kar' eX'
that Sosicrates wrote on Cretan ad'airs. — 0pau airov, Aristoph. Pac. 133. Prax.
J.S. fiaKapia y' &p' 7; ttoAis etrTOt To\onr6y.
^ Hd^aTO ro7s 0eo7s Kara kKar6ixfir]<i, IMcp. Kara t i; Prax. -noWuiv ovviKa.
Plut. in Mario p. 768. 1.12. ed. H. St. Aristoph. Eccl. 559. Kara rijv Kviaaav
Tjj 8' 'hypojtpa KRTo x'^'*" "■appVeaa eiVe\^\u8e, Id. Pac. 1059. — J. S.
244 Kara. [Cl^AP. IX. § v.
alone, to or by himself ; as, ».aO' iavror Cijy. oi/hets yap eXoir av «,«0*
avTuv TTcivT exetv,^ Aristot. Eth. ix. Hence to Kaff avro in j)hiK)so-
pliicai writings, that which is in one co-lain thing alone, and as
alone: Aristot. avrvs ka(j' tavrov eleirXevae, alone: Piul. in Cic.
|). 880. 1. 47' expressed by Kar Ibiav in Mattli, xiv, 20. ovk eoTi
TovTwi' uvTu Knd" aiJTo {of itself, in itself,) caXov ovbep, Plat. Symp.
p. 181. and in tlie .same sense, ov yap /.lofov j/^c7$ to kuO' auras
w<l>e\ovaiv (ij re (Twtppoavrr) Kai »/ biKaiouvvr), viz.) Isocr. Nicocl. p. 63.
KnO' ijijvyjuv is, at leisure, taking time : 'lliuc. i, 85.
V. Kara [xiKpov eTTi-irXeloi' is, more and more : Kara /.iik-pov T/rrov,
less and less. Tl)ese expressions are equivalent to eimrXeloi' iipeifjs or
€K irpoffaywyTis, and ^ttov or eAa-ror ec irpoirayioyijs, or ctt' e\a-TOV
ecpe^Fjs. But ^ora fnKphv alone is, by little and little; by degrees:
KUTCi (T^iKpuy olol re eTriXajSeaOai ttt] Tupbpos eafxev, Plat. Soph. p. 241.
wiiich is expressed by kcito. fipn-^^y also : ayanrjueis, eav tttj kqi cara
(opay^i) TTopaCTTao-wjueSa ovrojs la)(ypov \6yov : Id. ib. But sometimes
Karci fipax^ •». *« « s?nall degree or proportion : as, -navTes oaoi Ka\
KUTci fipo-xv atjjipponvvrjs ^ie-e-)(Qvaiv, Id. in Timseo p. 27. I. 22.
It is used adverbially witli other accusatives ; as, Kara ^a•)^os,
quickly, Tiiuc. iii, 18. Kara f^epos, in turn : see Ch. m. § vii. R. 2.
Kara Tpoirov, regularly, "properly : Plat.
Kara aTulyoi- is, in a straight row ; to which is opposed e»aXXo^,
alternately, [after the manner of a quincunx. See the word and
iigure in Gesner's Thesaurus.] 7rapnXAa£, in irregular series.*
VI. Kara iroba or -Trobas, or KUTanobas, is the same as €K .Tobos
(which however is sometimes, close, with foot set to foot, [or, as we
say, hand to hand,]" i. e. on the track or footsteps ;) as, icara -n-obas
alpe'iv, to take by folloiving ; Kara Tcobas avrCov Urai, Thuc. Hence
figuratively, r^ be KaTcnrobas iifxeprj, on the next day: Herodot. iii.
and Tij KciTcnrobas yf.i€pr^, Polyb. ii. p. ^\. (cara Trobat rijs fict^rfs
TrpoeXdelf, immediately after the battle.
VII. With words of number Kara has the following senses: jco0'
eva, Kad' ei', er Kafl' ey, severally, individxially , one by one ; ol Kud'
eya, JFA. V. H. ii, 1. So ot Kud' enatjToy. ev kciO' ef udpoifras oareor,
Lucd. Epigr. 2. Trpos be TOVTois, t'lXXas rpuipeis TrXeor ») f'lKofJtv (l\e,
Kara fjiav nal kcito. bvo Xanfiavwv, one at a time, and tivo at a time:
Demosth. c. Lept. p. 371' ft be 'A.Oqi'u'ioi Kara fjtnv ravi' Teray/^tepoi
•n-epieTrXeriy uvtovs kikcXw, 171 a singh line, one ship following another:
Thuc. ii, 84. 6 Kad' eJs for tis t'fcatrros, eve7'y one: l\om. xii, 5.
els tcaQ' eh, one by one: John viii, 9- Sometimes in one word
Kude'is. KaO' els for kud' era is numbered among solecisms bv Lucian
in Soloec. t. i. p. 577- e^'- Amsf. Sometimes Kud" eva and *.o0' ev
V KoAws, iri)) kot' i/iavTlv, kov ixiff oi'5' fx"""'"' evOeias Sio'Sous tov i/5otoj es
fr4pov \i)^^op.ai (rhv p.ioGhv viz.) Aiis- rh â– ire\ayos : Tliuc. ii, 102. p. 378. 1. 11.
toph. Vt-sp. 7H0.— J. S. ed. Bekk.— J. S.
' T6 re yap piv^o. (of tlie Aciielous) " '1 he French phrase pud it pied, by
iari fxiya koi ttoAu koI OoKipliv, a" re yi\(Toi which Viger explains collato pede, appears
■nvKval, Kal a\\{]\ais TrjS xpocrx«c-€Ci)$ Tiji to me to be rattier ciiuivaient to pedi'tcn-
^7j ffKeBdi/vvcrOat avvSenfJioi ylyvovrai, wa- tiiity cauliouslij, gradually, gingerly. —
paWh,^ K(ti ov Kara. (ttoIxuv Ktipava.^, J.S.
Rule 5 — 8.] Kara. 245
have a signification exactly opposite to (hat mentioned above,
namely, togelhtr : koQ' iva airavres yevo^evot, Dion. H<ti. i. p. 37.
1. 21. iVn fjt) Kad' €va nat'T€s yeroi-iei'oi, KOivhv e^eyeyicTjre kot' avruiv
iroXe/uov : Id. viii. p. 486'. I. 21. oXiynvs twv ck Trjs kw/ut/s fduaavruu
KuO' €y yeveffdai 7rapoXo/3wi', Id. i. pi 66. uTro^^^fji'iv olo^evai Tt)r niKeluv
buia/jiv, el Ka0' tv al rpels {nvXeis) ykvoivTo, fjiav ulpfjaai nuXiv ov
fieyaXj]v : Id. ii. p. 101. I. 26.
VIII. Kara 7rX(/0os is, in a body, adpooi : nweXdoPTwv Kni tG)v ev
TeXei Kara TrXijdos els to (iovXevTi'ipiov, Dion. Hal. vii. Kar' uXlyovs is
the coiiirAry, Jew ill numbe?', Jew together: en re rioi' av-ofxoXwv tu
nXFidos eKuaroTe, el cai kut oXiyovi, irpoawv Tt)i' huva^iiv rjv^riaep : He-
I'odian v. c. 4. § 8. few at a time : ol be iyrpnTiG>-ai ra fuey vpura
VTTiay^vovvTO, Kar oXlyovs be aveywpovv. Id. vi. c. 9. § 5. kar' vXlyavi
yap Kat ey iroXXo'is eavrovs btaffirelpavres eXr/crTevnv, Zosim. iii. Kara
iroaoy is, in some measure, in some degree : tarnTriarevo-avres raJs
Ibtais bvvafxeai, Kara ttoctov evdaptruis ei-)^oy : Pol\l>. ii. p. 92-
Kara is used to signify proportion or comparison : bwpa ov Kara
p.i}Xu Kal are(}>ayovs airebiboTO avrrj, Lucian, de Amicit. [p. 62. A. ed.
Salmiir. cf. 59. A.] gifts not merely equivalent or tantauiount to the
v.pples and garlands which he had received, but houses, lands, &c.
ov KOTO. Twy oiKiwy Kal rfjs y/Js ^pe/aj' — aurrj >/ bvvnfxts <puiyeTnt : Thuc.
ii, 62. fieiSu) Tivh T] Kar avdpivTroy (Tofiay aofpoi eiViv, Plat. Ap(d.
c. 5. "^aXeivujTepuv fioi <pnirerai >) kutci ttjv TXuvkov re^vrjy. Id. Phsed.
C. 58. aj-inprCii' els eavTov, ^dXXoy 1] Kara rify u^iapTtav eavruv Terifiw-
prjrai : Autiphon. Orat. p. 676. [I. 4. ed. Reisk.] el be rw boKQ fxei-
iuvs, y Kar tfxavruy, Xeyeiv X6yov$ : Demosth. de Veclig. p. 17 •• [I. 9-
ed. Reisk.] p?) Toiyw Kara ~oy Kvfiepyiirriy Oijs avrhv, put him not
then on a level with the pilot : Arislid. pro Quatuorv. p. 383. — simi-
litude : ofioXoyoiriy ay eyujye ov Kara tovtovs eiyai pi'iriop, Plat. Apol.
c. 1.
It serves to form a circumlocution instead of a genitive case : at
Kara to awfxa eTriQvfxiai, fur a'l tov awfiaTos eTridv/jtai, Plato Pheed.
c. 32.
With a noun, (usually a proper name,) it notes, — 1. possession, or
what belongs : Z,eyo<pG>v a^eXety rjj Kor' uvtov v7repj3f(iX7]Ke rijy YJXa-
Twyos iKJieXeiay, Hermog. de form. or. ii, 12. to TraXuiov fjev nvv 01
'Apc'ibioi Kud' avrovi ejSatTiXevorro, had kings of their own: Strabo
xvi. p. 754. [See Rule 4. and note y.] So 01 icar' oiKoy, the people of
the house, the servants: Soph. Eleclr. 1150. [1147] to'is Kara yevos
avveaofiai, my kindred, my relations: i5i.iian, V. H. i, 34. and ele-
gantly with the neuter article plural : ra itara \\nvanyiav ruv AuKebai-
fioviov Ka\ QefjKTTOKXea, &c. see p. 4. 1. 14. — 2. In quotatiun, or use,
of another's words : ovk hy o'iei jiie K"ora THrbopov kiu nn'^oXlns vTrep-
repoy Trpdyjua irun'iaacrOai ; to use the tvords of Pindar, as Pindar
says: Plato Plieedr. — 3. tvay, manner, custom: eywy ovv ov-ojs eiri-
TeOifitjKu uKOiKTat, (jjare, ay (inblttoy Trot/; ruy TrepiTraTOv Meyupa^e, Kal,
KUTO. 'HpobiKoy -Kpoajyus tS Tii\ei, rraXtv aTrii]s, ov jji) aov dnoXetcpOcu,
as tierodicus used to do : IMato, Plianlr. — A. time : rpl-os inroKab/iou
Kara AafibaKoy, in the time of Labdacus : Arrian. abviaruy be^u'ibfjov
ov fjtoyuy Ka-a luiKpartjy eii'ai, Athen, Deipnos. xi. tar' t/ie, in my
246 Mera. [ChAP. IX. § Y.
time:'' Pausan. in Achaic. Kara Ti)y ap\^y riLv rptAKovra, in the reign
of the thirty tyrants: ^Elian, V. H. ii, 11. Kara tk top Kara Kpo'iaoy
y^potoy, but in the time of Crcesus : Herod, i, 67. (But Kara -^^povov is
sometimes, in due time: 1] hk Kara j^^pnyov erexe Koprjv €Vfiop(puy, Flut.
TTopaW. 'E\\. mi 'Pwfi.) Ot kuO' >//uds avdpmnoi is not only the men
of our time, but, of our condition : v. Lennep. ad PliaJ. p. Qi-. tovs
Kad' ijfias Ti'jTrovs, the regions in which we dwell: Piialyr. p. 22 i.'
In composition kara signifies — 1. against: as in carayeX^*' Tiros:
KaTayiyw(TK€iyriy6s duyarvy : .^lian, V. H. iii, 47. Kara-^evbnijapTvpely
— -f:aTa<ppoy€iy — KaTaviararrdai — ruoi'. Ka-a-o\fi^y ruiy JroXefiiojy : ro-
lyb. iii, 103. — 2. descent; bringing, throwing, or keeping down,
as in KUTajSaiyeiy, KarUiai (h''Aibuv : ;Escll.dial. iii, 20. ndTaan^y,
Kade\KV€iy yaus : Pilyb. i, 21. Karaaeieiy to. Tei\T]> ^^lia"* V. H. iii,
\6. KaritfiuWeiy rita els cnrtarriui'. Plat. Pliaedr. c. 38. cararrarelr,
Xen. (Ec. viii, 5. Ages, i, 15. — 3. return or restitution ; as in Kan-
iyai, L>s. p. 212. [1. 7. ed. Reisk,] Kudoios eTri/jTiriwr, Hippocr. v.
Foes. CEcon. Karep-^eadai o'lKctte, L^s. p. 497- [I. 12. ed. U.] Kara-
7r\e~iy, DemostI). p. 88^. [I. 4. ed. R.] Karanopeveadai, Polyb. iv, 17.''
Karayeiy eis T))y o'lKeiar, Id. ib. Kuruyujyfl eni T))y (^aaiXeiay, Id. L.
L. 128. KnTabexe'rdai, to receive back: ^Eschin. Or. p. 13. — 4.
fulness, abundance ; as in KnreibwXos ttoXis, Acts Ap. xvii, 16'. Kard-
(jioflos, Pol)b. i, 39. iii, 108. Kudvbpos, Id. v, 24. t^ardfxoyos. Id.
xvii, 12. KaTu<pvros, Id. xvii, I6. KuraXidavy, Demostli. p. 290\ [I.
10. ed. R.] — 5. exhaustion, consumption, expense, ivaste, sacrifice,
ruin; as in KaTaKvfteveiv, /Eschin. Or. p. 13. Lys. p. 541. [1. 2.
ed. R.] KaTafjiiado(j)opel.y to. vnupj^^oyra, iEschin. Oral. p. 45. KctTa-
biopoboKsTy, Lys. p. 808. [I. 9- ^^l- ^O KaTaXeiTOvpyely, Isneiis p. 210.
KadiTrnoTpoipeJy, Id. p. 116". [1. 5. ed. R.] Kn0t7r7rafe(70at is, to over-
come: iEscliyl. Euni. 146. v. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 389.
Valck. ad Herodot. p. 473. Abresch. ad ^scb. ii. p. 103. — 6. It
intends or augments ; as in KareXmSeiv, Polyb. viii, 3. KareXKiafius,
Id. iii, 83. KnraXoyiieadai, lEsch. Or. p. 6I. Kurolv rdffTj^a, Fees.
CEc. Hipp. On KnraaK€vui£iy see Reiske's ind. to Demostli. »:ara-
iriareveiy rals Ibiais bvyci/jecn, Polyb. ii, 3. — 7. It very rarely has a
diniinuent force ; as in KadaXi.t))s, somewhat salt : Nicandr. — 8. under,
beneath : as in Zevs KctTnxQoyios, 11. 1, 457. — 9- a' fh^ back, behind ;
as in KUToniy, uye/aos KaTa()(>€u)y, Polyb. i, 60. — 10. distribution ;
as in KaTnyefieiy, Kadr]fiepiv6s. — 1 1. in ; as in Karadv fiios , II. p, 201.
IX. Mcrce, with a genitive, is used by poets and orators, for with:
/ie0"'Hpa$ oTuaa, siding ivith Juno : Eurip. Ilel. 895.* [See Rule 11.]
With the dative it has the sense of by or with, [in signification of
^ Kar' i/xe is a\^o, us far ai I am con- <* Aristophanes Ran. 1152 — 11G5.
cerned, as far as in me lies, {quantum in bhows tlie difference between Haripxio-
me est: Cic. I ad Q. i'. i, 29.) ha — ixt]- Bai, to return from exile, and fj/ceii'. See
hiv vfuu Kar' i^f iWiiwriiai, Deniostli. Classical Journal, vol. ii. p. .503.^/. S.
adv. I'olyci. p. 1224. 1. 24. ed. Reisk. v. ' Also amonf^ : ovtus hv SoKfotfj-i /x* t*
p. 1210. 1. 20.— J. S. avCpaiiTuv Oebs fhat, Tlieogn. 339. and
' Add Karck, among: 6,\\a S« fivpia besides: (f>r]criv t€ /act' avrov toij Tjirio-
\vyph Kar avOpwirovs aKaKrjTai, Ilesiod. Aois ^7rixeip7)(ra» irtpuaiy, Kal to7s iri/pe-
Op. 100.— J. S. Tohiv, Aristoph. Vcsp. 1037.— J. S.
Rule 9— n.] Ivy. 547
means or instrument,] among, [bittceen,] in, with. With an accu-
sutive, in pootrv, it signitios, to, in, into, among, on account of,
[against, Hes. Scut. H. 79-] [for, after,] to: Horn. II. b, v. 70,
in prose, after. Also in signitication of time: kuI jue6' ii^kpnv Kn\ bta
rvKTvs, both by day and by night : IFA. V. H. xiii, 16". fied' iifikpav
€\6!p€i bia T»/$ TcoXeiDS 6 \oyos, U'hen it was day, when day came :^
Pint, iu Caes. p. 712. oi/re ri/cros bviarai Kadevbetv, oi/rc /ueS' //^c'par,
ov ay ^, nireiv : Plat. \n Pliiidr. p. 251. 1. 42.5
In composition ^em signifies — 1. transference, change, alteration ;
as in fiCTufttljadeii' roy voXefjov els Ti)y Atftvrjy, Polyb. i, 41. fiera-
fiuXi) Kokov Ttroi (Is aynduf, ^scliin. Dial, iii, 3. peraflaXXeiy eavrof
cirui ka) Kc'irti), Plat. IMia-(U C- 45. ntdiarayai TtoXiTeiay els dXiyapj^iav,
Demostli. p. 1^6. [1. 13. ed. R.] fieracrrpaTOTreheveadai, Xen. Ag€S.
i, 21. fieTaicadonXiCeiy, Polyb. iii, 88. fieTaiota, Id. iv, 66. /jtera-
boK€~iy, Demostli. p. 467. [I. 21. ed. R.] fteTaireWeiy, L)s. p. 324.
|l. 5. ed. R.] fieTnppvQ/jiieir, Xen. CEc. xi, 2. fjeTarWeadai to. eipr)-
jieya. Id. Mem. iv, 2, 18. — 2. fetching, calling, or sending for,
jipproach, [pursuit, allocution ;] as in fieraicaXe'iadai, Xen, Ages, ii,
29. /.leranefineadai, Id. Mem. iii, 9, 11. ao<f»ay fi^Tieyai Id. ib. iv,
2,9' /Jera^wjeir, Odyss. »:, 67- neToiyecQai, II.*:, 111. — 3. after,
back, behind : as in fierafivveiy, Lys. p. 145. [1. 7- ed. R.] fierayi-
i(o(TK€iy, Id. ib. ovbey ye (jipoyTiSdiy, ovhe ^eraarpeipo^eros, Demoslh*
adv. Mid. p. 585. [1. 11. ed. R.] neraKXaUadai, II. X, 763. fierav-
TiKQ, Theocr. Id. xxv, 222. — 4. communication, participation, nsso-
ciation, [acquisition ;] as in fierabibvyai tov ftapovs, Xen. Mem- ii,
7, 1. fxeTfyjEiv. fieraXafiftayety Twy Kiybvywv, iEI. V. H. IX, 5.
perabalyvadni r<vt, II. \, 498. neTafieXireffdai riyi, Hom. ll. in Apoll.
197. fieTmroiturbai rexi'»?s, Plato Politic, c. 29. — 5. interval, inter-
position, inttrvenue, intervention ; as in fjeravvpytoy, Lys. fragm*
p. 16. fieTafxuiioy, 11. e, I9. fteTabpoiJabrjv, Ib. 80. fieraboprrws,
<)d. b, 194. — 6. in; as in fieraxeipi^eadai, Xen. CEc. xiv, 2.
/.leTotKos, Demostli. p. 50. [1. 21. ed. R.] fxeTabtjuios, Od. 6, 293.
— 7- privation, loss; as in 6\l/e /ueTufinydayeiy T})y eXev&eplny, i^scliin.
c. Ctes. p. 544. [I. 15. ed. R-] Oji fiera in composition see Catlier.
Giixoph. p. 81.*
X. lijy governs a dative case only, and commonly signifies the
same as ^lero with a genitive. So, (Tvy rdls "EXXr/ffi ^laXXo^ f/ avv 7f
/iapftdpo) tliai, in Xen. H. Gr. iii. and mayres /jer' aXXi'jXijjy in
TJiuc. both in the same signification of standing by or siding
with.
XI. So /jtera rujjMv in Time, ii, 39- p. 124. and avv ro'is rofims
(tu rofju)) in Xen. Cyrop. i. c. 15. conformably to the laws, in
obedience to the laws, legally, liiy with many other words also has
/ QvcravTfs Kol iriovres ovk ert /itfO* rjixe- Ilom. II. ij, 228. — J. S.
pav o.fearridat', aKKa redvTjKdTfs — HrpOri- * It may be here observed that /xtrh
aav: I'Jut. in Solon, p. 171. 1. 1. ed. Jl. alone is sometimes put instead of the verb
St. — J. S. of which it is a comi)OMent part : ifioiy'
S Add, besides : vvv fitv Sij ffd(pa dcrfat, "iaov fxkv Tricrht TTJy X'^f'"^ A'sTa, '6crov irtp
oUOev cilos, Oloi Kol Aavaotaiv i.pi<7TrjfS vp-'iv, for ixsjfjTty, Aristoph. Eccl. 173.
fifTtwTi, KOt fifT 'AxiX\rja (irj^riyopa : — J. S.
248 ^it/r. [Chap. ix.
an adverbial sense: ttoXXo fitv eiire, rci be iJKovaev ov ctvv Koafiip,
ijulecorousli/ , u7ibecominglj/ : Pans, in Ach. p. 420. avv Tuxei,
quickly: Soph. El. 14^8. avy avrw (r^ Reiz.) yeivaio), crvy ai/rw
ri5 Reiz.) abik(f), through mere genero&ity, — injustice: Xen. Ages.
iv, 5. So irpbs hiKTjs, and biKij alone, Soph. El. 1211. In the
same manner ^era with a genitive has an adverbial sense : /xera tov
bitcniov for btKaiu}<,, Demosth. in fin. Philipp. epist. fier abeias elfii,
insecurity: v. Demosth. pro Megalop. p, 83. I. 26. /iera Kaipov,
opportmiely, according to occasion : Time, vi, 85.
XII. 2u»' Oew, rallier than /uera deov, (although Plato has ^era
Oeuir, Ep. viii. p. 355. fin.) is used in various ways : vyiairovTo. ne. ws
eirironoXv avv deols ijpui/.iei', by the blessing or favor of the gods :
Xen. GLc. p. 851. 1. 15. Ivu deols eniwfxev cttJ tovs ubiKuuvras, tvith
the aid or favor of the gods: Thuc. 1.
XIII. Sometimes a verb is added to the phrase : to. jjiev oly eh to
irnpov, avv deoj eiTre'iy, e.^et koXws : God be thanked : Plato to Dio,
oifjtai yan, vlfiai, avv 0eJ h' elpi) aerai, Tnurrjs aTraXXcli'eti' ae tvs
ofdaX/jias : with the help of God: [under God, tcilh due submission
and reverence to Him; God willing:] Aristoph. Plut. 114. Ivy
'Abpaarei^ elire'iv is of nearly the same import.
But avf Qew, when not parenthetically used, is sometimes, by
divine impulse or instinct : ws ol e'ir) avv 6e^ elprjfxerov, to firjiepa twp
iwrriov oXfiiriv eJfai : Herodot. i, 86.
2()»' is very frequently suppressed : trXevaavTes ebdvs irevTe kui
e'lKoai vava\, Thuc. i, 26. rows ye firiv kokovs avro'is TeKvoiai kuI
bo/xois c^oXXv/xei', Eurip. Hipp. 1340. seq. Kn-ero^evae rw Xoipw tovs
'Axaiovs avroJs iiiiiovois Kai tcvaiv, Lucian, de Sacrif. p. 286". V. Her-
mann, ad Horn. h. Apoll. vs. 148. Always after afia. v. Hor. Serm.
i, 10. 86'. Tacit. Ann. iii, 64.
In composition avy signifies — 1. communion, conjunction, par-
ticipation, association ; as in avjxiruaiov, avyyeri>s, avn<p<iiTqv tivI
els — : Xen. Syn)p. iv, 23. Demosth. p. 1001. [1. 2/. ed. R.] avfx-
fieTabibovai Trjs c7r</3ouXJ/'^, Polyb. v, 36. avfi/uiae'cy To'is (j)i\ois tovs
e/)^dpovs, Id. i, 14. avyafifu). aj^ebov Ti ol/jat. e/ue irXeiw \p))fsaTa
eipynalhu ?} ciXXovs avrbvo ovanvas finvXei TtLv ao<^iaTwy, than any
other two put together: Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 282. Demosth. p.
564. [1. 22. ed. R.] So a'uvTpeis, and iwee'iKoai Hom. Od. I, 98.
avfxTraiTes, cvvOveiv, Polvb. iv, 49- — 2. assemblage, union, collection,
junction, moderate contraction or compression ; as in avppeeiv, avy-
KnXfAv, avvve(^e'iv, avyKeipaXaiovaOat, Pol^b. i, 66. avreXelv, Xen.
Mem. iii, 8, 9- avyypct(j>etv, avyKXeleiv, avarofins, avfj-me^eiv, avrc-
<ppvs : Theocrit. Id. viii, 72. Anacr. Od. xxviii, 16. — 3. universality,
or plurality, majority ; as in avaawieir, Polyb. x, 44. avakevaieaOut
TO. euvTov, Lys. adv. Pliilon. p. 873. [I. 12. ed. R.] — 4. the instru-
metit ; [collision,] as in avp'il/ixpFlv tovs Ovpeovs tcus fiay^aipais, I'olyb.
xi, 28. — 5. agreement, conformity ; as in aufx^ierpos, Polyb. iv. 21.
xi, 10. av/.ifiopfos, Rom. viii, 29. — 6. It intends or augments; as in
avvTeTn^hu)s, Xen. QEc. xx, 22. avvToros -rrpoalJoX)), Polyb. E. L. 134.
— 7. Il is redundant : v. Brunck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 695.
§ vi. Rule 1—5] Uapu. 249
SECTION VI.— On the preposition irapa.
Role I. "Ep^eaOai, nnpayiveffdut, nnpeveaOat irapa tivos, is, to come,
arrive, go from a person ; napa tijs avyKXi'iTov (iovXfjs uyyeWeiy, to
announce on the part of the senate ; Toy tpiXov ttoXv Trap' e/iou Trpocr-
eine, deliver mi/ particular commendations to my friend ; irup Ifiov
€Tiaa, J paid with my own money ; nap' e/jov ayaXwaas, at my own
expense, flap' eau-wv is, of themselves, of their own accord: Fhalar.
p. 214. Elliptically, nl irap'a aov, your messengers ; ra Trap' e/zoiJ,
(viz. yerofieva, InnplafTa,) my proceedings.*
II. With a dative it signifies, at, near, by, with; also before: Trapa
^apei'u) icpir^, Herodot. iii. extr. and in: naparo'ts eptpvXiois TroXe/uois
ByijaKeiv, Plut.
A dative is also sometimes put with it instead of an accusative,
when it signifies motion : €.<pr]-)^pTivai levai irapa.'Tiffaa(pipy€t, out eKcXev-
ae : Xen. Anab. ii.
III. With an accusative irapa signifies, by, near : aryp irap dvbpa
oTi](r£Tai ^i<pr](p6pos, in array: Eurip. Hel, 1081. (1078.) v. Musgr. in
Suppl. adnotat. during; unsuitably to, contrary to, against;
within; — on account of; in comparison with; according to, in
proportion to, beyond;^ also very frequently, <o;* as, Trapa tov
/3a(7tXea riKev. But the following uses are the most remarkable. It
signifies co-existence or coincidence : irap' alio to uhiKTjfia : Trapa t6u
vXoiiv : irapa to beliryoy ', t^ irapa ra heiva evroXfxlcf. : Dion. Hal. x.
irap' oXoy tov fiiov: irap" oXov tov ayijya: Demosth. irapa tovs
Kivhvvovi, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 433. irapaTrjy eicetVou ap^^^j', Xen. Mem.
ii, 1, 2. irapa ndcray tijv ')(^opt]ylar, Demosth. p. 514, 8. ed. Reisk.
ojs fii] irap" aura KoXaffdelq, instantly :' Herodian. iii, II, 17-
IV. Against, contrary to: irapa ipvaiv, irapa roirpenoy, napa [leXos,
vap &puy (unseasonably).
Kxcept : nap' oXiyovs iravres ayT}pidr)(Tay,
Besides : e'i tis dXXrj Trapa rauras ioTt fxadijfjiaTos Ibia. ovk ^(TTI
irapa tuiit' iiXXa, Aristoph. Nub. 698."* ovbe /jt/v iroieJy ti, ovbe ri
iracj^ecv a\\f>, irop' a nv CKelya 7/ iroi^ fj irdayrj ; Plat. Plijed. c. 42.
V. riapa bvya/uiv may signify either above or below one's strength ;
[because Trapa denotes difference or incongruence.^
riapa signifies elegantly, through, or by means of ; (v. Valck. ad
• riapa with a genitive is sometimes by, the opinion of Hermann, nothing determi-
notins; the agent; alaxp^y "rh tpeiyeii/, nate can be understood with auro, but
Kal rh TTpia^ivovr e'/x* ovtio y^XaaQai toD irpdy/xaTa would be preferable to (>-i)fj.aTa,
KacriyvnTov ndpa : Soph. CEd. C. 1423. — proposed by Tleizius. II. thinks Trapamoi
J. S. in /Escliyl. Ag. 746. is, so, in the same
J Examples may be seen in H. Steph. manner. — J. S.
Thes. t. iii. col. 37. and foil. — J. S. '" I. e. it in unavoidable, it must be
* rpd(pei tTTLCTToXiiv irapa, ^aaiXia, Xen, done. So ovk ian irapa raCr' &\Ka, I am
Anab. i, 6, 3. — J. S. determined to do it : Aristoph. Fac. 110.
' So Trap' auTo fitv ovit iirpidr], Polyb. • — J. 3.
*, 95. for irapoi/TJKO, says Eniebti. In
Figer. 2 i
/
250 Uapa. [ChaP. IX. § vi.
arg. Phoeii. p. xxi.)" napa tovtov uQvfjtovai "Kavres. Trap' CKelvov
TTavTU Tj] TToXet yiverai rrxyafltt. Trapa tovto be uKoXo^evoi, trap baov
vXlidei eXavTovs €vpiQr)irav, only because ; for no other reason than
because: Herodian. vi, 6, 12. irapa ri o'ieaQe rhi ttoXcis totc fxky ev,
T()T€ bk <pav\o)s irpciTTeiv : Dinarch, c. Demosth. But vapa ri ; is
sometimes, to what end or purpose? Trap' o, on which account,
wherefore: irap^ o kqi i^vpQvrai ra autfiuTa, Pliilo Jud. de Circumc.
p. 6'25. Ovbey -rrctpa tovto is an extenuatinjj piirase, expressive of
contempt for a tiling as of no importance : Jo. Clirys. Iiom. 12. in
ep. ad Rom. Casaub. ad Pers. v, 6?, translates it, quid turn postea?
and what then? and what of that?
VI. It signifies dependence or influence ; in the poiver of, or deter-
mined by : TTuvv yap Trapa tovto {ov-)(^ (;p^s ;) yeyove ra Tu/y 'E\\}]%u>y
TrpuyfjuTa, el tovtI to piifxa, aWa /ir) tovtI bif.Xe^Bijf kyuj, f; bevp\ ti)v
X^'po, ctWa /!») bevpi TtaprjpeyKa : for upon this forsooth entirely de-
pended the affairs of the Greeks, whether I made use of this or the
other expression, &c. Demosth. pro Cor." In this sense, ovTO)rt\ hi
Ka\ TO Trap' ?/yua$ to> koQ' et/uapnevrjv (erarrtwraro*' €<ttiv,) tvhat de-
pends upon our own will, tvhat is in our own power: Diogenian. ap.
Euseb. Praap. vi. So, Trap' yfjus be, ocra ec tov anovbaieiv >/yuos,
Kal eyepyc'iy, cttJ reXos ep\€ruL : are in our own poiver: ib. [undcrst.
eoTt after 6e.]
VII. ITopa TToXu is,yar, by much : Trfpteyerorro Trapa TroXw TiLy Yaftl-
V(oy, Dion. Hal. ill. p. 182. I. 12. ou yap ui/Jtjy eyioye vvru) Trap'
vXiyoy [^so little diff'erent~\ taetrdm (ekarrpwy tuiv \liti(pioy upiOfiuy,) uWu
Trapa iroXv : but different by a great excess : Plato Apol. [p. 14. 1. 40.
ed. Bas. I.]
VIII. Sometimes with a genitive added, far below ; as, Trapa TroXw
T-J/s a^ias, Trapa ttoXv riji eXnibos. Trapa ttoXi) Tuit' Tripvai KarupBdifxe-
vwv iiXQev, he came far short of his lust years achievements; Trapa
TToXu iXetrdai ^/Xdey, he was very far short of taking the city. See
Diik. ad Tliuc. viii, j6.
IX. To Trapa ttoXv are opposed Tropa fxitcpoy, rrap^ dX'iyov, irapa
ppa)(^u. Trapa fxiKpov 7j\doy viktjs, they were very near gaining the
victory: Eutrop. Metaphr. vi. Trap' oXiyoy iiKev i) tsoXis aXUvai, Arr.
" 'H/iery Se iraph. rh Thv Mei5v\iSrii' tion, wliich I think the right one, (see t. ii.
ravra (Tvyxoopwo-h ^trux'*" e'X''M*'' ^^^' P* 290. of Ileiske's Greek Orators) agrees
inostli. adv. Leocii. p. 1087. 1. 2. ed. R. with Viger's. Reiske's would make tlie
Trapa Thv rrjs auTov fj.r]Tphs SpKOv, Kol T7}V passage referaMe to Rule 5. Hooge-
TovSSuTos iK€ivr)Thv'6pKoveu7]6etav,iraTphs veeii's, whicii gives jrapct its common sig-
reTVxr)Ki>>s Id. in Bosot. de nom. 1002, nilication of motion, is quite inadmissible,
1. TToWa ixif oZv laws fcrrly afrja tov and must have arisen from liis not liaving
ravff' ovTOis 6X*"'> ""^ "" Trap' tv, ov^i considered the whole passage. The words
Svo, «jy TOVTO ra TrpdyfxaTa aip'iKTat : Id. are in answer to some observations which
Philipp. iii, 110, 15. — J. S. yEschines, in his oration against Ctesi-
" V. 305. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. This is one phon, had made on the cxj)ressions and
of the passages which I have thought it action of Demosthenes ; as, e. g. ov fiffj.-
necessary to give more at length than as v-qirOe avTov ra fiiapa Kal anWava p-i]fiaTa ;
they appear in Viger, because it has been .5:J4, 9. ed. R. see 401, 10. and TavTa 5e
variously interpreted, and the few words tIvos 4cnh', 2i kIvoSos, (irjuaTa 1^ OavfiaTU ;
cited by Viger cannot enable any one to 557, 1. — J. S.
judge of the meaning. Taylor's interpreta-
RuLKG— IJ.] llapu. 251
de Exp. Al. i, 23. Trapa Ppa)(y rov ravras eXelf eXOuyres, Zios'im. i.
So Trap' tXd)(t(Trov eXde'iy, to be within a very little; and vap*
o'vbev : nap' ovbev 7/\0e vopaiptBfjiat, he was within a hair's breadth of
destruction : Plut. in Cic. p. 880. 1. 33. cf. p. 727- and Tropa cfxf-b6v'.
TO. jjikv ijbr) ne-TTorOores, to. be napa cr)(^eb6v iKdovres waOe'ir, having nar-
rowly escaped S7/ffering : Dion. Hal. vii. p. 451. 1. 30. In ibis sense
els iilso is used, wiien the verb signifies motion : see § ii. R. 15.
X. ITnp' uXiyoy el\e r>)^ bUrji', within a little; very nearly : nap'
vXiyas xpt'i^ovs y-t/judr], he was within a few suffrages of bei?ig de-
graded ; a few more suffrages would have rendered him ignominious :
Demoslb. Trap' (Aiynv aire^vyes vXeOpov, you but just escaped destruc-
tion ; you very narrowly escaped destruction : Eurip. Iph. T.
87 !• V. Tbuc. vii, 71' «et yap Trap' oXiyov Tj bii.(pevyov y) antoX-
Xvrro, [for their escapes v^ere always within a hair's breadth of de-
struction, and their destruction was always within a hair's breadth
of escape. So 1 understand it. p. IO9. 1. 16'. ed. Bekk.]
XI. Witb ayetv, ijyeiadai, rldetrOai, TroieiaBai, irapa ^iKpov, oA/yor,
(^puyy, favXoy, signify, to make little account of, and Trapn iroXv the
contrary : Trapa ftpayy ti)v iavTOv cifftpaXeiay, Trpos ro nrjbiva e^ avrwv
(ypafifjiartjv) avKOfav-rjdrji'ai dcfxevos '. Xiphil. Domit.^ ffv oh irapa.
^avXoy, aXX' urrl nayris kwotelTo Treiadijicn, Synes. ad Tiieophil. So
Trap' oiibey : el fiovos eyai ttciycvyevov, trap' ovbev ay to irpdyfia enoiTicru.-
pv*', I should have thought nothing of it : Xiphil. in M. Antonin.
Philos.?
XII. riapa -o(7ovTov, witiiout a case, is — 1. by so much; so great-
ly : Trapa Toaovrov IjTTi^dets uye^wprjae. — 2. by SO little, by the want of
so little: vapa roaovroy Macpti'os ovk ll^cfmye rovs biu)KoyTas, within SO
little was Macrinus of escaping his pursuers : Herodian. v. c. 4. § 23.
ra 'IXXvptKO. be edyt), CTTeva i'lVTa, Kalov noXXyfy e^oira Tt)y vvo 'Pwjua/ois
yrjy, â– trapa. tooovtov bfxupovs ica) yehovas -KOiel Fepfiavovs 'IraXiwrais :
separate the Germans from the Italians by so small a barrier as their
own narrow intervening territory : Herodian. vi. c. 7- § 9-
XIII. Witb a genitive : /dy) irapa roaovroy eXddy/jev Tijs la'jrrjros deias,
let us not be so far distant from, &c. let us not come only tvithin
so great a distance of it : Gregor. and in an opposite sense : Trapa
ToiTovToy ij MirvXi'iyr] yXde Kivbvyov, SO near danger: Thuc. iii. c. 49.
TTopa roaovroy fxey at ^vpuKovaai I'/Xdoy Kiybvrov, into so great danger :
Id. vii, 2.
XIV. With Trap' vaoy following : Trapa roaovroy o'v KnreX{](p6ri, irap'
vaoy o't biwfcovres rys evdelas eS,€rpairr]aay, he escaped being taken, only
by the deviation of his pursuers : and in the same sense even without
a negative, and with kuI following : Trapf» ioaovrov Ka\ av/jLirarovfierot,
Trap' vaoy \paveiy avrQy ftbeXvaao/jieda : escaping being even trodden
under foot, only through our abhorrence of touching them : Greg.
irepi 0«\o7rrwX' speaking of the poor
XV. n«pa is used in comparisons: Trap' envrvv pribeya emri'ibeioy
P To this sense of irapo Hermann refes died with, [y&p Person.] — J. S.
irap' &Kpas airedpiffiv rpixas, Eurip. Or. * Ovtus f/xoiyf roCSe rov fjidpov rvxuy
liib. wliith he says oujjht uot to be mcd- Trap' ovliv 6.\yos, SujjIi. Antig. 4CG. — J.S.
2o2 riapo. [Chap. ix.
//yelro, tn Comparison with himself ; roaovrov to'u Kivhivov xareippdvrjae,
irapa to ala-)^p6v Tiv-nofiiveiVfin comparison of, &c. Plato Apol. c. l6.
aKexpbjfieda yap bfj napa tov A.VKovpyov tov M(Xr/d5»jv e^era^ovres,
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 272/ cf. Rom. i, 25. KparKTrevovres irapa
rii 6.\\a 8ija, Xen. Mem. i, 4. l-i.' TraykdXTjc Xeyeis irapa (jtavXr^v
Traibiaf, in comparison with which others are contemptible : Plat.
Phaedr. p. 276. 1. 41. With the comparative degree : v. Valck.
Ep. ad Roev. p. 51. ad Adoniaz. p. 109. Koin. ad Greg. Cor. p.
165. Valck. Diatrib. p. 11(). avTos bt) Trap" eavTov beirurepos kciO'
Vfiepav yiverai, compared with himself ; Trapa rovs Kaipoiis TroXXax^s
ei;aaTa 6eu)pe~iv j^pt) kql e^erd^etv rutv av^fiavTwv, with reference to, &c.
The difference between irpos, when used in comparisous, (see below,
§ viii. R. 13.) and rrapU, is that the latter sometimes notes traa-
scendence or excellence beyond that which is signified by its case :
ir/ovfxai be Kal irpos ajKpOTepovs, Ka\ Trap afK^oTepovs av tivciL Qe^ia-
TOK-Xea TOV re Mi\Ti6.bt]v *:al tov K//iwva, not merely equal, but su-
perior : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 321.
XVI. Ilapd signifies recurrence or repetition after regular and
equal intervals of time ; as, Trapct rpets f)fiepa.s or rplrriv ij/uepav, evert/
third day ; and elliptically, jrapd fxlav, every other day ; Trapa Tpirr^v,
every third day ; and without a numeral, Trap' rj/iepav, every other
day ; 6 Trap' {jpepav irvperos, the tertian ague ; Ttap' yj/jepriv TrvpeTaiveiv,
to have a tertian ague : Arctzeus de morb. diut. i, 2. Trapa fiijra,
every other month; Trap kviavrov, every other year;* and in the
same sense yfxepav Trap' jjfiipav, /iijra Trapa fJLijva, eviavTov Trap' iviav-
Tov. Also alternation of persons or things ; as, yepovTes kuI veaviat
Trap' eva avinropevofxevoi, alternately ; cKarepf TrXrjyrjv Trapa TrXjjy>)»'
ivTeivofieyos, first on one, then on the other; alternately.
Also exception : as, Trop' ei'o, except one; Qripiov el Trapa ypapfia,
with the exception of a letter: Ammian. Epigr. 9. Mapiccj, when fx
has been taken away, becomes ixpKOi, which is liere [in tliis dull
epigram] taken to be the same as ilpKros : see Valck. ad Herodot.
p. 708."
In composition Trapa signifies — 1. assumption, accession, produc-
tion; as in 7rapaXa/i/3d»'cn', TrapaKofiHeiv, TrapaicaXeTv, Trapep)(eCT0ai eiri
TO. KOiva, JE\. V. H. ii, 1. Trapdyeti' els to btKaan'jpiov, Demosth. p.
805. [1. 14. ed. R.] — 2. passage, transgression or violation, beyond,
against; as in TrdpoSos, Lys. p. 94. [1. 12. ed. R.] TrapojSafVei*' :
vapaanovbuv '. TrapaTrrjb^v tovs vofxovt, JEach. c. Ctes. p. ^582. [1. 7*
'' El \fyoi Trap abr^v UtvoKKeij) 6 animals.- — J. S.
KapKivov, in riralry with her, so that a ' The following passage affords a re-
coiiiparison tnight be made of his eloquence niarkable illustration of this sense of irapa :
with hers: Aristojih. Thesm. 440. — J. S. outw 5e fo-xut^ef iv ro7s 'Axaioij, oJo-t*,
' The words in Xenophon are placed in ei ju^ kut'' ivtavrhv (every year) ^{^r,
tlie followin}^ order ; Trapcb ra &K\a fcSa, Trap' ifiavrhv (etery'other year) alptlaOai
SitTTTip Oto), &v6pwiToi $toTevov(n, (pvcrei koI aTpaTrjyhv aurhi', (py(f> S^ icaX yuwftr) 5»i
rf aw)j.ark nal r-p 4'^XV KpaTtcnevovTfs. Ttavrhs (constantly) Hpx^"'' Plut.inArat.
Instead of construing, witli Hermann, p. 181)8. 1. 3. ed. II. St. — J. S.
»cpaT. irapct t. &. fdJa, I understand aiiTuv " Add Trap' i^l.( for tVfKa /ioG : ah hi y'
after KpaTKnkvovrts, and translate jrapa amoii fi(i'oi>v ol'^ntif € Trap' f/tt'. for all I care.
TO SAAa fia, compared Witk the other Arisloph. Av. 840.— J.S.
§ vii. RULK 1—3.] rifp/. 553
cd. R.] Trapmrpeapeveiy, Demostl). p. 401. [I. 4. od. R.] — 3. care-
lessness, negligence, Juulliness or imperfection, cursorily, amiss ; as
ill napop^y, TrapaOtupt'iy : Deiliosth. p. 1414. [1. 22. ed. U.] irapci-
iriiXwXer, Demostli. p. 543. [I. 28. ed. R.] irapaKoveiy, Polyb. ii, 8.
V. T>r\vli. ad Aristot. Poet. p. 129. — 4. propinquitj/, proximiiy ;
as in TTupaTreiiireiv, TrapoKoXovlh'iy, TrapaKaOfiadai, TTapcnrXely, Trapatrrd-
TT)s: Polyb. xvii, 25. — 5. presence; ivith, at ; as in irapaTvyxayeiv :
Xeu. Apol, 11. napaKaTUTideadai, Id. Symp. viii, 36". Trapelyai. —
6". (J.) addition, besides ; as in Trapeiarcpepeiy vofxov, Denioslli. p. 484.
[I. 1. ed. R.] — 7. (8.) departure, deflexion; as in Trapay^upely obwy,
Xcn. Ilier. vii, 2. TrapeXrjXvOujs XP"''°^' ^^- Apol. 25". Trapieyai,
/Eschin. Dial, ii, 2. irapuyeiy, Demostli. p. 487- 497- [•• 9- and 6.
ed. R.] — 8. (9.) tract of time; as in irapaxeif^aieiy. — 9. (10.) It
intends or augments ; as in -Kapabihuyai, â– jrapadepp.aiyeaQcn : iEscliin.
de Fals. Leg." p. 322. [I. 3. ed. R.] — 10. (11.) similitude; as in
irapaiiXriaiws, Xen. (Ec. iii, 5. irapo/jioios, Demosth. p. 12. [I. 8.
ed. R.] V. Lennep. ad Plialar. p. 312. seq.— 11. (12.) secrecy,
privacy, insinuation ; as in â– iTapahT]Xovy, Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p.
348. [1.7. ed. R.] ttitpahvyai. Id. pro Cor. p. 252. [I. 3. ed. R.]
irapaTTjpe'iy, Id. ib. p. 281. [1. l6. ed. R.] v. Cattier. Gazopli. p. 83.
SECTION VII. — On the prepositions irepl and Trp6.
Rule I. ITepl with a genitive signifies, about, on account of , for
the sake of ; as, vrept Trarp/Sos ixayeaQai. ovhkv 7rpoar}K€i TrepI twv iiXXo-
rpliov a.fiapTr}n6sii)v ws uhiKovyras Kiyhweveiv, Lys, Areop. p. 264.
[I. 3. ed. R.] Treipaffo/uai Trepl irayrwy ruiy Trenpayfieytjy /ue0' vniby uv-ov
Ti/juip/fcraaQat, Id. adv. Alcib. p. 519. [1. 2. ed. R.] v. John x, 33.
e'lTrep yap abiKely XP')> rvpnyyibos Tvepi KuXXiaroy ubixely : Eurip. Phoen.
ra eXevdepa auifiara — 7rep< (Lv bit'jXXa^ay tovs TvtTKvXaywv al^jJaXiorovs,
Dion. Halic. x. p. 651.
II. With respect to, as to ; as, irept fiev yap Tijs fiap-vplas, on xpevbrj
fi€fiaprvp})Katny, avroi fioi boKov/ny epy^ e^eXeyx^ty nvrriy : v. Acts,
xxviii, 22. and alter iroie'iy ; as, ruvs Ijnceipovs y'lpwrriaey, o, ti ^P')
Ttoie'iv Trepi Ttjs eyj^cipj/irews. /.irjhey ej^w Troiely nept raybpos, I know not
what to do ivith the man ; bebiios fx^in cat Trepi avrov rewTepirreiev^
Herodian. i, 13, 13. with regard to himself.
III. Ilept iroXXov Ttoie'iadai, or TiOeaOat, or iiye'iaOai, is to make
great account of, or to reckon of great importance : -nepl irXdoros, of
more; irepi irXeiarov, of most ; Trepi irayros, all in all; nepl fiiKpov, of
little consequence ; Trept (.Xuttovus, of less; ■Trepi €Xa\i(Trov, of least;
Trepi ovheyus, of none at all." Sometimes elvai is the verb joined
wilh Trepi TToXXoVy&c. as, Trepi troXXov earty n'tpeloQai to ^(wp/'oi', it is of
great importance that, &c. wiien a substantive is sometimes expressed
" ^AvoKTivviiyai tx\v yap avBpiiirovs, irepi sias in Eratosth, p. 387. 1. 3. cd. Reisk.
oiiSivhs rjyovyTo' Xajx^dvav 5e XP'*'" — J. S.
p.iXTa.y trepi iroKKov inoiovyr v : l^y-
254 riepj. [Chap. ix. § vii.
with TToXvs: as, olb' evXajoiTjs ear) Trepl TrXeoKoy, Theogn. 118. nor is
there a thirig that requires more caution. And sometimes there is a
dative of the person : Ovo\ov(tkois -Kepi troWov ia-i Karakvaaadai to.
Trpas'Pwf^taiovs tyivX»//Lzara, Dion. Halic. viii. p. 488.
IV, (V.) It signifies, above, over: XDj^ayous re erepovs, Kat vept
hnavTwy (ipj^orra rov ^iKtyiiop virobei^arTes : Dion. H:ilic. vi. p. 375.
1. 36. 01 be 'AotaroKpariKoi Trepi iravTos deXofres {wishing above every
thing, above all things,) iiy) Kiye'iaOai e/c tov narplnv Koafjov t))v ttoAj-
Tciav, Id. vi. p. 384. 1. 35.
V. (VII.) Willi a dative case nepl signifies around: irepl ftwfiols
y^opeveir, Herodian. v. c. 3. § l6. ttjs tQiv bopvcjx'jptov ttc/jI avTJ} tppov-
pus, Xiphil. in Macrin,
About, on : irepl rrj x^'P* XP*"'^^'^'' ^«KrvXtov (pepetv, Plato Reip.
ii. p. 382. 1. 40. as el^ov Trepi awfiatrif tadr'iTus, Herodian, viii. c.
ult. § 13.
For, concerning, about, on account of : irepl rfi TroXet bebiivai, <po-
fteltrOai : TIlUC. rnvrivv bt) evcKa Qapp^'iv "^pfi TrepJ t^ avrov v^kx}/ ^'i-^bpa,
Plato Pliaed. c. 63. rcepl tttwx^ epibalvo/jev, Honi. Od. <r, 402. v.
Od. /3, 245. p, 471. T)Tt£eus ap. Lycirg. p. 212. [i. 10.] ed.
SK
. a
Kci
Through, because of, out of: Trept (/<o/3w, .^scli\l. Choeph. 33. So
a/i(/)t Tctpftei, Id. n43. and cificpl <p6ftM, Eurip. Or. 815. [ed. Pors.]
V. Il^en. ad Honi. h. Cer. p. 560.
VI. (VIII.) With an accusative nepl usually signifies around, and is
used in the same manner as a/^Kpl, to which it is sometimes joined ;
as, afi(pl irepl Kp)]VT)r, Horn. II. /3, 305. ox^^ai b' a/ufi Trepl ^eyc'tX.'
tnxoi', II. V, [(t>, 10.] Ill such passages n/i(pt is used as an adverb.
Sometimes both are united in one word ; as, u^fnrepl (TKuipovres,
Oppian. Hal. i.
Ylepl, as well as nyu^J, is joined with words signifying number, in
the sense of about, nearly: vavs re KaTabvaavres irepl ejobofJiiKiit'Ta,
'J'huc. i, 54. els eVos i'jbr] irepi irov oyborjicoaTUv l\r)\ai.u)s, having by
this time arrived at somewhere about his eightieth year : Herodian.
vii. c. 5. § 3.
VII. (IX.) But the sense about, in signification oi time, is peculiar
to irepi : Trepi Xvyj'hiv u.(pas irapeiaTrerrvvTes tXaOor, Dlon. Halle. VII. p.
426". 1. 7. hui yap 7iy irepl bvatv i]kiov. Id. viii. p. 533. 1. 23. Trept
bei\T]v o-iPlav, M. vi. p. 364. 1. 13. irepl fietras vvktus, Id. ix. p. 56 1.
1. 30. i'i(^n ""ept TOV Ijpdpov i)»', Id. viii. p. 515. 1. 25. irepl irXijdovaav
ayophv, about the time when the forum is most crowded : Xeii. Anab.
ii. p. 273. Mi. V. H. xii, 30. v. Pcrizon. ad 1. c. Grtev. Lect.
Hes. c. 10.
riept with a reciprocal pronoun, spontaneotisly : irepl ahra Karappel,
Deniostli. 01. ii. p. 21. 1. 4. ed. R-'. ibui^ei. irepl ai/ry KaTaXvQljaeadai,
Plut. in Cais. p. 727- P- 1334. St.
«' "Opa, 3 /xaKapif, jut) irtpl to?s (piXra- Bas. 1. — J. S.
rots Kv^f ii-pt T£ Kal Kivovviinjs, take care ^ A metaphor taken from melting snow,
lest yuu run a risk in uhuf is most jire- sinking iiitu and about itself, says llciske :
ciunii: Plato Trotng. p. 281. 1. 49. ed. Gret-k Orators, vol. x. p. 61.— J. 8.
Rule 4—9.] n^o. 255
Tlefjl signifies, occupation, pursuils, emploi/7)ieiit, office: ol nepi (jt)To-
p««.->)»', the rlutoriciuns ; ol irep\ riiv ypu/jfiarii^ijf, the orrammarians ;
01 Ttepi aoipiur, the sophists : Plato Hipp. mnj. p. 281. ol nepl rovs
Xoyoi/j, the orators : Isocr. Evag. p. 377- More fully, ol irepl t))v <pt\o-
cfotpiav hiciTpi(oovTeSy Id. ad Nicocl. p. 48. o\ irepii tijv avXiif, the cotir-
tiers: Julian, p. 27 1 • Also state or condition ; vvv bk IwkpuT-qs p.kv
eoTi irepi uadei'eiav rifv Tijs arpayyovpias, Plato to Laodamas.
It serves to form a periphrasis instt-ad of a genitive case ; as, at
ilhovai al 7rep\ ru crw/jn, for al tov auifiaros, Plato Pliaed. c. 63. v. et
c. 9. Deniostli. de Fals. Leg. p. 30"5. [1. 6. ed. R.] p. 1414. [I. 15.
ed. R.]»
In composition TTfpt signifies — 1. circuit; roundabout; as in ire-
piftXeTTeii', irepieXavieiy, nepihiie'tadai : Xen. Symp. vii, 3. vepi-
arpciTonehfveiv iruXiv, Polyb. i, 28. — 2. upon every side ; from every
side; as in TrepiyXicr-^pa, Hippocr. v. Fees. CEc. Hipp. TreptK6-nret%-,
TzepieXelv. — 3. It intends or augments in a good sense, TreplfyXen-
Tos, TrepiT€iiis, iT€pi\api]s, Tteptovaia : Xen. CEc. i, 4. 7repi<pnv})s,
Lys. p. 719. [I. 13. ed. R.] Trepnradijs, Polyb. i, 55. In a bad
sense : TrepilSnrjros crvfrraais icai KciKta, Demostli. pro Cor. p. 324.
[I. 28. ed. R.] vepUpyos, Id. Pliil. iv. p. 143. [I. 17- ed. R.] — 4.
7iegligence ; contempt; as in irepiibe7v, Xen. Symp. iv, 23. De-
njostl), pro Cor. p. 246. [1. 7- ed. R.] iteptop^v, Id. ib. [1. 13.] Tre-
pt(f)pov£7y, Aristopb. Nub. 225. TreptoTTreirOui, Id. ib. 124. — 5. trans-
ference, removal; as in itepiait^v voXepLov ene'i, Polyb. i, 26. Trepirpi-
rretv eh rtia t})v aWiav, Lys. p. 210. [I. 2. ed. R.] — 6. mastery, con-
guest ; as in TTfpiyiyveaQai tivus, Trepieli at.
VIII. (X.) Ylpo, wliich governs a genitive only, most usually signi-
fies, before ; anil that with regard either to place ;y as izpu Bvpwv : irpo
iroXXnv Tijs noXetos ijyri, being yet a great way from the city: Dion.
Hal. ix. p. 593. I. 20. or persons ; -ds, -n-pu roii fiaatXeujs. Trpo Truar/s
7>7s irapaTc'ileus, before all the army in array : or time ; as, irpu iroX-
\G)v eruiy, many years before ; irpo uipus avapTruieadai, prematurely ;'
vpo /Ltids KaXuvhuiy ^lapriov, (or Trj irpo fiids KaXavbwv i]/j€p<f,) the day
before the Calends of March, pridie Kalendas Martii ; rrj irpo Se^a
HaXavbuiy yf^ep^, the tenth day before the Calends. In this sense
frporpiTa is, three days before : Ttporpira aKrfvijV TroirjaavTes, Thuc.
ii, 34.
IX. (XI.) It signifies, rather than, before, in preference to: idtjbeu
VTToXoyHeadai fxfjTe davarov fiyre aXXo ti fir^bev Trpo tov altryjiov, Plat.
Apol. Socr. 11. iravras tovs Ktybvvovs v(piuTaaQai OeXovai, irpo tov rijv
* Add Ttepl wSSa, fitting, applicuhle : yrjs, to pursue him from place to place:
irepl TTtiSa St) croi Kal EvdyyeKos ovtos, Aristoph. Acliarn. 235. yriv irph 775^
l.ucian. Adv. Indoct. p. 54G. B. cd. fAavvofxai, ^scli. I'rom. 703. See Dr.
Salmur. — J. S. Blnmfield's Glossary. — J. S.
!' Tlph TOV, which is commonly tiscd of - Avprj S' e'/c Trorauov ^oxph '"ven rfuQi
<i»«e, (see Aristoph. Eccles. 221. and full.) irpb. Hum. Od. f, 409. Add irp5, (abso-
appears in the following passage to signi- lute,) prcmaturclij : irpS yt aTfua^fts, not
iy anteriority of place: Swrideiv, Siarre- <p60uu irXea tls «!• 'EttiVxsj es t' hf Kal
pdcrasras Trph rod Svcrx^^P'O-s, iU Tovi Tvpo- ra \onra irpofffiddris, Ai'.sch, Prom. 721.
iipriy.ivovs a.(piKea6ai roirovi, nntijacint : — J. S.
Polyb. iii, 34. ZiWKdv rhv uvopa yf/f irph
256 Ilpoy. [Chap. ix. § viii.
v7r('(f>j^ou(Tav eXaTrtitOiivni So^ay. npn rov Atos avTOv f^yayev airbv, pre-
ftrred him before Jupiter himself: Xipliil. in Aug. r/jo Tvavrwv av
â– KOirf(Tai^i]v, kvcTUVTa tov Kiyhvpoy atrCjaaaQai : and so with rificiadai,
ijye'tadai, enaivelv, &c. /JX/re tra'iias irepi irXc lovoi irotov, f.niTe
TO $ijt', /.n'lre uWo fxyjbey, trpo tov hiKaiov : Plato C)'it. c. l6. ei fii]
hiKnioTepov ^/jtjv Kal kAXXiov eivai npo tov ^evyeiv tc Kat anobi'
hpa(TK€iv, Plat. Pheed. c. 4/.
For, for the sake of, in defence of : -Kpo tuvtov reOydvai av TroWaKis
eXoiTO, Plato Symp. c. 6. fiu^eadai irpo re itaihmv koi trpo yvvaiKiLv,
Horn. 11. e, 57.
In composition Trpo signifies — 1. anteriority as to place, before:
as in TTpo-ei-^iana, Polyb. iv, 6l. -ponvXaioy, Demosll). p. 174. [1.
23. ed. R.] irpoayciv, Mattll. ii, Q. Trpo Twv 6(pOa\fiu)v TTpofaiveTai,
iEschin. de Pais. Leg. p. 313. [I. 14. ed. R.] — 2. advance, protru-
sion ; forward ; as in irpofiuiveiv : ov-o) -Koppu) irpoeXrikvQaai (jivXaKijs,
Xen. Hier. iv. 4. ti)v al/Jiaatctv irpoaynyovTes, Gzevbtrkpav tyju obov
TreiroirjKafTiv, Demostli. adv. Callicl. p. 1279. [1. 13. ed. R.] vporei-
veiv Tcis y^e'ipas, Demostli. de Pals. Leg. p. 421. [1. 18. ed. R.] npo-
v€v€tv, Folyh. i, 21. — 3. defence, protection ; as in Trpd^axos, Xen.
Hier. xi, 12. TrpofjaWeadai, Reiske's ind. to Deniosth. TrpoTUTreiv
eavToy, Andocid. p. 54. [1. 3. ed. R.] — A. publication, publicity ;
as in TrpoetTretv tiv\ TroXejtxor, irpo'ikvai, irpoypcKpeiy, TrpoKTjpvTreiy. — 5.
presidency, lead, administration, superintendence ; as in npoiaraadai
Twv 'E\\r]V(i)v, Demostli. p. 143. [I. 15. ed. R.] — 6. before, in signi-
fication ot time ; as in eavTi)v irpoai'e'iXe tov arbpos, Plut. de Garrul.
p. 508. irpoayopeveiy to ^eXXov, Xen. Synip. iv, 5. TrpoanuXXvpai,
Id. Apol. 27. Trpuniveiv, M\. V. H. iii, 15. TrpoaTrodvi'icTKeir, Polyb.
iii, 12. — 7' preference; as in vpoaipeladai, trpoTifji^p t'i tivos. v.
Cattier. Gazoph. p. 88. Ylpd is often redundant in compound words ;
V. p'iscli. preef. ad Well. p. xiii. as in TrpobibauKeiv: v. Rrunck. ad
Aristopli. Nub. 987- But often where it appears redundant, it has
some force ; hin,fort, her ; as, vpo'iam€iv, hinschicken.
SECTION VIII.— On the peeposition npos.
Rule L Ylpds wilii a genitive very often signifies, agency, by ; as,
rrpos anaiTiov OeprtTreuecrHcu : Trpos arritiKfw oj^oXoyriTai.
II. In favour of,for: KaXXt'as boKe'i /loi j.ta\a npds Upwrayopov
€ivai, Plat, in Prolag. irpos Tijs ftovXfis kan, to iroXXovs elvai tov
hi'ifiov TrpoffTaTas : Dion. Hal. x. p. GoJ- I. 4." 0$ ecpOrj TToXXa irpos
kavTOv Ka\ Kar eKehwv biairpa^AiJievos, Xipliil. in Aug. Trpos eav-
Toii TO Xayiou kXu j.iftnv€V , Zosim. ii. C I6. elvai fiey yap Trpos avrou
TOV uiTov, Arrian. i, 19. v. Hcmst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 234. Koen. ad
Greg. Cor. p. 44.
* Trjf 7ckp inr]!/ 6py^]V ireiracai xa^eTbj/ dvai Ka\ vphs avrwv, Plut. in Brut.
/x^l irphs ^juoG \(yopri, Aiistoph. \'csp. p. ItilO. 1. 32. ed. Ii. St. — J. S.
ti-17. iS6Ktt 5i Kal rh rov tAttov Oehf
Rule 1—7.] IV'.-. 257
An(< just llie contrary, against : -npii at-hpis i^Spou tivt(pipuy ti)v
4'>l(pov, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 457. v. Sylburg. ad I.
y-i*, in the character oj : npos vjSpeujs ras vovdealas Xafiioarwy, Pliilo
in Lcgat. ad Caium.
III. To, for, conducive to : ^an fioi tovto npos ayadov. KUKelio 5»;
Tols noXe/uiois irpos KaKcv yevoir av. And without a dative : Trpos r/ios
av uyaOov yivono ',
IV. It signifies, congruity, fitness, suitableness, conformity, cha-
racteristicalness : irpos Tavbpos Ioti to ky^dpi^ixa, the enterprise is
quite in character ivith such a man ; ovk ean -n-pus rys ttoXcws, tov
TraXat (ppoyy'ifjiaTOS — Kadvipletrdai, Ttpos \6yov, pertinent ;^ irpus rpoTrov,
accorditig to disposition ;" or properly, fitly, decorously ; and and
TpoTTov, the contrary: irpos Qv^ov, agreeable, acceptable ; ann dvpiov,
the contrary; npds blK^s, with reason, with cause: Soph. CEd. R.
1014. El. 1211. to which 5<oj is used as equivalent. El. 1212.
V. It is used in phrases significant of kindred, consanguinity,
relationship ; as, 01 Trpos a'l/jiaTos, relations by blood ; ol vpos iruTpds,
irpoi firirpos, relations on the father's, on the mother's, side : eXevQepos
irpos -Karpos Kai /jrjrpos, j^ischin. c. Ctes. p. 293. 1. 38. Trdinros u Trpos
Hr]7pus, Id. ib. In the same sense ol irpos avbpHiv oIkeIoi, and ol irpos
yvyniKuii'. to irpos irarpui, fiT]rpus, &c. family on the father's side,
mother's, &c. underst. yevos, which is sometimes expressed ; as, ro fiey
yap irpus irarpos avru yeyos €K twv rys ffuykXiyrou ftovXTJs kTriajjpniiv i]V,
Herodian i, 7- also o-i/yyereTs ra irpos irarpos, and the like ; relations
on the father s side ; 'AGrjj-aloc oyres to. irpos prjTpos, Paus. in Acii.
p. 398. I. 35.
Not unlike this is the signification on the part of: ol/xai yap olic
aj^nplffTws pal i^eiv, o'vre irpos vpuiy, ovre irpos Tyjs 'EiXXabos airaarfs :
Xen. Anab. i.
VI. In swearing, conjuring. Sec. it is by ; as, Trpos 0£ou. But in
this form it is sometimes before ; as, avainov ehai irpos 0eoi> re tai
irpus avdptjJTrujy. hpq.v ovhev ahiKOv o'vre irpos detjjv o'vre irpos aydpwTrujy,
Thuc. i, 71. V. 11. a, 338.
It signifies towards: rijy ereprjv twv yecpvpewv Tijy irpos tov Yloyrov,
Herodot. vii, 55. npus aovs, Eurip. Rhes. 557.''
VII. With a dative case n-pos signifies, near, at : irpos rrj iroXei.
With, tcithin : eJyai irpos €avT<p, to be engaged in thought ; irpos
cavrw dKoirel., he considers within himself. In : ypev irpos T^be rw
Xoyw, toe were engaged in this discourse ; nl be kypiqyopevai re avruv
iraXat e^atrui-, ical irpos eiriaroXa'ts elyai : a7id that he uuis occupied in
writing letters : Philostr. de Vit. ApoU. v, 31. tt^os rou-w ciXos elpl,
* El /xiv iXaTTOvrai f} fiii i\aTTovTai 6 ApaKovrlSri : having the shape of a serpent
^Tjriiip Twv &\Kuu Sia rh ovtws ex^"', oi"- in your lower parts : Aristopb. Vesp. 438.
TiKa iniffKe^Sfieda, fdv Ti r]n7v irpb s \6- Tlphs, on account of; ita.T^p — diraSAero,
yov ^, vvv 5e r6oe irpdrtpov ffKi\l/'I-p.eda : irphs aiiTocpcipciiv afj.v\aKTifxa.Twi> StirKas
Plato Gorg. p. 307. 1.4b. eel. Bas. 1. — u\p(is apd^as avTus avrovpyu x^P^ • Soph.
J. S. Aulig. .51. irphs Stj tovtoiv tyco^e
'^ Oil ybp ^v irphs rov Kvpov rpSwov, Ti0rj|tti rijv rwv xpVIJ-'^'r^^ KTriaiv irXfiarov
fj(ovTa fii] airoStSuvai : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 11. a^iav that, Plato de Rep. i. p. 372. 1. 29.
— J. S. ed. Bas. I.— J. S.
** 'fl KfKpotli ^pui &ya^, Tck irphs voSwv
2 K
2.5S ripos. [Chap. ix. § viii.
/ am ivhoUy occupied in this: v. Ilor. [Ep, i, I, 11.] In this sense
it governs an accusative also.
Ill addition to, over and above, besides; irphs yap t^ vefxcarjTu Knl
ityevpes. Plat, in Demosth. p. 855. reos eari' Trpos be rw vew anaXos,
Plato Symp. p. 165. 7{y be o FlXarwi' Trpoj rrj i^nKOTjdelif Kal ({)i\6bolos,
Athen. xi. p. 507. 1- 31. v. Plat, in Pliajdr. p. 240. 1. 18. 45. p. 270.
init. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 70. [p. 8(5. 1. 4. ed. Battle, Cantab. 1729-]
Trpos be tovtois, en be irphs tovtois, and moreover ; and in the same
sense, withont a case/ Trpos be, Trpos be Kcti : Kal to Trpos (or Trpoaov),
and the surplus ; koI Trpos, Herodot. viii, 29-
VIII. It signifies office, employment, capacity: e'i ttws nvas nelaai
bvvrjQelev, >) rdv 6\po7roiujv, 7} riby Trpos rats KvXtli : Ilerodian iii, 5/
IX. With the accusative case Trpos has very various senses ; as,
irpos yiipiv,for the sake of pleasing, to tvin favor; also simply /or
the sake of: Trpos x^P^^ (iopds,for the sake of food : Soph. Ant. 30.
V. Id. in Phil. 1156\ Trpos eTros, to the purpose , pertinent ; tovto tI
rrpos e-TTos ; what is this to the purpose? in which sense airoKplveaQat.
TTpos TO. ep(j)TU)fxeva : Trpos Toberi airavra KaditTTuadai Toy Xoyoj', to
turn the whole discourse to this point: Aristid. X€7e(v Trpos to ftiX-
TLrjTov, Plat. Gorg. p. 502. 1. 42. il^evaafxevns Trpos to xP^'*^^^s>/or
advantage, for profit : Herodian ii, 9. That which is relative is
called by philosophers irpos rt : but Trpos ti ; is, to what end, where-
fore? V. John xiii, 28.
To the amount of : &aTe airoXeaQai avTwv irpos eiTTaKoaiovs, Xen.
H. Gr. i. p. 435. So ad in Latin : v. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 93. ad millia
xcir. Caes. B. G. i.
X. It is often put with an accusative case in an adverbial sense ;
as, Trpos aKplfjeiay, accurately ; Trpos a^doviay, abundantly ; irpos a.<po-
aiuiaiv , peifunctorily ; \^par manicre d' acquit ; in such a manner as
just to be able to say one has done a thing;] Trpos (^iav, forcibly,
perforce; irpos fyiav tivos, against one's will, by compulsion ;s irpos
iirijpeiay, contumeliously ; [and harmfully, vexatiously ;] Trpos ejr/;-
peiuv Xafte'iy, to take as an insult or injury ; irpos ex^pay, inimically,
nith hostile intentions ; irpos Katpov, or wpay, opportunely, seasonably ;
irpos dpyi]v, angrily ; irpos vftpiy, injuriously, itisultingly ; irpos vfSpiy
Xafiely, to take as an injury or insult ; ha be /.n) irpos opyijv ij irpos
vjipiy Xafir) to irpuyi^n, Dion. Hal. ix. p. 576. I. I9. Trpos {nrepjJoX^y,
surpassingly, exceedingly ; irpos virovoiav, suspiciously ; irpos fdoyoy,
enviously, invidiously ; irpos <piXiny, kindly, in a friendly manner.
XI. ITpos signifies, toivards, regarding, for : to. irpos 6eous offia:
* Xanth. xopfJ*'" $ov\onai. Baccli. inostli. in Aphob. iii. p. 45. 1. 11. ed.
K&ywye â– rrp6s. Aristoph. Kan. 41.'i. V^'s Jlerwag. ii. irpoatri, Reisk. 859, 20.
S' a^iovufv Tj; -irSKfi irpoiKa — afxvvnv — . e Cod. Bavar. — J. S.
Kol irphs, ovKalTov,uei> ouSfV : Aristoph. /Add that irphs signifies purpose or
Eq. 578. &u 6 irarrip i^ixlf KartKitre (tt€- end : 'Iva. irphs tovtois avTo7s 7]yfix6ves
povfifvovs, Kal irphs virh tovtwv vppi^oni- Sxri, Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 3. — J. S.
vovs : Dimosth. in Aphob. i. p. 835. < yEschyl. tois iroyripoTs S' 7}5€to» ;
1. 10. <d. Reisk. yvaxrfaBf.—ra ne/xap- Bacch. oil S^t' ^Kfluii y', oAAi XP^''^'^^
Tvpufiiva us ffTTtu a\T]6Ti,—Kttl irphs Uti irpos fiiav Aristoph. Ran, 1457. — J. S.
f^ViJurcit ' nri Tijy ixapTvplav ov5fi' : De-
Rl'LE 8 — Jd] Upm. 2.5<>
and simply tU Trpos deovs, Deniostli. Ol. iii. to. irpus tovs iroXtfiiovs
eiirpeTrri iron'iffaaQai. npos t))v t'orrov Troielv, to be good for the disease ;
TU nous awTtipiuv <pipovTa, the things conducive to preservation or
safety ; vera ye Trpos T})y TruXir, at least as far as the state is con-
cerned ; 0(70) Xeyets re)(»'t(cwrtpas Nwyu^as — A.vaiov Trpos \6yovs e7j'a< !
Plat. Fliasdr. p. 263. tu irp'os //yuas, the affairs that concern us:''
(but, Trpos j/^as torij', it is in our own power ; itpos ijixas avrovs kari
Ka) TO draXws Ka\ tu kokws aKOveii', Pint. Apopllth. p. 177' ^O
XII. On account of, on the score of : to av^oTiov, caJ liTTopoy, Kot
Trpos KOTabltcas */ xpea t))v enirtfxiav cnroXuXeicos (pvXoy : Dion. Hal. iv.
p. 235. !. 35.'"
Towards, to or ivith : ros Trpos aXXi]Xovs biuXXayai iroiiiaaadai.
trpos Tov €)(dpvv bLaXXuTTeadai. Trpos tovs (piXovs KOiroXoye'iadai.
For : upyvptov npos ror a'lTOv K'oraXXarrefffiat.
With, in company of : vpos tov paeriXen.
XIII. It signifies, proportion, suitableness, agreeableness ; accord-
ing to, with reference to 'J to /uev yap ei-joos ifv ks e| /uaXiara cTabiovs'
ftados be ovbk Trpos Xuyov tov evpovs, uXXa noXv bi) ti ftaOvrepos :
Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii, 29. Trpos o^mr e/vacrrots biayelfiat. Trpos to
KadrjKou TTuvTa oi'/co^oyueTv. Trpos aXXov £jjr. Set ovy Trpos Tci avfiftai-
vovTU, olj-iai, TOVTOts yjiriaQai : Xen. Cyrop. i, 44. ovbe Trpos apyvpiov
TTiv evbaifioriay eKpirov, Isocr. Paneg. p. 109. v. Mattli. xix, 8.
In comparison of: elvai twv ap-)(ctiwp tovs Trepl r/)»' frofiav (pavXovs
Trpos vficis: Plat. Hipp. niaj. p. 281. aydpwTrwv o o-o^wroros Trpos deoy
TrlOrjKos <pave~iTai, Id. ib. p. 289- oti fxe Ttpus tus aas 7rpa£e<s eiraireffai
eroX/ijjffe, Liiciaii, Dial. Alex. et. Plillipp. t. i. p, 396. In tliis sense,
lis, fcJs ye, oaoj', uaa, oaov ye, oaa ye, oaov bi), oaa bt), may be put
before Trpos.
Duration of time: npus TennapaKovTU ijfiepas, for forty days.
npos Tcivra frequently signifies, tvherefore, therefore ; as in Enrip.
Iph. A. 1568. 1607. So Trpos Tube, as in yEschyl. Eum. 533. Sept. c.
Th. 314.
ripos is also, with, i. e. the same way with; as, Trpos to Tn'evp.u
irkTeadai, to fly with the wind.
In addition to, over and above: beXrov (Jy^ofiriv <j)ep<i)v aot Trpos ra
Trpiv yeypa/Jfieya, Eurip. Iph. A. 896. Trpos tovt av e'i yit' ebei ti kqI
TiOTov AojSeTi', Soph. Phil. 292. as VVakef. has rightly corrected the
verse. Yipos kavrov oKOTze'i, is, he considers within himself. So wpvs
eavTov avaXafi(iayeiy, to think over to himself: Plat. Hipp. Maj.
p. 288. V. Soph. El. 281. [285.] *
* "HtSfaav yap iravres '6ri i^ilr] — iliri'iv, of the fine: Polyb. v, 27. — J. S.
(i ri 7is ex"' ''"^•' Trpbs rhv ■KuKtp.ov : J E!f ris Kol 6.\\os, 6xeis Tcphs ri %t7j
Xen. Anab. iv, 3, 8. Toxe'ws Sf /cal irpbs /.UKaivav tV rplxa- Theoplirast. Eth.
TOVS vricrtwTas, koX irphs rohs tV 'AalaP Char. c. ii. for your years. — J. S.
KaToiKovyras rb irapaTrAriaiov avvifii) yl- * Add tliat -rrphs with an accusative
ye(r6ai : ijuiclcly it nuts the. same case nilh sisnifies, equal lo : irphs roivw airavTa
regard to the Islanders, iiic.Vo\'j\>.v, \Q5. rhv tK ran' 6.\\a)v ipiropioiv acptKi'ov-
— J. S. ixevov (a~iTov, viz.) & tK rod T16vtou (t7tos
*''A-iraydy(it'iKt\(V<Tfrhv\eovTlov irphs tij-TrA.ECcj' tarty : Deniosth. adv. Lept,
tV avaSuxv", on account of his having- \t. AUG. I. 22. ed, Reisk, — J. S.
tiiade kiiHSflfansucrable for the pnijmcul
260 'Yirep. [Chap. ix. § ix.
Ill composition npos signifies, motion toicards, access to; as in
TTfjixT^py^ertBai tm (DaaiXel, IE,\. V. H. ix, 3. vpuaoboi, yijpiov Trpoa-
fSuTov, Xev. Apol. 23. TrpocncaXelaBat. — 2. addition; over and above ;
as in TrpotrypcKpeiv, Demostii. p. 629. [1. 1. ed. R.] irpoaert, irpoa-
epiar^v, Xen. Mem. iii, 9. 4. irpoaaTroXeaai, Polyb. i, 74. -npoahia-
aafe'iy, Id. iii, 24. Trpoaeirtnerpe'Li' riiu, Id. iv, 31. — 3. near, at, in,
upon, against; as in -TtpocrKnOi^eadai, iEscliin. Dial, ii, l6. Trpoa-
Kctprepe'iv rrj TtoXiopidq., Polyb. i, 55. irpooKvaaBai toIs XiOois, Xen.
Meiu. i, 2, 30. — 4. towards; as in 7rpoa(}>epe<Tdai tivi, Xen, Mem. iii,
) ], 11. — 5. It intends or augments ; as in TrpocjaiTelv, Xen. Apol. 9-
'7Tpoacivaj3ali'€ii', Polyb. iii, 72. irpoci^TnaiTiie.aQai, Id. i, 29- v. Catlier,
(Jazopb. p. 89-
SECTION IX. — On the prepositions vTrep, utto, x^P'*-
Rule I. 'Ynkp governs a genitive and accusative only. Witb a
genitive it signifies, over, above ; about, concerning ; ' by, in the
name oj:"" Apollon. Rh. iii, 701. for, on account of." It signifies
also, in the place or stead of: inrep ruy airodaroyrwv kv r^ irpus
A.VTiuT(is iroXe.j.iu) (TTpnriojTwr, ii^iovv erepovs KaTaypa(j)ety '. Dion. Hal.
p. 353. 1. 41. f^ieXeiv hi tivi Kai liXXo) UTrep eavrov Tt irpdiheiv, Thuc.
i, 141. [p. 211. I. 14. fid. Bekk,] Also, the motive: b yap Qeos koTiv
o evepywi' ev v/ilv Kal to BeXeiv, kcu to irepye'w, vnep tTis evboKias '. of
his good pleasure : Paul, ad Pbilipp. ii, 13. vitkp tFis els to. koivo.
(j)iXoriiJiias, Dion. Halic. ix. v. Markl. ad Eur. Suppl. 1125.
II. For the sake of, for the purpose of: vwep tov Xade~iy. iiirep tov
/.(>) 7rapcfKXi]eji('jv ri Tcndeiv. vrrep be tov kcu to. ftappapa /ytrv^a^etv edyr)
bia ^povTibos y/je'is elo^ev, Herodian iii, c. J- § 15."
III. With an accusative case v-wep signifies, beyond, above ; as,
virep Xoyoy, beyond expression, beyond the potver of language; virep
(iwavTa be ravra, Kai -a tiXXa, beii'uv ri Kal ovk uveKTov f.lyai 'V(i)fiaiois:
beyond all these things — : Dion. Halic. v. p. 332. 1. 26. ra vrrep
ijfids, the things ivhich are above our power ; inrep tovs ibiutras e^eiv,
to exceed the capacity of ordinary persons : Isocr. Paneg, [p. 101.
1. 5. ed. Rattie, Cantabr. 1729-] vrrep tov ITpwrea jitr/j^av^ Tijv ep))v
iiKpoaaiv uTTobibpuaiceiv, with shifts beyond even those of Proteus:
Lucian, Dcin. Enc. p. 903.
Through, by means of: tQv vnep lirnovs irTaiaavTior, of the number
' 'AW' ooX uirtp ^tXiTTirov, Kai Siv cf/x t' ainov Kf(pa\ris : Odyss. o, 2G1. —
iKiivos irpj-TTd vvv, oiix ovrws txovcriv : J. S.
Dfitiiosth. Pliil. iii. p. 111). 1. 1. ed. 11. " 'Tirep aiirov tov Trapafirtvai rhv v6-
Ko9' o&j (caipuL's T] (l(Tayye\la i566ri i) els (lov, roaain-qv tSuKe oiktiv : Dciiiostli. in
rrfv fiovKyv inrep 'ApicTTapxau rod M6cr- Mid. p. 572- I. 3. ed. lleisk. — J. S.
Xov, on iir\ 'HiK6h-/]fjL0v atrncrovws : Id. in " Add the sense, i7i favor of, for the
JMid. 554, 11. ffarpis ovSiv fi5('iT(i!V V iTfp advantage of: roiis Wifj.ovswsirpaora.Tovs
rwv TrpoTTOufvuv, I'lut. in Aiat. p. 1884. kuI fxerpiurdrovs elvai, virip ruiv oBwa-
1 17. ed.St. — J.S. ruv fxaXtar iar'i : Drmoslli. in Tinioci.
" A'tceop utrtp Sviuv iioX oa.ifxoi'os, — p Tj'J. 1.20. ed. Reisk. — J. S.
Ili;Lii 1— ().] TTTtp, 'VTro. 261
of those who ruined themselves hy keeping horses: Schol. Aristoph.
Nub. 31.
\^For, in signification of tlie end f\ Avyeiov — virep rfju tuiv aifiuTuv
€K)(^utTiv [ckKvoiv] enibiuiKotTos, Scljol. Aristopli. Nub. 508. [500. ed.
Rfkk.]
Iniamission : vntp fxlav (underst. y/xepav), every other day.
In composition vnep signifies — 1. beyond, {oi place ;) as in rh
vwf.p6pia, Xen. Symp. iv, 31. vTrepopi^eadut, ^Estliin. c. Ctesiph.
p. 522. [I. 4. ed. U.] vnepOopely v^t)\uv vnep eptcos, Demosth.
p. 422. [I. 24. cd. R. from Solon.] virepiaQneii' and vTrfpveo\Keli>,
Pulyb. iv, 19. viii, 29. — 2. beyond, (of time;) as in vnipyrjpos, JE\.
V. H. iv, 1. vTrepaKfioi, 1 Cor. vii, 36. vTrepi'ipepos, Demosth. p. 518.
[I. 2. ed. R.] — 3. exxess ; as in vrcepnya-rv^v, Deniostb. p. 172. [I. IS.
ed. R.] vTrep(poj3e'i(y0ut, Xen. CEc. viii, I7. virepeadieiv, Xen. Mem.
i, 2, 3. VTTfpy^aipeir, ^^1. V. H, iv, 25. vrrepepu^dai t))v evyeveiav
Tivos, Id. xii, 1. vTrepKciQcipais, Hippocr. Aphor. iv, 5. — 4. contempt,
jjretermission or overpassing, negligence, transgression or violation ;
as in vTrepopav, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 9* vTrepunTtKos, Polyb. v, 46. vnep-
(Sniveiv TToWa, ^schin. Dial, iii, 12. vvjxov vTrepfjaiieiv, Diod. S.
xvii, 34. vnep(j)ia\os, Iliad o, 94. &c. — 5. protection ; as in vrrep-
aarticetv, Polyb. vi, 37- vTrepeyeiv tcis j^etpc'cs Tivi, Id. XV, 29- — 6'
superiority, preeminence; as in vnepliuWeiy, Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 7.
vtrencpepeij' ttoAAw tivus. Id. Apol. 15. V. Cattier, Gazopli. p. Ql.
IV. 'Ytto governs a genitive, dative, and accusative. Wiih a geni-
tive it signifies, agency, by ; and in this sense it follows even a verb
neuter ; as, aTToQuvelv vtto twv TvoXefxitov. vko twi' biKuarwv eKireffely.
And so %vi;h the verb substantive : elrcii ev bilt] vtt6 twos, to be
honored by a persoti. It is sometimes suppressed : ?V tovto vncrjdTjs
€/jov, Aristoph. Nub. 1083. Also under: vno fiuXijs, Lucian.
V. It signifies, 07i account of , through, because of: vtto tT}s aire\Qeias'.
V. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. 1125. vir epbeias ovj^ c'^w o ti av e/uavra
â– ^pi}(T(ofxai.J' For biu '. viro (tkotov. In : vtto tj/s aroTrias })v o ^eftfjpos,
in perplexity: Xipliil. in Sever. With: vk6 (nrovbrjs en-oieTro ti)v
bi(oi.iv, Tliuc. iii, 33. 'Y^' eavrov is, spontaneously: ravru /uot
TToiijaat ixf vjuioy avTwu, of your own accord : Id. iv, 64. But some-
times i(j)' eavTov is, tinder his oivn auspices, conduct or authority,
in chief: Paus. in Acii. p. 417. in fin.?
VI. With a dative inru signifies, under: vno veais yeveaQcti,
Metaplir. Eutrop. vi, 24.
With : VTTO paftboia l>fiov vaaais Koi ireKiKeai, Pint, Public, i, e. the
fasces being carried before him: and in the same sense vitu cpivri,
with lights carried before. The agent, instrument, means, cause:
-rrpwro) (tVet) fieTU t))v vtto FaXAots yevofjievijv aXuair, after the taking
P Tiiv ruv 8\«wj' T-{]v'5e ra^iv avvixov<fiv noting immediate consequence : rovsxoas
(^01 Oiol) arpifirj Kal ayriparoy koI ava/xdp' irlvitv inri tTis adXtnyyos, ut the sound of
TTiTov, Kal virh KaKKovs Kal f^iyedovs the trumpet : Aristoph. Acli. lOOI. 'Xirb
o5»7)7'»jTo^ : Xeii. Cyrop. viii. — J. S. is often conjoined with in by Homer : see
V Add, iimon^: oh xopo'^Ttv, ouS' ixf II, %, 146. Od. A, 37. m. 107. 113.
ri\iKwv ufav'i^wu, ifijcjicov Krjuhv 'i(TT))K tX" *> 489. aud LoDgin. ^ s.. — J. S.
ot/(r' : Aristoph. Tliesni. 1031. At, on,
262 'Vtto, Xwpis. [Chap. ix. § ix.
of the city by the Gauls : Eutrop. Metaphr. ii. i} ^iiv vir 'Ayxifrj
TSKe fiovKoXeovrt, Horn. II. e., 313/ eKOarovrtw be avrwp vtto Kuvfiari,
Zosim. ii. c. 2. v. Abrescli. ad IF.sch. iii. p. 54. inro toIs oheiois
ufiaprii/jiaai, Kai ov)^ vtto to~is rrols t(7<pu\r) arpaTtiyi^jJiaai. 6 fxev bif
raiiTa eXeyev into btbatTKaXitjL rrj KaWiKparovs '. Pans, in Ach. p. 4l6.
Close to : iroXiv KTiadv-es vno rj; "l^j/, Paus. in Ach. p. 417. i"r*
uvrjj TT) â– noXei, Tliucycl. ii, 79-
Subservient to: ra I'jpyava ro v7r6 ttj novaiKrj, Kai to. vtto Tals ^XXais
7e'x»'<i«s, Plato Hipp. maj. p. 2.95. 1. 34.
VH. (VHI.) With an accusative vtto si<;nifies, close to, when motion
is spoken of; as, vtto rfiv ttoXiv. vtto "\Xiov 7iXdov ; Horn. Near, about,
in signification of time : vtto tovs avrovs '^(povovs. Under, in signifi-
cation of dominion, or power ; [and also in a sense not fignralive, of
place :] vcp' eav-uv iroielaOai, to bring into subjection to himself : v.
Lennep. ad Plialar. p. 242. ws k'^^Qpov TrpoTrrjXaKiiuvros abeuis roiis vtto
^e/pos, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 443. I. 42.
'Ttto Tt, in a manner, in some manner: Xoyov tviid-q, Kai vno n
uaefiT], Plat. Phaedr. p. 242. 1. 35.
In composition vtto signifies — 1. tinder, beneath; as in viroyews,
vnojiaXXeiv tTis yj/s, Xen. Gic. xix, 8. viro-^Qovioi, viraldpios, vnoyua-
rpiov, vTToplviov, vTTobeiv, vnoTefiieiv, vnocti)vrveiv I'avs, Polyb. E. L.
64. Acts Ap. xxvii, 17. — 2. ivithin ; [under the surface;'] as in
opfioi vnolvXoi, Xen. CEc. x, 3. — 3. secretly, by stealth ; as in
VTre^aipe'iadai, Xen. Hier. v, 2. inravoiyeiv ypapfuara, Demostll. p.
88S>. [I. 28. ed. R.] viroKaei^eiy, Polyb. xii, 2. Xndav vireKTriXde to
yyjpas, JEscb'w. Dial, iii, .9. — 4. by degrees, as hairs are said kotu
fjiKph vTToppeei}', JEl. V. H. xi, 4. v. Valck. ad Theocr. Id. x. p.
119. — 5. diminution ; as in viroXoyiifffdai ei: rwy oilnoviwv, Polyb.
vi, 37. It has a diminuent force in the following : vwipvdpns, vttu-
aairpos, vTroy^Xwpns, viroXevKos, — 6. protection ; as in virocnrovbos, Xen.
Ages, ii, 16. — 7' subjection, obnoxiousness ; as in yi/i'j) viravhpos,
Polyb. E. P. 36. VTTofiaXXeiv tlvo. toIs oyXois, lb, 52. vrrairios, Xen.
Mem. ii, 8, 4. vnaKoveiv, lb. ii, J, 10. vTroicrjpos, v. Foes. CEcon.
Hipp. — 8. approach, coining under: vTrobvveiy to Sevyns, yEschin.
Dial, iii, 10. [undertaking:] vTtobveaOai ti)v Trpuliv, Polyb. ii, 21.
[addition, adjection :] vwenrelv, Demoslh. p. 797. [I. 19. ed, R.] — 9.
It has an augmentative force ; as in vTromreipeiv yeXiura, iElian, V. H.
ii, 13, vKOTtive.iv, Xen. Synip, ix, 2. — 10. readiness; as in vTrap'^eiv,
vTre'ivai: v. Ind. Demostll, Reisk. — 11. retreat, return; as in viro-
•^lopyjrjeis nebiral, Polyb. i, 34. — 12, npu, forward, on ; as in vTrayetv,
V, Thom, M, p. 666. seq. v, Caltier, Gazopli. p. 91-
VHI. (IX.) XwpJs governs a genitive case only, and commonly signi-
fies, without, absque, sine : somclimes, besides, in addition to ; in
which sense a case is not always joined with it : X'^P'* ^^» "^^"s
il^iXos \piXu)v, ov(c oXlyos: Time. ii. and it takes an infinitive mood
instead of a case : x*^P** A'^*' '^"'^ earepriadai, besides being deprived of
you: Plat, Crit. But sometimes the genitive of the article is joined
'' 'A4itK0fifV(M!i^ ti( Tuv iraripwu Ka\ twi> iLv^pu — ; Diog. I.aert. in Diogrn. p. 22G.
vTrtpt\6vruv, v-nh Tovrois rafrivai rhv 1. 23. ed. H. Stcph. f. minim. — J.S.
Rule 7 — 10.] Xwfjii. QC'J
with tlie intinilive : xtiipn tov yu/) ofioXoyt'if ravra tKeivon, besides that
these things do not agree ivith those : Arisliil. pro Quat. p. 472.
IX. (X.) It signifies, except: wore hmtpdapTivui -iruvTas uvOpujnovs,
oXiyiov x^P'^ '• Apollodor. i. p. Ip. and in this signification it is fol-
lowed by f; on, as xwpls 1} on nofiTn^'iavos u yeptov ovk eariy (ire airt'ji'-
Trjrjevy except that, iicc Xiplnl. in Comniod. and the case following is
not influenced by the phrase : kukovs oTpuTniTua ovk t'^^ei, X'^P's '*/ ^''^
oXiyovs Tivas: [oXjyoi/s is governed by e'xei understood;] or it is
followed by 7) uaos : â– )Q^p\s f; oVoi vtto vocrwj', i) yijpios, <pvyelv aovya-ot
^(rav, except as many as, Sec. Dion. Hal. x. p. 646. 1. 19. or by
av or et with a negative particle : yu)p\s av fji) FaXariKos y noXefios,
unless there should be a war with the Gauls: Plut. Camill. p.
151. 1. 26.
X. (XI.) Sometimes it is rather an adverb than a preposition, signi-
fying apart, separately : xtjpis yap cKe'iyos, Kal Kad' avruy bi) ^ovov
eleraieTai. x'^pis Trepi e/cctarwi' elvely, oaov hia crrabiov X'^P'* aXXij-
Xuy SieaTijueyai.
THE END.
pniNTED BY A. J. VALPY, RED LION COUHT, FLEKT STREET.
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY A. J. VALPY,
AND MAY BE HAD OF ALL BOOKSELLERS.
LEMPRIERE ABRIDGED. — LEMPRIEUE'S
CLASSICAL DICTIONARY, ABRIDGED from Anthon's aud Bak-
keh's Second Edition. For Public and Private Schools of both sexes. By
E. H. Barker. Royal li'rao. 8s. C</. bound.
*^* This Work contains every article in a condensed form.
DICTIONARY of LATIN PHRASES; com-
prehending a methodical digest of phrases from the best authors, which have
been collected in all phraseological works liitherto published : for the more
speedy progress of students in Latin Cumposttion. By W. Robertson, A. M.
of Cambridge. A new Edition ; with considerable additions, alterations, and
corrections. For the Middle and Upper Classes in Schools. 15s. royal duod. bd.
*,* The present Edition has this advantage over its predecessors, that it is
enriched with many hundred phrases which have hitherto heen unrecorded ;
and these have been drawn from the purest fountains, by actual perusal ; from
Cicero, Tacitus, Terence, Piautus, fee.
GRADUS AD PARNASSUM; a new Edition,
omitting the Verses and Phrases : the English of the words is given, with
their form;itioii. Many new words are added, and other improvements. Fourth
Ed. 7s. 6d. duod.
VIRGIL, collated from the best Editions. By A. J.
Valpv, M.A. 2'jce//f A Edition. 3s. 6c/. 18mo.
VIRGIL, with English Notes, Original, and selected
from the Del phin and other editions. No Interpretatio. Seventh Jud. 7s. Gd.
'The body of Notes forming the Appendix constitutes an excellent com-
mentary on Virgil, and must prove of peculiar benefit to the pupil in clear-
ing up difficulties of the sense or the metre. But these explanatory Notes are
of still farther utility, as tending to lead juvenile minds into a train of inquiry
that will expand their ideas and facilitate their progress in classical literature.
The notes of Voss contribute to enrich the impression.' — New Monthly Mag.
HORACE; collated from the best Editions. The ob-
jecticmable Odes and Passages have been expunged. Printed uniformly with
the Virgil. Fifth Edition. 3s. Gd.
HORACE, with English Notes. JPi/"M Edition. Gs.
ELEGANTI^ LATINS; or, Rules and Exercises
illustrative of Elegant Latin Style. Intended for the middle and higher
Classes of Schools. By the Rev. E. Valpy, B.D. Tenth Edition. Im-
yjroved and made easier. 4s. Gd. A List of Phrases, as used in the original,
and an Index, are added — A KEY may be had, Pr. 2s.
CICERO DE OFFICIIS, with Critical and Expla-
natory Notes. The text of the lleusingers is followed. Third Ed. (is. bds.
'To students the present edition will prove particularly acceptable: con-
siderable information and much useful elucidation will be found in the adsti-
tilious matter; and the student will be thus benefited without any aug-
mentation of labor.' — Crit. Rev.
TACITI OPERA, Brotier's Text; with his
Explanatory Notes translated into EnglFsh, by the Rev. F. Valpy, M.A.,
Waster of Reading School. 3 vols. £l, 7$. bds.
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
J.
PA Viger, Francois
^07 Viger 's Greek idioms abridged
V5 and translated into English ^
1828 from Professor Hermann's last
edition
mm
